JP2023087113A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest of a player in a game.SOLUTION: One type is determined from a plurality of types including a first type and a second type as a type of a first advantageous game executed based on a first discrimination result in the discrimination by discrimination means. A second advantageous game more advantageous to a player than the first advantageous game is executed based on a second discrimination result in the discrimination by the discrimination means. One game state is set from a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state as a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game is finished. In the first game state, the first game state is more easily finished in the first discrimination result when the second type is determined by type determination means than in the first discrimination result when the first type is determined by the type determination means. This produces an effect that a player's interest in the game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and execution is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entrance. A game ball that enters a V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is opened passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device It is possible to provide a privilege game (jackpot game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-010741

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if a small winning game is executed, the bonus game is not executed unless the game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device. There is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be lost if the ball cannot be entered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises: a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition; A first advantageous game executing means for executing a first advantageous game advantageous to a player, a first type as a type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means, and the first type. and a second determination result different from the first determination result obtained by the determination by the type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a different second type. second advantageous game execution means for executing a second advantageous game more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game based on; game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state; game state ending means for terminating the first game state if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied when the determination by the executed determination means results in a determination result other than the second determination result; and, the specific condition is the first determination result in determination by the determination means, and the first type is determined by the determination means as compared with the case where the first type is determined by the type determination means. This is more likely to be established when the first determination result is obtained and the second type is determined by the type determining means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second game state is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state ending means is configured to If the condition is established, the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a ball entry area in which a game ball can be entered based on the execution of the first advantageous game, The 2-advantage game executing means executes the second advantageous game based on the entry of the game ball into the ball-entering area, and the game state ending means, in the 1st game state of 1, The first game state is ended based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the first type is executed the first number of times, and the first advantageous game of the second type is executed in the first game state of 1. The first game state is terminated based on the fact that the game has been executed a second number of times, which is less than the first number of times.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the game state setting means is adapted to prevent a game ball from entering the ball entering area during execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. When the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the second advantageous game is completed, the first game state is set as the game state after the second advantageous game is finished.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the game state setting means is adapted to prevent a game ball from entering the ball entering area during execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. When the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the second advantageous game is completed, the second game state is set as the game state after the second advantageous game is finished.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determining condition, and the second game advantageous to the player based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. A first advantageous game execution means for executing one advantageous game, and a first type and a second type different from the first type as the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means. and a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least the above; A second advantageous game executing means for executing a second advantageous game more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game, and a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game executing means is completed. game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least one game state and a second game state different from the first game state; and the determination performed in the first game state. a game state ending means for terminating the first game state if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied when the determination by the means results in a determination result other than the second determination result, The specific condition is that the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result, and the first determination result in determination by the determination means is higher than the case where the first type is determined by the type determination means. In addition, it is more likely to be established when the second type is determined by the type determining means.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state is The ending means shifts from the first game state to the second game state if the specific condition is satisfied.

As a result, the game can be played in the first game state in anticipation of the establishment of the specific condition, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, a game ball can be entered based on the execution of the first advantageous game. The second advantageous game executing means executes the second advantageous game based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area, and the game state ending means The first game state is terminated based on the fact that the first profitable game of the first type is executed a first number of times in the first game state, and the second type of the game is executed in the first game state of 1. The first game state is terminated when the first advantageous game is executed a second number of times which is less than the first number of times.

As a result, during the execution of the first advantageous game, the game ball is entered into the ball entry area and the second advantageous game is executed, or the specific condition is established without entering the ball into the ball entry area. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a playability that allows the user to choose whether to expect it.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 3, the game state setting means moves to the ball entry area during execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. When the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the game ball enters, the first game state is set as the game state after the second advantageous game is completed, so the first advantageous game is the first type or the second type, and the game ball is entered into the ball entry area to execute the second advantageous game, or the ball is entered into the ball entry area It is possible to select whether to expect a specific condition to be satisfied without Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 4, the game state setting means moves the player to the ball entry area during execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. And when the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering, the second game state is set as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game, so the first advantageous game If is the first type, there is a possibility that the specific condition will be satisfied by not allowing the ball to enter the ball entering area, and the game state will shift to the second game state. A second advantageous game is executed by entering a ball, and the game state shifts to the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of the first advantageous game can be predicted more seriously.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. (a) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 along the line La-La in FIG. 5(b), and (b) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 along the line Lb-Lb in FIG. 5(c). (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. (a) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the switching member is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel; FIG. 10 is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the guide piece of the switching member blocks the opening of the inlet of the discharge channel; (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a big win displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a view showing a ball entering the second ball entrance during the big win. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when is detected. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a door breaking mode effect that is executed with the start of an ending period after all rounds of jackpots are finished in the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when breaking through the first door in the door breakthrough mode effect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when breaking through the fourth door fails in the door breaking mode effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when all the doors are successfully broken through in the door breaking mode effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the state of the specific winning opening when shifting to the variable probability mode, and (b) is the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is a big win F and a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the state of the specific winning opening in the case of shifting to the normal mode. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is the main control in the first embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of the apparatus. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic representation of the contents of the table for each special figure 1 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for special figure 1 off (normal), and (d) is the specification of the table for special figure 1 (probability variation) It is the figure which showed the content typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot (4 fluctuations or less) table, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot (5 fluctuations or more) table (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 off (4 fluctuations or less) table, and (d) is a special figure 2 off (5 fluctuations or more) ) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for . It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method according to the first embodiment; 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. be. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing winning processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a small prize medium prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing close command processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller in the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows a small winning end time process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of the first hit random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the second embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st hit classification selection table set to ROM of this. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing state command setting processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing a prize winning process 2 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a turning-on state determination process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows breakthrough mode selection processing performed by MPU in an audio ramp control device in a 2nd embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing variation pattern determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve is in a protruding state (a state in which three balls, which are the upper limit number, are stored above the storage valve) in a modification of the second embodiment; There is, and (b) is the figure which illustrated the case where the storage valve was in the buried state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the opening of the jackpot displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during one round of the jackpot displayed in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of one round of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol according to the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in the interval after 1 round of big hits displayed on a display apparatus. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, (b) is the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an open scenario selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment; 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice ramp control device in the third embodiment, (b) is a promotion effect lottery table set in the ROM of the voice ramp control device in the third embodiment FIG. 10C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the definition of , and FIG. 11C is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the sound ramp control device according to the third embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing open scenario selection processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation|movement setting process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 3 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing opening command processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; 14 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing close command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the promotion effect lottery process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the opening of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in the modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the 1st round of big hit displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the modification of a form. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the change over time of the effect mode in the case of a big win in the modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is a modification of the third embodiment in which the FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a time-dependent change in the presentation mode when out of reach. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a table for special hits in the fourth embodiment It is a figure which showed typically the content of regulation, and (c) is the figure which showed typically the content of regulation of the table for the loss after the special hit in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 variation pattern determination process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing the operation contents of the distribution member in the fifth embodiment. Schematic representation of the correspondence relationship between the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door of the V winning device and the switching of the flow path in which the game ball that has flowed into the V winning device is guided in the case of a small win in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode with the highest degree of expectation for a pullback mode, which is displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the degree of expectation of the pullback mode is medium, displayed on the 3-symbol display device. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode with the lowest expectation degree of pullback mode displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment, (b) is the main control in the fifth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the device, (c) defines the time saving number selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment It is the figure which showed the content typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special figure 2 per table, and (c) is for special figure 2 off (normal / pullback) set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table, and (d) schematically shows the defined contents of the special figure 2 off (renso) table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment. It is a diagram showing. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment, (b) is the main control in the fifth embodiment It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the device. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the mode in 5th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment, (b) is an expectation level selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 5 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving number of times update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing V passage detection processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 5 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing status command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing expectation update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning a small hit in the normal mode displayed with the 3rd design display device in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the specification content, (c) is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the sixth embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the number-of-time-savings selection table set to 1 ROM. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the small hitting specification frequency|count selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the mode in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a rank-up lottery table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction frequency|count update process 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 6 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing state command processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing post-finish back setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing expectation update processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and ball entrances 64, 640, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of game balls detected may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails and windmills for guiding balls, rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a The first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the sorting member 660, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning hole 63, the first ball-entering hole 64, the second ball-entering hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. 13 is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13, and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a starting port and the like are arranged and the shot ball is area). In addition, the game area includes all areas where the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the prize winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is conducted, and the ball enters the normal entrance. When 67 is passed, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is carried out. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until seven balls are won). ) is opened, and the opening is repeated the number of times (the number of rounds) corresponding to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot types of special symbols, six types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are provided. (game value) is given to the player. The three types of "jackets A to C" are jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won in a lottery executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The three types of jackpots D to F” are jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won in a lottery executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 . Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the special symbol lottery that is executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the first special symbol lottery. A special symbol lottery that is executed when the ball enters the ball opening 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

When the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) elapses, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each game is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is carried out. , the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67, the success or failure determination of whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern is won, the first ball entrance 64 is opened by changing the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). be released. In addition, since the electric accessory 64a is arranged at the closed position, the right side and the left side of the first ball entrance 64 are normally closed when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball rolling toward the first ball entrance 64 from the right and left sides in the front view cannot enter the first ball entrance 64 because it is blocked by the electric accessory 64a. ). Therefore, basically, only the ball that has flowed down from vertically above the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state can enter the first ball entrance 64 . On the other hand, in the case of winning the normal pattern, the electric accessory 64a is released, and the balls rolling toward the first ball entrance 64 from the right and left sides in the front view are rolled into the first ball entrance 64. It becomes easier to enter the ball into the ball, and as a result, it becomes easier to perform the lottery for the special symbol.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. It is displayed and also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. be started.

As described above, six types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols.

When "jackpot A" and "jackpot D" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16-round jackpot). On the other hand, when "jackpot B" is reached, a special game state with 5 rounds (5-round jackpot) is reached, when "jackpot C" is reached, a special game state with 2 rounds is reached, and when "jackpot E" is reached, When the number of rounds becomes a special game state with 7 rounds (7 rounds big win) and "jackpot F" is reached, a special game state with 6 rounds (6 rounds big win) occurs. Furthermore, when the specific conditions are satisfied during each of the jackpot games (when the ball entering the variable winning device 65 passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, which will be described later), a high probability state of special symbols after the jackpot ends (special During the probability change of the pattern). Also, when the high probability state of the special pattern is given,
The probability of hitting the normal pattern is also increased (the time saving state of the normal pattern is given). The high-probability state of the special design and the time-saving state of the normal design continue after the end of the big win until the next big win. On the other hand, if the high probability state of the special pattern is not provided (the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the low probability state of the special pattern is set until the next big hit, and the hit of the normal pattern. Probability also becomes a normal probability (normal pattern normal state).

Here, "special symbol high probability state" means a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is up, the so-called "special symbol high probability state" (probability change state of special symbols), in other words, special game state It is a game state that easily shifts to (jackpot). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbols). In addition, the ``time-saving state of normal symbols'' (high-probability state of normal symbols) refers to a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and a ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal design", it is called "normal state of normal design" (low probability state of normal design), which means that the probability of winning normal design is normal, that is, during time saving Indicates a low probability of winning.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the special symbol definite variable period. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as time-shortening of normal symbols.

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is varied according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common (for example, all 5 rounds) for all jackpot types. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ``probability variable state of special symbols'' and the ``time-saving state of ordinary symbols'' provided after the big win are configured to continue until the next big win, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the "probability variable state of special symbols" and the "time-saving state of normal symbols" may be configured to be limited until the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of times of lottery to be "probability variable state of special symbols" and the number of times of lottery to be "time-saving state of normal symbols" may be different. Moreover, according to the kind of big hit, it is good also as a structure which changes the number of times of lottery.

When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by turning on the power supply, etc., it is always set to "low probability state of special symbols" and "normal state of normal symbols". Then, when a big hit occurs and the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win, the ``low probability state of the special symbol'' is shifted to the ``variable probability state of the special symbol'', and the ``normal state of the normal symbol'' is changed. Shift to "time saving state of normal pattern". In this case, the set "probability variable state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols" continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 even once in the 1 jackpot, the game shifts to "low probability state of special design" and "normal state of normal design". Although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when it becomes "jackets A to D", it becomes easier for the ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and when it becomes "jackets E, F", during the jackpot It becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. When the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, one of the ``jackpots A to C'' is obtained, so there is a high possibility that the ``probability variable state of the special pattern'' and the ``time-saving state of the normal pattern'' after the completion of the jackpot. On the other hand, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, it will be one of "big wins D to F". Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the ratio of "jackpot D" is 5% when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. Therefore, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, there is a high probability (at a rate of 95%) that the "jackpot E, F" will occur. And there is a high possibility that it will be a “normal state of the normal pattern”. Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol is disadvantageous to the player compared to the lottery for the first special symbol.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters. The number of times is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates whether or not the special symbol is a big hit. (first pattern) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 7(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.7(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is configured to imitate numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery of the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is configured such that a jackpot is generated after the end of the variable display. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower one-fifth of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of pending balls, preview characters, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 0.5 seconds. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbols for a certain period of time (0.5 seconds or more), the player can determine whether or not the combination of the third symbols corresponds to a big hit (the lottery result of the special symbols is Whether it is a big hit or not) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big winning moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big winning.

Further, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the loss and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time. Furthermore, when there are both a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol and a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is given priority. executed.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. A situation in which no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) is rare. In most cases, when the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all because the player quits the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new ball entrance. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The number of held balls, which is the number of (held balls), is displayed by the number of held symbols representing each held ball.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 7B, a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, up to four reserved symbols displayed as black circles are displayed on the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. The reserved design displayed on the right side of the front view is the reserved design (first reserved design) corresponding to the lottery of the first special design, and the reserved design displayed on the right side of the front view corresponds to the lottery of the second special design. It is a reserved design (second reserved design). FIG. 7B shows a case where three first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank). there is

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols, the number of reserved balls is indicated by numbers in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery that is performed when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" are displayed as the normal symbol (second symbol). A variable display is performed in which the symbols are alternately lit. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“○” symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an actuated state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second ball inlet 640 is achieved. The number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times at maximum, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of balls that pass through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, as in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but is not limited to three times or less, or , 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. The first ball entrance 64 is provided with a pair of electric accessories 64a that can be opened and closed on the left and right sides respectively. In addition to the balls that flowed down from the left and right, the balls that flowed down from the left and right can also be entered. It should be noted that this first ball entrance 64 is a ball that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed ball) regardless of whether or not the electric accessory 64a is in an open state. The nail or the like is arranged so that the ball is easier to enter than the ball that flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (the ball that is hit to the right).

A second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is arranged on the upper right side of the first ball entrance 64 in a front view. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize winning openings from which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, so basically the direction of the ball flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 However, it is easier to enter the ball than the ball that has flowed down the channel provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific prize winning port 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 7 balls have been won). That is, the opening/closing door 65f1, which normally closes the specific winning opening 65a, is opened when the jackpot hits, allowing the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. The specific winning hole 65a and the second ball-entering hole 640 are positions where a ball (a ball hit to the right) that has flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 can enter (easy to enter). are placed in In other words, it is arranged at a position where the ball that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 cannot enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). Therefore, in order for the player to receive the payout of prize balls (gain a profit) during the big win, the player should hit the ball to the right.

Inside the variable winning device 65, there are provided a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which balls can pass (see FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b)). The ball that has flowed into the inside of the variable winning device 65 flows down through one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a variable probability switch 65e3 that gives a high probability state (variable probability state) of special symbols after a big hit by passing the ball. This special discharge channel 65e2 is in a passable state only in the first round of the jackpot. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can be easily entered into the specific winning opening 65a (opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 30 seconds at maximum) jackpot. (jackpots A to D) and jackpots (jackpots E, F) where it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific prize-winning port 65a (the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened only for 0.2 seconds at maximum). .

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is an opening forming member 65b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the variable winning device 65 is combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c. It has an arranged LED board 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The open/close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g protrude into the game. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i engaged with the switching member 65h, a rear surface cover body 65j arranged on the rear surface side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the rear surface of the rear surface cover body 65j. A flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the side to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 65j with screws. there is

FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 5(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5(b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5(b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which game balls can enter. The specific winning hole 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 5(b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6(b).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 5(b), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a has an open state in which a game ball can enter and a ball in which a game ball cannot enter by an opening/closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. Possible (difficult to enter) closed state and variable. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the open/close door 65f1, and the game balls can roll on the top of the open/close door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a.

With this configuration, when the opening/closing door 65f1 is open, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can efficiently enter the specific winning opening. You can win within 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 5(b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration for distributing game balls guided to the distributing flow path of the back cover body 65e to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 6(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a variable probability switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Ejected.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the game state after the jackpot game is a special symbol probability variable state ( Probability variation gaming state) is set. That is, the variable probability switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing the variable probability gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability game state or the probability variation game state.

In this way, the game state set after the big win game is varied according to the downflow route of the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a during the big win game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the big win game. . It should be noted that the operation of the switching member 65h is linked to the first round of the jackpot. At the same time as the end of the first round, the switching member 65h operates to the position where the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed. Also, the time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 0.2 seconds at the shortest. there is As described above, in the jackpots E and F, the maximum opening period of the opening and closing door 65f1 is 0.2 seconds. , the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed by the guide piece 65h2 before the ball flows into the special discharge channel 65e2. Therefore, when the jackpots E and F are reached, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot of 1.

Next, referring to FIG. 6(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the channel solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening of the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. A ball outlet switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal outlet channel 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls entering the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, when trouble such as clogged balls occurs in the variable winning device 65, the trouble can be found early.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (in this embodiment, 11 balls per winning ball) as a privilege. prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so that a lottery can be executed as to whether or not to give the variable probability game state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting the variable probability game state separately from the variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. A substantially semicircular sorting member 660 is provided on the upper right side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front. The distribution member 660 is provided with receiving portions on the left and right thereof that can receive the balls flowing down from above. The distribution member 660 can be arranged in two ways, one in which the right receiving portion is directly below the channel provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and the other in which the left receiving portion is directly below the channel. It can take a street arrangement. FIG. 2 illustrates an arrangement in which the right receiving portion is directly below the channel.

In a state in which the receiving portion on the right side is positioned directly below the flow path, if the ball flowing down the flow path is received by the receiving portion on the right side, the distribution member 660 will be displaced by the weight of the ball. Rotation in the clockwise direction results in an arrangement in which the left receiving portion is directly below the channel. In addition, since the right receiving portion is inclined in the lower right direction in front view due to the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination and flows down in the lower right direction of the distribution member 660 . The ball that has flowed down in the lower right direction of the distribution member 660 rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 along the flow path. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 65f1 is set to the open state, the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a.

In a state where the left receiving portion is positioned directly under the flow path, if the ball flowing down the flow path is received by the left receiving portion, the distribution member 660 will be displaced by the weight of the ball. Rotation in the counterclockwise direction results in an arrangement in which the right receiving portion is directly below the channel. In addition, since the left receiving portion is inclined in the lower left direction in front view due to the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination and flows down in the lower left direction of the distribution member 660 . The balls that have flowed down in the lower left direction of the sorting member 660 flow down along the flow path toward the second ball entrance 640 , and about 80% of them enter the second ball entrance 640 .

As described above, in the first embodiment, a ball hit to the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (a ball hit to the right) is directed toward the variable winning device 65 by the distribution member 660. and the direction of the second entrance 640 alternately. Therefore, in the special game state (jackpot), if the ball is hit to the right in order to enter the specific winning hole 65a and win the prize ball, the ball will enter the second ball inlet 640 during the big win. Enter the ball in large numbers. As a result, in most cases, at the end of the big hit, the number of held balls of the second special symbol accumulates up to the value (4 pieces).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type (jackpot E, F) in which the ball is difficult to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 has a high probability (95%). It is determined. Also, in both the big wins E and F, the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in each round is extremely short (0.2 seconds), and it is difficult to enter the ball during the big win. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, there is a high probability (95%) that almost no prize balls can be obtained, and the game state after the big win is also disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the lottery for the second special symbol is an unfavorable lottery and that he/she wants to execute only the lottery for the first special symbol as much as possible.

However, as described above, if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a in the big win and hits to the right in order to win the prize ball, the ball also enters the second ball entering hole 640. After the end, the lottery for the second special symbol held during the big win is executed. Therefore, after the big win, novel game characteristics can be realized in which the game is played hoping that the special pattern lottery will not be a big win until the reserved balls corresponding to the second special pattern lottery run out. When all the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol are out of line as expected by the player, only the lottery of the first special symbol can be performed by hitting to the left. The game can be continued without reducing the number of balls held until a jackpot (jackpots A to C) of a type relatively advantageous to the player is achieved.

Further, in the first embodiment, when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one prize ball is awarded. When a right-handed ball is hit, one out of two balls is distributed in the direction of the second ball entrance 640 by the distribution member 660, so all the balls distributed in the direction of the second ball entrance 640 are the second balls. Even if the ball enters the ball entrance 640, only half of the ball hit by right-handed hitting is paid out as prize balls. Therefore, since the number of balls held is likely to decrease when hitting right, the advantage of hitting right can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right during normal times (states other than during the jackpot).

As described above, in the first embodiment, if the second special symbol lottery that is executed after the big win ends is a big hit, it is disadvantageous for the player, and all the reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are lost. , it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the lottery result of the predetermined number of times (four times) after the big win is finished, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not win any winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. - 特許庁The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, the characteristic effects of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment executed in the main display area Dm will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, when hitting to the right while aiming at the specific winning hole 65a during the big win, the ball enters the second ball hole 640, and the second special symbol is displayed before the big win ends. It is configured so that the number of pending balls reaches the upper limit. If the lottery of the second special pattern results in a big hit, it is disadvantageous to the player, so the player plays the game hoping that the lottery will be lost during the execution of the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special pattern. In the first embodiment, whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol jackpot was included in the retained balls until all the variable displays based on the second special symbol retained balls were completed. It is configured to execute a production that suggests.

First, with reference to FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), the effect executed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a big win. As shown in FIG. 8(a), during the jackpot, an effect in which the adventurer 811 explores a cave is displayed. Also, on the upper left side of the third pattern display device 81, a display area HR1 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape is displayed. The current round number is displayed in this display area HR1. In the example of FIG. 8(a), characters "1 round" are displayed, indicating that the current round is the first round.

On the upper right side of the third pattern display device 81, a display area HR2 having a substantially oblong rectangular shape is displayed. In this display area HR2, the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the specific prize winning opening 65a is displayed. In the example of FIG. 8(a), the characters "GET 0022" are displayed in the display area HR2, and 22 prize balls have been paid out (that is, 2 balls have been identified since the start of the jackpot). This indicates that the ball has entered the winning hole 65a).

Further, four display areas HR3a to HR3d are displayed on the right side of the third pattern display device 81. As shown in FIG. Although the details will be described later, these four display areas HR3a to HR3d show the degree of expectation of the second special symbol held ball increased by the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 during the big win. An image is displayed. In addition, as described above, there is a high possibility that the player will not win the lottery of the second special symbols. An image showing the degree of expectation is displayed.

Note that FIG. 8(a) illustrates a state in which there is no held ball corresponding to the lottery for the second special symbol, and each display area HR3a to HR3d is marked with a "?" An image is displayed.

FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected during a big win. As shown in FIG. 8(b), when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected during the jackpot, an effect is executed in which the adventurer 811 discovers the treasure box 812. FIG. This treasure box contains a key 813, and the aspect of the key 813 suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the second special symbol reserved based on the entering ball will be lost. The more luxurious the mode of the key 813, the higher the expectation of loss, and the poorer the mode, the lower the expectation of loss (the risk of winning the lottery for the second special symbol increases).

FIG. 8(b) exemplifies a case where a key 813 in a normal mode is displayed. When an effect in which the adventurer 811 discovers the key 813 is performed, the key in the same mode as the discovered mode is displayed above the display area where "?" is displayed among the display areas HR3a to HR3d. Displayed sequentially from the area. The example of FIG. 8B illustrates a case where the image of the key 813 is displayed in the display area HR3a among the display areas where the symbol "?" is displayed. In this way, by displaying the state of each key 813 discovered by the adventurer 811 in the display areas HR3a to HR3d, a variable display based on each held ball to be executed after the current big win is completed. The degree of expectation of the player can be confirmed at any timing. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the main display area Dm is provided with dedicated display areas HR3a to HR3d for displaying the expectation level of the second special symbol holding ball. It is not necessary to provide an area. For example, the second special symbol pending symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds may be displayed in the form of the key discovered by the adventurer 811 .

FIG. 9(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the ending effect after all rounds of big wins have ended. In the first embodiment, from the ending period of the jackpot to the elapse of the fluctuation time of all the variable displays based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the jackpot E, An effect is executed to inform the player whether F exists or not. In other words, it suggests whether or not the game state remains ``variable state of special symbols'' and ``time-saving state of normal symbols'' even after all variable display based on the second special symbol held ball is completed. A production for the purpose is executed. Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, it is a game state advantageous to a player, "probability change state of a special design", and "ordinary design time-saving state" is called "probability change mode", disadvantageous to a player. The "low probability state of special symbols" and the "normal state of normal symbols", which are game states, are referred to as "normal mode".

As shown in FIG. 9(a), when the jackpot ending period starts, an effect in which the adventurer 811 discovers the door 814 is performed. Moreover, above the image of the door 814, a display area HR4 having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape is formed. In this display area HR4, characters such as "Door breakthrough mode start! Break through four doors!" are displayed. According to these display contents, if four doors can be opened using the four keys (displayed in the display areas HR3a to HR3d) collected during the big win, it will be advantageous for the player (holding balls of the second special symbol It is possible to make the player easily understand that the variable probability mode continues even after consuming. In addition, in the display area HR1 on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81, an image of an arrow pointing to the left and characters "left shot" are displayed. These displays allow the player to hit the ball to the left (to hit the ball to the left channel of the variable display unit 80).

It should be noted that the reason why the left-handed hitting is notified with the start of the ending period is to suppress the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol after the end of the big hit. That is, during the ending period, the player hits right and shoots the ball, after the big win (and after the fluctuation based on the held ball of the second special symbol is started), the second ball entrance 640 Prevents the number of times of lottery of the second special pattern from increasing after the end of the big win (the lottery of the second special pattern is executed beyond the 4 times reserved during the big win). This is to (suppress). As described above, even if the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, prize balls can hardly be obtained during the big win, and the game state after the big win becomes a normal mode disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the more the number of lotteries for the second special symbol increases, the more disadvantageous it becomes for the player. For this reason, in order to prevent the player from continuing to hit to the right even after the end of the big win and the ball newly entering the second ball entrance 640, in the first embodiment, the game is started from the ending period. It is configured to inform the player of left-handed hitting. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big win can be limited to the held ball of the second special symbol held during the big win, so that the player is not excessively disadvantaged. can be prevented (suppressed).

When the jackpot (special game state) ends with the end of the ending period, an effect of breaking through the door 814 using the keys collected during the jackpot is executed, as shown in FIG. 9(b). FIG. 9B illustrates a case where the adventurer 811 successfully breaks through the door 814 using the key displayed in the display area HR3a. If the breakthrough is successful, an image of the opened door 814 is displayed, and the characters "Breakthrough!!" are displayed in the display area HR4. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the remaining three doors are broken through, the player will be in an advantageous state (variable probability mode).

The effect of breaking through the door 814 is basically executed in conjunction with the variable display based on the held ball of the second special symbol. That is, the effect in which the adventurer 811 uses the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR3a) to open (break through) the first door is based on the first reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the variable display based on the second held ball. Similarly, when the adventurer 811 uses the second key to open the second door, after the variable display based on the second reserved ball of the second special symbol starts, the third It is executed in the period until the variable display based on the held ball is started. The effect in which the adventurer 811 uses the third key to open the third door is to start the variable display based on the third reserved ball of the second special symbol, and then to the fourth reserved ball. It is executed in the period until the start of the variable display based on The effect of opening the fourth door using the fourth key is executed in the variable time of the variable display based on the fourth ball held in the second special symbol. In addition, these are operations in the case of a lottery result corresponding to the second special pattern reserved ball being lost, and if the second special pattern lottery results in a big win, the door is broken through during the period of the big win. The performance is performed one or more times.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, in the first embodiment, it is difficult to perceive whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is achieved from the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 in the variable winning device 65. As such, when the second special symbol comes off, it is configured so that the loss accompanied by the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 (so-called small hit) is determined. Then, the opening period (0.2 seconds) of the opening and closing door 65f1 in the case of a small win and the opening period of the opening and closing door 65f1 in each round in the case of the big hits E and F in the lottery of the second special pattern. are matching. Furthermore, when the jackpots E and F are obtained, the interval period between rounds is made to coincide with the variation time (1 second) when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery. By configuring in this way, even if the big hit E or the big hit F occurs during the execution of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the opening period or the opening interval of the open/close door 65f1 is already in the middle of the big hit. It can be difficult to determine whether or not As a result, attention can be drawn to the end of a series of effects (door breaking mode effects) that are executed with the start of the ending period.

FIG. 10(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when breaking through the fourth door fails in the door breaking mode effect. That is, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when either the jackpot E or F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 10(a), if the adventurer 811 fails to break through the door, the characters "Failed..." are displayed in the display area HR4, and the An effect is executed in which the key is broken. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the variable probability mode has ended (either of the jackpots E or F has been won).

FIG. 10(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the fourth door is successfully broken through in the door breaking mode effect. In this case, an image in which the fourth door is opened is displayed, and at the same time, the characters "Success!" These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the game can be played in an advantageous variable probability mode.

Thus, in the first embodiment, the above-described door breakthrough is performed over the period from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the variable display based on the second special symbol held ball increased during the jackpot. It is set as the structure which performs mode production. Due to this door breakthrough mode production, all the variable display based on the second special symbol holding ball is removed, and whether it is possible to play in the variable mode, the big hits E and F are included in the holding ball, and in the variable mode It is possible to suggest to the player whether the player will fall to the normal mode without performing the lottery for the first special symbol. By adopting a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over the ending period and a plurality of variable displays after the big win, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, depending on whether or not the number of doors corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be broken through, the game after all the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is completed. Although it was configured to notify whether or not the state is the variable probability mode, the presentation mode is not limited to this. Ultimately, one of two types of results (success or failure, victory or defeat, confirmation or failure, etc.) may be notified. A configuration may be adopted in which the variable probability mode is notified if the player wins the battle against the enemy.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the correspondence relationship between the change over time of the presentation mode during execution of the door breaking mode effect and the change over time of the state of the specific prize winning opening 65a (opening/closing state of the opening/closing door 65f1) will be described. FIG. 11(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship when the variable probability mode is notified (that is, when the lottery results correspond to all the held balls of the second special symbol being lost). On the other hand, FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence when the normal mode is announced (that is, when either the jackpot E or F is included in the hold).

As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when it is notified that the mode has been shifted to the variable probability mode (when the lottery of the second special symbol is all lost), the start screen of the door breakthrough mode production ( (see FIG. 9A) is displayed. This start screen continues to be displayed for an ending period of one second, and when the ending period ends and the jackpot ends, the start screen ends. When the jackpot ends and the variable display based on the first reserved ball (reserved 1) of the second special pattern is started in the first symbol display device 37, the effect of breaking through the first door (Fig. 9 (b) )) is started. This effect continues until the start timing of variation based on the second reserved ball (reserved 2). In addition, as described above, when the lottery for the second special symbol is out, it is almost a small hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11(a), when the variation display for 1 second based on Hold 1 ends, a small win is started and the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In accordance with this opening period, it is displayed that the door has been successfully broken through.

Thereafter, similarly, the variable display for 1 second and the opening of the opening/closing door 65f1 for 0.2 seconds based on the small win are repeated. At the same time, an effect of breaking through the second to fourth doors is executed in the third pattern display device 81, and it is notified (displayed) that the doors have been broken through during each opening period of the opening/closing door 65f1. . In this way, the result of whether or not the door can be broken through is notified during the opening period of the small win after the fluctuation time has passed, so that the door can be broken through during the fluctuation period of 1 second. You can raise your expectations for In addition, since it is possible to draw the player's attention during the opening period of the small winning, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether or not the opening pattern of the open/close door 65f1 is already a winning. can.

In the production of breaking through the fourth door, after the adventurer 811 breaks through the door 814 and the transition to the variable probability mode is notified (after the fourth small hit is completed), the display mode dedicated to the variable probability mode (not shown) is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the mode has been changed to the variable probability mode.

FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing a case where the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is a jackpot F. FIG. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode effect, even if it is notified that it has shifted to the normal mode (when either the big hit E or F is included in the second special symbol reserved ball), the ending period Door breakthrough mode production is started with the start of. When the big win is finished and the variable display of the special pattern based on the first reserved ball is started in the first pattern display device 37, the effect of trying to break through the first door is executed, and the opening period of the small win. Adventurer 811 breaks through the first door at the same time.

When the variable display of the special symbol based on the second reserved ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, the effect of trying to break through the second door is executed. At this time, the variation display for 1 second is executed based on the second held ball, and the jackpot F is started after 1 second has passed. When the jackpot F is reached and the first round is started, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In accordance with this open period, it is reported that the adventurer 811 has successfully broken through the door. Then, with the start of the interval period after the end of the first round, the effect of trying to break through the third door is executed, and the opening period of the second round after the interval period of 1 second (0.2 seconds), it is announced that the third door has been successfully breached.

In addition, when the interval period after the end of the second round starts, the effect of trying to break through the fourth door is executed, and the opening period of the third round (0. 2 seconds), it is reported that the fourth door could not be broken through (see FIG. 10(a)).

After the failure to break through the door is notified, a result display (not shown) indicating the total number of prize balls paid out in the variable probability mode is performed until the end of the big win. When the jackpot ends, the display mode dedicated to the normal mode is set.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the variable display is sequentially performed based on the held ball of the second special symbol after the big win, the state of the open/close door 65f1 changes over time when the variable display and the small win are repeated. The change (see FIG. 11(a)) and the change over time of the state of the opening/closing door 65f1 when the second special symbol holding ball includes the jackpot E or F (see FIG. 11(b)) are at least It is configured to match until the end of the door breakthrough mode production. That is, the opening period of the open/close door 65f1 in each round of the big wins E and F is configured to be 0.2 seconds, which is the same period as the opening period of the small win. Also, the length of the interval period after the 1st to 4th rounds of the jackpots E and F are completed is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, even if any of the 1st to 4th reserved balls of the second special pattern is a lottery result corresponding to the big hit E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode performance is completed. The operation of the door 65f1 can be made the same as when the variable probability mode is notified (see FIG. 11(a)). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 whether or not the jackpot E or F has been achieved, so that the attention can be paid to the door breakthrough mode effect until the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, in FIG. 11 (b), even when the second ball on hold becomes a big hit F (falls to normal mode), it breaks through up to the third door and fails at the fourth door. However, it is also possible to simply execute an effect of failing to break through the door when either the big hit E or F changes while the reserved ball of the second special symbol is digested.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 12, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 17) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 17, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first winning type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbols are used. , a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 36). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the ball mouth 64. Also, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in time with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 36).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

As described above, the value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 13(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first winning random number counter When the value of C1 coincides with the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers to be a big win included in each type is set differently (see FIG. 13(b)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number for a special symbol jackpot, that is, If it is a random number that causes the special symbol to come off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol comes off.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. display mode.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that become a big hit with special symbols when the probability of special symbols is low. It is stored in a table (see FIG. 13(b)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 4 among the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/100". Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the random number value (counter value) that becomes a big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. On the other hand, the random numbers other than the random numbers that are the big hits correspond to failures. As described above, the deviation of the special symbol includes a small hit. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the probability of the special symbol is low, the number of random numbers that are lost in the lottery for the first special symbol is 396 "4 to 399". On the other hand, the random numbers that are lost in the lottery of the second special symbol are 37 of "3 to 40", and the random numbers that become small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol are "41 to 399". 359 pieces.

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 40 random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the values "0 to 39" are stored in the first random number table for high probability ( See FIG. 13(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 40 among the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/10". In addition, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the number of random numbers that are lost in the lottery for the first special symbol is 360 "40 to 399". On the other hand, only "40" is defined as the random number that is lost in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number that becomes a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 359 of "41 to 399". individual is specified.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the jackpot type is "jackpot A" ( 16 rounds definite variable jackpot). In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "10 to 89" is "jackpot B" (5 round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "90 to 99" is "jackpot C". (2 rounds probability variable jackpot).

On the other hand, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" (16 round probability variable jackpot) when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". In addition, when the value is "5 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot E" (7 round normal jackpot), and when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot F". (6 rounds normal jackpot).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that six types of winning (jackpots A to F) are determined by the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. It is In addition, as described above, in the first embodiment, when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big hit, the variable probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. In other words, even if the jackpot type is determined, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the variable probability state. The above-mentioned "variable probability big win" means a type of jackpot in which the ball easily passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win, and "normal jackpot" means a type of jackpot in which the ball is difficult to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win. means

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and back" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and rear out" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low-probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. table for is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 15(a)) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided in

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. As shown in FIG. 15(a), this variation pattern table 202d is a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and is a special figure 1 per table 202d1 (see FIG. 15(b)). And, at least a special figure 1 off (normal) table 202d2 (see FIG. 15(c)) and a special figure 1 off (probability variation) table 202d3 (see FIG. 15(d)) are defined. In addition, as a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the second special symbol, a table 202d4 for special figures 2 (4 variations or less) (see FIG. 16 (a)) and a special figure 2 (5 variations or more ) for table 202d5 (see FIG. 16(b)), special figure 2 off (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6 (see FIG. 16(c)), special figure 2 off (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d7 (figure 16(d)) are defined at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 15(b), the table 202d1 for special figure 1 will be described. FIG. 15(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 per table 202d1. The special figure 1 winning table 202d1 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win. As the variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. Each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1 in the special figure 1 per table 202d1.

Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "51 to 179" is associated with various super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Select from table 202d1 for special figure 1.

FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss in the low probability state of the special symbol. . When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is set to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is out. Set (front-to-back out-of-reach reach, front-to-back out-of-reach reach).

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, either a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long failure (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, there are various types of normal reach (30 seconds) that are out of the range of "0 to 149" in the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and various kinds of outlier super reach in the range of "150 to 197" (60 seconds), but "198" is set to a different special reach (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 15(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol. In this deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from that in the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined , and within the range of “90 to 99”, the out-of-reach reach (front-rear out-of-reach reach, reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach) is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching reach in the case of being out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the variable probability game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d4 for special figure 2 per (4 variations or less). This table 202d4 for special figure 2 winning (4 fluctuations or less) is selected when the number of fluctuations of special symbols is 4 times or less after the end of the big win and when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win. It is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time). As shown in FIG. 16(a), after the big hit, if the number of times the special symbols fluctuate is 4 or less, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation time is 1 second per short fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern. selected.

FIG. 16(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d5 for winning special figure 2 (5 variations or more). This table 202d5 for special figure 2 winning (5 variations or more) is selected when the number of variations of the special symbol is 5 times or more after the end of the big win and when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win. It is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time). As shown in FIG. 16(b), after the big hit, if the number of times the special symbols fluctuate is 5 times or more, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds will be the fluctuation pattern. selected.

FIG. 16(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d6 for special figure 2 loss (4 fluctuations or less). The table 202d6 for this special figure 2 loss (4 fluctuations or less) is a case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 times or less after the end of the big hit, and when the second special symbol is lost by lottery (including a small win). It is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when it becomes. As shown in FIG. 16(c), after the big hit, if the number of times the special symbols fluctuate is 4 times or less, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation time is 1 second and the short fluctuation occurs as the fluctuation pattern. selected.

FIG. 16(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d7 for special figure 2 loss (5 fluctuations or more). This table 202d7 for special figure 2 winning (5 variations or more) is a case where the number of variations of special symbols is 5 times or more after the end of the big win, and it is lost (including small winning) in the lottery of special symbols. It is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected in the case. As shown in FIG. 16(b), after the big hit, if the number of times the special symbols fluctuate is 5 times or more, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, as a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time is 300 seconds. selected.

Thus, in the first embodiment, after the big hit, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbol is 4 times or less, the lottery result is out (small hit ) or a jackpot, the variation time is always set to 1 second. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the big win E or F has occurred from the fluctuation time during the execution of the variable display based on the held ball of the second special symbol after the big win. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the fluctuation time whether or not the game state after all the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the probability fluctuation mode. Therefore, the player who wants to know whether or not the variable probability mode is set can be made to play the game while paying more attention to the result of the door breaking mode effect, so that the desire to participate in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, after the big hit, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbol is 5 times or more, regardless of the lottery result, as a variable time The configuration is such that 300 seconds is always set. As a result, if the player hits to the right in a state other than the big win, a special pattern lottery is executed only once every 300 seconds (5 minutes) at the shortest (very poor game efficiency). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from hitting the right hand in a state other than during the jackpot. If the player hits to the right in a state other than the jackpot, especially during the probability variable mode, only the second special symbol lottery is executed, so either jackpot E or F is disadvantageous to the player when the jackpot is won. It is very likely that In other words, there is a high possibility that prize balls will hardly be obtained, and that the game will fall to the normal mode after the big win, resulting in a big win. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player will be dissatisfied with the game because the game is changed to the disadvantageous normal mode without being able to fully enjoy the game in the advantageous variable probability mode.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, since the game efficiency is deteriorated when hitting to the right in a state other than a big win, it is possible to suppress the player from hitting to the right in a state other than the big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the game in the variable probability mode more enjoyable.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and is stored in the RAM 203 as normal symbols. It is stored in the ball storage area 203c.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 14(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for normal design low probability (period in which normal design is normal state), and for high probability of normal design hit than low probability (normal design) It is divided into two types, one for a time-saving state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that will be a big hit included in each is set differently (see FIG. 14(b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the values are "5 to 28". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. In , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second As a symbol), a symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 64a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern high probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. At , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is illuminated and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 64a is opened "1 second x 3 times". be done. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the variable display time becomes very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 64a is opened only "1 second x 3 times" when the normal symbols are won. The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 32).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes a counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, a stack area storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I/O memory. and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 36) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 35) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(a). FIG. 13(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the above fixed value data. ing.

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 13(b)) is a data table that defines the correspondence between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the lottery results. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 13 (b)), and it is determined that the first special symbol is out. "4 to 399" is specified as the range of judgment values to be determined (see 202a2 in FIG. 13(b)). In addition, "3 to 40" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 13(b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol "41 to 399" is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 13(b)). In addition, in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variable state), "0 to 39" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a jackpot (see 202a4 in FIG. 13(b)), and the first special symbol is out. "40 to 399" is specified as the range of judgment values to be judged (see 202a5 in FIG. 13(b)). In addition, "40" is defined as a determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a5 in FIG. 13(b)), and "41 to 399" is determined as a determination value to be determined as a small hit of the second special symbol. ” is defined (see 202a6 in FIG. 13(b)). When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the starting prize matches one of the determination values corresponding to the big winning defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 13(b)) , is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14 (a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the first hit type counter C2 is determined. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the per type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is defined in association with "jackpot A". (See 202b1 in FIG. 14(a)). This "jackpot A" is a jackpot with 16 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot A", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot A" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot A" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds elapse or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, the player can almost certainly win the maximum number of balls (7 balls) into the specific winning hole 65a before 30 seconds elapse just by continuing to hit to the right in each round. , a large amount of prize balls can be obtained when the jackpot A is reached. In addition, if the player continues hitting to the right in one round in which the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) can pass, the ball will almost certainly pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, after the end of "big hit A", it will almost certainly be in the variable probability mode. Thus, "jackpot A" has the largest number of rounds, and since the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable mode, it is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 89" in association with "jackpot B" (see 202b2 in Fig. 14(a)). . This "jackpot B" is a jackpot with five rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 80 counter values are "jackpot B", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B" is determined. ratio is 80% (80/100). Like the "jackpot A", the "jackpot B" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds elapse or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, similarly to the jackpot A, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Also, in the first round of the big hit, the ball almost certainly passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so after the "big hit B" ends, the variable probability mode is almost guaranteed. In this way, since "jackpot B" has fewer rounds than "jackpot A" (and "jackpot D" to be described later), fewer prize balls can be obtained than "jackpot A" (and "jackpot D"). However, many prize balls can be paid out. In addition, since the game state after the big win is the variable probability mode, the game state is shifted to a game state that is advantageous to the player after the big win, similar to the "big win A".

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "jackpot C" (see 202b3 in Fig. 14(a)). . This "jackpot C" is a jackpot with two rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot C", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). Like the "jackpot A" and the "jackpot B", the "jackpot C" is opened in each round of the jackpot until the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 30 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, similarly to the "jackpot A" and the "jackpot B", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Also, in the first round of the big hit, the ball almost certainly passes through the probability variable switch 65e3, so after the "big hit C" ends, the probability variable mode is almost guaranteed. In this way, since "jackpot C" has the smallest number of rounds, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is reduced, but the number of prize balls that can be won can be paid out, so that the player's possession of balls can be increased. In addition, since the game state after the big win is the probability variable mode, the game state shifts to a game state that is advantageous to the player after the big win, similar to the "big win A" and "big win B".

In this way, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, prize balls for 2 rounds to 16 rounds can be paid out, and the game state after the big win is almost certainly changed to the probability variable mode. It is advantageous for the player regardless of the type of jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 4" for the second special symbol in association with "jackpot D". (See 202b4 in FIG. 14(a)). This "jackpot D" is a jackpot with 16 rounds. Among 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of counter values that become "jackpot D" is five, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot D" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). Since this "jackpot D" has the same operation as the "jackpot A", it is the type of jackpot most advantageous to the player like the "jackpot A".

For the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 49" in association with "jackpot E" (see 202b5 in Fig. 14(a)). . This "jackpot E" is a jackpot with 7 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 45 counter values become the "jackpot E", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot E" is determined. ratio is 45% (45/100). This "jackpot E" is opened in each round of the jackpot until the door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, it becomes difficult to even enter one ball into the specific winning hole 65a in each round, and it is almost impossible to win prize balls. Also, since it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning hole 65a in the first round, there is almost no possibility that the ball will pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 in the first round. Therefore, the game state after the "jackpot E" is completed becomes the "normal mode" which is almost disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the "jackpot E" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, because it is highly likely that the game will shift to the disadvantageous "normal mode" after the jackpot, and that prize balls can hardly be obtained.

For the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with "jackpot F" (see 202b6 in Fig. 14(a)). . This "jackpot F" is a jackpot with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values become the "jackpot F", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot F" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100). Like the "jackpot E", the "jackpot F" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 0.2 seconds elapse or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, like the "jackpot E", almost no prize balls can be obtained, and the possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous "normal mode" after the jackpot is extremely high, so that the jackpot type is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a big win, there is a high probability (at a rate of 95%) that the prize ball cannot be obtained, and the game state after the big win is almost certainly in the normal mode. , F, which is highly likely to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can expect that the second special symbol reserved balls, which are increased by the balls entering the second ball entrance 640 during the big win, will all come off. It is possible to provide novel playability.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14(b)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see 202c1 in FIG. 14(b)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 14(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to. , It is determined whether or not it is a normal pattern hit.

The variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the explanation of the fluctuation type counter CS1, so the detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second Special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, variable probability flag 203g, variable probability setting flag 203h, variable probability passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, remaining ball timer flag 203k, remaining ball timer 203m, variable probability effective flag 203n , probability variable effective timer 203o, emission number counter 203p, variable time counter 203q, big hit medium flag 203r, small hit medium flag 203s, round end flag 203t, and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area ( (see FIG. 17), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a special symbol lottery or the like is determined.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4. More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). 4 areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

If the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty, so it is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, a shift process is performed to shift the prize winning data stored in other reserve areas into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 . The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 28).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 28, FIG. 30 (see S405). The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the variable display of the variable display withheld by the main control device 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the number of pitches deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of pending pitches command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a special symbol (first symbol) variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero. is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 28). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. See S704 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 32).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding variable display in normal symbols M) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 33: No ).

The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state (variable probability mode) of the special symbols. ), and if the variable probability flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (normal mode) of special symbols. In addition, as described above, in the variable probability mode, the time saving state of normal symbols. Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203g is ON, it indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The variable probability flag 203g has an initial value set to OFF, and when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win, it is set to ON at the end of the big win (see S1302 in FIG. 39). Further, the variable probability flag 203g is reset to OFF when a jackpot game is started (see S219 in FIG. 28).

This probability variation flag 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 29). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S213), the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if it is on, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per random number table 202a for high probability, while the probability variation If the flag 203g is off, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the first winning random number table 202a for low probability.

In addition, the probability variation flag 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 32). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203g is referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if the probability variation flag 203g is on, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. On the other hand (see S609 in FIG. 32), if the variable probability flag 203g is off, a lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the second winning random number table 202c for low probability (see S610 in FIG. 32). In addition, in the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203g is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a when the normal symbol is hit (S614 of FIG. 32, S620).

The variable probability setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6(a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes through this variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1416 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203h is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1304 in FIG. 39). The variable probability setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

It should be noted that, when the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h may be formally set to ON for recovery. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off, depending on whether the variable probability passage counter 203i, which will be described later, is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203h to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 in one round (in this embodiment, one round of the jackpot) during the jackpot game. Incidentally, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203i and the ejection number counter 203p, which will be described later. This variable probability passing counter 203i is updated by being incremented by one when passing the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1415 in FIG. 40). Also, after executing the process of whether or not the number of winning game balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged game balls, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1511 in FIG. 41). It should be noted that this probability variable passing counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable prize winning device 65, the value is updated by adding one (S1403 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winnings of variable winning device 65 (value of winning number counter 203j) and the number of ejected items (total value of ejection number counter 203p and probability variable passage counter 203i) are the same. After it is determined whether they match, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 41). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball sweeping period after one round has ended and the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, it means that it is the ball sweeping period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203m, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 41). The remaining ball timer 203m is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and is used for determining whether the time required for the balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. is a counter.

The remaining ball timer 203m is the time required for the winning game balls to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds. It is set as the upper limit of 203m. When the remaining ball timer 203m reaches the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. (S1507 in FIG. 41). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加In addition, it is possible to suppress the illegality of illegally leaving the ball in the variable winning device 65 and flowing down the ball to the special discharge passage 65e2 at the timing of the first round of the big win E or the big win F.例文帳に追加

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

The variable probability effective flag 203n is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 after the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to be off. When this variable probability effective flag 203n is set to ON, based on the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, the gaming ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6 (a)) It shows that it is less than the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3.

The variable probability valid timer 203o is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203n is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203o, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. In this embodiment, it takes 0.3 seconds for the game ball entering the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203o is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, after the switching member 65h closes the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, or the piano from below the variable probability switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a game ball with a wire or the like to allow it to pass, or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that the game ball has passed by radio waves or the like.

The ejection number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the ball ejection port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6(a)) in one round. The discharge number counter 203p is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the discharge number (S1511 in FIG. 41).

The variable time counter 203q is a counter for counting variable time. A counter value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202d is set in the variation time counter 203q (see S311 in FIG. 29). Also, this variable time counter 203q is decremented by 1 (see S214 in FIG. 28) during the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), and based on the value of this variable time counter 203q, it is determined whether the variable time has elapsed. be discriminated.

The jackpot flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the big winning flag 203r is on, it means that the big winning is going on, and if it is off, it means that the big winning is not going on. The jackpot middle flag 203r is set to ON when a jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1103 in FIG. 37) when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery. Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1304 in FIG. 39). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), this big-hit flag 203r is referenced to determine whether or not the big-hit is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 28).

The flag 203s during the small hit is a flag indicating whether or not it is during the small hit. If the small hit medium flag 203s is on, it means that the small hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the small hit is not in progress. The small hit medium flag 203r becomes a small hit in the special symbol lottery, and is set to ON when the small hit starts (see S1603 in FIG. 42). Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S1610 in FIG. 42). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), this small winning middle flag 203s is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the small winning is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 28).

The round end flag 203t is a flag indicating whether or not it is the ball-striking period after the end of the big winning round. If the round end flag 203t is ON, it indicates that the ball-spitting period has ended after the round ends, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the ball-spitting period has ended.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Thus, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags. By performing control with reference to these flags and counters, it is possible to realize the novel game property of performing the game in the hope that the second special symbol held ball will be missed.

Next, referring to FIG. 19, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described. explain. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with roughly three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, the door break-through mode shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, and the variable probability mode shown in the lower part of FIG. 19 are provided.

As described above, the normal mode indicates the low probability state of the special symbols and the normal state of the normal symbols. This is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In addition, as described above, the probability variable mode indicates the probability variable state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the probability of the big hit is high, and the ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64. The game state becomes the most advantageous for the player.

In addition, the door breakthrough mode indicates a state in which there is a second special symbol reserved ball acquired during the execution of the probability variable jackpot (jackpots A to D), and the lottery based on the second special pattern reserved balls is all lost. Then, it is a state indicating that the game can be played in an advantageous variable probability mode. This door breakthrough mode is the same state as the probability variable mode except that there is a second special symbol reserved ball. In other words, there is a high probability (1/10) that a special symbol lottery will result in a big win, and the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 . The probability that all the four second special symbol holding balls accumulated during the jackpot are lost is about 65.6% (9/10 to the power of 4), so the door breakthrough mode is 65.6%. It can be said that the constant variable mode can be expected.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another mode only in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the first special symbol jackpot (jackpot A to C) is achieved, and if the ball passes the variable probability switch 65e3 in the first round, the door breakthrough mode is entered after the jackpot ends. . As described above, in the jackpots A to C, the ball almost passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 simply by hitting to the right in one round. In addition, if the ball does not pass the variable probability switch 65e3 in the first round (did not win V) due to the player not hitting the ball, etc., the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal mode again. be done.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 19, the door breakthrough mode is shifted to another mode not only when a big hit is made, but also when all the variable displays based on the second special symbol holding balls are completed. That is, as shown in FIG. 19, when the variable display based on the reserved balls of all the second special symbols is completed in the door breakthrough mode, the game shifts to the probability variable mode.

In addition, when the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 5% of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern, the ball almost passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so the door breakthrough mode is performed again after the jackpot. transition to In addition, if the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the first round (does not win V) because the player did not hit the ball, etc., the game state after the big win is set to the normal mode. . On the other hand, in the case of winning either the jackpot E or the jackpot F, which is determined by 95% of the big wins in the lottery of the second special symbols, in the first round, the ball is sent to the specific winning opening 65a. Since it is difficult to enter the ball, the ball almost never passes through the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19, after the big wins E and F are finished, the game shifts to the normal mode.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 19, the variable probability mode is shifted to another mode only when a big hit is achieved. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big hit (jackets A to C), and if the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the first round, the door breakthrough mode is entered after the big hit. Transition. All of the jackpots A to C are jackpot types that allow the ball to easily pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, so after the jackpot ends, the mode shifts to the door breakthrough mode. In addition, if the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the first round (does not win V) because the player did not hit the ball, etc., the game state after the big win is set to the normal mode. .

Thus, in the first embodiment, by going back and forth between the three types of modes, the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the big win is all lost. , it is possible to realize a characteristic game property that a game can be played in an advantageous variable probability mode. In a general pachinko machine, it is a favorable phenomenon for a player to win a jackpot again within the reserve after the end of the jackpot (so-called continuous play within the reserve). It is possible to allow the player to play an advantage in anticipation that a series of villas will not occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property different from that of a general pachinko machine, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253. FIG.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable display effects ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine more detailed variations. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 20(b). FIG. 20(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 has a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a dependent fluctuation time counter. 223f, breakthrough effect counter 223g, game state storage area 223h, and other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area consisting of one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. there is Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. From, various information obtained when the lottery of the special pattern corresponding to the starting winning prize is carried out (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, the predicted various information is , is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol reserved in the main control device 110, and the second special The symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the second special symbol reserved ball number The value of the counter 203e cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter At 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is added to the number of pending balls in the variable display, or when the main controller 110 When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. A number of balls command is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4208 in FIG. 46). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. Therefore, while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. send to.

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 and the second special The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number of reserved ball counter 223c is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c correspond to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. 203e, its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. can be changed while synchronizing with Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S4802 in FIG. 52). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 45). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 46), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S4807 in FIG. 52). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The sub-variation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the variation time of the special symbol variation display. When the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is set in the slave variation time counter 223f.

The breakthrough effect counter 223g is a counter that indicates the number of remaining doors to be broken through before shifting to the variable probability mode in the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Based on the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect has ended.

The game state storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The game state storage area 223h is updated every time a state command output every time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is received from the main controller 110 (see S4210 in FIG. 46). The game state storage area 223h is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not it is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the bit of the second lower order bit indicates whether or not it is the probability variable state of special symbols. Therefore, the lower two bits are "00B" in the "normal mode", while the lower two bits are "11B" in the "door breaking mode" and the "variable probability mode". The MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223h.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and a time-lapse timer that measures the presentation time. are doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 53) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the command pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 26) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 53).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 22 . FIG. 22 shows a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to perform the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 22(c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, there is a power-on variation image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" as shown in FIG. 22(c). A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit with special symbols", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts playing the game, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. 22(b) and 22(c), the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 23A and 23B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 23(b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", while the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" is shown.

As shown in FIG. 23, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back face type and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back face image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sand beach stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23(b), only image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, an image between position a and position b, is resident on the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage". It is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the video RAM 235 .

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 23(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. can be displayed. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 21). As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns (see FIG. 7) with numerals "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "adventurer" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are stored in the character design area 235e, so that the characters can be displayed. When the control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the control device 114 changes the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out the image data previously resident in the . This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of the back surface is to display either back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or to display a back surface different from back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of the back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 24) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect images become more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 25). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 25).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 53). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 64(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 55(b)). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 55(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 64A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 64(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 26) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 55(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 61) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 26), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 55(b)). )) is executed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 61). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation in accordance with the completion of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 65). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 65). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 66).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 55B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 43. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 399, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the starting winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a big hit or a small hit (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether one of the flag 203r during the big hit and the flag 203s during the small hit is ON. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the special symbol is neither a big hit nor a small hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display based on the second special symbol lottery) is obtained. (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the value of the first special symbol The holding count N1 of variable display based on lottery is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209).

In the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the counter 203d (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S211). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same technique as the processing of S207 (S209), and the processing proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is performed (S213), and this process is finished. The details of this special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202: Yes), the value of the fluctuating time counter 203q is updated by subtracting 1 (S214), and the fluctuating time counter after updating. Based on the value of 203q, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter 203q updated in the process of S214 has become zero. The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. Then, one of the jackpots A to F is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached, , the green LED is lit, and when the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S216 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S219), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. do. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S219, when the main processing (see FIG. 36) jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed, branch to S1101: Yes, and the opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

In the process of S218, if the result of the lottery this time is the loss of the special symbol (S218: No), the processes of S219 and S220 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S221.

The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by voice during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (whether or not a special symbol big win) or a "special symbol omission" is made (determination of success or failure), and the first symbol is selected. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserving ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserving ball storage area 203b. , and each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, the variable probability flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols (S302). In the process of S302, if the variable probability flag 203g is ON, it is determined that the special symbol is in the variable probability state, and if the variable probability flag 203g is OFF, it is determined as the low probability state (not the variable probability state) of the special symbol. In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability time Based on the big hit random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 13(b)). As described above, 40 random numbers from "0 to 39" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number that becomes the winning. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variable state (it is in the special symbol low probability state) (S302: No), the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first winning random number table for low probability (see FIG. 13(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, "0 to 39"), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big winning is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14(a)) to determine what the jackpot type is. do. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is a jackpot A (16 rounds probability variable jackpot). If it is in the range of "10 to 89", it is determined to be a jackpot B (5 rounds of variable probability), and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot of C (2 rounds of variable probability). Determine (see FIG. 14(a)). On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a big win, if the value of the first win type counter C2 is in the range of ``0 to 4'', it is determined to be a big win D (16 round probability variable big win), If it is in the range of "5 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot E (7 rounds normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot F (6 rounds normal jackpot) ( See FIG. 14(a)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to F). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpots A to F) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( time).

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (including a small win) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, the third symbol display device As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front-rear out-of-reach, non-front-rear out-of-reach, or complete out-of-order.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", set the complete out. , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", set the complete out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", set the reach other than front and rear out, and set the reach to "98". , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 time).

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 203q (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 36). When the processing of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. , when there is a start winning, processing for executing the holding processing of the values indicated by the various counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In addition, in the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) (S407). In this process as well, similarly to the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of holding variable display in special symbols) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

Then, there is no winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), and if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S411, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is Stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and proceeds to the processing of S413. In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of S413, a prefetching process for prefetching success or failure from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S413), and this process is terminated. Details of this prefetch processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S413). In this look-ahead processing (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has been detected in the current starting winning processing (see FIG. 30). (S501), if no new ball is detected (S501: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that a new ball has been detected (S501: Yes), then whether the number of held balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit (that is, 4). It is determined whether or not (S502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S502, if it is determined that the number of pending balls is less than the upper limit (S502: No), whether the timing to start the variable display based on the entering ball is the probability variable state of the special symbol (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the variable probability state is obtained according to the current game state and the result of the read-ahead of the reserved balls that were reserved before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the held ball does not include a jackpot, the current game state and the timing of starting the variable display based on the entered ball detected this time match, so the current game state is the probability variable state. It is determined that In addition, when a jackpot is included in the reserved balls, there is a possibility that the game state is changed according to the type of the jackpot. Specifically, when the variable probability jackpot is reserved, the state is shifted to the variable probability state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is reserved, the state is shifted to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variation display based on the hit ball detected this time is in the probability variation state.

In the processing of S503, if it is determined that the start time of the variation based on the entrance detected this time is the probability variable state of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance where the entrance was detected and the high probability time A lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start time is a low probability state of special symbols (S503: No), based on the type of entrance where the ball is detected and the first random number table for low probability. Then, the lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

In the process of S506 that is executed after the process of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of entrance where the current ball is detected and the lottery result obtained in the process of S504 or S505. (S506), this processing ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the prize winning information command, the audio ramp control device 113 stores the type of entrance notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the prize winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal design variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), and the variation display of the normal design (second design) performed in the second design display device 83, the first entrance This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with 64.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608). In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the period during which the special symbols are in the probability variable state and the period during which the normal symbols are in the time-saving state coincide. Therefore, in the process of S608, if the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is ON, it is determined that it is a time-saving state of normal symbols, and if it is OFF, it is determined that it is a normal state of normal symbols.

In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607, the random number table per normal symbol for high probability time Based on this, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S609). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 14(b)).

In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low A lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired based on the normal symbol winning random number table for the probability time (S610). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of 0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is normal It is determined that the design is out of line (see FIG. 14(b)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol win (S611), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S611: Yes), The display mode at the time of winning is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the time saving state of the normal design (whether the probability variation flag 203g is ON) (S614), and if it is the time saving state of the normal design (S614: Yes), the variable display in the second design display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a normal symbol time saving state (that is, the probability variation flag 203g is off) (S614: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S616), this process is terminated.

Also, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (S617). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the processing of S615 or S616 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the processing of S617, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S617: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 62) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S619). If the lottery result of this time is a hit of the normal design (S619: Yes), then, it is determined whether the normal design is in the time saving state (that is, whether the probability variation flag 203g is ON) (S620), and the time saving state If not (S620: No), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S621), and the process is executed. The process proceeds to S523. On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving mode (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 are set to "1 second x 2 times” (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

In the process of S623, the opening time and the number of times of opening determined in the process of S621 or S622 are set (S623), and the process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the processing of S623, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) is executed next, the electric accessory 64a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or S622 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

The ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 1 is added to the value (M) of 203f (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S914.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1015 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S914). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S915, S916).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S915, S916) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S915, S916) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the process of S916 ends, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. After the process of S910 is completed, the variable probability flag 203g is read (S911), and the state command is set based on the state of the variable probability flag 203g. This state command is a command for notifying the current game state to the sound lamp control device 113 . After the process of S912 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1009 and S1010 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) or the start winning process (see FIG. 30). Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific prize-winning port 65a is opened for each jackpot round, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1004 is finished, next, in the case of a small winning state, a small winning control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1005). In the small winning control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened at the start of the small winning, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has passed during the open period of the small winning or whether the ball has won a specified number of prizes. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the small winning control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this small winning control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1005 ends, next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 64a is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 64a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) ends, the first symbol display device The variable display being executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 29). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32), the second symbol display device 83 , the variable display is started. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "x" as normal symbols (second symbol) are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or S513 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), the time until the predetermined time, that is, until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values (both 399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 34 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the initial setting processing (see S901 in FIG. 35) , the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 36). is a process for opening or closing the

In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot will start. In the processing of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1102). The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect. After the process of S1102, the jackpot medium flag 203r is set to ON (S1103), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1004, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1104: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is during the special symbol jackpot (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105), and if it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes ), a jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot action setting process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1105, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1107). Specifically, when a special game state (all rounds of big wins) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times ends, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1107: Yes), the ending command is set (S1108), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: No), next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1109). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (S1109: Yes), next, the big win end process for setting the game state after the end of the big win is executed (S1110), and this process ends. do. Details of the jackpot ending process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1109, when it is determined that the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) is not reached (S1109: No), the winning process for performing the process corresponding to the winning to the specific winning hole 65a is executed (S1111). . Details of the winning process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the winning process (S1111) ends, an abnormality process is executed to determine whether the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was discharged normally (S1112), and this process ends. The details of this abnormality processing (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1106). This jackpot action setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning hole 65a according to the number of rounds.

When the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) is started, first, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1201), and then it is determined whether it is time to start one round (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S1202: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1202 that the current round is not the first round, the process of S1203 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1204. In the process of S1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1204), and the process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third pattern display device 81 (see S4404 in FIG. 48). Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.

By executing this jackpot action setting process (see FIG. 38), it is possible to open the specific prize winning opening 65a in each round of jackpot, and to set the special discharge channel 65e2 to be passable in the first round. can. As a result, in the big hits A to D, the ball almost certainly passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 just by hitting the right hand in the first round, so after the end of the big hit, the variable probability mode (variable state of special symbols and , It is possible to shift to the time saving state of the normal pattern). Also, in the case of the big hits E and F, although the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON in the first round, as described above, the opening period of the opening and closing door 65f1 is extremely short (0.2 seconds), Since it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during one round, the possibility of the ball passing through the variable probability switch 65e3 is almost zero. Therefore, when either of the jackpots E or F is reached, the normal mode can be set after the jackpot ends. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol, in which one of the types of jackpots A to C is determined in the case of a big win, is a lottery advantageous to the player, and when a big win occurs, the probability is high (95%). A lottery for the second special symbol, in which either the jackpot E or F is determined by the ratio), can be a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S1110). This jackpot end process (S1110) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1301). In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON (S1301: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big hit, so the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. The state after the jackpot is set to the variable probability mode (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the variable probability setting flag 203h is off (S1301: No), the process of S1302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1303. Since the variable probability flag 203g is reset to off at the start of the big hit (see S219 in FIG. 28), the variable probability flag 203g is turned off after the big hit by skipping the processing of S1302. That is, the normal mode is set after the end of the jackpot.

In the process of S1303, a state command is set based on the state of the probability variation flag 203g (S1303). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control is performed. It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the game state storage area 223h according to the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Next, both the flag 203r during the big hit and the variable probability setting flag 203h are set to OFF (S1304), and the process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 39), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S1401). Here, the round effective period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S1401, if it is not the round effective period (S1401: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that the current round valid period (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1402), If winning is detected (S1402: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1403), and a winning command indicating that a winning to the specific winning port 65a is detected is set. (S1404), the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if winning to the specific winning hole 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the processes of S1403 and S1404 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1405.

In the processing of S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405). On the other hand, in the process of S1405, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406). (S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. In the processing of S1406, if the current jackpot is a jackpot A to D, it is determined that the round time has passed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, and if the jackpots are E or F, the round starts. It is determined that the round time has passed when 0.2 seconds have passed since.

In the process of S1407, closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and a closing command indicating that closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning port 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S1409). (Probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to OFF (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is the closing due to the completion of a round other than the first round (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is turned on is not set, the process of S1410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1411.

In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the variable probability effective flag 203n, and the round end flag 203t are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. Further, when it is determined in the process of S1405 that the value of the winning number counter is 6 or less (S1405: No), and in the process of S1406 it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1406: No), S1407 ∼S1411 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1412.

In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag 203t is ON (S1412), and if the round end flag 203t is OFF (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag 203t is ON in the process of S1412 (S1412: Yes), then it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203n is ON (S1416). In the processing of S1416, if the variable probability effective flag 203n is off (S1416: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probability variable effective flag 203n is on (S1416: No), 1 is added to the value of the probability variable effective timer 203o (S1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203o is the upper limit value ( S1418). Then, if the value of the variable probability valid timer 203o is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1413, and the variable probability switch 65e3 is monitored to update the variable probability setting flag 203h. Thereby, if the variable probability effective timer 203o is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, so the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time for hitting the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being imparted by illegally passing the ball through the variable probability switch 65e3.

On the other hand, if the value of the probability variable effective timer 203o is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203n and the round end flag 203t are set to OFF (S1419), and the value of the probability variable effective timer 203o is reset (S1420 ), the process ends.

Also, in the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1413), and if the ball has not passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1413: No), the process proceeds to S1414. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passage counter 203i (S1414), the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1413), and this processing exit.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormality process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was discharged normally. This process is for

In the abnormality process (S1112), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S1501). On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1502).

In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203p (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203k is ON (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203k is off (S1504: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203k is ON (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is updated by adding 1 (S1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), then the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the probability variable passage counter 203i and the value of the discharge number counter 203p) wins. It is determined whether the number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

In the processing of S1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally entering the ball into the special discharge flow path 65e2 and passing through the variable probability switch 54e3.

On the other hand, in the process of S1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is reset (S1510). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203p, and the variable probability passing counter 203i are reset (S1511), and the process ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 41), the occurrence of a problem such as ball clogging occurring inside the variable prize winning device 65 and the ball entering the specific prize winning port 65a not being discharged normally. Early detection and notification are possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the small winning control process (S1005) will be described. As described above, this small winning control process is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the case of the small winning state.

In this small hit control process (see FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit (S1601). An opening command indicating the opening of the hit is set (S1602), the small hit medium flag 203s is set to ON (S1603), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S1601: No), then it is determined whether it is during the small hit (S1604), and if it is determined that it is not during the small hit (S1604 : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1604, if it is determined that the small winning is in progress (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a based on the small winning ( S1605), if it is time to start the opening operation (S1605: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (opening of the opening/closing door 65f1) is set (S1606), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the opening operation start timing (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the ending period start timing (S1607), and if it is the ending period start timing (S1607: Yes), set an ending command indicating that the small winning ending period has started (S1608), and terminate this process.

Also, in the process of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1607: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S1609), and if it is the end timing of the small hit (S1609: Yes), set the small hit medium flag 203s to OFF (S1610), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1609: No), the small win middle winning process for determining the end of the open period of the small hit is executed (S1611). The details of this small hit medium winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the small hit medium winning process (S1611) is completed, an abnormal process is executed to determine whether the number of balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a matches the number of discharged balls (S1612), and this process ends. do. Since this abnormal process (S1612) is the same process as the abnormal process (see FIG. 41) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), details thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the small winning middle winning process (S1611) for determining the end of the small winning opening period will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the small winning medium winning process (S1611). In the small hit middle winning process (S1611), first, it is determined whether or not it is during the round valid period of the small hit (S1701), and if it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S1701: No), this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning of the ball into the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1702), and the winning of the ball is detected. If so (S1702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1702 that the winning for the specific winning hole 65a is not detected (S1702: No), the process of S1703 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1704.

In the process of S1704, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704). It is determined whether or not (S1705). In the process of S1705, when it is determined that the round time has not passed (S1705: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the opening period of the small hit. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1704 that the value of the prize number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704: Yes), and if it is determined in the process of S1705 that the round time has elapsed (S1705: Yes) , means that the end condition of the opening period of the small win is established, so that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1706), and the process is terminated.

It should be noted that it is almost impossible to win seven or more balls into the specific winning opening 65a during the round time of 0.2 seconds, which is the small winning round time. After the winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 second, the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 52. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 44, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. 45) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 45), it executes power-off processing in S4116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, in a specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written by the process of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S1504 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the process is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

In the process of S4002, if the power-off processing flag is ON (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of S4116, It is started when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

In the process of S4005, if it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data ( S4006), and the process proceeds to S4008. By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. . An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 45). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is after a power failure has occurred, and the process is started in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial values of the RAM 223 are set (S4010). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

After the processing of S4010, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 analyzes the notification contents of the state command set in the start-up processing (see FIG. 31) (S4011), and according to the analysis result, the game state storage area 223h data is updated (S4012). As a result, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time the power is turned on. After the process of S4012, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example, and the process of S4008 is performed via the processes from S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processing of S4010 to S4013 is executed, and the process proceeds to the main processing.

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed because S4102 to S4110 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4111 and the variable display setting processing in S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4112 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4102 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol pending ball number counter 223c is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command is set for the display control device 114.例文帳に追加By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S4107 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the process of S4110 is completed, the process proceeds to S4111. In the process of S4111, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S4111). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . In the processing of S4113, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S4115), and the power is turned off. Processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. This process is for

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S4201). In the process of S4201, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command is extracted (S4203), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4204). When the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4204, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4207). . Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received pending ball number command, that is, the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 The value of (the number of times of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1), or the value of the second special design reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding the variable display based on the second special design N2) is extracted, and this is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4208). In addition, in the processing of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the updated second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is set. . After the process of S4208 ends, this process ends.

Here, the pending ball number command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), or when a lottery for special symbols is performed. Since it is transmitted, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol The value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of S4208 is executed, the values of the updated first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are displayed for notification to the display control device 114. Number commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S4207, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from main controller 110 (S4209). When it is determined that the state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223h is updated according to the received command (S4210). That is, when the variable probability mode is notified based on the information corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command (whether the variable probability state), the lower two bits of the gaming state storage area 223h are set to "11B". On the other hand, when the normal mode is notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223h are set to "00B". Thereby, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S4211). In the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning information command processing for performing control according to the prefetch result of the new start winning notified by the winning information command is executed. (S4212), and the process ends. The details of this winning information command process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then whether or not a command related to the jackpot (opening command, round number command, or ending command) has been received (S4213). Then, when it is determined that a command related to the jackpot has been received (S4213: Yes), a jackpot-related process for executing control corresponding to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S4214). End the process. The details of this jackpot related process (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4213, when it is determined that the command related to the big win has not been received (S4213: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4215), and this processing ends. In the processing of S4215, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, details of the winning information command process (S4212) described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the winning information command process (S4212).

In the winning information command process (see FIG. 47), first, the information notified by the received winning command (the type of entrance where the new starting winning was detected and the information indicating the lottery result) is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S4301). When the processing of S4301 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the information notified by the winning information command this time is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302). In the processing of S4302, when it is determined that the information notified this time is not the winning information of the second special symbol (the winning information of the first special symbol) (S4302: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information of this time is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpots A to D are currently being executed (S4303), and the jackpot If it is determined that any of A to D is being executed (S4303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ending period is in progress (S4304). selects the aspect of the key 813 in the presentation of discovering the key 813 (see FIG. 8(b)) (S4305). In the process of S4305, if the current winning information is winning information corresponding to the lottery result of losing (minor win), the rate of selecting the luxurious mode key 813 increases, and the winning information of this time is the big wins E, F. If the prize-winning information corresponds to , the ratio of selecting the poor-looking key 813 increases. When the processing of S4305 is completed, an effect of discovering the key 813 of the mode selected in the processing of S4305 is set (S4306), and this processing is completed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4303, if it is determined that the jackpots A to D are not being executed (S4303: No), and if it is determined that the ending period of the jackpots A to D is in progress in the processing of S4304 (S4304: Yes) , means that the starting winning for the second ball entrance 640 has been detected as a result of hitting right during the period when the player should hit left. A warning effect for notifying the person is executed (S4307), and the process ends. This warning effect (not shown) is more strongly left-handed to the player than the image of the characters "left-handed" and the left-pointing arrow displayed in the display area HR1 during execution of the door-breaking mode effect. is executed. Specifically, for example, the characters "left-handed" are displayed in a large size on the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the voice "please return to left-handed" is repeatedly played at maximum volume. be done. By executing this warning effect, it is possible to restrain (prevent) the player from hitting the right hand in a situation other than during the execution of the big wins A to D. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to hit to the right during the normal mode or the variable probability mode, and the continuous execution of the lottery of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous.

By executing this winning information command process, it is possible to appropriately set the aspect of the key 813 to be discovered during the big win based on the new winning information of the second special symbol. Therefore, during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, based on the state of the key 813, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation of the player to be in the probability variable mode, so that the player's game during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. can improve interest in

In addition, in the first embodiment, the selection ratio of the mode of the key 813 is variable depending on whether or not the winning information of the second special symbol newly notified by the winning information command is out (small hit). However, it is configured to select the mode of the key 813 based on not only the winning information based on the new winning information command but also the winning information of the second special symbol already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. good too. Specifically, for example, before the current winning information command is received, among the winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223a, there is winning information corresponding to either jackpot E or F. If it is included, regardless of the result of the lottery for the prize information of this time, the configuration may be such that the ratio of selecting the key 813 in a poor (tattered) manner is high. By configuring in this way, the more the keys 813 in the tattered state continue, the higher the possibility that the held ball of the second special symbol includes the big hits E and F. It can be estimated more accurately whether the jackpots E and F are included in the retained balls. Also, for example, when all of the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a before receiving the prize information command of this time and the prize information of this time are lost (minor win), the selection ratio is It is also possible to provide an aspect (for example, an aspect of the diamond key 813) that increases (or is selected only in this case). By configuring in this way, when the mode is displayed, it is possible to further heighten expectations for shifting to the variable probability mode.

In the first embodiment, when the winning information command corresponding to the second ball entrance 640 is received outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the warning effect is executed. isn't it. Even when a new ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected in a state where the second special pattern reserved ball has reached the upper limit value, a warning performance is executed outside the execution period of the big wins A to D. may be configured. In particular, during the ending of the jackpots A to D, or during the execution of the first variable display, there is a high possibility that the second special symbol holding ball is at the upper limit. In such a case, if the player hits right, a new start prize will be generated for the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol may be executed five times or more after the big win. There is a possibility that the player may lose money. On the other hand, if a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the player will lose money by setting a warning effect. can be suppressed (prevented).

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the jackpot-related processing (S4214) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this jackpot-related processing (S4214).

In jackpot-related processing, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S4401), and if an opening command has been received (S4401: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S4402). The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the big win. When the process of S4402 ends, the jackpot related process (see FIG. 48) ends. It should be noted that the opening command this time is a command corresponding to the opening of one of the big hits E, F, or small hits, and if the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed, the door breakthrough mode The performance continues as is. In this case, the opening command itself may not be output to the display control device 114, or the display control device 114 side may determine whether or not the door breaking mode effect is being executed, and select the effect mode. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the opening command has not been received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4403). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4403: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S4404), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number. (S4405). The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After the processing of S4405, this processing ends. As in the case where the opening command is received, when it is time to start a new round of the jackpots E and F during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the door breakthrough mode effect is continued as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the round number command has not been received (S4403: No), then it is determined whether or not the closing command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4406). If it is determined that a close command has been received (S4406: Yes), close command processing for performing control according to the situation in which the close command was received is executed (S4406), and this processing ends. The details of this close command processing (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in the process of S4405 that the closing command has not been received (S4405: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4407). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4407: Yes), ending command processing for performing control according to the ending command type and situation is executed (S4408), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the ending command has not been received (S4407: No), this process ends. By executing this jackpot-related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to jackpots.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, details of the closing command processing (S4406) described above will be described. In this closing command process (S4406), first, it is determined whether the type of the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots A to D (S4501), and if it is determined to be one of the jackpots A to D ( S4501: Yes), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is other than jackpots A to D (it is either jackpot E or F) (S4501: No), then the value of breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0. (that is, whether the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed), and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed). ) (S4502: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4502: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4503). , it is determined whether the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after the subtraction has become 0 (that is, whether it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect) (S4504). In the processing of S4504, if it is determined that the counter value after the subtraction is 1 or more (S4504: No), this processing is terminated as it is in order to continue the door breaking mode effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after the subtraction has become 0 (S4504: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, so the remaining period until the end of the jackpot is reached. The result display is set (S4505), and this processing ends. Incidentally, the result display indicates the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, such as the total number of prize balls paid out by repeating the big win and the variable probability mode, the number of big wins, and the like. By setting this result display, the player can easily grasp the number of times the player has won the jackpot, the number of winning balls, and the like, so that the player can have a sense of accomplishment.

Next, details of the ending command processing (S4408) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This ending command process (S4408) is, as described above, a process for performing control according to the jackpot type, game situation, etc., when an ending command is received.

In this ending command process, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command indicating the ending of the small hit (S4601), and if it is determined that it is the ending of the small hit (S4601: Yes), the small hit (S4602) to execute a small winning control process for performing control according to the timing to end, and ends this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, if it is determined that it is not the ending of the small hit (S4601: No), the ending command of this time is output to notify that the ending machine of the big hit has started. Therefore, it is determined whether the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots A to D (S4603).

In the processing of S4603, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is not one of the jackpots A to D (S4603: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots A to D (S4603: Yes), the winning prize information of the second special symbol is read from the winning prize information storage area 223a (S4604), and the read winning prize It is determined whether or not a big hit D is included in the lottery result of the second special symbol reserved balls indicated by the information. As described above, the jackpot D is the only one among the jackpots of the second special symbol that can obtain a large amount of prize balls, and is an advantageous jackpot type in which the probability variable mode is set almost after the jackpot.

In the process of S4605, when it is determined that the jackpot D is included in the hold (S4605: Yes), a door breakthrough mode in a special mode in which it is notified that the jackpot has been hit during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. An effect is set (S4606), and this processing ends. As described above, after the big hits A to D are finished, basically, it is advantageous for the player if all the held balls of the second special symbol come off. This is because if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, it will be either a disadvantageous big win E or F with a high probability (95% ratio). However, when the lottery of the second special symbols results in a big win, there is a case where the big win D is advantageous to the player with a low probability (5% ratio). In this case, a large amount of prize balls can be acquired, and the door-breaking mode effect is set again after the big win, which is more advantageous for the player than in the case of the big wins E and F. Therefore, in this case, by setting the door breaking mode effect of a special notification mode, the player can easily understand that the jackpot D has been achieved.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4605, if it is determined that the big hit D is not included in the second special symbol held ball (S4605: No), the value of the breaking effect counter 223g is set to 4 (S4607), Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit is included in the held ball of the second special symbol (S4608). In the processing of S4608, if it is determined that a jackpot is included, it means that either the jackpot E or F will occur during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and the mode will shift to the normal mode after the jackpot ends. Finally, the door breakthrough mode effect is set in such a manner that the fall to the normal mode is announced (the door breakthrough failure mode) (S4609), and this processing ends. It should be noted that the same presentation time of 5.8 seconds is set as the presentation time of the door breakthrough mode presentation regardless of whether or not a big win is included. This 5.8 seconds is the period from the start of the ending mechanism to the end of the small hit based on the 4th reserved ball when all the reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol are lost (small hit). period. That is, in order to make it difficult for the player to guess whether or not there is a big hit in the reserved balls from the performance time, the performance time of the door breakthrough mode performance is set to be the same time (4.8 seconds) regardless of the result. .

In the processing of S4608, when it is determined that the big hit is not included in the reserved balls (S4608: No), the door breakthrough mode effect is finally set to inform the transition to the variable probability mode (S4610 ), the process ends. By executing this ending command process (see FIG. 50), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the content of the second special symbol reserved ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the above-described small winning end processing (S4602) will be described. This small hit end time processing (S4602) is a process executed when it is determined that the received ending command is a small winning ending command in the ending command process (see FIG. 50).

As shown in FIG. 51, in the small hit end processing (see FIG. 51), first, whether the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0 (that is, whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) or not. (S4701), and if the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (S4701: No), it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed, and the process is terminated as it is. In addition, the case where the small win occurs outside the execution period of the door breakthrough mode effect is the case where the player intentionally or negligently hits right outside the execution period of the big wins A to D (the period during which the left hit should be performed). be. In this case, since the warning effect has been set by the processing of S4307 of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 47) when the start winning for the second ball entrance 640 is detected, the player has already returned to left-handed hitting. It is thought that there are Therefore, at the end of the small hit, control such as performing a warning effect again is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the repetition of the warning effect despite the return to left-handed hitting.

In the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (S4701: Yes), then 1 is subtracted from the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S4702), and the counter value after the subtraction is 0. (S4703). If it is determined in the process of S4703 that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g has become 0 (S4703), the door breakthrough mode effect ends with a lottery result (small hit) (that is, all the door breakthrough mode effects Since it means that the variation is out), the effect mode indicating the entry into the probability variation mode is set (S4704), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4703, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S4703: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect. End the process.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4801). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4801: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S4806. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4802), and then S4803 of the command judgment process (see FIG. 46). In the process of , the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S4803).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S4804). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4805), and the process proceeds to S4806. In the process of S4805, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area.

In the process of S4806, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S4806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4806: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S4806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S4807), and then the processing of S1706 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) , the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4808). Next, based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4808, a display stop type command is set (S4809), and this process ends. By receiving this stop type command for display, the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to stop and display the third pattern in the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display. be done.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 66. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 53) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 54, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 64(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 64A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 22 is drawn. Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 55B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third pattern display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 55(a). FIG. 55(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 55(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 55(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 26, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A to F, small hit, front and rear out reach, front and back reach other than front and rear out, complete out ) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 57(a). FIG. 57(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 57(b). FIG. 57(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A to F, small hit, reach out, complete out) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55(b)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Finally, the stop pattern after the variable effect is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the command is displayed. If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description is continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command process (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 58(b). FIG. 58(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description is continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. .

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A and B is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set in S7002 is used to determine the The type of background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 for normal use or video RAM 236 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no back image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). Otherwise (S6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. 60(b). FIG. 60(b) is a flow chart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 57(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 61, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are specified. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 61, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and for each sprite, Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set the drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 64(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 64(b). FIG. 64B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 has A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 65) (see S7501: No in FIG. 64A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the processing of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer process in this way, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process. When the received stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 26) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task process (S6304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ) and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Also, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 55(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the ball is hit to the left (a game method in which a ball is shot toward the flow path on the left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front), the ball is likely to enter the position. When the first ball entry hole 64 arranged in the right side of the game board 13 is hit to the right (a game method in which a ball is shot toward the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball. and a second ball entrance 640 arranged at a position where it is difficult for the ball to enter. If the lottery for the second special symbol, which is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, results in a big win, it will be disadvantageous to the player (almost no prize balls can be obtained during the big win). After the big win, there is a high possibility that the game will shift to a disadvantageous normal mode). It is configured to increase the possibility that it will be advantageous for players (a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in the big win and the transition to the advantageous probability variable mode after the big win). As a result, the player can be made to think that the lottery for the first special symbol, which is advantageous, is executed rather than the lottery for the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous.

In addition, in the right channel of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, there is provided a specific prize winning opening 65a that is opened during a big win and pays out a large number (11) of prize balls each time a ball enters the game. Similar to the second ball entry hole 640, this specific winning hole 65a allows a ball to enter (easy to enter) when hitting right, and does not allow a ball to enter (difficult to enter) when hitting left. It is set at a position where Therefore, it is necessary to hit the ball to the right in order to make the ball enter the specific winning hole 65a and obtain the prize ball during the jackpot. As described above, when hitting to the right, the ball also enters the second ball entrance 640, so after the big hit, the second special symbol reserved ball can be accumulated to the upper limit. For this reason, after the end of the big win, it is possible to create a state in which the lottery of the second special symbols, which are disadvantageous when the big win occurs, is continuously executed. A game can be played in the hope that all the reserved balls with patterns will come off (small hits). In other words, in a general pachinko machine, it is a favorable phenomenon for a player to win a jackpot again in the reserve after the end of the jackpot (so-called continuous play in the reserve), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, It is possible to allow the player to play an advantage in anticipation that the reservation will not occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property different from that of a general pachinko machine, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, each time the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases during the execution of jackpots A to D, the lottery result of the increased reserved balls is read in advance, and a mode according to the result of the read is performed. is configured to execute That is, it is configured to execute an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result will be lost (small win). More specifically, an effect is executed in which the adventurer 811 acquires the key 813 in a manner corresponding to the result of prefetching of the lottery result of the increased reserved balls. With this effect, the player can guess from the mode of the displayed key 813 whether or not to shift to the variable probability mode during the big win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from becoming a mere work to get the prize balls, so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, from the ending period of the big hits A to D until the fluctuation time of all the fluctuation display based on the second special symbol reserved ball passes, the second special symbol reserved ball An effect is executed for informing the player whether or not there are jackpots E and F in the game. That is, even after all the variable display based on the second special symbol reserved ball is finished, the effect for suggesting whether the game state remains the probability variable mode or falls to the normal mode is executed. . By adopting a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over the ending period and a plurality of variable displays after the big win, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, there is a high probability of a small hit. The open period of the specific winning opening 65a in the case of a small win and the open period of the opening/closing door 65f1 in each round of the big wins E and F are set to be the same (0.2 seconds). Furthermore, the length of the interval period after the end of the 1st to 4th rounds of the big hits E and F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. . By configuring in this way, even if any of the 1st to 4th reserved balls of the second special pattern is a lottery result corresponding to the big hit E or F, opening and closing until the door breaking mode effect is completed. A series of opening and closing operations of the door 65f1 can be made the same as when the variable probability mode is notified (when all the second special symbol holding balls are small hits). That is, regardless of whether or not the big hits E and F are included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol, the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 from the end of the big hit to the end of the door breakthrough mode effect. , closing for 1 second and opening for 0.2 seconds four times. Therefore, it is difficult to determine from the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 after the end of the big win whether the opening/closing operation is due to a succession of small wins or the opening/closing motion is due to a big win E or F. You can pay attention to the door breakthrough mode production until the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the specification may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. By configuring in this way, it is possible to win a big hit by the variable display of the first special symbol before the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous, so that during the execution of the door breakthrough mode performance. , It is possible to make the left hand hit more aggressively. In this case, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, a predetermined ratio (for example, 10% ratio) may be configured to determine a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the lottery of the first special symbol one or more times during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol, so that the chance of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is increased. can be formed.

In the first embodiment, the left-hand shot is notified from the start of the ending period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the final round of the jackpot, the number of balls remaining until the end of the final round is displayed, and the message "Left-handed ball with the remaining ○ balls" is displayed. , etc., so that the player can immediately switch to left-handed play after the condition for ending the final round is met. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 after the end of the big win.

In the first embodiment, in the case of the time saving state of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design is uniformly 3 seconds, and the opening period of the electric accessory 64a in the case of winning the normal design is 1 second. Although it is configured to be set twice, it is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the jackpot, only the fluctuation time of the first normal symbol may be set to a longer time (for example, 10 seconds) than the period until all the fluctuations based on the held balls of at least the second special symbol are completed. good. By constructing in this way, since the normal pattern does not win during execution of the door breakthrough mode performance, it becomes a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern from the opening time of the normal pattern, and the normal pattern is in a low probability state. It can be made difficult to determine whether the player has fallen or whether the time-saving state of the normal pattern is maintained. Therefore, the player can be made to pay more attention to the result of the door breaking mode effect.

In the first embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, it is configured such that it is almost a small hit, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the second special pattern is lost, instead of being configured to be simply lost, the variation time in the case of a big win is varied according to the number of times of variation after the big win, and a door breakthrough mode is provided. The period from the start of the production to the start of the second special symbol jackpot, and the period from the start of the door breakthrough mode production to the end of all the fluctuation displays corresponding to the second special symbol being missed four times. It is good also as a structure which matches with the period (the period until it shifts to probability variable mode). More specifically, when the first lottery of the second special pattern after the big hit results in a big hit, the fluctuation time is set to 4 seconds, and when the second lottery of the second special pattern results in a big hit. , 3 seconds is set as the variation time, and if the third lottery of the second special pattern results in a big hit, the variation time is set to 2 seconds, and the fourth lottery of the second special pattern results in a big hit. In this case, the variable time may be set to 1 second. By configuring in this way, the total variation time is 4 seconds (1 second x 4) when all the 4 second special symbol holding balls are lost, and in the case of a big hit on the way, It is possible to match the period (4 seconds) until the jackpot starts. Therefore, during the period of 4 seconds after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the door breaking mode effect, even if the jackpot with the second special symbol is included in the reserved balls, the specific winning opening 65a is not opened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that it is known from the operation of the specific winning port 65a whether or not to shift to the variable probability mode before the door breakthrough mode effect ends. In addition, the period from the start of the door breakthrough mode production to the start of the second special symbol jackpot is a variable display corresponding to four second special symbol deviations after the start of the door breakthrough mode production. If the duration is longer than the period until the end of all, at least the jackpot will not start during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, when the second special symbol is simply a big hit, the variation time may be uniformly set to be equal to or greater than the total sum of the variation times of the variation display corresponding to the second special symbol being missed four times.

In the first embodiment, the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the 1st to 4th rounds in the jackpots E and F is the same (0.2 seconds) as the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the small winnings. However, it may be set arbitrarily as long as the player cannot distinguish between the open period of the big win and the open period of the small win by feeling the difference. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is disadvantageous and the lottery for the first special symbol is advantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery for the second special symbol may be advantageous, and the lottery for the first special symbol may be advantageous. Then, when the lottery of the second special pattern is a big hit, the door breakthrough mode production is executed to succeed in breaking through the door, and when the lottery of the second special pattern is all lost, the breakthrough of the door fails. You may comprise so that the production|presentation to perform may be performed. As a result, it is possible to realize more easily understandable game characteristics such as a big win if the door is successfully broken through. Furthermore, in this case, the first ball entrance 64 may be removed and only the second ball entrance 640 may be provided. That is, it may be configured such that only the lottery for the second special symbol is executed.

In the first embodiment, it becomes difficult to know whether the lottery of the second special symbol resulted in a big win or a small win while the variation based on the held balls of the second special symbol after the big win is being executed. Although the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set as above, making it difficult to understand whether it is a big win or a small win is not limited to the variable display based on the second special symbol held ball. For example, even in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small win and an operation similar to the small win (the same operation or an operation indistinguishable from the small win by the player) are set. good.

In the first embodiment, the ending period of the jackpot is started to determine whether or not all the reserved balls of the second special symbol reserved during the jackpot will come off (small hit) (whether to shift to the variable probability mode). , until the lottery of all the second special symbols is completed, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in at least a part of the transition to the variable probability mode, it may be configured to notify the transition to the variable probability mode during the ending period. That is, at the start of the ending period, the lottery result of the second special symbol reserved ball is read in advance, and if it is determined that all the prediction results are out (small hit), the probability changes during the ending period of the big hit with a predetermined probability. It may be configured to notify the transition to the mode. By configuring in this way, the player can be notified more quickly of the transition to the variable probability mode, so that the player can be pleased. In addition, when notifying the transition to the variable probability mode during the ending period, it may be possible to execute an effect of breaking through four doors at once, or to execute an effect different from the normal door breakthrough mode effect. good too. Here, as an effect different from the normal door breakthrough mode effect, for example, a structure in which the theme song of the adventurer 811 is played may be executed, or the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be blacked out. After that, an effect may be executed in which the characters "variable probability mode confirmed" appear on the display screen. Furthermore, when the production that confirms the transition to the variable probability mode is executed during the ending period, the production is performed until the variation based on the second special symbol holding ball is completed (that is, until the variable probability mode is started) ) may be configured to continue execution. By configuring in this way, for the player who knew the transition to the definite variable mode early (during the ending period), in the remaining period until the transition to the definite variable mode, for the transition to the definite variable mode You can immerse yourself in the afterglow. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel satisfied.

Furthermore, before the ending period, it may be configured to notify the transition to the variable probability mode. More specifically, when the start winning corresponding to the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected and the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated based on the winning information command , It is determined whether all the winning information of the second special symbol is out (small hit). Then, when all of the winning information is lost (small win), it may be configured to execute an effect indicating a shift to the variable probability mode at that time. As an effect indicating the transition to the variable probability mode, for example, an effect in which the adventurer 811 discovers the key 813 in a special (premium) mode may be executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the music played inside is changed to a special (premium) one.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 84. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the variable probability switch 65e3 of the special discharge flow path 65e2 When the ball passes through, the game state after the big win is set to the probability variable mode. In addition, as long as it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability mode and the jackpot are repeated unlimitedly.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the game state after the big win is predetermined for each type of big win. In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive times of the probability variable state of the special pattern, and when the upper limit is reached, even if the probability variable jackpot is won, the special pattern is set to the low probability state after the big win. there is

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, in order to prevent the player from hitting right during normal times (states other than during the jackpot), when the start winning for the second ball entrance 640 is detected during normal times, It was set as the structure which performs warning production.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the electric accessory 640b is provided for the second ball entrance 640, and the ball normally enters the second ball entrance 640 while being blocked by the electric accessory 640b. It is configured so that it is difficult to In addition, during the big win state, by controlling the electric accessory 640b provided accompanying the second ball entrance 640 to be easily opened, the second special It is configured so that the reserved balls of the pattern are accumulated to the upper limit number. By providing the electric accessory 640b in association with the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a provided in association with the first ball entrance 64 in the first embodiment is eliminated. .

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. There are some changes. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 67, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67 , in the second embodiment, a normal entrance (through gate) 67 is set in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 . A variable winning device 650 and a second ball entrance 640 are provided downstream of the normal ball entrance 67 . The variable prize winning device 650 is provided in place of the variable prize winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and serves as a prize winning port from which 13 prize balls are paid out each time a ball enters the specific prize winning port 650a of the variable prize winning device 650. It is configured. The specific prize winning port 650a is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can be entered (easy) and a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered (difficult), and is opened in each jackpot round. state.

As shown in FIG. 67, the second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be variable between a closed position that prevents the ball from entering the second ball inlet 640 and an open position that allows the ball to enter. A case of being variable is exemplified. Although the details will be described later, this electric accessory 640a is controlled so that the ball is easier to enter in the normal symbol low probability state than in the normal symbol high probability state (time saving state). will be More specifically, in the high probability state of the normal design, although the hit probability of the normal design is slightly higher than the low probability state of the normal design (199/240 → 200/240), the fluctuation time of the normal design is long. (3 seconds → 30 seconds), and the opening period of the electric accessory 640b in the case of winning the normal symbol becomes shorter (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 seconds × 1 time). Therefore, as a whole, it becomes more difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the high-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the probability variable mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the second special is disadvantageous. It is possible to suppress execution of lottery of symbols. In addition, during the big win set in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the balls are likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that the number of retained balls can be easily stored up to the upper limit during the big win. .

By attaching the electric accessory 640b to the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 in the first embodiment is eliminated. A winning device 655 for a special figure 1 small prize is provided below the first ball entrance 64 . In this special figure 1 small winning prize device 655, when the first special symbol lottery results in a small win, the special figure 1 small winning prize opening 655a is set in an open state, so that the ball enters the inside. It becomes possible to enter the ball. In the second embodiment, when the variable mode is entered, the probability of becoming a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is greatly increased (1/1000 → 989/1000), and the left hand is hit during the variable mode. The number of balls consumed in the case is equal to the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the special figure 1 small winning prize opening 655a after becoming a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol. is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the game efficiency when hitting to the left during the variable probability mode without using the electric accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, the distribution member 660 (see FIG. 2) provided in the first embodiment is deleted, and the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 downstream side is branched in approximately three directions. That is, the flow path toward the second ball entrance 640, the flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and the out port 66 without going to any of these (the second ball entrance 640, the specific winning hole 650a) It is branched into a flow path that flows down toward By configuring in this way, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to cause part of the ball hit toward the specific winning hole 650a by hitting to the right during the big win to enter the second ball entering hole 640. can. Therefore, it is possible to have a configuration in which the second special symbol reserved balls are accumulated up to the upper limit number during the big win. As a result, even in the second embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, which is executed after the big win, is all lost.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, a flow path toward the second ball entrance 640, a flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and a flow path toward the out port 66 are formed by a plurality of nails. and Therefore, by adjusting the nail, the hall clerk can adjust the ratio of balls distributed to the second ball entrance 640 and the ratio of balls distributed to the specific prize winning port 650a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 with higher convenience can be realized because it can be adjusted in accordance with the management policy of the hall.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68-72. First, referring to FIG. 68(a), the first winning random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described.

FIG. 68(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the second embodiment, the range of possible values of the first winning type counter C1 is expanded to 0-999.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the low-probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 9" is defined as the range of judgment values for judging the jackpot (see 202a1 in FIG. 68(a)). It should be noted that, as in the first embodiment, the determination value for the big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, "10 ~ 998" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in Fig. 68 (a)), the determination value determined to be a small hit of the first special symbol "999" is defined as the range. In addition, "10, 11" is defined as the range of determination values determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 68(a)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. "12 to 999" is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 68(a)).

On the other hand, in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol, the range of the judgment value that becomes a big hit, the judgment value that becomes an outlier, and the range of the judgment value that becomes a small hit are all the first special symbols and the second It is common with 2 special designs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(a), "0 to 10" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a jackpot (see 202a4 in FIG. 68(a)), and determination to be determined to be out "11" is specified as a value (see 202a5 in FIG. 68(a)), and "12 to 999" is specified as a determination value for determining a small hit (see 202a6 in FIG. 68(a)).

Thus, in the second embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is made different between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol. , the probability of getting a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is extremely high. As a result, the number of balls consumed when left-handed during the probability variable mode and the lottery of the first special symbol become a small hit, and the ball enters the special figure 1 small winning prize opening 655a. It is configured to be equal to the number of awarded balls to be paid out. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the game efficiency when hitting to the left during the variable probability mode without using the electric accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

The small hit of the second special pattern and the small hit of the first special pattern are configured so that the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is different, and the small hit of the first special pattern has more prizes. It is configured to be able to acquire a ball. On the other hand, in the small win of the second special symbol, as in the first embodiment, the specific winning opening 650a is opened only for 0.2 seconds, making it difficult for the player to win the prize ball. Therefore, if the ball is hit to the right at normal times, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and even if a big win is made, a disadvantageous jackpot type is easily determined, and even if a small win is made, a prize ball is awarded. Since it can hardly be obtained, it is disadvantageous to the player compared to the case of hitting left. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right normally.

Next, with reference to FIG.68(b), the 1st winning classification selection table 202b in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG.68(b) is the figure which showed the defined content of the 1st winning classification selection table 202b in the 2nd Embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68(b), in the second embodiment, three types of jackpots A2 to C2 are provided as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, and jackpot D2 is provided as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. , E2 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 68(b), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in association with "jackpot A2". (See 202b1 in FIG. 68(b)). This "jackpot A2" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 16, and the definite variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot A2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A2" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot A2" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds elapse or until 6 balls are won. Therefore, the player can almost certainly win the maximum number of balls (6 balls) into the specific winning hole 650a before 30 seconds elapse just by continuing to hit to the right in each round. , a large amount of prize balls can be obtained when the jackpot A2 is reached.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 69" in association with "jackpot B2" (see 202b2 in Fig. 68(b)). . This "jackpot B2" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 7, and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 counter values are "jackpot B2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B2" is determined. ratio is 60% (60/100). Like the "jackpot A2", the "jackpot B2" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds elapse or until six balls are won. Therefore, similarly to the "jackpot A2", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "jackpot C2" (see 202b3 in Fig. 68(b)). . This "jackpot C2" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 2, and the definite variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 30 counter values are the "jackpot C2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C2" is determined. ratio is 30% (30/100). Like the "jackpot A2" and the "jackpot B2", this "jackpot C2" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds elapse or until six balls are won. . Therefore, similarly to the "jackpot A" and the "jackpot B", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

In this way, when the lottery of the first special symbol wins a jackpot, prize balls for 2 rounds, 7 rounds, or 16 rounds can be paid out, and the game state after the jackpot ends is almost certainly changed to the probability variable mode. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player regardless of the type of jackpot. In addition, since 7 rounds and 16 rounds, which are relatively large numbers of rounds, are determined at a high rate (70%), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be obtained when the first special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to please the player when the big hit is played in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68(b), for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 4" in association with "big hit D2". (See 202b4 in FIG. 68(b)). This "jackpot D2" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 4, and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that becomes the "jackpot D2" is five, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot D2" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot D2" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 6 balls have been won in the specific prize winning opening 650a. Therefore, a relatively large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 68(b), for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 99" in association with "big hit E2". (See 202b5 in FIG. 68(b)). This "jackpot E2" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 4, and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 95 counter values are the "jackpot E2", so when the second special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot E2" is determined. ratio is 95% (95/100). Unlike other jackpot types, this "jackpot E2" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 0.2 seconds elapse or until 6 balls are won. Since it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning hole 650a for 0.2 seconds, the "jackpot E2" is a disadvantageous jackpot type in which no prize ball can be obtained. In addition, as described above, an upper limit (4 times) is provided for the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state of the special symbol, and when the jackpot occurs in a state where the upper limit number is reached, the game state after the jackpot ends regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to be in a disadvantageous normal mode. Therefore, if the "jackpot E" is reached, the player cannot win prize balls, and the number of times to shift to the normal mode is reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player.

Thus, in the second embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the prize ball cannot be obtained with a high probability (95% rate), and the remaining jackpot until the normal mode is set. It is configured to determine the jackpot type (jackpot E2) that reduces the number of times. That is, as in the first embodiment, if the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, the possibility of an unfavorable result for the player increases. Thus, a novel game property is realized in which a game can be played in the hope that the lottery result will be lost during the execution of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the end of the big win. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, details of the second winning random number table 202c in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 69, in the normal state of the normal symbols, "5 to 203" are defined as the judgment value for winning the normal symbols (see 202c1 in FIG. 69). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see 202c3 in FIG. 69). That is, the normal state (low-probability state) of normal symbols and the high-probability state of normal symbols differ only by one in the number of determination values determined to be hits of normal symbols. As a result, even in the normal state of the normal design, the probability of winning can be almost the same as that in the high probability state of the normal design.

In addition, as described above, in the high probability state of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design is longer than the normal state of the normal design (3 seconds → 30 seconds), and the electric power when the normal design hits The opening period of the accessory 640b is shortened (1 second×2 times→0.1 second×1 time). Therefore, as a whole, it becomes more difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the high-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the probability variable mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the second special is disadvantageous. It is possible to suppress execution of lottery of symbols. As a result, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in a situation other than during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and excessive disadvantage to the player can be suppressed. In addition, during the big win set in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the balls are likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that the number of retained balls can be easily stored up to the upper limit during the big win. .

Next, referring to FIG. 70, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 70, the configuration of the RAM 202 in the second embodiment is the configuration of the RAM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) with the addition of a variable probability limit counter 203aa and a breakthrough mode counter 203ab. There is a difference. Also, the variable probability setting flag 203h, the variable probability passage counter 203i, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the remaining ball timer 203m, the variable probability effective flag 203n, the variable probability effective timer 203o, and the discharge number counter 203p are omitted.

The variable probability limit counter 203aa is a counter that counts the remaining number of consecutive times of the variable probability state until the normal mode is set. This variable probability limit counter 203aa is set to 4, which is the maximum number of consecutive times of the variable probability state, when the normal mode is set as the state after the end of the jackpot (see S1314 in FIG. 78), and each time the variable probability jackpot ends , the value is decremented by 1 (see S1311 in FIG. 78). When the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa is updated to 0 at the end of the big win, the normal mode is set after the end of the big win.

Breakthrough mode counter 203ab is a counter that indicates the number of remaining fluctuations in door breakthrough mode production, and at the end of jackpot A2-D2, the number of held balls of the second special symbol is set as a counter value (see S1316 in FIG. 78). ), the value is decremented by 1 at the start of fluctuation and updated (see S324 in FIG. 73). In the second embodiment, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab (the remaining number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode effect ends) is included in the fluctuation pattern command and transmitted. When receiving the variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 reads the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab from the variation pattern command, and grasps the remaining number of variations until the door breakthrough mode effect is completed. In particular, since the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 does not back up the memory contents, if the power supply is interrupted during execution of the door breaking mode presentation, the progress of the door breaking mode presentation is controlled by the voice lamp after the power is restored. The device 113 side cannot grasp it.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the information corresponding to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command and output to the voice lamp control device 113, so that the door breakthrough mode effect is performed. Even if the power supply is interrupted during the execution and the memory contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are cleared, the door breaking mode presentation is executed by analyzing the first received variation pattern command after the power supply is restored. It is possible to grasp whether it is in progress and its progress status. As a result, even when the power supply is cut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode presentation, the presentation can be restarted from the continuation of the door breakthrough mode presentation after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the performance from being changed before and after the power is cut off, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the contents of the performance.

Next, referring to FIG. 71, a state transition method according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the game moves between three types of states: the normal mode, the door breakthrough mode, and the variable probability mode. In the second embodiment, the contents of the door breakthrough mode are changed from those in the first embodiment. Specifically, the door breakthrough mode of the first embodiment described above is a variable state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and shows only the state where the second special symbol reserved ball exists. In addition to this, in the second embodiment, the special symbol low-probability state, the normal symbol normal state, and the state in which the second special symbol reserved ball is present are also set as the door breakthrough mode. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the door breakthrough mode in which the variable state of the special pattern and the time saving state of the normal pattern are set is called the door breakthrough mode 1, the low probability state of the special pattern, and , The door breakthrough mode in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set is called the door breakthrough mode 2. Note that the door breakthrough mode 1 is shown on the middle left side of FIG. 71, and the door breakthrough mode 2 is shown on the middle left side of FIG.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 71, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another state only when a big win is achieved. Specifically, when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big hit, the mode is always shifted to the door breakthrough mode. As described above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for a relatively long time (up to 30 seconds) in each round of the jackpot. When the ball is hit, a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 as well. As a result, when the big win ends, the second special symbol reserved balls are accumulated up to the upper limit value, and after the big win the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1) is entered.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 71 , in the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough modes 1 and 2), basically the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, or the lottery of the second special symbol is all lost and the second When the number of reserved balls of 2 special symbols becomes 0, there is a possibility of shifting to another state. The transition destination state in the case of a big hit is common to the door breakthrough modes 1 and 2, but the transition destination state in the case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 is the door breakthrough mode 1. It is different from door breakthrough mode 2. Specifically, in door breakthrough mode 1, when the number of held balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without becoming a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the probability variable mode (see the middle left side of FIG. 71). In the variable probability mode, by hitting left, only the lottery for the first special symbol that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and the probability of getting a small win in the lottery for the first special symbol is increased (for small winning). Since the winning opening 655a is easily opened), it is possible to continue the game until the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained without almost reducing the number of balls in the player's possession. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, in door breakthrough mode 2, when the number of held balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the normal mode (see the middle right side of FIG. 71). In the normal mode, the probability of a small hit is low, so if you hit left to execute the lottery for the first special symbol, the number of balls you have will continue to decrease until you hit the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the variable mode. Become.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 71, in the door breakthrough mode, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a jackpot E2, on the condition that the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state has not reached the upper limit, after the jackpot ends Shift to probability mode (common to door breakthrough mode 1 and 2). As described above, the jackpot E2 has a short opening time (0.2 seconds) of the specific winning hole 650a, and a right-handed shot cannot win a prize ball. Also, in the display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, left-handed hitting is notified during the big hit E2 and the small hit of the second special symbol. Therefore, as long as the player does not intentionally hit the right hand against the notification, the second special pattern reserved balls are not accumulated during the execution of the big win E2, so after the big win E2 is completed, the mode is directly shifted to the variable probability mode. do. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa that counts the number of consecutive times of the remaining variable probability state before shifting to the normal mode. Therefore, when the jackpot E2 is reached, the number of times of the variable probability state is subtracted without winning the prize balls, which is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the door breakthrough mode, when the specific winning opening 650a repeats the opening operation for 0.2 seconds multiple times, the player wants the opening operation to be all due to the second special symbol. It is possible to realize a novel game property that makes you wish.

In addition, in the door breakthrough mode, when the second special symbol jackpot E2 is reached and the probability variation limit counter 203aa becomes 0 (the number of consecutive probability variation states reaches the upper limit), the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big win. Therefore, the state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode effect, the effect of failing to break through the door is executed, and the transition to the normal mode is notified.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 71, if the jackpot D2 is won during the door breakthrough mode, the door breakthrough mode (either door breakthrough mode 1 or door breakthrough mode 2) is performed again after the jackpot D2 ends. to move to. More specifically, if the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit, the door breakthrough mode 1 (probability variation state of the special pattern and time saving state of the normal symbol) is set, and the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state is the upper limit. If it has reached, door breakthrough mode 2 (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) is set. As described above, when the door breakthrough mode 1 is set, it is advantageous for the player because it is possible to shift to the variable probability mode unless the big hit is achieved with the reserved ball of the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the door breakthrough mode 2 is set, if all the reserved balls of the second special pattern come off (small hit), it will fall to the normal mode, so it is advantageous to get a big hit. .

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the variable probability mode, when a special symbol hits the jackpot, the game state shifts to another game state. Specifically, when the first special symbol is a jackpot, and the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit (the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 0), the door breakthrough mode is started after the jackpot ends. . On the other hand, when the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit value (the variable probability limit counter 203aa becomes 0), the state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, it is notified that the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state has reached the upper limit during the jackpot. That is, an effect for informing that the state after the end of the big win is the normal mode is executed, for example, during the ending period of the big win.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the second special pattern lottery in the door breakthrough mode results in a jackpot, a prize ball can be obtained with a high probability (95%, which is the rate at which the jackpot E2 is determined). It is an unfavorable result for the player that the remaining number of consecutive times in the variable probability state (the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa) is subtracted. Therefore, in the door breakthrough mode, the game can be played in the hope that the second special symbol will not be a big hit.

In addition, in the door breakthrough mode effect of the second embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win E2, the door breakthrough failure effect (see FIG. 10(a)) is once executed. be. Then, if the number of consecutive times of the probability variable state has not reached the upper limit value (the value of the probability variable limit counter 203aa is not 0), the adventurer 811 again challenges the door breakthrough by the so-called resurrection effect. A successful rendition is executed. On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win E2 and the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit, the resurrection performance is not performed, and the mode is shifted to the normal mode as it is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining number of consecutive times has decreased when the resurrection effect is accompanied even when the mode is shifted to the variable probability mode.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71 , in the variable probability mode, only when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big hit, the game shifts to another state. Specifically, when the first special pattern is a jackpot, and the number of consecutive times of the probability change state does not reach the upper limit, it shifts to door breakthrough mode 1 after the jackpot ends, and the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has reached the upper limit. In this case, after the jackpot is completed, the door breakthrough mode 2 is entered.

In addition, when it becomes door breakthrough mode 2, as a door breakthrough mode effect, if all the reserved balls of the second special pattern are off (small hit), it fails to break through the door and returns to normal mode. An effect in which transition is notified is executed. That is, an effect opposite to the door breakthrough mode 1 (and the door breakthrough mode effect in the first embodiment) is executed. In addition, when the jackpot E2 is achieved in the door breakthrough mode 2, the probability change mode is reported through the resurrection performance, similarly to the case where the probability change state remains in the door breakthrough mode 1. - 特許庁

Thus, in the first embodiment, two types of door breakthrough modes are provided. That is, the door breakthrough mode 1 that shifts when one of the jackpots A2 to D2 occurs in a state where the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has not reached the upper limit, and the state where the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has reached the upper limit (limit). There is provided a door breakthrough mode 2 that shifts when one of the jackpots A2 to D2 is achieved. In the door breakthrough mode 1, as in the first embodiment, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), the mode shifts to the probability variable mode advantageous to the player, so the second special symbol It is advantageous not to win a jackpot in the lottery. On the other hand, the door breakthrough mode 2 is internally in a state of low probability of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, and is a state in which the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state is reset. Therefore, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off, the game shifts to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this case, the jackpot of the second special symbol is obtained during the door breakthrough mode 2, so that the transition to the door breakthrough mode 1 or the probability variable mode can be made, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit. is advantageous for the player. In door breakthrough mode 2, if all the balls with the second special pattern are missed (small hits) and the mode shifts to normal mode, there is a possibility that a large amount of balls will be consumed before a big hit. is.

Depending on the type of door breakthrough mode, it is advantageous if all the reserved balls with the second special pattern are advantageous, or it is advantageous if the reserved balls with the second special pattern include a big hit. Therefore, in the case of shifting to the door breakthrough mode, it is possible to predict which mode the current door breakthrough mode will be. Then, depending on the type of the predicted mode, it is possible to make the player expect to lose or to expect a big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(b)) in that a post-input flag 223i is added. are doing. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The after-throwing flag 223i is a flag indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is powered off during execution of the door breakthrough mode, and after the door breakthrough mode is switched to the intermediate stage, the power is turned on again, and the door breakthrough mode is restarted. is. This post-throwing flag 223i is set to ON when it is determined that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and that the change is other than the final change of the door breakthrough mode effect. (See S5102 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 73 to 79. FIG. First, the details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment.

Of the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, S301 to S309, and in each processing of S311, respectively S301 to S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and the same processing as each processing of S311 is executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, after determining the variation pattern in the process of S307 or S309, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S321), and the read counter value and the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 are set to a variation pattern command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 (S322).

Also, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 73) in the second embodiment, after the process of S311 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is greater than 0 (S323). In the processing of S323, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is greater than 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S323: Yes), the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is subtracted by 1. (S324), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S323, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S323: No), the process of S324 is skipped, This process is terminated as it is.

By this special symbol variation start processing 2 (see FIG. 73), the progress of the door breakthrough mode effect (the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab) can be included in the variation pattern command and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the deviation between the actual remaining number of door breaking mode effects and the effect mode executed by the sound lamp control device 113 . In particular, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily cut off, all the contents stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are cleared, so the state of the door breaking mode effect before the power cut-off can also be changed by the sound lamp. It becomes unknown on the control device 113 side. Even in this case, if the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command, simply analyzing the variation pattern command that is first output after the power supply is restored, the power supply can be easily cut off. can be grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the mode of presentation before the power was cut off.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the situation in which the second special symbol reserved ball exists is basically only during the jackpot and during the execution of the door breaking mode effect. Therefore, in the case where the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the jackpot is not in progress, it seems that it is enough to determine that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. However, when the player intentionally or erroneously hits to the right during normal times, the number of pending balls of the second special symbol may become 1 or more. In such a case, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, when the power is restored, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is notified by the reserved ball number command at the time of power restoration, and the door is opened on the voice lamp control device 113 side. A problem arises in which it is misidentified that the breakthrough mode effect is being executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the progress of the door breaking mode effect is included in the variation pattern command and output. , it is possible to grasp whether the door breakthrough mode is being executed or whether the player intentionally or mistakenly hits to the right during normal operation. Therefore, it is possible to accurately return the presentation mode after the power is restored to the state before the power was cut off.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the number of fluctuations until the end of the door breakthrough mode effect is grasped by the breakthrough mode counter 203ab, and is included in the change pattern command and output. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which only the information as to whether or not it is being executed is included in the variation pattern command and output. Then, on the sound lamp control device 113 side, based on the information and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, it may be configured to grasp the number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode effect is completed. With this configuration, the process of updating the counter 203ab during the door breaking mode can be omitted on the main controller 110 side, so the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, normal symbol variation processing 2 (S106) in the second embodiment will be described. This normal symbol variation process 2 (S106) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) instead of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment.

In each process of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 of the normal symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, each of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment The same processes as those of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed.

Further, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, in the process of S614, when it is determined that the present is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: Yes), the normal symbol variation The time is set to 30 seconds (S631), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S614, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state of the normal design (S614: No), the fluctuation time of the normal design is set to 3 seconds (S632), and this process is finished.

Furthermore, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the second entering ball The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640b attached to the mouth 640 are set to "1 second x 2 times" (S633), and the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the current state is the time-saving state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640b associated with the second ball entrance 640 are set to " 0.2 seconds×1 time” (S634), and the process proceeds to S623.

Thus, in the second embodiment, the normal state of the normal design is shorter than the time-saving state of the normal design, and the opening time when the normal design is hit is short. configured to be long. Also, as described above, the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment is a normal design normal state (low probability state) and a normal design high probability state. The number of judgment values to be judged differs by only one. As a result, even in the normal state of normal patterns, the hit probability is almost the same as in the high-probability state of normal patterns. it gets harder. Therefore, in the probability variable mode in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, the ball is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the second special symbol is disadvantageous. execution of the lottery can be suppressed. As a result, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in a situation other than during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and excessive disadvantage to the player can be suppressed. In addition, during the big win set in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the balls are easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, so that the number of retained balls can be easily stored up to the upper limit during the big win. .

Next, referring to FIG. 75, start-up processing 2 of main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. This start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment.

In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, S901-S910 and S913 are the steps S901-S910 and S913 of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. are executed. In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, when the process of S910 ends, the state command setting process for setting the state command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. (S921), the process proceeds to S913. Details of this state command setting process (S921) will be described with reference to FIG.

The flowchart in FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S921). In this state command setting process (S921), first, the probability variable flag 203g is read (S1801), and the state command is set based on the state of the read probability variable flag 203g (S1802). Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently fluctuating (S1803), and if it is fluctuating (S1803: Yes), the execution area data and the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q are read out (S1804). . Next, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S1805), and the variation pattern command is set based on each read value (S1806). Next, a stop type command is set (S1807), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S1803: No), the processes of S1804 to S1807 are skipped and the process is finished as it is.

By executing this state command setting process (see FIG. 76), the game state before the power is cut off, the progress of the door breakthrough mode effect, etc. can be set by voice during the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75). The lamp controller 113 can be notified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

Among the jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109, respectively, in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment S1101 to S1105, , and the same processes as those of S1107 to S1109 are executed.

Also, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), first, the specific winning opening 650a is opened. state (S1121), sets a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started (S1122), and terminates this process. In the second embodiment, a variable winning device 650 is provided instead of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e2 are not provided therein. Therefore, since there is no need to execute the flow path switching process in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77), these processes (S1202 and S1203 in FIG. 38) are deleted.

Also, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing in the process of S1109 (S1109: Yes), the jackpot end process in the first embodiment ( (See S1110 in FIG. 37), a jackpot ending process 2 is executed (S1123), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process 2 (S1123) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: No), instead of the winning process in the first embodiment (see S1111 in FIG. 37), the winning process 2 is executed (S1124). ), the process ends. The details of this winning process 2 (S1124) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Incidentally, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, a process corresponding to the abnormality process (see S1112 in FIG. 37) in the first embodiment is not provided. In the first embodiment, whether or not to shift to the variable probability state after the big hit is determined by whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65, whereas in the present embodiment. This is because in the second embodiment, there is a difference that the game state after the big win is determined according to the kind of the big win. Therefore, in the second embodiment, even if the ball is left inside the variable winning device 650, it does not affect whether or not the variable probability state is reached, and it is a fraudulent act of leaving the ball inside. itself does not work. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the abnormality processing (see FIG. 41) for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in which a ball remains inside the variable winning device 650 is eliminated.

It should be noted that in the second embodiment as well, it is of course possible to execute processing corresponding to the abnormality processing (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. As a result, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs inside the variable winning device 650, an error can be notified early.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the details of the jackpot ending process 2 (S1123) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process 2 (S1123). In this jackpot end processing 2 (S1123), first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa (S1311), and it is determined whether or not the counter value after the subtraction has become 0.

In the process of S1311, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 1 or more (S1312: No), it means that the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit (limit), so the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1315. On the other hand, in the process of S1311, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa after subtraction has become 0 (S1313: Yes), it means that the number of consecutive probability variation states has reached the upper limit. , Without executing the processing of S1313 to turn on the probability variation flag 203g (while the probability variation flag 203g remains off), set the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa to 4 (S1314), and move the process to S1315 .

In the process of S1315 executed after the process of S1313 or S1314 is finished, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is read (S1315), and the read value is set to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. (S1316). Then, based on the state of the variable probability flag 203g and the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa, a state command is set (S1317). By including the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa in the state command, not only the game state after the big win but also the remaining number of times until the number of continuous times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit (limit) can be grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 side. be able to. When the process of S1317 is completed, the flag 203r during the big hit is set to OFF (S1318), and this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described. This prize winning process 2 (S1124) is, as described above, a process that is executed in place of the prize winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

In the processes of S1401 to S1404 and S1406 to S1408 of the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, S1401 to S1404 and S1406 of the winning process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 40) respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1408 is executed.

In addition, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1404 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or more (S1431). If the value of 203j is 6 or more (S1431: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1431, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 6 (S1431: No), the process proceeds to S1406.

Also, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1409 to S1420 of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are deleted. These processes are processes for determining whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 or whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 at normal timing. This is because the processing is unnecessary for the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in which the discharge channel 65e2, the variable probability switch 65e3 and the like are not provided. By omitting these processes, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 80 to 84. FIG. First, startup processing 2 executed by MPU 201 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. This start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) is a process executed instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, each process of S4001-S4013 is the same as each process of S4001-S4013 of the start-up process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. In addition, in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4012 is completed, the state at the time of power-on based on the state command and the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is executed (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4013. Details of the state determination processing at the time of insertion (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the state determination processing at the time of insertion (S4021). In the input state determination process (S4021), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S4901), and if it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (S4901: No) , the back image is set according to the gaming state when the power is turned on (S4902), and this process is terminated. Here, the game state at the time of power-on is determined based on the data in the game state storage area 223h updated in the process of S4012 of the startup process 2 (see FIG. 80), and if the current state is the probability variable state Set the back image for the variable probability state, and set the back image for the normal state if it is the normal state. It should be noted that the door breakthrough mode effect is an effect that is executed while the second special symbol is fluctuating, so there is no possibility of the door breakthrough mode when the fluctuation is stopped when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), then the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4903 ), and it is determined whether the extracted value is 0 (S4904). If the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed, and if the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 or more, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. means.

In the processing of S4904, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is not 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4904: No), the breakthrough for selecting the effect mode of the door breakthrough mode effect A mode selection process is executed (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4907. The details of this breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S4904: No), the remaining variation A presentation mode is determined according to the time and the result of the lottery (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907. In the processing of S4907, based on the effect mode determined in the processing of S4905 or S4906, the variation pattern command for display is set (S4907), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, details of the breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this breakthrough mode selection process (S4905).

In the breakthrough mode selection process (see FIG. 82), first, it is determined whether the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 1 (S5001), and if the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1, If there is (S5001: Yes), then it is determined whether it is an outlier variation pattern (S5002). In the process of S5002, when it is determined that the variation pattern is out (S5002: Yes), then it is determined whether the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is data indicating the probability variation state (S5003). , If it is in the probability variable state (S5003: Yes), the power supply is cut off during the execution of the variable display based on the last second special symbol held ball in the door breakthrough mode 1 (see the middle left side of FIG. 71), and the execution It means that the last ball held inside was a miss (small hit). Therefore, in this case, as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining variable time, it is determined to the effect mode of notifying the transition to the variable probability mode (S5004), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5003, if it is determined that the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is the data indicating the low probability state of the special symbol (S5003: No), the door breakthrough mode 2 (the middle part of FIG. 71) Right side) means that the power supply was cut off during the execution of the variable display based on the last second special symbol held ball, and the last held ball during execution was a miss (small hit). Therefore, in this case, as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining variable time, the effect mode of notifying the shift to the normal mode is determined (S5004), and the process is terminated. Through these processes of S5003 and S5004, even if the state at the time when the power is turned on again is during execution of the final variation display in the door breakthrough mode effect, the door is opened based on the lottery result and the game state. The result of breakthrough mode production can be accurately notified.

On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is not 1 (2 or more) (S5001: No), and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 And, when it is determined that the variation pattern being executed at the time of power restoration is the big hit variation pattern (S5002: No), first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is the big hit E2 (S5006). In the processing of S5006, if it is determined that the jackpot E2 (S5006: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of consecutive times of probability variation state has reached the upper limit (limit) (S5007). In addition, the remaining number of times up to the upper limit of the number of continuous times of the variable probability state is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the state command together with the game state at the time of power-on.

In the process of S5007, if it is determined that the upper limit value (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state is reached (S5007: Yes), the state after the jackpot becomes the normal mode, so to notify the transition to the normal mode , the process proceeds to the above-described S5005. On the other hand, in the processing of S5007, if it is determined that the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probability variable state has not been reached, the state after the big hit becomes the probability variable mode, so the door is successfully broken through the resurrection effect. The production mode is determined (S5008), and this process is terminated. As mentioned above, this resurrection effect indicates that the remaining number of times up to the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has decreased even though the prize ball could not be obtained due to the big hit E2. It is a production that shows. By this resurrection presentation, the player can be made to recognize that the jackpot E2 has been won during the door breaking mode presentation.

In addition, in the processing of S5006, if it is determined that it is not the jackpot E2 (S5006: No), then it is determined whether the current variation pattern is the jackpot D2 (S5009). In the processing of S5009, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the big win D2 (S5009: Yes), a special effect mode indicating that the big win has been achieved is determined in the door breaking mode effect (S5010). , the process ends.

Also, in the process of S5009, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the big hit D2 (S5009: No), the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the deviation (small hit), and the current variation means that is not the last change in the door breakthrough mode, the breakthrough production mode is determined according to the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab (S5011). That is, the state of the door 814 is determined according to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. Then, the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set to the breakthrough effect counter 223g, the post-throwing flag 223i is set to ON (S5012), and the present process ends. By turning on the post-turn-on flag 223i, it is possible to determine that the effect has been restarted from the middle of the door breaking mode when the power is turned on, even when the next and subsequent variation patterns are received.

The door breakthrough mode effect in the second embodiment is basically the same as in the first embodiment, from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the opening period of the fourth specific winning opening 650a for 5.8 seconds. is set. That is, at the start of the door-breaking mode effect, the result of the door-breaking mode effect is determined in advance based on the look-ahead result of each reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, basically, when the variation pattern command of the second special symbol is newly received during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the predetermined effect mode may be executed as it is. However, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off in the middle of the door breakthrough mode effect, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, and the progress of the door breakthrough mode effect and the result of the effect etc., cannot be grasped. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power is turned off during execution of the door-breaking mode effect, and the power is turned on again, the after-turn flag 223i is configured so that it can be grasped. Then, while the post-throwing flag 223i is on, each time a variation pattern command is received, the door breakthrough mode is performed based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and the information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is time to end the performance, and to set the performance mode according to the determination result. By configuring in this way, while minimizing the information to be output from the main control device 110, the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect can be accurately determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

Next, details of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This variable display setting process 2 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. S4801 to S4803 and S4805 to S4809 of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) in the second embodiment correspond to S4801 to S4803 and S4803 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, respectively. and the same processing as the processing of S4805 to S4809 are executed.

In addition, in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 83) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4803 is completed, the rough variable display mode ( Variation time), variation pattern determination processing for determining the detailed effect mode of the variation pattern is executed (S4811). The details of this variation pattern determination process (S4811) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S4811 ends, based on the detailed rendering mode of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S4811, the variation pattern command for display is set (S4812), and the processing proceeds to S4805.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, details of the variation pattern determination process (S4811) described above will be described. In the variation pattern determination process (S4811), first, it is determined whether or not the after-throwing flag 223i is on (S5101), and if the after-throwing flag 223i is off (S5101: No), the main controller 110 Based on the rough aspect of the variation pattern extracted from the output variation pattern command, the detailed effect aspect of the variation pattern is determined (S5102), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5101, if it is determined that the after-throw flag 223i is ON (S5101: Yes), the power is turned on again after the power is turned off during execution of the door breaking mode effect. Since this means that, according to the information of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and the lottery result, a process for determining the effect mode during the door breakthrough mode effect is executed.

Specifically, first, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is extracted from the variation pattern command (S5103), and whether the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (that is, the last variation in the door breakthrough mode effect (S5104). In the process of S5104, if it is determined that the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), then the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern out of It is determined (S5105), and when it is determined that it is a deviation variation pattern (S5105: Yes), based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223h, it is determined whether the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol. (S5106).

In the process of S5106, if it is determined that the current is the probability variation state of the special symbol (S5106: Yes), the effect mode (see FIG. 10 (b)) for informing the transition to the probability variation mode is determined, and the processing is performed. The process proceeds to S5116. On the other hand, in the processing of S5106, when it is determined that the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol (S5106: No), the effect mode (see FIG. 10 (a)) for notifying the shift to the normal mode is determined. (S5108), the process proceeds to S5116.

On the other hand, in the process of S5104, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 2 or more (S5104: No), and the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), and when it is determined that the variation pattern of the jackpot has been notified (S5105: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot is E2 (S5109).

In the processing of S5109, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot E2 (S5109: Yes), then the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state (limit) It is determined whether or not it has reached. Then (S5110), if the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times is reached (S5110: Yes), the state after the end of the jackpot E2 cannot be set to the variable probability mode, so the transition to the normal mode is notified. The process proceeds to S5108 for determining the effect mode. On the other hand, in the processing of S5110, if it is determined that the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state has not reached the upper limit (limit) (S5110: No), the production mode of the resurrection production is determined (S5111), and this processing ends do.

On the other hand, in the process of S5109, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the jackpot E2 (S5109: No), then it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot D2 Then (S5112), if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the big hit D2 (S5112: Yes), the effect mode of the special door breakthrough mode effect that notifies the big win is determined (S5113), and the process proceeds to S5116. and migrate.

Also, in the process of S5112, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot D2 (S5112: No), the current variation pattern is a deviation (small hit) variation pattern, and the remaining variation number of door breakthrough mode effects ( Since it means that the number of held balls of the second special symbol) is 2 or more, the effect mode of the door breakthrough mode effect is determined according to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted in the process of S5103 (S5114). , the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set to the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S5115), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the processing of S5116 that is executed after any one of S5107, S5108, S5111, and S5113 is completed, the post-throwing flag 223i is reset to off, and the breakthrough effect counter 223g is reset to 0 ( S5116), the process ends.

By executing this variation pattern determination processing, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off during the door breaking mode presentation, the presentation is resumed from the middle of the door breaking mode presentation after the power is turned on again. Aspects can be restored. More specifically, if the power is cut off during execution of the door breaking mode effect, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, so that the progress of the door breaking mode effect, the result of the effect, etc. can be grasped. I can't. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power is turned off during execution of the door-breaking mode effect, and the power is turned on again, the after-turn flag 223i is configured so that it can be grasped. Then, while the post-throwing flag 223i is on, each time a variation pattern command is received, the door breakthrough mode is performed based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and the information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is time to end the performance, and to set the performance mode according to the determination result. By configuring in this way, while minimizing the information to be output from the main control device 110, the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect can be accurately determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the game state after the big win is predetermined for each type of big win. In addition, it is configured to set an upper limit (limit) for the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state of the special pattern, and when the upper limit is reached, even if the probability variation jackpot is won, after the jackpot is set to the special pattern low probability state. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to form two types of a door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1) in which special symbols are in a variable probability state and a door breakthrough mode in which special symbols are in a low probability state. can. Therefore, when shifting to the door breakthrough mode, there is a possibility of shifting to the normal mode even if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which it is advantageous or disadvantageous to win a big hit during the door breakthrough mode depending on the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the electric accessory 640b is provided for the second ball entrance 640, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b is difficult to open. In the normal state (low-probability state) of the pattern, the electric accessory 640b is configured to be easily opened. By configuring in this way, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the probability variable mode in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. , it is possible to suppress the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous. As a result, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in a situation other than during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and excessive disadvantage to the player can be suppressed. In addition, during the big win set in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the balls are easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, so that the number of retained balls can be easily stored up to the upper limit during the big win. .

In addition, in the second embodiment, information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the door breakthrough mode effect (the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab) is included in the change pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. It is configured to include As a result, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door breaking mode presentation, the voice lamp control device 113 can reproduce the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 after the power is turned on again. Only by analyzing on the side, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the door breaking mode effect is being executed, and the progress status when it is being executed. Therefore, while minimizing the information to be output from the main controller 110, the end timing of the door breaking mode effect can be accurately determined on the voice lamp controller 113 side.

In addition, in the second embodiment, by outputting the variable pattern command including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab, when the power is restored, it is determined whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed or not by voice lamp control. Although the device 113 side is configured to be able to distinguish between them, it is not limited to this. For example, only the information as to whether or not the second special symbol is being digested pending after the end of the jackpot may be included in the variation pattern command. In other words, the variation pattern does not need to include the information of the number of times of remaining variation display until the door breakthrough mode effect ends. Then, when the power supply is restored during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, based on the number of pending balls of the second special symbol and the type of variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command (whether it is hit or not) , It may be configured to determine whether or not it is the last variation of the door breakthrough mode production. By configuring in this way, the amount of data of the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 to sound lamp controller 113 can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, the variable pattern command is always output including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, only the first variation pattern command may be configured to output including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. As a result, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command and output, but it is not necessarily included in the variation pattern command. For example, a command for notifying only the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab may be prepared separately. That is, only when there is a change in the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab, the main controller 110 may notify the voice lamp controller 113 by a command. By configuring in this way, the amount of data of the variation pattern command can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, when the power is turned on, the game state is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the state command, and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is notified by the variation pattern command. The information notified to the control device 113 is not limited to this. For example, the prefetch result of each reserved ball may be notified again by the winning information command. By configuring in this way, when the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the power is turned on, not only the fact that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed, but also the result of the door breakthrough mode effect can be displayed. , can be grasped on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation in consideration of the results of the presentation.

<Modified Example of Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment described above will be described. In the above-described second embodiment, the second ball entrance 640 is provided with the electric accessory 640b. Then, the variation time of the normal symbols is shorter in the low-probability state of the normal symbols than in the high-probability state of the normal symbols, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640b is longer when the normal symbols win. By doing so, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 in the probability variable mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

On the other hand, in this modified example, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, there is a storage valve 63a capable of storing (retaining) a ball in the upper part, and a ball stored in the storage valve 63a. A general prize winning opening 63 is provided in which the stored ball can enter when the stored state is released. Although the details will be described later, the second ball entry hole 640 in this modified example is basically provided at a position where it is impossible (difficult) for a ball to enter even if the player hits to the right. As an exception, a ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 only when hitting to the right while three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a. More specifically, when hitting to the right while three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, the ball flowing down due to the hitting to the right collides with the third stored ball. There is a possibility that the trajectory of the ball is changed and becomes a trajectory that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 . In this modification, the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 only during the big win by canceling the stored state at normal times and setting the stored state only during the big win. .

With this configuration, it is not necessary to accompany the second ball entrance 640 with the electric accessory 640b. Therefore, the electric accessory 64a can be attached to the first ball entrance 64, as in the first embodiment. As a result, as in the first embodiment, the electric accessary 64a can be easily opened in the variable probability mode, so that the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held. In addition, by configuring the electric accessory 64a to accompany the first ball entrance 64, the "low probability state of special symbols" and the "time saving state of normal symbols" are set in each of the above embodiments. A game state that was not present can be provided. More specifically, by setting the game state when the number of consecutive times of the probability variable state reaches the upper limit (limit) as "low probability state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols", probability variable mode After the end (after reaching the limit), for a predetermined period (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times), a state in which the special symbol lottery can be executed while maintaining the ball (so-called pullback state) can be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately quitting the game after the variable probability mode ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, "the low probability state of a special design" and "the time-saving state of a normal design" are called "pull-back mode."

First, referring to FIG. 85, the game board 13 in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, in this modified example, an electric accessory 64a is attached to the first ball entrance 64, as in the first embodiment. Thereby, in the "probability variable mode" and the "pull-back mode" set to the time-saving state of normal symbols, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened and the ball is easily entered into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, in this modified example, as in the first embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so as not to result in a small hit.

In addition to the second ball entrance 640 and the variable prize winning device 650 , the general prize winning port 63 is provided in the channel provided on the right side of the variable prize winning device unit 80 . This general winning hole 63 is configured as a winning hole from which one prize ball is paid out when a ball enters. Moreover, a storage valve 63 a is provided vertically above the general prize winning opening 63 . The reservoir valve 63a is variable between a protruding state (see FIG. 86(a)) protruding forward in front view and a recessed state (see FIG. 86(b)) in which it is buried inside the game board 13. It is configured. In the protruded state of the storage valve 63a, the balls that have reached the storage valve 63a can be prevented from flowing down to the general winning opening 63 by storing (retaining) the balls in the upper portion thereof. On the other hand, when the reservoir valve 63a is buried, the ball can pass through the front side of the reservoir valve 63a. That is, the ball can flow down to the general prize winning opening 63 . Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 86, but in this modification, the reservoir valve 63a is set to the buried state (see FIG. 86(b)) at normal times other than during the jackpot, and the reservoir valve 63a is set at the start of the jackpot. is varied from the buried state (see FIG. 86(b)) to the projected state (see FIG. 86(a)). Then, at the end of the jackpot, the storage valve 63a is again changed from the protruding state (see FIG. 86(a)) to the recessed state (see FIG. 86(b)).

The protruding state and the retracted state of the storage valve 63a will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a case in which the reservoir valve 63a is in a protruding state, and FIG. 86(b) is a diagram illustrating a case in which the reservoir valve 63a is in a recessed state. As shown in FIG. 86(a), when the reservoir valve 63a protrudes with the start of the jackpot, the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63 is blocked by the reservoir valve 63a. As a result, up to three balls that have reached the flow path are stored (retained) above the retention valve 63a. During the big win, the player cannot get the prize ball unless the ball enters the specific winning hole 650a. A nail, a pinwheel, or the like is arranged in a channel formed above the general winning hole 63 so that one out of every two balls launched by hitting to the right advances. Therefore, during one round of the jackpot, three balls are stored in the information of the storage valve 63a (see FIG. 86(a)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 86(a), when the upper limit of three balls is stored above the storage valve 63a, and the ball is hit to the right, the ball hit to the right is , may collide with the third (last) ball stored by the storage valve 63a. The ball that collides with the third stored ball is reflected in the direction opposite to the flow direction up to that point, and as a result, in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, it enters the general winning opening 63. The trajectory allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 provided on the opposite side. In the modified example of the second embodiment, the reservoir valve 63a enters the reservoir state when the jackpot is reached, and the reservoir state is maintained until the jackpot ends. Therefore, if the ball is hit to the right to enter the specific winning hole 650a during the jackpot, three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a. With three balls stored above the storage valve 63a, when the player hits to the right to obtain a prize ball, the newly shot ball collides with the stored ball. As a result, the ball enters the second ball inlet 640. As a result, the player continuously hits to the right in an attempt to obtain a prize ball during the big win, so that when the big win is finished, the reserved balls of the second special pattern are accumulated up to the upper limit number (4). can be done. Although not shown, in a state in which three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, some of the balls fired by hitting to the right do not collide with (interfere with) the stored balls. It flows down in the direction of the specific prize winning port 650a. As a result, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 and the specific winning opening 650a during the big win.

FIG. 86(b) is a diagram showing a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As described above, when the big win ends, the state is changed from the projecting state to the buried state, and the buried state is maintained (retained) until the next big win. When the reservoir valve 63a is in the buried state, the ball can pass (flow down) through the channel provided above the general prize winning opening 63. FIG. Therefore, the ball fired into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 passes through the front side of the buried reservoir valve 63a and enters the general prize opening 63, or It flows down a flow path toward a specific prize winning port 650 a provided between the winning port 63 and the second ball entrance 640 . In this modified example, since the storage valve 63a is in the retracted state until the next big win after the big win is completed, it is possible to prevent the ball hit to the right from entering the second ball entrance 640 in normal times. can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol that is usually disadvantageous, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being too disadvantageous.

Next, referring to FIG. 87, a state transition method in this modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modification, in addition to the four states (normal mode, variable probability mode, door breakthrough mode 1, door breakthrough mode 2) provided in the second embodiment described above, a pullback mode is provided. is provided.

The pullback mode is a state in which a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols are set. In this modification, when the upper limit (limit) of the number of continuous times of the variable probability state is reached, the state after the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in this modification, the door breakthrough mode 2 is a low probability state of special symbols and a short time state of normal symbols, and when the reserved ball of the second special symbol becomes 0 in door breakthrough mode 2, it becomes a pullback mode. .

As shown in the upper right of FIG. 87, the pull-back mode shifts to another mode when the lottery of special symbols for the number of times of time reduction (25 times) set without becoming a big hit ends. there's a possibility that. Specifically, when the lottery for the special symbols for the number of times of time saving is all lost, the game shifts to the normal mode. In addition, the pull-back mode is set to a low probability state of the special symbol, and the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state is reset, so when the first special symbol lottery hits the jackpot, the door breakthrough mode 1 is entered. .

In addition, in this modified example, the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is easily opened in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the variable probability mode and the pull-back mode both have the same opening control of the electric accessory 64a, it is difficult to visually distinguish between the variable probability mode and the pull-back mode. In this modification, the player can recognize that it was in the pullback mode when the number of times of time saving ends and the pullback mode falls to the normal mode. In other words, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the pullback mode, it becomes difficult to know whether the jackpot was hit in the variable probability mode or the jackpot in the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the variable probability state continues beyond the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state by making a big hit in the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in accordance with the configuration in which the probability variable mode and the pullback mode cannot be distinguished from the operation of the electric accessory 64a, in this modification, in the door breakthrough mode 2, all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are removed. Also in this case, an effect of successfully breaking through the door is executed. As a result, in the door breakthrough mode production, when the adventurer 811 succeeds in breaking through all the doors, whether the transition from the door breakthrough mode 1 to the variable mode or from the door breakthrough mode 2 to the withdrawal mode is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the migration has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which it is not known how long the repetition of the jackpot and the mode (probability variable mode or pullback mode) in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set continues.

In this way, in the modification of the second embodiment, a ball can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 63a, and depending on whether or not a ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 63a, a right-handed ball It is configured to be able to switch the direction in which the water flows. When no balls are stored in the storage valve 63a, it is difficult for the balls to enter the second ball inlet 640. On the other hand, the storage valve 63a stores the upper limit number (three) of balls. If so, the flow direction of part of the newly launched ball is switched by the stored ball, and the trajectory is changed to a trajectory that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. bottom. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 even if the ball is hit to the right when the storage valve 63a is set in the buried state. Further, during the big win in which the storage valve 63a is set to the protruding state, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 when hitting to the right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of lottery of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player in normal times while making it possible to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol to the upper limit at the end of the jackpot.

In addition, in the modification of the second embodiment, when the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit, a time-saving state of normal symbols that continues until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (25 times) is set. It was configured as follows. By constructing in this way, when the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit, the lottery of the special pattern is executed without reducing the holding balls until the lottery of the special pattern is executed for a predetermined number of times (25 times). can be created (pull-back mode). Therefore, even when the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit and the low probability state of the special pattern is set after the big win, the player can be prevented (suppressed) from quitting the game immediately. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, since the pull-back mode and the probability variable mode are both set to the time-saving state of the normal symbol, they are configured to be difficult to distinguish from each other from the appearance of the operation of the electric accessory 64a. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he or she had won a big win in the variable probability mode even when the jackpot was won in the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide novel playability that makes it feel as if the variable probability state continues beyond the upper limit of the variable probability state.

In addition, in the modification of the second embodiment, a storage valve 63a is provided above the general prize winning port 63, and depending on the state of the storage valve 63a, it may be difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. , and the state in which the ball can enter the ball, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the general prize winning opening 63, a configuration may be adopted in which a storage valve 63a is provided above the second ball entrance 640. FIG. During the big win, the reservoir valve 63a is set to the buried state so that the ball hit to the right can enter the second ball entrance 640. The ball may be difficult to enter the second ball inlet 640 by keeping the valve 63a in a projecting state. As a result, since the general prize winning port 63 can be omitted, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the modified example of the second embodiment, the upper limit is set for the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state, but instead of this, the upper limit may be set for the number of times of lottery of special symbols in one variable probability state. That is, when the probability variation jackpot is reached, the special symbol probability variation state may be continued until, for example, the special symbol lottery is executed 130 times after the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state has been reached, so the processing load at the end of the jackpot can be reduced. Also, in this case, when the first special symbol hits the jackpot, the probability variable state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are set. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot type is determined such that, with a high probability (for example, a rate of 95%), almost no prize balls can be obtained, and after the jackpot, the variable state of the special pattern and the normal state of the normal pattern are shifted. . By constructing in this way, as in the above-described embodiments, a novel game property is realized in which a game is played in the hope that the game will not be a big win in the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the big win. be able to.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 103. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the passage on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front is provided with the second ball entrance 640 and the specific prize winning opening 65a. There is a possibility that only a right-handed ball will flow into the flow path on the right side of the front view (a ball will not flow into the flow path on the right side of the front view even if the ball is hit left-handed), so the second ball entry Both the hole 640 and the specific winning hole 65a allow a ball to enter (easy to enter) when hitting right, and cannot (difficult to enter) when hitting left. Therefore, when a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special pattern, if the ball is struck to the right to obtain a prize ball, the ball also enters the second ball entrance 640, so after the big win, the second special It is possible to make the state where the holding ball of the pattern is accumulated to the upper limit. As a result, after the big hit of the first special symbol, a state is formed in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous in the event of a big win, is continuously executed.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the left specific winning hole makes it possible to enter the ball (easy to enter) when hitting to the left, and impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter) when hitting to the right. 656a and two types of special prizes, a right specific prize opening 657a in which a ball can enter the ball (easy to enter) when hitting right and a ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) when hitting left. It was configured to have a mouth. Then, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, a jackpot type in which only the left specific prize winning port 656a is opened in all rounds (the right specific prize winning port 657a is difficult to open), and a left specific prize winning port 656a in the first round. is opened, and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other rounds (the right specific winning opening 657a is easily opened). That is, there are few opportunities to hit to the right during the big win (it is difficult to accumulate balls with the second special symbol during the big win), and there are many opportunities to hit to the right (the ball with the second special symbol is held during the big win). It is configured to provide a jackpot type that is easy to accumulate). If the type of jackpot has fewer chances to hit to the right (it is difficult to accumulate balls with the second special symbol during the jackpot), the possibility that the jackpot will be included in the reserved balls that exist at the end of the jackpot is also low. It is possible to increase the possibility of shifting to the probability variable mode. On the other hand, if the type of jackpot has many opportunities to hit to the right (hold balls with the second special symbol are likely to accumulate during the jackpot), the possibility that the jackpot will be included in the reserved balls that exist at the end of the jackpot will also increase. Therefore, the possibility of shifting to the variable probability mode is relatively low. As a result, it is possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the type of jackpot, so that when a jackpot is won, it is possible to attract more attention to the type. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player until the type of jackpot is determined.

In addition, in the present third embodiment, as the difference in the degree of advantage according to the jackpot type of the first special symbol is increased, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable display. It was configured to suggest the jackpot type depending on the type of. More specifically, the number of rounds is small (2 rounds or 5 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened other than the 1st round (holding balls of the second special symbol are easy to accumulate) jackpot type (relatively In the case of a disadvantageous jackpot type), when three main patterns imitating the same even numbers are aligned on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, it is notified that the jackpot has been won. In addition, the number of rounds is large (16 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened except for the first round (holding balls of the second special symbol are easy to accumulate). In this case, it is reported that three main patterns imitating one of the eight types of numbers excluding "7" among the numbers "1 to 9" are aligned on the display screen. Furthermore, in the case of the most advantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds and all rounds are left-handed), one of the third patterns imitating the numbers "1 to 9" may be aligned. In other words, when three main symbols with odd numbers other than "7" are aligned, it indicates a jackpot of at least 16 rounds, and further, when main symbols with "7" are aligned. means that the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and in addition, it is a jackpot type in which a prize ball can be obtained by hitting left in all the rounds of the jackpot. As a result, the player can play the game while paying attention to the types of the main symbols arranged on the display screen at the end of the variable display, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the most advantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and all rounds are left-handed), and numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display effect. If so, after that, an effect of changing to "7" matching (promotion) is executed by the promotion effect executed during the big win. In other words, in the most advantageous jackpot, "7" matching indicating the most advantageous jackpot is notified during the variable display effect or during the big win after the variable display effect. Similarly, the number of rounds is the largest (16 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened other than the first round (the second special symbol holding ball is easy to accumulate). When the numbers are matched, after that, an effect is executed to change (promote) the odd numbers other than "7" by the promotion effect executed during the jackpot. That is, in the 16-round jackpot in which the right specific prize-winning port 657a is opened other than the first round, odd numbers other than "7" are notified during the variable display effect or during the big win after the variable display effect. Furthermore, the right specific prize-winning port 657a is opened except for the 1st round, and in the case of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (5 rounds or 2 rounds), even numbers are arranged by a variable display effect, which develops into a promotion effect. Even in this case, even digits remain aligned without being changed (promoted) to odd digits. In this way, by providing a promotion effect, the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot type with a low degree of advantage once in the variable display effect (simulating the even number corresponding to the 5th or 2nd round jackpot) Even if the combination of the 3rd symbols, etc.) is stopped and displayed, the combination corresponding to the jackpot type with a high degree of advantage due to the promotion effect (3 3rd symbols imitating "7" corresponding to the most advantageous jackpot). The player can be expected to be changed (promoted) to a combination, etc.). As a result, interest can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113 , and the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The only difference is that the process has changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 88, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 88, in the game board 13 of the third embodiment, instead of the variable winning device 65 of the first embodiment being removed, a left variable winning device 656 is added to the left channel of the game board 13. In addition, a right variable winning device 657 is provided in the right channel. The internal structure of the left variable winning device 656 provided in the left channel of the game board 13 is the same as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment. That is, the ball entering the left specific winning hole 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 inside the left variable winning device 656 or the special discharge channel 65e2. As described above, the ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2 during the big hit, and when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability state of the special symbol is given after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, the right variable winning device 657 only has a function of paying out 11 winning balls when it detects that a ball has entered the right specific winning hole 657a. That is, the winning device has a simple configuration in which a switch (variable probability switch 65e3), which is a determination target for determining whether or not to give the variable probability state, is not provided inside.

The left specific winning port 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is the first round (in the case of jackpots A3 to C3 described later) or all rounds (in the case of jackpot D3 described later) when the first special symbol jackpot is won. ). On the other hand, the right specific winning opening 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened after the second round when the jackpot A3-C3 is achieved. When the jackpot type (jackpot D3) in which the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in all rounds is reached, prize balls can be obtained simply by continuing to hit left during the jackpot. That is, since there is no need to hit the right ball with the possibility that the ball may enter the second ball entrance 640, after the big hit, it is disadvantageous in the lottery of the second special symbol (that is, the probability variable state is granted. difficult) There is no possibility of becoming a big hit (low). In other words, there is no (low) possibility of winning again in the lottery executed after the big win based on the reserved balls that exist at the end of the big win. Therefore, when the jackpot type (jackpot D3) in which the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in all the rounds, the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction. Henceforth, the jackpot classification which can digest a jackpot by hitting left-handed in all rounds is called a "left-handed jackpot." On the other hand, the type of jackpot in which the jackpot is completed by hitting the right hand from the second round onwards is referred to as "right hit jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot type in which the right specific prize winning port 657a of the right variable prize winning device 657 is opened after the second round, the prize ball cannot be obtained unless the player hits to the right after the second round. (It becomes difficult), so a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during the big win. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot, the second special symbol reserved balls can be accumulated up to the upper limit. If there are many reserved balls with the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot, the possibility of winning a jackpot by lottery based on the reserved balls after the jackpot is higher than the left-handed jackpot. For this reason, after the end of the big win, it is possible to create a state in which the lottery of the second special symbols, which is disadvantageous when the big win occurs, is continuously executed. It is possible to provide a novel game property that allows the player to play the game in the hope that all the reserved balls of the second special symbols accumulated during the big win will come off (small win).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, a promotion effect, which is a type of display effect in the third embodiment, will be described. In the third embodiment, as described above, there is a possibility that the main symbols with the number "7" will be aligned only during the variable display that informs the left-handed jackpot. Also, the main symbols with odd numbers other than "7" may be aligned during the variable display that informs the 16-round jackpot. In other words, there is a possibility that even-numbered main symbols will be displayed even in the variable display for informing a left-handed jackpot and the variable display for informing a 16-round jackpot. In the third embodiment, in the variation display that notifies the 16-round jackpot or the left-handed jackpot, when the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, the opening period of the jackpot to the end of the first round Until the interval period, the main symbols that are once aligned in the variable display are changed (promoted) to the main symbols imitating the number "7" or the main symbols imitating odd numbers other than "7". executed. As a result, even when the main patterns simulating even-numbered numbers are arranged in the variable display, the promotion performance is executed during the big win and the players can expect to be promoted to the patterns simulating odd-numbered numbers. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a decrease in the player's motivation to play even when an even number of symbols are displayed in the variable display. Also, the promotion effects are configured to be executed more frequently in the case of success in promotion than in the case of failure in promotion. As a result, the player's expectation for promotion can be improved at the time when the promotion effect is executed.

FIG. 89(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during the opening period of the jackpot in which promotion effects are set. As shown in FIG. 89(a), during the opening period of the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set, the third pattern (the main pattern imitating "2" in the example of FIG. 89(a)) is aligned in the variable display. continues to be displayed. In addition, a display area HR5 is formed in the upper central part of the display screen, in which characters such as "Chance for promotion!! Hit the left side!!" are displayed. A display area HR1 is displayed to the left of the display area HR5, in which the characters "left shot" and an image of an arrow pointing to the left are displayed. Also, a cannon 815 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that an effect using the cannon 815 is executed by hitting left.

It should be noted that the reason why left-handed hitting is announced in the opening period is that the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in the first round. By starting left-handed hitting during the opening period, the ball can be efficiently entered into the left specific prize-winning opening 656a at the start of the first round.

FIG. 89(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the first round. As shown in FIG. 89(b), during one round, when the winning of a ball (entering a ball) into the left specific winning hole 656a is detected, the cannon 815 emits the third pattern (the main pattern imitating "2"). A bombardment production is executed. As shown in FIG. 89(b), the view of the bombarded portion of the third pattern is blocked by the smoke K1. Thereafter, every time a ball entering the left specific winning hole 656a is detected, the effect of bombarding the third symbol (bombardment effect) is executed, and the smoke increases.

FIG. 90(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of one round in a jackpot set with a promotion effect. As shown in FIG. 90(a), at the end of one round, smoke K1 to K7 is displayed so as to cover all the third symbols. By covering all the third patterns, it is possible for the player to predict whether the third patterns appearing after the smoke clears will remain even numbers or will be promoted to odd numbers. can improve expectations for promotion.

FIG. 90(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the interval period after the end of one round when the promotion to the left-handed jackpot was successful (that is, the current jackpot type was the left-handed jackpot). . As shown in FIG. 90(b), when the promotion to the left-handed jackpot succeeds, after the smoke K1 to K7 clears, an effect is executed in which three main symbols imitating the number "7" appear. be done. In addition, the characters "Promoted to Super Big Bonus!!" are displayed in the display area HR5. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that a left-handed hit is a big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel great satisfaction.

In addition, in the case of promotion to a symbol indicating a right-handed jackpot in 16 rounds (a main symbol imitating an odd number other than "7"), the characters "Promoted to Big Bonus!!" Is displayed. Also, if the promotion fails (that is, the jackpot type this time was a right-handed jackpot other than 16 rounds), the main pattern will be changed to an even-numbered pattern even after the smoke K1 to K7 has cleared. Along with the execution of the effect that the player has not been promoted, the characters "promotion failed..." are displayed in the display area HR5. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the promotion was successful, and if the promotion was successful, the type of the jackpot. Therefore, an easy-to-understand presentation can be provided.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the variable probability switch 65e3 is provided inside the left variable winning device 656. The specific winning opening 656a is configured to be opened in the first round of the jackpot. By constructing in this way, the opening operation can be made the same until the interval period of one round of the big win ends, regardless of whether the left-handed jackpot or the right-handed jackpot is won. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the jackpot is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot. Therefore, when the promotion performance is executed, the game can be played while paying more attention to the content of the performance, so that the performance effect of the promotion performance can be enhanced.

Further, in the third embodiment, in the first round in which the left variable winning device 656 having the variable probability switch 65e3 inside operates, the promotion effect is executed. As a result, when the promotion performance is executed, even if it is confirmed that the ball enters the left specific prize-winning port 656a and becomes a probability variable state after the big win, attention is focused on whether or not the promotion will occur. to play the rest of the game in the first round.

Here, in a general gaming machine, a game during a big hit is performed with the most attention paid to whether or not the variable probability state occurs. In other words, it is common to play a game during a big win, focusing most on whether or not a ball enters a prize winning opening in which a variable probability switch is built. However, when the ball passes through the variable probability switch and it is confirmed that the variable probability state is established, the player is satisfied at that point, and the rest of the game in the jackpot is just like the work to get the prize ball. There were cases where it became

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the promotion effect can be executed from the opening period of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. That is, even after passing the variable probability switch 65e3, the promotion effect is continued. By configuring in this way, after the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 and the variable probability state is confirmed, the result of the promotion performance can be made to pay attention, so that the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3. After that, you can draw attention to the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the big win from becoming a mere work to get the prize balls, so that the interest in the game during the big win can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. First, the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 91(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91(a), the ROM 202 in the third embodiment has an open scenario selection table 202e added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13(a)). There is a difference. Moreover, it is different in that the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG.91(b), the detail of the 1st hit classification|category selection table 202b in the 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 91(b), in the third embodiment, four types of jackpots A3 to D3 are provided as jackpots of the first special symbol. In addition, four types of jackpots E3 to H3 are provided as jackpot types of the second special symbols. Jackpots A3 to C3 and E3 are jackpots corresponding to jackpots A to D in the first embodiment, respectively, and are right-handed jackpots with 16 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds and 16 rounds, respectively. That is, it is a jackpot in which the right specific prize winning opening 657a is opened in rounds other than the first round of the jackpot. In the right-handed jackpot, the right specific winning hole 657a is opened from the second round, so the ball cannot be made to enter the right specific winning hole 657a and a prize ball cannot be obtained unless the ball is hit rightward from the second round onwards. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, by continuing to hit right during the big win, a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 provided on the right side of the game board 13, and the big win ends. Sometimes, it is possible to make a state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous is accumulated up to the upper limit. Therefore, after the jackpots A3 to C3 and E3 are finished, the game can be shifted to the door breakthrough mode in the same manner as after the jackpots A to D in the first embodiment. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which, after the end of the big hits A3 to D3 and E3, the game is played in the hope that the special pattern lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special pattern will not result in a big hit. can.

On the other hand, the jackpots D3 and H3 are left-handed jackpots in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all the rounds. When a left-handed hit hits a jackpot, a prize ball can be obtained simply by continuing to hit left-handed during the jackpot. That is, since there is no need to hit the ball to the right where the ball may enter the second ball entrance 640, after the big hit, it is disadvantageous in the lottery of the second special symbol (that is, the probability variable state is granted. Difficult) There is no possibility of becoming a big hit (go directly to the variable mode without going through the door breakthrough mode). Therefore, when the jackpot type (jackpots D3, H3) in which the left specific prize winning port 656a is opened in all rounds, the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

Also, the jackpots F3 and G3 are jackpots corresponding to the jackpots E and F in the first embodiment, and are jackpot types in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot. That is, it is a jackpot type in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened only for 0.2 seconds in each round of jackpot. Since the variable probability switch 65e3 is not provided in the right variable winning device 657, it is possible to more reliably prevent the balls from passing through the variable probability switch 65e3 when the big wins F3 and G3 are achieved. Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol can be made more disadvantageous. In addition, in accordance with the configuration in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in each round when the big hits are F3 and G3, the right specific winning opening 657a is opened even when the small winning is achieved in the third embodiment. It is configured to be open. As a result, when the right specific winning port 657a is opened, it is difficult to identify whether the opening is due to the big wins F3, G3 or the small wins. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether or not the second special symbol has been a big hit from the operation of the right specific winning port 657a, so as in the first embodiment, more attention is paid to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect. You can play games.

As shown in FIG. 91(b), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and the number of rounds is 16 rounds "jackpot A3" is associated. is defined (see 202b1 in FIG. 91(b)), and the range of "5 to 84" is defined in association with "jackpot B3" with 5 rounds (see 202b2 in FIG. 91(b) ), the range of “85 to 94” is defined in association with “jackpot C3” with two rounds (see 202b3 in FIG. 91(b)), and the range of “95 to 99” includes rounds A "jackpot D3" with a number of 16 rounds is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 91(b)). Since the value that the first winning type counter C2 can take is 100 of "0 to 99", the ratio of "jackpot A3" to be determined when the first special symbol jackpot is 5% (5/ 100). Similarly, the rate at which "jackpot B3" is determined is 80% (80/100), the rate at which "jackpot C3" is determined is 10% (10/100), and the rate at which "jackpot D3" is determined ratio is 5% (5/100). That is, the ratio of right-handed jackpots (jackpots A3 to C3) in the first special symbol lottery is 95%, and the ratio of left-handed jackpots (jackpot D3) is 5%. Since the ratio of left-handed big wins is extremely low compared to the right-handed big wins, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction when an advantageous left-handed big win is reported.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 91(b), for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 3", and the number of rounds is 16 rounds "jackpot E3". It is defined in association (see 202b5 in FIG. 91(b)), and in the range of "4 to 48", the number of rounds is defined in association with "jackpot F3" with 7 rounds (in FIG. 91(b) 202b6), the range of "49 to 98" is defined in association with the "jackpot G3" with 6 rounds (see 202b7 in FIG. 91(b)), and "99" has the number of rounds. 16 rounds of "jackpot H3" are associated and defined (see 202b8 in FIG. 91(b)). Therefore, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is determined, the ratio of determining the "jackpot E3" is 4% (4/100), and the percentage of determining the "jackpot F3" is 45% (45/100). , the ratio of determining the “jackpot G3” is 50% (50/100), and the percentage of determining the “jackpot H3” is 1% (1/100). That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big hit, the ratio of determining a big hit (either of the big wins F3 and G3) to which the variable probability state is difficult to be given is 95%. Therefore, when the second special symbol hits the jackpot during the door breakthrough mode, the game shifts to the normal mode at an extremely high rate (95%). In addition, the ratio of the left specific winning opening 656a to be opened (provided with a variable probability state after the jackpot) to be a jackpot is 5%, of which 4% is a right-handed jackpot (jackpot E3), 1% is a left-handed jackpot ( It becomes a jackpot H3). Therefore, when a left-handed jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the player can be made to think that he or she is very lucky, so that the player can be made to feel greater joy. .

In addition, in the third embodiment, there is a possibility that the promotion effect will be executed even when the jackpots E3 and H3 are obtained. Since the jackpots E3 and H3 are both jackpots of 16 rounds, they are the jackpots E3 and H3, and when the promotion effect is executed, the effect is executed in which the main symbols simulating odd numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display. After that, in the promotion performance, the performance of whether or not to be promoted to the main symbol imitating "7" is executed. The jackpot H3 is a rare jackpot type that is selected only at a rate of 1% in the jackpot of the second special symbol, but when the jackpot is announced, the possibility of the jackpots F3 and G3 accounting for 95% is eliminated. be done. That is, when the big win is reported in the lottery of the second special symbols, it is determined that the distribution is the 4% big win E3 or the 1% big win H3. Therefore, since the jackpot H3 occurs at a rate of 1/5, the player can be made to recognize that this is the most advantageous chance to win the jackpot. Furthermore, as described above, the promotion production is set so that the ratio of execution is higher when the promotion is successful, so the big hit is notified by the lottery of the second special symbol, and it has developed into a promotion production. In this case, the player's expectation for the big win H3 can be further heightened. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the open scenario selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 92(a). This opening scenario selection table 202e shows, for each jackpot type, as an opening scenario, the type of the specific winning opening to be opened in each round of the jackpot (either the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a), and the opening period ( It is a data table that defines either a long release of up to 30 seconds or a short release of up to 0.2 seconds. When the jackpot is won, the unlock scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is read out from the unlock scenario selection table 202e, and stored in the unlock scenario storage area 203ba, which will be described later. During the jackpot, the opening operation of each round is set according to the scenario defined in the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a), as an opening scenario corresponding to the jackpot types "jackpot A3" to "jackpot C3" and "jackpot E3" (that is, right-handed jackpot), the left specific winning for the first round A long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the mouth 656a is defined in correspondence, and a long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the right specific winning opening 657a is defined in association with each round after the second round (Fig. See 202e1 at 92(a)). As a result, when a right-handed jackpot is won, the left specific winning opening 656a is opened only in the first round, and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in each round after the second round. Therefore, from the second round onwards, a prize ball cannot be obtained unless a game during a jackpot is played by aiming at the right specific winning hole 657a by hitting to the right. A large amount of balls enter 640 during the jackpot. Therefore, when the right-handed jackpot ends, the second special pattern reserved balls can be in a state of reaching the upper limit value, so that the lottery of the second special pattern that is disadvantageous after the jackpot ends is continuously executed. mode can be set. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player is expected to continuously lose the lottery of the second special symbols after the end of the big win.

Also, as shown in FIG. 92(a), as an opening scenario corresponding to the jackpot types "jackpot D3" and "jackpot H3" (that is, left-handed jackpot), the length of the left specific winning opening 656a for all rounds Open (up to 30 seconds) is associated and defined (see 202e2 in FIG. 92(a)). As a result, in the left-handed jackpot, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by simply hitting the left-handed ball aiming at the left specific winning hole 656a in all rounds. That is, since there is no need to hit to the right during the big win, there is no possibility that the ball will enter the second ball entrance 640 during the big win. Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, in many cases, the number of balls held in the second special pattern, which is disadvantageous at the end of the jackpot, is 0, and after the jackpot ends, the most advantageous directly without going through the "door breakthrough mode". It is possible to shift to "variable mode". As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction when a left-handed hit hits the jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 92(a), as an opening scenario corresponding to the jackpot types "jackpot F3" and "jackpot G3", the right specific winning opening 657a is short-opened (maximum 0.2 seconds) for all rounds. ) are associated and defined (see 202e3 in FIG. 92(a)). As a result, when "jackpot F3" and "jackpot G3" are achieved, it is almost impossible to obtain a prize ball, and the ball is made to enter the left specific prize winning port 656a and the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3. there is no possibility to do so. In other words, it is possible to form a disadvantageous jackpot in which prize balls are not obtained and the variable probability state is not given after the jackpot.

In this way, in the third embodiment, by setting the opening operation according to the opening scenario defined in the opening scenario selection table 202e, the same opening operation can be set accurately each time for all jackpot types. can be done.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92(b). FIG. 92(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92(b), the RAM 203 of the third embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) in that an open scenario storage area 203ba is added. ing. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The opening scenario storage area 203ba is a storage area for storing (storing) the opening scenario when the jackpot is won and the opening scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is read out from the opening scenario selection table 202e. is. At the start of each round in the jackpot, the type of specific winning opening to be opened (left specific winning opening 656a, right specific winning opening 656a, right specific winning opening) is determined according to the opening scenario stored in this opening scenario storage area 203ba and the number of new rounds. port 657a), and the duration of the opening (either long open, up to 30 seconds, or short open, up to 0.2 seconds) is determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 93, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 93(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93(a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment has a promotion effect lottery table 222b added to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(a)). There is a difference. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Details of the promotion effect lottery table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 93(b). This promotion effect lottery table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining (lottery) whether or not promotion effects can be executed. value) are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93(b), "0 to 49" is defined in association with "jackpot A3" as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j (FIG. 93). (b) 222b1). Although the details will be described later, the effect lottery counter 223j is configured as a random number counter that generates a value within the range of "0 to 99", and can take 100 values of "0 to 99". Therefore, the rate at which the promotion effect is determined when the "jackpot A3" is achieved is 50% (50/100). When the “jackpot A3” (16 round right-handed jackpot) was reached and the promotion effect was decided, an effect was performed in which three main patterns (third patterns) imitating the same even numbers were aligned in the variable display. After that, in the promotion performance in the jackpot, the performance of promotion to the main pattern imitating the same odd numbers other than "7" is executed, and it is reported that the 16-round right-handed jackpot. On the other hand, when the promotion effect is not determined, an effect is executed in which main symbols simulating odd numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display effect. In this case, the normal jackpot effect (see FIG. 8) is executed without executing the promotion effect during the jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 93(b), "0 to 19" is associated with "jackpot B3", "jackpot C3", and "jackpot E3" as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j. (see 222b2 in FIG. 93(b)). Out of 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223j, 20 counter values (random numbers) corresponding to the execution of the promotion production are defined, so "big win B3", "big win C3". , and “jackpot E3”, the rate at which the promotion effect is determined is 20% (20/100). In the lottery of the first special pattern, "jackpot B3" (5 rounds of right-handed jackpots) or "jackpot C3" (2nd rounds of right-handed jackpots) is determined, and the promotion effect is determined, even numbers in the variable display After the performance of aligning three main patterns imitating the same number is performed, the performance of failing in the promotion performance in the jackpot is performed. In addition, when the promotion effect is not determined, after the effect in which the main symbols simulating even numbers are aligned in the variable display effect, the normal jackpot effect is performed without developing into the promotion effect (see FIG. 8). is executed.

In addition, when the second special symbol lottery results in “jackpot E3” (16 round right-handed jackpot) and the promotion effect is decided, the main character imitating the same odd number other than “7” in the variable display After the performance in which three patterns are aligned is executed, the performance in which the promotion is failed in the promotion performance executed during the jackpot is executed. In addition, if the promotion effect is not determined, after the effect is executed in which the main symbols imitating the same odd numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display, the normal jackpot will not develop into the promotion effect. An effect (see FIG. 8) is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 93(b), for the "jackpot D3" and "jackpot H3" (16 round left-handed jackpot), the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j is "0 to 79". are defined in association with each other (see 222b3 in FIG. 93(b)). Out of 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223j, 80 counter values (random numbers) corresponding to the execution of the promotion production are defined, so that "jackpot D3" or "jackpot H3 , the rate at which the promotion effect is determined is 80% (80/100). When the lottery of the first special pattern results in a ``jackpot D3'' and the promotion performance is determined, a performance is executed in which three main patterns imitating the same even numbers are aligned in the variable display, and then the promotion in the jackpot. In the production, the production to be promoted to the main pattern imitating the number "7" is executed, and it is reported that the left-handed hit jackpot in 16 rounds. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery results in a “big hit H3” and the promotion effect is decided, an effect is executed in which three main symbols imitating the same odd numbers other than “7” are aligned in the variable display. After that, in the promotion performance in the big win, the performance of promotion to the main pattern imitating the number "7" is executed, and the left-handed big win of 16 rounds is notified. Incidentally, when the promotion effect is not determined, an effect in which the main symbols imitating the number "7" are aligned is executed in the variable display effect. In this case, the promotion performance is not executed during the big win, but the normal jackpot performance is executed.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 93(c). As shown in FIG. 93(c), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20(b)). The difference is that an effecting flag 223k is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect lottery counter 223j is a counter used for the lottery of the effect mode such as determination (lottery) of whether or not promotion effect can be executed. This effect lottery counter 223j. The value is updated within the range of "0 to 99". At the time of lottery for the promotion performance, it is determined whether any of the random numbers (counter values) prescribed in the promotion performance lottery table 222b and the value of the performance lottery counter 223j match, and if the values match, the promotion performance is performed. execution is decided.

The promotion effect in progress flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the promotion effect is set. If this promotion effect in progress flag 223k is ON, it indicates that the promotion effect is set, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the promotion effect is not set. This promotion effect flag 223k is set to ON when winning the promotion effect execution lottery executed at the start of variation of the third symbol when any of the jackpots A to E and G is won in the special symbol lottery. (See S5405 in FIG. 103). Moreover, it is set to OFF after setting the end of the promotion effect (see S4515 in FIG. 101).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. First, the details of the special symbol variation process 3 (S121) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This special symbol variation process 3 (S121) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

Among the special symbol variation processing 3 (see FIG. 94) in the third embodiment, in each processing of S201 to S221, each processing of S201 to S221 of the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28) The same processing is performed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 94) in the third embodiment, when the process of S219 is completed, an opening scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is selected from the opening scenario selection table 202e. A scenario selection process (S241) is executed, and the process proceeds to S220. Details of this open scenario selection process (S241) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the above-described open scenario selection process (S241). In the open scenario selection process (S241), first, the open scenario selection table 202e (see FIG. 92(a)) is read (S1901) to specify the open scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type (S1902). Next, the specified release scenario is stored in the release scenario storage area 203ba (S1903), and this processing ends.

According to the opening scenario specified in this opening scenario selection process (see FIG. 95) and stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba, the opening operation of each round during the jackpot can be set to an appropriate operation according to the jackpot type. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) will be described. This jackpot control process 3 (S1031) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the opening operation during the jackpot.

Among the jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 96) in the third embodiment, S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1112, respectively, in the jackpot control processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37) S1101 to S1105, , and the same processes as those of S1107 to S1112 are executed. Also, in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 96) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (See FIG. 38), instead of (S1131), the big hit operation setting process 3 is executed, and the process is terminated. The details of this jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the big hit operation setting process 3 (S1131). This jackpot action setting process 3 (S1131) is a process for setting the opening action according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Among the jackpot control processing 3 (S1131) in the third embodiment, each processing of S1202 to S1204 is the same processing as each processing of S1202 to S1204 of the jackpot operation setting processing (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. is executed.

Also, when the jackpot action setting process 3 (see FIG. 97) in the third embodiment is executed, first, the data of the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba is read (S1211), and the read data , the type of the specific winning opening to be opened in this round (the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a) and the opening time are specified (S1212). Next, the opening of the type of specific winning opening (left specific winning opening 656a or right specific winning opening 657a) specified in the process of S1212 is set (S1213), and the opening time specified in the process of S1212 is started this time. The round time of the round is set (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1202.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 97), the opening operation can be set accurately for each round according to the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 103. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 98, the jackpot related process 3 (S4221) executed by MPU 201 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. This jackpot related process 3 (S4221) is a process executed instead of the jackpot related process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment.

Of the jackpot related processing 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, in each of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408, the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment The same processes as those of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 are executed.

Also, in the jackpot related processing 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the opening command is received in the processing of S4401 (S4401: Yes), then whether or not the promotion effect is set , an opening command process for setting the corresponding opening effect is executed (S4411), and this process ends. The details of this opening command processing (S4411) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the jackpot-related process 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include the round number command in the process of S4403 (S4403: No), then it is determined whether the command received from main controller 110 includes a winning command (S4412). In the process of S4412, if it is determined that the winning command is included (S4412: Yes), the specific winning opening (left specific winning opening 656a, or A winning command process for setting a winning effect when a winning to the right specific winning port 657a) is detected is executed (S4413), and the process ends. The details of this winning command process (S4413) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4412 that no winning command is included (S4412: No), the process proceeds to S4405.

In addition, in the jackpot related processing 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the closing command has been received in the processing of S4405 (S4405: Yes), the closing command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 49), close command processing 3 is executed (S4414), and this processing ends. The details of this close command process 3 (S4414) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, details of the opening command processing (S4411) described above will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this opening command processing (S4411).

In this opening command process (see FIG. 99), first, it is determined whether the flag 223k during promotion effect is ON (S5201), and when it is determined that the flag 223k during promotion effect is ON (S5201: Yes), An opening effect (see FIG. 89(a)) corresponding to promotion effect is determined (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5204. On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if it is determined that the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is off (S5201: No), the opening effect of the mode corresponding to the type of this big hit is determined (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Transition. In addition, the mode according to the jackpot type is, in the case of the jackpots F3 and G3, a mode in which the door breakthrough mode effect is continued. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type other than jackpots F3 and G3, the effect is such that a jackpot is announced.

In the process of S5204, an opening command for display indicating the aspect of the opening effect determined in the process of S5202 or S5203 is set (S5204), and this process ends. By executing this opening command process, it is possible to execute the opening effect in an appropriate mode depending on whether or not the promotion effect is set.

Next, details of the winning command process (S4413) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. When this winning command process (S4413) is executed, first, it is determined whether the promotion effect flag 223k is ON (S5301), and if it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is ON (S5301: Yes ), the main pattern is bombarded by the cannon 815 (see FIG. 89(b)) (S5302), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5301, when it is determined that the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is off (S5301: No), the normal mode winning effect is set (S5303), and this process ends. Note that the prize-winning effect in the normal mode indicates a effect suggesting the acquisition of a prize ball, and for example, the effect of winning a gold coin or the effect of displaying the characters "GET" is executed.

By executing this winning command process (see FIG. 100), every time a ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a in one round of a jackpot in which a promotion effect is set, the main pattern is stepped by the bombardment effect. can be masked with smoke images. By executing an effect in which the main pattern is hidden and it is not known whether the player will be promoted or not, the player's expectation for the promotion can be further enhanced.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the notification as to whether or not the player is promoted is performed in the interval period after the end of one round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, every time a ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to report the result. , or after 30 seconds have passed), the result may be notified. Further, for example, when the execution of the promotion effect is determined, it may be determined by lottery together with the number of wins to the left specific winning opening 656a to notify the result of the promotion effect. By configuring in this way, every time the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a, the player can expect to be notified of the promotion. It is possible to further improve the interest of the person. Furthermore, in the case where the result of the promotion presentation can be notified even if the termination condition of the first round is not satisfied, the notification of the result before the termination condition is satisfied may be limited to the case of promotion. . That is, when the promotion fails, the failure of the promotion is always notified in the interval period after the end of the first round. A configuration may be adopted in which notification is made when the number of wins is less than the upper limit number of wins for 656a. By configuring in this way, while expecting to be notified of promotion for each prize winning to the left specific prize opening 656a, if promotion fails, expectations for promotion will be longer (until the end of one round). can be sustained.

Next, the details of the close command process 3 (S4414) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This close command process 3 (S4414) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the close command process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment.

Of the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, each process of S4502 to S4505 is the same as each process of S4502 to S4505 of the closing command process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed.

Also, when the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment is started, first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is ON (S4511). In the process of S4511, if it is determined that the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is ON (S4511: Yes), it means that the end condition of the first round of the big win in which the promotion effect is set is established. That is, it means that it is time to inform the result of the promotion effect, so next, it is determined whether the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots B3, C3, or E3 (S4512). In the processing of S4512, if it is determined that none of the jackpots B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: No), it is determined that the jackpot type for which the promotion effect is set this time is the jackpot A3, D3, or H3. means. In other words, it means that it is a jackpot type that succeeds in promotion, so in this case, an interval effect (see FIG. 90(b)) is set (S4513) to notify success in promotion, and the process proceeds to S4515. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S4512, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: Yes), it means that it is a jackpot type that fails to promote, An interval effect is set to notify of promotion failure (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4515. In the process of S4515, by turning off the promotion effect in progress flag 223k, the end of the promotion effect is set (S4515), and this process ends.

Further, in the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, in the process of S4511, if it is determined that the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is off (S4511: No), then the jackpot during execution is the jackpot F3 or G3 (S4516). In the process of S4516, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed is either the jackpot F3 or G3 (S4516: Yes), the process proceeds to S4502. On the other hand, in the processing of S4516, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed is neither the jackpot F3 nor G3 (S4516: No), the interval production in a manner corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S4517), and the processing is executed. finish.

By executing this closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101), when the end condition of the promotion effect is met (the end timing of one round is reached), the result of an appropriate mode according to the jackpot type is notified. be able to.

Next, details of the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 3 (S4131) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. In the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) in the third embodiment, the processes in S4801 to S4809 are the same as the processes in S4801 to S4809 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed.

In addition, in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4803 ends, the promotion effect lottery process for determining (lottery) whether or not the promotion effect can be executed is executed (S4821). ), and the process proceeds to S4804. Details of this promotion effect lottery process (S4821) will be described with reference to FIG.

In the promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 103), first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that notifies any of the jackpots A3 to E3, H3 (S5401), and the jackpots A3 to H3, E3. If it is determined that it is not a variation pattern that notifies any of them (that is, it is either a miss or a big hit F3 or G3) (S5401: No), there is no possibility of executing the promotion effect, so this processing is performed as it is. exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S5401, when it is determined that the variation pattern is one of the big hits A3 to E3, H3 (S5401: Yes), the process for drawing lots to determine whether promotion effects can be executed is executed. Specifically, first, the promotion effect lottery table 222b is read (S5402). By determining whether or not there is a matching value, it is determined (lottery) whether or not promotion effect can be executed (S5403). Then, it is determined whether or not execution of the promotion effect is determined by the determination (lottery) by the processing of S5403 (S5404).

In the process of S5404, when it is determined that execution of the promotion effect has not been determined (S5404: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5404, if it is determined that the execution of the promotion effect is determined (S5404: Yes), the execution of the promotion effect is indicated by setting the flag 223k during promotion effect to ON (S5405), and then this time It is determined whether the jackpot type is either jackpot E3 or H3 (S5406).

In the processing of S5406, if it is determined that neither the jackpot E3 nor the H3 is the jackpot, it means that the first special pattern is a jackpot and the execution of the promotion effect is decided, so the third pattern imitating an even number is changed. It is set to the stop pattern at the time of stop (S5407), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in the process of S5406, if it is determined that it is either the jackpot E3 or H3 (S5406: Yes), it means that the second special symbol jackpot and the execution of the promotion effect have been decided. A third symbol simulating an odd number other than "7" is set as a stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop (S5408), and this process is terminated.

By this promotion effect lottery processing (see FIG. 103), it is possible to determine whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery), and to set the stop pattern when winning the promotion effect.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the ball can be entered (easy to enter) when hitting to the left, and the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) when hitting to the right. and a right specific winning hole 657a in which the ball can enter the ball (easy to enter) when hitting to the right and cannot enter the ball (difficult to enter) when hitting to the left. It is configured to provide two types of specific winning holes. When the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a during the jackpot, the prize ball is paid out, and the ball passes through the probability variable switch 65e3 inside the left variable winning device 656, so that after the jackpot, a special symbol is obtained. The probability change state is given. On the other hand, when the ball enters the right specific winning hole 657a, the same number of prize balls as when the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a are paid out, but the game state is set after the big win. does not affect In addition, in the third embodiment, as the type of jackpot, left-handed jackpots in which only the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds (left-handed hits in all rounds win more prize balls than right-handed hits). A jackpot that makes it easier to win more), the left specific prize winning port 656a is opened in the first round, and the right specific prize winning port 657a is opened in other rounds (the right specific prize winning port 657a is easy to open). From the second round onwards, a jackpot that makes it easier to win more prize balls by hitting with the right than with hitting with the left) is provided. In the left-handed jackpot, it is not necessary to hit the right during the jackpot (there are few opportunities to hit the right), so it is difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls during the jackpot, while in the right-handed jackpot, two Since the prize ball cannot be obtained (becomes difficult) unless the ball is hit rightward after the round, it becomes easier to accumulate the second special symbol reserved ball during the big win. Therefore, when a left-handed jackpot hits, it becomes difficult to draw a lottery of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous after the jackpot ends (the possibility that the jackpot of the second special pattern is suspended at the end of the jackpot is reduced. ) On the other hand, when a right-handed jackpot hits, it becomes easier to draw a lottery with a second special symbol that is disadvantageous after the jackpot ends (there is a possibility that the jackpot of the second special pattern is suspended at the end of the jackpot). is higher than the left-handed jackpot). As a result, after the left-handed jackpot is finished, the game can be played without anxiety until the next jackpot is won. On the other hand, after the right hitting jackpot is finished, the game can be played in anticipation of not getting a jackpot until all the lotteries of the second special symbols that are disadvantageous based on the reserved balls of the second special patterns are finished. As described above, in the third embodiment, it is possible to switch the playability after the end of the big win according to the kind of the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition to the number of rounds of the big win and the game state set after the big win, the easiness of executing the lottery of the second special symbol after the big win (the easiness of holding a series of games) is also variable according to the kind of the big win. can be done. This makes it possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. Therefore, when the most advantageous left-handed jackpot hits, the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

Further, in the third embodiment, the promotion effect can be executed from the opening period of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. That is, even after passing through the variable probability switch 65e3, the promotion effect is continued. By configuring in this way, after the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 and the variable probability state is confirmed, the result of the promotion performance can be made to pay attention, so that the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3. After that, you can draw attention to the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the big win from becoming a mere work to get the prize balls, so that the interest in the game during the big win can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round of the jackpot regardless of whether it is a right-handed jackpot or a left-handed jackpot. The round and the number of times the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in the case may be arbitrarily determined. In the case of right-handed jackpots, when the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in rounds other than the first round, the opening of the right specific winning opening 657a in the first round causes the first round to start. At that point, the type of jackpot will be known. Therefore, the promotion performance should be executed in the opening period while the jackpot type is unknown.

In the third embodiment, two types of variable winning devices, the left variable winning device 656 and the right variable winning device 657, are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13, respectively. A variable winning device may be provided only on the right side of the board 13 . A storage valve 63a may be provided upstream of the second ball inlet 640 in the same manner as in the modification of the second embodiment described above. Then, instead of providing a left-handed big hit and a right-handed big hit, the storage state of the storage valve 63a is maintained during the big win (that is, even if a right-handed hit is made during the big win, the ball reaches the second ball entrance 640). impossible) and a jackpot type in which the stored state is canceled (that is, the ball can reach the second ball entrance 640 when hitting right during the jackpot). By configuring in this way, the number of variable winning devices can be reduced, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, as the promotion effect, the effect of bombarding the third symbol with the cannon 815 is executed, but the effect mode of the promotion effect is not limited to this. Any production mode may be set as long as it is possible to inform the player of two types of modes of promotion success and failure in an easy-to-understand manner. An effect may be executed in which the player 811 attacks the third symbol to promote the symbol. Also, the promotion effect is not limited to the effect of promoting the third symbol. For example, without displaying the third symbol, an effect of a battle between the adventurer 811 and the enemy may be performed, and a left-handed hit jackpot may be announced by winning the enemy. As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom in production.

In the third embodiment, the timing of notifying the result of the promotion effect is set to the end timing of the first round, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls have won in the left specific winning hole 656a, the result of the promotion effect may be notified. Also, the number of prizes to be won, which triggers the notification of the result, need not be fixed, and may be determined by lottery, for example. In this case, it is also possible to set the number of prizes that are highly selected in the case of a left-handed jackpot or the number of prizes that are highly selected in the case of a right-handed jackpot. By configuring in this way, the player who wants to perceive the jackpot type (whether it is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot) at an early stage according to the timing when the result of the promotion effect is notified, is able to specify the left side. A game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole 656a. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot.

In the third embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the promotion performance by lottery when the jackpot is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to always execute the promotion performance. As a result, the lottery process for the promotion effect can be omitted, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, for example, when a right-handed hit hits the jackpot, the promotion performance is executed in a mode of failing in promotion without fail, and when a left-handed hit hits the jackpot, a lottery draws the number "7" in the variable display performance. or to display the main pattern simulating an even-numbered number once, and to decide whether to promote to the third pattern simulating the number ``7'' by the promotion effect. may be By constructing in this way, when a right-handed jackpot hits, it is possible to play a game during the jackpot in anticipation of promotion every time. Further, for all the jackpot types, the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot type may be definitely displayed by the variable display effect without executing the promotion effect. As a result, any performance can be executed during the opening period of the jackpot or in the first round, so that the degree of freedom of performance can be increased.

In the third embodiment, when the first special pattern lottery results in a left-handed jackpot and the promotion effect is executed, the third pattern imitating an even number is definitely displayed in the variable display effect. , but not limited to these. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a third symbol imitating an odd number other than "7" is confirmed and displayed, and is promoted to a main symbol imitating the number "7" by promotion effect. In addition, in the third embodiment, the promotion effect is executed from the opening period of the jackpot to one round of the jackpot, but it is not limited to this. For example, the promotion performance may be executed within the fluctuation period of the variable display performance for notifying the big win, or the promotion performance may be executed over the fluctuation period and the opening period of the big win.

In the third embodiment, the promotion performance is configured to be executed as a performance for informing whether a left-handed big win or a right-handed big win, but there is no distinction between a left-handed big win and a right-handed big win. It may be configured to be applied to the machine 10 (for example, a general gaming machine in which a variable probability jackpot and a normal jackpot exist). More specifically, for example, when a probability variable jackpot is won, the third pattern imitating an even-numbered number or the third pattern imitating an odd-numbered number is definitely displayed by a variable display effect. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, the third pattern imitating an even-numbered number is determined and displayed by a variable display effect. Then, when the probability variable jackpot and the third pattern simulating an even-numbered number are determined and displayed, the structure may be such that promotion performance is executed to promote to the third pattern simulating an odd-numbered number after that. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, a configuration may be adopted in which a promotion effect in which promotion fails is executed at a predetermined rate. As a result, the versatility of the promotion performance can be enhanced.

In the third embodiment, the probability variable switch 65e3 is provided only inside the left variable winning device 656, and if the ball is not entered into the left variable winning device 656 during the big win, the variable probability state of the special symbol is given after the big win. It was configured to not be. That is, even in the case of a right-handed jackpot, in the first round, the game is played aiming at the left variable winning device 656 by left-handed hitting, but it is not limited to this. For example, inside the right variable winning device 657, similarly to the left variable winning device 656, the variable probability switch 65e3 may be provided. Then, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, only the right variable winning device 657 may be configured to be in a state in which the ball can be entered in all rounds. With this configuration, when a right-handed hit is a big hit, the ball is passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 by left-handed hit only in the first round and a prize ball is obtained, and in the remaining rounds, the shooting of the ball is stopped. It can prevent the method from being performed. That is, in order to avoid the ball from entering the second ball hole 640 during the right-handed jackpot, the ball is launched only in the round (first round) in which the ball can be entered into the left specific winning hole 656a. An irregular game method can be suppressed. When this irregular game method is executed, the number of prize balls obtained in the right-handed jackpot is small (only one round's worth is obtained), but since the second special symbol lottery is not executed, it is usually No falling into mode. Therefore, the probability-variable state continues semipermanently, and there is a risk of giving unexpected disadvantages to the hole. On the other hand, in the right-handed jackpot, only the right variable winning device 657 is set to be able to enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hole.

In the third embodiment, by varying the ease with which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a big win according to the type of the big win, It was configured to vary the possibility of including a big hit (so-called possibility of occurrence of a reservation inside the house). That is, by switching the direction in which prize balls can be obtained by shooting balls according to the type of jackpot, it was configured to physically change the possibility of occurrence of a pending inner ring, but this is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ease of occurrence of a reservation within the reservation is variable by control. More specifically, for example, in the same way as in the first embodiment, only on the right side of the game board 13 is provided a specific winning hole for winning a prize ball during a big hit, and the variable state of special symbols and The number of lotteries may be changed according to the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot where the number of times of lottery to be in the variable probability state is 1 and a jackpot where the number of draws is 4) may be configured. By configuring in this way, in the case of a jackpot type in which the number of times of lottery to be in a probability variable state is one, the probability of winning a big hit in the second and subsequent special symbol lotteries is low, so even the first lottery is lost. If so, the possibility of being out of all lotteries based on reserved balls increases. On the other hand, when the number of lotteries to be in the probability variable state is four times, all the lotteries based on the second special symbol reserved ball are executed in the probability variable state of the special symbol, so that they are suspended at the end of the big win. A lottery based on the reserved ball increases the possibility of winning a big hit. Therefore, the operation similar to that of the above-described third embodiment can be realized with only one variable winning device. It should be noted that, as in this modification, if the variable probability state is terminated with the number of times of lottery predetermined according to the jackpot type, for example, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is all out. As a privilege in this case, it may be configured so as to be in a time-saving state of normal symbols. In other words, the number of lotteries that become the probability variation state of the special symbols and the number of lotteries that become the time-saving state of the normal symbols are different, and regardless of the number of lotteries that become the probability variation state of the special symbols, for example, 100 times of special symbol lotteries What is necessary is just to constitute so that it may become the time-saving state of a normal design over until it is completed. In this case, as a more advantageous jackpot type, it may be possible to provide a jackpot type in which only the time saving state is given without the variable probability state of the special symbol. By constructing in this way, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol executed after the end of the big win can be performed in a low probability state of all the special symbols, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is all lost. can increase the chances of

In the third embodiment, a jackpot type in which reserved balls of the second special pattern are easily accumulated during the jackpot and a jackpot type in which it is difficult to accumulate are provided, so that the reserved balls that are reserved at the end of the jackpot win again. Although the possibility of becoming is made different for each jackpot type, it is not limited to this. For example, by providing a jackpot type in which reserved balls with normal patterns are easy to accumulate during a big win and a jackpot type in which reserved balls with normal patterns are difficult to collect during a big win, the number of reserved balls with normal patterns at the time of the end of the jackpot can be increased. It may be configured to vary the possibility of occurrence of a normal symbol hit after a big win. In addition, by varying the winning probability of the normal symbols after the big win according to the type of the big win, the normal symbols are kept for a predetermined period after the big win (for example, until all the reserved balls of the normal symbols are consumed at the end of the big win). A configuration may be adopted in which the ratio of winning the prize is changed according to the type of the jackpot. Also in this configuration, the degree of advantage of the player can be varied according to the type of jackpot, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the type of jackpot.

In the third embodiment, when the promotion effect is set, the ball enters the specific winning opening 656a in the first round, and even after it is confirmed that the special symbol will be in a variable state after the big hit, the ball Each time the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a, an effect (effect of bombarding the third symbol) is executed to arouse the expectation of promotion or not, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the promotion effect may be executed during the opening period of the jackpot. In the first round of the jackpot, an effect indicating that the left specific winning hole 656a is open (for example, an effect in which an image imitating the letter "V" is displayed) may be executed. good. By configuring in this way, the player does not notice that the big win has started, and continues to see the result of the promotion effect, and fails to enter the ball into the left specific winning hole 656a (variable probability big win). In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the fact that the variable probability state is no longer given after the big hit. In addition, for example, in the first round of the jackpot, the effect indicating that the left specific winning hole 656a is the round is displayed during the first round (even after the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a). , may continue to be executed, and the promotion performance may be executed after one round is completed. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to put the ball into the left specific winning hole 656a, so that the player can be prevented from being excessively disadvantaged. Furthermore, no promotion effect is executed (that is, the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot type is always stopped and displayed in the variable display), and the left specific prize winning opening 656a is opened during the jackpot. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the effect indicating whether or not is continuously executed during each round. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from hitting the ball in the wrong direction.

In the third embodiment, when the ball entered inside the left variable winning device 656 passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, the pachinko machine 10 with specs that shifts to the variable probability state after the end of the big win is one of the jackpots. After winning to the left specific winning port 656a in the round and confirming the variable probability state, the result of the promotion effect is notified, but the specs to which the promotion effect can be applied are not limited to this. do not have. If the specifications allow the player to transition to either an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state compared to the advantageous state at a predetermined opportunity, the promotion effect can be applied. For example, when a ball enters a specific area inside a variable prize winning device provided on a game board, a configuration may be adopted in which a promotion effect is applied to a pachinko machine 10 with specs that gives a jackpot. That is, in the lottery based on the start-up prize, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the ball can easily enter the variable prize winning device (whether or not the variable prize winning device can be moved). Even in such a case, the jackpot is not awarded unless the ball enters the variable winning device and the ball does not enter the specific area. In this specification, the type of jackpot given when a ball enters the specific area may be notified after the ball enters the specific area and the jackpot is confirmed. More specifically, at the time of winning the lottery for whether or not the variable prize winning device can be moved, lottery for the type of jackpot given when the ball enters the specific area and whether or not promotion performance can be executed are drawn. Then, when a lottery for promotion performance is won, even if an advantageous jackpot type is won, a third pattern combination (for example, the same even number) corresponding to a disadvantageous jackpot type is displayed. Then, when the ball is entered into the variable winning device while the variable winning device is actuated and the ball is allowed to enter, and the ball is entered into the specific area, it corresponds to the original jackpot type. An effect of displaying a third symbol combination (for example, promotion to the same odd number or maintaining the same even number) is executed. By configuring in this way, even after the ball enters the specific area, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance in anticipation of being notified of the advantageous jackpot type by the promotion performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from entering the specific area to finishing the big win from becoming like a work for simply winning a prize ball. In other words, since the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 not provided with the variable probability switch 65e3 (the game state after the big win is predetermined according to the type of the big win), the game state after the big win is finished can be notified by promotion effect. may In other words, during the jackpot, after making it difficult for the player to identify which of the time saving state and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot, part of the case where the time saving state is set and the probability variable state is set Then, it is notified that it has become a time saving state at the end of the jackpot. Then, when the variable probability state is set, the promotion effect is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the probability variable state is changed as a result of the promotion effect based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, when a predetermined number of starting prizes are detected). It is good also as composition which performs production which is promoted. Further, when the time-saving state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot and the promotion performance is executed, the promotion to the variable probability state may be failed based on a predetermined trigger. In addition, regarding the pachinko machine 10 in which the same opening pattern is set for the specific winning hole for the small win and the so-called sudden probability, when the small prize is once reported and the winning is sudden. , may be configured to notify promotion to sudden definite at a predetermined opportunity by promotion production. Furthermore, in the jackpot type in which an open pattern that can pass through the variable probability switch is set and the jackpot type in which an open pattern that cannot pass through the variable probability switch is set, an open pattern that cannot pass through the variable probability switch is set. It may be configured to notify the jackpot type and notify the promotion to the jackpot type in which an open pattern that can pass through the variable probability switch is set at a predetermined opportunity.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. In the above-described third embodiment, when the jackpot set with the promotion performance is started, the promotion performance is executed over the opening period of the jackpot, the first round period, and the interval period. In the promotion effect, the combination of the main symbols confirmed and displayed in the variable display effect for notifying the big win is promoted to the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the big win with a higher degree of advantage for the player. In the case of success, it was configured to inform that it was a more advantageous jackpot type.

On the other hand, in this modified example, during the execution period of the variable display for notifying the big win and the period from the start of the big win to the interval period of the first round, one variable display effect is executed in a pseudo manner. and Thus, in addition to whether or not a big win is achieved, the kind of big win (whether it is a left-handed big win or a right-handed big win) in the case of a big win can be notified by one variable display effect.

FIG. 104(a) is a display that can be displayed when a special symbol lottery results in a left-handed jackpot (either D3 or H3), and when a special symbol lottery results in a ready-to-win state. It is the figure which showed the aspect. As shown in FIG. 104(a), in this modification, when the ready-to-win state occurs, the characters "left-handed" and the image of the arrow pointing left are displayed on the upper left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. is displayed in the display area HR1. In addition, a display area HR5 is displayed in the upper center portion of the display screen, in which the characters "Hit to the left to stop the symbols!" are displayed. By these displays, the player can easily understand that the symbol will be stopped by shooting the ball to the left.

In the case of a big win, the display mode shown in FIG. 104(a) is set at the timing when the opening period of the big win is started. That is, in this modification, the third symbol is not stop-displayed even during the opening period of the jackpot, and the ready-to-win state remains. Under this circumstance, if the left-hand shot is not suggested, there is a possibility that the ball will be delayed toward the left specific winning hole 656a in the first round. If the hitting to the left specific winning hole 656a is delayed, there is a possibility that the ball cannot enter (the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3) during the opening period of the left specific winning hole 656a, resulting in a variable probability big win. Nevertheless, there is a possibility that the probability change state will not be given after the big hit. In order to prevent such a situation, in this modified example, when the opening period starts during execution of the variable display, an effect suggesting a left-hand shot (see FIG. 104(a)) is executed. In addition, in order to prevent (suppress) from being perceived whether it is a big hit or not from the display mode, even during the execution of the fluctuation display of the loss, a predetermined timing (for example, 1 second before the third symbol is confirmed and displayed) It is configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 104(a)) suggesting hitting to the left. As a result, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the game is a big win or a loss until the third symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be maintained for a longer period of time.

FIG. 104(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when either the big win D3 or H3 is achieved and all the third symbols are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 104(b), when the player hits left during the execution of the effect suggesting hitting left and the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a, the number "7" is displayed. An effect is executed in which the third pattern (main pattern) simulating is aligned. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that a left-handed hit has resulted in a big win. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which a big hit is notified based on the ball entering the left specific winning hole 656a, more attention is paid to the direction of the shot ball (whether the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a). You can play games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is lost and an effect suggesting left-handed hitting is executed, the left specific winning opening 656a is not opened, so the ball fired by left-handed hitting enters the left specific winning opening 656a. never do. In this case, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed since the effect suggesting a left-hand shot is executed, the stop symbols of the combination that is out (combination other than the squares) are stop-displayed.

In the example of FIG. 104, the case of the big wins D3 and G3 has been described, but the same effect is executed for other big wins. That is, when the jackpots A3 and E3 are obtained, an effect is executed in which the third symbols (main patterns) imitating odd numbers other than "7" are aligned, and when the jackpots B3 and C3 are obtained, even numbers are produced. An effect is executed in which the third pattern (main pattern) imitating the number of is aligned. In addition, even when the player is out of reach with a reach state, the reach state may occur with a number other than "7".

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing changes over time in the effect mode after the start of the variable display effect in the case of a big win in the lottery of special symbols and in the case of a loss accompanied by a ready-to-win state. First, with reference to FIG. 105(a), a description will be given of changes over time in the presentation mode when the jackpot is won.

FIG. 105(a) shows changes over time in the mode of presentation in the case of a super reach and a big win. As shown in FIG. 105(a), when the variable display corresponding to the big win is started, first, the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds, and then the ready-to-win state occurs after 10 seconds have passed. . After that, through normal reach performance for 20 seconds, super reach performance develops when 30 seconds pass from the start of fluctuation. Furthermore, after the super reach effect continues for 28 seconds, an effect suggesting left-handed hitting (left-handed navigation, see FIG. 104(a)) is displayed. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 105(a), at the time when the effect suggesting a left-handed hit is displayed, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display corresponding to the big win has actually passed, and the opening period of the big win has started. ing. Therefore, in the first symbol display device 37, the variable display of the first symbol (special symbol) ends when 58 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation, and a stop symbol indicating a big hit is displayed.

After one second of the opening period has passed and the ball enters the left specific winning port 656a after the left specific winning port 656a is opened, a third pattern ( An effect (see FIG. 104(b)) in which the main symbols are aligned is executed. Then, it is notified that the jackpot has been won, and an effect indicating that the jackpot is in progress is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 105(b), even if the lottery result is out with reach state, from the start of the variable display to the display of left-handed navigation (see FIG. 104(a)) is the same as in the case of a big hit (see FIG. 105(a)). Then, as shown in FIG. 105(b), in the case of misalignment, the combination of the third symbol indicating misalignment is stopped and displayed one second after left-handed navigation (see FIG. 104(a)) is displayed. Then, it is notified that it is out.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 105, the variation time in the case of a special symbol jackpot is set 2 seconds shorter than the variation time in the case of a loss. This is because, when the loss variation display is performed, the lottery result of the special symbol is announced within the variation display execution period, whereas when the win variation display is performed, the big win is announced. This is because the variable display is performed over the opening period and the period of the first round. If the same variation time is used for the jackpot and the loss, the timing to generate the left-handed navigation will be different between the case of the jackpot and the case of the loss, and the lottery result will be announced before the end of the variation effect due to the difference in the variation time. There is a risk of being detected. On the other hand, in this modified example, the variation time is longer for the missed game than for the big win, so the timing of displaying the left-handed navigation can be matched between the big win and the missed game. Therefore, it becomes difficult to perceive the lottery result of the special symbol from the fluctuation time, so that the result of the fluctuation display effect can be noticed.

As described above, in the modification of the third embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern, the opening period of the big hit, and the period of the first round 1 is configured to execute the variable display effect. By constructing in this way, not only whether it is a big win, but also the type of the big win can be notified in one variable display performance, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the variable display performance. can be done.

In addition, in this modification, when a big win is achieved in the variable display effect, it is configured to be in a ready-to-win state with the type of numbers corresponding to the type of big win. It is good also as a structure which draws lots. When execution of the promotion performance is determined, the promotion performance is performed by using the remaining period after the notification of the jackpot pattern in the first round of the jackpot and the interval period after the end of the first round. may be configured to execute By constructing in this way, even if the third symbols with even-numbered numbers are once arranged, the player can expect the promotion performance to be executed, so that the player's interest can be improved. .

In this modified example, during the opening period of the jackpot and the last two seconds of the variation pattern corresponding to the loss, an image suggesting a left-handed hit is displayed in the upper left display area HR1 of the display screen. It is not something that can be done. For example, an effect suggesting a left-handed shot to the player may be performed in a more conspicuous manner than the changing third symbol. Specifically, for example, instead of or in addition to the configuration of the above modification, the characters "Aim for V!" It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an image schematically shown is displayed. Then, when the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a (when the lottery result of this special symbol is a big win), an image in which the third symbols imitating the same numbers are displayed in a stopped state is displayed. As the background, an image simulating the letter "V" may be displayed on the front side of the third pattern. The display of the image simulating the letter "V" may be continued until, for example, one round is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to see the result of the effect without launching the ball until the end of the variable display. Therefore, when a big win is achieved, the ball can be more reliably entered into the left specific winning hole 656a in the first round. Further, for example, the changing third symbol may be displayed in a translucent manner so that the effect suggesting a left-handed shot is more conspicuous, or the third symbol may be temporarily hidden.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 112. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, it is configured to have a small hit with a high probability, and the opening period of the opening and closing door 65f1 in the case of a small hit, the jackpot E, The opening period of the opening/closing door 65f1 in each round of F is the same (0.2 seconds). Furthermore, the length of the interval period after the end of the 1st to 4th rounds of the big hits E and F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. . As a result, even if the big hit E or F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol that is reserved at the end of the big hit, or if all of them are out, the time until the door breakthrough mode effect ends. A series of opening and closing operations of the opening and closing door 65f1 are configured to be the same.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, there is a type of jackpot that the player can easily detect whether or not the result of the variation display of the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot is wrong, and a type that is difficult to detect. It was configured to provide a jackpot. As a result, depending on the type of jackpot, it is not possible to know whether or not the hit of the second special pattern was included until the result of the door breakthrough mode production is confirmed, and whether or not the door breakthrough mode production is executed. It is possible to switch between the playability that is easy to perceive inside.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. The ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment has a configuration of the first winning type selection table 202b and a configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d with respect to the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13(a)). It is different in that Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 106, in the fourth embodiment, five jackpot types A4 to E4 are provided as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. In addition, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of jackpots F4 to H4 are provided.

Jackpots A4, B4, D4, F4 to H4 are jackpot types that operate in the same manner as the jackpots A to F in the first embodiment. That is, the jackpots A4 and F4 are both jackpots with 16 rounds, the jackpot B4 is a jackpot with 5 rounds, and the jackpot D4 is a jackpot with 2 rounds. When these big wins occur, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 30 seconds at maximum in each round, so that a large amount of prize balls can be acquired during the big win and the balls can be easily passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win. can be done. Also, the jackpot G4 is a jackpot with 7 rounds, and the jackpot H4 is a jackpot with 6 rounds. When these jackpots are hit, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened only for 0.2 seconds at the maximum in each round, so it is almost impossible to obtain a prize ball, and there is almost no possibility that the ball will pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot. do not have.

The jackpot C4 has the same operation as the jackpot B4 (5 rounds jackpot), but after the jackpot is over, whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol is lost during the execution of the variable display based on the held ball of the second special symbol. easier to distinguish. More specifically, when the jackpot C4 is reached, after the jackpot ends, if the second special symbol lottery is lost, a variable time (3 seconds) are more likely to be selected. Therefore, by observing the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) is opened, it is possible to guess whether or not the lottery for the special symbol has been lost. In other words, when the player feels that the interval at which the specific winning port 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) is opened after the big win clearly exceeds 1 second, the opening of the special symbol this time becomes a miss (small win). It can be made to recognize that there is a high possibility that the opening is based on the fact that

Also, the jackpot E4 has the same operation as the jackpot D4 (two-round jackpot), but is a jackpot type that makes it easy to determine whether or not the lottery for the second special pattern is lost after the jackpot is finished, like the jackpot C4.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot C4 or jackpot E4 is achieved, by observing the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) is opened, it is possible to determine whether or not it has come off. is configured so that it can be inferred. As a result, after the jackpot is over, not only the content of the door breakthrough mode effect but also the opening interval of the specific prize winning port 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) can be noticed during the game. In particular, during the execution of the production in which there is a high risk of winning a jackpot with the second special symbol that is disadvantageous (the production of trying to open the door 814 using the tattered key 813). When the player feels that the opening interval of the winning opening 65a exceeds one second, the possibility that the current fluctuation is the fluctuation display corresponding to the loss increases, so that the player can be relieved. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the big wins (jackpots C4, E4) from which it is easy to guess whether or not the lottery of the second special symbols executed after the big wins will be lost will be referred to as "special wins."

On the other hand, when it comes to big hits A4, B4, D4, F4, as in the first embodiment, whether the lottery result of the second special symbol executed after the big win is lost (small win) or big win. is impossible (difficult) to identify from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, depending on the jackpot type, it is not possible to know whether the hit of the second special symbol was included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is confirmed, and whether it is out. Since it is possible to switch between easily perceivable game characteristics during execution of the door breaking mode effect, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the operation during the big win (opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a, display mode of the third symbol display device 81) is configured to be exactly the same between the big win B4 and the big win C4. there is Similarly, the big win D4 and the big win E4 are configured so that the operation during the big win is exactly the same. For this reason, when the jackpot ends in the 2nd round or the 5th round, it is not possible to know whether the hit of the second special pattern was included until the result of the door breakthrough mode production is confirmed, and whether it has come off. It becomes difficult to identify which is set, whether it is the playability which is easy to perceive during execution of the door breaking mode effect. Therefore, even if the same period as the interval period is continuously set as the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened, whether the winning of the second special symbol is included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is confirmed. It is possible to make the player think that the game is set with an unknown playability. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of shifting to the variable probability mode until the door breakthrough mode effect is completed.

As shown in FIG. 106, for the first special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 "0 to 9" is defined in association with "jackpot A4", and "10 to 19 ” is defined in association with “jackpot B4”, the range of “20 to 89” is defined in association with “jackpot C4”, and the range of “90, 91” is defined in association with “jackpot D4” is defined in correspondence, and the range of “92 to 99” is defined in association with “jackpot E4”. That is, in the 5-round jackpots, the ``jackpot B4'' and the ``jackpot C4'' are configured so that the ``jackpot C4'' (special prize) is selected at a higher rate (7 times more likely to be selected). . In addition, in the 2-round jackpot "jackpot D4" and "jackpot E4", the "jackpot E4" (special win) is more likely to be selected (5 times more likely to be selected). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set a game property in which it is easy to perceive whether or not the player has come off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, after the big win is over, the game can be played while paying more attention to the operation of the specific winning hole 65a.

The range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each of the jackpots F4 to H4 is the same as the jackpots D to F in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 107(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107(a), the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(a)). The difference is that a post-hit table 202d8 and a special post-hits table 202d9 are added.

The table 202d8 for post-special winning wins a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbols within a range of 4 times or less of the special symbols executed after the special winning (jackpot C4 or E4) is completed. is a data table referenced by In addition, the table 202d9 for loss after the special win is in the range where the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the end of the special win is 4 times or less, when the second special symbol lottery results in a loss (small win). is a data table referenced by The details of the special hit/return table 202d8 and the special hit/return table 202d9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107(b) and 107(c).

FIG. 107(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 202d8 for special hits and subsequent hits. As shown in FIG. 107(b), in the table 202d8 for special hits and subsequent hits, the value "0" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with "hit middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. , and the range of "1 to 198" are defined in association with "per hit short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 1 second. Therefore, if the second special symbol lottery is a big hit after the end of the special hit, the fluctuation time of 1 second is set with a high probability (198/199), but with a low probability (1/199) A variation time of 3 seconds may be set. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set (the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a becomes 3 seconds), it is not determined that the lottery result of the loss (small hit) is obtained, but the big hit. There is also a possibility of becoming.

FIG. 107(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 202d9 for special hits and losses. As shown in FIG. 107(c), in the table 202d9 for special hits and losses, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 66" corresponds to "losing middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. The range of "67 to 198" is defined in association with "off-short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 1 second. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery results in a loss (small hit) after the special hit, a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set at a rate of about 34% (67/199). That is, the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a becomes 3 seconds or longer. As described above, when the second special symbol lottery after the special hit results in a big win, the variation time of 3 seconds is selected only with a very low probability, so the variation time is 3 seconds ( When the player recognizes that the time has exceeded 1 second), it can be made to think that the variable display currently being executed is likely to be the variable display corresponding to the loss. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property that the possibility of shifting to the probability variable mode can be predicted from the set variable time during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 108, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 108, the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment has a variation number counter 203ca and a post-special hit flag 203cb added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18). They are different in that respect.

The fluctuation number counter 203ca is a counter that counts the number of special symbol fluctuation displays (special symbol lottery) executed after the big hit. The initial value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the special symbol fluctuation start timing comes (see S2001 in FIG. 110 and S2201 in FIG. 112). In addition, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the initial value is reset to 0 (see S253 in FIG. 109). When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, one data table for determining the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the value of the variation number counter 203ca (Fig. 111 S2103, S2109).

The post-special win flag 203cb is a flag indicating whether or not the previous big win was a special win (big win C3 or E3). If this post-special win flag 203cb is ON, it means that the previous big win is a special win, and if it is OFF, it means that the previous big win is not a special win. The initial value of the special winning flag 203cb is set to OFF, and is updated according to the jackpot type at the start of the jackpot (see S254 in FIG. 109). When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, this post-special winning flag 203cb is referred to, and one data table for determining the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d (Fig. 111 (See S2105 and S2111). In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the update of the special winning flag 203cb is configured to be executed when setting the start of the big win, but it may be set at the end of the big win.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 109 to 112. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 109, special symbol variation processing 4 (S131) in the fourth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 4 (S131) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

Of the special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, in each of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221, the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28) ) are executed in steps S201-212, S214-S218, S220, and S221.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S207 ends, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol is performed. Execute (S251) and terminate this process. Details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S251) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S212 is completed, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed (S252), and the process ends. The details of this special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S252) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big hit in the processing of S218 (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is reset to OFF. At the same time, the fluctuation number counter 203ca is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S253). Next, according to the type of the jackpot won this time, the post-special winning flag 203cb is updated (S254), and the process proceeds to S220. In the process of S254, the post-special win flag 203cb is set to ON when the special win (either of the jackpot C3 or E3) is won this time, and is set to OFF when the other jackpot types are selected. By switching the state of the post-special-hit flag 203cb according to the type of big win, the data table to be referred to for selecting the variation pattern can be switched according to the state of the post-special-hit flag 203cb after the end of the big win. Therefore, if the post-special hit flag 203cb is on, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol after the big win, the table 202d8 for post-special hit and the table 202d9 for loss after special hit are referred to for the variation pattern. is determined, a game property is set in which it can be relatively easily guessed whether or not the player is out based on the opening interval of the specific winning hole 65a. Further, if the post-special win flag 203cb is off, a game property is set in which it is difficult to identify whether the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big win wins or loses from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. .

Next, with reference to Drawing 110, the details of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S251) mentioned above are explained. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S251) is, as described above, a process for starting the fluctuation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol.

In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 110), first, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is updated by adding 1 (S2001), and the data of the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired. (S2002). Next, the variable probability flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols (S2003). In the process of S2003, if the probability variation flag 203g is ON, it is determined that the probability variation state of the special symbol is present, and if the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, the special symbol low probability state is determined. In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol (S2003: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S2002 and the special symbol for high probability time Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained (S2004). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 13(b)). As described above, 40 random numbers from "0 to 39" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number that becomes the winning. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S2006.

On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variable state (it is in the special symbol low probability state) (S2003: No), the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S2002 and the first winning random number table for low probability (see FIG. 13(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S2005). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, "0 to 39"), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S2006.

Then, special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S2004 or S2005 (S2006). The details of this special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) ends, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is set ( S2007). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 223f (S2008). Then, the stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is set (S2009), and this process ends. These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 36).

Next, with reference to Drawing 111, the details of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern decision processing (S2006) mentioned above are explained. This special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S2006) is, as described above, a processing for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

In this special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit (S2101), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (S2101: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2002 of the process (see FIG. 110), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S2102). More specifically, the value of the first per type counter C2 obtained in the process of S2002 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 110) and the first per type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106) are compared. , to determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is a big hit F4 (16 round probability variable big hit). If it is in the range of "5 to 49", it is judged to be a jackpot G4 (7 rounds normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is judged to be a jackpot H4 (6 rounds normal jackpot) Determine (see FIG. 106).

In the process of S2102, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot F4 to H4). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot F4 to H4) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

When the process of S2102 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2103), and if it is 5 or more (S2103: Yes), from the variation pattern selection table 202d, per special figure 2 (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d5 is read (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2114.

On the other hand, in the process of S2103, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2103: No), it is determined whether the special hit flag 203cb is on (S2105), and the special hit flag If 203cb is on (S2105: Yes), from the variation pattern selection table 202d, read the table 202d8 for special hit after hit (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2114. Also, in the process of S2105, if it is determined that the flag 203cb after the special hit is off (S2105: No), from the variation pattern selection table 202d, read the table 202d4 for special figure 2 (4 variations or less) ( S2107), and the process proceeds to S2114.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is lost (S2101: No), first, the display mode at the time of loss is set (S2108). In the process of S2108, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, the third symbol display device As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front-rear out-of-reach, non-front-rear out-of-reach, or complete out-of-reach.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2109), and if it is determined that it is 5 or more (S2109: Yes), the special figure 2 is removed from the variation pattern selection table 202d (5 variations or more ) table 202d7 (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2114. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2109: No), it is determined whether the special hit flag 203cb is on (S2111), and after the special hit If the flag 203cb is ON (S2111: Yes), the table 202d9 for special hits and after-out is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2112), and the process proceeds to S2114. Also, in the process of S2111, if it is determined that the flag 203cb after the special hit is off (S2111: No), read the table 202d6 for special figure 2 off (4 variations or less) from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2113 ), and the process proceeds to S2114.

In the process of S2114, based on the data table read out by any of the processes of S2104, S2106, S2107, S2110, S2112, and S2113 and the value of the variation type counter CS1, the lottery result of this special symbol is determined. The variation pattern to be shown is determined (S2114), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S252) described above will be described. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S252) is, as described above, a process for starting the fluctuation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol.

Of this special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 112), S2201 ~ S2205, and in each process of S2214 ~ S2216, S2001 ~ S2005 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see Figure 110), and S2007 ~ The same processing as each processing of S2009 is executed.

Also, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 112), when the process of S2204 or S2205 is completed, it is then determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained in the process of S2204 or S2205 is a big hit ( S2206), when it is determined that it is a big hit (S2206: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S2207). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106) to determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is a big hit A4 (16 round probability variable big hit). If it is in the range of "10 to 19", it is determined to be a jackpot B4 (5 rounds of variable probability), and if it is in the range of "20 to 89", it is a jackpot C4 (5 rounds special hit). If it is in the range of "90, 91", it is determined to be a jackpot D4 (2 rounds of variable probability), and if it is in the range of "92 to 99", it is a jackpot E4 (2 rounds special hit). Determine (see FIG. 106).

In the process of S2207, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A4 to E4). Also, in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpots A4 to E4) are set as the stop types. When the process of S2207 is completed, the table 202d1 for per special figure is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2208), and the process proceeds to S2213.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2206 that the obtained lottery result is a loss (S2206: No), the display mode for a loss is set (S2209). In the process of S2209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, the third symbol display device As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front-rear out-of-reach, non-front-rear out-of-reach, or complete out-of-order.

Next, it is determined whether it is in the probability variation state of the special symbol from the state of the probability variation flag 203g (S2210), and if it is determined that it is in the probability variation state (S2210: Yes), the special figure 1 is removed from the variation pattern selection table 202d The (probability variation) table 202d3 is read (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, in the process of S2210, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in the probability variation state (S2210: No), read out the special figure 1 off (normal) table 202d2 from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2212), and process to S2213.

In the process of S2213, the data table read out by any of the processes of S2208, S2211, or S2212 and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S2213), and the process proceeds to S2214. do.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a jackpot of a type that allows the player to easily perceive whether or not the result of the variation display of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot ends is wrong, It is configured to provide a jackpot of a type that is difficult to perceive. More specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big win is lost, the variation time of the period different from the interval period of the second special symbol is likely to be selected (special winning). and a jackpot type that is difficult to select. As a result, after the special win is over, the player can guess whether or not the lottery result is a loss by paying attention to the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1. That is, the player can be made to predict the possibility of shifting to the variable probability mode before the result of the door breaking mode effect is notified. On the other hand, after the end of the big win other than the special win, it is determined from the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 whether the opening/closing operation is due to continuous small wins or the opening/closing motion is due to the big win G4 or H4. becomes difficult. As a result, depending on the type of jackpot, it is not possible to know whether or not the hit of the second special pattern was included until the result of the door breakthrough mode production is confirmed, and whether or not the door breakthrough mode production is executed. It is possible to switch between the playability that is easy to perceive inside. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery after the special hit is lost (small hit), it is longer than the interval period (1 second) of the second special symbol jackpot (3 seconds However, the variable time (that is, the interval until the open/close door 65f1 is opened in the event of disconnection) is limited to this. not a thing It may be set arbitrarily within a range in which the player can determine that a period different from the interval period has been set. With this configuration, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened and closed at clearly short intervals, so there is a high possibility that the opening/closing of the opening/closing door 65f1 is due to a small win for the player. I can make you think. Therefore, the game can be played while paying more attention to the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 65f1. In addition to the open/close door 65f1, a variable member capable of variable operation is provided, and the variable operation of the variable member is determined depending on whether it is a loss after a special win or a big win other than a special win. It is good also as a structure which makes it different.

In the fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the pachinko machine 10 is disadvantageous to the player when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win. It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 which is advantageous. By configuring in this way, the more the open/close door 65f1 is opened at intervals of one second after the end of the big win, the higher the expectation for the big win of the advantageous second special symbol becomes. The player can be made to pay attention to the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 while playing the game.

In the fourth embodiment, there are provided a jackpot type in which the variable operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 after the jackpot ends is likely to be different from that in the jackpot, and a jackpot type that tends to be the same variable operation. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the mode of the effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to provide a jackpot type that tends to be different between the case of losing and the case of a jackpot, and a jackpot type that is likely to match. Also, for example, depending on the type of big win, the probability of a small win (that is, the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds)) probability in the case of a loss in the special symbol lottery may be different. It may be configured to allow As a result, the game can be played with the expectation that the opening/closing door 65f1 will not be opened (that is, it will come off).

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 139. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the variable probability switch 65e3 of the special discharge flow path 65e2 When the ball passes through, the game state after the big hit is set to a variable probability mode (variable probability state of special symbols and time saving state of normal symbols) advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, instead of the variable winning device 65, a V winning device 670 having the same external appearance and internal structure as the variable winning device 65 and different functions of each part is provided. ing. The V winning device 670 opens the opening/closing door 670f1 when a special symbol lottery results in a small win, so that a game ball can enter. Inside the V winning device 670, a V winning switch 670e3 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable probability switch 65e3 in the first embodiment. A game ball that enters the V winning device 670 during the open period of the opening/closing door 670f1 passes through the V winning switch 670e3, so that a big winning game is awarded after the small winning ends. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the special symbol lottery results in a small win and the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3 in the V prize device 670. It is configured so that the jackpot is started even when it is done. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the small hit is won with a high probability (for example, 9/10) only in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 6400). (The second special symbol lottery is easier to win a small prize than the first special symbol lottery), and the ease of entering the second ball entrance 6400 according to the game state is improved. It is configured to be variable. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the special symbol lottery is fixed regardless of the game state, and the opening probability of the electric accessory 6400a associated with the second ball entrance 6400 (normal symbol winning and (probability of winning), normal symbol fluctuation time, opening time, etc., are varied according to the game state, so that the possibility of winning a small win is changed according to the game state, resulting in a possibility of winning a big win. are different (so-called specifications of a 1-type 2-type mixer).

Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is configured to provide three types of game states. Specifically, a time-saving gaming state A in which it is easy to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, a normal game state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, and Three types of time saving game state B are provided. In the time-saving game state A, by playing a game aiming at the second ball entrance 6400, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 6400 with a high probability, and the second ball can be played with almost no reduction in the number of balls held. A lottery of special symbols can be executed continuously. In addition, when the jackpot is achieved in the time-saving gaming state A, the time-saving gaming state A is entered again at a high rate (80% rate). easier to repeat. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state A becomes a gaming state that is extremely advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal game state, since it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, it becomes difficult to generate a V prize due to a small hit. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a big hit becomes low. In addition, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the ratio of shifting to the time-saving game state after the big win is also low (for example, 50% ratio), so the normal game state is the most disadvantageous for the player. becomes. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state B, it is the same as the normal game state in that it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, but when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the time-saving game state Since the rate of shifting to the game state A is the highest (for example, 100% rate), the state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when a big win is made in the time saving game state A, either the time saving game state A or the time saving game state B is set as the game state after the big win. By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving game state A is not set, it becomes the time-saving game state B that is more advantageous than the normal game state (it is easy to shift to the time-saving game state A when it becomes a big hit). , it is possible to prevent the player from immediately quitting the game when the time-saving game state A ends. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the following description of the fifth embodiment, the most disadvantageous normal game state is called "normal mode", the most advantageous time-saving game state A is called "renso mode", and it is disadvantageous during the stay, but it goes to consecutive house mode. The time-saving game state B, which is easy to shift to, is called a “pullback mode”.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 , the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 113, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 113 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 113, in the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment, the electric accessory 64a that is provided in association with the first ball entrance 64 according to the first embodiment is removed. Note that the first ball entrance 64 in the fifth embodiment receives a game ball that is shot (left-handed) toward a flow path that is provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. While it becomes possible to enter a ball, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter a game ball that is shot (hit to the right) toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The arrangement of nails and the like is set as follows. Further, below the first ball entrance 64, a variable prize winning device 650 is provided which is set in a state in which a game ball can enter in each round of the big win. The specific winning hole 650a of the variable winning device 650 is configured as a winning hole from which ten prize balls are paid out each time a game ball wins.

A V winning device 670 is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. As described above, this V winning device 670 has the same structure as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 4 to 6), but the function of each part is different. More specifically, in the V winning device 670, the opening/closing door 670f1 on the upper surface is normally closed, and only when a special symbol lottery results in a small win, the opening/closing door 670f1 provided on the upper surface is closed for a predetermined period of time. It is opened (for example, for 1.5 seconds), and a state is formed in which a game ball can enter inside through the V winning opening 670a, which is an opening. Inside the V winning device 670, instead of the normal discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 6(a)) and the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6(b)) in the first embodiment, the same structure as these A normal discharge channel 670e1 and a special discharge channel 670e2 are provided. The game ball that has flowed into the inside of the V winning device 670 flows down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 670e1 and the special discharge flow path 670e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the special discharge channel 670e2 is provided with a V winning switch 670e3 for starting a big hit after a small hit by passing a game ball. The details will be described later, but during the small hit, the game balls are basically distributed to the normal discharge flow path 670e1, and only for a short period of time (for example, 0.075 seconds). to form Therefore, even if the game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 670 during the opening period (1.5 seconds) of the open/close door 670f1 based on the small win, it is distributed to the special discharge channel 670e2. If it is not during the period, it will flow down the normal discharge channel 670e1, and the big win will not start. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the game ball is continuously shot aiming at the V winning device 670, the game ball enters the special discharge channel 670e2 at a rate of about once every 20 small hits. is configured to

As shown in FIG. 113, a through gate 67 is provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the front view of the game board 13, and a game ball enters thereunder. A second ball entrance 6400 is provided which triggers the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 113, a large number of nails are planted in the area from the upstream side of the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the front view to the second ball entrance 6400. With these nails, almost all game balls that are fired at least with a firing strength that collides with the return rubber 69 (for example, a firing strength of 95% or more) flow down to the second ball entrance 6400 (guide can do. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the area for guiding the game ball to the second ball entrance 6400 will be referred to as the second ball entrance guide area.

The second ball entrance 6400 includes a horizontally long rectangular electric accessory 6400a that covers the second ball entrance 6400, and an electric accessory for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the electric accessory 6400a as an axis. a solenoid (not shown). The electric accessory 6400a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win. In the closed state of the electric accessory 6400a, the electric accessory 6400a and the game board 13 are closed so as to be on the same plane, so that the game ball can pass through the front side of the electric accessory 6400a. In addition, by tilting the electric accessory 6400a to the lower front side, an open state is temporarily formed in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 6400.例文帳に追加For this reason, even if the game ball is shot with a launch intensity that collides with the return rubber 6400, if the electric accessory 6400a is not in the open state at the timing when it reaches the second ball entrance 6400, the game ball will hit the second The ball passes through the entrance 6400 without being able to enter, and flows downward (the area where the V winning device 670, the variable winning device 650, the out port 66, etc. are provided).

As shown in FIG. 113, the inside of the second ball entrance guidance area and the upstream side of the second ball entrance 6400 branches into a right flow path R1 and a left flow path R2. A through gate 67 is provided in the left flow path R2 as shown in FIG. Furthermore, on the upstream side of the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2, a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance guidance area is sent to either the right flow path R1 or the left flow path R2. A distribution member 6600 for distribution is provided. Although the details will be described later, depending on the interval at which the game ball reaches, the distribution member 6600 tends to be biased toward one flow path, or the distribution member 6600 tends to alternately distribute to both flow paths. It is variable. More specifically, when the shooting interval of the game ball (the interval at which the game ball reaches the distribution member 6600) becomes longer (for example, when the shooting interval and arrival interval are 1.5 seconds or more) , while the game ball is distributed only to the right flow path R1 by the distribution member 6600, when the shooting interval of the game ball (the interval at which the game ball reaches the distribution member 6600) is shortened (for example , the shortest firing interval of 0.6 seconds), the game balls are alternately distributed to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 by the distribution means. In addition, when the game ball is shot at a shooting interval of 0.6 seconds to 1.5 seconds, depending on the arrangement of the distribution member 6600 when it reaches the distribution member 6600, the right flow path R1 Whether it is distributed or distributed to the left flow path R2 is variable. Therefore, if the shooting interval can be adjusted accurately between 0.6 seconds and 1.5 seconds, it is possible to continue distributing game balls only to the left flow path R2. The configuration of distribution member 6600 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

114(a) to (d) are diagrams showing the operation contents of the distribution member 6600. FIG. FIG. 114(a) shows a state in which the game ball has flowed down (dropped) toward the distribution member 6600 while the distribution member 6600 is arranged at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 114(a), the distribution member 6600 includes a rotating shaft 6600a, a substantially bar-shaped right receiving portion 6600R extending rightward with respect to the rotating shaft 6600a, and an upper left with respect to the rotating shaft 6600a. A substantially rod-shaped left receiving portion 6600L extending in the direction, a substantially rod-shaped hanging portion 6600b extending (drooping) in the lower left direction with respect to the rotation axis, and joined to the right side of the hanging portion 6600b in front view. and a substantially rectangular parallelepiped biased portion 6600c. The sorting member 6600 is configured to be capable of rotating clockwise and counterclockwise in a front view with the rotating shaft 6600a as the center of rotation, and the hanging portion 6600b can rotate with respect to the rotating shaft 6600a. By arranging it vertically downward, it is configured to have a substantially “Y” shape when viewed from the front. The weighted portion 6600c is made of a material with a higher density than the other portions (the right receiving portion 6600R, the left receiving portion 6600L, and the hanging portion 6600b) of the distributing member 6600, and the center of gravity of the distributing member 6600 as a whole is There is a difference in mass from the other parts to the extent that it substantially coincides with the center of gravity of the unevenly weighted portion 6600c. Specifically, for example, the biased portion 6600c is made of iron and has a mass of 4 g, while the other portions are all made of PS material and have a total mass of 0.5 g. It is In a state where no force other than gravity G acts on the sorting member 6600, the center of gravity is finally stabilized at the lowest position (the state where the potential energy is the lowest). Even if it is moved to the position, it will eventually return to the position shown in FIG.

The distribution member 6600 is configured so as to be able to receive game balls that have flowed down from above the second ball entrance guidance area with a right receiving portion 6600R and a left receiving portion 6600L. At the initial position (static position) of the distribution member 6600, when a game ball flows down from above the second ball entrance guidance area (see FIG. 114(a)), the game ball is received mainly by the right receiving portion 6600R. be done. When the game ball collides with the right receiving portion 6600R, a downward force acts on the right receiving portion 6600R when viewed from the front. In other words, a force acts to rotate the distribution member 6600 in the clockwise direction in a front view about the rotation shaft 6600a. Here, the mass of the game ball is heavier (about 5.5 g) than the total mass of the distribution member 6600 (about 4.5 g). , the right receiving portion 6600R is pushed downward, and the distribution member 6600 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. As a result, the distribution member 6600 rotates until the right receiving portion 6600R forms an inclination in the direction from the upper left direction in front view to the lower right direction (see FIG. 114(b)). Therefore, the game ball received by the right receiving portion 6600R flows down in the lower right direction when viewed from the front along the slope formed by the right receiving portion 6600R, and falls into the right flow path R1. That is, game balls are distributed to the right channel R1.

In this way, the game ball that first reaches the distribution member 6600 in a state where the distribution member 6600 is arranged at the initial position (completely stationary) is distributed to the right flow path R1. there is As described above, the through gate 67 is provided in the left flow path R2, while the through gate 67 is not provided in the right flow path R1. This flow path is disadvantageous to the player because there is no possibility that it will be played. By arranging the initial position of the distribution member 6600 so that it can be distributed to the disadvantageous channel, it is possible to prevent the initial state of the game machine from becoming an advantageous state.

After the game ball has been distributed to the right flow path R1 (dropped from the right receiving portion 6600R), the force (load due to the weight of the game ball) rotating the distribution member 6600 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is applied. Therefore, only the gravity G acts on the sorting member 6600 . Here, immediately after the game balls are distributed to the right channel, the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 is moved to the upper left side from the initial arrangement. Therefore, of the gravity G acting on the distribution member 6600, the component Gc parallel to the rotation direction is a force in the direction (lower right in the front view) to rotate the distribution member 6600 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Due to this component Gc of the gravity in the rotation direction, the distribution member 6600 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It should be noted that even if the distribution member 6600 reaches the initial arrangement by this rotating operation, it does not stop immediately, but passes through the initial arrangement once. This is because kinetic energy is generated during the rotational movement from the arrangement shown in FIG. 114(b) to the initial arrangement. Therefore, the distribution member 6600 continues to rotate in the counterclockwise direction even after passing through the initial arrangement, and temporarily stops when the kinetic energy becomes 0 (the speed of the rotation becomes 0). See FIG. 114(c)). In addition, if the player continuously shoots the game ball to the second ball entrance guidance area (that is, if the game ball is shot at the shortest shooting interval of 0.6 seconds), the initial The next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 before and after this temporary rest position (see FIG. 114(c)), which is placed after passing the placement. That is, the movable range ( The next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 while it is moving in the rotation range).

As shown in FIG. 114(d), when the game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 after passing through the distribution member 6600, the game ball mainly collides with the left receiving portion 6600L. The left receiving portion 6600L that has collided with the game ball exerts a force that pushes it downward in the front view due to the weight of the collided game ball. In other words, a force acts to rotate the distribution member 6600 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. As described above, since the mass of the game ball is heavier than the total mass of the distribution member 6600, the distribution member 6600 rotates and the left receiving portion 6600L tilts downward from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front. Form. The game ball received by the left receiving portion 6600L rolls along this inclination and drops into the left flow path R2 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. That is, game balls are distributed to the left flow path R2.

After the game ball is distributed to the left flow path R2 (dropped from the left receiving portion 6600L), a force (load due to the weight of the game ball) rotates the distribution member 6600 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. disappears, only the gravity G acts on the sorting member 6600 . Therefore, after distributing the game balls to the right flow path R1 (see FIGS. 114(b) and (c)), of the gravity G acting on the distributing member 6600, the component Gc parallel to the rotation direction As a result, the distribution member 6600 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

After that, while the game balls continue to be continuously shot at the shortest (0.6 seconds) shot interval, the distribution member 6600 moves the game balls to one flow path (right flow path R1, left flow path R1, The action of distributing the game ball to one of the flow paths R2) and the action of rotating to an arrangement in which the game ball can be distributed to the other flow path by the recoil after distributing the game ball are repeated. As a result, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 by continuously shooting the game balls at the shortest shooting intervals. As described above, since the through gate 67 is provided in the left flow path R2, by continuing to shoot game balls continuously at the shortest shooting interval, the through gate is opened at a rate of one out of two game balls. 67 can be passed.

On the other hand, when the game ball is continuously shot at a shooting interval of 1.5 seconds or more, the recoil of the game ball distributed to the right flow path R1 temporarily distributes the game ball to the left flow path R2. Although it rotates up to the initial position, it rotates again toward the initial position, and thereafter performs a pendulum movement centering on the initial position. The amplitude of this pendulum movement decreases over time due to air resistance and dynamic friction acting on the rotating shaft 6600a. The pendulum motion is performed (or is stationary) only in the range where the hanging part 6600b is arranged on the left side of the vertical line drawn vertically downward from 6600a. Therefore, if a game ball is shot with an interval of 1.5 seconds or longer, the game ball will be distributed only to the right flow path R1, so that the game ball can be played through the through gate 67 provided in the left flow path R2. It becomes impossible to pass the ball. That is, since it becomes impossible to execute the lottery for the normal symbols, it is particularly easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400 (when the game ball hits the normal symbol, the game ball In the consecutive game mode in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that easily enter the second ball entrance 6400 and the release pattern of the electric accessory 6400a are set), it is extremely disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, in the continuous mode, a game ball can be shot at the shortest shooting interval for the player who wants to distribute the game ball to the left flow path R2. That is, since game balls can be continuously shot in the continuous mode, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, the distribution member 6600 is performing pendulum motion by adjusting the firing interval according to the operation of the distribution member 6600 between the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds) and 1.5 seconds. It is also possible for the game ball to reach the distribution member 6600 only at the timing when the position is changed to the position where the game ball can be distributed to the left flow path R2. In addition, in order to shoot the game ball at the shortest shooting interval, it is sufficient to perform a relatively simple operation of maintaining the operation handle 51 at the maximum amount of rotation. Delicate manipulation of the operating handle 51 is required to shoot the game ball as intended at a shooting interval other than the shooting interval. Therefore, except for some players with high game skills, it is better to continue to shoot the game balls at the shortest shooting interval by keeping the operation handle 51 at the maximum amount of rotation. By distributing the balls to the left flow path R2, it is possible to execute more lotteries of normal symbols.

In this manner, the distribution member 6600 in the fifth embodiment can change the flow path through which game balls flow down according to the details of the operation of the handle 51 by the player. That is, by performing the operation of maintaining the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 and continuing to shoot the game ball at the shortest shooting interval, the game ball is reliably flowed alternately into the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2. can be made In other words, there is a disadvantageous flow path (right flow path R1) in which the lottery for normal symbols is not executed even if the game ball passes through, and an advantageous flow path (right flow path R1) in which the lottery for normal symbols is executed by the passing of the game ball. It can be alternately distributed to the flow path (left flow path R2). In addition, while the distribution member 6600 is performing a pendulum movement centering on the initial arrangement (see FIG. 114 (a)) in reaction to distributing the game ball to one of the flow paths, the game moves to the left flow path R2. By operating the operation handle 51 so as to make the game balls reach the target during the period in which the movable range in which the balls can be distributed is moved, most of the game balls that are shot are moved to the left side where the through gate 67 is provided. It is also possible to distribute to the flow path R2. In other words, it is also possible to realize an operation of biasing and distributing to a flow path that is advantageous for the player. Also, although there is no merit for the player, by operating the operation handle 51 so that the shooting interval is 1.5 seconds or longer, the game balls can be distributed by modulating the flow path that is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to change the details of the operation on the operating handle 51 according to the skill of the player and the action desired to be realized, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In the fifth embodiment, in the consecutive game mode (time-saving game state A), the electric accessory 6400a is opened at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second ball entrance 6400. be done. That is, a very short variation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the variation time of normal symbols. In addition, 0.2 second is set as the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a in the case of winning the normal symbol. It takes about 0.2 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to reach the second ball entrance 6400. Reach 6400 and enter the ball. Therefore, during the continuous mode, all the game balls distributed to the left flow path R2 are sent to the second ball entrance 6400 by simply hitting the game balls to the right with the maximum firing intensity and the shortest firing interval. It can be made to enter the ball. That is, game balls can enter the second ball entrance 6400 at a rate of about one in two.

On the other hand, in the pull-back mode (time-saving gaming state B), the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is also shot to the second ball entrance guidance area next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and is moved to the right flow path. A normal symbol variation time (0.5 seconds) is set in which it is impossible (difficult) to enter the second ball entrance 6400 for the game ball distributed to R1. By setting the variation time of 0.5 seconds, when the normal pattern hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has passed through the second ball entrance 6400 (that is, through After 0.2 seconds, which is the flow-down period of the flow path from the gate 67 to the second entrance 6400, the electric accessory 6400a is opened. In addition, since the opening period of the electric accessary 6400a is set to 0.2 seconds as in the continuous mode, the game ball 1 passes through the through gate 67 and the opening period is 0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds. It is impossible to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 6400 unless another game ball reaches the . However, even if the game ball continues to be shot to the second ball entrance guidance area at the shortest shooting interval, the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is distributed to the right flow path R1 and is sent to the second ball entrance guidance area. Since it takes about 0.8 seconds to reach the ball entrance 6400, the ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 after the lapse of the open period. Therefore, even if the ball is hit to the right with the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pullback mode, it is impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, and it is useless. It becomes an extremely disadvantageous state that only reduces the number of balls you have. Therefore, in the pullback mode, it is possible to perform a game method in which the player enters the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting left to proceed with the game (lottery for special symbols). In other words, the game method similar to the normal mode (normal game state) is performed instead of the game method aiming at the second ball entrance 6400 which is easily opened despite the fact that the time-saving state of the normal symbol is provided. It is possible to realize a novel game property that can be done.

In addition, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, there is a higher possibility that the pull-back mode will shift to the consecutive mode after the jackpot ends when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal mode. It is configured as follows. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the continuous mode, the withdrawal mode is set until at least 30 special symbol lotteries are completed. More specifically, when the jackpot E5 is reached in the continuous mode, the pullback mode is set until the lottery of special symbols is completed 30 times after the jackpot is completed, and when the jackpot is F5, the lottery of special symbols is set to 100 after the jackpot is completed. Retraction mode is set until the end of the cycle. On the other hand, if another jackpot type (jackpots A5 to D5) is set in the consecutive villa mode, the consecutive villa mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, after the end of the consecutive villa mode, if the lottery of special symbols does not result in a big hit, the pullback mode is maintained until the lottery of special symbols is completed 30 times or 100 times. In other words, the pullback mode is maintained at least until the lottery of special symbols is completed 30 times after the end of the continuous mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that it is advantageous to continue playing the game until at least 30 special symbol lotteries are performed after the end of the continuous mode. In other words, the game can be continued until at least 30 special pattern lotteries are completed even after the continuous mode is ended, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Here, when a special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, or when a game ball enters a specific area, a game machine with specifications that give a jackpot (so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine), as a game state Only two types of game states, a normal game state in which game balls are difficult to enter the specific area and a time-saving game state in which game balls are easy to enter the specific area, are provided, and when the time-saving game state ends, the game is immediately started. It was common to switch to the most disadvantageous normal game state. However, in this configuration, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game will be greatly reduced when the game shifts to the disadvantageous normal game state, and the player will immediately quit the game when the time-saving game state ends. There was a possibility that it would be lost.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the continuous mode, at least until the lottery of special symbols is executed 30 times, there is a special special pattern that makes it easy to shift to the continuous mode when the jackpot is won. The configuration is such that the state (retraction mode) is set. As a result, even if the consecutive game mode ends and the game ball enters a disadvantageous game state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, the player's motivation for playing the game is prevented from decreasing. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the consecutive game mode is finished, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the continuous villa mode ends, the mode is always switched to the pullback mode. That is, in the case of a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, only the jackpot type that shifts to the continuous mode again after the jackpot ends and the jackpot type that shifts to the pullback mode after the jackpot ends. Although it was set as the structure provided, it is not restricted to this. At a predetermined ratio (for example, 5%), it may be configured to provide a jackpot type that shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot ends.

In the fifth embodiment, when the game ball is continuously shot at the shortest shooting interval (0.6 second interval), the distribution member 6600 can distribute the game ball to the right flow path R1 and the left side. The cycle of switching between the motion ranges that can be distributed to the flow path R2 and the shooting interval of the game ball are substantially the same. That is, the distribution member 6600 of this embodiment, after distributing the game ball to one flow path, during 0.6 seconds until the next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600, the other flow path (The half period of the pendulum movement of the distribution member 6600 is substantially the same as 0.6 seconds), but it is not limited to this. . If the game balls can be alternately distributed to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 when the game balls are shot at the shortest shooting interval, the next game ball arrives after the first game ball is distributed. It may be configured to reciprocate the movement range that can be distributed to one flow path and the movement range that can be distributed to the other flow path by pendulum movement once or multiple times during 0.6 seconds until the . In other words, an odd multiple of the half period of the pendulum motion of the distribution member 6600 may be configured to be substantially the same as the shortest firing interval of 0.6 seconds. Even with this configuration, every time a game ball shot at the shortest shooting interval reaches the sorting member 6600, the game ball can be alternately sorted to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2.

In the fifth embodiment, by displacing the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 by providing the biased portion 6600c, in a state where the distribution member 6600 is stationary, game balls can be distributed to the right flow path R1 (see FIG. 114). (a)), but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of providing the biased portion 6600c, an elastic body such as a spring is used, and after the distribution member 6600 rotates by distributing the game balls, the initial arrangement shown in FIG. may be configured to return to

Next, referring to FIG. 115, the operation of the V winning device 670 in the fifth embodiment will be described. As described above, the V winning device 670 is in a state in which the opening/closing door 670f1 is opened and a ball can be entered inside when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the opening period of the opening/closing door 670f1 based on a small win and the channel inside the V winning device 670 through which the game ball can flow down.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 115, when a small win is won, the opening/closing door 670f1 is opened. This open period continues for 1.5 seconds, and when 1.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the opening/closing door 670f1 is closed and the small win ends. Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 115, for 0.5 seconds after the start of the small win, game balls that have flowed into the V winning device 670 are guided to the normal discharge channel 670e1. , the flow path solenoid 670k is kept off. As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 670e2 for 0.5 seconds from the start of the small win. Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the passage solenoid 670k is set to ON for 0.075 seconds, thereby guiding the game ball to the special discharge passage 670e2. state (a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow down to the normal discharge flow path 670e1). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the V winning device 670 for 0.075 seconds is guided to the special discharge channel 670e2 and easily passes through the V winning switch 670e3.

After 0.075 seconds have passed since the flow path solenoid 670k was set to ON, the flow path solenoid 670k is set to OFF until the end of the small hit. That is, a state is set in which the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the V winning device 670 is easily guided to the normal discharge channel 670e1. By these operation contents, if the game ball can be made to enter the V winning device 670 and reach the special discharge channel 670e2 during 0.075 seconds when it is easy to be guided to the special discharge channel 670e2, the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 and a big win is awarded after the small win is completed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning switch 670e3 during the opening period of the small win, the big win is not awarded.

While the opening period of the small win is 1.5 seconds, it is only 0.075 seconds that the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass, so the game in which the ball entered the V winning opening 670a in the small win The probability of the ball passing through the V winning switch 670e3 is 1/20 (0.075/1.5). As described above, in the Renso mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400 unless the game ball is continuously shot at the shortest shooting interval. The player basically keeps shooting game balls at the shortest shooting interval. In other words, it becomes difficult to adjust the shooting timing of the game ball aiming at the period during which the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass. It depends only on the fluctuation time of the pattern, the flowing direction of the game ball, and the like. That is, there is almost no room for the skill of the player to intervene, and the degree of expectation for a big win is always constant (1/20) when a small win is won. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the consecutive game mode can be made almost constant regardless of the player's skill, so that even a player who is not accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 can play the game without worry. can be done.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the mode is shifted to the continuous mode after the end of the big win, the continuous mode will continue until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times or until the big win is achieved. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 9/10, and the probability of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/200. The probability that the continuous mode will end without winning the jackpot regardless of whether it is a lottery of symbols or a small win is about 0.6%. That is, once the player shifts to the consecutive villa mode, an extremely advantageous state in which the consecutive villa mode and the jackpot are almost repeated is formed until winning the jackpot of the type to which the pullback mode is provided after the completion of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with the goal of making the player switch to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117, description will be given of an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the pullback mode, which is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the withdrawal mode is set until the lottery for special symbols is executed at least 30 times after the end of the continuous mode. That is, when a big win is won, an advantageous state is set in which the mode is always shifted to the consecutive mode after the big win is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game while the withdrawal mode is set. That is, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game. However, if the number of lotteries for the special symbols set as the pullback mode is too large, the rate of re-entering the Renso mode (the rate of pulling back the Renso mode) becomes too high, which is excessively advantageous for the player. There is a risk that it will become Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, after providing variations in the number of lotteries for which the pullback mode is set (that is, with a configuration in which either 30 times or 100 times is set), any lottery The configuration is such that the selection of the number of times is not specified (hidden). Then, according to the type of the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the number of times of the selected lottery (duration of the pullback mode) is suggested. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it ambiguous whether the pullback mode is terminated or continues, so that the game can be continued even if the minimum number of lotteries in the case of shifting to the pullback mode exceeds 30 times. It can make you want to continue. Therefore, since the game can be continued for a longer period of time after the continuous mode ends, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be further improved. In addition, since it is possible to realize the playability of predicting whether or not the pull-back mode has ended from the type of the back image, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game after the multi-station mode ends.

In the fifth embodiment, three types of rear images are provided as the rear images suggesting the degree of expectation that the withdrawal mode continues. 116(a)), a back image with a medium expectation (see FIG. 116(b)), and a back image with a low expectation (see FIG. 116(b)). 117) are provided. When the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 30 times after the pull-back mode is set, a process of re-lottering the back image is executed each time the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times. The player can be made to predict whether the pullback mode will continue or not according to the update status of the back image. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 116(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the back image with the highest degree of expectation (back image for high expectation) is displayed in which the withdrawal mode continues. As shown in FIG. 116(a), when the back image with the highest degree of expectation is set, the display mode is such that the character 811 advances through the forest. Further, in the upper center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a display area HR6 is formed in which characters "CHANCE!!" These display contents can suggest to the player that the withdrawal mode is likely to continue.

FIG. 116(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a rear image with a medium degree of expectation is displayed in which the pullback mode continues. As shown in FIG. 116(b), when a back image with a medium level of expectation is set, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode of going down the river. Also, the characters displayed inside the display area HR6 are "CHANCE!?". Due to these display contents, the expectation of the pullback mode is lower than when the back image for high expectations (back image for medium expectations) is displayed (high possibility that it has shifted to normal mode ) to the player.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a state in which the back image with the lowest degree of expectation (back image for low expectation) in which the pullback mode continues is displayed. As shown in FIG. 117, when the back image with the lowest degree of expectation is set, the display mode is such that the character 811 advances through the wilderness. Also, the characters displayed inside the display area HR6 are "CHANCE...?". These display contents can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for the withdrawal mode is extremely low (there is a high possibility that the transition to the normal mode has been completed).

In this way, in the fifth embodiment, whether or not the pullback mode is continuing can be suggested by the display mode of the rear image. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature that makes it possible to predict whether or not the withdrawal mode continues from the type of the back image, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. The pull-back mode is continued until the lottery of special symbols is executed a maximum of 100 times after the jackpot won during the continuous mode is completed. To put it the other way around, when the lottery for the special symbol ends 100 times, the mode always shifts to the normal mode. Therefore, after the lottery for the special symbol is completed 100 times, the background image (not shown) for the normal mode is set.

<Electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 118(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 also received in the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 118(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 118(a), the configuration of the ROM202 in the fifth embodiment is the configuration of the ROM202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13(a)), the small hit type selection table 202da, and the time saving The difference is that the number of times selection table 202db and the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202dc are added. In addition, in the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment, the contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, and the variation pattern table 202d are partially changed.

First, referring to FIG. 118(b), the first winning random number table 202a in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 118(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118(b), in the first hit random number table 202a in the fifth embodiment, two random numbers (counter values) of "0, 1" are defined as judgment values for judging a big hit. (See 202a1 in FIG. 118(b)). It should be noted that, as in the first embodiment, the determination value for the big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, "2 to 399" is defined as the range of determination values determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 118 (b)), and determination to be determined as a small hit of the first special symbol No value is defined (see 202a3 in FIG. 118(b)). In addition, "2 to 40" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 118 (b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol "41 to 399" is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 118(b)).

In this way, in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to win a small prize only in the second special symbol lottery. As a result, a state in which the V winning switch 670e3 can be easily passed in the continuous mode in which the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed can be formed, so that in the continuous mode, the big win is likely to occur again in a short period of time. As a result, the degree of advantage in the consecutive villa mode can be further increased, so that the player can be greatly delighted when the mode is shifted to the consecutive villa mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119(a), the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 119(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 119(a), the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment is provided with two types of jackpots A5 and B5 as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C5 is provided as a jackpot type of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 119(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with "jackpot A5". (See 202b1 in FIG. 119(b)). This "jackpot A5" has 5 rounds, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the jackpot type (5 rounds It is a time-saving jackpot). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot A5", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A5" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 119(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with "jackpot B5". (See 202b2 in FIG. 119(b)). This "jackpot B5" is a jackpot type (5-round special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the jackpot changes according to the game state at the time of winning. More specifically, in the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design, when it becomes "big hit B5", the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design is set as the game state after the big hit. When "jackpot B5" is reached in the time-saving state of normal symbols (pull-back mode or continuous mode), the time-saving state A of normal symbols (continuous mode) is set as the game state after the big win. It should be noted that the correspondence between the jackpot type, the game state when the jackpot is won, and the game state to be set is defined in a time reduction number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119(c)), which will be described later. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot B5", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B5" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 119(a), all possible values of the first winning type counter C2 for the second special symbol are defined in association with "jackpot C5" (FIG. 119 ( a) 202b3). This "jackpot C5" is a jackpot type (10-round special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10, and the game state after the jackpot changes according to the game state at the time of winning. More specifically, in the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design, when it becomes "big hit C5", the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design is set as the game state after the big hit. When "jackpot C5" is reached in the time-saving state of normal symbols (pull-back mode or continuous mode), the time-saving state A of normal symbols (continuous mode) is set as the game state after the big win.

In this way, half of the first special pattern jackpot is a special jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal mode is set after the jackpot when winning in the normal mode, and the consecutive mode is set after the jackpot when winning in a mode other than the normal mode). In a plurality of game states (normal mode, pullback mode) in which it is necessary to mainly execute the lottery for the first special symbol (the lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to execute), a difference can be provided in the degree of advantage. That is, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained in the normal mode, the consecutive mode is set after the jackpot at a rate of 50%, whereas when the jackpot of the first special pattern is drawn in the pullback mode, the rate is 100%. It can be configured so that the continuous mode is set after the jackpot. As a result, in the normal mode and the pullback mode, the degree of advantage until winning the jackpot is common (unfavorable state in which it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 6400), while the degree of advantage when winning the jackpot is common. The advantage can be configured to be higher in pullback mode than in normal mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that it is advantageous to continue the game at least during the pullback mode, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the continuous mode ends (when a jackpot is won in which a mode other than the continuous mode is set after the jackpot ends), the mode is always shifted to the pullback mode. there is This makes it possible to make the player want to continue playing the game at least until the return mode ends even after the consecutive villa mode ends. In other words, a player who has won a large number of prize balls by repeating the jackpot and the Renso mode in the Renso mode is satisfied with the game and immediately quits the game when the last big win in the Renso mode ends. It can be suppressed. That is, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and the game can be continued in a disadvantageous state (pull-back mode) compared to the consecutive mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. can be improved.

In addition, as in the pullback mode, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols in the continuous mode, the continuous mode can be set after the big win at a rate of 100%. As a result, for example, in the state where the reserved ball of the first special pattern remains, the mode is shifted to the continuous mode, and when the lottery of the special pattern based on the reserved ball of the first special pattern results in a big hit, the continuous mode is always selected. can be continued. In other words, after shifting to Renso mode, an absurd situation occurs in which the player wins the first special symbol lottery and immediately shifts to the normal mode or pullback mode. Therefore, the player's motivation for playing the game during the consecutive villa mode can be suppressed. In addition, even if the lottery of the second special pattern in the consecutive villa mode results in a big win, it will be a special jackpot, and the consecutive villa mode will always be set again after the big win. It is possible to more reliably eliminate the possibility that the mode ends without winning either. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's motivation for playing in the consecutive villa mode.

Furthermore, by making all the big wins of the second special symbols not the time-saving big wins but the special big wins, it is possible to prevent an attempt to execute the lottery of the second special symbols in the normal mode. That is, if an irregular game method is performed in which a game ball is hit to the right in the normal mode and the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 6400 to play a game, even if a big win is achieved, the most disadvantageous game is always reached after the big win. Since the normal mode can be set, it is possible to enhance the effect of suppressing irregular game methods.

Next, with reference to Drawing 119 (b), small hit classification selection table 202da is explained. FIG. 119(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table 202da. This small hit type selection table 202da is a data table that defines a determination value for determining a small hit type when a small hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery, and is a determination value of the small hit type counter C5. Is defined in association with each small hit type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 49", "small hit A" is defined in association with the small hit type (See 202da1 in FIG. 119(b)). This "small win A" is a small win type in which a "big win C5" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. As described above, the jackpot C5 has 10 rounds, and if it is won in the normal mode, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends, while in other than the normal mode (pullback mode or Renso mode) This is a jackpot type in which, when winning, the Renso mode is set after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 50 counter values are "small hit A", so if a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit A" The ratio determined is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with "small hit B" as the small hit type for the range of "50 to 79" ( See 202da2 in FIG. 119(b)). This “small win B” is a small win type in which “big win D5” is awarded when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670 e 3 of the V winning device 670 . Here, "jackpot D5" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15, and regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, the mode shifts to the continuous mode after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 30 counter values are "small hit B", so if a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit B" The ratio determined is 30% (30/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit C" as the small hit type for the range of "80 to 94" ( See 202da3 in FIG. 119(b)). This "small win C" is a small win type in which a "big win E5" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, the "jackpot E5" has 10 rounds, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the withdrawal mode is set from the end of the jackpot to the end of 30 special symbol lotteries. It is a jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 15 counter values are "small hit C". The ratio determined is 15% (15/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit D" as the small hit type for the range of "95 to 99" ( See 202da4 in FIG. 119(b)). This "small win D" is a small win type in which a "big win F5" is given when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, the "jackpot F5" has 10 rounds, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the withdrawal mode is set from the end of the jackpot to the end of 100 special symbol lotteries. It is a jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 5 counter values that become the "small hit D", so when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the "small hit D" The percentage determined is 5% (5/100).

Thus, in the fifth embodiment, four types of small hits are provided, and the types of big hits that are executed (started) when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed differ depending on the type of small hits. It is configured. In the continuous mode (and the pullback mode in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set), the small winning A or the small winning B is won, and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small winning game. As a result, the jackpot C or jackpot D is started, and the continuous game mode is set again as the game state (mode) after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it can be said that the small winning A and the small winning B are relatively advantageous small winning types for the player. In addition, since the number of rounds of the jackpot executed when the small win B is passed through the V winning switch 670e3 is larger, the small win B is a small win type with a higher degree of advantage than the small win A. I can say that there is. The percentage of winning small win A or small win B is a total of 80% (50% + 30%), and as described above, consecutive villa mode ends without a big win ( The probability that a short period of time will pass 100 times is about 0.6%. .

In addition, in the continuous mode (and the withdrawal mode in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set), the small hit C or the small hit D is won, and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small hit game. As a result, a jackpot E or a jackpot F is started, and a pullback mode is set as a game state (mode) after the jackpot ends. Since the withdrawal mode is a game state (mode) in which the degree of advantage is lower than that of the consecutive mode, it can be said that the small wins C and D are relatively disadvantageous small win types for the player. Note that the small hit C and the small hit D have the same performance (number of rounds) of the big hit executed when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3, but the period of the pullback mode set after the big win (Number of times) is configured to be shorter in the pullback mode based on the small hit C. For this reason, it can be said that the small hit D is a small hit type with a higher degree of advantage than the small hit C. The percentage of winning either the small win C or the small win D is 20% (15% + 5%), so if a big win occurs in Renso mode, about 20% of the time it will shift to pullback mode. . In addition, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols in the consecutive villa mode (when the jackpot is won without passing through the V winning switch 670e3), the game is shifted to the consecutive villa mode after the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the normal mode, when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 after winning a small win (small wins A, C, D) other than the small win B, the normal mode is set as the mode after the end of the big win. end up That is, when the V winning prize switch 670e3 is passed in the normal mode, the normal mode is set after the big win at a rate of 70%, so an irregular game method to make the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode is performed. Doing so would be extremely disadvantageous to the player. As described above, if the lottery of the first special pattern is a big hit, the transition to the consecutive mode will be made after the big hit at a rate of 50%, whereas if the lottery of the second special pattern is a big hit, the rate of 100% will be increased. After hitting the jackpot at a certain rate, it shifts to the normal mode again. In addition, in the normal mode, even if the lottery for the second special symbol results in a small hit and the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3, the game will shift to the normal mode again after the big win at a rate of 70%. Therefore, if a game method is implemented in which only the lottery of the second special symbols is performed by performing an irregular game method, the rate of transition to the consecutive game mode which is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. becomes low, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, an irregular game method is performed in which the player is forced to enter the second ball entrance 6400 where the game ball is difficult to enter in the normal mode, and only the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Since the advantage can be eliminated, in the normal mode, a left-handed game can be played in order to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent unforeseen disadvantages to the hole or, conversely, excessive loss to the player due to the implementation of an irregular game method. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG.119(c), the detail of time-saving frequency|count selection table 202db is demonstrated. FIG. 119(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time reduction frequency selection table 202db in the fifth embodiment. This time saving frequency selection table 202db is referred to at the end of the big win, and the number of time saving times after the end of the big win (the number of lotteries of special symbols until shifting to the normal mode) is set according to the type of the big win and the game state at the time of winning the big win. is a data table in which data for In this time saving frequency selection table 202db, not only the number of time saving times after the end of the jackpot but also data indicating the type of time saving state (whether it is time saving state A or time saving state B) are also defined.

As shown in FIG. 119 (c), as the jackpot type, the jackpot A5 and D5 are defined in association with 100 times as the number of times of time saving regardless of the game state at the time of winning, and as the type of time saving state, Time saving state A is defined in association (see 202db1 in FIG. 119(c)). For this reason, the jackpot A5 is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202b1 in FIG. 119 (a)), or the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3 during the opening period of the small hit B and the jackpot D5 is won. If you do (see 202da2 in Figure 119 (b)), regardless of the game state at the time of winning, after the jackpot, until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times, the time saving state A of normal symbols (Consecutive mode ) is set. As described above, the consecutive mode is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. is one of the types of jackpots that are preferable (pleasing) to the player. Also, in the continuous game mode in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by mainly executing the lottery of the second special symbols, the big win D5 is one of the preferred big win types for the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), as the jackpot type, the jackpot B5 and C5 are defined in association with 0 times as the number of time reductions in the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design, and the normal design Time saving state A of 100 times is defined in association with the time saving state (pull back mode, continuous mode) (see 202db2 in FIG. 119(c)). Therefore, in the normal mode set to the normal state of the normal symbols, if the lottery of the first special symbols results in a big win B5, the normal mode is set again after the big win, so the big win B5 is an unfavorable big win for the player. It is one of the types. On the other hand, in the pull-back mode, even if the big win B5 is reached, the mode shifts to the consecutive mode, which is advantageous after the big win is over, so it is one of the types of big wins that is preferable for the player. Also, in the consecutive game mode in which it is necessary to proceed with the game mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbols, the jackpot C5 in which the game is shifted to the advantageous consecutive game mode after the big win is one kind of jackpot type preferable for the player. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), as a jackpot type, the jackpot E5 is defined in association with 0 times as the number of time reductions in the normal state of the normal design, and the time reduction state of the normal design (pull back mode, 30 times of time saving state B is associated with continuous mode) is defined (see 202db3 in FIG. 119 (c)). In addition, in the normal mode and pullback mode, in which it is necessary to proceed with the game mainly by lottery of the first special symbols, the jackpot E5 is basically not won, but if the normal mode is irregular or illegal, Even if the lottery of the second special pattern is performed and the small win C is won, and even if the big win E5 is won, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the big win, so the big win E5 is the most disadvantageous big win type in the normal mode. It is one type. Further, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the pullback mode and the jackpot E5 is won, the game shifts to the pullback mode after the jackpot. That is, if the lottery of the first special pattern results in a big win, the pullback mode is looped in vain despite the shift to the 100% continuous mode, so even in the pullback mode, the big win E5 is compared. It is one of the unfavorable (disadvantageous) jackpot types. In addition, if the small win C and the big win E5 are reached in the continuous mode, the game shifts to a pullback mode that is more disadvantageous to the player than in the continuous mode. It becomes one of the unfavorable (disadvantageous) jackpot types.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), as a jackpot type, the jackpot F5 is defined in association with 0 times as the number of time reductions in the normal state of the normal design, and the time reduction state of the normal design (retraction mode, 100 times of time saving state B is associated with continuous mode) is defined (see 202db4 in FIG. 119 (c)). That is, when the jackpot F5 is reached, the same mode shift as the jackpot E5 (see 202db3 in FIG. 119 (c)) is performed, but the length of the pullback mode that shifts when winning in the consecutive villa mode (the number of times of lottery of special symbols) is longer than the case of winning the jackpot E5 (the number of lotteries increases). Therefore, the jackpot F5 is one type of jackpot type that is not preferable (disadvantageous) like the jackpot E5 in the normal mode and the pullback mode. Also, in the continuous mode, it is one of the unfavorable jackpot types, but it can be said that it is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than the jackpot E5 in that the pullback mode after the jackpot continues for a long time.

In this way, in the fifth embodiment, by setting the number of times of reduction in working hours specified in the number of times of reduction in working hours selection table 202db (see FIG. 119(c)), the normal mode (normal state of the normal symbol) is triggered by the jackpot. ), continuous mode (time-saving state A with normal patterns), and pullback mode (time-saving state B with normal patterns). As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the mode (game state) after the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, details of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fifth embodiment will be described. This variation pattern selection table 202d, like the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, is referred to in order to determine the special symbol variation pattern (variation time) according to the special symbol lottery result. data table.

FIG. 120(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 120(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fifth embodiment has a special figure 1 for the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(a)). A single special figure 1 out table 202d11 is provided instead of the out (normal) table 202d2 and the special figure 1 out (probability variation) table 202d3, per special figure 2 (4 fluctuations or less) In place of the table 202d4 for special figure 2 and the table 202d5 for special figure 2 (5 variations or more), a single table 202d12 for special figure 2 is provided, and the table for special figure 2 off (4 variations or less) 202d6 and a table 202d7 for special figure 2 loss (5 fluctuations or more), a table 202d13 for special figure 2 loss (normal / pullback) and a table 202d14 for special figure 2 loss (renso) are provided There is a difference. In addition, since the specified contents of the table 202d11 for the special figure 1 are the same as the table 202d2 for the special figure 1 (normal) in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(c)), the detailed description will be given here. are omitted.

The special figure 2 winning table 202d12 is a data table that is referred to for determining a variation pattern (variation time) when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win. As shown in FIG. 120(b), the special figure 2 per table 202d12 has a variation pattern (variation time) selected for each mode (game state) at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed. stipulated. As shown in FIG. 120 (b), when the second special symbol lottery hits in the normal mode and the pullback mode, the variation pattern exceeds the variation time of 180 seconds regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. A long variation is determined. On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol in the consecutive villa mode results in a big win, a middle variation with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. In this way, in the normal mode or pullback mode in which it is necessary to advance the game by lottery of the first special symbol, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, an extremely long variation time is set. Therefore, the game efficiency can be lowered when the second special symbol lottery is irregularly or fraudulently performed in the normal mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being irregularly or fraudulently executed.

In addition, the table 202d13 for the special figure 2 loss (normal/pullback) determines the variation pattern (variation time) when the second special symbol lottery (including small hits) is lost in the normal mode and the pullback mode. This is a data table that is referenced to As shown in FIG. 120(c), in the table 202d13 for special figure 2 loss (normal/retraction), regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, as a variation pattern, there is only a super long variation with a variation time of 180 seconds. is stipulated. In this way, in the normal mode or pullback mode where it is necessary to proceed with the game by lottery of the first special symbol, when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost (or small hit), an extremely long fluctuation time is set. With this configuration, it is possible to further reduce the game efficiency when the second special symbol lottery is performed irregularly or fraudulently in the normal mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being irregularly or fraudulently executed.

In addition, the table 202d14 for special figure 2 loss (renso) is referred to for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the second special symbol lottery is lost (or a small hit) in the Renso mode. data table. As shown in FIG. 120(d), the table 202d14 for special figure 2 out (renso) defines a variation pattern that can be determined for each lottery result. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(d), for the deviation of the second special symbol, the variation time is 10 seconds for all possible values of the variation type counter CS1. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode, when the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, a variation time of 10 seconds is always set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), for the small hit of the second special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 174" The small hit short with a variation time of 5 seconds Fluctuations are defined in correspondence, and small hit middle fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "175 to 198". According to these provisions, in the continuous mode, only a relatively short variation time of 5 seconds or 10 seconds is set when the second special symbol lottery is executed, so the game efficiency in the continuous mode is improved. can be enhanced. Therefore, the superiority of the consecutive villa mode can be further enhanced, so that the player's pleasure when shifting to the consecutive villa mode can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game in the consecutive villa mode.

In addition, in Renso mode, when a small win with a high probability of winning is set, the ratio of setting a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is increased, and a relatively low ratio (about 1/4) is set in the case of a small win. ), a relatively long (10 seconds) variation time is set as in the case of hit or miss. As a result, every time a relatively long variation time is selected, the player can be made to think that there is a possibility that the lottery for the second special symbol has directly won a big win. Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode, the game can be played by paying attention to the fluctuation time, so that the interest of the player in the consecutive villa mode can be improved.

Next, with reference to Drawing 121 (a), the details of normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc are explained. This normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc is a data table that is referred to for setting the normal pattern fluctuation time when the normal pattern lottery is executed, and as shown in FIG. The game state (mode) at the time when the symbol lottery is executed and the normal symbol variation pattern (variation time) are defined in association with each other.

As shown in FIG. 121(a), for the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design, as a variation pattern, a long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is associated and defined (FIG. 121(a) 202dc1). On the other hand, for the time saving state A (Renso mode) of the normal pattern, a short variation A with a variation time of 0.1 seconds is associated and defined (see 202dc2 in FIG. 121 (a)), A short variation B with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is defined in association with the time saving state B (pull-back mode) of normal symbols (see 202dc3 in FIG. 121(a)).

Therefore, when the normal pattern lottery is executed in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is set to be extremely long compared to the time-saving state (Renso mode, pullback mode). If the game is played aiming at the gate 67 and the second ball entrance 6400, the game efficiency can be significantly deteriorated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal mode. In addition, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal pattern in the continuous mode (time saving state A) to 0.1 seconds, when the normal pattern hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 will directly enter the second input. It can be configured so that the ball can be easily entered into the ball opening 6400 . Therefore, during the continuous mode, the game ball is distributed to the left flow path R2 (see FIG. 113) just by continuing to hit the game ball to the right with the maximum firing intensity and the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval). It is possible to make the game ball entered into the second ball entrance 6400 with a high probability (at 1/1.2, which is the probability of winning the normal symbol).

On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the withdrawal mode (time saving state B) to 0.5 seconds, even if the normal symbol lottery wins, the game ball that triggered the lottery (through A game ball that has passed through the gate 67) and a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and is then launched into the second ball entrance guidance area and distributed to the right flow path R1 (see FIG. 113). It can be configured such that it is impossible (difficult) to enter the second ball entrance 6400 . That is, by setting a variation time of 0.5 seconds, when the normal pattern hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has passed through the second ball entrance 6400 (that is, The electric accessory 6400 is opened after 0.2 seconds, which is the flow-down period of the flow path from the through gate 67 to the second ball entrance 6400, has passed. Also, since the electric accessory 6400a has an open period of 0.2 seconds, other game balls must not reach within 0.5 to 0.7 seconds after one game ball passes through the through gate 67. cannot enter the second ball entrance 6400. However, even if the game ball continues to be shot to the second ball entrance guidance area at the shortest shooting interval, the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is distributed to the right flow path R1 and is sent to the second ball entrance guidance area. Since it takes about 0.8 seconds to reach the ball entrance 6400, the ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 after the lapse of the open period. Therefore, even if the ball is hit to the right with the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pullback mode, it is impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, and it is useless. It becomes an extremely disadvantageous state that only reduces the possession ball. Therefore, in the pullback mode, it is possible to perform a game method in which the player enters the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting left to proceed with the game (lottery for special symbols). In other words, it is not a game method aiming at the second ball entrance 6400 that is easy to open despite the fact that the time saving state of the normal symbol is given, but a game method similar to the normal mode (normal game state) (by left-handed hitting) A game method in which a game is played aiming at the first ball entrance 64) can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided inside the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 121(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 121(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18), while the time saving medium counter 203da, and the jackpot type storage area 203db. , a mode type storage area 203dc, a V passage flag 203dd, and a winning mode storage area 203de are added. Also, the difference is that the variable probability flag 203g, the variable probability setting flag 203h, the variable probability passage counter 203i, the variable probability effective flag 203n, and the variable probability effective timer 203o are deleted.

The time saving medium counter 203da is a counter for counting the number of times of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the time saving state of the normal symbols ends. If the value of the counter 203da during this time saving is 1 or more, it means that it is in the time saving state of the normal design (either the continuous mode or the pullback mode), and if the value of the counter 203da during the time saving is 0, it is normal. It means that it is in the normal state of the design. The counter 203da during this time saving has an initial value set to 0, and at the end of the jackpot, the number of time saving times specified in the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119(c)) is set (see S1323 in FIG. 133) ). In addition, the value of the time saving medium counter 203da is updated by subtracting one each in the time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) executed at the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbol (see S2302 of FIG. 128). When executing the lottery for normal symbols, it is determined whether or not the time saving state for normal symbols is determined by the value of the time saving medium counter 203da, and a random number table for normal symbols for high probability (Fig. 14 (b)) 202c3, 202c4) to perform a lottery for normal symbols, or a random number table per normal symbol for low probability (202c1, 202c2 in FIG. 14(b)) to determine whether to perform a lottery for normal symbols. (see S608 in FIG. 130).

The jackpot type storage area 203db is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. In the jackpot type storage area 203db, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot (see S331 in FIG. 127). Also, when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the V winning switch 670e3 is passed in the small win, data indicating a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is stored (see S1629 in FIG. 134). The data stored in this jackpot type storage area 203db is held until the end timing of the winning jackpot, and is used to select the number of times of reduction in working hours from the number of times of reduction in working hours selection table 202db at the end of the jackpot (see S1322 in FIG. 133).

The mode type storage area 203dc is a storage area for storing data indicating the current mode (game state). If "00H" is stored as data in this mode type storage area 203dc, it indicates that the current mode is the normal mode (normal state of normal symbols), and if "01H" is stored, It indicates that it is a continuous mode (time saving state A of normal symbols), and if "02H" is stored, it indicates that it is a pullback mode (time saving state B of normal symbols). Normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc (see FIG. 121 (a)) When selecting and setting the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, the fluctuation time corresponding to the data stored in this mode type storage area 203dc is set be done.

The V passing flag 203dd is a flag for indicating whether or not the V winning switch 670e3 has been passed during execution of the small winning game (whether or not it is confirmed that a big winning will occur after the small winning is completed). . If the V passing flag 203dd is turned on at the end of the small win, the start of the big win is set at the end of the small win, whereas if the V passing flag 203dd is off, the small win is made without starting the big win. is terminated. This V passage flag 203dd has an initial value set to off, and is set to on when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 670e3 during execution of the small winning game (see FIG. 135 (see S2506). In addition, it is set to OFF after setting the start of the jackpot based on passing through the V winning switch 670e3 (see S1630 in FIG. 134).

The winning mode storage area 203de is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating a mode (game state) when winning a jackpot. The winning mode storage area 203de stores data in the same format as the mode type storage area 203dc. At the start of the jackpot, the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is transferred to the winning mode storage area 203de, and the data is held until the jackpot ends. At the end of the jackpot, the mode at the time of winning the jackpot is determined using the data stored in the mode storage area 203de at the time of winning, and the corresponding number of reduced hours is read from the reduced number of times selection table 202db (see FIG. 119(c)). output and set (see S1322 in FIG. 133).

Next, referring to FIG. 122, a game state (mode) transition method in the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 122, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is provided with roughly three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 122 (normal state of the normal pattern), the continuous mode shown in the lower left part of FIG. A mode (ordinary pattern time saving state B) is provided.

As described above, the normal mode indicates the normal state of the normal symbol, and the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and even if the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the continuous mode This is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In addition, as described above, the continuous mode indicates a game state in which the time saving state A of the normal pattern is set, and since it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, it is a small hit with a high probability. is generated and the chances of passing through the V prize switch 670e3 increase, so this is a gaming state in which the possibility of winning a big win is higher than in the normal mode. In addition, since the consecutive game mode is easily set again after the end of the big win, the game state becomes the most advantageous for the player.

In addition, the pull-back mode indicates a game state in which the time-saving state B of the normal pattern is set, and as described above, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, similarly to the normal mode, the second Although it is necessary to play the game aiming at the 1 ball entrance 64, the game state is more advantageous than the normal mode because the game shifts to the continuous mode at a rate of 100% when winning a jackpot.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 122, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another mode only in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big win and the big win A5 is determined as the big win type, the continuous mode is set as the game state after the big win. On the other hand, when the big win B5 is determined, the normal mode is set as the game state after the big win, so the most unfavorable game state is repeated. That is, in the normal mode, unless the big win A5, which is determined at a rate of 50% of the big win, cannot be won, there is no transition to another game state. In other words, even if a jackpot is won, the same state is looped at a rate of 50%, resulting in an extremely disadvantageous gaming state.

As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 122, there is a possibility of shifting from the continuous mode to another mode not only when the jackpot is won, but also when the time reduction number of normal symbols is finished. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 122, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, and a V prize (event in which the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3) occurs, and the big hits E5 and F5 is determined, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the withdrawal mode. In addition, when the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times without a big win, the number of times of shortening the working hours of the normal symbols passes, and the game shifts (falls) to the normal mode. On the other hand, when the jackpots C5 and D5 are determined when a V prize is won, or when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols, the continuous mode is set again after the jackpot ends. In addition, as described above, the possibility that the variation of the special symbols ends 100 times without a big hit is about 0.6%, so it is a phenomenon that hardly occurs. Therefore, the transition to another mode in the Renso mode occurs when the jackpots E5 and F5 are won. Small wins (small wins C, D) corresponding to big wins E5, F5 are determined at a rate of 20% of all small wins, so when it comes to continuous mode, 80% or more of the big win and continuous mode It becomes an extremely advantageous game state that repeats at a rate. Therefore, since the player can play the game with the goal of shifting to the consecutive villa mode, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

As shown in the lower right part of FIG. 122, there is a possibility that the pullback mode will shift to another mode when a jackpot is won and when the number of times of time reduction of normal symbols is finished. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 122, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, even if the jackpot A5 or the jackpot B5 is reached, the game after the jackpot ends. The state is set to Renso mode. In addition, when the lottery of special symbols for the number of times of time saving is completed without a big hit, it shifts to the normal mode (falls down). In the normal mode, even if the jackpot of the first special pattern is achieved, the mode is shifted to the multi-floor mode only at a rate of 50%. Therefore, while the preparation mode continues, the game can be played with a strong desire to win the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game in the preparation mode.

Thus, in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to switch between three types of modes with different degrees of advantage. As a result, since the game can be sharpened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 123(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 123(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment has an expectation level selection table 222da added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(a)). There is a difference. This expectation degree selection table 222da is used to draw a lottery for a back image during a predetermined period (until the fluctuation display of the special symbols ends 100 times) after the continuous mode ends (shifts to the pullback mode). Data table used. Here, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, either 30 times (jackpot E5) or 100 times (jackpot F5) is set as the number of special symbol lotteries in which the pullback mode continues. That is, if the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 30 after transitioning to the pullback mode, there is a possibility of transitioning (falling) to the normal mode. In the fifth embodiment, it is not clearly notified whether the normal mode has been entered or whether the pullback mode continues, and whether or not the pullback mode continues depends on the type of the rear image (see FIGS. 116 and 117). By suggesting the degree of expectation, a game feature is provided that allows the player to predict whether or not it is the withdrawal mode.

More specifically, after shifting to the pullback mode (that is, after the jackpot E5 or the jackpot F5 is completed), the number of lotteries of special symbols is within a range of 30 times (that is, staying in the pullback mode) is determined), the back image for high expectations is set as the back image, and if the number of lotteries exceeds 30 times (that is, the number of lotteries that may have ended the pullback mode ), every time the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times, the back image is reselected using the expectation selection table 222da (the expectation is updated every 10 lotteries). there is Details of the expectation level selection table 222da will be described with reference to FIG. 123(b).

FIG. 123(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the expectation level selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 123(b), the expectation level selection table 222da is for each mode (game state) at the time of executing a lottery for reselecting a back image (expectation level re-lottery). The type and the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223da are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(b), in the normal mode, the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is in the range of "0 to 4", and the back image for high expectation (FIG. 116(a) reference) is defined in association with the range of "5 to 49", the rear image for medium expectations (see FIG. 116 (b)) is defined in association with the range of "50 to 99", and low expectations in the range of "50 to 99" A rear image (see FIG. 117) for is defined in correspondence.

Since the effect lottery counter 223da can take 100 values from "0 to 99", when the expectation re-lottery is executed in the normal mode, the ratio of setting the back image for the high expectation is 5. % (5/100). On the other hand, the ratio of setting the back image for medium expectation is 45% (45/100), and the ratio of setting the back image for low expectation is 50% (50/100). Therefore, if you have already transitioned (falling) from the pullback mode to the normal mode (if the pullback mode with a reduction in time of 30 times is set after the end of the previous jackpot), the expectation re-lottery will While the image is most likely to be set, it is extremely unlikely that the high-expectation back image will be set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 123(b), for the pullback mode, the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is in the range of "0 to 9", and the back image for high expectation (see FIG. 116(a)) is displayed. Defined in correspondence, the rear image for medium expectations in the range of "10 to 79" (see FIG. 116 (b)) is defined in correspondence, and the back for low expectations in the range of "80 to 99" An image (see FIG. 117) is associated and defined. Therefore, when the expectation re-lottery is executed in the pullback mode, the ratio of setting the back image for high expectation is 10% (10/100), and the back image for middle expectation is set. The ratio is 70% (70/100), and the ratio of setting the back image for low expectations is 20% (20/100). Therefore, when the pullback mode continues (when the pullback mode with the number of times of time reduction of 100 times is set after the end of the previous jackpot), the back image for high expectations is set by the expectation re-lottery. The possibility is doubled compared to the case where the normal mode has already been entered, and the possibility that the back image for low expectations is set is reduced to less than half. In addition, the ratio of setting the back image for medium expectation is increased by 25%.

Therefore, when the back image for high expectations is set, the possibility that the pullback mode continues (expectation) increases, while when the back image for low expectations is set, the pullback mode ends The possibility (expectation) that it is (has been shifted to normal mode) increases. Therefore, since the player can guess the mode according to the type of the back image, it is possible to improve the interest in the game until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times after the continuous mode is completed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 124, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(b)) in that an effect lottery counter 223da and a variation counter 223db are added. The difference is that they are added. In addition, the breakthrough effect counter 223g is deleted because the breakthrough effect in the first embodiment is not executed.

The effect lottery counter 223da is a counter used to select one back image (expectation level) from the above-described expectation level selection table 222da. The value of the effect lottery counter 223da is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When selecting a back image, a random number (counter value) defined in the expectation selection table 222da is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223da, and one corresponding back image is selected. This effect lottery counter 223da is updated, for example, every 1 ms during the main process (see FIG. 45).

The variation number counter 223db is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries (number of times of execution of variation display) after the end of the big win. The fluctuation number counter 223db has an initial value set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 when execution of the fluctuation display effect is set based on a new fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. It is updated (see S5601 in FIG. 139). Also, when the jackpot is won, the value is reset to 0. During the period from when the withdrawal mode is set after the end of the jackpot to when the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times, the variation counter 223db is referred to every time the variation display performance is set, and the expectation selection table 222da is used. It is determined whether or not it is time to execute the re-lottery for the degree of expectation (see S5603 and S5605 to S5608 in FIG. 139).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 135, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, timer interrupt processing 5 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 125) is executed instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. , is a periodic process that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds.

Of the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 125) in the fifth embodiment, the processing of S101, S102, S105, and S107 to S109 is different from the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. The same processes as those of S101, S102, S105, and S107 to S109 are executed. In addition, in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 125) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S102 is completed, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the The random number counter C4 per 2 and the small per type counter C5 are updated (S141). That is, in addition to various counter values updated in the process of S103 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated. After the process of S141, instead of the special symbol variation process (S104, see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the special symbol variation process 5 is executed (S142), and the process proceeds to S105. The details of this special symbol variation process 5 (S142) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 125) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S105 is completed, next, instead of the normal symbol variation process (S106, see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, normal Symbol variation processing 5 is executed (S143), and the processing proceeds to S107. The details of this normal symbol variation process 5 (S143) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, details of the special symbol variation process 5 (S142) described above will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 5 (S142). This special symbol variation process 5 (S142) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37, the variable display of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

Of the special symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221, the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28) ) are executed in steps S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S207 or the process of S212 ends, the special symbol variation start process (S213, see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment Instead, the special symbol variation start process 5 is executed (S261), and the process ends. The details of this special symbol variation start process 5 (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, in the processing of S218, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big hit (S218: Yes), the mode type storage area 203dc After the data is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S262), the counter value of the time saving counter 203da and the data of the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S263), and the process proceeds to S220. By transferring the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc to the winning mode storage area 203de before returning the jackpot state to the initial state (normal state of normal symbols) in the process of S263. , data indicating the mode (game state) at the time of winning the big win can be held until the end of the big win. Therefore, at the end of the big win, the game state at the time of winning the big win can be accurately discriminated, and the corresponding number of times of time saving can be set.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S218, it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not a big hit (that is, it is a miss or a small hit). In the case (S218: No), if it is in the time saving state (that is, if it is the continuous villa mode or the pullback mode), the time saving number update process for updating the number of time saving is executed (S264). The details of this time saving frequency update process (S264) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the time saving frequency update process (S264) is completed, it is then determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S265), and if it is determined to be a small hit (S265: Yes), a small hit A small winning start process for setting the start of the opening operation is executed (S266), and the process proceeds to S221. The details of this small winning start process (S266) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S265, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small win (that is, it is a loss) (S265: No), the processing of S266 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S221.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, details of the above-described special symbol variation start process 5 (S261) will be described. This special symbol variation start process 5 (S261) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. reference), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, along with performing a special symbol lottery (determination of success or failure), the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of .

Of the special symbol variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 127) in the fifth embodiment, in each processing of S301 to S312, each of S301 to S312 of the special symbol variation start processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 29) The same processing as the processing is executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 127) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit (S305: Yes), this time winning Data corresponding to the type of the jackpot obtained is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db (S331), and the process proceeds to S306. By storing data corresponding to the jackpot type in the jackpot type storage area 203db in advance in the process of S331, the jackpot type can be accurately determined based on the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db at the end of the jackpot. can be discriminated. Therefore, it is possible to accurately set the game state after the end of the big win.

Also, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 127) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a big hit in the process of S305 (S305: No), next, this time It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (S332), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S332: Yes), a small hit type determination table 202da and a small hit type The display mode of the first special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the small hit type specified from the value of the counter C5 is set (S333), and the variation pattern corresponding to the small hit is selected in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 120). ) is referred to and determined (S334), and the process proceeds to S310. On the other hand, in the processing of S332, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S332: No), it means that the lottery result of this time is lost, so the processing is shifted to S308. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the above-described time saving frequency update process (see FIG. 128) will be described. This time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) is, as described above, one process in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126), and is a process for updating the time saving number of normal symbols. As shown in FIG. 128, in the time saving number update process (see FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203da is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S2301), and the time saving When it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203da is 0 (S2301: No), the current state is the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design, and the time saving state is not set (there is no need to update the time saving number of times) ), the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203da during time saving is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S2301: Yes), the value of the counter 203da during time saving is updated by subtracting 1 (S2302), set the remaining time reduction command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of the counter 203da during the time reduction after the update (S2303). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203da has become 0 (S2304), and if the value of the time saving counter 203da is 0 (S2304: Yes), the continuous villa mode or the pullback mode ends Therefore, a state command is set to notify the sound lamp controller 113 of the shift to the normal mode (S2305), and the normal mode is set in the mode type storage area 203dc. "00H" indicating data is stored (S2306), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2304, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203da after the update by the process of S2302 is not 0 (S2304: No), each process of S2305 and S2306 is skipped, This process is terminated as it is. By executing this time saving frequency update process (see FIG. 128), the time saving frequency can be appropriately updated in the continuous mode in which the normal pattern working time saving state is set and the pullback mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the above-described small winning start processing (S266) will be described. This small winning start process (S266) is, as described above, one process in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126), and is a process for setting the start of the small winning opening operation.

As shown in FIG. 129, in the small winning start process (see FIG. 129), first, the operation pattern of the V winning device 670 corresponding to the small winning type is read (S2401). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when a small win is achieved, the open door 670f1 of the V winning device 670 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the open period, A period of 0.075 seconds is set so that the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass through (see FIG. 115).

When the processing of S2401 is completed, then, the data indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the current small hit type is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db (S2402). In addition, as described above, if the small hit A, the corresponding jackpot type is the jackpot C5 (see 202da1 in FIG. 119 (b)), if the small hit B, the corresponding jackpot type is the jackpot D5 ( 202da2 in FIG. 119(b)), if it is a small hit C, the corresponding jackpot type is a big hit E5 (see 202da3 in FIG. 119(b)), and if it is a small hit D, the corresponding jackpot type is a big hit F5 (see 202da4 in FIG. 119(b)).

When the process of S2402 ends, the start of the small hit is set (S2403), and this process ends. By executing this small winning start process (see FIG. 129), when the fluctuation of the variation pattern corresponding to the small winning stops, the corresponding small winning operation pattern can be started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, details of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S143) will be described. This normal design variation process 5 (S143) is a process executed instead of the normal design variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 125). This is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, like the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in one embodiment.

In each process of S601 to S613, S617 to S620, and S623 of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 130) in the fifth embodiment, each of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment The same processes as those of S601 to S613, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed. Also, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130) in the fifth embodiment, after setting the display mode according to the lottery result of the normal symbol in the process of S612 or S613, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202dc (See FIG. 121) is read (S641), and from the read table, the fluctuation time of the normal design corresponding to the current mode indicated by the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is read and set (S642), End this process.

Also, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (the value of the counter 203da during time saving is 0) ( S620: No), the opening time of the electric accessary 6400a and the number of times of opening are set to 0.1 second x 1 (S643), and the process proceeds to S623.

On the other hand, in the process of S620, when it is determined that it is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (the value of the time saving counter 203da is 1 or more) (S620: Yes), the opening time and opening of the electric accessory 6400a The number of times is set to 0.2 seconds×1 time (S644), and the process proceeds to S623.

By executing this normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130), the normal symbol variation time and the release pattern of the electric accessory 6400a when the normal symbol wins are set appropriately according to the mode. be able to. As a result, in the normal mode and the pull-back mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400 during the period in which the electric accessory 6400a is opened, while in the continuous mode. Then, it is possible to form a state in which a game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 6400 during the open period of the electric accessory 6400a. As a result, in the pullback mode, although the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, it is advantageous for the player to hit the ball with the left hand aiming at the first ball entrance 64. can be realized.

Next, startup processing 5 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 131 . This start-up process 5 is a process executed instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. This is a process that is started along with

S901 to S910 and S912 to S916 of the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 131) in the fifth embodiment correspond to S901 to S910 and S910 of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. , and the same processes as those of S912 to S916 are executed. Further, in the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 131) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S910 is completed, then the value of the time saving counter 203da and the data of the mode type storage area 203dc are read out (S931). , sets a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the game state specified from each read data (S912), and shifts the processing to S913. By executing the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 131), the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the mode at power-on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the jackpot control process 5 (1031) executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) in the fifth embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 5 (S1031) is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1004, see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 650a. .

Of the jackpot control processing 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109 are respectively S1101 to S1105 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, , and the same processes as those of S1107 to S1109 are executed. Also, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the specific winning opening 650a is opened. setting (S1141), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1142), and this process is terminated.

Also, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: No), then the specific winning opening 650a (S1143). As described above, when 30 seconds have passed since each round of big wins started, or when 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning hole 650a, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. In the process of S1143, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening 650a is satisfied (S1143: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 650a is set (S1144), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1143, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening 650a is not satisfied (S1105: No), the process proceeds to S1107.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S1109, when it is determined that the jackpot end timing has come (the end time of the ending effect has come) (S1109: Yes ), instead of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, jackpot end processing 5 (S1145) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of this jackpot ending process 5 (S1145) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 5 (S1145). This jackpot end processing 5 (S1145) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, and the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for setting the game state (mode) after the end of the jackpot.

In this jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 133), first, the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119 (c)) is read (S1321), and the number of time saving times and the type of time saving state specified in the read table Among them, the jackpot type indicated by the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db and the time saving number corresponding to the jackpot winning mode indicated by the data stored in the winning mode storage area 203de, and the mode (time saving status type) is specified (S1322). When the processing of S1322 ends, the specified number of times of time saving is set in the time saving counter 203da (S1323), and the data indicating the mode (type of time saving state, game state) specified in the processing of S1322 is stored in the mode type storage area 203dc. (S1324). Next, a state command indicating the set game state (mode) is set (S1325), the jackpot flag 203r and winning mode storage area 203de are reset (S1326), and the process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 133), the game state after the jackpot ends can be appropriately set according to the jackpot type and the game state (mode) at the time of winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, small hit control processing 5 (1032) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 36) in the fifth embodiment will be described. This small winning control process 5 (S1032) is a process executed in place of the small winning control process (S1005, see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the operation of the V winning device 670. be.

Of the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, in each process of S1601 to S1604 and S1607 to S1610, S1601 to the small hit control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 42) The same processes as S1604 and S1607 to S1610 are executed. Also, in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S1604, when it is determined that the small hit game is being executed (that is, the flag 203s during the small hit is ON) (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the V winning opening 670a (S1621). (S1622), this processing ends.

In addition, in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1621: No), then at the closing timing of the V winning opening 670a If it is determined that it is time to close the V winning opening 670a (S1623: Yes), the closing of the V winning opening 670a is set (S1624), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1623, if it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1623: No), the process proceeds to S1607.

In addition, in the small hit control processing 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1609: No), the game ball for the V winning switch 670e3 V passage detection processing is executed to monitor the passage of (S1625), and this processing ends. The details of this V passage detection process (S1625) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1610 is completed, next, whether the V passing flag 203dd is on (the V winning switch 670e3 is turned on during the small has passed) or not (S1626), and if it is determined that the V passage flag 203dd is on (S1626: Yes), each process of S1627 to S1630 for setting the execution of the jackpot Execute. Specifically, first, the data in the mode type storage area 203dc is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S1627), and the time saving medium counter 203da and the data in the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S1628). Next, the start of the type of jackpot corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area 203db is set (S1629), the V passage flag 203dd is set to off (S1630), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1626, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203dd is off (S1626: No), the execution conditions for the big hit were not established during the execution of the small winning game (V winning switch 670e3 not even one game ball has passed through), skipping the processing for starting the jackpot (each processing of S1627 to S1630) and terminating this processing as it is.

By executing this small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134), when the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small hit game, the start of the big hit corresponding to the small hit type can be accurately started. can be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, details of the above-described V passage detection process (S1625) will be described. This V passage detection process (S1625) is one process in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134), and as described above, is a process for monitoring the passage of the game ball to the V prize switch 670e3.

In the V passage detection process (see FIG. 135), first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203dd is on (S2501). If it is determined that the V passage flag 203dd is on (S2501: Yes), In the small win this time, the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 has already been detected, which means that the execution of the big win is already decided after the small win is finished, so the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203dd is off (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 670e3 (S2502), and the V winning switch 670e3 is determined. If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through (S2502: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2502, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 670e3 (S2502: Yes), then the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 was detected during the regular period (V valid period) (S2503). Here, as the V valid period, the special discharge channel 670e2 is set to be passable for 0.075 seconds, and just before the end of the period, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge channel 670e2 reaches the V passage switch 670e3. 0.2 seconds, which is a period that can be required until

In the processing of S2503, if it is determined that the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 is not detected during the V valid period (S2503: No), there is a fraudulent act of illegally passing the V winning switch 670e3 to execute a big win. Since there is a possibility that it has been performed, an error command is set (S2504), and this processing ends. By setting the error command, the display of the error image is set in the sound lamp control device 113, so that the hall clerk or the like who visually recognizes the error image can be made to recognize the occurrence of the fraudulent act at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2503, if it is determined that the V winning switch 670e3 was passed during the V valid period (S2503: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 notifies that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3. (S2505), sets the V passage flag 203dd to ON (S2506), and terminates this processing. By setting the V passing flag 203dd to ON, the start of the big win can be set after the small win is finished.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to 136, the details of command determination processing 5 (S4141) in the fifth embodiment will be described. This command determination process 5 (S4141) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, and similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, This is a process for executing control according to the type of command output from main controller 110 .

S4201 to S4209 and S4213 to S4215 of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment correspond to S4201 to S4209, S4209 and S4209 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, respectively. and the same processing as the processing of S4213 to S4215 are executed. Further, in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4209 that the status command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110, (S4209: Yes), state command processing for performing control according to the game state (mode) notified by the state command is executed (S4221), and this processing ends. Details of this status command will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the state command processing (S4221) described above. This state command process (S4221) is, as described above, a process for performing control according to the game state (mode) notified by the state command. In this state command processing (4221), first, the data in the game state storage area 223h is updated according to the game state indicated by the received state command (S5501). That is, the data is updated to the data indicating the gaming state notified from the main controller 110 .

When the process of S5501 is completed, it is then determined whether the status command received this time is a status command for notifying that the multi-family mode has been entered (S5502). If it is determined that the command is to show (S5502: Yes), the back image for the multi-family villa mode is set (S5503), and this processing ends. By setting a rear image (not shown) dedicated to the multi-streak mode when the multi-streak mode is entered, the player can easily understand that the multi-streak mode is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing the shift to the consecutive villa mode.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5502, if it is determined that the command is not for notifying that the mode has shifted to the multi-station mode (S5502: No), then whether the command is for notifying the game state at the time of power return. It is determined whether or not (S5504), and if it is determined that the status command was output when the power was restored (S5504: Yes), the back image for normal mode is set (S5506), and this processing ends. The fact that the status command is not a status command for notifying the continuous mode and is output at the time of power restoration is a command indicating the pullback mode or the normal mode. By setting the same back image in both the pullback mode and the normal mode, especially when the power is turned off when the pullback mode is entered and the number of fluctuations exceeds 30 times and is within 100 times. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the game state from the back image when the power is restored (to make it difficult to distinguish between the normal mode and the withdrawal mode). That is, the game property before the power is turned off (the game property of predicting whether the game has been shifted to the normal mode or whether the withdrawal mode is continuing) can be inherited even after the power is turned on again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered when the power supply is cut off due to a so-called momentary power failure or the like.

In the process of S5504, if it is determined that the current status command is not a command for power restoration (S5504: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a command indicating the normal mode (S5505), and the normal mode is changed. If it is determined that the command is to show (S5505: Yes), the process proceeds to S5506 in order to set the back image for the normal mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5505, if it is determined that the command is not the command indicating the normal mode (that is, the command indicating the pullback mode) (S5505: No), the back image for high expectation (see FIG. 116(a) ) is set (S5507), and the process ends. By setting a high-expectation back image when the withdrawal mode is notified, the player can be made to recognize that the player is in a relatively advantageous state. Therefore, since the game can be continued even after the consecutive villa mode ends, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, variable display setting processing 5 (S4142) in the fifth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 5 (S4142) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. This is a process for executing a variable effect in the 3-symbol display device 81 .

In each process of S4801 to S4809 of the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 138), the same process as each of S4801 to S4809 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed. be done. In addition, in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 138) in the fifth embodiment, after the process of S4805 is finished, the back image indicating the degree of expectation as to whether or not the pullback mode continues is drawn again. is executed (S4831), and the process proceeds to S4806. The details of this expectation update process (S4831) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the above-described expectation updating process (S4831). In this expectation updating process (S4831), first, the value of the variation counter 223db is updated by adding 1 (S5601), and then whether the current mode is the continuous mode (connected to the game state storage area 223h). (S5602). In the processing of S5602, if it is determined that the mode is the continuous villa mode (S5602: Yes), the possibility of the pullback mode is 0, and there is no need to suggest the degree of expectation by the rear image, so this processing ends as it is. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5602 that the current mode is not the multi-family villa mode (S5602: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image for the normal mode is set (S5603). If it is determined that the back image is set (S5604: Yes), there is no possibility of executing a re-lottery for the back image (after the big win, the normal mode is shifted to, and the normal mode continues ), the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, if it is determined that the back image for the normal mode is not set (S5603: No), the pullback mode was set after the previous big win, and it has already fallen to the normal mode. Alternatively, it means that the pullback mode is being continued, so first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter 223db is 101 (S5604). If the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is 101 (S5604: Yes), it means that the number of fluctuations in the pullback mode has ended and the normal mode has been entered, regardless of whether the previous jackpot was a jackpot E5 or a jackpot F5. A back image for normal mode is set (S5605), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5604 that the value of the variation number counter 223db is not 101 (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter 223db is greater than 30. (S5606), if it is determined to be 30 or less (S5606: No), it is the number of fluctuations that confirms that the pullback mode continues regardless of whether the previous jackpot was jackpot E5 or jackpot F5, and high expectations Since there is no need to change the back image for the first image, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5606 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is greater than 30 (S5606: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is 31. (S5607). In the process of S5607, when it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223db is 31 (S5607: Yes), each process (S5609, S5610) for re-lottery of the degree of expectation is executed. More specifically, the expectation level selection table 222da is read (S5609), and from the read table, the back image (expectation level) corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is specified and set as the back image (S5610). , the process ends. This makes it possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation as to whether or not the pullback mode continues at the time when the number of fluctuations at which there is a possibility that the pullback mode has ended. It is possible to predict whether or not is continuing. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

If it is determined in the processing of S5607 that the value of the variation number counter 223db is not 31 (S5607: No), it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223db is a multiple of 10 (S5608). (S5608: Yes), each process (S5609, S5610) for re-lottery of the degree of expectation is executed. In other words, after reaching the number of times of variation that may have ended the pullback mode, the degree of expectation can be updated every time the variation display is performed 10 times. Therefore, as the game continues, it is possible to accurately predict whether or not the game is in the pullback mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, in the processing of S5608, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is not a multiple of 10 (S5608: No), this processing ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the V winning switch inside the V winning device 670 that enables ball entry when a small win is made in addition to the case where a special symbol lottery results in a big win. Also when the game ball passes through 670e3, the jackpot game is executed. In addition, while the small hit cannot be won in the first special symbol lottery, it is configured to be won with a high probability (9/10) in the second special symbol lottery. In other words, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, even if the result of the lottery does not result in a big win, if the lottery results in a small win, a big win can be expected. It can be said that the special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the ratio of executing the lottery of the second special symbols (easiness of execution) is varied according to the game state. That is, a game state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400 and a game state in which it is easy to enter the game ball are provided. More specifically, in the normal mode in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal pattern is low, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is long, and the normal pattern is hit. Since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is shortened in this case, even if the player continues to aim at the through gate 67 by hitting to the right, the rate at which the electric accessory 6400a is opened becomes extremely low, and the second ball entrance 6400 is played. It also becomes difficult to enter the ball. On the other hand, in the continuous mode in which the time saving state A of the normal pattern is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal pattern increases, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern shortens, and the normal pattern hits. Since the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a in , is also longer, many game balls can enter the second ball entrance 6400 simply by continuing to shoot game balls aiming at the through gate 67 by hitting to the right. . Therefore, the continuous mode can create an advantageous state in which a big win is more likely to occur than in the normal mode.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, in addition to the normal mode and the consecutive villa mode, there is provided a pull-back mode in which the time-saving state B of normal symbols is set. In this pull-back mode, the probability of winning a normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a in the case of winning a normal symbol are the same as in the continuous mode, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different from that in the continuous mode. It is configured. In the continuous mode, the normal pattern variation time is set so that the electric accessory 6400a is opened at the timing at which the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second ball entrance 6400. However, in the pullback mode, after the game ball that passed through the through gate 67 has passed through the second ball entrance 6400, and before the next game ball reaches the second ball entrance 6400 The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set so that the electric accessory 6400a is released only before. As a result, in the pullback mode, by continuing to shoot the game ball aiming at the through gate 67, it is possible to frequently open the electric accessory 6400a, but the game ball almost reaches the second ball entrance 6400. Since it does not enter the ball, it becomes an extremely disadvantageous state that only reduces the number of balls it has. Therefore, in the pullback mode, it is possible to perform a game method in which the player enters the game ball into the first ball inlet 64 by hitting to the left to proceed with the game (lottery for special symbols). In other words, the game method similar to the normal mode (normal game state) is performed instead of the game method aiming at the second ball entrance 6400 which is easily opened despite the fact that the time saving state of the normal symbol is provided. It is possible to realize a novel game property that can be done.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the pullback mode than in the normal mode, there is a higher possibility of shifting to the consecutive mode after the jackpot ends. . In addition, in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the continuous mode, the withdrawal mode is set until at least 30 special symbol lotteries are completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that it is advantageous to continue playing the game until at least 30 special symbol lotteries are performed after the end of the continuous mode. Here, when a special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, or when a game ball enters a specific area, a game machine with specifications that give a jackpot (so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine), as a game state Only two types of game states, a normal game state in which game balls are difficult to enter the specific area and a time-saving game state in which game balls are easy to enter the specific area, are provided, and when the time-saving game state ends, the game is immediately started. It was common to switch to the most disadvantageous normal game state. However, in this configuration, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game will be greatly reduced when the game shifts to the disadvantageous normal game state, and the player will immediately quit the game when the time-saving game state ends. There was a possibility that it would be lost. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the continuous mode, at least until the lottery of special symbols is executed 30 times, there is a special special pattern that makes it easy to shift to the continuous mode when the jackpot is won. The configuration is such that the state (retraction mode) is set. As a result, even if the consecutive game mode ends and the game ball enters a disadvantageous game state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, the player's motivation for playing the game is prevented from decreasing. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the consecutive game mode is finished, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, the ratio of mode transition (ratio of each jackpot type) is not limited to the content of the fifth embodiment, and is arbitrarily determined within the range where the normal mode is the most disadvantageous and the consecutive villa mode is the most advantageous. be able to. For example, in the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols in the normal mode, the game state after the jackpot ends is either the consecutive mode or the normal mode. However, the retraction mode may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, 10%). In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery in the pull-back mode results in a big win, the mode is always switched to the multi-family mode, but the normal mode and the pull-back mode are lower than the multi-family mode. It is good also as a structure which can be set with a ratio.

In the fifth embodiment, only 30 times or 100 times are provided as the number of times of the pullback mode, but the number is not limited to this, and the number of times may be diversified. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether or not the pullback mode has ended, so that the player can more seriously predict how long the pullback mode will continue. In addition, a part of the jackpot won during the Renso mode is configured to shift to the normal mode, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the type of back image in the same way as when the pullback mode is set. may be configured. By constructing in this way, even when the normal mode is set after the end of the big win, the player can continue the game by trying to determine whether or not the return mode is set from the type of the rear image. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the fifth embodiment, the state of the distribution member 6600 includes a state in which game balls are distributed to the right flow path R1 and a state in which game balls are distributed to the left flow path R2 by passing (distribution) of the game balls. Although it was set as the structure which switches, it is not restricted to this. For example, it may be configured to determine the shooting interval of the game ball and electrically switch the state of the distribution member 6600 . In this case, for example, in the time saving state A, it may be operated so as to be alternately distributed to the right side flow path R1 and the left side flow path R2, and in the time saving state B, it may be operated so as to be distributed only to the right side flow path R1. . By configuring in this way, even reaching the through gate 67 is blocked in the time saving state B, so that the game can be played more reliably by hitting to the left.

In the fifth embodiment, there are one type of state in which game balls are likely to enter the second ball entrance 6400 (Renso mode), and two types of state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entrance 6400. (Normal mode, pullback mode). That is, in the Renso mode, a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entrance 6400 directly, while in the other modes (normal mode, pullback mode), the game ball can pass through the through gate 67. A game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path R1 after being shot cannot enter the second ball entrance 6400. Although the variable time and the open period of the electric accessory 6400a are set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 6400, two types of game states may be provided. Specifically, for example, both time-saving state A and time-saving state B are configured as game states in which it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and in time-saving state A, game balls are shot at the shortest shooting interval. If this continues, only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entrance 6400 (the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is fired next and passes through the right flow path R1). On the other hand, in the time saving state B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 are fired next to the right flow path R1 It may be configured to set the open period of the electric accessory 6400a so that both the game ball that has passed through can enter. That is, in the time-saving state A, the opening period of the length in which the electric accessory 6400a is closed before the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entrance 6400 is set. , In the time saving state B, after the game ball next to the game ball that passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entrance 6400, the electric accessory 6400a may be closed. good. By configuring in this way, the time-saving state B can reduce waste balls when the game balls are continuously struck to the right than the time-saving state A. - 特許庁Therefore, since the time saving state B can be made to have a higher degree of advantage, the setting of the time saving state B can make the player more happy than the setting of the time saving state A. - 特許庁

In the fifth embodiment, by making the fluctuation time of the normal pattern different between the time saving state A and the time saving state B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 in the time saving state A directly enters the second ball entrance 6400. While the ball is possible, in the time saving state B, neither the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 nor the game ball that has been fired after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entrance 6400. It was configured to be That is, in the time-saving state A, if the game ball is continuously struck to the right at the shortest shooting interval, most of the game balls distributed to the left flow path R2 by the distribution member 6600 enter the second ball entrance 6400. On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, neither the game ball that has been hit to the right and distributed to the right flow path R1 nor the game ball that has been distributed to the left flow path R2 cannot enter the second ball entrance 6400. Although the configuration is described as being possible, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the variation time of the normal symbol, by varying the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a according to the type of the time saving state, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 in the time saving state B. It is good also as a structure which becomes difficult to ball. Specifically, for example, in the time saving state A, similarly to the fifth embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.1 seconds, and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a is set to 0.2 seconds. A game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is directly entered into the second ball entrance 6400 . On the other hand, in the time saving state B, after 0.1 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, it is opened momentarily (for example, 0.01 seconds), and then 0.4 seconds have passed. After that, the electric accessory 6400a may be opened for a relatively long time (for example, 0.19 seconds). With this configuration, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entrance 6400 before and after the electric accessory 6400a is momentarily opened. It becomes impossible to enter the ball into the ball entrance 6400. In addition, the game ball launched next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can reach the second ball entrance 6400 only after a relatively long opening time (0.19 seconds) has elapsed. Even if hitting to the right, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400 . Therefore, since the operation similar to that of the fifth embodiment can be realized, the game can be played by hitting to the left in the time-saving state B.

In the fifth embodiment, in the time saving state A, the variation time of the normal pattern is always 0.1 seconds (the variation time in which the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is likely to enter the second ball entrance 6400 directly). It is set, and in the time saving state B, the variation time of the normal pattern is always set to 0.5 seconds (the variation time that makes it difficult to enter the second ball entrance 6400), but there are variations in the variation time. may be provided. Specifically, for example, in the time saving state A, the variable time of 0.5 seconds is set with a low probability (for example, 10%), and in the time saving state B, the variable time of 0.1 seconds with a low probability may be set. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variation time of normal symbols.

In the fifth embodiment, as the normal pattern variation time in the time saving state A, when the normal pattern hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entrance 6400 directly. Although the configuration is such that the time is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation time of the normal symbol may be set so that the game ball fired next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and distributed to the right flow path R1 can enter. By configuring in this way, in the time saving state A, the game ball cannot be entered into the second ball entrance 6400 only by passing it through the through gate 67, so in the time saving state A, the game can be played continuously. You can keep shooting balls. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

In the fifth embodiment, by biasing the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 to the lower right side by the biased portion 6600c of the distribution member 6600, the game ball does not reach the distribution member 6600 for 1.5 seconds or longer. In this case, the distributing member 6600 is configured to return to the state of distributing to the right flow path R1, but the biased portion 6600c is not necessarily provided. It may be configured such that the game balls that have reached the distribution means are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path regardless of the shooting interval of the game balls.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 156. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, the normal mode in which the normal state of the normal symbols is set is the most disadvantageous state (a state in which the number of balls held is likely to decrease and a lottery for the second special symbol that is disadvantageous is likely to be executed), The continuous mode in which the time-saving state A of the normal pattern is set is the most advantageous state (the state in which the number of held balls is difficult to decrease and the lottery of the advantageous second special pattern is easily executed). In addition, in the pullback mode, which may shift when a big win is achieved in the consecutive mode, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting it to the left in the same way as in the normal mode, and to proceed with the game. However, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery in the pullback mode, the ratio of shifting to the consecutive mode is higher than in the case of a jackpot in the normal mode. That is, as a disadvantageous mode (game state) in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by lottery of the first special symbol, two types of modes, a normal mode and a pullback mode, are provided, and a predetermined mode is provided after the continuous mode is completed. A relatively advantageous pullback mode is set only during the period.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the time-saving state B of the normal symbols is set to the most disadvantageous game state in which it is difficult to shift to the continuous mode even if the jackpot is won, and when the normal state of the normal symbols is reached, the normal symbols are displayed. It is configured so that the shift rate to the continuous mode when a big hit is higher than in the time saving state B.例文帳に追加More specifically, when the first special pattern lottery hits in the time saving state B of the normal pattern, the game state after the jackpot ends at a high rate becomes the time saving state B of the normal pattern, and the continuous mode at a low rate. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern in the normal state of the normal pattern, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to 100% continuous mode. As a result, when the time saving state B of the normal pattern ends and the normal pattern shifts to the normal state, it becomes easier to shift to the continuous mode, so when the time saving state B is set, the time saving state is set. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is played with the expectation that the game will end.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, even in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a low probability (for example, 1/200). The small hit type of the first special symbol includes a small hit type that shifts to the continuous mode after the big hit given when the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3, and a small hit that shifts to the normal state of the normal pattern. A hit type is provided. Therefore, if a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3 after winning a small hit, there is a possibility that it will shift to an advantageous state, so in the disadvantageous normal pattern time saving state B, the first special pattern lottery It is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game is played in anticipation of a small win rather than a big win.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, in addition to the case where the number of lotteries of special symbols in the time saving state of 1 ends the specified number of times (for example, 100 times), a small hit of a specific type in the time saving state of 1 (small hit A6) Even when the number of winning times reaches a specified number (for example, once), it is configured to directly shift from the time saving state to the normal state. That is, when winning a specific type of small hit (small hit A6) in the time saving state B of the normal pattern, the small hit ends without the game ball passing through the V prize switch 670e3, and the remaining time saving Regardless of the number of times, it goes directly to the relatively advantageous normal mode. As a result, in the most disadvantageous time-saving state B of normal symbols, the game can be played in anticipation of winning a specific type of small win (small win A6) at an early stage (small number of lotteries of special symbols). can. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous while the most disadvantageous time saving state B is set, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel game property that it is advantageous not to generate a V prize in a specific type of small win (small win A6).

In the following description of the sixth embodiment, for simplification of the description, the time saving state B of the most disadvantageous normal pattern is called "normal mode", and when it becomes a jackpot than the time saving state B The normal state of the normal pattern that easily shifts to the continuous mode is called "preparation mode". In addition, since the time-saving state A of normal symbols is the most advantageous state as in the fifth embodiment, it is referred to as the "consecutive mode" as in the fifth embodiment.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the sound lamp The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The only difference is that the control processing to be executed is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 140, a selection effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 when a small win is made in the normal mode (ordinary symbol time saving state B) in the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed during the small winning period and a big win is achieved, the small winning type (small winning B6, C6 ) and a small hit type (small hit A6) in which the time saving state ends and shifts to the normal mode by finishing the small hit as it is without passing through the V prize switch 670e3. In other words, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a small hit, the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3 and passes through the V prize switch 670e3. A small win type is provided in which it is advantageous to finish the small win as it is without doing so. In this selection effect, an effect is executed in which the player selects whether to hit to the right in order to pass the V prize switch 670e3 or to hit to the left so that the game ball does not pass through the V prize switch 670e3. be done.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140, when a small win is won during the normal mode, "3", "4" and "1" indicating the small win are displayed on the display area Ds2 in the upper right portion of the display screen. ” is stopped and displayed. In addition, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is divided into two on the left and right, and in the upper center of the display screen, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR7 in which the characters "Choose!" is displayed. is formed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 140, in the left half of the display screen, there is formed a display area HR8 of a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in which the characters "A chance to enter the preparation mode by avoiding V!?" , an arrow image YG1 resembling a left-pointing arrow is displayed, in which characters "left-handed" are displayed. In addition, in the right half of the display screen, there is formed a display area HR9 having a substantially oblong rectangular shape in which characters such as "V-get a big win! Maybe Renso mode...?" , an arrow image YG2 imitating a right-pointing arrow with characters "Right shot" is displayed.

Depending on the contents of these displays, there is a possibility that the player will shift to the preparation mode by hitting left, but if the player hits right and wins a V prize, the game will shift to the Renso mode in addition to the jackpot. It is possible to make them understand that there is a possibility to do so. As a result, the player is made to judge whether it is better to hit the right hand to aim for the V prize or to hit the left hand to avoid the V prize, and the game is played according to the judgment. Since the game can be played by the method, the interest of the player can be enhanced each time a small win is obtained. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the ratio of determining the small hit type (small hit A6) that shifts to the preparation mode when avoiding the V prize is 50%, whereas the V prize occurs The ratio of determining the small hit type (small hit B6) that shifts to Renso mode after the big hit is 40%, and when the V prize occurs, it moves to the preparation mode (time saving state B) after the small hit. The rate at which the small hit type (small hit C6) is determined is 10%. Also, when a V winning occurs in the small win A6, the normal mode is reset 100 times after the big win. Therefore, if a game is played with the aim of winning a V prize, and if a V prize occurs as intended, a jackpot will always be awarded, but the normal mode will be looped rather than the possibility of shifting to the Renso mode. more likely. Also, if you avoid the V prize, 50% of the time, it will shift to the preparation mode, and 50% of the time, the normal mode will be maintained. can be judged. Also, the determination of whether to avoid the V winning or to aim for the V winning can be made different according to the remaining number of times of shortening the time (remaining number of times in the normal mode). Specifically, for example, when the number of times of time saving in the normal mode is small, it is better to avoid the V prize than to risk that the normal mode will be reset by allowing the player to win the V prize. It can make you think that is good. Also, when the number of times of time saving is large, even if the number of times of time saving is reset, there is little shock, so it is possible to make the player think that he should actively aim for the V prize. Therefore, it is possible to change the game method when the selection effect occurs according to the number of times of remaining time saving in the normal mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 141(a). FIG. 141(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141(a), the configuration of the ROM202 in the sixth embodiment is the configuration of the ROM202 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 118(a)), and the small hit prescribed number of times selection table 202ea is added. It is different in that In addition, the contents of the first hit random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, the small hit type selection table 202da, and the time saving frequency selection table 202db are partially changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 118(a)) in the fifth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIG. 141(b), details of the first winning random number table 202a in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 141(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141(b), in the first hit random number table 202a in the sixth embodiment, five random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 4" are defined as judgment values for judging a big hit. (See 202a1 in FIG. 141(b)). It should be noted that, similarly to the fifth embodiment, the determination value for the big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Of the 400 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers judged to be a big win is 5, so a special symbol lottery is executed in the sixth embodiment. In that case, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/80 (5/400). That is, it is set to be twice or more higher than the jackpot probability (1/200) in the fifth embodiment. As a result, it becomes difficult to allow the number of times of time saving to elapse before the first special symbol lottery hits a jackpot in the normal mode. Therefore, when the normal mode (time-saving state B with normal symbols) shifts to the preparation mode (normal state with normal symbols), it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction. In addition, the normal mode basically continues until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times. The probability that the lottery of special symbols will not be won even once in 100 times of lottery is about 28.4% (79/80 to the 100th power). 4%.

In addition, "5 to 397" is defined as the range of determination values determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 141 (b)), and determination to be determined as a small hit of the first special symbol "398, 399" is defined as the value range (see 202a3 in FIG. 141(b)). Therefore, the probability of winning a small prize in the first special symbol lottery is 1/200 (2/400). That is, in the normal mode, the probability of winning a small prize is set to be lower than the probability of winning a big prize in the special symbol lottery. In other words, it is configured so that the possibility of shifting to another mode due to the lapse of the number of big wins or time saving is higher than that of shifting to another mode triggered by a small win.

In addition, "5 to 40" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 141 (b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol "41 to 399" is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 141(b)). Thus, as in the fifth embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a small win is won with a high probability (9/10), so the game ball can pass through the V prize switch 670e3. More periods are also set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the time-saving state A (continuous villa mode) in which the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG.141(c), the detail of the 1st hit classification selection table 202b in the 6th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 141(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141(c), in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot A6 and the jackpot B6 are provided as the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the jackpot C6 is provided as the jackpot of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 141 (c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 69", and "jackpot A6" is defined in correspondence. (See 202b1 in FIG. 141(c)). This "jackpot A6" is a special jackpot in which the number of rounds is 5 lands, and the mode after the jackpot ends varies depending on the game state (mode) when the jackpot is won. Specifically, when it becomes "jackpot A6" in the time saving state (normal mode, consecutive mode), the normal mode with the number of time saving times of 100 times is set after the jackpot ends, while the normal state of the normal pattern (preparation mode ), when the "jackpot A6" is reached, the continuous mode with 100 times of time saving is set. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A6" is 70, so the first special symbol If the lottery results in a big win, the percentage of determining "jackpot A6" is 70%.

In addition, since the Renso mode is a game state in which the game is progressed mainly by lottery of the second special symbol, in most cases when the "jackpot A6" is won, it is not necessary to proceed with the game by lottery of the first special symbol. Some normal mode, or preparation mode. When it becomes "jackpot A6" in normal mode, the most disadvantageous normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends, and the number of times of time saving is reset 100 times regardless of the number of times of time saving at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, "jackpot A6" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type in the normal mode. On the other hand, when the "jackpot A6" is reached in the preparation mode, the most advantageous continuous mode (time-saving state A) is set after the jackpot ends, so if the "jackpot A6" is reached during the preparation mode, it is advantageous for the player. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 141(c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" as corresponding to "jackpot B6". (See 202b2 in FIG. 141(c)). This "jackpot B6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five and the game state after the jackpot is set to the continuous mode regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. That is, in the normal mode, it is the jackpot type that is the most advantageous for the player. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B6" is 70, so the first special symbol If the lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining "jackpot A6" is 30%. In other words, in the normal mode, even if the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big hit, the "jackpot A6" in which the normal mode is set again after the big hit is determined at a rate of 70%, and only at a rate of 30%, after the big hit A "jackpot B6" in which the consecutive villa mode is set is determined. In other words, even if the jackpot is achieved in the normal mode, the expectation of shifting to another mode is low (30% ratio), so if the jackpot is higher than the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode. It is possible to provide a novel game property that makes the player want to exit the normal mode (end the time-saving state) and shift to the preparation mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 141(c), as the second special symbol jackpot type, "jackpot C6" is defined in association with all the values of the first hit type counter C2 (FIG. 141 (c) 202b3). This "jackpot C6" is a jackpot that has 15 rounds and shifts to the Renso mode after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when a jackpot is achieved in the consecutive game mode in which the game is progressed mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbols, the game is certainly shifted to the consecutive game mode again after the jackpot is finished. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, it is better to win a big hit in the second special symbol lottery than to win a big win through a small win in the continuous mode. Possibility of going into Sou mode increases. Therefore, it is possible to please the player when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win.

Next, with reference to Drawing 142 (a), the details of small hit classification selection table 202da in the 6th embodiment are explained. FIG. 142(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table 202da.

As shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the first special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 49", "small hit A6" is defined in association with (see 202da1 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small win A6" is a small win type in which a "big win D6" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. The jackpot D6 is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5, and the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, "small win A6" is a small win type in which the game state after the big win becomes the most disadvantageous when a V prize is won during the small win game. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 50 counter values are "small hit A6", so when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit A6" The ratio determined is 50% (50/100). In addition, this "small hit A6" is a small hit that serves as an opportunity to end the time saving state regardless of the number of remaining time saving. For this reason, in the normal mode, if it becomes "small hit A6" and V prize does not occur, it shifts to a relatively advantageous preparation mode after the small win, so it is better not to win a V than to win a V. However, it is a special small hit type in which the gaming state is advantageous.

Further, as shown in FIG. 142(a), as the small hit type of the first special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "50 to 89", and "small hit B6" is associated. defined (see 202da2 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small hit B6" is a small hit type in which a "big hit B6" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. As described above, the jackpot B6 is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5, and the continuous mode is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, the "small win B6" is a small win type in which the game state after the big win is the most advantageous state by winning a V prize during the small win game. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 25 counter values are "small hit B6", so when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit B6" The ratio determined is 25% (25/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 142(a), as the small hit type of the first special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "90 to 99", and "small hit C6" is associated. (see 202da3 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small hit C6" is a small hit type in which a "big hit E6" is given when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. This "jackpot E6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5, and the preparation mode is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, the "small win C6" is a small win type in which the game state after the big win is set to a relatively advantageous state by winning a V prize during the small win game. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 10 counter values are "small hit C6", so if a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit C6" The percentage determined is 10% (10/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as a small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit D6" is defined in association with the range of "0 to 29" for the small hit type counter C5. (see 202da4 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small hit D6" is a small hit type in which a "big hit C6" is given when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. As described above, this "jackpot C6" has 15 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the consecutive game mode is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, the ``small win D6'' is a jackpot that has the largest number of rounds and the most advantageous game state after the big win by winning V during the small win game, so the ``small win D6'' is one of the most advantageous small winning types for the player. Of the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 30 counter values are "small hit D6". The ratio determined is 30% (30/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as a small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit E6" is defined in association with the range of "30 to 79" for the small hit type counter C5. (See 202da5 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small hit E6" is a small hit type in which a "big hit F6" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. This "jackpot F6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the game state after the jackpot ends is varied according to the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, when it becomes "jackpot F6" in the time saving state (normal mode, consecutive mode), after the jackpot ends, the consecutive mode with a time saving number of times of 100 is set, while the normal state of the normal pattern (preparation mode), when it becomes "jackpot F6", the number of times of time saving is set to 0 times (preparation mode is set). Therefore, when "big hit F6" occurs in the consecutive mode, the continuous mode continues even after the big win ends, which is advantageous for the player. It will be disadvantageous compared to the case of hitting the jackpot. This is because, if the lottery of the first special symbol in the preparation mode results in a big hit, the mode is shifted to the continuous mode, which is advantageous at a rate of 100%. Therefore, in the preparation mode in which it is necessary to play the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting left, when an irregular game for executing the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the degree of advantage for the player. can be reduced, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods. Of the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes the "small hit E6" is 50, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the "small hit E6" The ratio determined is 50% (50/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as a small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit F6" is defined in association with the range of "80 to 89" for the small hit type counter C5. (see 202da6 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small win F6" is a small win type in which a "big win G6" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. This "jackpot G6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. The period of the normal mode (the number of lotteries of special symbols until shifting to the preparation mode) set after the end of the "jackpot G6" is configured differently according to the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, when the “jackpot G6” is reached during the time saving state of the normal pattern, the normal mode (time saving state B) is set 50 times after the jackpot ends, while the “jackpot” is set during the normal state of the normal pattern. G6", the normal mode is set for 100 times after the jackpot is completed. Therefore, if the game goes to "jackpot G6" in the continuous mode, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends, which is disadvantageous for the player. However, since the number of times of the normal mode is set to be smaller than the number of times of the normal mode (100 times) which is set when "jackpot A6" is reached in the normal mode, it becomes easier to exit the normal mode and shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game until the game shifts to the preparation mode or until the jackpot is won before shifting to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the consecutive game mode ends, so that the availability of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Of the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes "small hit F6" is 10, so when it becomes a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit F6" The percentage determined is 10% (10/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as a small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit G6" is defined in association with the range of "90 to 94" for the small hit type counter C5. (See 202da7 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small hit G6" is a small hit type in which a "big hit H6" is given when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. This "jackpot H6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends, like the "jackpot G6". Specifically, when the "jackpot H6" is reached during the time saving state of the normal pattern, the normal mode (time saving state B) is set 25 times after the jackpot ends, while the "jackpot" is set during the normal state of the normal pattern. H6", the normal mode is set for 100 times after the jackpot is finished. Therefore, if "big win H6" is reached in the continuous mode, the game will shift to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the big win, which is disadvantageous for the player. However, the number of times of normal mode (100 times) set when "jackpot A6" is reached in normal mode, and the number of times of normal mode (25 times) set when "jackpot G6" is reached in continuous mode ) is set, it becomes easier to leave the normal mode and shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game until the game shifts to the preparation mode or until the jackpot is won before shifting to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the consecutive game mode ends, so that the availability of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Of the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes the "small hit G6" is 5, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the "small hit G6". The percentage determined is 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit H6" is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99" for the small hit type counter C5. (see 202da8 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small hit H6" is a small hit type in which a "big hit I6" is given when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. Like the "jackpot G6" and the "jackpot H6", this "jackpot I6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. Specifically, when it becomes "jackpot I6" during the time saving state of the normal pattern, one normal mode (time saving state B) is set after the jackpot ends, while the "jackpot" is set during the normal state of the normal pattern I6", the normal mode is set for 100 times after the jackpot is completed. Therefore, when it becomes "jackpot I6" in Renso mode, if it is lost in the first special pattern lottery after the jackpot ends, it is possible to shift to the preparation mode, so the normal mode is set among the jackpot types. Then, it is most advantageous for the player (it becomes easier to shift to the preparation mode). Of the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes "small hit H6" is 5, so when it becomes a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit H6" The percentage determined is 5% (5/100).

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, in the continuous mode, when the game shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot ends, the number of times the normal mode (time saving state B) continues is not clearly indicated to the player. That is, as in the sixth embodiment, the type of the rear image suggests the degree of expectation as to whether or not the normal mode has shifted to the preparation mode. By configuring in this way, during a predetermined period (in the sixth embodiment, 50 times after the end of the jackpot) after the end of the consecutive villa mode, whether the transition to the preparation mode or the normal mode is maintained. It is possible to provide a game property that makes it possible to predict whether or not there is. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to Drawing 142 (b), the details of number-of-time-savings selection table 202db in the 6th embodiment are explained. FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time reduction frequency selection table 202db. This time-saving frequency selection table 202db, like the time-saving frequency selection table 202db in the fifth embodiment, the time-saving frequency after the end of the jackpot (the number of lotteries of special symbols until shifting to the normal mode) is determined by the jackpot type, and when the jackpot is won. This is a data table that defines data to be set according to the game state of the game.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b), as a jackpot type, the jackpot A6 is defined in association with 100 times of time saving state A in the normal state (preparation mode) of normal symbols, and the time saving state of normal symbols ( 100 time saving state B is defined in association with normal mode, continuous mode) (see 202db1 in FIG. 142(b)). Therefore, in the preparation mode set to the normal state of the normal symbols, if the lottery of the first special symbols results in a jackpot A6, the continuous mode is set after the jackpot, so it is one of the jackpot types preferable for the player. . On the other hand, in the normal mode and the consecutive mode, when the jackpot reaches A6, the mode shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode, which is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player. In addition, since the continuous mode is a game state in which the game is progressed by mainly executing the lottery of the second special symbol, it becomes disadvantageous when the jackpot becomes A6 (the disadvantageous normal mode is set after the jackpot ends). ) is almost normal mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot B6 and C6 are defined in association with the time saving state A of 100 times regardless of the game state at the time of winning (Fig. 202db2 at 142(b)). Therefore, even if the jackpot B6 or C6 is won in any of the game states of the normal mode, the preparation mode, and the consecutive game mode, the game state after the jackpot ends is the most advantageous consecutive game mode. Jackpots B6 and C6 are one of the most advantageous jackpot types.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as a jackpot type, the jackpot D6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times regardless of the game state at the time of winning (Fig. 142 ( b) 202db3). Therefore, the jackpot D6 is the most disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends. In addition, as the jackpot type, the jackpot E6 is defined in association with 0 times as the number of times of time saving (see 202db4 in FIG. 142(b)). Therefore, even if the jackpot E6 is won in any game state of the normal mode, the preparation mode, and the continuous mode, the preparation mode is relatively advantageous after the jackpot ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as a jackpot type, for jackpot F6, 0 times is defined as the number of time reductions in the normal state (preparation mode) of the normal design in association with the time reduction state of the normal design. (Normal mode, continuous mode) is defined in association with 100 times of time saving state A (see 202db5 in FIG. 142(b)). The jackpot F6 is a jackpot type that is won when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed during the jackpot game and becomes a jackpot E6 in the lottery of the second special symbols, and basically it is a jackpot that is won only in the consecutive mode. . When the jackpot F6 is reached in the consecutive game mode, the consecutive game mode is set again after the jackpot ends, so the jackpot F6 is one of the jackpot types in which the game state after the jackpot ends is most advantageous. The reason why the number of times of time saving is set to 0 when winning during the normal state of the normal symbol is to suppress the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation mode. . That is, in the preparation mode, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big win, the mode shifts to the continuous mode at a rate of 100%, but when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a small win E6 and the jackpot F6 is won. , looping the preparation mode. Therefore, if the lottery of the second special symbols is executed irregularly, it becomes disadvantageous, and thus, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as a jackpot type, the jackpot G6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times in the normal state of the normal symbol, and 50 times in the time saving state of the normal symbol. is defined in association with the time saving state B (see 202db6 in FIG. 142(b)). Therefore, when the jackpot G6 is reached in the continuous mode, the normal mode is set a relatively large number of times, which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, when the jackpot G6 is reached in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times, so that the irregular game method for executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation mode can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as a jackpot type, the jackpot H6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times in the normal state of the normal symbol, and 25 times in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The time saving state B is defined in association with (see 202db7 in FIG. 142(b)). Therefore, when the jackpot H6 is reached in the continuous mode, the normal mode is set a smaller number of times than when the jackpot G6 is reached, so that the normal mode can be ended more easily than the jackpot G6. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player than when the jackpot G6 is reached and the consecutive villa mode ends. In addition, when the jackpot H6 is reached in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times in the same way as the jackpot G6. can be planned.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot I6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times in the normal state of the normal symbol, and once in the time saving state of the normal symbol. is defined in association with the time saving state B (see 202db8 in FIG. 142(b)). Therefore, when the jackpot hits I6 in the continuous mode, the normal mode is set a smaller number of times than when the jackpot hits G6 or H6, so that the normal mode can be terminated much more easily than the jackpot hits G6 or H6. can be done. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player than when the consecutive game mode ends with the jackpot G6 or jackpot H6. In addition, when the jackpot I6 is reached in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times like the jackpot G6 and the jackpot H6. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, details of the small hit prescribed number of times selection table 202ea will be described. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit specified number of times selection table 202ea. This small hit prescribed number of times selection table 202ea is a data table referred to for setting end conditions of the time saving state for each small hit type. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, in addition to the number of times of saving time (number of times of lottery of special symbols), the number of times of winning until the time saving state is terminated for each type of small hit is defined, and the number of times of winning is defined within the number of times of saving time. When the specified number of times is reached, the time saving state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of time saving times. As a result, every time a small win is made in the disadvantageous normal mode, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation for reaching the specified number of times.

As shown in FIG. 143, the small hit prescribed number of times selection table 202ea is associated with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the number of times of winning until the time saving state for each small hit type is terminated (regulation number of times) is specified. More specifically, for the big hit A6, 100 times is defined as the prescribed number of times for all the small winning types in the normal state of the normal symbol. On the other hand, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, 1 time is defined as the specified number of times for the small hit A6, and 100 times is specified as the specified number of times for the small hit type other than the small hit A6 (Fig. 143) 202ea1). In other words, when setting the continuous mode, 100 times are set as the specified number of times for all small hit types, whereas when setting the normal mode (time saving state B), the big hit A6 One time is set as the specified number of times, and 100 times is set as the specified number of times for other small hit types. In addition, 100 times is defined as the prescribed number of times for all the small winning types regardless of the game state at the time of winning (see 202ea2 in FIG. 143). That is, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, when it comes to the big hits B6 and C6 in which the continuous mode is set, 100 times is set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types.

Also, as shown in FIG. 143, for the jackpot D6 and the jackpot G6 to I6, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, one time is defined as the prescribed number of times for the small hit A6, and other 100 times is defined in association with the small hit type as the defined number of times (see 202ea3 in FIG. 143). That is, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, when it becomes one of the big hits D6, G6 to I6 in which the normal mode is set, one time is set as the specified number of times for the small hit A6, and for the other small hit types 100 times is set as the specified number of times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 143, for the big hit E6, 0 times is defined as the prescribed number of times for all the small hit types regardless of the game state at the time of winning (of FIG. 143 202ea4). That is, when the normal mode is set after the end of the big hit, 0 times is set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types. In addition, for the big hit F6, in the normal state of the normal design, 0 times is defined as the prescribed number of times for all the small hit types, while in the time saving state of the normal design, all the small hit types 100 times is defined as the prescribed number of times (see 202ea5 in FIG. 143).

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the continuous villa mode is set, 100 times are set as the prescribed number of times for ending the time saving state for all small hit types. That is, until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times, the time saving state is surely continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent the disappointment of the player by forcibly terminating the time saving state and shifting to the preparation mode before the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times in the continuous mode. In addition, when the normal mode is set, one time is set for the small hit A6 as the prescribed number of small hits for ending the time saving state. As a result, in the normal mode, if you win a small hit A6, you can forcibly end the number of times of working hours and shift to the preparation mode, so even if there are many remaining times of working hours in the normal mode, small The game can be played in anticipation of winning A6. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game in the normal mode from becoming an operation of simply continuing to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 until the number of times of time saving has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game in the normal mode.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, only in the normal mode, the specified number of times for the small hit A6 is set to 1 time, and the specified number of times for the other small hit types is set to 100 times. Although the number of times is set to 100, it is not limited to this. The correspondence relationship between the specified number of small hits and the type (mode) of the time saving state may be determined arbitrarily. For example, in the consecutive villa mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a small winning type with a small prescribed number of times (for example, 5 times) is provided in the small winning of the second special symbol. By configuring in this manner, the more V prizes of about 1/20 in the Renso mode continue to fail, the higher the possibility that the Renso mode will end, so that the game in the Renso mode will have a sense of tension. can have. Further, in the normal mode, in place of or in addition to determining the specified number of times for each type of small win, the specified number may be determined by summing up the winning times of one or all of the types of small wins. Specifically, for example, the specified number of times of the small winning A6 may be set to 1 time, and the specified number of times based on the total winning number of the small winning B6 and the small winning C6 may be set to 5 times. By configuring in this way, even if the event of failing to win the V prize and maintaining the normal mode continues, it is possible to positively perceive that the specified number of times until the transition to the preparation mode is reduced, so that the game can be played. It is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 144, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment has a small winning specified number of times storage area 203ea added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 121(b)). They are different in that respect.

The small hit prescribed number of times storage area 203ea is for storing the number of remaining small wins for each small win type to end the time saving state (normal mode, continuous mode) and shift to the preparation mode. storage area. In the time-saving state of normal symbols, each time a small win is made, the remaining number of winnings (prescribed number of times) corresponding to the winning small win type is subtracted and updated (see S2412 in FIG. 150). Then, when the specified number of times corresponding to one of the small hit types becomes 0 (reaches the specified number of times), regardless of the remaining time reduction number of times (lottery number of special symbols), it shifts to the preparation mode. (See S2414 in FIG. 150). In addition, in the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode, since the specified number of times of the small per type other than the small per A6 is set to 100 times, depending on the small per type other than the small per A6, 100 times (or 50 times, 25 times, 1 time), there is no possibility that the time saving state will end before the time saving number of times ends. In addition, in the continuous mode, 100 times is set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types, so the specified number of small wins is reached before the 100 times, which is the number of time saving times in the continuous mode, ends. There is also no possibility of moving to preparation mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 145, a game state transition method in the sixth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 145, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is provided with roughly three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 145 (time saving state B of normal patterns), the continuous mode shown in the lower left part of FIG. 145 (time saving state A of normal patterns), and the lower right part of FIG. A preparation mode (normal state of normal symbols) is provided.

As described above, the normal mode indicates the time-saving state B of the normal pattern, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and even if it becomes a big hit in the first special pattern lottery. Since it is difficult to shift to the mode, it is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In addition, as described above, the continuous mode indicates a game state in which the time saving state A of the normal pattern is set, and since the game ball becomes easier to enter the second ball entrance 6400, it is a small hit with a high probability. is generated and the chances of passing through the V winning switch 670e3 increase, so this is a gaming state in which the possibility of winning a big win is higher than in the normal mode. In addition, since the consecutive game mode is easily set again after the end of the big win, the game state becomes the most advantageous for the player.

In addition, the preparation mode indicates a game state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. Although it is necessary to play the game aiming at the ball entrance 64, the game state is more advantageous than the normal mode because the game shifts to the continuous mode at a rate of 100% when winning a jackpot.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 145, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another mode when a big hit is won, when a small win is won, and when the number of times of time saving has passed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big win and the big win B6 is determined as the big win type, the continuous mode is set as the game state after the big win. In addition, when the number of times of time saving passes (the lottery of special symbols for the number of times of time saving ends), it shifts to the preparation mode (normal state of normal symbols). Further, when the small winning A6 is reached and the small winning game ends without generating the V prize, the game shifts to the preparation mode due to reaching the specified number of times of the small winning A6 in the normal mode. In addition, when the small win B6 is reached and the player hits to the right aiming at the V win, and when the V win occurs, after the big win (jackpot B6) based on the V win is completed, the game shifts to the continuous mode. . Further, when the small win C6 is reached, the player hits to the right aiming at the V win, and when the V win occurs, after the big win (jackpot D6) based on the V win is completed, the mode shifts to the continuous mode. . On the other hand, when the big win A6 is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, and when the small win A6 is won and V prize is generated, the normal mode is set again after the big win is finished. Further, when the small wins B6 and C6 are reached and no V winning occurs, the normal mode is maintained.

Therefore, in the normal mode, when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big win, the mode is shifted to the continuous mode only at a rate of 30%, and the normal mode is looped at a rate of 70%. In other words, even if the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big win, there is a higher possibility that the normal mode will be looped rather than the transition to the continuous mode, so that the player will not be very pleased with the result of the lottery of the special symbol lottery. becomes. Therefore, in the normal mode, rather than getting a big win in the special symbol lottery, it can be made to want to shift to the preparation mode after the number of times of time reduction has passed, so every time the special symbol lottery is executed, a big win is made. It is possible to provide a novel game property that makes the player wish not to win the prize. Furthermore, in the normal mode, when a small win is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbols, a small win A6 is determined at a rate of 50%, with the specified number of times until the time-saving state is terminated. Therefore, if the small win becomes A6 and V winning does not occur, the mode shifts to the preparation mode, so if the small win is won with a probability of 1/200 in the lottery of the special symbols, the small win A6 is determined. It is possible to make the player expect to be there. Incidentally, if a V winning occurs in the small win A6, the normal mode is set again after the big win ends. Therefore, it can be said that the small win A6 is a small win type in which it is more advantageous not to generate a V prize than to generate a V prize in terms of game state (mode) transition. On the other hand, when a small winning type other than A6 is determined in the lottery of the first special symbol, the game state (mode) is maintained unless V winning is generated. In other words, the small winning types other than the small winning A6 are the small winning types that are more advantageous when the V winning is generated than when the V winning is not generated.

In this way, there is a small win type (small win A6) that becomes advantageous if you do not win a V prize and a disadvantage if you win a V prize, and a small win type that maintains a disadvantageous state if you do not win a V prize (small win B6, By providing C6), when winning a small prize, it is possible to provide a game property that allows the player to decide whether it is better to win a V prize or avoid a V prize. can. In addition, as described above, in the sixth embodiment, when a small hit is made in the normal mode, the selection effect (see FIG. 140) is executed regardless of the small hit type. As a result, it becomes difficult to guess the small winning type from the display mode, so that it is possible to make a determination as to whether or not to aim for the V prize more seriously. Therefore, every time a small prize is won, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 145, there is a possibility of shifting from the continuous mode to another mode not only when the jackpot is won, but also when the time reduction number of normal symbols is finished. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 145, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a small hit and a V prize (event in which the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3) occurs, and the big hit G6 to I6 is determined, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In addition, when the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times without winning a big hit, the number of times of shortening the working hours of the normal symbols passes, and the game shifts (falls) to the preparation mode. On the other hand, when the jackpots C6 and F6 are determined in the case of winning the V prize, or when the jackpots are won in the lottery of special symbols, the continuous mode is set again after the jackpot ends. In addition, as described above, the probability that the 100th special symbol variation ends without a big hit is about 0.6%, so it is a phenomenon that hardly occurs. Therefore, it is when the jackpot G6 to I6 is won that the mode is shifted to another mode in the continuous mode. The small hits (small hits F6 to H6) corresponding to the big hits G6 to I6 are determined at a rate of 20% of the total small hits, so when it comes to Renso mode, the big hit and Renso mode are set at 80% or more. It becomes an extremely advantageous game state that repeats at a rate. Therefore, since the player can play the game with the goal of shifting to the consecutive villa mode, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

As shown in the lower right portion of FIG. 145, there is a possibility of transitioning from the preparation mode to another mode only in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 145, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, even if the jackpot is A6 or when the jackpot is B6, the game after the jackpot ends. The state is set to Renso mode. In the preparation mode, basically only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed (the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 6400), but the second entry is performed by an irregular game method. When a game ball is entered into the ball opening 6400 to result in a big hit or a small hit to generate a V prize, the game falls to the normal mode (when the big hit is F6 to H6). , there is a possibility of looping the preparation mode (when jackpots D6 and E6 are obtained). Therefore, if the lottery for the second special symbol is executed by the irregular game method, it becomes more difficult to shift to the continuous mode than the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, so the advantage of the irregular game method. can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146(a), the details of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 146(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 146(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 123(a)) except that the expectation level selection table 222da is deleted. The difference is that a rank-up lottery table 222ea is added.

The rank-up lottery table 222ea suggests the number of remaining fluctuations up to the preparation mode by the rank-up aspect of the rear image when the jackpot G6 to I6 is reached in the consecutive mode and the game shifts (falls) to the normal mode. It is a data table that is referenced to set the rank-up effect for. Details of the rank-up lottery table 222ea will be described with reference to FIG. 146(b).

FIG. 146(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rank-up lottery table 222ea. As shown in FIG. 146(b), in the rank-up lottery table 222ea, for each value of the number of remaining time reductions (J), a determination value for determining to update (rank up) to a back image with a higher degree of expectation (Counter value of effect lottery counter 223da) is defined in association with this data table. The update of the rear image is randomly selected every time the number of times of change becomes a multiple of 10 within the range of less than 50 times of change.

As shown in FIG. 146(b), when the value of the number of remaining time reductions (J) is less than 20, it is determined that there is no rank increase when the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is "0 to 29". On the other hand, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is "30 to 89", it is determined to be one rank up, and when it is "90 to 99", it is determined to be two ranks up. Here, 1 rank up means that if the current rear image is a rear image for low expectations, it is updated (ranked up) to a rear image for medium expectations, and is a rear image for medium expectations. In this case, the back image is updated (ranked up) for high expectations. In other words, it means raising expectations by one level. In addition, when the back image for high expectations has already been set, the back image for high expectations is not changed. In addition, 2 rank up means updating (ranking up) to a rear image for high expectations regardless of the type of the current rear image.

Further, as shown in FIG. 146(b), when the value of the number of remaining time reduction (J) is 20 or more, the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is "0 to 59", it is determined that there is no rank up, In the case of "60 to 97", it is determined to be one rank up, and in the case of "98, 99", it is determined to be two ranks up. In this way, when the number of times of time saving is less than 20, the rate of one rank or two ranks up is higher than when the number of times of time saving is 20 or more. It is possible to play a game while paying attention to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 147, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment has a rank-up lottery flag 223ea and an expectation storage area 223eb added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 124). It is different in that

The rank-up lottery flag 223ea is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period for lottery for rank-up of the rear image using the rank-up lottery table 222ea. This rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to ON at the timing when the jackpot of the type that shifts from the continuous mode to the normal mode ends (see S5706 in FIG. 154), and the 51st variation pattern production after the jackpot ends. is set to OFF at the start timing of (see S5624 in FIG. 156). In other words, it is set to OFF based on the number of times of fluctuation that determines that the transition to the preparation mode has been reached for any of the jackpots G6 to I6. Also, although not shown, the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is also set to OFF when a big win is won. While the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on, every time the number of variations of the special symbol becomes a multiple of 10, a rank-up lottery using the rank-up lottery table 222ea is executed. Thus, it is possible to provide the playability of guessing whether or not the rank-up mode is shifted to the preparation mode (whether the number of remaining time reductions before shifting to the preparation mode is less than 20 times).

The degree-of-expectation storage area 223eb is a storage area for storing data indicating the degree of expectation suggested by the back surface type. When executing the lottery using the rank-up lottery table 222ea (see FIG. 146(b)), the current degree of expectation is determined by the data stored in the degree of expectation storage area 223eb, and determined by lottery. Identify the back face type after reflecting the rank up.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. First, the special symbol variation process 6 (S151) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this special symbol variation process 6 (S151), similar to the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the third pattern display device 81, and the like.

Of the special symbol variation processing 6 (see FIG. 148) in the sixth embodiment, in each process of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, S221, S261, S262, and S265, the special symbol in the fifth embodiment The same processes as S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, S221, S261, S262, and S265 of variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) are executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 6 (see FIG. 148) in the sixth embodiment, after the processing of S262, all the data in the time saving medium counter 203da, the small hit prescribed number of times storage area 203ea, and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset. , the process proceeds to S220 to set the start of the jackpot.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 148) in the sixth embodiment, in the process of S218, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a special symbol jackpot (S218: No), the fifth implementation Instead of the time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) in the form, the time saving number update process 6 is executed (S272), and the process proceeds to S265. The details of this time saving frequency update process 6 (S272) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the process of S265, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S265: Yes), instead of the small hit start process (see FIG. 129) in the fifth embodiment, the small hit start process 6 is executed (S273), and the process ends. The details of this small winning start process 6 (S273) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the details of the above-described time saving frequency update process 6 (S272) will be described. This time saving number update process 6 (S272) is a process executed instead of the time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth embodiment, and the time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) and Similarly, when it is the mode in which the time saving state is set (that is, when it is the continuous mode or the normal mode), it is a process for updating the number of times of working time saving.

Among the time saving number update processing 6 (see FIG. 149) in the sixth embodiment, in each process of S2301 to S2304 and S2306, respectively S2301 to S2304 of the time saving number update processing (see FIG. 128) in the fifth embodiment, and the same processing as each processing of S2306 is executed. In addition, in the time saving number update process 6 (see FIG. 149) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203da has become 0 in the process of S2304 (S2304: Yes), the small hit specified number of times is stored All the data in the area 203ea are reset to 0 (S2311), and a state command indicating the normal state of the normal design is set (S2312). Next, "00H" indicating the preparation mode (normal state of the normal symbol) is stored in the mode type storage area 203dc (S2313), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, details of the above-described small winning start process 6 (S273) will be described. This small hit start process 6 (S273) is a process executed instead of the small hit start process (see FIG. 129) in the fifth embodiment, and the small hit start process (see FIG. 129) in the fifth embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for setting the start of the small winning opening operation.

Among the small hitting start processing 6 (see FIG. 150) in the sixth embodiment, in each processing of S2401 to S2403, each processing of S2401 to S2403 of the small hitting start processing in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 129) The same processing is performed. In addition, in the small winning start processing 6 (see FIG. 150) in the sixth embodiment, when the processing of S2403 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203da during time saving is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) If it discriminate|determines (S2411) and the value of counter 203da is 0 in time saving (S2411:No), this process will be complete|finished as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2411, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203da during time saving is a value greater than 0 (S2411: Yes), the specified number of times for each small hit type stored in the small hit specified number of times storage area 203ea Of these, the specified number of times corresponding to the type of small hit won this time is updated by subtracting 1 (S2412), and it is determined whether or not the specified number of times after the subtraction has become 0 (S2413).

In the process of S2413, if it is determined that the prescribed number of times after subtraction has become 0 (S2413: Yes), in order to terminate the time saving state, the data of the time saving medium counter 203da and the small winning prescribed number of times storage area 203ea are all set to 0 (S2414), set a state command indicating the intention to the normal state of the normal symbol (S2415), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2413, if it is determined that the prescribed number of times after the subtraction in the process of S2412 is not 0 (S2413: No), this process ends.

By executing this small hit start process 6 (see FIG. 150), when the small hit A6 (the specified number of times is one small hit) in the normal mode, regardless of the remaining number of times of time saving, the time saving state It can be terminated and transitioned to preparation mode.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, only in the normal mode, the specified number of times for the small hit A6 is set to 1 time, and the specified number of times for the other small hit types is set to 100 times. Although the number of times is set to 100, it is not limited to this. The correspondence relationship between the specified number of small hits and the type (mode) of the time saving state may be determined arbitrarily. For example, in the continuous villa mode, the prescribed number of times may be set to one. By configuring in this way, in the consecutive villa mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a small winning type with a small prescribed number of times (for example, 5 times) is provided in the small winning of the second special symbol. By configuring in this manner, the more V prizes of about 1/20 in the Renso mode continue to fail, the higher the possibility that the Renso mode will end, so that the game in the Renso mode will have a sense of tension. can have. Further, in the normal mode, in place of or in addition to determining the specified number of times for each type of small win, the specified number may be determined by summing up the winning times of one or all of the types of small wins. Specifically, for example, the specified number of times of the small winning A6 may be set to 1 time, and the specified number of times based on the total winning number of the small winning B6 and the small winning C6 may be set to 5 times. By configuring in this way, even if the event of failing to win the V prize and maintaining the normal mode continues, it is possible to positively perceive that the specified number of times until the transition to the preparation mode is reduced, so that the game can be played. It is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the jackpot ending process 6 (S1151) in the sixth embodiment will be described. This jackpot end process 6 (S1151) is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 133) in the fifth embodiment in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132). Similar to the jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 133) in the form, this is processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Of the jackpot end processing 6 (see FIG. 151) in the sixth embodiment, S1321, S1322, and S1324 to S1326 of the jackpot end processing 5 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 133) S1321, S1322 , and S1324 to S1326 are executed. In addition, in the jackpot end processing 6 (see FIG. 151) in the sixth embodiment, when the processing of S1322 is completed, the small hit prescribed number of times selection table 202ea is read (S1331), and from the read table, the jackpot type storage area 203db and the game state (mode) at the time of winning indicated by the data of the winning mode storage area 203de (S1332). Next, the specified number of small hits for each type of specified small hit is stored in the specified number of times of small hit storage area 203ea, and the number of times of reduced working hours specified in the process of S1322 is set as the value of the counter 203da during reduced working hours (S1333) and processed. to S1324.

By executing this jackpot end processing 6 (see FIG. 151), the number of times of time saving and the number of times of small hits can be appropriately set according to the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 156. FIG. First, command determination processing 6 (S4151) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 6 (S4151) is executed in place of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment. This is processing for performing control according to the type of command received from the device 110 .

S4201 to S4209 and S4213 to S4215 of the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 152) in the sixth embodiment correspond to S4201 to S4209 of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment. , and S4213 to S4215 are executed. In command determination processing 6 (see FIG. 152) in the sixth embodiment, if it is determined that a state command has been received in the processing of S4209 (S4209: Yes), state command processing in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 137) ), status command processing 6 is executed (S4231), and this processing ends. The details of this state command process 6 (S4231) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 152) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4209 that the state command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4209: No), It is determined whether or not a command related to a win (opening command for a small win, ending command for a small win, etc.) is received (S4232), and if it is determined that a command related to a small win is received (S4232 : Yes), small hit related processing for performing control according to the type of the command related to the small hit is executed (S4233), and this processing ends. The details of this small hit related process (S4233) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4232, when it is determined that the command related to the small hit is not received (S4232: No), the process proceeds to S4213.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, details of the state command process 6 (S4231) described above will be described. This state command process 6 (S4231) is executed instead of the state command process (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment, and similar to the state command process (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment, the status command This is a process for performing control according to the game state (mode) notified from the control device 110 .

S5501 to S5504 and S5506 of the state command processing 6 (see FIG. 153) in the sixth embodiment correspond to S5501 to S5504 and S5506 of the state command processing (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. are executed. In addition, in the state command processing 6 (see FIG. 153) in the sixth embodiment, in the processing of S5504, if it is determined that the current state command is not the command output when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is restored (S5504 : No), then it is determined whether or not it is a state command output at the end of the jackpot (S5511).

In the processing of S5511, if it is determined that the current state command is the state command output at the end of the jackpot (S5511: Yes), after the end for setting the back image according to the gaming state after the jackpot Back face setting processing is executed (S5512), and this processing ends. The details of the post-finish back face setting process (S5512) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S5511, if it is determined that it is not the state command output at the end of the jackpot (if the time saving number of times has elapsed, or if the normal mode has shifted to the preparation mode due to the arrival of the small hit specified number of times) (S5511: No), this process is terminated as it is. It should be noted that when the transition from the normal mode to the preparation mode without going through the jackpot, notification in the small hit related processing (see FIG. 155), or expectation update processing 6 (see FIG. 156), or by the rear image Suggestion settings are made.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the details of the post-end back setting process (S5512) will be described. As described above, the post-finish background image setting process (S5512) is a process for setting the background image after the jackpot is finished in accordance with the gaming state after the jackpot is finished. In the back setting process after the end (S5512), first, it is determined whether or not the data in the game state storage area 223h updated based on the state command is data corresponding to the number of time reduction times of 100 (S5701). . Here, the back setting process after the end (S5512) is a process that is not executed in the case of the multi-family mode. be. In addition, the normal mode that is set after the end of the continuous mode is set to the number of times of time saving of 50 times or less. It means that if Therefore, in the processing of S5701, when it is determined that the remaining number of times of time saving is 100 times (S5701: Yes), the back image for normal mode is set (S5702), and this processing ends. This allows the player to easily understand that the normal mode has been set after the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the remaining number of times of time saving is not 100 times (S5701: No), then whether the remaining number of times of saving time is 0 (that is, after the jackpot is in preparation mode (S5703), and if it is determined that the remaining number of times of time saving is 0 (S5703: Yes), the back image for the preparation mode is set (S5704), and this processing ends as it is. This allows the player to easily understand that the preparation mode has been set after the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S5703, if it is determined that the remaining number of times of time saving is not 0 (S5703: No), it is the normal mode after the end of the continuous villa mode (50 times, 25 times, or 1 time). This means that it is a normal mode of the number of times of time saving), so the back image for low expectations is set (S5705), and the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to ON (S5706), and this process ends. do. By turning on the rank-up lottery flag 223ea, the rank-up lottery for the degree of expectation (type of rear image) can be executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times. As a result, it is possible to realize a game property in which the number of remaining time reductions can be predicted from the mode of rank-up, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, details of the above-described small winning related process (S4233) will be described. This small hit related process (S4233) is one process in the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 152). This is a process for executing

In the small hit related process (see FIG. 155), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command for the small hit is received from the main control device 110 (S5801), and when it is determined that the opening command for the small hit is received (S5801: Yes), then, from the data stored in the game state storage area 223h, it is determined whether the current mode is the normal mode (S5802). In the processing of S5802, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal mode (time saving state B) (preparation mode or continuous mode) (S5802: No), then the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is turned on (S5803), and if the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is off (S5803: No), whether it is the continuous villa mode or the preparation mode and the back image for the preparation mode has already Since it means that it is in a switched state, execution of a right hitting navigation effect is set to urge the player to hit to the right aiming at the V winning device 670 (S5804), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5802, when it is determined that the normal mode (S5802: Yes), and when it is determined in the process of S5803 that the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is ON (S5803: Yes), the selection effect ( (see FIG. 140) is set (S5805), and this process ends. Even in the preparation mode, the selection effect (see FIG. 140) is executed when the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is ON, so that a small win is won during the execution period of the rank-up effect. Also, the display mode can be shared between the normal mode and the preparation mode. Therefore, during the execution period of the rank-up effect (between the end of the last jackpot in Renso mode and the end of 50 special symbol lotteries), whether the mode is transitioning to the preparation mode or the normal mode is maintained. It is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish whether the Therefore, since the player can play the game while paying more attention to the rank-up mode of the rank-up effect, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, in the processing of S5801, if it is determined that the opening command for the small hit is not received from the main control device 110 (S5801: No), then it is determined whether the ending command for the small hit has been received. It is determined (S5806). In the processing of S5806, if it is determined that the ending command for the small hit is received (S5806: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning has already been detected in the small hit game this time (S5807 ), if it is determined that the V winning is not detected (S5807: No), then whether the specified number of small wins has been reached It is determined whether or not the data indicating the number of times is data corresponding to 0 (S5808).

In the processing of S5808, when it is determined that the specified number of small hits has been reached (S5808: Yes), the back image for the preparation mode is set (S5809), and the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to OFF. (S5810), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5808, when it is determined that the specified number of small hits has not been reached (the data indicating the specified number of times in the gaming state storage area 223h is not 0) (S5808: No), this process is continued as it is. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S5807, if it is determined that V winning has been detected during the execution of this small winning game (S5807: Yes), the notification of the start of the big winning is set (S5811), and this End the process.

By executing this small hit related process (see FIG. 155), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode as the effect at the time of the small win according to the game state. In addition, it is possible to appropriately set the notification contents after the end of the small winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the expectation updating process 6 (S4841) in the sixth embodiment will be described. This expectation level update process 6 (S4841) is a process executed in place of the expectation level update process (see FIG. 139) in the fifth embodiment. It is a process for setting the rank-up lottery of.

In the processing of S5601, S5603, and S5608 of the expectation level update processing 6 (see FIG. 156) in the sixth embodiment, S5601 and S5603 of the emergency treatment processing (see FIG. 139) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. , and S5608 are executed. In addition, in the expectation updating process 6 (see FIG. 156) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S5601 ends, it is next determined whether or not the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on (S5621), and the rank When it is determined that the up lottery flag 223ea is ON (S5621: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter 223db is 51 (S5622).

In the process of S5622, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is 51 (S5622: Yes), the previous jackpot type is any of the jackpots G6 to I6. has reached the number of fluctuations, the lottery period for the rank-up effect is terminated, and processing (each processing of S5623 and S5624) for setting the back image for the preparation mode is executed. Also, if it is determined in the process of S5603 that the value of the variation number counter 223db is not 101 (S5603: No), it means that the normal mode has shifted to the preparation mode, so the process shifts to S5623. In the process of S5623, the background image for the preparation mode is set (S5623), the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to OFF (S5624), and the process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S5622, if it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223db is not 51 (S5622: No), it is determined whether or not the current rear image is the rear image for high expectations (S5625 ), if it is determined that a back image for high expectations has been set (S5625: Yes), the expectations cannot be raised any further, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5625 that the currently set back image type is not the back image for high expectations (S5625: No), the process proceeds to S5608.

In addition, in the expectation updating process 6 (see FIG. 156) in the sixth embodiment, in the process of S5608, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter 223db is a multiple of 10 (S5608: Yes), the rank is increased The lottery table 222ea is read out (S5626), the value of the effect lottery counter 223da and the rank-up mode corresponding to the remaining number of times of time reduction are specified, the specified rank-up mode is set (S5627), and the process is terminated. do.

By executing this expectation update process 6 (see FIG. 147), the lottery for the special symbol is performed 10 times in a predetermined period after the end of the continuous mode (until the lottery for the special symbol is completed 50 times). Every time it is executed, a lottery can be drawn for a rank-up of the rear image. As a result, it is possible to realize a game feature that allows the player to guess the remaining number of times of time saving according to the ease of rank-up.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the time-saving state B of normal symbols is set to the most unfavorable game state (normal mode) in which it is difficult to shift to the continuous mode even if the jackpot is won, and the normal symbols are set. In the normal state (preparation mode), the transition rate to the continuous mode in the case of a big win is higher than in the time-saving state B of the normal pattern. As a result, it is easier to shift to Renso mode when the jackpot is reached after the number of times in the normal mode is reduced and the transition to the preparation mode is made, rather than when the jackpot is hit in the normal mode. , it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in anticipation of the end of the time saving state. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player expects to continuously lose the lottery in the special symbol lottery in the normal mode.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the type of the small hit that is won with a low probability (1/200) is the normal mode after the end of the big win due to the occurrence of the V prize. A small hit type (small hit A6) that is reset, a small hit type (small hit B6) that shifts to Renso mode after the end of the jackpot due to the occurrence of a V prize, and a jackpot end due to the occurrence of a V prize. A small hit type (small hit C6) that shifts to the preparation mode later is provided. As a result, in the case of a small win in the normal mode, the occurrence of the V winning will result in a disadvantage in the game state (the number of time reductions for the amount consumed is reset and return to 100), and it will be advantageous. (Transition to preparation mode or Renso mode) can be provided, so if a small win occurs in the normal mode, is it better to win a V prize or avoid a V prize? It is possible to provide a game property that allows you to judge whether. In addition, when it becomes a small hit A6 in the normal mode, the time saving state is terminated regardless of the number of remaining time saving times. As a result, in the small win A6, avoiding the V prize and shifting to the preparation mode is more advantageous as a game state than resetting the normal mode with the V prize. Therefore, when a small win is achieved, the player can make a more serious decision as to whether to hit to the right in order to win a V prize or to hit to the left to avoid winning a V prize. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game when the player wins a small prize.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, only in the normal mode, the specified number of times for the small hit A6 is set to 1 time, and the specified number of times for the other small hit types is set to 100 times. Although the number of times is set to 100, it is not limited to this. The correspondence relationship between the specified number of small hits and the type (mode) of the time saving state may be determined arbitrarily. For example, in the consecutive villa mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a small winning type with a small prescribed number of times (for example, 5 times) is provided in the small winning of the second special symbol. By configuring in this manner, the more V prizes of about 1/20 in the Renso mode continue to fail, the higher the possibility that the Renso mode will end, so that the game in the Renso mode will have a sense of tension. can have. Further, in the normal mode, in place of or in addition to determining the specified number of times for each type of small win, the specified number may be determined by summing up the winning times of one or all of the types of small wins. Specifically, for example, the specified number of times of the small winning A6 may be set to 1 time, and the specified number of times based on the total winning number of the small winning B6 and the small winning C6 may be set to 5 times. By configuring in this way, even if the event of failing to win the V prize and maintaining the normal mode continues, it is possible to positively perceive that the specified number of times until the transition to the preparation mode is reduced, so that the game can be played. It is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game.

In the sixth embodiment, as the small hit type of the first special symbol, when V wins, the normal mode is set after the big win, and when the V win is avoided, the small win A shifts to the preparation mode, and when the V wins, the preparation mode after the big win. is set, but if you avoid the V prize, the current mode will be maintained. Although it has been configured to provide three types of winning types, the types of small winnings are not limited to these three types, and the types may be arbitrarily increased or decreased. For example, by setting the small winning type of the first special symbol to only small winning A6, at the time when the small winning is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is confirmed that the preparation mode will be entered if V winning is avoided. , the player can feel great satisfaction when winning a small prize. Conversely, in addition to the big hits A6 to C6, for example, when V winning or when avoiding V winning, it may be possible to provide a relatively advantageous small winning type that shifts to the preparation mode. It is also possible to provide a comparatively disadvantageous small win type in which the game shifts to the normal mode when the game is won and the mode is maintained when the V prize is avoided. By constructing in this way, it is possible to seriously judge whether to win a V prize or to avoid it when winning a small prize, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode, in the normal mode, a small winning type that is more advantageous than the case where the V winning is generated, and the person who causes the V winning is more advantageous than the case where the V winning is avoided Although it was configured to provide a small hit type that is also advantageous, it is not limited to this. For example, even if V winning is avoided, it is good also as a structure which provides the small hit classification which becomes advantageous, even if V winning is generated. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which the predetermined number of times is one and the preparation mode is set after the end of the big hit by the occurrence of the V prize. Conversely, even if V winning is avoided, even if V winning is generated, it is good also as a structure which provides the small hit classification which becomes normal mode.

In the sixth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode, either the mode is shifted to the continuous mode or the time saving state B of 100 times is set. However, it is not limited to this. A case of shifting to the preparation mode may be provided, or a configuration may be provided in which variations are provided in the number of times of time reduction in the normal mode after the end of the jackpot. Similarly, for other modes, it is possible to arbitrarily determine the ratio of transition to each mode and the variation of the number of times of time reduction when a big win is achieved.

In the sixth embodiment, the operation pattern of the V winning device 670 when a small win is made is common regardless of the type of small win, but it is not limited to this. For example, an open pattern with a short open period (a game ball is difficult to enter) and an open pattern with a long open period (a game ball is easy to enter) may be provided.

In the sixth embodiment, the display mode shown in FIG. 140 is executed as a selection effect executed when a small win is made in the normal mode, but the game determines whether or not to generate a V prize. It can be determined arbitrarily as long as it is a mode that allows the person to choose. In addition, at a predetermined ratio in the case of a small win, the selection performance may be executed in a manner that allows notification or suggestion of the small win type. Specifically, for example, when winning a small win A6 that is more advantageous to avoid the V prize, an arrow with the character "left hitting" at a first rate (for example, a rate of 5%) While the image YG1 is displayed in red, when it becomes another small hit type, the arrow image YG1 is displayed in red at a second rate (for example, 1% rate) lower than the first rate. It may be configured as By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a playability in which the type of small winning is predicted based on the display mode of the selection effect and the shooting direction is determined.

In the sixth embodiment, the current mode is not specified from the end of the continuous villa mode until the lottery of special symbols is completed 50 times, and the mode is shifted to the preparation mode according to the rank-up mode of the rear image. It was configured to only suggest the number of lotteries for the remaining special symbols up to. In other words, the current mode is not indicated to the player by means of a display mode or the like until the lottery for the special symbols is completed 50 times (the number of lotteries has been reached to ensure that the preparation mode has already been entered regardless of the type of jackpot). However, it is not limited to this. The current mode may be notified when an arbitrary number of lotteries has reached the number of times of lotteries (50 times) that ensures transition to the preparation mode after the consecutive villa mode ends. . More specifically, for example, after the continuous mode ends (that is, after the jackpot G6-I6 ends), at the point when the lottery of the special symbols ends 30 times, the normal mode remains or the preparation mode has already been entered. It is also possible to determine whether the display mode is , and change to a rear image according to the mode (a rear image for normal mode or a rear image for preparation mode). By constructing in this way, the player can be made to think to continue the game until at least the number of lotteries in which the current mode is specified, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Also, even if the normal mode is notified when the lottery of 30 special symbols is completed, the remaining number of lotteries until the preparation mode is 20 times, and more than half of the remaining number of lotteries until the preparation mode. Since it is digested, it is possible to make the player have the impression that "it will be possible to shift to the preparation mode in a little while". Therefore, even when the normal mode is notified, the game can be continued with the aim of shifting to the preparation mode.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily conjectured that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. It is possible.

For example, in each of the above-described embodiments and its modifications, a disadvantageous state (normal mode) is entered until all the lotteries based on the second special symbol reserved balls, which are executed after the big win, are completed. Although it was set as the structure which alert|reported by the door breakthrough mode production whether it was or not, it is not restricted to this. Regardless of whether or not the ball is held for the second special symbol, after the end of the jackpot, the door determines whether or not it has shifted to a disadvantageous state (or advantageous) within the range of the special symbol lottery of a predetermined number of times. It is good also as composition which notifies by breakthrough mode production. Specifically, for example, in the variable probability state of the special symbols, each time it is time to perform the lottery of the special symbols, a transition (fall) to a low probability state is made without going through the big win, apart from the lottery of the special symbols. A door breakthrough mode performance is applied to a pachinko machine 10 having a specification (a specification in which it is more advantageous not to obtain a lottery result corresponding to a fall) to draw a lottery as to whether or not the player will fall with a predetermined probability (for example, a fall probability of 1/100). good too. That is, when a jackpot that shifts to the variable probability state occurs, for example, the door breaking mode effect may be executed until the lottery of 100 special symbols is completed after the jackpot is finished. Then, if the player falls to the low-probability state of the special pattern within 100 times, the performance of failing to break through the door is executed, and if the player does not fall, the performance of successfully breaking through the door is executed. . Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 having specifications in which the number of lotteries for which the variable probability state is set is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 130 times after the big win), the jackpot is won within the range of the number of lotteries for which the variable probability state is set. Or, it may be configured to suggest (notify) whether the probability variable state has ended by the door breakthrough mode production. More specifically, when the jackpot is won during the variable probability state, it is suggested that it is advantageous to the player (executing the effect of successfully breaking through the door), and the predetermined number of times (130 If the lottery for the first time has ended, it may be configured to suggest that the player is at a disadvantage (perform an effect of failing to break through the door). Furthermore, in this case, the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed over the entire period in which the variable probability state is set, or for a part of the period (for example, the number of lotteries after the big win is 125 times or later). Only, it may be configured to execute the door breakthrough mode effect.

In addition, for example, as a game state after the big hit, the special pattern probability variable state until the next big hit, and the jackpot type (jackpot a), which is a time-saving state of the normal pattern, and the special pattern lottery are selected a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) until the end of the pachinko machine 10, which has at least a jackpot type (jackpot b) set to a low-probability state of special patterns and a short-time state of normal patterns. After making it impossible (difficult) to distinguish whether it is a jackpot a or a jackpot b from the performance etc., after the jackpot, until the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times), It may be configured such that the game state set after the last big hit is notified by the door breakthrough mode effect. That is, if the game state is a probability variable state of special symbols and a time-saving state of normal symbols, a performance (a performance of breaking through the door) suggesting that the state is advantageous for the player is executed, and the game state is set. If is in a low probability state of special symbols and a short working time state of normal symbols, an effect suggesting that the player is in a disadvantageous state (an effect of failing to break through the door) may be executed. Also, for example, in the lottery of special symbols, a small win is obtained with a lower probability than a loss, and the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a when a part of the probability variable jackpot (jackpot c) is determined is equivalent to a small win ( The door breaking mode effect may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having specifications that are the same or have only a difference that the player cannot distinguish between them. That is, it is made difficult to determine which lottery result is obtained by the effect or the operation of the specific prize winning port 65a, depending on whether the game is a small win or a big win c. Then, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, after the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the small win or the big win c, the state is notified by the door breaking mode effect. may be That is, if a small win is achieved and the low probability state of the special symbols is maintained, an effect suggesting that the player is in a disadvantageous state (an effect of failing to break through the door) is executed, resulting in a big win c. If the transition to the probability variable state of the special symbol is performed, an effect suggesting that it is in an advantageous state for the player (an effect that the door is successfully broken through) may be executed.

In each of the above embodiments, it was configured to notify whether or not it is in an advantageous state (mode) by the door breakthrough mode production, but the content notified (suggested) by the door breakthrough mode production is not necessarily limited to the mode. . For example, it may be configured such that whether or not the presentation mode is changed is notified by the door breaking mode presentation. More specifically, for example, whether or not the game will develop into a highly reliable ready-to-reach effect, or whether or not a so-called continuous effect will progress to the next step, etc., may be notified by the door breaking mode effect.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of held balls of the second special symbol is increased to the upper limit number (4) at the end of the big win, but it is not limited to after the big win. It is applicable if the second special symbol holding balls increase to the upper limit number in a state different from the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), for example, the end of the probability variable state It may be configured so that the second special symbol holding ball becomes the upper limit value at the time or at the end of the time saving state. In addition, for example, a state in which it is easy to get a small win (lottery probability is high or lottery conditions are likely to be established) and a state in which it is difficult to get a small win (lottery probability is low or lottery conditions are difficult to be established) are provided. It is good also as a structure applied to the state which tends to become a small hit.

In each of the above embodiments, the second ball entrance 640 and the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) are provided on the right side of the game board 13. However, during the jackpot, the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) The arrangement may be changed to any arrangement within the range that the ball hit toward the second ball entrance 640 can also enter the second ball entrance 640 . Also, a ball launched toward the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) during the big win is difficult to enter the first ball entrance 64, but the first ball entrance 64 It may be configured so that the ball can enter the ball.

In each of the above embodiments, the correspondence between the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the game state set after the jackpot ends can be arbitrarily determined without departing from the spirit of each embodiment. .

In the above fifth and sixth embodiments, in the time-saving state A of the normal design, if the lottery of the normal design wins, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 directly enters the second ball entrance 6400. Although the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a are set so as to make a ball, it is not limited to this. The variation time of the normal symbols and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a make it easier for the game ball struck to the right in the time-saving state A of the normal symbols to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and the time-saving state of the normal symbols. It can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which it is difficult for a game ball struck to the right in B to enter the second ball entrance 6400 . Specifically, for example, in the time-saving state A of the normal design, the game ball that has reached the distribution member 6600 next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and has been distributed to the right flow path R1 is the second entrance. In order to make it easier to enter 6400, it may be configured to determine the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a.

In the above-mentioned fifth and sixth embodiments, game balls shot with a shooting intensity of 95% or more are guided to the distribution member 6600 by a plurality of nails planted above the distribution member 6600. However, instead of or in addition to this, game balls shot at the shortest shooting interval (0.6 second interval) surely reach the distribution member 6600 at 0.6 second intervals. You may provide the structure which adjusts the arrival interval of a game ball. More specifically, for example, directly above the distribution member 6600, an open state in which the game ball can flow down toward the distribution member 6600 and a game ball can not flow down to the distribution member 6600 and stay above A configuration may be adopted in which an opening/closing device is provided that periodically switches between the closed state and the closed state. In other words, a game ball fired at a firing intensity of 95% or more is always operated by an open/close device that repeats an open state period long enough for only one game ball to fall and a closed state period at a cycle of 0.6 seconds. It is good also as a structure provided in the position which passes. By configuring in this way, when the game balls are continuously shot at the shortest shooting interval, the interval at which the game balls reach the distribution member 6600 is more reliably set to an interval of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, the game balls can be distributed alternately to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 more reliably.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (playability that is advantageous if no holding group occurs)
A first ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a first direction can easily enter, and first discrimination information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. A first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring, a first discrimination means for performing a first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and a direction different from the first direction A second ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a second direction can easily enter, and second discrimination information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. Second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring; second discrimination means for performing second discrimination based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means; and second discrimination information acquisition means After the second determination information is acquired by, until the second determination based on the acquired second determination information is performed, the second determination information is stored with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit a first state in which a game ball launched in the second direction is placed at a position where the game ball can easily enter, and a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. variable ball entry means that can be changed to the second state, privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the first determination means, or Variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed to the first state for a predetermined number of times based on the result of the determination by the second determining means, and the variable game execution. One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as a game state after execution of the variable game by means is completed. and a game state setting means for setting a game state, wherein the game state setting means determines the specific determination result by the second determination means rather than the specific determination result by the first determination means. A game machine A1 characterized in that the ratio of setting the first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is finished is higher if the game state is changed.

According to the gaming machine A1, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is likely to enter, and the game ball enters the first ball entering means. First discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means. The first determination is performed by the first determination means based on the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction is likely to enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Then, the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means. After the second determination information is acquired by the second determination information acquisition means, until the second determination based on the acquired second determination information is executed, the second determination information is stored by the determination information storage means. A predetermined number of pieces of information is stored as an upper limit. A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state is provided so that a game ball launched in a second direction enters. placed in an easy-to-reach position. A predetermined privilege is given by a privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. The variable game execution means executes a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. . Among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, as a game state after execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is completed. 1 game state is set by the game state setting means. The specific determination result by the second determination means is the first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed by the game state setting means rather than the specific determination result by the first determination means. setting is higher.

Thus, when the game ball is shot in the second direction to obtain a predetermined privilege during execution of the variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entering means and the second discrimination information is stored. . When a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information, the ratio of setting to the first game state having a lower advantage than the second game state is high, so it is stored during the execution of the variable game. A player can play a game in anticipation that a specific determination result will not be obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information. Therefore, there is an effect that novel game characteristics can be realized.

In the gaming machine A1, a plurality of variable patterns of the variable ball-entering means include at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball-entering means than the first variable pattern. variable pattern setting means for setting any one of the variable patterns, the variable pattern setting means, when the determination by the first determination means results in the specific determination result, the variable pattern is set to the second variable pattern rather than the second variable pattern The ratio of setting the first variable pattern increases, and the ratio of setting the second variable pattern becomes higher than the first variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the second determination means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the variable pattern of the variable ball-entering means, any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball-entering means than the first variable pattern. is set by the variable pattern setting means. When the determination by the first determination means results in a specific determination result, the ratio of setting the first variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than the first variable pattern.

As a result, when the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result, the second variable pattern in which the game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entry means is likely to be set, so that the variable game is being executed. The second determination based on the second determination information stored in .

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entering means, a first variable pattern and a game ball to the variable ball entering means rather than the first variable pattern. variable pattern setting means for setting any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter, and the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern is set so that the game ball is It is composed of a period that is at least longer than the period until the second identification information of the predetermined number of pieces of information is obtained by the second identification information obtaining means when the ejection is continued in the second direction. A gaming machine A3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the start of the variable game, the variable pattern of the variable ball-entering means is a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball-entering means than the first variable pattern. Any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern, when the game ball continues to be shot in the second direction, the second discrimination information acquisition means acquires a predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information. It consists of a period that is at least longer than the period until

As a result, during the execution of the variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, if the player continues to shoot the game ball in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined benefit, the second variable pattern of at least the predetermined number of pieces of information or more is acquired. Therefore, the second determination of the upper limit number of times is executed each time after the end of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in anticipation that the second discrimination of the upper limit number of times will not all result in a specific discrimination result.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination means is executed with priority over the first determination by the first determination means. Game machine A4.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination means is executed with priority over the first determination by the first determination means. Execution of the first discrimination can be suppressed even if a game ball enters the first ball entering means in a state where the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to attract attention by the second determination.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a game ball launched in the second direction is placed at a position that can be reached, and the game ball that has reached the first flow path provided with the second ball entering means is provided. and a second channel provided with the variable ball entry means.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the first channel provided with the second ball entry means and the second channel provided with the variable ball entry means Distributing means for distributing the game balls to the second direction is arranged at a position where the game balls shot in the second direction can reach, so that the flow direction of the game balls shot in the second direction is biased. There is an effect that it can be prevented.

In the game machine A5, the game machine A6 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means. A ball can be alternately entered into the second ball entering means and the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game ball launched in the second direction from being unevenly entered into the second ball entering means or the variable ball entering means.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a first position at which a game ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means compared to the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to hit the ball, and a variable control means that controls the variable operation of the variable means. The second game state is characterized in that the variable means is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first game state. Gaming machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the first position where the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means and the first position compared to the first position The variable means is changed to the second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. A variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first game state, the variable means is less likely to be varied to the first position by the variable control means, and in the second game state, the variable means is more likely to be varied to the first position by the variable control means than in the first game state. .

Thereby, in the first game state, the variable means is easily changed to the first position, so that the game ball is easily entered into the first ball entering means. Therefore, in the first game state, the game can be played more efficiently, so that there is an effect that the game can be played with a higher expectation of the first game state.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the first game state is such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the determination by the first determining means and the second determining means is set to the first probability. In the second game state, the probability that the specific discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination by the first discriminating means and the second discriminating means is set to a second probability lower than the first probability. A gaming machine A8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first game state, the probability that the determination by the first determination means and the second determination means will result in a specific determination result is set to the first probability. On the other hand, in the second game state, the probability that the determination by the first determination means and the second determination means will result in a specific determination result is set to a second probability lower than the first probability.

Thus, in the first game state, the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is higher than in the second game state, so that after the variable game ends, the variable game can be easily executed again with a relatively small number of determinations. Therefore, in the first game state, it can be expected that a greater number of predetermined benefits will be obtained in a relatively short period of time, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Feature B Group> (Executing a specific effect using the jackpot ending period and the pending digestion period)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means, and the privilege. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as game states after execution of the privilege game by the game execution means is completed. game state setting means for setting one game state out of the states; dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the result of discrimination by the discrimination means; Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a period until the end of the privilege game and a period until the dynamic display of the one or more identification information executed after the end of the privilege game is completed. and a specific performance executing means for executing a specific performance, wherein the specific performance is a performance capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the game state after the specific performance is finished is the second game state. A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. carried out by means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as game states after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. One game state out of the states is set by the game state setting means. Identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A dynamic display of one or a plurality of identification information executed after the end of the privilege game and the period until the end of the privilege game based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during the execution of the privilege game. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means during the period until the end of . The specific effect is composed of an effect capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the game state after the specific effect is finished is the second game state.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed over the period from the establishment of the specific condition to the end of dynamic display of one or a plurality of pieces of identification information, so the period until the end of the privilege game can be executed. , or in the case where the specific effect is executed during the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of one piece of identification information, the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the establishment of the specific condition when the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the second game state. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it executes

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the second gaming state, the specific performance is generated based on the establishment of the specific condition. is executed by the specific effect executing means, the second game state is suggested in the specific effect unless a specific determination result is obtained during execution of the specific effect and the game state is shifted to the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that a specific determination result will not be obtained during execution of a specific effect.

In the game machine B1 or B2, based on a predetermined specific trigger, a discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means; discrimination information storage means that can store a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit until the discrimination condition for the acquired discrimination information is satisfied; determination means for determining whether or not the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result is included in the determination information stored therein; and effect mode determination means, wherein the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on a predetermined specific trigger, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discriminating means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used as discrimination against the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the predetermined number of pieces of information is stored by the determination information storage means as the upper limit. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the determination means determines whether or not the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes determination information corresponding to the specific determination result. An effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the effect mode determination means based on the determination result by the determination means. A specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is executed by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, the result of determination by the determination means can be determined in advance, so there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode that is in line with the result of determination actually performed by the determination means.

In the gaming machine B3, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a first privilege game in which the game state after execution is set to the first game state by the game state setting means; a type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a second privilege game whose game state after execution is set to the second game state; is for determining whether the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, and the production mode determining means determines whether the discrimination information Based on the fact that the means determines that the identification information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, a performance mode is provided that suggests that the game state after the specific performance is completed is the first game state. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it determines.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and the first privilege game after the execution is completed One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of privilege game types including at least a second privilege game in which the game state is set to the second game state. The determining means determines whether or not the determining information stored in the determining information storing means includes the determining information corresponding to the first privilege game. Based on the determination by the determination means that the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, a performance mode suggesting that the game state after the end of the specific performance is the first game state is rendered. Determined by mode determination means.

As a result, it is possible to provide novel game characteristics such that the game is played with the expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A game machine B5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B4, a predetermined specific period is set as an effect period for the specific effect regardless of the effect mode.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines B1 to B4, as the effect period of the specific effect, a predetermined specific period is set irrespective of the effect mode, so the effect period can be lengthened. Therefore, it becomes difficult to predict the result of the specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the result of the specific effect until the end.

In the gaming machine B5, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display execution means executed by the dynamic display execution means dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means, wherein the specific period is set after the specific condition is satisfied and the bonus game is determined by the dynamic display period determination means when all determinations by the determination means for a predetermined specific number of times result in deviation determination results different from the specific determination result. A game machine B6 characterized in that it is the sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means. A dynamic display time in dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the determination result of the determination means. A dynamic display period is determined when the period from the establishment of a specific condition to the end of the privilege game and the determination result by the determination means for a predetermined specific number of times are all different from the specific determination result. A sum of a specific number of dynamic display periods determined by means is set as the specific period.

As a result, the specific effect can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for the specific number of times ends, so there is an effect that the specific effect can be ended neatly.

In the game machine B6, the dynamic display period determination means, after the end of the privilege game, when the determination by the determination means within the specified number of times results in a specific determination result, at least until the specified period ends. A game machine B7 characterized in that a period equal to or longer than the remaining period of is determined as the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, after the end of the privilege game, if the discrimination by the discrimination means within a specified number of times results in a specific discrimination result, at least the remainder until the end of the specified period Since a period equal to or longer than the period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, when a specific determination result is obtained in determination within a specific number of times, the privilege game is played before the end of the specific period. can be suppressed from being started. Therefore, by starting the privilege game before the end of the specific performance, it is possible to prevent the result of the specific performance from being known in advance, so that there is an effect that the specific performance can draw the player's attention.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B7 is provided with an expectation level indication effect executing means for executing an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the suggestion of the second game state by the specific effect during execution of the privilege game. A game machine B8 characterized by.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines B1 to B7, the expectation level suggesting effect executing means provides an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the fact that the second game state is suggested by the specific effect during execution of the privilege game. Therefore, the player can have the impression that the performance mode during execution of the privilege game and the specific performance are a series of performances. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved during execution of the privilege game.

<Characteristic group C> (Makes it difficult to determine from the actions of the attacker whether or not a holding series will occur)
A privilege ball entry means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball, a first position where the game ball can enter the privilege ball entry means, and a game from the first position. Variable means for changing to a second position where the ball is difficult to enter, determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and determination by the determination means based on the first determination result. a first variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary in a first variable mode; and a second determination result different from the first determination result obtained by determination by the determination means a game state setting means capable of setting a game state different from the game state at the time when the determination was performed; A second variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode that is executed the specific number of times when all the determinations by the determination means result in the first determination result, and a second variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable.

According to the gaming machine C1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball, and the first position where the game ball can be entered into the privilege ball entry means; The variable means is variable to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable means is varied in the first variable mode based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. controlled by It is distinguished from the first variable mode executed a specific number of times when all the determinations by the determination means for a specific number of times result in the first determination result based on the fact that the determination by the determination means has resulted in the second determination result. In a second variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult, the variable means is controlled to be variable by the second variable control means.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the first determination result or the second determination result is obtained from the variable mode of the variable means. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for a person to discriminate.

In the gaming machine C1, the game state setting means can set one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more disadvantageous than the first game state. When the determination by the determination means results in the second determination result, the rate of setting the second game state is set higher than the rate of setting the first game state. A gaming machine C2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one game state is set by the game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more disadvantageous than the first game state. A rate of setting the second game state by the game state setting means is set higher than a rate of setting the first game state when the determination by the determination means results in a second determination result.

As a result, when the second determination result is obtained, the disadvantageous second game state is likely to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the first determination result.

A gaming machine C3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, a rate of the first discrimination result in discrimination by the discrimination means is set higher than a rate of other discrimination results.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the ratio of the first judgment result in the judgment by the judgment means is set higher than the ratio of the other judgment results. The possibility of obtaining the first determination result continuously over the number of times increases. Therefore, even when the second determination result is obtained and the variable means is controlled in the second variable mode, it is possible to make the user think that the first determination result may have continued for a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not a different game state has been set.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C3, the determination means executes determination when either a first determination condition or a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. , the game state setting means sets a high percentage of setting the first game state when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the second determination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that a ratio of setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state is set higher when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on establishment. C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means when either the first determination condition or the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. When the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition results in the second determination result, the ratio of setting the first game state by the game state setting means is set high. On the other hand, when the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition results in the second determination result, the ratio of setting the second game state, which is more disadvantageous than the first game state, is set high.

Thus, when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first game state having a higher degree of advantage than the second game state is likely to be set. A game can be played in anticipation of success. Therefore, there is an effect that, when the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means, the type of the discrimination condition that triggered the execution of the discrimination can be focused on.

In the game machine C4, when the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means and the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the bonus ball entry means is selected rather than the second variable mode. A game machine C5 comprising a third variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary in a third variable mode in which a game ball is likely to enter.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the determination by the determination means results in the second determination result, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the second variable mode is obtained. Since the variable means is controlled by the third variable control means so as to vary in the third variable mode in which the game ball easily enters the bonus ball entry means, the second determination is made based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The resulting advantage can be made higher. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game expecting that the first determination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine C4 or C5, a first ball-entering means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction is likely to enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. a second ball-entering means arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball-entering means; The second determination condition is established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and the privilege entering means has entered the game ball launched in the second direction. A game machine C6 characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to hit a ball.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball-entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction is likely to enter, while the second ball-entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction is likely to enter. A ball-entering means and a privilege-ball-entering means are provided. The first discrimination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, whereas the second discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. holds.

Thus, when the privilege ball entering means is changed to the first position and the game is launched in the second direction to obtain a predetermined privilege, the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is likely to be executed after the privilege ball-entering means is changed to the first position.

In the game machine C6, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and a discrimination information acquisition means acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means and a determination information storage means capable of storing at least a predetermined number of pieces of the determination information until the determination by the determination means is executed.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is Up to a predetermined number of pieces of information are stored at least by the determination information storage means until determination is performed by the determination means.

Thus, when a ball entering the second ball entering means is detected in a situation in which the discrimination by the discrimination means cannot be started, the discrimination information used for discrimination can be stored in the discrimination information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball entering the second ball entering means from being wasted.

In any of the game machines C4 to C7, the determination executed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition is executed with priority over the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines C4 to C7, the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is more than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. is executed with priority, there is an effect that when a determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is executed, attention can be paid to the result of the determination.

<Feature D group> (A special 2 start-up prize is likely to occur during the jackpot, and is unlikely to occur normally)
A first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and the first determination a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by means or the second determination means; and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. Type determination for determining the type of one privilege game from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. setting a first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be established based on a specific determination result obtained by determination by means, the first determination means or the second determination means, and performing the privilege game; state setting means for setting a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state, based on the satisfaction of the termination condition; A ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the first determination means results in the specific determination result than when the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result. Characterized gaming machine D1.

According to the gaming machine D1, determination is performed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. be done. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the scoring game execution means based on a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game executing means, a category is selected from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. The type of one privilege game is determined by the determining means. The state setting means sets a first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. On the other hand, the state setting means sets a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state based on the fact that the condition for ending the privilege game is satisfied. The type determining means is arranged so that the ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the first determining means results in a specific determination result than when the determination by the second determining means results in a specific determination result. It is configured.

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the second determination condition from being established in a state other than during execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to limit the chances of executing the first privilege game with a low degree of advantage.

In the gaming machine D1, a discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means. is stored up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the determination information acquisition means acquires determination information to be used for determination by the second determination means. Until the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, the discrimination information storage means stores a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit.

Thereby, when the second determination condition is satisfied a plurality of times before the determination by the second determination means is executed, the plurality of determination information acquired according to the satisfaction of the second determination condition for the plurality of times. is stored by the discrimination information storage means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the discrimination is not executed even though the second discrimination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine D2, the second discriminating means acquires by the discrimination information acquiring means during execution of the privilege game, based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, after the privilege game ends A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is one that executes discrimination.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the privilege is determined by the second discrimination means based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means during execution of the privilege game and stored in the discrimination information storage means. Since the determination is performed after the game is finished, the chances of performing the determination by the second determination means can be concentrated after the privilege game is finished. Therefore, after the end of the privilege game, the player can play the game expecting that the determination by the second determining means will not result in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a ball entry means for satisfying the second determination condition based on the entry of a game ball, and a first position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means. , a second position at which a game ball is easier to enter than the first position; Specific determining means for determining whether to vary to the second position, and the variable means varies to the second position based on determination by the specific determining means that the first position should be varied to the second position. wherein the variable control means controls the specific determination means in the second state more than the case where the specific determination means determines that the variable means is to be varied in the second state. A game machine D4 characterized in that the period during which said variable means is varied to said second position is longer when it is determined that said variable means is varied by said variable means.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means where the second determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball, and a game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is varied to the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific determination condition, the specific determination means determines whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. The variable control means controls the variable means to be variable to the second position based on the determination by the specific determination means that the first position should be varied to the second position. The variable means is at the second position when the specific determining means determines to vary the variable means in the second state than when the specific determining means determines to vary the variable means in the second state. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes long.

Thereby, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the ball entering means in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, in the first state, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be established more easily than in the second state.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball, and a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. , a second position at which a game ball is easier to enter than the first position; Specific determining means for determining whether to vary to the second position, and the variable means varies to the second position based on determination by the specific determining means that the first position should be varied to the second position. The period from the start to the end of the discrimination of 1 by the specific discriminating means tends to be shorter in the first state than in the second state. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means where the second determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball, and a game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is varied to the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific determination condition, the specific determination means determines whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. The variable control means controls the variable means to be variable to the second position based on the determination by the specific determination means that the first position should be varied to the second position. In the first state, the period from the start to the end of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means is more likely to be shorter than in the second state.

As a result, in the first state, the period required for the specific determination means to perform the same number of determinations is shorter than in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the opportunity to change the variable means to the second position more times, so that there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered in the first state.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, a ball entry means provided in a specific flow path and satisfying the second determination condition based on the entry of a game ball, and a game ball difficult to flow down the specific flow path. and an open state in which the game ball can flow down, and the opening and closing means are set to the open state based on the first state. and opening/closing control means for setting the game machine to the closed state when the game machine D6 is in the second state.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific channel is provided with ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of a game ball. The opening/closing means is variable between a closed state in which the specific channel is closed so that the game ball cannot easily flow down, and an open state in which the game ball can flow down. The opening/closing means is set to the open state by the opening/closing control means based on the first state, and the opening/closing means is set to the closed state by the opening/closing control means based on the second state. .

Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the second determination condition from being satisfied in the second state.

In the gaming machine D6, the opening/closing means is configured to be able to park a specific number of game balls upstream of the opening/closing means when the opening/closing means is set to the closed state. Machine D7.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6, when the opening/closing means is set in the closed state, a specific number of game balls can be parked upstream of the opening/closing means. Therefore, when the open state is set, the parked game ball can enter the ball entering means. Therefore, in the first state in which the open state is set, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily established.

<Feature group E> (Information corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the specific effect is included in the fluctuation pattern command from the main to the sub)
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a performance mode, main control means for performing main control relating to a game, and slave control means for performing control relating to a game based on a command output from the main control means The main control means includes determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of determination by the determining means becoming a specific determination result. A privilege game execution means, a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means, and a dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. dynamic display time determination means for determining a target display time; information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means; and command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least information to the slave control means, wherein the slave control means receives the dynamic display time command output by the command output means. dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time based on the dynamic display time command being received by the command receiving means; and a predetermined specific condition being established. Based on this, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect executable over one or more of the dynamic display times on the display means, and the specific information included in the dynamic display time command Based on, the specific effect end determination means for determining whether or not to end the specific effect, and the specific effect end determination means determined to end the specific effect, used for the determination a specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect until the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command ends. Gaming machine E1 to play.

According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and when the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, the game is advantageous to the player. A privilege game is executed by a privilege game executing means. The dynamic display executing means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determining means. A dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A dynamic display time command including at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is output by the command output means. It is output to the slave control means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display time command output by the command output means is received by the command receiving means, and based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means, the dynamic display time is set dynamically. It is specified by the display time specifying means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, a specific effect that can be executed over one or more dynamic display times is executed on the display means by the specific effect executing means. Based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, the specific effect end determining means determines whether or not to end the specific effect. The dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination ends when the specific effect end determining means determines to end the specific effect. The specific effect is terminated by the specific effect main hot water amount means until the specified effect is completed.

As a result, there is an effect that the specific effect can be terminated favorably.

In the gaming machine E1, when it is determined by the specific effect end determining means that the specific effect is to end, the specific effect is determined based on the information according to the determination result of the determining means included in the dynamic display time command. The game machine E2 is characterized by comprising a performance mode determination means for determining a performance mode until the specified performance is terminated by the performance end means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when it is determined by the specific performance end determining means that the specific performance is to be terminated, the game machine E2 responds to the determination result by the determining means included in the dynamic display time command. Based on the information, the performance mode determining means determines the performance mode until the specific performance ending means terminates the specific performance, so that the performance mode can be determined in consideration of the determination result by the determining means. . Therefore, there is an effect that the effect mode of the specific effect can be preferably set.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the slave control means includes an input determination means for determining power-on of the game machine, and a dynamic display time command included in the dynamic display time command when the power-on is determined by the power-on determination means. cut-off determination means for discriminating whether or not the specific performance was being executed at the time when the power of the game machine was cut off based on the specific information received; and execution of the specific performance by the cut-off determination means. A gaming machine E3 characterized by comprising post-throwing effect execution means for executing the specific effect based on the fact that it is determined to be in the middle.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the power-on of the gaming machine is determined by the power-on determination means in the slave control means, and the power-on is determined by the power-on determination means. Secondly, based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, the cut-off time discriminating means discriminates whether or not the specific effect was being executed at the time when the power of the gaming machine was cut off. The specific performance is executed by the post-throwing performance executing means based on the determination that the specific performance was being executed by the shut-off determination means.

Thus, even if the power supply is cut off during execution of the specific performance, the specific performance can be restarted, so that the player is prevented from being puzzled by the different performance modes before and after the power cutoff. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine E3, the game machine E4 is characterized in that the specific effect ending means terminates the specific effect executed by the post-throwing effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the specific effect executed by the effect executing means after the input is terminated by the specific effect ending means, so that the power of the gaming machine is turned off during execution of the specific effect. There is an effect that the specific effect can be terminated favorably even when it is interrupted.

In the gaming machine E4, the game machine E5 is characterized in that the specific effect executing means sets a predetermined specific period as the effect period of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5, a specific period predetermined by the specific production executing means is set as the production period of the specific production, so that a simple process is performed when setting the specific production. There is an effect that it can be set by

In any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the main control means acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and acquisition by the discrimination information acquisition means. determination information storage means capable of storing at least a predetermined number of pieces of the determined determination information until they are used for determination by the determination means; and the command output means stores the determined determination information in the determination information storage means. and outputting to the sub-control means an information number command including information corresponding to the number of pieces of information of the identification information that is stored, and the specific effect executing means outputs the number of pieces of information of the identification information included in the information number command. The game machine E6 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times equal to or less than the number of pieces of information.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is stored in the determination information storage means at least until the determination information is used for determination by the determination means, with a predetermined number of pieces of information being the upper limit. An information number command including information corresponding to the number of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is output to the slave control means by the command output means. The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect over the dynamic display of the identification information for the number of times equal to or less than the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information included in the number-of-information command.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed within a range equal to or less than the number of identification information stored in the identification information storage means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the continuation of the presentation.

In the gaming machine E6, the information corresponding to the number of pieces of information of the identification information is stored until all identifications based on the identification information stored in the identification information storage means are completed after the specific condition is established. The gaming machine E7 is characterized by comprising information corresponding to the number of information of the remaining identification information stored in the identification information storage means.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of the game machine E6, the information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information is stored in all the discriminations based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after the specific condition is satisfied. Since it is composed of information corresponding to the number of information of the remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means until the end of, the specific performance is more surely stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that it can be executed within a range equal to or less than the number of pieces of discrimination information.

<Feature F group> (Depending on the winning pattern, the ease of execution of the special drawing lottery on the disadvantageous side is changed)
A first ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a first direction can easily enter, and first discrimination information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. First determination information acquisition means to be acquired, first determination means for performing first determination using the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means, and the first direction Second discriminating information based on a second ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a different second direction can easily enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means to obtain a second discrimination that is likely to result in a discrimination result that is more disadvantageous than the first discrimination. a second determination means for executing; a determination information storage means capable of storing the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information; the first determination means; or As a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result in the discrimination by the second discrimination means, and a privilege game type executed by the privilege game execution means a first privilege game in which it is more advantageous to shoot a game ball in the first direction than in the second direction for at least a predetermined period; and a game ball to shoot in the second direction rather than the first direction during the predetermined period. A game machine F1 characterized by comprising a type determining means for determining one type of the privilege game from among a plurality of types including a second privilege game which is likely to be more advantageous to launch.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines have advantages such as changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have different degrees. However, it has been desired to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the winning type.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is likely to enter. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first discrimination information acquired by the first information acquiring means is used. , a first determination is performed by the first determination means. A second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction is likely to enter. The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Using the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means, the second determination is performed by the second determination means, which tends to result in a more disadvantageous determination result than the first determination. The second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as the upper limit. Based on a specific determination result obtained by determination by the first determination means or the second determination means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. As the types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a first privilege game in which it is more advantageous to shoot the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction at least during a predetermined period, and a first privilege game in which the game ball is more likely to be shot in the first direction than in the first direction during the predetermined period One privilege game category is determined by a category determining means from among a plurality of categories including a second privilege game in which shooting a game ball in the second direction tends to be more advantageous.

As a result, the first privilege game, which is advantageous by shooting the game ball in the first direction, is difficult to execute the second discrimination, which tends to result in a disadvantageous discrimination result, so that the first privilege game and the second privilege. It is possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage from the game. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, so that when a specific determination result is obtained, the effect is that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of the privilege game. There is

In the gaming machine F1, a first apparatus is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, and can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter. A variable ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction is easy to enter, and is variable between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter. 2 variable ball entry means, and privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, In the first privilege game, the first variable ball entry means is more likely to be changed to a state where the ball can be entered than the second variable ball entry means, and the second privilege game is the first privilege. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second variable ball-entering means is more likely to be changed to a state in which a ball can be entered than in a game.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which a game ball can be entered and a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can easily enter. It is A second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which a game ball can be entered and a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can easily enter. there is A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. The first privilege game is more likely to be changed to a state in which the first variable ball-entering means can enter the ball than the second variable ball-entering means. In the second privilege game, the second variable ball-entering means is more likely to be changed to the state in which the ball can be entered than in the first privilege game.

As a result, during execution of the privilege game, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to whether the shot game ball enters the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. be.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the bonus game is finished. game state setting means for setting the game state, and the first game state is set after the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result in the determination by the second determination means is completed. The game machine F3 is characterized in that the rate set as the later game state is higher than the second game state.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the game state after the end of the privilege game, one game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. It is set by the setting means. In the first game state, a ratio set as the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result in the determination by the second determination means is higher than that in the second game state. is configured to be

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game feature in which a game is played in anticipation that a specific determination result will not be obtained when the determination by the second determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F3, the game state setting means sets the first game state at a ratio of setting the second game state as the game state after the first privilege game or the second privilege game is completed. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the ratio is higher than the ratio of playing.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the ratio of setting the second game state as the game state after the first privilege game or the second privilege game is completed is Since it is configured to be higher than the set ratio, the second determination executed based on the shooting of the game ball in the second direction in the predetermined period results in a specific determination result, and the first game state The player can be made to think that he/she wants to avoid that is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the second determination will not result in a specific determination result after the second privilege game is finished.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting a determination result by the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means, and the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means. As an effect, either a first suggested effect or a second suggested effect different from the first suggested effect is determined when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, and the type determining means determines A game machine F5, further comprising a suggestive effect determining means for determining the first suggestive effect when the second privilege game is determined.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect suggesting the result of determination by the first determining means or the second determining means. As the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means, either a first suggestive effect or a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect is suggested when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. It is determined by the performance determining means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, the first suggestive effect is determined by the suggestive effect determining means.

As a result, when the second suggestive performance is executed, it is confirmed that the first privilege game is played, so that the game can be played in anticipation of the execution of the second suggestive performance as the suggestive performance. has the effect of Further, since the first suggesting effect may be executed even in the first privilege game, it is possible to play the game expecting that the first suggesting effect is the first privilege game when the first suggesting effect is executed. has the effect of

In the gaming machine F5, when the suggestive effect executing means executes the first suggestive effect based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determining means, after the first suggestive effect is completed, the A gaming machine F6 characterized by executing a second suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, when the first suggestive effect is executed based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determining means, after the first suggestive effect is completed, Since the second suggestive performance is executed by the suggestive performance executing means, the game is played with the expectation that the second suggestive performance will be executed after the first suggestive performance is finished when the first suggestive performance is executed. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the predetermined period of time is defined as, when the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction, the second discriminating information acquisition means obtains at least the predetermined number of pieces of information or more. The gaming machine F7 is characterized by a period of time during which the discrimination information is acquired.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, when the second privilege game is entered and the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction for a predetermined period, the discrimination information storage means Since the second determination information of the predetermined number of information, which is the upper limit, is stored, there is an effect that the second determination can be executed the number of times corresponding to the upper limit number after the second privilege game is finished.

In the gaming machine F7, the game ball is arranged at a position where the game ball shot in the second direction can easily enter, and can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter. second variable ball entry means; variable control means for changing the state of the second variable ball entry means to the first state in the predetermined period; and a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the hitting of the ball, and the second ball-entering means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can reach, and receiving the game ball that has reached the game ball. A game machine F8, characterized in that it comprises a sorting means for sorting either the first flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means or the second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exhibited. Second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can easily enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot easily enter. are placed. The state of the second variable ball entering means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period by the variable control means. A predetermined privilege is imparted by the privilege imparting means based on the entry of the game ball into the second variable ball entering means. A first flow path provided with a second ball entry means and a second flow path provided with a second variable ball entry means to place a game ball at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can reach. and distribution means for distributing to either.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the flow direction of the game ball shot in the second direction from becoming biased.

In the game machine F8, the game machine F9 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, the game ball launched in the second direction during the predetermined period in the second privilege game is transferred to the second ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. You can enter the ball alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the game ball shot in the second direction from being unevenly entered into the second ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means.

<Feature G group> (notify the jackpot type based on the V winning)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means, and game balls. a ball-entering means capable of entering a ball, a first position at which a game ball can be entered into the ball-entering means, and a second position at which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. means, variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during execution of the privilege game, and when the privilege game is completed. As a later game state, a first game state advantageous to the player is set when a game ball enters the ball-entering means during execution of the privilege game, and the ball enters during the execution of the privilege game. A game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball does not enter the means, and a privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. Type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the type determination means. When at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the above, a suggestive effect suggesting the type of the determined privilege game is generated when the game ball enters the ball entering means. and a suggestion performance execution means that can be executed based on the game machine G1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886). In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that do not notify the game state after winning at the time of winning, but execute an effect that suggests the game state after winning during the winning state. Are known. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the rest of the winning game becomes monotonous after the effect suggesting the game state after the end of winning is executed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the special game execution means determines the player when the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result. A privilege game advantageous to is executed. The variable means is varied between a first position at which a game ball can be entered into a ball entry means, and a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by the variable control means for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the predetermined condition during execution of the privilege game. As a game state after the end of the privilege game, a first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game, the game state setting means sets a second game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. Determined by the type determining means. When at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, the performance suggesting the determined type of the privilege game is suggested, and the game ball enters the entering means by the performance executing means. executed on the basis of

As a result, even after the game ball enters the ball-entering means and the setting of the advantageous first game state is determined, attention is paid to the type of privilege game suggested by the suggestive performance executed by the suggestive performance executing means. You can play games by Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous after the game ball is entered into the ball entering means.

In the gaming machine G1, the determining means comprises first determining means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determining condition as the determining condition, and second determining means different from the first determining condition. and a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a condition, wherein the type determination means obtains the specific determination result in the first determination by the first determination means. As the type of the privilege game to be executed based on, one type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the second by the second determination means As the type of the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result in the determination of the above, the first privilege game, and the second privilege game during execution of the privilege game said entering means One type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a third privilege game in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game is the privilege game rather than the second privilege game. A game machine G2 characterized in that the second determination is likely to be executed in a predetermined period after the end of the game machine G2.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the first determination is performed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition in the determination means. A second discrimination is performed by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. A plurality of bonus games including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game are selected by the type determining means as the classification of the bonus game to be executed based on the specific identification result obtained in the first identification by the first identification means. One type is determined from among the types. On the other hand, as the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the second determination by the second determination means, during the execution of the privilege game rather than the first privilege game and the second privilege game One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the third privilege game that is difficult to enter into the ball-entering means. In the first privilege game, the second discrimination is more likely to be executed in a predetermined period after the completion of the privilege game than in the second privilege game.

As a result, when the first privilege game ends, the disadvantageous second discrimination is more likely to be executed in a predetermined period, so it is strongly expected that the second privilege game will be decided when a specific discrimination result is obtained. can be made Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of privilege game.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, execution of a specific effect for executing a specific effect during a period from when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is started until at least the game ball enters the ball entering means. means, wherein the suggesting effect executing means executes an effect suggesting the type of the privilege game as a result of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. During a period from when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is started until at least the game ball enters the ball entering means, the specified performance executing means executes the specified performance. As a result of the specific effect, the suggesting effect executing means executes an effect suggesting the type of privilege game.

As a result, it is possible to show a series of effects with the specific effect and the effect suggesting the type of the privilege game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display means for displaying dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and dynamic display means thereof Identification information capable of determining one identification information from a plurality of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information, as the identification information dynamically displayed by and a determination means, wherein the identification information determination means is the specific determination result in determination by the determination means, and the first identification information when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means is determined, and the first identification information or the second identification information is determined when the second privilege game is determined.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed by the dynamic display means. As the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one identification information is identification information among a plurality of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information. Determined by a determining means. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determination means when the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result and the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined by the identification information determining means.

As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information can be confirmed in anticipation that the second identification information that is determined only by the advantageous second privilege game will be displayed. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the first identification information can be displayed even in the case of the second privilege game, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the second privilege game when the first identification information is displayed. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine G4, the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, The types of the suggestive effect include a first suggestive effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and a first suggestive effect in which the first identification information is displayed as the first identification information. The game machine G5 is characterized by being provided with at least a second suggestive effect variable in the identification information.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, the suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect. The types of suggestion effects include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information is changed to the second identification information. At least a second suggestion effect is provided.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation that the second suggestion effect will be executed when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information.

The gaming machine G5 comprises suggestive effect execution determination means for determining whether or not the suggestive effect is to be executed when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, The identification information determining means determines the first identification information based on the fact that the suggestive effect execution determining means determines that the suggestive effect is to be executed, and the suggestive effect executing means is the type determining means. The first privilege game is determined by, the first suggestion performance is executed when it is determined that the suggestion performance is executed by the suggestion performance execution determination means, and the second privilege game is determined by the type determination device. A game machine G6, characterized in that said second suggestive effect is executed when said suggestive effect execution determination means determines that said suggestive effect is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the type determining means determines the first privilege game or the second privilege game, the suggestive effect execution determination means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the determination by the suggestive effect execution determination means that the suggestive effect is to be executed. When the first identification information is determined by the type determining means and the suggestive effect execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect, the first suggestive effect is executed by the suggestive effect executing means. On the other hand, when the type determining means determines the second privilege game and the suggestive effect execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect executing means executes the second suggestive effect.

As a result, the second suggestive effect is executed only when the second privilege game is determined, so there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the execution of the second suggestive effect.

In the gaming machine G6, the suggestive effect execution determining means executes the suggestive effect more when the second bonus game is determined than when the first bonus game is determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that the rate of discrimination is high.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6, the suggestive effect executing means performs more when the second privilege game is determined than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. Since the ratio of determination increases when the suggestive effect is executed, there is an effect that the sense of expectation for the second privilege game can be improved when the suggestive effect is started.

In the game machine G1 or G2, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means in the display means, and dynamic display thereof Over a period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result executed by the execution means and a period from when the privilege game is started until at least the variable means is varied to the first position. and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect as a result of the specific effect, wherein the suggestive effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting the type of the privilege game as a result of the specific effect. Gaming machine G8.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the period from the start of the privilege game until at least the variable means is biased to the first position. A specific effect is executed by a specific effect executing means over a period of time. As a result of the specific effect, a suggestive effect suggesting the type of privilege game is executed by the suggestive effect executing means.

As a result, it is possible to show a series of effects with the specific effect and the effect suggesting the type of the privilege game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature H group> (Depending on the type of jackpot, the ease of predicting the presence or absence of holding consecutive occurrences is changed)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; Bonus game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means; As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game executing means, one category is determined from a plurality of categories including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. means, a variable means capable of being varied in a predetermined variable mode, and a first variable mode and a first variable mode based on the determination by the determination means that a result of determination is different from the specific determination result. A first variable control means for varying the variable means in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a second variable mode different from the mode, and determination by the determination means result in the specific determination result. second variable control means for varying the variable means in a third variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that makes it difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode, and the first privilege game is completed. until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first variable control means sets the first variable state in which the variable means is easily variable in the first variable mode, and the second privilege game is performed. variable state setting means for setting a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be varied in the second variable mode than the first variable state during a period from the end of the process until the specific condition is satisfied; A gaming machine H1 characterized by comprising:

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a win is achieved, the win is reported, and the type of win is also reported. In some cases, the game becomes monotonous because the work is just to digest the hits. In addition, in conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to distinguish whether a winning state or a small winning state, which is a type of loss, is made based on the performance mode or the opening and closing operation of a specific winning port. A configured game machine is also known, and there is also known a game machine that allows the user to expect that the winning game has been completed even after the winning game is over. However, in such a gaming machine, it takes too much time to grasp whether a win or a small win has occurred, and there is a risk that the player's interest in the game may be lost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game executing means, one category is selected by the category determination device from a plurality of categories including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. It is determined. A plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode, based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means resulted in an outlier discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. In one of the variable modes, the variable means is varied by the first variable control means. In a third variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode, the variable means is controlled by the second variable control means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. variable. During the period from the end of the first privilege game to the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the variable state setting means sets a first variable state in which the variable means is likely to be varied in the first variable mode by the first variable control means. set. On the other hand, the variable state setting means sets a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be varied in the second variable mode than the first variable state during the period from the end of the second privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition. be done.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish the appearance of the variable mode of the variable means between the case of the failure determination result after the end of the first privilege game and the case of the specific determination result, so that at least the specific condition is satisfied. Until then, it can be difficult to identify whether or not the privilege game is executed from the variable mode of the variable means. On the other hand, when the result of determination is lost after the end of the second privilege game, the second variable mode is set. becomes easier. Therefore, it is possible to change the easiness of distinguishing the result of determination until the specific condition is established according to the type of privilege game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, a game ball can enter a ball entering means, and the variable means has a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means and a game ball at a position higher than the first position. is variable from the second position to the second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and in the first variable mode, the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period and the second variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the elapse of a second period different from the first period. A gaming machine H2 characterized by:

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period, and the second variable mode is a second variable mode different from the first period. The variable means is configured in a variable mode in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the lapse of the period.

As a result, the player can easily distinguish between the first variable mode and the second variable mode by confirming the interval until the variable means is varied to the first position. There is

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the determination means comprises a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and a second determination means for executing a second determination based on establishment, and the first variable control means, based on the result of the determination by the first determination means as the result of the determination of the deviation, the first variable control means The variable means is varied in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least the first variable mode and the second variable mode, and the second variable control means comprises the first determination means. A gaming machine H3, wherein the variable means is varied in the third variable mode based on the specific determination result obtained in the determination by H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. A second discrimination is performed by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. The first variable control is performed in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode, based on the result of determination by the first determination means as a result of determination. The variable means is varied by the means. The variable means is varied in the third variable mode by the second variable control means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination means.

As a result, the variable mode of the variable means is changed in accordance with the type of privilege game when the result of determination by the first determination means is a failure determination result. There is an effect that the player can play the game while paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means each time the determination by is executed.

In the gaming machine H3, the type determination means determines the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result obtained in the second determination by the second determination means. A game machine H4 characterized by.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machine H3, the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result obtained in the second determination by the second determination means is determined by the type determination means. Since it is determined, when the second determination by the second determination means is executed, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether the first privilege game is determined or the second privilege game is determined. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the first determination condition is more likely to be established than the second determination condition during a period from the end of the privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition. Gaming machine H5.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the first determination condition is satisfied more than the second determination condition during the period from the end of the privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied. Since it becomes easier, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying more attention to the variable mode of the variable means until the specific condition is established.

In any one of the game machines H3 to H5, a first ball entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball can enter; and the state of the privilege ball entry means is changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the start of the privilege game. a variable control means for changing a predetermined number of times to a possible second state, wherein the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means; The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball-entering means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a second ball-entering means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. 2 ball entry means are provided. At a position where the game ball shot in the first direction is likely to enter, there is provided a privilege ball entry means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball. The state of the bonus ball entry means is changed by the variable control means a predetermined number of times from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball can be entered based on the start of the bonus game. The first discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. is established.

Thus, by shooting a game ball aiming at the privilege ball entering means during execution of the privilege game, the game ball can enter the first ball entering means as well. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination condition can be easily established when the privilege game is executed.

In the gaming machine H6, a first determination information acquisition means for acquiring first determination information used for determination by the first determination means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means; 1 discrimination information storage means capable of storing the first discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the specific condition is the discrimination information at the end of the privilege game The game machine H7 is characterized in that it is established based on the determination based on all the first determination information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means is acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. The first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means is stored by the determination information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. A specific condition is established based on execution of determination based on all the first determination information stored in the determination information storage means at the end of the privilege game.

As a result, the first determination information acquired during execution of the privilege game is stored in the determination information storage means, so that the first determination can be efficiently executed.

In the gaming machine H7, the game state after the privilege game is finished is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. game state determination means for determining one game state, wherein the type determination means determines the game state as a type of privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the first determination; a first type determination means in which a rate of determining a third privilege game for which the first game state is determined by the determination means is higher than a rate of determining the type of other privilege games; A second type that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game as the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the determination result of and a determination means, wherein the game state determination means sets the second game state as a game state after the end of the privilege game when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is played. The gaming machine H8 is characterized in that it determines.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the game state after the privilege game is finished, one game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. is determined by the game state determining means. As the type of privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the first determination, the third privilege game in which the first game state is determined by the game state determination means is determined by the first type determination means. The percentage of winning is higher than the percentage of determining the type of other privilege games. As the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the second determination, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game. It is determined by the two-type determining means. When the first privilege game or the second privilege game is played, the second game state is determined by the game state determining means as the game state after the privilege game ends.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first determination, the first determination stored in the determination information storage means during execution of the privilege game is highly likely to be determined after the privilege game is completed. Based on the information, it is possible to play the game hoping that all the first determinations executed after the end of the privilege game will result in a false determination result. Therefore, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that make the player want to avoid a specific determination result, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic group I> (Different susceptibility to occurrence of holding series according to the type of jackpot)
a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition; a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition; A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means, and by the privilege game execution means As the type of the privilege game to be executed, the first privilege game and the determination by the second determination means between the completion of the privilege game and the establishment of the specific condition rather than the first privilege game a second privilege game that tends to result in a specific determination result; and game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the first game state, wherein the first bonus game and the second bonus game. The game machine I1 is characterized in that, as the game state after the privilege game ends, the set ratio of the first game state is higher than that of the second game state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines have advantages such as changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have different degrees. However, it has been desired to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the winning type.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, the determination is executed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the second determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. 2 The determination is performed by the determination means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game and the discrimination by the second discrimination means between the end of the privilege game and the establishment of the specific condition rather than the first privilege game The type determination means determines the type of one privilege game out of a plurality of types including at least the second privilege game that tends to result in a specific determination result. A game state setting means sets one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state as a game state after the privilege game is finished. . In both the first privilege game and the second privilege game, the set ratio of the second game state is higher than that of the second game state as the game state after the privilege game is finished.

Thus, depending on whether the first privilege game is played or the second privilege game is played, the possibility that the determination by the second determination means will result in a specific determination result before the specific condition is satisfied differs. There is an effect that a game can be played while paying more attention to the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means.

In the game I1, the type determining means includes at least the first privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the other privilege game types. The type of the privilege game from 1 is determined, and the third privilege game is determined by the second determination means rather than the first determination means. When the specific determination result is obtained A game machine I2 characterized by having a high rate determined by the type determining means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the type determination means selects one privilege game type from among a plurality of at least a first privilege game, a second privilege game, and a third privilege game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the other privilege game types. determined by When the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result, the third privilege game is determined by the type determination means at a higher rate than the determination by the first determination means.

Thus, when the discrimination by the second discriminating means results in a specific discrimination result, the rate of determining the disadvantageous third privilege game increases, so that it is hoped that the discrimination by the second discriminating means will not result in a specific discrimination result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that it will be the first privilege game rather than the second privilege game that tends to result in a specific discrimination result in the discrimination by the second discriminating means.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the first game state is such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result when the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means is executed is the second game state. During the period from the end of the second privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition, the second judgment condition is more likely to be established than the first judgment condition. A game machine I3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first game state is configured such that the probability of obtaining a specific determination result when the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means is executed is higher than that in the second game state. . During the period from the end of the second privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition, the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first determination condition.

Thus, in the first game state, the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is higher than in the second game state, so that the privilege game is likely to be played continuously at relatively short intervals. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved when the first game state is entered.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means on the basis of establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; A discrimination information storage means capable of storing discrimination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, and one discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means. and erasing means for erasing the one discrimination information from the discrimination information storage means, wherein the specific condition is that the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes zero. A game machine I4 characterized by being established based on.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. The determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is stored in the determination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as the upper limit. Based on the fact that the piece of identification information stored in the identification information storage means is used for identification by the second identification unit, the piece of identification information is erased from the identification information storage unit by the erasing means. A specific condition is established when the number of pieces of identification information stored in the identification information storage means becomes zero.

Thus, until the information number of discrimination information becomes 0, discrimination by the second discrimination means tends to result in a specific discrimination result, so that the game is played while paying attention to the number of information stored in the discrimination information storage means. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines I1 to I4, a first ball-entering means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. a second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball can enter, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The second determination condition is established based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second privilege game is when the privilege game is started. A game machine I5 characterized in that, for at least a predetermined period afterward, it is easier for the player to shoot game balls in the second direction than in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. The first determination condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, while the second determination condition is that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. Established on the basis of In the second privilege game, it is easier for the player to shoot the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction for at least a predetermined period after the privilege game is started.

As a result, when the second privilege game is entered, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entering means by shooting the game ball in the second direction for a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied after the privilege game is finished.

In the gaming machine I5, a first device is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter, and can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter. A variable ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can be entered, and is variable between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball is difficult to enter. 2 variable ball entry means; and privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means; 2. A game machine I6 characterized in that the variable ball entry means is capable of changing the state in which a game ball can be entered for at least the predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter. It is A second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can enter. there is A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. The second variable ball entry means is changed to a state in which a game ball can be entered during at least a predetermined period of time during execution of the second scoring game.

As a result, during the predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game, the game ball can be shot in the second direction to the player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be entered into the second ball entering means during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine I6, the first variable ball entry means is capable of changing the state in which game balls can be entered during at least the predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game. Gaming machine I7 to play.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I6, during execution of the first scoring game, the first variable ball entry means changes the state in which the game ball can be entered for at least a predetermined period of time. Therefore, during the predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game, the game ball can be shot in the first direction to the player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second ball entering means during the predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game.

In any one of gaming machines I5 to I7, discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discriminating means based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entering means; a determination information storage means capable of storing the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction during the predetermined period. In this case, the gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the period is a length during which at least the predetermined number of pieces of information or more of the second discrimination information are acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I5 to I7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the discrimination information acquisition means acquires the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means. The determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is stored by the determination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as the upper limit. The predetermined period is constituted by a length in which at least a predetermined number of pieces of second identification information or more are acquired by the identification information storage means when the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction.

As a result, when the second privilege game is played, there is an effect that the determination information can be reliably stored in the determination information storage means up to the upper limit of the number of pieces of information.

In the game machine I8, the game ball launched in the second direction is passed through the first channel provided with the second ball entering means and the second channel provided with the second variable ball entering means. A gaming machine I9 characterized by comprising a sorting means capable of sorting to either

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effects of the game machine I8, the game ball shot in the second direction passes through the first flow path provided with the second ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. Since it is distributed by the distribution means to either the provided second flow path, the game ball fired in the second direction is biased toward the second ball entry means, or conversely, the second ball There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball from being unevenly entered into the variable ball entering means.

<Feature J Group> (As the state of playing a game in Special 1, a state in which it is easy to give time reduction and a state in which it is difficult to give time reduction are provided)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be varied, a first variable pattern based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable pattern, based on the establishment of a specific variable condition. A variable control means for making a variable with one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a variable pattern, a determination means for performing determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the determination means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based at least on a specific determination result in determination, and a game state after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. , a first game state, a second game state different from the first game state, and a third game state different from the first game state and the second game state. and game state setting means for setting a game state, wherein the first game state and the second game state are set by the variable control means in the first variable pattern rather than the third game state. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that the rate at which is varied is low.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are those that are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous game state is not set at the end of the winning state, the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered, and it is easy for the player to quit the game. There was a problem.

In particular, in a game machine of a type that does not have a so-called probability variation function and only two types of game states, a time-saving game state and a normal game state, are provided, the normal game state is set after the time-saving game state. In that case, the player may be satisfied with the game because he/she was able to play the game in the time-saving game state, and it may become difficult to persuade the player to continue the game in the normal game state after that.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, there is a first position at which a game ball can be entered into a ball entry means into which a game ball can be entered, and a game ball is more difficult to enter than at the first position. A variable means is configured to be variable between the second position and the second position. The variable means generates a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball-entering means than the first variable pattern by the variable control means based on the establishment of a specific variable condition. It is varied in one variable pattern out of a plurality of at least. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means at least based on a specific determination result in determination by the determination means executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. be done. As a game state after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed, a first game state, a second game state different from the first game state, and both the first game state and the second game state One of a plurality of game states including at least a different third game state is set by the game state setting means. The first game state and the second game state are configured such that the rate at which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than that in the third game state.

This makes it difficult to distinguish between the first game state and the second game state from the variable ratio of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the first game state and the second game state are characterized in that the probability of the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means is a common specific probability. Machine J2.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, the first game state and the second game state are set so that the probability of obtaining a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means is a common specific probability. Since it is configured, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to distinguish between the first game state and the second game state.

In a gaming machine J1 or J2, a second ball entering means different from the above ball entering means, a second determination means for performing a determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the determination by the second determination means having the specific determination result, wherein the first game state is determined by the second determination means; When the determination results in the specific determination result, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a first ratio, and the second game state is determined by the second determination means. A game machine J3 characterized in that, when the specific determination result is obtained in the game state setting means, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate by the game state setting means. .

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the second determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means different from the ball entry means. The privilege game is executed by the second privilege game executing means based on the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means resulting in a specific discrimination result. When a specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the second determination means in the first game state, the game state setting means sets the third game state at the first rate, while the second game state is set in the second game state. When the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a second rate higher than the first rate.

As a result, in the second game state, it is easier to set the third game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, in the second game state than in the first game state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of what will happen.

In the gaming machine J3, the third game state is set at a third rate higher than the first rate by the game state setting means when the privilege game is executed. A game machine J4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, when the privilege game is executed in the third gaming state, the third gaming state is set to the third rate higher than the first rate by the gaming state setting means. Therefore, when the third game state is reached, the privilege game and the third game state are likely to be repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when the third game state is entered.

In the gaming machine J4, a game in which the game state is shifted to the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition that is at least different from the specific determination result in the second game state. State transition means is provided, and the third game state is set to either the second game state or the third game state by the game state setting means when the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine J5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second game state, the game state is shifted to the first game state by the game state shift means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition different from at least a specific determination result. When the privilege game is executed in the third game state, either the second game state or the third game state is set by the game state setting means.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in the third game state, the first game state is not set. Until the transition from the second game state to the first game state, the player can be made to think about continuing the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine J5, the game state transition means is based on, as the specific condition, a determination result different from the specific determination result continuously over a predetermined number of times in the determination by the determination means, A game machine J6 characterized in that it shifts from the second game state to the first game state.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J5, as a specific condition, based on the fact that the judgment by the judgment means has continuously produced a different judgment result different from the specific judgment result for a predetermined number of times. Since the second game state is shifted to the first game state by the game state shifting means, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of consecutive times of the result of determination of failure. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine J6, as the type of the second game state set by the game state setting means, the game state transition is performed based on the result of the determination of the first number of times by the determination means. Based on the fact that the result of determination is out of the first type of transition to the first game state by the means and the determination of the second number of times that is larger than the first number of times, the game state transition means performs the first game state. A game machine J7 characterized by comprising a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a second type to be shifted to one game state.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6, as the type of the second game state set by the game state setting means, the discriminating result of the first number of discriminations by the discriminating means is a result of discriminating. Based on the first type that is shifted to the first game state by the game state transition means based on the above, and the second number of times that is larger than the first number of times, the game state transition means based on the result of discriminating out. Since one type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the second type to be shifted to the first game state, the second game state can be continued over a larger number of determinations. can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In a game machine J7, display means capable of displaying an effect mode, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the display means can display the first effect mode. When the second game state is set by the first display control means and the game state setting means, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode can be displayed on the display means. The first effect mode is displayed during the period from when the second game state is set by the second display control means and the game state setting means to when the result of the determination is obtained over the second number of times. A gaming machine J8 characterized by comprising a limiting means for limiting the.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first presentation mode is displayed on the display means by the first display control means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is displayed on the display means by the second display control means. The restriction means restricts the display of the first performance mode from when the second game state is set by the game state setting means until the result of the determination of failure is obtained over the second number of times.

As a result, even if the result of determination is out of reach for the first number of times after the second game state is set, the first effect mode is not displayed until the second number of times. It becomes difficult to identify whether it is the second game state of one type or the second game state of the second type. Therefore, regardless of the type of the second game state, it is possible to make the player think that the game should be continued at least until the determination is made the second number of times, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine J8, a third display for displaying the first effect mode based on the second game state being set by the game state setting means and the second game state being determined to be out of the second game state. A gaming machine J9 characterized by comprising display control means.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J8, the third display is performed based on the fact that the second game state is set by the game state setting means and the second game state is set to the second game state, and the second game state is determined as a result of the determination. Since the first effect mode is displayed by the control means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the period during which it is unclear whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state from becoming too long.

A gaming machine J10 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines J4 to J9, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J4 to J9, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio. There is an effect that it can be made to expect more strongly to become.

<Characteristic K group> (Configuration that makes it difficult for Special 2 to turn during time saving)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, a first game state, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. a game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of at least including; a ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter; A variable means that can be changed between a position and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a variable operation of the variable means is changed to the ball entering means in the first game state. Control by the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter, in the second game state, control by the second control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, and in the third game state, A gaming machine K1 characterized by comprising: variable control means for performing control by a third control that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first control and the second control.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are those that are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous game state is not set at the end of the winning state, the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered, and it is easy for the player to quit the game. There was a problem.

In particular, in a game machine of a type that does not have a so-called probability variation function and only two types of game states, a time-saving game state and a normal game state, are provided, the normal game state is set after the time-saving game state. In that case, the player may be satisfied with the game because he/she was able to play the game in the time-saving game state, and it may become difficult to persuade the player to continue the game in the normal game state after that.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, a first game state, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the second game state are based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition. The game state setting means sets one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state more advantageous to the player than the third game state. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. there is The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means under the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means in the first game state, and the game ball enters the ball entering means in the second game state. is controlled by the variable control means in the second control that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and in the third game state, the variable control means controls the game ball in the third control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means.

As a result, the degree of advantage is differentiated between the first game state in which the ball is hardly entered into the ball-entering means and the second game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the second control makes it easier for the variable means to be arranged at the first position than the first control.

According to the game machine 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the second control is configured to make it easier for the variable means to be arranged at the first position than in the first control. Although the variable means is more likely to be placed at the first position than the first control, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel operation in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball-entering means as in the first control.

The gaming machine K2 comprises passing means through which a game ball can pass, and determination means for performing a determination based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means, wherein the variable control means performs determination by the determination means. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the specific determination result obtained in step 1, and the first game state is determined by the determination by the determination means. The specific determination result is obtained with a probability of 1, and the second game state and the third game state are determined by the determination means with a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it provides a specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the determining means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means through which the game ball can pass. The variable control means causes the variable means to be varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. In the first game state, determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result with a first probability. A specific determination result is obtained with a probability of 2.

As a result, although the second game state and the third game state have the same probability of obtaining a specific determination result, it is possible to realize a novel operation in which the easiness of entering the ball into the ball-entering means is different. has the effect of

In the game machine K3, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls at a shooting interval equal to or greater than a predetermined interval is provided, and the second game state is determined by the determination means after the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, and the variable means is changed to the A period until the variable means is changed to the first position is set as the first period, and a period from when the variable means is changed to the first position until it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passing game ball reaches the ball entering means tends to be shorter than the first period, and 1 The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the game ball fired by the shooting means at the predetermined interval next to the passing game ball reaches the variable means is The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that it tends to be longer than the sum of one period and the second period.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, game balls are shot by the shooting means at a shooting interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. In the second game state, the first period is set to the period from when the determining means obtains a specific determination result to when the variable means is varied to the first position, and the variable means is variable to the first position. The second period is set to the period from when it is changed to when it is changed to the second position. A period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means tends to be shorter than the first period. The period from when one game ball passes through the passing means until the game ball fired by the shooting means at a predetermined interval next to the passing game ball reaches the variable means is the first period and the second period. It tends to be longer than the sum of the two periods.

Thereby, even if the game balls are continuously shot to the passing means in the second game state, the game balls are allowed to reach the ball entering means while the variable means is changed to the first position. can make it difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the second game state can be made into a special state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means although the variable means is likely to be changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine K4, the third game state is defined as a period from when the determination by the determination means provides the specific determination result to when the variable means is varied to the first position, which is longer than the first period. is set to a long third period, and the period from when the variable means is varied to the first position to when it is varied to the second position is set to the second period; The period from when the game ball passes through the means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means is longer than the third period, and the third period and the second period A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is likely to be shorter than the sum of .

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of the game machine K4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the third game state, a period from when the determining means obtains a specific determination result to when the variable means is varied to the first position is set to a third period longer than the first period, A period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means is longer than the third period, and is the sum of the third period and the second period. It becomes easier to be shorter than

Thus, in the third game state, when a specific determination result is obtained in the determination executed based on passing through the passing means, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is directly entered into the ball-entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the third game state can be progressed efficiently.

In any one of gaming machines K1 to K5, second ball entering means different from the above ball entering means and capable of entering a game ball, and based on the fact that the game ball has entered the above ball entering means A first determination means for executing a first determination, a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means, and the first determination means a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination or the result of the determination by the second determination means resulting in a predetermined first determination result, wherein the game state The setting means sets the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the first game state at a first rate. 3 game states are set, and the first game state is set as the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the second game state. A game machine K6 characterized in that the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the rate.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first determination is performed by the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means different from the ball entry means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on a predetermined first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the discrimination by the second discrimination means. The third game state is set at a first rate by the game state setting means as the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the first game state. set. A game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate as a game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the second game state. A third game state is set by means.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained during the second game state.

In the gaming machine K6, the game state setting means sets the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the third game state. , wherein the third game state is determined at a third rate higher than the first rate.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the first determination in the third game state. Since the third game state is determined by the game state setting means at the third rate higher than the first rate, the third game state is likely to reappear after the privilege game is finished in the third game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when the third game state is entered.

A game machine K8 characterized in that, in the game machine K7, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, so that the first determination result is obtained in the second game state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of .

<Characteristic group L> (A mechanism that allows a game to be played in a game method that makes it easy to be alternately distributed to two routes by the distribution means and a game method that makes it easy to be distributed to one route)
An operating means operable by a player, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball according to the operation content of the operating means, a first passage through which the game ball shot by the shooting means can pass, While the second flow path different from the first flow path and the first condition that can be established by performing the operation of the first operation content on the operating means are satisfied, the game ball that has reached the first condition is held. A second condition is established that can be established by performing an operation of a second operation content different from the operation of the first operation content. A game machine L1, characterized in that it is provided with a distributing means that makes it easier to distribute the arriving game balls to the first flow path while the first condition is satisfied.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a distribution member for distributing game balls to one of two types of flow paths provided on the board surface. In such a conventional game machine, game balls that reach the distribution member are distributed one by one to two types of flow paths, thereby making it possible to cause game balls to flow down the two types of flow paths in a well-balanced manner. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231902).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the game balls that reach the distribution member are alternately distributed to two types of flow paths regardless of the game method of the player, so there is room for the skill of the player to intervene. There is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, a game ball is shot by the shooting means according to the operation contents of the operation means that the player can operate. A first flow path through which a game ball shot by the shooting means can pass, and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided. While the first condition that can be established by performing the operation of the first operation content on the operating means is satisfied, the state of the sorting means divides the arrived game balls into the first flow path and the second flow path. It becomes a state in which it is easy to distribute alternately to the flow path. While a second condition that can be satisfied by performing an operation with a second operation content different from the first operation content is satisfied, the state of the sorting means is higher than that while the first condition is satisfied. A game ball that has reached the first flow path is easily distributed to the first flow path.

As a result, the manner in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution means can be varied according to the operation content of the player, so there is an effect that the operation of the operation means can be devised.

In the gaming machine L1, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, game balls are shot by the shooting means at a first shooting interval, and the operation of the second operation content is performed. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that, by doing so, game balls are shot by the shooting means at a second shooting interval longer than the first shooting interval.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, the game ball is shot at the first shooting interval by the shooting means. When the operation of the second operation content is executed, the game ball is shot by the shooting means at a second shooting interval longer than the first shooting interval. As a result, it is possible to easily change how the game balls are distributed by the distribution means by simply changing the shooting interval, so that there is an effect that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

In the game machine L2, the sorting means has at least a first movable range in which the arriving game ball is easily sorted to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the game ball is easily sorted to the second flow path. It is configured to be able to move a specific movable range including, the distribution means, by distributing the game ball to the first flow path in a state arranged in the first movable range, the second It is configured to be easily movable within the movable range, and to be easily movable within the first movable range by distributing the game balls to the second flow path while being arranged in the second movable range. A gaming machine L3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the distributing means can move a specific movable range including at least a first movable range in which the arriving game ball is easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path. do. By distributing the game balls to the first flow path in the state of being arranged in the first movable range, the distributing means can be easily moved to the second movable range. Further, by distributing the game balls to the second flow path while being arranged in the second movable range, the distributing means can be easily moved to the first movable range.

As a result, it is possible to realize an operation of alternately distributing the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path by continuously reaching the distributing means.

In the game machine L3, when the game ball is distributed to the first flow path and moved to the second movable range, the distribution means is shorter than the length of the second shooting interval and the first The game machine L4 is characterized in that it can move up to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the firing interval.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3, when the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and the distributing means moves to the second movable range, the length of the second firing interval is shorter In addition, since the sorting means moves up to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the first shooting interval, when the game balls are continuously shot at the shooting interval longer than the second shooting interval, the sorting means can be distributed. There is an effect that the movable range of the means can be reliably set to the first movable range.

In the game machine L4, the distributing means can easily move from the first movable range to the second movable range by the mass of the game balls distributed to the first flow path, and distributes the ball to the second flow path. The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that it is easily movable from the second movable range to the first movable range by the mass of the game ball.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects of the game machine L4, the mass of the game balls distributed to the first flow path makes it easier for the distribution means to move from the first movable range to the second movable range. The mass of the game balls distributed to the two flow paths facilitates the movement of the distributing means from the second movable range to the first movable range, thereby eliminating the need for a power source for moving the distributing means. has the effect of

In the game machine L4 or L5, the distribution means is configured so that a predetermined position in the first movable range is the initial arrangement, and the game ball returns to the predetermined position when the game ball does not reach for a predetermined period of time. A gaming machine L6 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects of the game machine L4 or L5, the distribution means is configured so that the predetermined position in the first movable range is the initial arrangement, and game balls are distributed to the distribution means. On the other hand, since the distribution means is configured to return to the predetermined position when the game ball is not reached for the predetermined period, the distribution means is maintained within the first movable range unless the game ball is distributed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball that reaches the sorting means first can be surely sorted to the first flow path.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L6, passing means provided at a position through which the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass; A ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the flow path can enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a position before the first position a second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the entering ball means; variable control means for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the game machine L7.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L6, the following effects are produced. That is, the passing means is provided at a position through which the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down through the first flow path and a game ball that has flowed down through the second flow path can enter. A variable means is configured to be variable between a first position at which a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter into the ball entering means than at the first position. It is Determination by the determining means is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means. The variable control means causes the variable means to be varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the result of discrimination by the discriminating means, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L7, a first game state, a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition. a game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state; The variable means is controlled to be variable in the first variable mode in which the ball is difficult to enter, and in the second game state, the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means in the second variable mode. The variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the third game state, the game ball is easier to enter the ball entering means than the first variable mode and the second variable mode. The game machine L8 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be variable.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of the game machine L7, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, a first game state, a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state. One game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a game state is set by the game state setting means. In the first game state, the variable control means controls so that the variable means is variable in the first variable mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means. In the second game state, the variable control means controls the variable means to vary in the second variable mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means. In the third game state, the variable control means controls the variable means to vary in the third variable mode in which the game ball enters the ball-entering means more easily than in the first variable mode and the second variable mode.

As a result, since a plurality of game states with different easiness of entering the ball into the ball entering means are provided, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine L8, the first game state is a state in which the specific determination result is obtained with a first probability by the determination means, and the second game state is determined by the determination means with a higher probability than the first probability. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific determination result is obtained with a high second probability, and the three game states are those that result in the specific determination result with the second probability by the determination means. L9.

According to the game machine L9, in addition to the effects of the game machine L8, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first game state, the discrimination means produces a specific discrimination result with a first probability. In the second game state, the determination means provides a specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability. In the third game state, the determination means provides a specific determination result with a second probability.

As a result, although the second game state and the third game state have the same probability of obtaining a specific determination result, a novel operation is realized in which the easiness of entering the ball into the ball entering means is made different. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature M group> (It is advantageous to get out of time saving)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based at least on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result, and One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state as a game state after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. game state setting means for setting the game state, and in a state in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a specific transition condition different from at least the end of execution of the privilege game is satisfied. and game state transition means for shifting from the first game state to the second game state based on.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are those that are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the normal game state is set at the end of the winning state, the disadvantageous state continues at least until the next winning state. However, there is a problem that it is impossible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, in addition to the normal game state and the advantageous game state, there is provided a third game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state and more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state. After the winning state ends, either the advantageous game state or the third game state is set, so that the game can be continued at least until the third game state ends. There are also things that can make people think. However, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined number of lotteries are completed in the third game state, it is normal to shift from the third game state to the normal game state. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player after the game has ended.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, at least based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition results in a specific discrimination result, the privilege game executing means provides a privilege advantageous to the player. A game is executed. One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state as a game state after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. A game state is set by the game state setting means. In a state in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first game state is changed to the second game state based on establishment of a specific transition condition that is at least different from the end of execution of the privilege game. The transition is made by the game state transition means.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation that the specific transition condition will be satisfied in the first game state, so there is an effect that the game in the first game state can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine M1, the specific transition condition is a determination result different from the specific determination result a predetermined specific number of times in the determination by the determination means executed after the first game state is set. The game machine M2 is characterized in that it is established when .

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, in the determination by the determination means executed after being set to the first game state, a predetermined specific number of times, a deviation determination different from a specific determination result Since a specific transition condition is established when a result is obtained, a novel game property can be realized in which, in the first game state, a failure determination result can be expected every time determination is performed by the determination means. has the effect of

In a game machine M1 or M2, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a position from the first position to the ball entry means A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter, and a first variable control that makes it easier for the variable means to be changed to the first position in the first game state, and the first variable control is performed. 2 variable control execution means for executing a second variable control in which the variable means is less likely to be varied to the first position than in the first game state in a game state, wherein the determination condition is the ball entering means; A game machine M3 characterized in that it is established based on the entry of a game ball.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is variable between the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the second position where the game ball enters the ball entering means more difficult than the first position. In the first game state, the variable control executing means executes the first variable control that makes it easier to change the variable means to the first position, and in the second game state, the variable means is more variable to the first position than in the first game state. The second variable control, which is difficult to perform, is executed by the variable control execution means. A determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entering means.

As a result, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that the variable means will be varied to the first position.

In the game machine M3, the game state setting means selects one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state, the second game state, and a third game state more advantageous than the second game state. 1 game state is set, and the variable control execution means makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable control and the second variable control in the third game state. A game machine M4 characterized in that it executes a third variable control.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, the following effects are produced. That is, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state more advantageous than the second game state is set by the game state setting means. . In the third game state, the variable control executing means executes the third variable control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable control and the second variable control.

As a result, in the third game state, determination by the determination means is facilitated, so that the game can be played efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the third game state.

In the gaming machine M4, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a first rate as the game state after the privilege game ends when the specific determination result is obtained in the first game state. is set, and when the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate Game machine M5.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine M4, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first game state, the game state after the privilege game ends is set to the first ratio by the game state setting means. While the third game state is set in the second game state, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second game state, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate, so the second The third game state is more likely to be set as the game state after the end of the privilege game when a specific determination result is obtained in the game state. Therefore, in the first game state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in anticipation of the establishment of a specific transition condition rather than a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine M5, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a third rate higher than the first rate as a game state after the privilege game executed in the third game state is finished. A gaming machine M6 characterized by being a setting.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of the game machine M5, the game state setting means sets the third rate higher than the first rate as the game state after the privilege game executed in the third game state ends. Since the third game state is set, in the third game state, it becomes easy to enter the third game state again after the privilege game ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction by entering the third game state.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, there is a ball entry area into which a game ball can enter, and a second bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game based on the game ball entering the ball entry area. and a gaming machine M7 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the second privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry area. , the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Features N group> (If you win during a short time, the small hit is likely to be disadvantageous after the small hit ends)
Determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and first advantageous game execution for executing a first advantageous game advantageous to the player based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. means, and as the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. and a type determination means for determining the type of the game, and a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game based on the second determination result different from the first determination result in the determination by the determination means. A second advantageous game executing means for executing a second advantageous game, and a first game state as a game state after execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game executing means, and the first game state. is a different second game state, and a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of at least including; game state termination means for terminating the first game state if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied when the determination result of is determined, and the specific condition is determined by the determination means Compared to the case where the first determination result is obtained and the first type is determined by the type determination unit, the determination by the determination unit results in the first determination result, and the type determination unit determines the first determination result. The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it is configured such that it is easier to establish when two types are determined.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance into which a ball can be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entrance. A game ball that enters the interior of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed based on the There has been proposed a pachinko machine capable of providing a privilege game (such as a jackpot game) that is advantageous to a player by passing through the machine (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if a small winning game is executed, the bonus game is not executed unless the game ball can enter the V winning device. There is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be lost if the ball cannot be entered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first advantageous game advantageous to the player is selected based on the first determination result in the determination by the determination means executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. Executed by advantageous game executing means. As the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type is selected by the type determining means. A type is determined. A second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game executing means based on the fact that the judgment by the judging means results in a second judgment result different from the first judgment result. be. As a game state after execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed, a game is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. One game state is set by the state setting means. When a determination result other than the second determination result is obtained in determination by the determination means executed in the first game state, if a predetermined specific condition is established, the first game state is terminated by the game state ending means. is terminated by Compared to the case where the discrimination by the discrimination means yields the first discrimination result and the discrimination by the discrimination means determines the first classification, the discrimination by the discrimination means yields the first discrimination result, and the discrimination by the discrimination means determines the second classification. is determined, the specific condition is more likely to be established.

As a result, when the first determination result is obtained, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the determination of the first type.

In the gaming machine N1, the second game state is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. game machine N2, characterized in that the game machine N2 shifts from the game state to the second game state.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first game state. If the specific condition is established, the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state by the game state ending means.

As a result, the game can be played in the first game state in anticipation of the establishment of the specific condition, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine N1 or N2 is provided with a ball entry area in which a game ball can be entered based on the execution of the first advantageous game, and the second advantageous game execution means moves the game into the ball entry area. The second advantageous game is executed based on the entry of a ball, and the game state ending means performs the first advantageous game of the first type for the first number of times in the first game state of 1. The first game state is terminated based on the execution, and the first advantageous game of the second type is executed a second number of times less than the first number of times in the first game state of 1. The game machine N3 is characterized in that the first game state is ended based on the game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game executing means based on the game ball entering the ball entry area that becomes possible to enter the ball based on the execution of the first advantageous game. . While the first game state is terminated by the game state termination means based on the first number of executions of the first advantageous game of the first type in the one first game state, the first game state is terminated in the one first game state. The first game state is terminated by the game state termination means based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the two types is executed a second number of times smaller than the first number of times.

As a result, during the execution of the first advantageous game, the game ball is entered into the ball entry area and the second advantageous game is executed, or the specific condition is established without entering the ball into the ball entry area. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a playability that allows the user to choose whether to expect it.

In the gaming machine N3, the game state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the first game state is determined as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game when the second advantageous game ends.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N3, the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. In this case, since the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the second advantageous game is completed, it is determined whether the first advantageous game is the first type or the second type. Select whether to make a more serious prediction and execute the second advantageous game by entering the game ball into the ball entry area, or to expect that the specific condition is established without entering the ball into the ball entry area. can be made Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine N4, the game state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. The gaming machine N5 is characterized in that the second game state is set as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game when the second advantageous game is ended.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. In this case, the game state setting means sets the second game state as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game, so if the first advantageous game is of the first type, the ball is not allowed to enter the ball entry area. While there is a possibility that the specific condition is satisfied and the game state shifts to the second game state, if it is the second type, the second advantageous game is executed by entering the ball into the ball entering area, and furthermore, the second game state is executed. 2 It shifts to a game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of the first advantageous game can be predicted more seriously.

In the gaming machine N5, when the determination by the determining means yields the first determination result, a common specific effect is executed regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine N6 characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means for executing.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N5, based on the first determination result in the determination by the determination means, regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determination means Since the common specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, it becomes difficult to distinguish from the effect whether it is the first type or the second type. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more seriously predict whether it is the first type or the second type.

In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N6, the game state setting means sets the first game state, the second game state, and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state. 1 game state is set from among a plurality of game states including at least 3 game states, and the game state setting means sets the game state after the second advantageous game executed in the first game state is completed. As a state, the third game state is set at a first rate, and as a game state after the second advantageous game executed in the second game state is completed, a second rate higher than the first rate is set. A game machine N7 characterized in that the third game state is set at a ratio of .

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state setting means selects one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state. A game state is set. As a game state after the second advantageous game executed in the first game state is completed, the game state setting means sets the third game state at the first ratio, while the game state is executed in the second game state. As a game state after the second advantageous game ends, a third game state is set by the game state setting means at a second rate higher than the first rate.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the second advantageous game will be executed in the second game state.

In the gaming machine N7, the game state setting means sets the game state at a third rate higher than the first rate as a game state after the second advantageous game executed in the third game state is finished. 3. A game machine N8 characterized in that it sets three game states.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N7, as the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state is finished, the gaming state setting means sets the second rate higher than the first rate. Since the third game state is set at a ratio of 3, when the third game state is reached, the second advantageous game and the third game state are likely to be repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction when the third game state is entered.

A gaming machine N9 characterized in that, in the gaming machine N8, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N8, the second ratio tooth is configured at a ratio higher than the third ratio, so when the second game state is entered, the second advantageous game There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the will be executed.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, J1 to J10, K1 to K8, L1 to L9, A game machine Z1 in any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N9, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, J1 to J10, K1 to K8, L1 to L9, A game machine Z2 in any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N9, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, J1 to J10, K1 to K8, L1 to L9, A game machine Z3 in any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N9, wherein said game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
670e2 Special discharge channel (entering ball area)
S220 Part of second advantageous game execution means S305, S332 Determination means S1323, S1324 Game state setting means S1629 Part of second advantageous game execution means S2403 First advantageous game execution means S2414 Game state end means

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the interest of the player in the game by suggesting to the player that the lottery result is winning according to the contents of the variable performance that is executed. be.

JP-A-2006-345901

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, and first ball entering means capable of entering the game balls shot by the shooting means. an acquiring means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is established; and the predetermined information acquired by the acquiring means. storage means capable of storing data; and determination means capable of performing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied; means capable of generating a specific game state based on the fact that the result is a specific determination result; is a different second ball entering means, a first position that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means from the first position a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position; a second displacement control for displacing the positioned displacement means to the second position; The first displacement control is executed based on the establishment of the first condition, and the first displacement control satisfies a second condition that can be established in a situation where the displacement means is positioned at the first position. The gaming machine is configured to execute the second displacement control based on, and the gaming machine provides a predetermined value to the player when a game ball enters at least the first ball entering means A first mode based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific game state, and a predetermined state to the second ball entry means It is configured so that at least the third mode based on the entrance of the ball can occur .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the shooting means capable of shooting the game ball into the game area, the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means, and the first entering means Acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the entry of a game ball into the ball means is established, and storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means. and determination means capable of performing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied, wherein the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination. a means capable of generating a specific game state based on the result; A ball means, a first position that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a game ball that is more difficult to enter the second ball entering means than the first position. a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position; and the displacement means positioned at the first position. a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means to the second position; The first displacement control is executed based on the fact that the first displacement control is performed, and the first displacement control satisfies the second condition that can be satisfied in the situation where the displacement means is positioned at the first position. The game machine is configured to execute 2-displacement control, and the game machine is configured to award a predetermined value to the player when a game ball enters at least the first ball entering means. A first mode based on execution of the determination by the determining means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means It is configured so that at least the third aspect can occur .

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. (a) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 along the line La-La in FIG. 5(b), and (b) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 along the line Lb-Lb in FIG. 5(c). (c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. (a) is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the switching member is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel; FIG. 10 is a rear view of the back cover body showing a state in which the guide piece of the switching member blocks the opening of the inlet of the discharge channel; (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a big win displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a view showing a ball entering the second ball entrance during the big win. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when is detected. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a door breaking mode effect that is executed with the start of an ending period after all rounds of jackpots are finished in the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode when breaking through the first door in the door breakthrough mode effect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when breaking through the fourth door fails in the door breaking mode effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when all the doors are successfully broken through in the door breaking mode effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the state of the specific winning opening when shifting to the variable probability mode, and (b) is the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is a big win F and a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the display mode and the state of the specific winning opening in the case of shifting to the normal mode. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is the main control in the first embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of the apparatus. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic representation of the contents of the table for each special figure 1 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for special figure 1 off (normal), and (d) is the specification of the table for special figure 1 (probability variation) It is the figure which showed the content typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot (4 fluctuations or less) table, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot (5 fluctuations or more) table (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 off (4 fluctuations or less) table, and (d) is a special figure 2 off (5 fluctuations or more) ) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table for . It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method according to the first embodiment; 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. be. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing winning processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a small prize medium prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing close command processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller in the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows a small winning end time process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of the first hit random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the second embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st hit classification selection table set to ROM of this. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing state command setting processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing a prize winning process 2 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a turning-on state determination process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows breakthrough mode selection processing performed by MPU in an audio ramp control device in a 2nd embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing variation pattern determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram illustrating a case where the storage valve is in a protruding state (a state in which three balls, which are the upper limit number, are stored above the storage valve) in a modification of the second embodiment; There is, and (b) is the figure which illustrated the case where the storage valve was in the buried state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the opening of the jackpot displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during one round of the jackpot displayed in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of one round of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol according to the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in the interval after 1 round of big hits displayed on a display apparatus. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment, (b) is the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an open scenario selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third embodiment; 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice ramp control device in the third embodiment, (b) is a promotion effect lottery table set in the ROM of the voice ramp control device in the third embodiment FIG. 10C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the definition of , and FIG. 11C is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the third embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing open scenario selection processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation|movement setting process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 3 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing opening command processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; 14 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing close command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the promotion effect lottery process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the opening of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in the modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the 1st round of big hit displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the modification of a form. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the change over time of the effect mode in the case of a big win in the modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is a modification of the third embodiment in which the super FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a time-dependent change in the presentation mode when out of reach. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a table for special hits in the fourth embodiment It is a figure which showed typically the content of regulation, and (c) is the figure which showed typically the content of regulation of the table for the loss after the special hit in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 variation pattern determination process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing the operation contents of the distribution member in the fifth embodiment. Schematic representation of the correspondence relationship between the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door of the V winning device and the switching of the flow path in which the game ball that has flowed into the V winning device is guided in the case of a small win in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode with the highest degree of expectation for a pullback mode, which is displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the degree of expectation of the pullback mode is medium, displayed on the 3-symbol display device. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode with the lowest expectation degree of pullback mode displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment, (b) is the main control in the fifth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the device, (c) defines the time saving number selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment It is the figure which showed the content typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special figure 2 per table, and (c) is for special figure 2 off (normal / pullback) set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table, and (d) schematically shows the defined contents of the special figure 2 off (renso) table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment. It is a diagram showing. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment, (b) is the main control in the fifth embodiment It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the device. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the mode in 5th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment, (b) is an expectation level selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing 5 executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation start processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time saving number of times update processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing V passage detection processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 5 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing status command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing expectation update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of winning a small hit in the normal mode displayed with the 3rd design display device in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the specification content, (c) is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment, (b) is the main controller in the sixth embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the number-of-time-savings selection table set to 1 ROM. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the small hitting specification frequency|count selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the mode in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment, (b) is a rank-up lottery table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction frequency|count update process 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 6 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing state command processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing post-finish back setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing expectation update processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and ball entrances 64, 640, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of game balls detected may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails and windmills for guiding balls, rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a The first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the sorting member 660, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning hole 63, the first ball-entering hole 64, the second ball-entering hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. 13 is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13, and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a starting port and the like are arranged and the shot ball is area). In addition, the game area includes all areas where the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the prize winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is conducted, and the ball enters the normal entrance. When 67 is passed, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is carried out. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until seven balls are won). ) is opened, and the opening is repeated the number of times (the number of rounds) corresponding to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot types of special symbols, six types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are provided. (game value) is given to the player. The three types of "jackets A to C" are jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won in a lottery executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The three types of jackpots D to F” are jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won in a lottery executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 . Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the special symbol lottery that is executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the first special symbol lottery. A special symbol lottery that is executed when the ball enters the ball opening 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

When the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) elapses, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each game is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is carried out. , the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67, the success or failure determination of whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern is won, the first ball entrance 64 is opened by changing the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). be released. In addition, since the electric accessory 64a is arranged at the closed position, the right side and the left side of the first ball entrance 64 are normally closed when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball rolling toward the first ball entrance 64 from the right and left sides in the front view cannot enter the first ball entrance 64 because it is blocked by the electric accessory 64a. ). Therefore, basically, only the ball that has flowed down from vertically above the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state can enter the first ball entrance 64 . On the other hand, in the case of winning the normal pattern, the electric accessory 64a is released, and the balls rolling toward the first ball entrance 64 from the right and left sides in the front view are rolled into the first ball entrance 64. It becomes easier to enter the ball into the ball, and as a result, it becomes easier to perform the lottery for the special symbol.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. It is displayed and also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. be started.

As described above, six types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols.

When "jackpot A" and "jackpot D" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16-round jackpot). On the other hand, when "jackpot B" is reached, a special game state with 5 rounds (5-round jackpot) is reached, when "jackpot C" is reached, a special game state with 2 rounds is reached, and when "jackpot E" is reached, When the number of rounds becomes a special game state with 7 rounds (7 rounds big win) and "jackpot F" is reached, a special game state with 6 rounds (6 rounds big win) occurs. Furthermore, when the specific conditions are satisfied during each of the jackpot games (when the ball entering the variable winning device 65 passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, which will be described later), a high probability state of special symbols after the jackpot ends (special During the probability change of the pattern). Also, when the high probability state of the special pattern is given,
The probability of hitting the normal pattern is also increased (the time saving state of the normal pattern is given). The high-probability state of the special design and the time-saving state of the normal design continue after the end of the big win until the next big win. On the other hand, if the high probability state of the special pattern is not provided (the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the low probability state of the special pattern is set until the next big hit, and the hit of the normal pattern. Probability also becomes a normal probability (normal pattern normal state).

Here, "special symbol high probability state" means a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is up, the so-called "special symbol high probability state" (probability change state of special symbols), in other words, special game state It is a game state that easily shifts to (jackpot). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbols). In addition, the ``time-saving state of normal symbols'' (high-probability state of normal symbols) refers to a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and a ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal design", it is called "normal state of normal design" (low probability state of normal design), which means that the probability of winning normal design is normal, that is, during time saving Indicates a low probability of winning.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the special symbol definite variable period. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as time-shortening of normal symbols.

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is varied according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common (for example, all 5 rounds) for all jackpot types. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ``probability variable state of special symbols'' and the ``time-saving state of ordinary symbols'' provided after the big win are configured to continue until the next big win, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the "probability variable state of special symbols" and the "time-saving state of normal symbols" may be configured to be limited until the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of times of lottery to be "probability variable state of special symbols" and the number of times of lottery to be "time-saving state of normal symbols" may be different. Moreover, according to the kind of big hit, it is good also as a structure which changes the number of times of lottery.

When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by turning on the power supply, etc., it is always set to "low probability state of special symbols" and "normal state of normal symbols". Then, when a big hit occurs and the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win, the ``low probability state of the special symbol'' is shifted to the ``variable probability state of the special symbol'', and the ``normal state of the normal symbol'' is changed. Shift to "time saving state of normal pattern". In this case, the set "probability variable state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols" continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 even once in the 1 jackpot, the game shifts to "low probability state of special design" and "normal state of normal design". Although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when it becomes "jackets A to D", it becomes easier for the ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and when it becomes "jackets E, F", during the jackpot It becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. When the lottery of the first special pattern results in a jackpot, one of the ``jackpots A to C'' is obtained, so there is a high possibility that the ``probability variable state of the special pattern'' and the ``time-saving state of the normal pattern'' after the completion of the jackpot. On the other hand, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, it will be one of "big wins D to F". Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the ratio of "jackpot D" is 5% when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. Therefore, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, there is a high probability (at a rate of 95%) that the "jackpot E, F" will occur. And there is a high possibility that it will be a “normal state of the normal pattern”. Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol is disadvantageous to the player compared to the lottery for the first special symbol.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters. The number of times is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates whether or not the special symbol is a big hit. (first pattern) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 7(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.7(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is configured to imitate numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery of the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is configured such that a jackpot is generated after the end of the variable display. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower one-fifth of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of pending balls, preview characters, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 0.5 seconds. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbols for a certain period of time (0.5 seconds or more), the player can determine whether or not the combination of the third symbols corresponds to a big hit (the lottery result of the special symbols is Whether it is a big hit or not) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big winning moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big winning.

Further, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the loss and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time. Furthermore, when there are both a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol and a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is given priority. executed.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. A situation in which no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) is rare. In most cases, when the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all because the player quits the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new ball entrance. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The number of held balls, which is the number of (held balls), is displayed by the number of held symbols representing each held ball.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 7B, a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, up to four reserved symbols displayed as black circles are displayed on the right side and the left side when viewed from the front. The reserved design displayed on the right side of the front view is the reserved design (first reserved design) corresponding to the lottery of the first special design, and the reserved design displayed on the right side of the front view corresponds to the lottery of the second special design. It is a reserved design (second reserved design). FIG. 7B shows a case where three first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank). there is

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols, the number of reserved balls is indicated by numbers in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery that is performed when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" are displayed as the normal symbol (second symbol). A variable display is performed in which the symbols are alternately lit. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“○” symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an actuated state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second ball inlet 640 is achieved. The number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times at maximum, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of balls that pass through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, as in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but is not limited to three times or less, or , 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. The first ball entrance 64 is provided with a pair of electric accessories 64a that can be opened and closed on the left and right sides respectively. In addition to the balls that flowed down from the left and right, the balls that flowed down from the left and right can also be entered. It should be noted that this first ball entrance 64 is a ball that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed ball) regardless of whether or not the electric accessory 64a is in an open state. The nail or the like is arranged so that the ball is easier to enter than the ball that flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (the ball that is hit to the right).

A second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is arranged on the upper right side of the first ball entrance 64 in a front view. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize winning openings from which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, so basically the direction of the ball flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 However, it is easier to enter the ball than the ball that has flowed down the channel provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the second ball entrance 640 in a front view, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific prize winning port 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 7 balls have been won). That is, the opening/closing door 65f1, which normally closes the specific winning opening 65a, is opened when the jackpot hits, allowing the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. The specific winning hole 65a and the second ball-entering hole 640 are positions where a ball (a ball hit to the right) that has flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 can enter (easy to enter). are placed in In other words, it is arranged at a position where the ball that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 cannot enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). Therefore, in order for the player to receive the payout of prize balls (gain a profit) during the big win, the player should hit the ball to the right.

Inside the variable winning device 65, there are provided a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which balls can pass (see FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b)). The ball that has flowed into the inside of the variable winning device 65 flows down through one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a variable probability switch 65e3 that gives a high probability state (variable probability state) of special symbols after a big hit by passing the ball. This special discharge channel 65e2 is in a passable state only in the first round of the jackpot. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can be easily entered into the specific winning opening 65a (opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 30 seconds at maximum) jackpot. (jackpots A to D) and jackpots (jackpots E, F) where it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific prize-winning port 65a (the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened only for 0.2 seconds at maximum). .

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is an opening forming member 65b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the variable winning device 65 is combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 65c. It has an arranged LED board 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The open/close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g protrude into the game. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i engaged with the switching member 65h, a rear surface cover body 65j arranged on the rear surface side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the rear surface of the rear surface cover body 65j. A flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the side to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 65j with screws. there is

FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 5(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5(b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5(b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which game balls can enter. The specific winning hole 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 5(b). A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6(b).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 5(b), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a has an open state in which a game ball can enter and a ball in which a game ball cannot enter by an opening/closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. Possible (difficult to enter) closed state and variable. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the open/close door 65f1, and the game balls can roll on the top of the open/close door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a.

With this configuration, when the opening/closing door 65f1 is open, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can efficiently enter the specific winning opening. You can win within 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 5(b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration for distributing game balls guided to the distributing flow path of the back cover body 65e to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 6(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a variable probability switch 65e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Ejected.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the game state after the jackpot game is a special symbol probability variable state ( Probability variation gaming state) is set. That is, the variable probability switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing the variable probability gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability game state or the probability variation game state.

In this way, the game state set after the big win game is varied according to the downflow route of the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a during the big win game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the big win game. . It should be noted that the operation of the switching member 65h is linked to the first round of the jackpot. At the same time as the end of the first round, the switching member 65h operates to the position where the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed. Also, the time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 0.2 seconds at the shortest. there is As described above, in the jackpots E and F, the maximum opening period of the opening and closing door 65f1 is 0.2 seconds. , the special discharge channel 65e2 is closed by the guide piece 65h2 before the ball flows into the special discharge channel 65e2. Therefore, when the jackpots E and F are reached, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot of 1.

Next, referring to FIG. 6(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the channel solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening of the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. A ball outlet switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided at the end of the normal outlet channel 65e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls entering the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, when trouble such as clogged balls occurs in the variable winning device 65, the trouble can be found early.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (in this embodiment, 11 balls per winning ball) as a privilege. prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so that a lottery can be executed as to whether or not to give the variable probability game state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting the variable probability game state separately from the variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. A substantially semicircular sorting member 660 is provided on the upper right side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front. The distribution member 660 is provided with receiving portions on the left and right thereof that can receive the balls flowing down from above. The distribution member 660 can be arranged in two ways, one in which the right receiving portion is directly below the channel provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and the other in which the left receiving portion is directly below the channel. It can take a street arrangement. FIG. 2 illustrates an arrangement in which the right receiving portion is directly below the channel.

In a state in which the receiving portion on the right side is positioned directly below the flow path, if the ball flowing down the flow path is received by the receiving portion on the right side, the distribution member 660 will be displaced by the weight of the ball. Rotation in the clockwise direction results in an arrangement in which the left receiving portion is directly below the channel. In addition, since the right receiving portion is inclined in the lower right direction in front view due to the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination and flows down in the lower right direction of the distribution member 660 . The ball that has flowed down in the lower right direction of the distribution member 660 rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 along the flow path. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 65f1 is set to the open state, the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a.

In a state where the left receiving portion is positioned directly under the flow path, if the ball flowing down the flow path is received by the left receiving portion, the distribution member 660 will be displaced by the weight of the ball. Rotation in the counterclockwise direction results in an arrangement in which the right receiving portion is directly below the channel. In addition, since the left receiving portion is inclined in the lower left direction in front view due to the rotation, the ball rolls along the inclination and flows down in the lower left direction of the distribution member 660 . The balls that have flowed down in the lower left direction of the sorting member 660 flow down along the flow path toward the second ball entrance 640 , and about 80% of them enter the second ball entrance 640 .

As described above, in the first embodiment, a ball hit to the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (a ball hit to the right) is directed toward the variable winning device 65 by the distribution member 660. and the direction of the second entrance 640 alternately. Therefore, in the special game state (jackpot), if the ball is hit to the right in order to enter the specific winning hole 65a and win the prize ball, the ball will enter the second ball inlet 640 during the big win. Enter the ball in large numbers. As a result, in most cases, at the end of the big hit, the number of held balls of the second special symbol accumulates up to the value (4 pieces).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type (jackpot E, F) in which the ball is difficult to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 has a high probability (95%). It is determined. Also, in both the big wins E and F, the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in each round is extremely short (0.2 seconds), and it is difficult to enter the ball during the big win. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, there is a high probability (95%) that almost no prize balls can be obtained, and the game state after the big win is also disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the lottery for the second special symbol is an unfavorable lottery and that he/she wants to execute only the lottery for the first special symbol as much as possible.

However, as described above, if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a in the big win and hits to the right in order to win the prize ball, the ball also enters the second ball entering hole 640. After the end, the lottery for the second special symbol held during the big win is executed. Therefore, after the big win, novel game characteristics can be realized in which the game is played hoping that the special pattern lottery will not be a big win until the reserved balls corresponding to the second special pattern lottery run out. When all the reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol are out of line as expected by the player, only the lottery of the first special symbol can be performed by hitting to the left. The game can be continued without reducing the number of balls held until a jackpot (jackpots A to C) of a type relatively advantageous to the player is achieved.

Further, in the first embodiment, when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one prize ball is awarded. When a right-handed ball is hit, one out of two balls is distributed in the direction of the second ball entrance 640 by the distribution member 660, so all the balls distributed in the direction of the second ball entrance 640 are the second balls. Even if the ball enters the ball entrance 640, only half of the ball hit by right-handed hitting is paid out as prize balls. Therefore, since the number of balls held is likely to decrease when hitting right, the advantage of hitting right can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right during normal times (states other than during the jackpot).

As described above, in the first embodiment, if the second special symbol lottery that is executed after the big win ends is a big hit, it is disadvantageous for the player, and all the reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are lost. , it is advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the lottery result of the predetermined number of times (four times) after the big win is finished, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not win any winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. - 特許庁The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, the characteristic effects of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment executed in the main display area Dm will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, when hitting to the right while aiming at the specific winning hole 65a during the big win, the ball enters the second ball hole 640, and the second special symbol is displayed before the big win ends. It is configured so that the number of pending balls reaches the upper limit. If the lottery of the second special pattern results in a big hit, it is disadvantageous to the player, so the player plays the game hoping that the lottery will be lost during the execution of the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special pattern. In the first embodiment, whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol jackpot was included in the retained balls until all the variable displays based on the second special symbol retained balls were completed. It is configured to execute a production that suggests.

First, with reference to FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), the effect executed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a big win. As shown in FIG. 8(a), during the jackpot, an effect in which the adventurer 811 explores a cave is displayed. Also, on the upper left side of the third pattern display device 81, a display area HR1 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape is displayed. The current round number is displayed in this display area HR1. In the example of FIG. 8(a), characters "1 round" are displayed, indicating that the current round is the first round.

On the upper right side of the third pattern display device 81, a display area HR2 having a substantially oblong rectangular shape is displayed. In this display area HR2, the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the specific prize winning opening 65a is displayed. In the example of FIG. 8(a), the characters "GET 0022" are displayed in the display area HR2, and 22 prize balls have been paid out (that is, 2 balls have been identified since the start of the jackpot). This indicates that the ball has entered the winning hole 65a).

Further, four display areas HR3a to HR3d are displayed on the right side of the third pattern display device 81. As shown in FIG. Although the details will be described later, these four display areas HR3a to HR3d show the degree of expectation of the second special symbol held ball increased by the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 during the big win. An image is displayed. In addition, as described above, there is a high possibility that the player will not win the lottery of the second special symbols. An image showing the degree of expectation is displayed.

Note that FIG. 8(a) illustrates a state in which there is no held ball corresponding to the lottery for the second special symbol, and each display area HR3a to HR3d is marked with a "?" An image is displayed.

FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected during a big win. As shown in FIG. 8(b), when a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected during the jackpot, an effect is executed in which the adventurer 811 discovers the treasure box 812. FIG. This treasure box contains a key 813, and the aspect of the key 813 suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the second special symbol reserved based on the entering ball will be lost. The more luxurious the mode of the key 813, the higher the expectation of loss, and the poorer the mode, the lower the expectation of loss (the risk of winning the lottery for the second special symbol increases).

FIG. 8(b) exemplifies a case where a key 813 in a normal mode is displayed. When an effect in which the adventurer 811 discovers the key 813 is performed, the key having the same mode as the discovered mode is displayed above the display area where "?" is displayed among the display areas HR3a to HR3d. Displayed sequentially from the area. The example of FIG. 8B illustrates a case where the image of the key 813 is displayed in the display area HR3a among the display areas where the symbol "?" is displayed. In this way, by displaying the state of each key 813 discovered by the adventurer 811 in the display areas HR3a to HR3d, a variable display based on each held ball to be executed after the current big win is completed. The degree of expectation of the player can be confirmed at any timing. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the main display area Dm is provided with dedicated display areas HR3a to HR3d for displaying the expectation level of the second special symbol holding ball. It is not necessary to provide an area. For example, the second special symbol pending symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds may be displayed in the form of the key discovered by the adventurer 811 .

FIG. 9(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the ending effect after all the rounds of big wins have ended. In the first embodiment, from the ending period of the jackpot to the elapse of the fluctuation time of all the variable displays based on the second special symbol reserved ball, the jackpot E, the second special symbol reserved ball. An effect is executed to inform the player whether F exists or not. In other words, it suggests whether or not the game state remains "variable state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols" even after all variable display based on the second special symbol reserved ball is completed. A production for the purpose is executed. Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, the game state which is advantageous to the player, "variable state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols" are referred to as "variable mode", which is disadvantageous to the player. The "low probability state of special symbols" and the "normal state of normal symbols", which are game states, are referred to as "normal mode".

As shown in FIG. 9(a), when the jackpot ending period starts, an effect in which the adventurer 811 discovers the door 814 is performed. Moreover, above the image of the door 814, a display area HR4 having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape is formed. In this display area HR4, characters such as "Door breakthrough mode start! Break through four doors!" are displayed. According to these display contents, it is advantageous for the player if the four doors can be opened using the four keys (displayed in the display areas HR3a to HR3d) collected during the big win (holding balls of the second special symbol It is possible to make the player easily understand that the variable probability mode continues even after consuming. In addition, in the upper left display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, an image of a leftward arrow and characters "left shot" are displayed. These displays allow the player to hit the ball to the left (to hit the ball to the left channel of the variable display unit 80).

It should be noted that the reason why the left-handed hitting is notified with the start of the ending period is to suppress the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol after the end of the big hit. That is, during the ending period, the player hits right and shoots the ball, after the big win (and after the fluctuation based on the held ball of the second special symbol is started), the second ball entrance 640 Prevents the number of times of lottery of the second special pattern from increasing after the end of the big win (the lottery of the second special pattern is executed beyond the 4 times reserved during the big win). This is to (suppress). As described above, even if the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, prize balls can hardly be obtained during the big win, and the game state after the big win becomes a normal mode disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the more the number of lotteries for the second special symbol increases, the more disadvantageous it becomes for the player. Therefore, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent the player from continuing to hit to the right even after the end of the big win and the ball newly entering the second ball entrance 640, the game is started during the ending period. It is configured to inform the player of left-handed hitting. As a result, the lottery of the second special pattern executed after the big win can be limited to the held ball of the second special pattern held during the big win, so that the player is not excessively disadvantaged. can be prevented (suppressed).

When the big win (special game state) ends with the end of the ending period, an effect of breaking through the door 814 using the keys collected during the big win is executed, as shown in FIG. 9(b). FIG. 9B illustrates a case where the adventurer 811 successfully breaks through the door 814 using the key displayed in the display area HR3a. If the breakthrough is successful, an image of the opened door 814 is displayed, and the characters "Breakthrough!!" are displayed in the display area HR4. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the remaining three doors are broken through, the player will be in an advantageous state (changed probability mode).

The effect of breaking through the door 814 is basically executed in conjunction with the variable display based on the held ball of the second special symbol. That is, the effect in which the adventurer 811 uses the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR3a) to open (break through) the first door is based on the first reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the variable display based on the second held ball. Similarly, when the adventurer 811 uses the second key to open the second door, after the variable display based on the second reserved ball of the second special symbol starts, the third It is executed in the period until the variable display based on the held ball is started. The effect in which the adventurer 811 uses the third key to open the third door is to start the variable display based on the third reserved ball of the second special symbol, and then to the fourth reserved ball. It is executed in the period until the start of the variable display based on The effect of opening the fourth door using the fourth key is executed in the variable time of the variable display based on the fourth ball held in the second special symbol. In addition, these are operations in the case of a lottery result corresponding to the second special pattern reserved ball being lost, and if the second special pattern lottery results in a big win, the door is broken through during the period of the big win. The production is performed one or more times.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, in the first embodiment, it is difficult to perceive whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is achieved from the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 in the variable winning device 65. As such, when the second special symbol comes off, it is configured so that the loss accompanied by the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 (so-called small hit) is determined. Then, the opening period (0.2 seconds) of the opening and closing door 65f1 in the case of a small win and the opening period of the opening and closing door 65f1 in each round in the case of the big hits E and F in the lottery of the second special pattern. are matching. Furthermore, when the jackpots E and F are obtained, the interval period between rounds is made to coincide with the variation time (1 second) when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery. By configuring in this way, even if the big hit E or the big hit F occurs during the execution of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, the opening period or the opening interval of the open/close door 65f1 is already in the middle of the big hit. It can be difficult to determine whether or not As a result, attention can be drawn to the end of a series of effects (door breaking mode effects) that are executed with the start of the ending period.

FIG. 10(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when breaking through the fourth door fails in the door breaking mode effect. That is, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when either the jackpot E or F is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 10(a), if the adventurer 811 fails to break through the door, the characters "Failed..." are displayed in the display area HR4, and the An effect is executed in which the key is broken. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the variable probability mode has ended (either of the jackpots E or F has been won).

FIG. 10(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the fourth door is successfully broken through in the door breaking mode effect. In this case, an image in which the fourth door is opened is displayed, and at the same time, the characters "Success!" These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the game can be played in an advantageous variable probability mode.

Thus, in the first embodiment, the above-described door breakthrough is performed over the period from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the variable display based on the second special symbol held ball increased during the jackpot. It is set as the structure which performs mode production. Due to this door breakthrough mode production, all the variable display based on the second special symbol holding ball is removed, and whether it is possible to play in the variable mode, the big hits E and F are included in the holding ball, and in the variable mode It is possible to suggest to the player whether the player will fall to the normal mode without performing the lottery for the first special symbol. By adopting a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over the ending period and a plurality of variable displays after the big win, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, depending on whether or not the number of doors corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be broken through, the game after all the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is completed. Although it was configured to notify whether or not the state is the variable probability mode, the presentation mode is not limited to this. Ultimately, one of two types of results (success or failure, victory or defeat, confirmation or failure, etc.) may be notified. A configuration may be adopted in which the variable probability mode is notified if the player wins the battle against the enemy.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the correspondence relationship between the change over time of the presentation mode during execution of the door breaking mode effect and the change over time of the state of the specific prize winning opening 65a (opening/closing state of the opening/closing door 65f1) will be described. FIG. 11(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship when the variable probability mode is notified (that is, when the lottery result corresponds to all the held balls of the second special symbol being out). On the other hand, FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence when the normal mode is announced (that is, when either the jackpot E or F is included in the hold).

As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when it is notified that the mode has shifted to the variable probability mode (when the lottery for the second special symbol is all lost), the start screen of the door breakthrough mode production ( (see FIG. 9A) is displayed. This start screen continues to be displayed during the ending period of one second, and when the ending period ends and the jackpot ends, the start screen ends. When the jackpot ends and the variable display based on the first reserved ball (reserved 1) of the second special pattern is started in the first symbol display device 37, the first door is broken through (Fig. 9 (b) )) is started. This effect continues until the start timing of variation based on the second reserved ball (reserved 2). In addition, as described above, when the lottery for the second special symbol is out, it is almost a small hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11(a), when the variation display for 1 second based on Hold 1 ends, a small win is started and the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In accordance with this opening period, it is displayed that the door has been successfully broken through.

Thereafter, similarly, the variable display for 1 second and the opening of the opening/closing door 65f1 for 0.2 seconds based on the small win are repeated. At the same time, an effect of breaking through the second to fourth doors is executed in the third pattern display device 81, and it is notified (displayed) that the doors have been broken through during each opening period of the opening/closing door 65f1. . In this way, the result of whether or not the door can be broken through is notified during the opening period of the small win after the fluctuation time has passed, so that the door can be broken through during the fluctuation period of 1 second. You can raise your expectations for In addition, since it is possible to draw the player's attention during the opening period of the small winning, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether or not the opening pattern of the open/close door 65f1 is already a winning. can.

In the production of breaking through the fourth door, after the adventurer 811 breaks through the door 814 and the transition to the variable probability mode is notified (after the fourth small hit is completed), the display mode dedicated to the variable probability mode (not shown) is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the mode has been changed to the variable probability mode.

FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing a case where the second reserved ball of the second special symbol is a jackpot F. FIG. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode effect, even if it is notified that it has shifted to the normal mode (when either the big hit E or F is included in the second special symbol reserved ball), the ending period Door breakthrough mode production is started with the start of. When the big win is finished and the variable display of the special pattern based on the first reserved ball is started in the first pattern display device 37, the effect of trying to break through the first door is executed, and the opening period of the small win. Adventurer 811 breaks through the first door at the same time.

When the variable display of the special symbol based on the second reserved ball is started in the first symbol display device 37, the effect of trying to break through the second door is executed. At this time, the variation display for 1 second is executed based on the second held ball, and the jackpot F is started after 1 second has elapsed. When the jackpot F is reached and the first round is started, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In accordance with this opening period, it is reported that the adventurer 811 has successfully broken through the door. Then, with the start of the interval period after the end of the first round, the effect of trying to break through the third door is executed, and the opening period of the second round after the interval period of 1 second (0.2 seconds), it is announced that the third door has been successfully breached.

In addition, when the interval period after the end of the second round starts, the effect of trying to break through the fourth door is executed, and the opening period of the third round (0. 2 seconds), it is reported that the fourth door could not be broken through (see FIG. 10(a)).

After the failure to break through the door is reported, a result display (not shown) showing the total number of prize balls paid out in the variable probability mode is executed until the end of the big win. When the jackpot ends, the display mode dedicated to the normal mode is set.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the variable display is sequentially performed based on the held ball of the second special symbol after the big win, the state of the open/close door 65f1 changes over time when the variable display and the small win are repeated. The change (see FIG. 11(a)) and the change over time of the state of the opening/closing door 65f1 when the second special symbol holding ball includes the jackpot E or F (see FIG. 11(b)) are at least It is configured to match until the end of the door breakthrough mode production. That is, the opening period of the open/close door 65f1 in each round of the big wins E and F is configured to be 0.2 seconds, which is the same period as the opening period of the small win. Also, the length of the interval period after the 1st to 4th rounds of the jackpots E and F are completed is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, even if any of the 1st to 4th reserved balls of the second special pattern is a lottery result corresponding to the big hit E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode performance is completed. The operation of the door 65f1 can be made the same as when the variable probability mode is notified (see FIG. 11(a)). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 whether or not the jackpot E or F has been achieved, so that the attention can be paid to the door breaking mode effect until the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, in FIG. 11 (b), even when the second ball on hold becomes a big hit F (falls to normal mode), it breaks through up to the third door and fails at the fourth door. However, it is also possible to simply execute an effect of failing to break through the door when either the big hit E or F changes while the reserved ball of the second special symbol is digested.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 12, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery of the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 17) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 17, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first winning type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol are used. , a variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 36). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the ball mouth 64. Also, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in time with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 36).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

As described above, the value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 13(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first winning random number counter When the value of C1 coincides with the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers to be a big win included in each type is set differently (see FIG. 13(b)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number for a special symbol jackpot, that is, If it is a random number that causes the special symbol to come off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol comes off.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. display mode.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that become a big hit with special symbols when the probability of special symbols is low. It is stored in a table (see FIG. 13(b)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 4 among the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/100". Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the random number value (counter value) that becomes a big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. On the other hand, the random numbers other than the random numbers that are the big hits correspond to failures. As described above, the deviation of the special symbol includes a small hit. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the probability of the special symbol is low, the number of random numbers that are lost in the lottery for the first special symbol is 396 "4 to 399". On the other hand, the random numbers that are lost in the lottery of the second special symbol are 37 of "3 to 40", and the random numbers that become small hits in the lottery of the second special symbol are "41 to 399". 359 pieces.

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 40 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot. See FIG. 13(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 40 out of 400 random numbers. In addition, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the number of random numbers that are lost in the lottery for the first special symbol is 360 of "40 to 399". On the other hand, only "40" is stipulated as the random number that will be lost in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random number that will be a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 359 of "41 to 399". individual is specified.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the jackpot type is "jackpot A" ( 16 rounds definite variable jackpot). In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "10 to 89" is "jackpot B" (5 round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "90 to 99" is "jackpot C". (2 rounds probability variable jackpot).

On the other hand, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" (16 round probability variable jackpot) when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". In addition, when the value is "5 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot E" (7 round normal jackpot), and when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot F". (6 rounds normal jackpot).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that six types of winning (jackpots A to F) are determined by the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. It is In addition, as described above, in the first embodiment, when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big hit, the variable probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit. In other words, even if the jackpot type is determined, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the variable probability state. The above-mentioned "variable probability big win" means a type of jackpot in which the ball easily passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win, and "normal jackpot" means a type of jackpot in which the ball is difficult to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win. means

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment). It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low-probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. table for is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 15(a)) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided in

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. As shown in FIG. 15(a), this variation pattern table 202d is a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and is a special figure 1 per table 202d1 (see FIG. 15(b)). And, at least a special figure 1 off (normal) table 202d2 (see FIG. 15(c)) and a special figure 1 off (probability variation) table 202d3 (see FIG. 15(d)) are defined. In addition, as a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the second special symbol, a table 202d4 for special figures 2 (4 variations or less) (see FIG. 16 (a)) and a special figure 2 (5 variations or more ) for table 202d5 (see FIG. 16(b)), special figure 2 off (4 fluctuations or less) table 202d6 (see FIG. 16(c)), special figure 2 off (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d7 (figure 16(d)) are defined at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 15(b), the table 202d1 for special figure 1 will be described. FIG. 15(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 per table 202d1. The special figure 1 winning table 202d1 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win. As variation patterns of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. Each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1 in the special figure 1 per table 202d1.

Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "51 to 179" is associated with various super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Select from table 202d1 for special figure 1.

FIG. 15(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for failure. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is set to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is out. Set (front-to-back out-of-reach reach, front-to-back out-of-reach reach).

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, either a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long failure (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for the outlier reach, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" Normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range, "150 to 197" out of range Super reach (60 seconds), but "198" is set to a different special reach (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 15(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol. In this deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from that in the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , and within the range of “90 to 99”, the out-of-reach reach (front-rear out-of-reach reach, reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach) is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the fluctuation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of the probability change, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d4 for special figure 2 per (4 variations or less). This table 202d4 for special figure 2 winning (4 variations or less) is selected when the number of variations of the special symbol is 4 times or less after the end of the big win and when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win. It is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time). As shown in FIG. 16(a), after the big hit, if the number of times the special symbols fluctuate is 4 or less, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation time is 1 second per short fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern. selected.

FIG. 16(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d5 for special figure 2 per (5 variations or more). This table 202d5 for special figure 2 win (5 variations or more) is selected when the number of variations of the special symbol is 5 times or more after the end of the big win and when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win. It is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time). As shown in FIG. 16(b), after the big hit, if the number of times the special symbols fluctuate is 5 times or more, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern is a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds. selected.

FIG. 16(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d6 for special figure 2 loss (4 fluctuations or less). The table 202d6 for this special figure 2 loss (4 fluctuations or less) is a case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 4 times or less after the end of the big hit, and when the second special symbol is lost by lottery (including a small win). It is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when it becomes. As shown in FIG. 16(c), after the big hit, if the number of times the special symbols fluctuate is 4 or less, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, as a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time is one second short fluctuation. selected.

FIG. 16(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table 202d7 for special figure 2 loss (5 fluctuations or more). This table 202d7 for special figure 2 winning (5 variations or more) is a case where the number of variations of special symbols is 5 times or more after the end of the big win, and it is lost (including small winning) in the lottery of special symbols. It is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected in the case. As shown in FIG. 16(b), after the big hit, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 times or more, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation time is 300 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. selected.

Thus, in the first embodiment, after the big hit, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbol is 4 times or less, the lottery result is out (small hit ) or a jackpot, the variation time is always set to 1 second. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate whether or not the big win E or F has occurred from the fluctuation time during the execution of the variable display based on the held ball of the second special symbol after the big win. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the fluctuation time whether or not the game state after all the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the probability fluctuation mode. Therefore, the player who wants to know whether or not the variable probability mode is set can be made to play the game while paying more attention to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect, so that the desire to participate in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, after the big hit, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the number of times of execution of the variable display of the special symbol is 5 times or more, regardless of the lottery result, as a variable time The configuration is such that 300 seconds is always set. As a result, if the player hits to the right in a state other than the big win, a special pattern lottery is executed only once every 300 seconds (5 minutes) at the shortest (very poor game efficiency). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from hitting the right hand in a state other than during the jackpot. If the player hits to the right in a state other than the jackpot, especially during the probability variable mode, only the second special symbol lottery is executed, so either jackpot E or F is disadvantageous to the player when the jackpot is won. It is very likely that In other words, there is a high possibility that prize balls will hardly be obtained, and that the game will fall to the normal mode after the big win, resulting in a big win. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player will be dissatisfied with the game because the game is changed to the disadvantageous normal mode without being able to fully enjoy the game in the advantageous variable probability mode.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, since the game efficiency is deteriorated when hitting to the right in a state other than a big win, it is possible to suppress the player from hitting to the right in a state other than a big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the game in the variable probability mode more enjoyable.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203c.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 14(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the win is a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for when the probability of normal patterns is low (period in which normal patterns are normal), and when the probability of winning normal patterns is high than that of low probability (normal patterns) It is divided into two types, one for a time-saving state) and the other, and the number of random numbers to be a jackpot included in each is set differently (see FIG. 14(b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that are normal symbol wins, and the values are "5 to 28". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. In , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second As a symbol), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 64a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern high probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. At , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is illuminated and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 64a is opened "1 second x 3 times". be done. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the variable display time becomes very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 64a is opened only "1 second x 3 times" when the normal symbols are won. The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 32).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I/O buffer. and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 36) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 35) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 13(a). FIG. 13(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the above fixed value data. ing.

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 13(b)) is a data table that defines the correspondence between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the lottery result. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 13 (b)), and it is determined that the first special symbol is out. "4 to 399" is specified as the range of judgment values to be determined (see 202a2 in FIG. 13(b)). In addition, "3 to 40" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 13(b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol "41 to 399" is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 13(b)). In addition, in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variable state), "0 to 39" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a jackpot (see 202a4 in FIG. 13(b)), and the first special symbol is out. "40 to 399" is specified as the range of judgment values to be judged (see 202a5 in FIG. 13(b)). In addition, "40" is defined as a determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a5 in FIG. 13(b)), and "41 to 399" is determined as a determination value to be determined as a small hit of the second special symbol. ” is defined (see 202a6 in FIG. 13(b)). When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the starting prize matches one of the determination values corresponding to the big winning defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 13(b)) , is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14 (a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the first hit type counter C2 is determined. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 per one is selected.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is defined in association with "jackpot A". (See 202b1 in FIG. 14(a)). This "jackpot A" is a jackpot with 16 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot A", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot A" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot A" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds elapse or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, the player can almost certainly win the maximum number of balls (7 balls) into the specific winning hole 65a before 30 seconds elapse just by continuing to hit to the right in each round. , a large amount of prize balls can be obtained when the jackpot A is reached. In addition, if the player continues hitting to the right in one round in which the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) can pass, the ball will almost certainly pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, after the end of "big hit A", it will almost certainly be in the variable probability mode. Thus, "jackpot A" has the largest number of rounds, and since the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable mode, it is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 89" in association with "jackpot B" (see 202b2 in Fig. 14(a)). . This "jackpot B" is a jackpot with five rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 80 counter values are "jackpot B", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B" is determined. ratio is 80% (80/100). Like the "jackpot A", the "jackpot B" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds elapse or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, similarly to the jackpot A, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Also, in the first round of the big hit, the ball almost certainly passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so after the "big hit B" ends, the variable probability mode is almost guaranteed. In this way, since "jackpot B" has fewer rounds than "jackpot A" (and "jackpot D" to be described later), fewer prize balls can be obtained than "jackpot A" (and "jackpot D"). However, many prize balls can be paid out. In addition, since the game state after the big win is the variable probability mode, the game state is shifted to a game state that is advantageous to the player after the big win, similar to the "big win A".

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "jackpot C" (see 202b3 in Fig. 14(a)). . This "jackpot C" is a jackpot with two rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot C", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). Like the "jackpot A" and the "jackpot B", the "jackpot C" is opened in each round of the jackpot until the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 30 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, similarly to the "jackpot A" and the "jackpot B", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Also, in the first round of the big hit, the ball almost certainly passes through the probability variable switch 65e3, so after the "big hit C" ends, the probability variable mode is almost guaranteed. In this way, since "jackpot C" has the smallest number of rounds, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is reduced, but the number of prize balls that can be won can be paid out, so that the player's possession of balls can be increased. In addition, since the game state after the big win is the probability variable mode, the game state shifts to a game state that is advantageous to the player after the big win, similar to the "big win A" and "big win B".

In this way, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, prize balls for 2 rounds to 16 rounds can be paid out, and the game state after the big win is almost certainly changed to the probability variable mode. It is advantageous for the player regardless of the type of jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 4" for the second special symbol in association with "jackpot D". (See 202b4 in FIG. 14(a)). This "jackpot D" is a jackpot with 16 rounds. Among 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of counter values that become "jackpot D" is 5, so when the second special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot D" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). Since this "jackpot D" has the same operation as the "jackpot A", it becomes the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, like the "jackpot A".

For the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 49" in association with "jackpot E" (see 202b5 in Fig. 14(a)). . This "jackpot E" is a jackpot with 7 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 45 counter values become the "jackpot E", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the "jackpot E" is determined. ratio is 45% (45/100). This "jackpot E" is opened in each round of the jackpot until the door 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds or until seven balls are won. Therefore, it becomes difficult to even enter one ball into the specific winning hole 65a in each round, so that almost no prize balls can be obtained. Also, since it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning hole 65a in the first round, there is almost no possibility that the ball will pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 of the special discharge channel 65e2 in the first round. Therefore, the game state after the "jackpot E" is finished becomes the "normal mode" which is almost disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the "jackpot E" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, because it is very likely that the game will shift to the disadvantageous "normal mode" after the jackpot, in addition to which prize balls can hardly be obtained.

For the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with "jackpot F" (see 202b6 in Fig. 14(a)). . This "jackpot F" is a jackpot with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values become the "jackpot F", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot F" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100). Like the "jackpot E", the "jackpot F" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 0.2 seconds elapse or until 7 balls are won. Therefore, as with the "jackpot E", almost no prize balls are obtained, and the possibility of shifting to the disadvantageous "normal mode" after the jackpot is extremely high, which is a disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

In this way, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, there is a high probability (at a rate of 95%) that it is almost impossible to acquire prize balls, and the game state after the big win is almost certainly in the normal mode. , F, which is highly likely to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can expect that the second special symbol reserved balls, which are increased by the balls entering the second ball entrance 640 during the big win, will all come off. It is possible to provide novel playability.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14(b)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see 202c1 in FIG. 14(b)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c3 in FIG. 14(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to. , It is determined whether or not it is a normal pattern hit.

The variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the explanation of the fluctuation type counter CS1, so the detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second Special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, variable probability flag 203g, variable probability setting flag 203h, variable probability passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, remaining ball timer flag 203k, remaining ball timer 203m, variable probability effective flag 203n , probability variable effective timer 203o, emission number counter 203p, variable time counter 203q, big hit medium flag 203r, small hit medium flag 203s, round end flag 203t, and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area ( (see FIG. 17), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a special symbol lottery or the like is determined.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In this second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4. More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (first holding area to second holding area). 4 areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). In other words, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

If the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty, so it is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, a shift process is performed to shift the prize winning data stored in other reserve areas into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 28).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 28, FIG. 30 S405 reference). The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the variable display of the variable display withheld by the main controller 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is suspended from the actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number of pitches, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of pending pitches command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a special symbol (first symbol) variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero. is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 28). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. See S704 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 32).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding variable display in normal symbols M) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 33: No ).

The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state (variable probability mode) of the special symbols. ), and if the variable probability flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (normal mode) of special symbols. In addition, as described above, in the variable probability mode, the time saving state of normal symbols. Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203g is ON, it indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The variable probability flag 203g has an initial value set to OFF, and when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win, it is set to ON at the end of the big win (see S1302 in FIG. 39). Further, the variable probability flag 203g is reset to OFF when a jackpot game is started (see S219 in FIG. 28).

This probability variation flag 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 29). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S213), the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if it is on, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per random number table 202a for high probability, while the probability variation If the flag 203g is off, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the first winning random number table 202a for low probability.

In addition, the probability variation flag 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 32). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203g is referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if the probability variation flag 203g is on, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. On the other hand (see S609 in FIG. 32), if the variable probability flag 203g is off, a lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the second winning random number table 202c for low probability (see S610 in FIG. 32). In addition, in the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203g is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a when the normal symbol is hit (S614 of FIG. 32, S620).

The variable probability setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6(a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes through this variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1416 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203h is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1304 in FIG. 39). The variable probability setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

It should be noted that, when the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h may be formally set to ON for recovery. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off, depending on whether the variable probability passage counter 203i, which will be described later, is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203h to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 in one round (in this embodiment, one round of the jackpot) during the jackpot game. Incidentally, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203i and the ejection number counter 203p, which will be described later. This variable probability passing counter 203i is updated by being incremented by one when passing the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1415 in FIG. 40). Also, after executing the process of whether or not the number of winning game balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged game balls, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1511 in FIG. 41). It should be noted that this probability variable passing counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable prize winning device 65, the value is updated by adding one (S1403 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winnings of variable winning device 65 (value of winning number counter 203j) and the number of ejected items (total value of ejection number counter 203p and probability variable passage counter 203i) are the same. After it is determined whether they match, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 41). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball sweeping period after one round has ended and the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, it means that it is the period of the ball sweeping. While the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203m, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 41). The remaining ball timer 203m is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and is used for determining whether the time required for the balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. is a counter.

The remaining ball timer 203m is the time required for the winning game balls to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds. It is set as the upper limit of 203m. When the remaining ball timer 203m reaches the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. (S1507 in FIG. 41). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加In addition, it is possible to suppress the illegality of illegally leaving the ball in the variable winning device 65 and flowing down the ball to the special discharge passage 65e2 at the timing of the first round of the big win E or the big win F.例文帳に追加

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

The variable probability effective flag 203n is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 after the flow passage solenoid 65k is set to be off. When this variable probability effective flag 203n is set to ON, based on the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, the gaming ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6 (a)) It shows that it is less than the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3.

The variable probability valid timer 203o is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203n is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203o, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. In this embodiment, it takes 0.3 seconds for the game ball entering the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203o is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, after the switching member 65h closes the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, or the piano from below the variable probability switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a game ball with a wire or the like to pass it, or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that the game ball has passed by radio waves or the like.

The ejection number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the ball ejection port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6(a)) in one round. The discharge number counter 203p is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the discharge number (S1511 in FIG. 41).

The variable time counter 203q is a counter for counting variable time. A counter value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202d is set in the variation time counter 203q (see S311 in FIG. 29). Also, this variable time counter 203q is decremented by one (see S214 in FIG. 28) during the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), and whether the variable time has elapsed is determined based on the value of this variable time counter 203q. be discriminated.

The jackpot flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the big winning flag 203r is on, it means that the big winning is going on, and if it is off, it means that the big winning is not going on. The jackpot middle flag 203r is set to ON when a jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1103 in FIG. 37) when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery. Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1304 in FIG. 39). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), this big-hit flag 203r is referenced to determine whether or not the big-hit is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 28).

The flag 203s during the small hit is a flag indicating whether or not it is during the small hit. If the small hit medium flag 203s is on, it means that the small hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the small hit is not in progress. The small hit medium flag 203r becomes a small hit in the special symbol lottery, and is set to ON when the small hit starts (see S1603 in FIG. 42). Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S1610 in FIG. 42). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), this small winning middle flag 203s is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the small winning is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 28).

The round end flag 203t is a flag indicating whether or not it is the ball-striking period after the end of the big winning round. If the round end flag 203t is ON, it indicates that the ball-spitting period has ended after the round ends, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the ball-spitting period has ended.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Thus, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags. By performing control with reference to these flags and counters, it is possible to realize the novel game property of performing the game in the hope that the second special symbol held ball will be missed.

Next, referring to FIG. 19, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with roughly three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, the door break-through mode shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, and the variable probability mode shown in the lower part of FIG. 19 are provided.

As described above, the normal mode indicates the low probability state of the special symbols and the normal state of the normal symbols. This is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In addition, as described above, the probability variable mode indicates the probability variable state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the probability of the big hit is high, and the ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64. The game state becomes the most advantageous for the player.

In addition, the door breakthrough mode indicates a state in which there is a second special symbol reserved ball acquired during the execution of the probability variable jackpot (jackpots A to D), and the lottery based on the second special pattern reserved balls is all lost. Then, it is a state indicating that the game can be played in an advantageous variable probability mode. This door breakthrough mode is the same state as the probability variable mode except that there is a second special symbol reserved ball. In other words, there is a high probability (1/10) that a special symbol lottery will result in a big win, and the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 . The probability that all the four second special symbol holding balls accumulated during the jackpot are lost is about 65.6% (9/10 to the power of 4), so the door breakthrough mode is 65.6%. It can be said that the constant variable mode can be expected.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 19, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another mode only in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the first special symbol jackpot (jackpot A to C) is achieved, and if the ball passes the variable probability switch 65e3 in the first round, the door breakthrough mode is entered after the jackpot ends. . As described above, in the jackpots A to C, the ball almost passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 simply by hitting to the right in one round. In addition, if the ball does not pass the variable probability switch 65e3 in the first round (did not win V) due to the player not hitting the ball, etc., the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal mode again. be done.

As shown in the middle part of FIG. 19, the door breakthrough mode is shifted to another mode not only when a big hit is made but also when all the variable displays based on the second special symbol holding balls are finished. That is, as shown in FIG. 19, when the variable display based on all the second special symbol holding balls is completed in the door breakthrough mode, the game shifts to the probability variable mode.

In addition, when the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 5% of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern, the ball almost passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so the door breakthrough mode is performed again after the jackpot. transition to In addition, if the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the first round (does not win V) because the player did not hit the ball, etc., the game state after the big win is set to the normal mode. . On the other hand, in the case of winning either the jackpot E or the jackpot F, which is determined at a rate of 95% of the jackpot hits in the lottery of the second special symbols, the ball is sent to the specific winning opening 65a in the first round. Since it is difficult to enter the ball, the ball almost never passes through the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19, after the big wins E and F are finished, the mode shifts to the normal mode.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 19, the variable probability mode is shifted to another mode only when a big hit is achieved. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big hit (jackets A to C), and if the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the first round, the door breakthrough mode is entered after the big hit. Transition. All of the jackpots A to C are jackpot types that allow the ball to easily pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, so after the jackpot ends, the mode shifts to the door breakthrough mode. In addition, if the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the first round (does not win V) because the player did not hit the ball, etc., the game state after the big win is set to the normal mode. .

Thus, in the first embodiment, by going back and forth between the three types of modes, the lottery of the second special symbol executed based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the big win is all lost. , it is possible to realize a characteristic game property that a game can be played in an advantageous variable probability mode. In a general pachinko machine, it is a favorable phenomenon for a player to win a jackpot again within the reserve after the end of the jackpot (so-called continuous play within the reserve). It is possible to allow the player to play an advantage in anticipation that a series of villas will not occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property different from that of a general pachinko machine, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253. FIG.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable display effects ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine more detailed variations. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 20(b). FIG. 20(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 has a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a dependent fluctuation time counter. 223f, breakthrough effect counter 223g, game state storage area 223h, and other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area consisting of one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. there is Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. From, various information obtained when the lottery of the special pattern corresponding to the starting winning prize is carried out (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, the predicted various information is , is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol reserved in the main control device 110, and the second special The symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the second special symbol reserved ball number The value of the counter 203e cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter At 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is added to the number of pending balls of the variable display, or when the main controller 110 When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. A number of balls command is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4208 in FIG. 46). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. Therefore, while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. send to.

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 and the second special The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number of reserved ball counter 223c is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c correspond to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. 203e, its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. can be changed while synchronizing with Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 46), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S4802 in FIG. 52). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 45), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 46), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S4807 in FIG. 52). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The sub-variation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the variation time of the special symbol variation display. When the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is set in the slave variation time counter 223f.

The breakthrough effect counter 223g is a counter that indicates the number of remaining doors to be broken through before shifting to the variable probability mode in the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Based on the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the door breakthrough mode effect has ended.

The game state storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The game state storage area 223h is updated every time a state command output every time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is received from the main controller 110 (see S4210 in FIG. 46). The game state storage area 223h is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not it is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the bit of the second lower order bit indicates whether or not it is the probability variable state of special symbols. Therefore, the lower two bits are "00B" in the "normal mode", while the lower two bits are "11B" in the "door breaking mode" and the "variable probability mode". The MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223h.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and a time-lapse timer that measures the presentation time. are doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 34).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 53) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the command pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 26) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time with the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 53).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 22 . FIG. 22 shows a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to perform the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 22(c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, there is a power-on variation image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" as shown in FIG. 22(c). A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol big hit", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts playing the game, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. 22(b) and 22(c), the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 23A and 23B are explanatory diagrams for explaining four kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 23B shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 23, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back face type and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back face image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sand beach stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23(b), only image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, an image between position a and position b, is resident on the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage". It is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the video RAM 235 .

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' (or the range shown in FIGS. 23(a) to (b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of fluctuation decides to change the stage, the resident video RAM 235 can store the characters on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. can be displayed. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 21). As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns (see FIG. 7) with numerals "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "adventurer" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are stored in the character design area 235e, so that the characters can be displayed. When the control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the control device 114 changes the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data previously resident in the . As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of the back surface is to display either back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or to display a back surface different from back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of the back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 24) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect images become more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 25). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 25).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 53). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 64(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 55(b)). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 55(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 64A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 64(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 65) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 26) describing image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 55(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 61) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 26), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 55(b)). )) is executed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 61). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation in accordance with the completion of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 65). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 65). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 66).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 55B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 43. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 399, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the starting winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a big hit or a small hit (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether one of the flag 203r during the big hit and the flag 203s during the small hit is ON. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the special symbol is neither a big hit nor a small hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display based on the second special symbol lottery) is obtained. (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the value of the first special symbol The holding count N1 of variable display based on lottery is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209).

In the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the counter 203d (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S211). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same technique as the processing of S207 (S209), and the processing proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is performed (S213), and this process is terminated. The details of this special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q is updated by subtracting 1 (S214), and the fluctuation time counter after updating. Based on the value of 203q, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter 203q updated in the process of S214 has become zero. The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. Then, one of the jackpots A to F is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached, , the green LED is lit, and when the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S216 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S219), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. do. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S219, when the main processing (see FIG. 36) jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed, branch to S1101: Yes, and the opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

In the process of S218, if the result of the lottery this time is the loss of the special symbol (S218: No), the processes of S219 and S220 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S221.

The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by voice during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (whether or not a special symbol big win) or a "special symbol omission" is made (determination of success or failure), and the first symbol is selected. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. , and each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, the variable probability flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols (S302). In the process of S302, if the variable probability flag 203g is ON, it is determined that the special symbol is in the variable probability state, and if the variable probability flag 203g is OFF, it is determined as the low probability state (not the variable probability state) of the special symbol. In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability time Based on the big hit random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 13(b)). As described above, 40 random numbers from "0 to 39" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number that becomes the winning. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variable state (it is in the special symbol low probability state) (S302: No), the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first winning random number table for low probability (see FIG. 13(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, "0 to 39"), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big winning is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14(a)) to determine what the jackpot type is. do. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is a jackpot A (16 rounds probability variable jackpot). If it is in the range of "10 to 89", it is determined to be a jackpot B (5 rounds of variable probability), and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot of C (2 rounds of variable probability). Determine (see FIG. 14(a)). On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special pattern results in a big win, if the value of the first win type counter C2 is in the range of ``0 to 4'', it is determined to be a big win D (16 round probability variable big win), If it is in the range of "5 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot E (7 rounds normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot F (6 rounds normal jackpot) ( See FIG. 14(a)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to F). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpots A to F) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( time).

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (including a small win) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, the third symbol display device As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front-rear out-of-reach, non-front-rear out-of-reach, or complete out-of-order.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", set the complete out. , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", set the complete out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", set the reach other than front and rear out, and set the reach to "98". , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 time).

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 ends, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter 203q (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 36). When the processing of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. , when there is a start winning a prize, processing for executing the holding processing of the values indicated by the various counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In addition, in the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) (S407). In this process as well, similarly to the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

Then, there is no winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), and if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S411, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is It stores in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and proceeds to the processing of S413. In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

In the process of S413, a pre-reading process is executed for pre-reading the win/loss from the various counter values acquired based on the start winning (S413), and this process ends. Details of this prefetch processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S413). In this look-ahead processing (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has been detected in the current starting winning processing (see FIG. 30). (S501), if no new ball is detected (S501: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that a new ball has been detected (S501: Yes), then whether the number of held balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit (that is, 4). It is determined whether or not (S502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the number of pending balls is less than the upper limit (S502: No), whether the timing to start the variable display based on the entering ball is the probability variable state of the special symbol (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the variable probability state is obtained according to the current gaming state and the result of the read-ahead of the reserved balls that were reserved before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the big hit is not included in the held balls, the current game state and the timing of starting the variable display based on the entered ball detected this time match, so the current game state is the probability variable state. It is determined that In addition, when a jackpot is included in the reserved balls, there is a possibility that the game state is changed according to the type of the jackpot. Specifically, when the variable probability jackpot is reserved, the state is shifted to the variable probability state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is reserved, the state is shifted to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variation display based on the hit ball detected this time is in the probability variation state.

In the processing of S503, if it is determined that the start time of the variation based on the entrance detected this time is the probability variable state of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance where the entrance was detected and the high probability time A lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start time is a low probability state of special symbols (S503: No), based on the type of entrance where the ball is detected and the first random number table for low probability. Then, the lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

In the process of S506 that is executed after the process of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of entrance where the current ball is detected and the lottery result obtained in the process of S504 or S505. (S506), this processing ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 36), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the prize winning information command, the audio ramp control device 113 stores the type of entrance notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the prize winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal design variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27), and the variation display of the normal design (second design) performed in the second design display device 83, the first entrance This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessary 64a attached to 64, and the like.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is normal symbol time saving state (S608). In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the period during which the special symbols are in the probability variable state and the period during which the normal symbols are in the time-saving state coincide. Therefore, in the process of S608, if the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is ON, it is determined that it is a time-saving state of normal symbols, and if it is OFF, it is determined that it is a normal state of normal symbols.

In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607, the random number table per normal symbol for high probability time Based on this, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S609). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 14(b)).

In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low A lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired based on the normal symbol winning random number table for the probability time (S610). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of 0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is normal It is determined that the pattern is out of line (see FIG. 14(b)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol win (S611), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S611: Yes), The display mode at the time of winning is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the time saving state of the normal design (whether the probability variation flag 203g is ON) (S614), and if it is the time saving state of the normal design (S614: Yes), the variable display in the second design display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a normal symbol time saving state (that is, the probability variation flag 203g is off) (S614: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S616), this process is terminated.

Also, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (S617). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the processing of S615 or S616 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the processing of S617, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S617: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 62) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S619). If the lottery result of this time is a normal pattern hit (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal pattern is in a time saving state (that is, whether the probability variation flag 203g is ON) (S620), and the time saving state If not (S620: No), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S621), and the process is executed. The process proceeds to S523. On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the normal pattern is in the time saving mode (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 are set to "1 second x 2 times” (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

In the process of S623, the opening time and the number of times of opening determined in the process of S621 or S622 are set (S623), and the process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the processing of S623, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) is executed next, the electric accessory 64a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or S622 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

The ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 1 is added to the value (M) of 203f (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S914.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1015 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S914). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S915, S916).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S915, S916) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S915, S916) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the process of S916 ends, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. After the process of S910 is completed, the variable probability flag 203g is read (S911), and the state command is set based on the state of the variable probability flag 203g. This state command is a command for notifying the current game state to the sound lamp control device 113 . After the process of S912 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1009 and S1010 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 27). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) or the start winning process (see FIG. 30). Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific prize-winning port 65a is opened for each jackpot round, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1004 is finished, next, in the case of a small winning state, a small winning control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1005). In the small winning control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened at the start of the small winning, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has passed during the open period of the small winning or whether the ball has won a specified number of prizes. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the small winning control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this small winning control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1005 ends, next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 64a is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 64a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) ends, the first symbol display device The variable display being executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 29). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32), the second symbol display device 83 , the variable display is started. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the normal symbol (second symbol) of "O" and the symbol of "X" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or S513 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), the time until the predetermined time, that is, until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values (both 399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 34 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the initial setting processing (see S901 in FIG. 35) , the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36). is a process for opening or closing the

In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot will start. In the processing of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1102). The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect. After the process of S1102, the jackpot medium flag 203r is set to ON (S1103), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1001, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1004, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1104: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is during the special symbol jackpot (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105), and if it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes ), a jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot action setting process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1105, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1107). Specifically, when a special game state (all rounds of big wins) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times ends, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1107: Yes), the ending command is set (S1108), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1107: No), next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1109). That is, it is determined whether it is time to end the ending effect. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (S1109: Yes), next, the big win end process for setting the game state after the end of the big win is executed (S1110), and this process ends. do. Details of the jackpot ending process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1109, when it is determined that the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) is not reached (S1109: No), the winning process for performing the process corresponding to the winning to the specific winning hole 65a is executed (S1111). . Details of the winning process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the winning process (S1111) ends, an abnormality process is executed to determine whether the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was discharged normally (S1112), and this process ends. The details of this abnormality processing (S1112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1106). This jackpot action setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning hole 65a according to the number of rounds.

When the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 38) is started, first, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1201), and then it is determined whether it is time to start one round (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S1202: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1202 that the current round is not the first round, the process of S1203 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1204. In the process of S1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1204), and the process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets the display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third pattern display device 81 (see S4404 in FIG. 48). Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.

By executing this jackpot action setting process (see FIG. 38), it is possible to open the specific prize winning opening 65a in each round of jackpot, and to set the special discharge channel 65e2 to be passable in the first round. can. As a result, in the big hits A to D, the ball almost certainly passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 just by hitting the right hand in the first round, so after the end of the big hit, the variable probability mode (variable state of special symbols and , Normal pattern time saving state) can be shifted to. Also, in the case of the big hits E and F, although the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON in the first round, as described above, the opening period of the opening and closing door 65f1 is extremely short (0.2 seconds), Since it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during one round, the possibility of the ball passing through the variable probability switch 65e3 is almost zero. Therefore, when either of the jackpots E or F is reached, the normal mode can be set after the jackpot ends. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol, in which one of the types of jackpots A to C is determined in the case of a big win, is a lottery advantageous to the player, and when a big win occurs, the probability is high (95%). A lottery for the second special symbol, in which either the jackpot E or F is determined by the ratio), can be a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S1110). This jackpot end process (S1110) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1301). In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203h is ON (S1301: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big hit, so the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON. The state after the jackpot is set to the variable probability mode (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the variable probability setting flag 203h is off (S1301: No), the process of S1302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1303. Since the variable probability flag 203g is reset to off at the start of the big hit (see S219 in FIG. 28), the variable probability flag 203g is turned off after the big hit by skipping the processing of S1302. That is, the normal mode is set after the end of the jackpot.

In the process of S1303, a state command is set based on the state of the probability variation flag 203g (S1303). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the game state storage area 223h according to the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Then, both the flag 203r during the big hit and the variable probability setting flag 203h are set to OFF (S1304), and the process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 39), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S1401). Here, the round effective period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S1401, if it is not the round effective period (S1401: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that the current round valid period (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1402), If winning is detected (S1402: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1403), and a winning command indicating that a winning to the specific winning port 65a is detected is set. (S1404), the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if winning to the specific winning hole 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the processes of S1403 and S1404 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1405.

In the processing of S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1405). On the other hand, in the process of S1405, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406). (S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. In the processing of S1406, if the current jackpot is a jackpot A to D, it is determined that the round time has passed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, and if the jackpots are E or F, the round starts. It is determined that the round time has passed when 0.2 seconds have passed since.

In the process of S1407, closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and a closing command indicating that closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning port 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S1409). (Probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to OFF (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, in the processing of S1409, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is the closing due to the completion of a round other than the first round (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is turned on is not set, the process of S1410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1411.

In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the variable probability effective flag 203n, and the round end flag 203t are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. Further, when it is determined in the process of S1405 that the value of the winning prize number counter is 6 or less (S1405: No), and in the process of S1406 it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1406: No), S1407 ∼S1411 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1412.

In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag 203t is ON (S1412), and if the round end flag 203t is OFF (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag 203t is ON in the process of S1412 (S1412: Yes), then it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203n is ON (S1416). In the processing of S1416, if the variable probability effective flag 203n is off (S1416: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probability variable effective flag 203n is ON (S1416: No), add 1 to the value of the probability variable effective timer 203o (S1417), then determine whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203o is the upper limit value ( S1418). Then, if the value of the variable probability valid timer 203o is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1413, and the variable probability switch 65e3 is monitored to update the variable probability setting flag 203h. Thereby, if the variable probability effective timer 203o is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, so the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time for hitting the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being imparted by illegally passing the ball through the variable probability switch 65e3.

On the other hand, if the value of the probability variable effective timer 203o is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203n and the round end flag 203t are set to OFF (S1419), and the value of the probability variable effective timer 203o is reset (S1420 ), the process ends.

Also, in the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1413), and if the ball has not passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1413: No), the process proceeds to S1414. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passage counter 203i (S1414), the variable probability setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1413), and this processing exit.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormality process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was discharged normally. This process is for

In the abnormality process (S1112), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S1501). On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1502).

In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203p (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203k is ON (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203k is off (S1504: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203k is ON (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is updated by adding 1 (S1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), then the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the probability variable passage counter 203i and the value of the discharge number counter 203p) wins. It is determined whether the number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

In the processing of S1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally entering the ball into the special discharge flow path 65e2 and passing through the variable probability switch 54e3.

On the other hand, in the process of S1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203k is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203m is reset (S1510). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203p, and the variable probability passing counter 203i are reset (S1511), and the process ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 41), the occurrence of a problem such as ball clogging occurring inside the variable prize winning device 65 and the ball entering the specific prize winning port 65a not being discharged normally. Early detection and notification are possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the small winning control process (S1005) will be described. As described above, this small winning control process is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the case of the small winning state.

In this small hit control process (see FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit (S1601). An opening command indicating the opening of the hit is set (S1602), the small hit medium flag 203s is set to ON (S1603), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S1601: No), then it is determined whether it is during the small hit (S1604), and if it is determined that it is not during the small hit (S1604 : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1604, if it is determined that the small winning is in progress (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a based on the small winning ( S1605), if it is time to start the opening operation (S1605: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (opening of the opening/closing door 65f1) is set (S1606), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the opening operation (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period (S1607), and if it is the start timing of the ending period (S1607: Yes), set an ending command indicating that the small winning ending period has started (S1608), and terminate this process.

Also, in the process of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1607: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S1609), and if it is the end timing of the small hit (S1609: Yes), set the small hit medium flag 203s to OFF (S1610), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1609: No), the small win middle winning process for determining the end of the open period of the small hit is executed (S1611). The details of this small hit medium winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the small hit medium winning process (S1611) is completed, an abnormal process is executed to determine whether the number of balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a matches the number of discharged balls (S1612), and this process ends. do. Since this abnormal process (S1612) is the same process as the abnormal process (see FIG. 41) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37), details thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the small winning middle winning process (S1611) for determining the end of the small winning opening period will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the small winning medium winning process (S1611). In the small hit middle winning process (S1611), first, it is determined whether or not it is during the round valid period of the small hit (S1701), and if it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S1701: No), this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning of the ball into the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1702), and the winning of the ball is detected. If so (S1702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j (S1703), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1702 that the winning for the specific winning hole 65a is not detected (S1702: No), the process of S1703 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1704.

In the process of S1704, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704). It is determined whether or not (S1705). In the process of S1705, when it is determined that the round time has not passed (S1705: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the opening period of the small hit. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1704 that the value of the prize number counter 203j is 7 or more (S1704: Yes), and if it is determined in the process of S1705 that the round time has elapsed (S1705: Yes) , means that the end condition of the opening period of the small win is established, so that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1706), and the process is terminated.

It should be noted that it is almost impossible to win seven or more balls into the specific winning opening 65a during the round time of 0.2 seconds, which is the small winning round time. After the winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 second, the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 52. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 44, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. 45) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 45), it executes power-off processing in S4116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4116. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, in a specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written by the process of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S1504 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1616 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the process is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

In the process of S4002, if the power-off processing flag is ON (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of S4116, It is started when the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

In the process of S4005, if it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data ( S4006), and the process proceeds to S4008. By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. . An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 45). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is executed. This is after a power failure has occurred, and the process is started in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial values of the RAM 223 are set (S4010). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

After the processing of S4010, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 analyzes the notification contents of the state command set in the start-up processing (see FIG. 31) (S4011), and according to the analysis result, the game state storage area 223h data is updated (S4012). As a result, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time the power is turned on. After the process of S4012, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example, and the process of S4008 is performed via the processes from S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processing of S4010 to S4013 is executed, and the process proceeds to the main processing.

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed because S4102 to S4110 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4111 and the variable display setting processing in S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4112 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4102 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol pending ball number counter 223c is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command is set for the display control device 114.例文帳に追加By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S4107 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S4110 is completed, the processing proceeds to S4111. In the process of S4111, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S4111). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . In the processing of S4113, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S4115), and the power is turned off. Processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. This process is for

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S4201). In the process of S4201, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command is extracted (S4203), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4204). When the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4204, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4207). . Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received pending ball number command, that is, the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 The value of (the number of times of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1), or the value of the second special design reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding the variable display based on the second special design N2) is extracted, and this is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4208). In addition, in the processing of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the updated second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is set. . After the process of S4208 ends, this process ends.

Here, the pending ball number command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), or when a lottery for special symbols is performed. Since it is transmitted, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol The value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of S4208 is executed, the values of the updated first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are displayed for notification to the display control device 114. Number commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S4207, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from main controller 110 (S4209). When it is determined that the state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223h is updated according to the received command (S4210). That is, when the variable probability mode is notified based on the information corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command (whether the variable probability state), the lower two bits of the gaming state storage area 223h are set to "11B". On the other hand, when the normal mode is notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223h are set to "00B". Thereby, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S4211). In the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning information command processing for performing control according to the prefetch result of the new start winning notified by the winning information command is executed. (S4212), and the process ends. The details of this winning information command process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then whether or not a command related to the jackpot (opening command, round number command, or ending command) has been received (S4213). Then, when it is determined that a command related to the jackpot has been received (S4213: Yes), a jackpot-related process for executing control corresponding to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S4214). End the process. The details of this jackpot related process (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4213, when it is determined that the command related to the big win has not been received (S4213: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4215), and this processing ends. In the processing of S4215, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, details of the winning information command process (S4212) described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the winning information command process (S4212).

In the winning information command process (see FIG. 47), first, the information notified by the received winning command (the type of entrance where the new starting winning was detected and the information indicating the lottery result) is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S4301). When the processing of S4301 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the information notified by the winning information command this time is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302). In the processing of S4302, when it is determined that the information notified this time is not the winning information of the second special symbol (the winning information of the first special symbol) (S4302: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information of this time is the winning information of the second special symbol (S4302: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpots A to D are currently being executed (S4303), and the jackpot If it is determined that any of A to D is being executed (S4303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the ending period is in progress (S4304). selects the aspect of the key 813 in the presentation of discovering the key 813 (see FIG. 8(b)) (S4305). In the process of S4305, if the current winning information is winning information corresponding to the lottery result of losing (minor win), the rate of selecting the luxurious mode key 813 increases, and the winning information of this time is the big wins E, F. If the prize-winning information corresponds to , the ratio of selecting the poor-looking key 813 increases. When the processing of S4305 is completed, an effect of discovering the key 813 of the mode selected in the processing of S4305 is set (S4306), and this processing is completed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4303, if it is determined that the jackpots A to D are not being executed (S4303: No), and if it is determined that the ending period of the jackpots A to D is in progress in the processing of S4304 (S4304: Yes) , means that the starting winning for the second ball entrance 640 has been detected as a result of hitting right during the period when the player should hit left. A warning effect for notifying the person is executed (S4307), and the process ends. This warning effect (not shown) is more strongly left-handed to the player than the image of the characters "left-handed" and the left-pointing arrow displayed in the display area HR1 during execution of the door-breaking mode effect. is executed. Specifically, for example, the characters "left-handed" are displayed in a large size on the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the voice "please return to left-handed" is repeatedly played at maximum volume. be done. By executing this warning effect, it is possible to restrain (prevent) the player from hitting the right hand in a situation other than during the execution of the big wins A to D. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to hit to the right during the normal mode or the variable probability mode, and the continuous execution of the lottery of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous.

By executing this winning information command process, it is possible to appropriately set the aspect of the key 813 to be discovered during the big win based on the new winning information of the second special symbol. Therefore, during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, based on the state of the key 813, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation of the player to be in the probability variable mode, so that the player's game during the execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. can improve interest in

In addition, in the first embodiment, the selection ratio of the mode of the key 813 is variable depending on whether or not the winning information of the second special symbol newly notified by the winning information command is out (small hit). However, it is configured to select the mode of the key 813 based on not only the winning information based on the new winning information command but also the winning information of the second special symbol already stored in the winning information storage area 223a. good too. Specifically, for example, before the current winning information command is received, among the winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223a, there is winning information corresponding to either jackpot E or F. If it is included, regardless of the result of the lottery for the prize information of this time, the configuration may be such that the ratio of selecting the key 813 in a poor (tattered) manner is high. By configuring in this way, the more the keys 813 in the tattered state continue, the higher the possibility that the held ball of the second special symbol includes the big hits E and F. It can be estimated more accurately whether the jackpots E and F are included in the retained balls. Also, for example, when all of the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a before receiving the prize information command of this time and the prize information of this time are lost (minor win), the selection ratio is It is also possible to provide an aspect (for example, an aspect of the diamond key 813) that increases (or is selected only in this case). By configuring in this way, when the mode is displayed, it is possible to further heighten expectations for shifting to the variable probability mode.

In the first embodiment, when the winning information command corresponding to the second ball entrance 640 is received outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the warning effect is executed, but this is not the only option. isn't it. Even when a new ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected in a state where the number of held balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit value, a warning performance is executed outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D. may be configured. In particular, during the ending of the jackpots A to D, or during the execution of the first variable display, there is a very high possibility that the second special symbol holding balls are at the upper limit. In such a case, if the player hits right, a new starting prize will be generated for the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol may be executed five times or more after the big win. There is a possibility that the player may lose money. On the other hand, if a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected outside the execution period of the jackpots A to D, the player will lose money by setting a warning effect. can be suppressed (prevented).

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the jackpot-related processing (S4214) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this jackpot-related processing (S4214).

In jackpot-related processing, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S4401), and if an opening command has been received (S4401: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S4402). The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the big win. When the process of S4402 ends, the jackpot related process (see FIG. 48) ends. It should be noted that the opening command this time is a command corresponding to the opening of one of the big hits E, F, or small hits, and if the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed, the door breakthrough mode The performance continues as is. In this case, the opening command itself may not be output to the display control device 114, or the display control device 114 side may determine whether or not the door breaking mode effect is being executed, and select the effect mode. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the opening command has not been received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4403). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4403: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S4404), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number. (S4405). The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After the processing of S4405, this processing ends. As in the case where the opening command is received, when it is time to start a new round of the jackpots E and F during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the door breakthrough mode effect is continued as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4403 that the round number command has not been received (S4403: No), then it is determined whether or not the closing command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4406). If it is determined that a close command has been received (S4406: Yes), close command processing for performing control according to the situation in which the close command was received is executed (S4406), and this processing ends. The details of this close command processing (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in the process of S4405 that the closing command has not been received (S4405: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4407). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4407: Yes), ending command processing for performing control according to the ending command type and situation is executed (S4408), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the ending command has not been received (S4407: No), this process ends. By executing this jackpot-related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to jackpots.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, details of the closing command processing (S4406) described above will be described. In this closing command process (S4406), first, it is determined whether the type of the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots A to D (S4501), and if it is determined to be one of the jackpots A to D ( S4501: Yes), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is other than jackpots A to D (it is either jackpot E or F) (S4501: No), then the value of breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0. (that is, whether the door breakthrough mode effect (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is being executed), and the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed). ) (S4502: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4502: Yes), the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4503). , it is determined whether the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after the subtraction has become 0 (that is, whether it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect) (S4504). In the processing of S4504, if it is determined that the counter value after the subtraction is 1 or more (S4504: No), this processing is terminated as it is in order to continue the door breaking mode effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g after the subtraction has become 0 (S4504: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect, so the remaining period until the end of the jackpot is reached. The result display is set (S4505), and this processing ends. Incidentally, the result display indicates the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, such as the total number of prize balls paid out by repeating the big win and the variable probability mode, the number of big wins, and the like. By setting this result display, the player can easily grasp the number of times the player has won the jackpot, the number of winning balls, and the like, so that the player can have a sense of accomplishment.

Next, details of the ending command processing (S4408) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This ending command process (S4408) is, as described above, a process for performing control according to the jackpot type, game situation, etc., when an ending command is received.

In this ending command process, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is an ending command indicating the ending of the small hit (S4601), and if it is determined that it is the ending of the small hit (S4601: Yes), the small hit (S4602) to execute a small winning control process for performing control according to the timing to end, and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that it is not the ending of the small hit (S4601: No), the ending command of this time is output to notify that the ending machine of the big hit has started. Therefore, it is determined whether the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots A to D (S4603).

In the processing of S4603, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is not one of the jackpots A to D (S4603: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots A to D (S4603: Yes), the winning prize information of the second special symbol is read from the winning prize information storage area 223a (S4604), and the read winning prize It is determined whether or not a big win D is included in the lottery result of the second special symbol reserved balls indicated by the information. As described above, the jackpot D is the only one among the jackpots of the second special symbol that can obtain a large amount of prize balls, and is an advantageous jackpot type in which the probability variable mode is set almost after the jackpot.

In the process of S4605, when it is determined that the jackpot D is included in the hold (S4605: Yes), a door breakthrough mode in a special mode in which it is notified that the jackpot has been hit during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. An effect is set (S4606), and this processing ends. As described above, after the big hits A to D are finished, basically, it is advantageous for the player if all the held balls of the second special symbol come off. This is because if the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, it will be either a disadvantageous big win E or F with a high probability (95% ratio). However, when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, there is a case where the big win D is advantageous to the player with a low probability (5% ratio). In this case, a large amount of prize balls can be acquired, and the door-breaking mode effect is set again after the big win, which is more advantageous for the player than in the case of the big wins E and F. Therefore, in this case, by setting the door breaking mode effect of a special notification mode, the player can easily understand that the jackpot D has been achieved.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4605, if it is determined that the big hit D is not included in the second special symbol held ball (S4605: No), the value of the breaking effect counter 223g is set to 4 (S4607), Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit is included in the held ball of the second special symbol (S4608). In the processing of S4608, if it is determined that a jackpot is included, it means that either the jackpot E or F will occur during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and the mode will shift to the normal mode after the jackpot ends. Finally, the door breakthrough mode effect is set in such a manner that the fall to the normal mode is announced (the door breakthrough failure mode) (S4609), and this processing ends. It should be noted that the same presentation time of 5.8 seconds is set as the presentation time of the door breakthrough mode presentation regardless of whether or not a big win is included. This 5.8 seconds is the period from the start of the ending mechanism to the end of the small hit based on the 4th reserved ball when all the reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol are lost (small hit). period. That is, in order to make it difficult for the player to guess whether or not there is a big hit in the reserved balls from the performance time, the performance time of the door breakthrough mode performance is set to be the same time (4.8 seconds) regardless of the result. .

In the processing of S4608, when it is determined that the big hit is not included in the reserved balls (S4608: No), the door breakthrough mode effect is finally set to inform the transition to the variable probability mode (S4610 ), the process ends. By executing this ending command process (see FIG. 50), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the content of the second special symbol reserved ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the above-described small winning end processing (S4602) will be described. This small hit end time processing (S4602) is a process executed when it is determined that the received ending command is a small winning ending command in the ending command process (see FIG. 50).

As shown in FIG. 51, in the small hit end processing (see FIG. 51), first, whether the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is greater than 0 (that is, whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) or not. (S4701), and if the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 0 (S4701: No), it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed, and the process is terminated as it is. In addition, the case where the small win is made outside the execution period of the door breaking mode effect is the case where the player intentionally or negligently makes a right hit outside the execution period of the big wins A to D (the period during which the left hit should be made). be. In this case, since the warning effect is set by the processing of S4307 of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 47) at the time when the starting winning for the second ball entrance 640 is detected, the player has already returned to left-handed hitting. It is thought that there are Therefore, at the end of the small hit, control such as performing a warning effect again is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the warning effect being repeated despite the return to left-handed hitting.

In the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is 1 or more (S4701: Yes), then 1 is subtracted from the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S4702), and the counter value after the subtraction is 0. (S4703). If it is determined in the process of S4703 that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g has become 0 (S4703), the door breakthrough mode effect ends with a lottery result (small hit) (that is, all the door breakthrough mode effects Since it means that the variation is out), the effect mode indicating the entry into the probability variation mode is set (S4704), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4703, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough effect counter 223g is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S4703: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect. End the process.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4801). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4801: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S4806. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4802), and then S4803 of the command judgment process (see FIG. 46). In the process of , the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S4803).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S4804). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4805), and the process proceeds to S4806. In the process of S4805, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area.

In the processing of S4806, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S4806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4806: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S4806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S4807), and then the processing of S1706 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) , the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4808). Next, based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4808, a display stop type command is set (S4809), and this process ends. By receiving this stop type command for display, the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to stop and display the third pattern in the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display. be done.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 66. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 53) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 53) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 54, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 64(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 64A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 22 is drawn. Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 55B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 55B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure recovery. Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 55(a). FIG. 55(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 55(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 55(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V-interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and produce a performance image corresponding to that mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the next one-frame image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 26, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A to F, small hit, front and rear out reach, front and back reach other than front and rear out, complete out ) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402). The command types are analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 57(a). FIG. 57(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for the next display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third symbol display on the third symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 57(b). FIG. 57(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A to F, small hit, reach out, complete out) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55(b)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Finally, the stop pattern after the variable effect is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the command is displayed. If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58(a) is a flow chart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description is continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command process (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 58(b). FIG. 58(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is for executing the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 56, the description is continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. This back image change command process is for executing a process corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. .

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A and B is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image determination flag set in S7002 is used to determine the back face image discrimination flag. The type of the background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 for normal use or video RAM 236 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no back image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). Otherwise (S6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. 60(b). FIG. 60(b) is a flow chart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 57(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 57(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 61, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are specified. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or when it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 61, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and for each sprite, Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the fixed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81. , you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 55B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 64(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 64(b). FIG. 64B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 55B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 56 to 60) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 61 to 63) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 has A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 65) (see S7501: No in FIG. 64A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, referring to FIG. 65, normal image transfer setting processing (S7503), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Also, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is ON (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer process in this way, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process. When the received stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 26) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task process (S6304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination top address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 55(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the ball is hit to the left (a game method in which a ball is shot toward the flow path on the left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front), the ball is likely to enter the position. When the first ball entry hole 64 arranged in the right side of the game board 13 is hit to the right (a game method in which a ball is shot toward the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball. and a second ball entrance 640 arranged at a position where it is difficult for the ball to enter. If the lottery for the second special symbol, which is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, results in a big win, it will be disadvantageous to the player (almost no prize balls can be obtained during the big win). After the big win, there is a high possibility that the game will shift to a disadvantageous normal mode). It is configured to increase the possibility that it will be advantageous for players (a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in the big win and the transition to the advantageous probability variable mode after the big win). As a result, the player can be made to think that the lottery for the first special symbol, which is advantageous, is executed rather than the lottery for the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous.

In addition, in the right channel of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, there is provided a specific prize winning opening 65a that is opened during a big win and pays out a large number (11) of prize balls each time a ball enters the game. Similar to the second ball entry hole 640, this specific winning hole 65a allows a ball to enter (easy to enter) when hitting right, and does not allow a ball to enter (difficult to enter) when hitting left. It is set at a position where Therefore, it is necessary to hit the ball to the right in order to make the ball enter the specific winning hole 65a and obtain the prize ball during the jackpot. As described above, when hitting to the right, the ball also enters the second ball entrance 640, so after the big hit, the second special symbol reserved ball can be accumulated to the upper limit. For this reason, after the end of the big win, it is possible to create a state in which the lottery of the second special symbols, which are disadvantageous when the big win occurs, is continuously executed. A game can be played in the hope that all the reserved balls with patterns will come off (small hits). In other words, in a general pachinko machine, it is a favorable phenomenon for a player to win a jackpot again in the reserve after the end of the jackpot (so-called continuous play in the reserve), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, It is possible to allow the player to play an advantage in anticipation that the reservation will not occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property different from that of a general pachinko machine, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, each time the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases during the execution of jackpots A to D, the lottery result of the increased reserved balls is read in advance, and a mode according to the result of the read is performed. is configured to execute That is, it is configured to execute an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result will be lost (small win). More specifically, an effect is executed in which the adventurer 811 acquires the key 813 in a manner corresponding to the result of prefetching of the lottery result of the increased reserved balls. With this effect, the player can guess from the mode of the displayed key 813 whether or not to shift to the variable probability mode during the big win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from becoming a mere work to get the prize balls, so that the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

In addition, in the first embodiment, from the ending period of the big hits A to D until the fluctuation time of all the fluctuation display based on the second special symbol reserved ball passes, the second special symbol reserved ball An effect is executed for informing the player whether or not there are jackpots E and F in the game. That is, even after all the variable display based on the second special symbol reserved ball is finished, the effect for suggesting whether the game state remains the probability variable mode or falls to the normal mode is executed. . By adopting a configuration in which a series of effects are executed over the ending period and a plurality of variable displays after the big win, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, there is a high probability of a small hit. The open period of the specific winning opening 65a in the case of a small win and the open period of the opening/closing door 65f1 in each round of the big wins E and F are set to be the same (0.2 seconds). Furthermore, the length of the interval period after the end of the 1st to 4th rounds of the big hits E and F is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. . By configuring in this way, even if any of the 1st to 4th reserved balls of the second special pattern is a lottery result corresponding to the big hit E or F, opening and closing until the door breakthrough mode performance is completed. A series of opening and closing operations of the door 65f1 can be made the same as when the variable probability mode is notified (when all the second special symbol holding balls are small hits). That is, regardless of whether or not the big hits E and F are included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol, the operation of the open/close door 65f1 from the end of the big hit to the end of the door breakthrough mode effect. , closing for 1 second and opening for 0.2 seconds four times. Therefore, it is difficult to determine from the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 after the end of the big win whether the opening/closing operation is due to a succession of small wins or the opening/closing motion is due to a big win E or F. You can pay attention to the door breakthrough mode production until the end. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the specification may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. By configuring in this way, it is possible to win a big hit by the variable display of the first special symbol before the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous, so that during the execution of the door breakthrough mode performance. , It is possible to make the left hand hit more aggressively. In this case, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, a predetermined ratio (for example, 10% ratio) may be configured to determine a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the lottery of the first special symbol one or more times during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol, so that the chance of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is increased. can be formed.

In the first embodiment, the left-hand shot is notified from the start of the ending period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the final round of the jackpot, the number of balls remaining until the end of the final round is displayed, and the message "Left-handed ball with the remaining ○ balls" is displayed. , etc., so that the player can immediately switch to left-handed play after the condition for ending the final round is met. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 after the end of the big win.

In the first embodiment, in the case of the time saving state of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design is uniformly 3 seconds, and the opening period of the electric accessory 64a in the case of winning the normal design is 1 second. Although it is configured to be set twice, it is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the jackpot, only the fluctuation time of the first normal symbol may be set to a longer time (for example, 10 seconds) than the period until all the fluctuations based on the held balls of at least the second special symbol are completed. good. By constructing in this way, since the normal pattern does not win during execution of the door breakthrough mode performance, it becomes a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern from the opening time of the normal pattern, and the normal pattern is in a low probability state. It can be made difficult to determine whether the player has fallen or whether the time-saving state of the normal pattern is maintained. Therefore, the player can be made to pay more attention to the result of the door breaking mode effect.

In the first embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, it is configured such that it is almost a small hit, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the second special pattern is lost, instead of being configured to be simply lost, the variation time in the case of a big win is varied according to the number of times of variation after the big win, and a door breakthrough mode is provided. The period from the start of the production to the start of the second special symbol jackpot, and the period from the start of the door breakthrough mode production to the end of all the fluctuation displays corresponding to the second special symbol being missed four times. It is good also as a structure which matches with a period (period until shifting to probability variable mode). More specifically, when the first lottery of the second special pattern after the big hit results in a big hit, the fluctuation time is set to 4 seconds, and when the second lottery of the second special pattern results in a big hit. , 3 seconds is set as the variation time, and if the third lottery of the second special pattern results in a big hit, the variation time is set to 2 seconds, and the fourth lottery of the second special pattern results in a big hit. In this case, the variable time may be set to 1 second. By configuring in this way, the total variation time is 4 seconds (1 second x 4) when all the 4 second special symbol holding balls are lost, and in the case of a big hit on the way, It is possible to match the period (4 seconds) until the jackpot starts. Therefore, during the period of 4 seconds after the end of the jackpot, which is the execution period of the door breaking mode effect, even if the jackpot with the second special symbol is included in the reserved balls, the specific winning opening 65a is not opened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that it is known from the operation of the specific winning port 65a whether or not to shift to the variable probability mode before the door breakthrough mode effect ends. In addition, the period from the start of the door breakthrough mode production to the start of the second special symbol jackpot is a variable display corresponding to four second special symbol deviations after the start of the door breakthrough mode production. If the duration is equal to or longer than the period until the end of all, at least the jackpot will not start during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, when the second special symbol is simply a big hit, it may be configured to uniformly set a variation time equal to or greater than the total sum of the variation times of the variation display corresponding to the second special symbol being missed four times.

In the first embodiment, the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the 1st to 4th rounds in the jackpots E and F is the same (0.2 seconds) as the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in the small winnings. However, it may be set arbitrarily as long as the player cannot distinguish between the open period of the big win and the open period of the small win by feeling the difference. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is disadvantageous and the lottery for the first special symbol is advantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery for the second special symbol may be advantageous, and the lottery for the first special symbol may be advantageous. Then, when the lottery of the second special pattern is a big hit, the door breakthrough mode production is executed to succeed in breaking through the door, and when the lottery of the second special pattern is all lost, the breakthrough of the door fails. You may comprise so that the production|presentation to perform may be performed. As a result, it is possible to realize more easily understandable game characteristics such as a big win if the door is successfully broken through. Furthermore, in this case, the first ball entrance 64 may be removed and only the second ball entrance 640 may be provided. That is, it may be configured such that only the lottery for the second special symbol is executed.

In the first embodiment, it becomes difficult to know whether the lottery of the second special symbol resulted in a big win or a small win while the variation based on the held balls of the second special symbol after the big win is being executed. Although the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set as above, making it difficult to understand whether it is a big win or a small win is not limited to the variable display based on the second special symbol held ball. For example, even in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small win and an operation similar to the small win (the same operation or an operation indistinguishable from the small win by the player) are set. good.

In the first embodiment, the ending period of the jackpot is started to determine whether or not all the reserved balls of the second special symbol reserved during the jackpot will come off (small hit) (whether to shift to the variable probability mode). , until the lottery of all the second special symbols is completed, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in at least a part of the transition to the variable probability mode, it may be configured to notify the transition to the variable probability mode during the ending period. That is, at the start of the ending period, the lottery result of the second special symbol reserved ball is read in advance, and if it is determined that all the prediction results are out (small hit), the probability changes during the ending period of the big hit with a predetermined probability. It may be configured to notify the transition to the mode. By configuring in this way, the player can be notified more quickly of the transition to the variable probability mode, so that the player can be pleased. In addition, when notifying the transition to the variable probability mode during the ending period, it may be possible to execute an effect of breaking through four doors at once, or to execute an effect different from the normal door breakthrough mode effect. good too. Here, as an effect different from the normal door breakthrough mode effect, for example, a structure in which the theme song of the adventurer 811 is played may be executed, or the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be blacked out. After that, an effect may be executed in which the characters "variable probability mode confirmed" appear on the display screen. Furthermore, when the production that confirms the transition to the variable probability mode is executed during the ending period, the production is performed until the variation based on the second special symbol holding ball is completed (that is, until the variable probability mode is started) ) may be configured to continue execution. By configuring in this way, for the player who knew the transition to the definite variable mode early (during the ending period), in the remaining period until the transition to the definite variable mode, for the transition to the definite variable mode You can immerse yourself in the afterglow. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel satisfied.

Furthermore, before the ending period, it may be configured to notify the transition to the variable probability mode. More specifically, when the start winning corresponding to the fourth reserved ball of the second special symbol is detected and the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated based on the winning information command , It is determined whether all the winning information of the second special symbol is out (small hit). Then, when all of the winning information is lost (small win), it may be configured to execute an effect indicating a shift to the variable probability mode at that time. As an effect indicating the transition to the variable probability mode, for example, an effect in which the adventurer 811 discovers the key 813 in a special (premium) mode may be executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the music played inside is changed to a special (premium) one.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 84. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the variable probability switch 65e3 of the special discharge flow path 65e2 When the ball passes through, the game state after the big hit is set to the probability variable mode. In addition, as long as it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability mode and the jackpot are repeated unlimitedly.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the game state after the big win is predetermined for each type of big win. In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive times of the probability variable state of the special pattern, and when the upper limit is reached, even if the probability variable jackpot is won, the special pattern is set to the low probability state after the big win. there is

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, in order to prevent the player from hitting right during normal times (states other than during the jackpot), when the start winning for the second ball entrance 640 is detected during normal times, It was set as the structure which performs warning production.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the electric accessory 640b is provided for the second ball entrance 640, and the ball normally enters the second ball entrance 640 while being blocked by the electric accessory 640b. It is configured so that it is difficult to In addition, during the big win state, by controlling the electric accessory 640b provided accompanying the second ball entrance 640 to be easily opened, the second special It is configured so that the reserved balls of the pattern are accumulated to the upper limit number. By providing the electric accessory 640b in association with the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a provided in association with the first ball entrance 64 in the first embodiment is eliminated. .

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. There are some changes. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 67, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67 , in the second embodiment, a normal entrance (through gate) 67 is set in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 . A variable winning device 650 and a second ball entrance 640 are provided downstream of the normal ball entrance 67 . The variable prize winning device 650 is provided in place of the variable prize winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and serves as a prize winning port from which 13 prize balls are paid out each time a ball enters the specific prize winning port 650a of the variable prize winning device 650. It is configured. The specific prize winning port 650a is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can be entered (easy) and a closed state in which the ball cannot be entered (difficult), and is opened in each round of the jackpot. state.

As shown in FIG. 67, the second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be variable between a closed position that prevents the ball from entering the second ball inlet 640 and an open position that allows the ball to enter. A case of being variable is exemplified. Although the details will be described later, this electric accessory 640a is controlled so that the ball is easier to enter in the normal symbol low probability state than in the normal symbol high probability state (time saving state). will be More specifically, in the high probability state of the normal design, although the hit probability of the normal design is slightly higher than the low probability state of the normal design (199/240 → 200/240), the fluctuation time of the normal design is long. (3 seconds → 30 seconds), and the opening period of the electric accessory 640b in the case of winning the normal symbol becomes shorter (1 second × 2 times → 0.1 seconds × 1 time). Therefore, as a whole, it becomes more difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the high-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the probability variable mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the second special is disadvantageous. It is possible to suppress execution of lottery of symbols. In addition, during the big win set in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the balls are likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that the number of retained balls can be easily stored up to the upper limit during the big win. .

By attaching the electric accessory 640b to the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 in the first embodiment is eliminated. A winning device 655 for a special figure 1 small prize is provided below the first ball entrance 64 . In this special figure 1 small winning prize device 655, when the first special symbol lottery results in a small win, the special figure 1 small winning prize opening 655a is set in an open state, so that the ball enters the inside. It becomes possible to enter the ball. In the second embodiment, when the variable mode is entered, the probability of becoming a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is greatly increased (1/1000 → 989/1000), and the left hand is hit during the variable mode. The number of balls consumed in the case is equal to the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the special figure 1 small winning prize opening 655a after becoming a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol. is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the game efficiency when hitting to the left during the variable probability mode without using the electric accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, the distribution member 660 (see FIG. 2) provided in the first embodiment is deleted, and the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 downstream side is branched in approximately three directions. That is, the flow path toward the second ball entrance 640, the flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and the out port 66 without going to any of these (the second ball entrance 640, the specific winning hole 650a) It is branched into a flow path that flows down toward By configuring in this way, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to cause part of the ball hit toward the specific winning hole 650a by hitting to the right during the big win to enter the second ball entering hole 640. can. Therefore, it is possible to have a configuration in which the second special symbol reserved balls are accumulated up to the upper limit number during the big win. As a result, even in the second embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol, which is executed after the big win, is all lost.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the second embodiment, a flow path toward the second ball entrance 640, a flow path toward the variable winning device 650, and a flow path toward the out port 66 are formed by a plurality of nails. and Therefore, by adjusting the nail, the hall clerk can adjust the ratio of the balls distributed to the second ball entrance 640 and the ratio of the balls distributed to the specific prize winning port 650a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 with higher convenience can be realized because it can be adjusted in accordance with the management policy of the hall.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68-72. First, referring to FIG. 68(a), the first winning random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described.

FIG. 68(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the second embodiment, the range of possible values of the first winning type counter C1 is expanded to 0-999.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the low-probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 9" is defined as the range of judgment values for judging the jackpot (see 202a1 in FIG. 68(a)). It should be noted that, as in the first embodiment, the determination value for the big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, "10 ~ 998" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in Fig. 68 (a)), the determination value determined to be a small hit of the first special symbol "999" is defined as the range. In addition, "10, 11" is defined as the range of determination values determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 68(a)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. "12 to 999" is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 68(a)).

On the other hand, in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol, the range of the judgment value that becomes a big hit, the judgment value that becomes an outlier, and the range of the judgment value that becomes a small hit are all the first special symbols and the second It is common with 2 special designs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(a), "0 to 10" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a jackpot (see 202a4 in FIG. 68(a)), and determination to be determined to be out "11" is specified as a value (see 202a5 in FIG. 68(a)), and "12 to 999" is specified as a determination value for determining a small hit (see 202a6 in FIG. 68(a)).

Thus, in the second embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is made different between the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol. , the probability of getting a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is extremely high. As a result, the number of balls consumed when left-handed during the probability variable mode and the lottery of the first special pattern become a small hit, and the ball enters the special figure 1 small winning prize opening 655a. It is configured to be equal to the number of awarded balls to be paid out. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the game efficiency when hitting to the left during the variable probability mode without using the electric accessory 64a in the first embodiment.

The second special symbol small win and the first special symbol small win are configured so that the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is different, and the first special symbol small win has more prizes. It is configured to be able to acquire a ball. On the other hand, in the small win of the second special symbol, as in the first embodiment, the specific winning opening 650a is opened only for 0.2 seconds, making it difficult for the player to win the prize ball. Therefore, if the ball is hit to the right at normal times, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and even if a big win is made, a disadvantageous jackpot type is easily determined, and even if a small win is made, a prize ball is awarded. Since it can hardly be obtained, it is disadvantageous to the player compared to the case of hitting left. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right normally.

Next, with reference to FIG.68(b), the 1st winning classification selection table 202b in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG.68(b) is the figure which showed the defined content of the 1st winning classification selection table 202b in the 2nd Embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68(b), in the second embodiment, three types of jackpots A2 to C2 are provided as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, and jackpot D2 is provided as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. , E2 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 68(b), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in association with "jackpot A2". (See 202b1 in FIG. 68(b)). This "jackpot A2" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 16, and the definite variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot A2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A2" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot A2" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds elapse or until 6 balls are won. Therefore, the player can almost certainly win the maximum number of balls (6 balls) into the specific winning hole 650a before 30 seconds elapse just by continuing to hit to the right in each round. , a large amount of prize balls can be obtained when the jackpot A2 is reached.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 69" in association with "jackpot B2" (see 202b2 in Fig. 68(b)). . This "jackpot B2" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 7, and the definite variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 counter values are "jackpot B2". ratio is 60% (60/100). Like the "jackpot A2", the "jackpot B2" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds elapse or until six balls are won. Therefore, similarly to the "jackpot A2", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "jackpot C2" (see 202b3 in Fig. 68(b)). . This "jackpot C2" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 2, and the definite variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 30 counter values are the "jackpot C2", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C2" is determined. ratio is 30% (30/100). Like the "jackpot A2" and the "jackpot B2", this "jackpot C2" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds elapse or until six balls are won. . Therefore, similarly to the "jackpot A" and the "jackpot B", a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

In this way, when the lottery of the first special symbol wins a jackpot, prize balls for 2 rounds, 7 rounds, or 16 rounds can be paid out, and the game state after the jackpot ends is almost certainly changed to the probability variable mode. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player regardless of the type of jackpot. In addition, since 7 rounds and 16 rounds, which are relatively large numbers of rounds, are determined at a high rate (70%), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be obtained when the first special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to please the player when the big hit is played in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68(b), for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 4" in association with "big hit D2". (See 202b4 in FIG. 68(b)). This "jackpot D2" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 4, and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that becomes the "jackpot D2" is five, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot D2" is determined. ratio is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot D2" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 6 balls have been won in the specific prize winning opening 650a. Therefore, a relatively large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 68(b), for the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 99" in association with "big hit E2". (See 202b5 in FIG. 68(b)). This "jackpot E2" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 4, and the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 95 counter values are the "jackpot E2", so when the second special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot E2" is determined. ratio is 95% (95/100). Unlike other jackpot types, this "jackpot E2" is opened in each round of the jackpot until 0.2 seconds elapse or until 6 balls are won. Since it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning hole 650a for 0.2 seconds, the "jackpot E2" is a disadvantageous jackpot type in which no prize ball can be obtained. In addition, as described above, an upper limit (4 times) is provided for the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state of the special symbol, and when the jackpot occurs in a state where the upper limit number is reached, the game state after the jackpot ends regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to be in a disadvantageous normal mode. Therefore, if the "jackpot E" is reached, the player cannot win prize balls, and the number of times to shift to the normal mode is reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player.

Thus, in the second embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the prize ball cannot be obtained with a high probability (95% rate), and the remaining jackpot until the normal mode is set. It is configured to determine the jackpot type (jackpot E2) that reduces the number of times. That is, as in the first embodiment, if the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, the possibility of an unfavorable result for the player increases. Thus, a novel game property is realized in which a game can be played in the hope that the lottery result will be lost during the execution of the variable display based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the end of the big win. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, details of the second winning random number table 202c in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 69, in the normal state of the normal symbols, "5 to 203" are defined as the determination value for winning the normal symbols (see 202c1 in FIG. 69). In addition, in the high-probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as a determination value for winning normal symbols (see 202c3 in FIG. 69). That is, the normal state (low-probability state) of normal symbols and the high-probability state of normal symbols differ by only one in the number of determination values determined to be hits of normal symbols. As a result, even in the normal state of the normal design, the probability of winning can be almost the same as that in the high probability state of the normal design.

In addition, as described above, in the high probability state of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design is longer than the normal state of the normal design (3 seconds → 30 seconds), and the electric power when the normal design hits The opening period of the accessory 640b is shortened (1 second×2 times→0.1 second×1 time). Therefore, as a whole, it becomes more difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the high-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the probability variable mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the second special is disadvantageous. It is possible to suppress execution of lottery of symbols. As a result, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in a situation other than during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and excessive disadvantage to the player can be suppressed. In addition, during the big win set in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the balls are likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that the number of retained balls can be easily stored up to the upper limit during the big win. .

Next, referring to FIG. 70, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 70, the configuration of the RAM 202 in the second embodiment is the configuration of the RAM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) with the addition of a variable probability limit counter 203aa and a breakthrough mode counter 203ab. There is a difference. Also, the variable probability setting flag 203h, the variable probability passage counter 203i, the remaining ball timer flag 203k, the remaining ball timer 203m, the variable probability effective flag 203n, the variable probability effective timer 203o, and the discharge number counter 203p are omitted.

The variable probability limit counter 203aa is a counter that counts the remaining number of consecutive times of the variable probability state until the normal mode is set. This variable probability limit counter 203aa is set to 4, which is the maximum number of consecutive times of the variable probability state, when the normal mode is set as the state after the end of the jackpot (see S1314 in FIG. 78), and each time the variable probability jackpot ends , the value is decremented by 1 (see S1311 in FIG. 78). When the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa is updated to 0 at the end of the big win, the normal mode is set after the end of the big win.

Breakthrough mode counter 203ab is a counter that indicates the number of remaining fluctuations in door breakthrough mode production, and at the end of jackpot A2-D2, the number of held balls of the second special symbol is set as a counter value (see S1316 in FIG. 78). ), the value is decremented by 1 at the start of fluctuation and updated (see S324 in FIG. 73). In the second embodiment, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab (the remaining number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode effect ends) is included in the fluctuation pattern command and transmitted. When receiving the variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 reads the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab from the variation pattern command, and grasps the remaining number of variations until the door breakthrough mode effect is completed. In particular, since the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 does not back up the memory contents, if the power supply is interrupted during execution of the door breaking mode presentation, the progress of the door breaking mode presentation is controlled by the voice lamp after the power is restored. The device 113 side cannot grasp it.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the information corresponding to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command and output to the voice lamp control device 113, so that the door breakthrough mode effect is performed. Even if the power supply is interrupted during the execution and the memory contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are cleared, the door breaking mode presentation is executed by analyzing the first received variation pattern command after the power supply is restored. It is possible to grasp whether it is in progress and its progress. As a result, even when the power supply is cut off during execution of the door breakthrough mode presentation, the presentation can be restarted from the continuation of the door breakthrough mode presentation after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the performance from being changed before and after the power is cut off, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the contents of the performance.

Next, referring to FIG. 71, a state transition method according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the game moves between three types of states: the normal mode, the door breakthrough mode, and the variable probability mode. In the second embodiment, the contents of the door breakthrough mode are changed from those in the first embodiment. Specifically, the door breakthrough mode of the first embodiment described above is a variable state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and shows only the state where the second special symbol reserved ball exists. In addition to this, in the second embodiment, the special symbol low-probability state, the normal symbol normal state, and the state in which the second special symbol reserved ball is present are also set as the door breakthrough mode. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the door breakthrough mode in which the probability change state of the special pattern and the time saving state of the normal pattern are set is called the door breakthrough mode 1, the low probability state of the special pattern, and , The door breakthrough mode in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set is called the door breakthrough mode 2. Note that the door breakthrough mode 1 is illustrated on the middle left side of FIG. 71, and the door breakthrough mode 2 is illustrated on the middle left side of FIG.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 71, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another state only when a big win is achieved. Specifically, when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big hit, the mode is always shifted to the door breakthrough mode. As described above, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for a relatively long time (up to 30 seconds) in each round of the jackpot. When the ball is hit, a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 as well. As a result, when the big win ends, the second special symbol reserved balls are accumulated up to the upper limit value, and after the big win the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1) is entered.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 71 , in the door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough modes 1 and 2), basically the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, or the lottery of the second special symbol is all lost and the second When the number of reserved balls of 2 special symbols becomes 0, there is a possibility of shifting to another state. The transition destination state in the case of a big hit is common to the door breakthrough modes 1 and 2, but the transition destination state in the case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 is the door breakthrough mode 1. It is different from door breakthrough mode 2. Specifically, in door breakthrough mode 1, when the number of held balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without becoming a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the probability variable mode (see the middle left side of FIG. 71). In the variable probability mode, by hitting left, only the lottery for the first special symbol that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and the probability of getting a small win in the lottery for the first special symbol is increased (for small winning). Since the winning opening 655a is easily opened), it is possible to continue the game until the jackpot of the first special symbol is obtained without almost reducing the number of balls in the player's possession. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, in door breakthrough mode 2, when the number of held balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 without a big hit of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the normal mode (see the middle right side of FIG. 71). In the normal mode, the probability of a small hit is low, so if you hit left to execute the lottery for the first special symbol, the number of balls you have will continue to decrease until you hit the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the variable mode. Become.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 71, in the door breakthrough mode, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a jackpot E2, on the condition that the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state has not reached the upper limit, after the jackpot ends Shift to probability mode (common to door breakthrough mode 1 and 2). As described above, the jackpot E2 has a short opening time (0.2 seconds) of the specific winning hole 650a, and a right-handed shot cannot win a prize ball. Also, in the display area HR1 of the third symbol display device 81, left-handed hitting is notified during the big hit E2 and the small hit of the second special symbol. Therefore, as long as the player does not intentionally hit the right hand against the notification, the second special pattern reserved balls are not accumulated during the execution of the big win E2, so after the big win E2 is completed, the mode is directly shifted to the variable probability mode. do. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa that counts the number of consecutive times of the remaining variable probability state before shifting to the normal mode. Therefore, when the jackpot E2 is reached, the number of times of the variable probability state is subtracted without winning the prize balls, which is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the door breakthrough mode, when the specific winning opening 650a repeats the opening operation for 0.2 seconds multiple times, the player wants the opening operation to be all due to the second special symbol. It is possible to realize a novel game property that makes you wish.

In addition, when the second special symbol jackpot E2 is reached in the door breakthrough mode and the probability variation limit counter 203aa becomes 0 (the number of consecutive probability variation states reaches the upper limit), the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the big win. Therefore, the state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, in the door breakthrough mode effect, the effect of failure to break through the door is executed, and the transition to the normal mode is notified.

As shown in the middle of FIG. 71, if the jackpot D2 is won during the door breakthrough mode, the door breakthrough mode (either door breakthrough mode 1 or door breakthrough mode 2) is performed again after the jackpot D2 ends. to move to. More specifically, if the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit, the door breakthrough mode 1 (probability variation state of the special pattern and time saving state of the normal symbol) is set, and the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state is the upper limit. If it has reached, door breakthrough mode 2 (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) is set. As described above, when the door breakthrough mode 1 is set, it is advantageous for the player because it is possible to shift to the variable probability mode unless the big hit is achieved with the reserved ball of the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the door breakthrough mode 2 is set, if all the reserved balls of the second special pattern come off (small hit), it will fall to the normal mode, so it is advantageous to get a big hit. .

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the variable probability mode, when a special symbol hits the jackpot, the game state shifts to another game state. Specifically, when the first special symbol is a jackpot, and the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit (the probability variation limit counter 203aa is not 0), the door breakthrough mode is started after the jackpot ends. . On the other hand, when the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit value (the variable probability limit counter 203aa becomes 0), the state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In this case, it is notified that the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state has reached the upper limit during the jackpot. That is, an effect for informing that the state after the end of the big win is the normal mode is executed, for example, during the ending period of the big win.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the second special pattern lottery in the door breakthrough mode results in a jackpot, a prize ball can be obtained with a high probability (95%, which is the rate at which the jackpot E2 is determined). It is an unfavorable result for the player that the remaining number of consecutive times in the variable probability state (the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa) is subtracted. Therefore, in the door breakthrough mode, the game can be played in the hope that the second special symbol will not be a big hit.

In addition, in the door breakthrough mode effect of the second embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win E2, the door breakthrough failure effect (see FIG. 10(a)) is once executed. be. Then, if the number of consecutive times of the probability variable state has not reached the upper limit value (the value of the probability variable limit counter 203aa is not 0), the adventurer 811 again challenges the door breakthrough by the so-called resurrection effect. A successful rendition is executed. On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win E2 and the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit, the resurrection performance is not performed, and the mode is shifted to the normal mode as it is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining number of consecutive times has decreased when the resurrection effect is accompanied even when the mode is shifted to the variable probability mode.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 71 , in the variable probability mode, only when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big hit, the game shifts to another state. Specifically, when the first special pattern is a jackpot, and the number of consecutive times of the probability change state does not reach the upper limit, it shifts to door breakthrough mode 1 after the jackpot ends, and the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has reached the upper limit. In this case, after the jackpot is completed, the door breakthrough mode 2 is entered.

In addition, when it becomes door breakthrough mode 2, as a door breakthrough mode effect, if all the reserved balls of the second special pattern are off (small hit), it fails to break through the door and returns to normal mode. An effect in which transition is notified is executed. That is, an effect opposite to the door breakthrough mode 1 (and the door breakthrough mode effect in the first embodiment) is executed. In addition, when the jackpot E2 is achieved in the door breakthrough mode 2, the probability change mode is reported through the resurrection performance, similarly to the case where the probability change state remains in the door breakthrough mode 1. - 特許庁

Thus, in the first embodiment, two types of door breakthrough modes are provided. That is, the door breakthrough mode 1 that shifts when one of the jackpots A2 to D2 occurs in a state where the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has not reached the upper limit, and the state where the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has reached the upper limit (limit). There is provided a door breakthrough mode 2 that shifts when any one of the jackpots A2 to D2 is achieved. In the door breakthrough mode 1, as in the first embodiment, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off (small hit), the mode shifts to the probability variable mode advantageous to the player, so the second special symbol It is advantageous not to win a jackpot in the lottery. On the other hand, the door breakthrough mode 2 is internally in a state of low probability of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, and is a state in which the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state is reset. Therefore, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off, the game shifts to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this case, the jackpot of the second special symbol is obtained during the door breakthrough mode 2, so that the transition to the door breakthrough mode 1 or the probability variable mode can be made, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit. is advantageous for the player. In door breakthrough mode 2, if all the balls with the second special pattern are missed (small hits) and the mode shifts to normal mode, there is a possibility that a large amount of balls will be consumed before a big hit. is.

Depending on the type of door breakthrough mode, it is advantageous if all the reserved balls with the second special pattern are advantageous, or it is advantageous if the reserved balls with the second special pattern include a big hit. Therefore, in the case of shifting to the door breakthrough mode, it is possible to predict which mode the current door breakthrough mode will be. Then, depending on the type of the predicted mode, it is possible to make the player expect to lose or to expect a big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(b)) in that a post-input flag 223i is added. are doing. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The after-throwing flag 223i is a flag indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is powered off during execution of the door breakthrough mode, and after the door breakthrough mode is switched to the intermediate stage, the power is turned on again, and the door breakthrough mode is restarted. is. This post-throwing flag 223i is set to ON when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and it is determined that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed and the change is other than the final change of the door breakthrough mode effect. (see S5102 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 73 to 79. FIG. First, the details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment.

Of the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, S301 to S309, and in each of S311 processing, respectively S301 to S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and the same processing as each processing of S311 is executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (S231) in the second embodiment, after determining the variation pattern in the process of S307 or S309, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S321), and the read counter value and the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 are set to a variation pattern command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 (S322).

Also, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 73) in the second embodiment, after the process of S311 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is greater than 0 (S323). In the processing of S323, when it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is greater than 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S323: Yes), the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is subtracted by 1. (S324), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S323, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S323: No), the process of S324 is skipped, This process is terminated as it is.

By this special symbol variation start processing 2 (see FIG. 73), the progress of the door breakthrough mode effect (the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab) can be included in the variation pattern command and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the deviation between the actual remaining number of door breaking mode effects and the effect mode executed by the sound lamp control device 113 . In particular, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily cut off, all the contents stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are cleared, so the state of the door breaking mode effect before the power cut-off can also be changed by the sound lamp. It becomes unknown on the control device 113 side. Even in this case, if the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command, simply analyzing the variation pattern command that is first output after the power supply is restored, the power supply can be easily cut off. can be grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the mode of presentation before the power was cut off.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the situation in which the second special symbol reserved ball exists is basically only during the jackpot and during the execution of the door breaking mode effect. Therefore, in the case where the number of pending balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the jackpot is not in progress, it seems to be enough to determine that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. However, when the player intentionally or erroneously hits to the right during normal times, the number of pending balls of the second special symbol may become 1 or more. In such a case, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, when the power is restored, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is notified by the reserved ball number command when the power is restored, so that the door is opened on the voice lamp control device 113 side. A problem arises in which it is misidentified that the breakthrough mode effect is being executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the progress of the door breakthrough mode effect is included in the variation pattern command and output. , it is possible to grasp whether the door breaking mode is being executed or whether the player intentionally or mistakenly hits to the right during normal operation. Therefore, it is possible to accurately return the presentation mode after the power is restored to the state before the power was cut off.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the number of fluctuations until the end of the door breakthrough mode production is grasped by the breakthrough mode counter 203ab, and is included in the fluctuation pattern command and output. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which only the information as to whether or not it is being executed is included in the variation pattern command and output. Then, on the sound lamp control device 113 side, based on the information and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, it may be configured to grasp the number of fluctuations until the door breakthrough mode effect is completed. With this configuration, the process of updating the counter 203ab during the door breaking mode can be omitted on the main controller 110 side, so that the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, normal symbol variation processing 2 (S106) in the second embodiment will be described. This normal symbol variation process 2 (S106) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) instead of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment.

In each process of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 of the normal symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, each of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment The same processes as those of S601 to S614, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed.

Further, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, in the process of S614, when it is determined that the present is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: Yes), the normal symbol variation The time is set to 30 seconds (S631), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S614, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state of the normal design (S614: No), the fluctuation time of the normal design is set to 3 seconds (S632), and this process is finished.

Furthermore, in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 74) in the second embodiment, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the current is in the normal state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the second entering ball The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640b attached to the mouth 640 are set to "1 second x 2 times" (S633), and the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the current is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S620: No), the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640b associated with the second ball entrance 640 are set to " 0.2 seconds×1 time” (S634), and the process proceeds to S623.

In this way, in the second embodiment, the normal state of the normal design is shorter than the time-saving state of the normal design, and the opening time when the normal design is hit is short. configured to be long. Further, as described above, the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment is a normal design normal state (low probability state) and a normal design high probability state. The number of judgment values to be judged differs by only one. As a result, even in the normal state of the normal pattern, the hit probability is almost the same as in the high probability state of the normal pattern. it gets harder. Therefore, in the probability variable mode in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, so the second special symbol is disadvantageous. execution of the lottery can be suppressed. As a result, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in a situation other than during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and excessive disadvantage to the player can be suppressed. In addition, during the big win set in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the balls are likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that the number of retained balls can be easily stored up to the upper limit during the big win. .

Next, referring to FIG. 75, start-up processing 2 of main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. This start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment.

In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, S901-S910 and S913 are the steps S901-S910 and S913 of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. are executed. In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75) in the second embodiment, when the process of S910 ends, the state command setting process for setting the state command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. (S921), the process proceeds to S913. Details of this state command setting process (S921) will be described with reference to FIG.

The flowchart in FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S921). In this state command setting process (S921), first, the probability variable flag 203g is read (S1801), and the state command is set based on the state of the read probability variable flag 203g (S1802). Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently fluctuating (S1803), and if it is fluctuating (S1803: Yes), the execution area data and the value of the fluctuation time counter 203q are read out (S1804). . Next, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is read (S1805), and the variation pattern command is set based on each read value (S1806). Next, a stop type command is set (S1807), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S1803: No), the processes of S1804 to S1807 are skipped and the process is finished as it is.

By executing this state command setting process (see FIG. 76), the game state before the power is cut off, the progress of the door breakthrough mode effect, etc. can be set by voice during the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 75). The lamp controller 113 can be notified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, details of the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

Among the jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1109, respectively, in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment S1101 to S1105, , and the same processes as those of S1107 to S1109 are executed.

Also, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), first, the specific winning opening 650a is opened. state (S1121), sets a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started (S1122), and terminates this process. In the second embodiment, a variable winning device 650 is provided instead of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e2 are not provided therein. Therefore, since there is no need to execute the flow path switching process in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77), these processes (S1202 and S1203 in FIG. 38) are deleted.

Also, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing in the process of S1109 (S1109: Yes), the jackpot end process in the first embodiment ( (See S1110 in FIG. 37), a jackpot ending process 2 is executed (S1123), and the process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process 2 (S1123) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: No), instead of the winning process in the first embodiment (see S1111 in FIG. 37), the winning process 2 is executed (S1124). ), the process ends. The details of this winning process 2 (S1124) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Incidentally, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 77) in the second embodiment, a process corresponding to the abnormality process (see S1112 in FIG. 37) in the first embodiment is not provided. In the first embodiment, whether or not to shift to the variable probability state after the big hit is determined by whether or not the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65. This is because in the second embodiment, there is a difference that the game state after the big win is determined according to the kind of the big win. Therefore, in the second embodiment, even if the ball is left inside the variable winning device 650, it does not affect whether or not the variable probability state occurs, and the ball is left inside. itself does not work. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the abnormality processing (see FIG. 41) for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in which a ball remains inside the variable winning device 650 is eliminated.

It should be noted that in the second embodiment as well, it is of course possible to execute processing corresponding to the abnormality processing (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. As a result, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs inside the variable winning device 650, an error can be notified early.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the details of the jackpot ending process 2 (S1123) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process 2 (S1123). In this jackpot end processing 2 (S1123), first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa (S1311), and it is determined whether or not the counter value after the subtraction has become 0.

In the process of S1311, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 1 or more (S1312: No), it means that the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state has not reached the upper limit (limit), so the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1315. On the other hand, in the process of S1311, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa after subtraction has become 0 (S1313: Yes), it means that the number of consecutive probability variation states has reached the upper limit. , Without executing the processing of S1313 to turn on the probability variation flag 203g (while the probability variation flag 203g remains off), set the value of the probability variation limit counter 203aa to 4 (S1314), and move the process to S1315 .

In the process of S1315 executed after the process of S1313 or S1314 is completed, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is read (S1315), and the read value is set to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. (S1316). Then, based on the state of the variable probability flag 203g and the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa, a state command is set (S1317). By including the value of the variable probability limit counter 203aa in the state command, not only the game state after the big win but also the remaining number of times until the number of continuous times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit (limit) can be grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 side. be able to. When the process of S1317 is completed, the flag 203r during the big hit is set to OFF (S1318), and this process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the details of the winning process 2 (S1124) will be described. This prize winning process 2 (S1124) is, as described above, a process that is executed in place of the prize winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

In the processes of S1401 to S1404 and S1406 to S1408 of the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, S1401 to S1404 and S1406 of the winning process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 40) The same processing as each processing of S1408 is executed.

In addition, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, when the process of S1404 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 6 or more (S1431), and the winning number counter If the value of 203j is 6 or more (S1431: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1431, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 6 (S1431: No), the process proceeds to S1406.

Also, in the winning process 2 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1409 to S1420 of the winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are deleted. These processes are processes for determining whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 or whether the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 at normal timing. This is because the processing is unnecessary for the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in which the discharge channel 65e2, the variable probability switch 65e3 and the like are not provided. By omitting these processes, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 80 to 84. FIG. First, startup processing 2 executed by MPU 201 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. This start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) is a process executed instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, each process of S4001-S4013 is the same as each process of S4001-S4013 of the start-up process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed. In addition, in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4012 is completed, the state at the time of power-on based on the state command and the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is executed (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4013. Details of the state determination processing at the time of insertion (S4021) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the state determination processing at the time of insertion (S4021). In the input state determination process (S4021), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S4901), and if it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (S4901: No) , the back image is set according to the gaming state when the power is turned on (S4902), and this process is terminated. Here, the gaming state at the time of power-on is determined based on the data in the gaming state storage area 223h updated in the processing of S4012 of the startup processing 2 (see FIG. 80), and if the current state is the probability variable state Set the back image for the variable probability state, and set the back image for the normal state if it is the normal state. It should be noted that the door breakthrough mode effect is an effect that is executed while the second special symbol is fluctuating, so there is no possibility of the door breakthrough mode when the fluctuation is stopped when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), then the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4903 ), and it is determined whether the extracted value is 0 (S4904). If the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 0, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed, and if the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 or more, it means that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed. means.

In the process of S4904, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is not 0 (the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed) (S4904: No), the breakthrough for selecting the effect mode of the door breakthrough mode effect A mode selection process is executed (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4907. The details of this breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 0 (that is, the door breakthrough mode effect is not being executed) (S4904: No), the remaining variation A presentation mode is determined according to the time and the result of the lottery (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907. In the processing of S4907, based on the effect mode determined in the processing of S4905 or S4906, the variation pattern command for display is set (S4907), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, details of the breakthrough mode selection process (S4905) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this breakthrough mode selection process (S4905).

In the breakthrough mode selection process (see FIG. 82), first, it is determined whether the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 1 (S5001), and if the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 If there is (S5001: Yes), then it is determined whether it is an outlier variation pattern (S5002). In the process of S5002, when it is determined that the variation pattern is out (S5002: Yes), then it is determined whether the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is data indicating the probability variation state (S5003). , If it is in the probability variable state (S5003: Yes), the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display based on the last second special symbol held ball in the door breakthrough mode 1 (see the middle left side of FIG. 71), and the execution It means that the last ball held inside was a miss (small hit). Therefore, in this case, as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining variable time, it is determined to the effect mode of notifying the transition to the variable probability mode (S5004), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5003, if it is determined that the data stored in the game state storage area 223h is the data indicating the low probability state of the special symbol (S5003: No), the door breakthrough mode 2 (the middle part of FIG. 71) Right side) means that the power supply was cut off during the execution of the variable display based on the last second special symbol held ball, and the last held ball during execution was a miss (small hit). Therefore, in this case, as the effect mode to be executed in the remaining variable time, the effect mode of notifying the shift to the normal mode is determined (S5004), and the process is terminated. Through these processes of S5003 and S5004, even if the state at the time when the power is turned on again is during execution of the final variation display in the door breakthrough mode effect, the door is opened based on the lottery result and the game state. The result of breakthrough mode production can be accurately notified.

On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is not 1 (2 or more) (S5001: No), and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 And, when it is determined that the variation pattern being executed at the time of power restoration is the big hit variation pattern (S5002: No), first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is the big hit E2 (S5006). In the processing of S5006, if it is determined that the jackpot E2 (S5006: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of consecutive times of probability variation state has reached the upper limit (limit) (S5007). In addition, the remaining number of times up to the upper limit of the number of continuous times of the variable probability state is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the state command together with the game state at the time of power-on.

In the process of S5007, if it is determined that the upper limit value (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state is reached (S5007: Yes), the state after the jackpot becomes the normal mode, so to notify the transition to the normal mode , the process proceeds to the above-described S5005. On the other hand, in the processing of S5007, if it is determined that the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probability variable state has not been reached, the state after the big hit becomes the probability variable mode, so the door is successfully broken through the resurrection effect. The production mode is determined (S5008), and this process is terminated. As mentioned above, this resurrection effect indicates that the remaining number of times up to the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times of the probability change state has decreased even though the prize ball could not be obtained due to the big hit E2. It is a production that shows. By this resurrection presentation, the player can be made to recognize that the jackpot E2 has been won during the door breaking mode presentation.

Also, in the processing of S5006, if it is determined that the big hit is not E2 (S5006: No), then it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the big hit D2 (S5009). In the process of S5009, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the big win D2 (S5009: Yes), a special effect mode indicating that the big win has been achieved is determined in the door breaking mode effect (S5010). , the process ends.

Also, in the process of S5009, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the big hit D2 (S5009: No), the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the deviation (small hit), and the current variation means that is not the last change in the door breakthrough mode, the breakthrough production mode is determined according to the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab (S5011). That is, the state of the door 814 is determined according to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. Then, the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set to the breakthrough effect counter 223g, the post-throwing flag 223i is set to ON (S5012), and the present process ends. By turning on the post-turn-on flag 223i, it is possible to determine that the effect has been restarted from the middle of the door break-through mode when power is turned on even when the next and subsequent variation patterns are received.

The door breakthrough mode effect in the second embodiment is basically the same as in the first embodiment, from the start of the jackpot ending period to the end of the opening period of the fourth specific winning opening 650a for 5.8 seconds. is set. That is, at the start of the door-breaking mode effect, the result of the door-breaking mode effect is determined in advance based on the look-ahead result of each reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, basically, when the variation pattern command of the second special symbol is newly received during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, the predetermined effect mode may be executed as it is. However, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off in the middle of the door breakthrough mode effect, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, and the progress of the door breakthrough mode effect and the result of the effect etc., cannot be grasped. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power is turned off during execution of the door-breaking mode effect, and the power is turned on again, the after-turn flag 223i is configured so that it can be grasped. Then, while the post-throwing flag 223i is on, each time a variation pattern command is received, the door breakthrough mode is performed based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and the information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is time to end the performance, and to set the performance mode according to the determination result. By configuring in this way, while minimizing the information to be output from the main control device 110, the end timing of the door breakthrough mode effect can be accurately determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

Next, details of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This variable display setting process 2 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. S4801 to S4803 and S4805 to S4809 of the variable display setting process 2 (S4121) in the second embodiment correspond to S4801 to S4803 and S4803 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, respectively. and the same processing as the processing of S4805 to S4809 are executed.

In addition, in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 83) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4803 is completed, then the rough variable display mode ( Variation time), variation pattern determination processing for determining the detailed effect mode of the variation pattern is executed (S4811). The details of this variation pattern determination process (S4811) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S4811 ends, based on the detailed rendering mode of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S4811, the variation pattern command for display is set (S4812), and the processing proceeds to S4805.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, details of the variation pattern determination process (S4811) described above will be described. In the variation pattern determination process (S4811), first, it is determined whether or not the after-throwing flag 223i is on (S5101), and if the after-throwing flag 223i is off (S5101: No), the main controller 110 Based on the rough aspect of the variation pattern extracted from the output variation pattern command, the detailed effect aspect of the variation pattern is determined (S5102), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5101, if it is determined that the after-throw flag 223i is ON (S5101: Yes), the power is turned on again after the power is turned off during execution of the door breaking mode effect. Since this means that, according to the information of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and the lottery result, a process for determining the effect mode during the door breakthrough mode effect is executed.

Specifically, first, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is extracted from the variation pattern command (S5103), and whether the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (that is, the last variation in the door breakthrough mode effect (S5104). In the process of S5104, if it is determined that the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), then the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern out of It is determined (S5105), and when it is determined that it is a deviation variation pattern (S5105: Yes), based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223h, it is determined whether the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol. (S5106).

In the process of S5106, if it is determined that the current is the probability variation state of the special symbol (S5106: Yes), the effect mode (see FIG. 10 (b)) for informing the transition to the probability variation mode is determined, and the processing is performed. The process proceeds to S5116. On the other hand, in the processing of S5106, when it is determined that the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol (S5106: No), the effect mode (see FIG. 10 (a)) for notifying the shift to the normal mode is determined. (S5108), the process proceeds to S5116.

On the other hand, in the process of S5104, if it is determined that the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted from the variation pattern command is 2 or more (S5104: No), and the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is 1 (S5104: Yes), and when it is determined that the variation pattern of the jackpot has been notified (S5105: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot is E2 (S5109).

In the processing of S5109, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot E2 (S5109: Yes), then the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state (limit) It is determined whether or not it has reached Then (S5110), if the upper limit (limit) of the number of consecutive times is reached (S5110: Yes), the state after the end of the jackpot E2 cannot be set to the variable probability mode, so the transition to the normal mode is notified. The process proceeds to S5108 for determining the effect mode. On the other hand, in the process of S5110, if it is determined that the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state has not reached the upper limit (limit) (S5110: No), the effect mode of the resurrection effect is determined (S5111), and this process ends do.

On the other hand, in the process of S5109, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the jackpot E2 (S5109: No), then it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot D2 Then (S5112), if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the big hit D2 (S5112: Yes), the effect mode of the special door breakthrough mode effect that notifies the big win is determined (S5113), and the process proceeds to S5116. and migrate.

Also, in the process of S5112, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot D2 (S5112: No), the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that is off (small hit), and the remaining variation number of door breakthrough mode effects ( Since it means that the number of held balls of the second special symbol) is 2 or more, the effect mode of the door breakthrough mode effect is determined according to the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab extracted in the process of S5103 (S5114). , the value of the extracted breakthrough mode counter 203ab is set to the breakthrough effect counter 223g (S5115), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S5116 executed after any one of S5107, S5108, S5111, and S5113 is completed, the post-throwing flag 223i is reset to OFF, and the value of the breaking effect counter 223g is reset to 0 ( S5116), the process ends.

By executing this variation pattern determination processing, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off during the door breaking mode presentation, the presentation is resumed from the middle of the door breaking mode presentation after the power is turned on again. Aspects can be restored. More specifically, when the power is cut off during execution of the door breaking mode effect, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is cleared, so that the progress of the door breaking mode effect, the result of the effect, etc. can be grasped. I can't. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the power is turned off during execution of the door-breaking mode effect, and the power is turned on again, the after-turn flag 223i is configured so that it can be grasped. Then, while the post-throwing flag 223i is on, each time a variation pattern command is received, the door breakthrough mode is performed based on the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab included in the variation pattern command and the information indicating the lottery result. It is configured to determine whether or not it is time to end the performance, and to set the performance mode according to the determination result. By configuring in this way, while minimizing the information to be output from the main controller 110, the end timing of the door-breaking mode effect can be accurately determined on the sound lamp controller 113 side.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the game state after the big win is predetermined for each type of big win. In addition, it is configured to set an upper limit (limit) for the number of consecutive times of the probability variation state of the special pattern, and when the upper limit is reached, even if the probability variation jackpot is won, after the jackpot is set to the special pattern low probability state. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to form two types of a door breakthrough mode (door breakthrough mode 1) in which special symbols are in a variable probability state and a door breakthrough mode in which special symbols are in a low probability state. can. Therefore, when shifting to the door breakthrough mode, there is a possibility of shifting to the normal mode even if all the reserved balls of the second special symbol come off. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which it is advantageous or disadvantageous to win a big hit during the door breakthrough mode depending on the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the electric accessory 640b is provided for the second ball entrance 640, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b is difficult to open. In the normal state (low-probability state) of the pattern, the electric accessory 640b is configured to be easily opened. By configuring in this way, even if the player hits the ball to the right, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the probability variable mode in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. , it is possible to suppress the execution of the lottery of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous. As a result, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in a situation other than during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, and excessive disadvantage to the player can be suppressed. In addition, during the big win set in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the balls are easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, so that the number of retained balls can be easily stored up to the upper limit during the big win. .

In addition, in the second embodiment, information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the door breakthrough mode effect (the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab) is included in the change pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. It is configured to include As a result, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during the door breaking mode presentation, the voice lamp control device 113 can reproduce the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 after the power is turned on again. Only by analyzing on the side, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the door breaking mode effect is being executed, and the progress status when it is being executed. Therefore, while minimizing the information to be output from the main controller 110, the end timing of the door breaking mode effect can be accurately determined on the voice lamp controller 113 side.

In addition, in the second embodiment, by outputting the variable pattern command including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab, when the power is restored, it is determined whether the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed or not by voice lamp control. Although the device 113 side is configured to be able to distinguish between them, it is not limited to this. For example, only the information as to whether or not the second special symbol is being digested pending after the end of the jackpot may be included in the variation pattern command. That is, it is not necessary to include the information of the number of remaining variable display times until the door breakthrough mode effect ends in the variation pattern. Then, when the power supply is restored during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect, based on the number of pending balls of the second special symbol and the type of variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command (whether it is hit or not) , It may be configured to determine whether or not it is the last variation of the door breakthrough mode production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 .

In the second embodiment, the variable pattern command is always output including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, only the first variation pattern command may be configured to output including the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab. As a result, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is included in the variation pattern command and output, but it is not necessarily included in the variation pattern command. For example, a command for notifying only the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab may be prepared separately. That is, only when there is a change in the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab, the main controller 110 may notify the voice lamp controller 113 by a command. By configuring in this way, the data amount of the variation pattern command can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, when the power is turned on, the game state is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the state command, and the value of the breakthrough mode counter 203ab is notified by the variation pattern command. The information notified to the control device 113 is not limited to this. For example, the prefetch result of each reserved ball may be notified again by the winning information command. By configuring in this way, when the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed when the power is turned on, not only the fact that the door breakthrough mode effect is being executed, but also the result of the door breakthrough mode effect can be displayed. , can be grasped on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation in consideration of the results of the presentation.

<Modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment described above will be described. In the above-described second embodiment, the second ball entrance 640 is provided with the electric accessory 640b. Then, the variation time of the normal symbols is shorter in the low probability state of the normal symbols than in the high probability state of the normal symbols, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640b is longer when the normal symbols win. By doing so, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 in the probability variable mode in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

On the other hand, in this modified example, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, there is a storage valve 63a capable of storing (retaining) a ball in the upper part, and a ball stored in the storage valve 63a. A general prize winning opening 63 is provided in which the stored ball can enter when the stored state is released. Although the details will be described later, the second ball entry hole 640 in this modified example is basically provided at a position where it is impossible (difficult) for a ball to enter even if the player hits to the right. As an exception, a ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 only when hitting to the right while three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a. More specifically, when hitting to the right while three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, the ball flowing down due to the hitting to the right collides with the third stored ball. There is a possibility that the trajectory of the ball is changed and becomes a trajectory that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 . In this modification, the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 only during the big win by canceling the stored state at normal times and setting the stored state only during the big win. .

With this configuration, it is not necessary to accompany the second ball entrance 640 with the electric accessory 640b. Therefore, the electric accessory 64a can be attached to the first ball entrance 64, as in the first embodiment. As a result, as in the first embodiment, the electric accessary 64a can be easily opened in the variable probability mode, so that the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held. In addition, by configuring the electric accessory 64a to accompany the first ball entrance 64, the "low probability state of special symbols" and the "time saving state of normal symbols" are set in each of the above embodiments. A game state that was not present can be provided. More specifically, by setting the game state when the number of consecutive times of the probability variable state reaches the upper limit (limit) as "low probability state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols", probability variable mode After the end (after reaching the limit), for a predetermined period (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times), a state in which the special symbol lottery can be executed while maintaining the ball (so-called pullback state) can be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately quitting the game after the variable probability mode ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, "the low probability state of a special design" and "the time-saving state of a normal design" are called "pull-back mode."

First, referring to FIG. 85, the game board 13 in the modified example of the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, in this modified example, an electric accessory 64a is attached to the first ball entrance 64, as in the first embodiment. Thereby, in the "probability variable mode" and the "pull-back mode" set to the time-saving state of normal symbols, the electric accessory 64a is easily opened and the ball is easily entered into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, in this modified example, as in the first embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so as not to result in a small hit.

In addition to the second ball entrance 640 and the variable prize winning device 650 , the general prize winning port 63 is provided in the channel provided on the right side of the variable prize winning device unit 80 . This general winning hole 63 is configured as a winning hole from which one prize ball is paid out when a ball enters. Moreover, a storage valve 63 a is provided vertically above the general prize winning opening 63 . The reservoir valve 63a is variable between a protruding state (see FIG. 86(a)) protruding forward in front view and a recessed state (see FIG. 86(b)) in which it is buried inside the game board 13. It is configured. In the protruded state of the storage valve 63a, the balls that have reached the storage valve 63a can be prevented from flowing down to the general winning opening 63 by storing (retaining) the balls in the upper portion thereof. On the other hand, when the reservoir valve 63a is buried, the ball can pass through the front side of the reservoir valve 63a. That is, the ball can flow down to the general prize winning opening 63 . Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 86, but in this modification, the reservoir valve 63a is set to the buried state (see FIG. 86(b)) at normal times other than during the jackpot, and the reservoir valve 63a is set at the start of the jackpot. is changed from the buried state (see FIG. 86(b)) to the projected state (see FIG. 86(a)). Then, at the end of the jackpot, the storage valve 63a is again changed from the protruding state (see FIG. 86(a)) to the recessed state (see FIG. 86(b)).

The protruding state and the retracted state of the storage valve 63a will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a case in which the reservoir valve 63a is in a protruding state, and FIG. 86(b) is a diagram illustrating a case in which the reservoir valve 63a is in a recessed state. As shown in FIG. 86(a), when the reservoir valve 63a protrudes with the start of the jackpot, the flow path formed above the general winning opening 63 is blocked by the reservoir valve 63a. As a result, up to three balls that have reached the flow path are stored (retained) above the retention valve 63a. During the big win, the player cannot get the prize ball unless the ball enters the specific winning hole 650a. A nail, a pinwheel, or the like is arranged in a channel formed above the general winning hole 63 so that one out of every two balls launched by hitting to the right advances. Therefore, during one round of the jackpot, three balls are stored in the information of the storage valve 63a (see FIG. 86(a)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 86(a), when the upper limit of three balls is stored above the storage valve 63a, and the ball is hit to the right, the ball hit to the right is , may collide with the third (last) ball stored by the storage valve 63a. The ball that collides with the third stored ball is reflected in the direction opposite to the flow direction up to that point, and as a result, in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80, it enters the general winning opening 63. The trajectory allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 provided on the opposite side. In the modified example of the second embodiment, the reservoir valve 63a enters the reservoir state when the jackpot is reached, and the reservoir state is maintained until the jackpot ends. Therefore, if the ball is hit to the right to enter the specific winning hole 650a during the jackpot, three balls are stored above the storage valve 63a. With three balls stored above the storage valve 63a, when the player hits to the right to obtain a prize ball, the newly shot ball collides with the stored ball. As a result, the ball enters the second ball inlet 640. As a result, the player continuously hits to the right in an attempt to obtain a prize ball during the big win, so that when the big win is finished, the reserved balls of the second special pattern are accumulated up to the upper limit number (4). can be done. Although not shown, in a state in which three balls are stored by the storage valve 63a, some of the balls fired by hitting to the right do not collide with (interfere with) the stored balls. It flows down in the direction of the specific prize winning port 650a. As a result, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 and the specific winning opening 650a during the big win.

FIG. 86(b) is a diagram showing a case where the storage valve 63a is in a buried state. As described above, when the big win ends, the state is changed from the projecting state to the buried state, and the buried state is maintained (retained) until the next big win. When the reservoir valve 63a is in the buried state, the ball can pass (flow down) through the channel provided above the general prize winning opening 63. FIG. Therefore, the ball fired into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 passes through the front side of the buried reservoir valve 63a and enters the general prize opening 63, or It flows down a flow path toward a specific prize winning port 650 a provided between the winning port 63 and the second ball entrance 640 . In this modified example, since the storage valve 63a is in the retracted state until the next big win after the big win is completed, it is possible to prevent the ball hit to the right from entering the second ball entrance 640 in normal times. can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol that is usually disadvantageous, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being too disadvantageous.

Next, referring to FIG. 87, a state transition method in this modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modification, in addition to the four states (normal mode, variable probability mode, door breakthrough mode 1, door breakthrough mode 2) provided in the second embodiment described above, a pullback mode is provided. is provided.

The pullback mode is a state in which a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols are set. In this modification, when the upper limit (limit) of the number of continuous times of the variable probability state is reached, the state after the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in this modification, the door breakthrough mode 2 is a low probability state of special symbols and a short time state of normal symbols, and when the reserved ball of the second special symbol becomes 0 in door breakthrough mode 2, it becomes a pullback mode. .

As shown in the upper right of FIG. 87, the pull-back mode shifts to another mode when the lottery of the special symbols for the number of times of time reduction (25 times) set without becoming a big hit ends. there's a possibility that. Specifically, when the lottery for the special symbols for the number of times of time saving is all lost, the game shifts to the normal mode. In addition, the pull-back mode is set to a low probability state of the special symbol, and the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state is reset, so when the first special symbol lottery hits the jackpot, it shifts to the door breakthrough mode 1. .

In addition, in this modified example, the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is easily opened in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the variable probability mode and the pull-back mode both have the same opening control of the electric accessory 64a, it is difficult to visually distinguish between the variable probability mode and the pull-back mode. In this modification, the player can recognize that it was in the pullback mode when the number of times of time saving ends and the pullback mode falls to the normal mode. In other words, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the pullback mode, it becomes difficult to know whether the jackpot was hit in the variable probability mode or the jackpot in the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the variable probability state continues beyond the upper limit of the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state by making a big hit in the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in accordance with the configuration in which the probability variable mode and the pullback mode cannot be distinguished from the operation of the electric accessory 64a, etc., in this modification, in the door breakthrough mode 2, all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are removed. Also in this case, an effect of successfully breaking through the door is executed. As a result, in the door breakthrough mode production, when the effect that the adventurer 811 succeeds in breaking through all the doors is executed, whether the transition from the door breakthrough mode 1 to the variable mode or from the door breakthrough mode 2 to the withdrawal mode is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the migration has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which it is unknown how long the repetition of the jackpot and the mode (probability variable mode or pullback mode) in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set continues.

In this way, in the modification of the second embodiment, a ball can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 63a, and depending on whether or not a ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 63a, a right-handed ball It is configured to be able to switch the direction in which the water flows. When no balls are stored in the storage valve 63a, it is difficult for the balls to enter the second ball inlet 640. On the other hand, the storage valve 63a stores the upper limit number (three) of balls. If so, the flow direction of part of the newly launched ball is switched by the stored ball, and the trajectory is changed to a trajectory that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. bottom. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 even if the ball is hit to the right when the storage valve 63a is set in the buried state. Further, during the big win in which the storage valve 63a is set to the protruding state, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 when hitting to the right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of lottery of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player in normal times while making it possible to store the reserved balls of the second special symbol to the upper limit at the end of the jackpot.

In addition, in the modification of the second embodiment, when the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit, a time-saving state of normal symbols that continues until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (25 times) is set. It was configured as follows. By constructing in this way, when the number of continuous times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit, the lottery of the special symbols is performed without reducing the holding balls until the lottery of the special symbols of the predetermined number of times (25 times) is executed. can be created (pull-back mode). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately even when the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state reaches the upper limit and the low probability state of the special pattern is set after the big win. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, since the pull-back mode and the probability variable mode are both set to the time-saving state of the normal symbol, they are configured to be difficult to distinguish from each other from the appearance of the operation of the electric accessory 64a. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he or she had won a big win in the variable probability mode even when the jackpot was won in the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide novel playability that makes it feel as if the variable probability state continues beyond the upper limit of the variable probability state.

In addition, in the modification of the second embodiment, a storage valve 63a is provided above the general prize winning port 63, and depending on the state of the storage valve 63a, it may be difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. , and the state in which the ball can enter the ball, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the general prize winning port 63, a configuration may be adopted in which a storage valve 63a is provided above the second ball entrance 640. FIG. During the big win, the reservoir valve 63a is set to the buried state so that the ball hit to the right can enter the second ball entrance 640. The ball may be difficult to enter the second ball inlet 640 by keeping the valve 63a in a projecting state. As a result, since the general prize winning port 63 can be omitted, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the modified example of the second embodiment, the upper limit is set for the number of continuous times of the variable probability state, but instead of this, the upper limit may be set for the number of times of lottery of special symbols in one variable probability state. That is, when the probability variable jackpot is achieved, the special symbol variable probability state may be continued until, for example, the special symbol lottery is executed 130 times after the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the upper limit (limit) of the number of continuous times of the variable probability state has been reached, so the processing load at the end of the jackpot can be reduced. Also, in this case, when the first special symbol hits the jackpot, the probability variable state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are set, while when the second special symbol lottery wins, It may be possible to determine the type of jackpot in which prize balls can hardly be obtained with a high probability (for example, 95%), and the variable state of special patterns and the normal state of ordinary patterns are determined after the jackpot. . By constructing in this way, as in the above-described embodiments, a novel game property is realized in which a game is played in the hope that the game will not be a big win in the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the big win. be able to.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 103. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the passage on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front is provided with the second ball entrance 640 and the specific prize winning opening 65a. There is a possibility that only a right-handed ball will flow into the flow path on the right side of the front view (a ball will not flow into the flow path on the right side of the front view even if the ball is hit left-handed), so the second ball entry Both the hole 640 and the specific winning hole 65a allow a ball to enter (easy to enter) when hitting right, and cannot (difficult to enter) when hitting left. Therefore, when a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special pattern, if the ball is struck to the right to obtain a prize ball, the ball also enters the second ball entrance 640, so after the big win, the second special It is possible to make the state where the holding ball of the pattern is accumulated to the upper limit. As a result, after the big hit of the first special symbol, a state is formed in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous in the event of a big win, is continuously executed.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the left specific winning hole makes it possible to enter the ball (easy to enter) when hitting to the left, and impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter) when hitting to the right. 656a and two types of special prizes, a right specific prize opening 657a in which a ball can enter the ball (easy to enter) when hitting right and a ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) when hitting left. It was configured to have a mouth. Then, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, a jackpot type in which only the left specific prize winning port 656a is opened in all rounds (the right specific prize winning port 657a is difficult to open), and a left specific prize winning port 656a in the first round. is opened, and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in other rounds (the right specific winning opening 657a is easily opened). That is, there are few opportunities to hit to the right during the big win (it is difficult to accumulate balls with the second special symbol during the big win), and there are many opportunities to hit to the right (the ball with the second special symbol is held during the big win). It is configured to provide a jackpot type that is easy to accumulate). If the type of jackpot has fewer chances to hit to the right (it is difficult to accumulate balls with the second special symbol during the jackpot), the possibility that the jackpot will be included in the reserved balls that exist at the end of the jackpot is also low. It is possible to increase the possibility of shifting to the probability variation mode. On the other hand, if the type of jackpot has many opportunities to hit to the right (hold balls with the second special symbol are likely to accumulate during the jackpot), the possibility that the jackpot will be included in the reserved balls that exist at the end of the jackpot will also increase. Therefore, the possibility of shifting to the variable probability mode is relatively low. As a result, it is possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the type of jackpot, so that when a jackpot is won, it is possible to attract more attention to the type. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player until the type of jackpot is determined.

In addition, in the present third embodiment, as the difference in the degree of advantage according to the jackpot type of the first special symbol is increased, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable display. It was configured to suggest the jackpot type depending on the type of. More specifically, the number of rounds is small (2 rounds or 5 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened other than the 1st round (holding balls of the second special symbol are easy to accumulate) jackpot type (relatively In the case of a disadvantageous jackpot type), when three main patterns imitating the same even numbers are aligned on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, it is notified that the jackpot has been hit. In addition, the number of rounds is large (16 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened except for the first round (holding balls of the second special symbol are easy to accumulate). In this case, it is reported that three main patterns imitating one of the eight types of numbers excluding "7" among the numbers "1 to 9" are aligned on the display screen. Furthermore, in the case of the most advantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds and all rounds are left-handed), one of the third patterns imitating the numbers "1 to 9" may be aligned. In other words, when three main symbols with odd numbers other than "7" are aligned, it indicates a jackpot of at least 16 rounds, and further, when main symbols with "7" are aligned. means that the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and in addition, it is a jackpot type in which a prize ball can be obtained by hitting left in all the rounds of the jackpot. As a result, the player can play the game while paying attention to the types of the main symbols arranged on the display screen at the end of the variable display, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the most advantageous jackpot type (the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and all rounds are left-handed), and numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display effect. If so, after that, an effect of changing to "7" matching (promotion) is executed by the promotion effect executed during the big win. In other words, in the most advantageous jackpot, "7" matching indicating the most advantageous jackpot is notified during the variable display effect or during the big win after the variable display effect. Similarly, the number of rounds is the largest (16 rounds), and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened other than the first round (the second special symbol holding ball is easy to accumulate). When the numbers are matched, after that, an effect is executed to change (promote) the odd numbers other than "7" by the promotion effect executed during the jackpot. That is, in the 16-round jackpot in which the right specific prize-winning port 657a is opened other than the first round, odd numbers other than "7" are notified during the variable display effect or during the big win after the variable display effect. Furthermore, the right specific prize-winning port 657a is opened except for the 1st round, and in the case of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (5 rounds or 2 rounds), even numbers are arranged by a variable display effect, which develops into a promotion effect. Even in this case, even digits remain aligned without being changed (promoted) to odd digits. In this way, by providing a promotion effect, the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot type with a low degree of advantage once in the variable display effect (simulating the even number corresponding to the 5th or 2nd round jackpot) Even if the combination of the 3rd symbols, etc.) is stopped and displayed, the combination corresponding to the jackpot type with a high degree of advantage due to the promotion effect (3 3rd symbols imitating "7" corresponding to the most advantageous jackpot). The player can be expected to be changed (promoted) to a combination, etc.). As a result, interest can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113 , and the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The only difference is that the process has changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 88, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 88, in the game board 13 of the third embodiment, instead of the variable winning device 65 of the first embodiment being removed, a left variable winning device 656 is added to the left channel of the game board 13. In addition, a right variable winning device 657 is provided in the right channel. The internal structure of the left variable winning device 656 provided in the left channel of the game board 13 is the same as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment. That is, the ball entering the left specific winning hole 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is distributed to either the normal discharge channel 65e1 inside the left variable winning device 656 or the special discharge channel 65e2. As described above, the ball is distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2 during the big hit, and when the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability state of the special symbol is given after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, the right variable winning device 657 only has a function of paying out 11 winning balls when it detects that a ball has entered the right specific winning hole 657a. That is, the winning device has a simple configuration in which a switch (variable probability switch 65e3), which is a determination target for determining whether or not to give the variable probability state, is not provided inside.

The left specific winning port 656a of the left variable winning device 656 is the first round (in the case of jackpots A3 to C3 described later) or all rounds (in the case of jackpot D3 described later) when the first special symbol jackpot is won. ). On the other hand, the right specific winning opening 657a of the right variable winning device 657 is opened after the second round when the jackpot A3-C3 is achieved. When the jackpot type (jackpot D3) in which the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in all rounds is reached, prize balls can be obtained simply by continuing to hit left during the jackpot. That is, since there is no need to hit the right ball with the possibility that the ball may enter the second ball entrance 640, after the big hit, it is disadvantageous in the lottery of the second special symbol (that is, the probability variable state is granted. difficult) There is no possibility of becoming a big hit (low). In other words, there is no (low) possibility of winning again in the lottery executed after the big win based on the reserved balls that exist at the end of the big win. Therefore, when the jackpot type (jackpot D3) in which the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in all the rounds, the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction. Henceforth, the jackpot classification which can digest a jackpot by hitting left-handed in all rounds is called a "left-handed jackpot." On the other hand, the type of jackpot in which the jackpot is completed by hitting the right hand from the second round onwards is referred to as "right hit jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot type in which the right specific prize winning port 657a of the right variable prize winning device 657 is opened after the second round, the prize ball cannot be obtained unless the player hits to the right after the second round. (It becomes difficult), so a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during the big win. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot, the second special symbol reserved balls can be accumulated up to the upper limit. If there are many reserved balls with the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot, the possibility of winning a jackpot by lottery based on the reserved balls after the jackpot is higher than the left-handed jackpot. For this reason, after the end of the big win, it is possible to create a state in which the lottery of the second special symbols, which is disadvantageous when the big win occurs, is continuously executed. It is possible to provide a novel game property that allows the player to play the game in the hope that all the reserved balls of the second special symbols accumulated during the big win will come off (small win).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, a promotion effect, which is a type of display effect in the third embodiment, will be described. In the third embodiment, as described above, there is a possibility that the main symbols with the number "7" will be aligned only during the variable display that informs the left-handed jackpot. Also, the main symbols with odd numbers other than "7" may be aligned during the variable display that informs the 16-round jackpot. In other words, there is a possibility that even-numbered main symbols will be displayed even in the variable display for informing a left-handed jackpot and the variable display for informing a 16-round jackpot. In the third embodiment, in the variation display that notifies the 16-round jackpot or the left-handed jackpot, when the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, the opening period of the jackpot to the end of the first round Until the interval period, the main symbols that are once aligned in the variable display are changed (promoted) to the main symbols imitating the number "7" or the main symbols imitating odd numbers other than "7". executed. As a result, even when the main patterns simulating even-numbered numbers are arranged in the variable display, the promotion performance is executed during the big win and the players can expect to be promoted to the patterns simulating odd-numbered numbers. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a decrease in the player's motivation to play even when an even number of symbols are displayed in the variable display. Also, the promotion effects are configured to be executed more frequently in the case of success in promotion than in the case of failure in promotion. As a result, the player's expectation for promotion can be improved at the time when the promotion effect is executed.

FIG. 89(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during the opening period of the jackpot in which promotion effects are set. As shown in FIG. 89(a), during the opening period of the jackpot in which the promotion effect is set, the third pattern (the main pattern imitating "2" in the example of FIG. 89(a)) is aligned in the variable display. continues to be displayed. In addition, a display area HR5 is formed in the upper center of the display screen, in which characters such as "Chance for promotion!! Hit the left side!!" are displayed. Further, to the left of the display area HR5, there is displayed a display area HR1 in which the characters "left shot" and an image of an arrow pointing to the left are displayed. Also, a cannon 815 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that an effect using the cannon 815 is executed by hitting left.

It should be noted that the reason why left-handed hitting is notified during the opening period is that the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in the first round. By starting left hitting during the opening period, the ball can be efficiently entered into the left specific winning hole 656a at the start of the first round.

FIG. 89(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the first round. As shown in FIG. 89(b), during one round, when the winning of a ball (entering a ball) into the left specific winning hole 656a is detected, the cannon 815 emits the third pattern (main pattern imitating "2"). A bombardment production is executed. As shown in FIG. 89(b), the portion of the third pattern that has been bombarded is in a state where the view is blocked by the smoke K1. Thereafter, every time a ball entering the left specific winning hole 656a is detected, the effect of bombarding the third symbol (bombardment effect) is executed, and the smoke increases.

FIG. 90(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of one round in a jackpot set with a promotion effect. As shown in FIG. 90(a), at the end of one round, smoke K1 to K7 is displayed so as to cover all the third symbols. By covering all the third patterns, the player can predict whether the third patterns appearing after the smoke clears will remain even numbers or will be promoted to odd numbers. can improve expectations for promotion.

FIG. 90(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the interval period after the end of one round when the promotion to the left-handed jackpot was successful (that is, the current jackpot type was the left-handed jackpot). . As shown in FIG. 90(b), when the promotion to the left-handed jackpot succeeds, after the smoke K1 to K7 clears, an effect is executed in which three main symbols imitating the number "7" appear. be done. In addition, the characters "Promoted to Super Big Bonus!!" are displayed in the display area HR5. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the left-handed hit has been a big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel great satisfaction.

In addition, in the case of promotion to a symbol indicating a right-handed jackpot in 16 rounds (a main symbol imitating an odd number other than "7"), the characters "Promoted to Big Bonus!!" Is displayed. Also, if the promotion fails (that is, the jackpot type this time was a right-handed jackpot other than 16 rounds), the main pattern will be changed to an even-numbered pattern even after the smoke K1 to K7 has cleared. Along with the execution of the effect that the player has not been promoted, the characters "promotion failed..." are displayed in the display area HR5. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the promotion was successful, and if the promotion was successful, the type of the jackpot. Therefore, an easy-to-understand presentation can be provided.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the variable probability switch 65e3 is provided inside the left variable winning device 656. The specific winning opening 656a is configured to be opened in the first round of the jackpot. By constructing in this way, the opening operation can be made the same until the interval period of one round of the big win ends, regardless of whether the left-handed jackpot or the right-handed jackpot is won. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the left specific winning hole 656a or the right specific winning hole 657a, it can be difficult to distinguish whether the jackpot is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot. Therefore, when the promotion performance is executed, the game can be played while paying more attention to the content of the performance, so that the performance effect of the promotion performance can be enhanced.

Further, in the third embodiment, in the first round in which the left variable winning device 656 having the variable probability switch 65e3 inside operates, the promotion effect is executed. As a result, when the promotion performance is executed, even if it is confirmed that the ball enters the left specific prize-winning port 656a and becomes a probability variable state after the big win, attention is focused on whether or not the promotion will occur. to play the rest of the game in the first round.

Here, in a general gaming machine, a game during a big hit is performed with the most attention paid to whether or not the variable probability state occurs. That is, it is common to play a game during a big win with the most attention paid to whether or not a ball enters a prize winning hole in which a variable probability switch is built. However, when the ball passes through the variable probability switch and it is confirmed that the variable probability state is established, the player is satisfied at that point, and the rest of the game in the jackpot is just like the work to get the prize ball. There were cases where it became

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the promotion effect can be executed from the opening period of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. That is, even after passing through the variable probability switch 65e3, the promotion effect is continued. By configuring in this way, after the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 and it is determined that the variable probability state is established, the result of the promotion performance can be made to pay attention, so that the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3. After that, you can draw attention to the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the big win from turning into a mere work to get the prize balls, so that the interest in the game during the big win can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. First, the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 91(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91(a), the ROM 202 in the third embodiment has an open scenario selection table 202e added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13(a)). There is a difference. Moreover, it is different in that the configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG.91(b), the detail of the 1st hit classification|category selection table 202b in the 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 91(b), in the third embodiment, four types of jackpots A3 to D3 are provided as jackpots of the first special symbol. In addition, four types of jackpots E3 to H3 are provided as jackpot types of the second special symbols. Jackpots A3 to C3 and E3 are jackpots corresponding to jackpots A to D in the first embodiment, respectively, and are right-handed jackpots with 16 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds and 16 rounds, respectively. That is, it is a jackpot in which the right specific prize winning opening 657a is opened in rounds other than the first round of the jackpot. In the right-handed jackpot, the right specific winning hole 657a is opened from the second round, so the ball cannot be made to enter the right specific winning hole 657a and a prize ball cannot be obtained unless the ball is hit rightward from the second round onwards. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, by continuing to hit right during the big win, a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 provided on the right side of the game board 13, and the big win ends. Sometimes, it is possible to make a state in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol which is disadvantageous is accumulated up to the upper limit. Therefore, after the jackpots A3 to C3 and E3 are finished, the game can be shifted to the door breakthrough mode in the same manner as after the jackpots A to D in the first embodiment. Thus, after the big hits A3 to D3 and E3 are finished, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game is played in the hope that a special pattern lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special pattern will not result in a big hit. can.

On the other hand, the jackpots D3 and H3 are left-handed jackpots in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all the rounds. When a left-handed hit hits a jackpot, a prize ball can be obtained simply by continuing to hit left-handed during the jackpot. That is, since there is no need to hit the ball to the right where the ball may enter the second ball entrance 640, after the big hit, it is disadvantageous in the lottery of the second special symbol (that is, the probability variable state is granted. Difficult) There is no possibility of becoming a big hit (go directly to the variable mode without going through the door breakthrough mode). Therefore, when the jackpot type (jackpots D3, H3) in which the left specific prize winning port 656a is opened in all rounds, the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

Also, the jackpots F3 and G3 are jackpots corresponding to the jackpots E and F in the first embodiment, and are jackpot types in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot. That is, it is a jackpot type in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened only for 0.2 seconds in each round of jackpot. Since the variable probability switch 65e3 is not provided in the right variable winning device 657, it is possible to more reliably prevent the balls from passing through the variable probability switch 65e3 when the big wins F3 and G3 are achieved. Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol can be made more disadvantageous. In addition, in accordance with the configuration in which the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in each round when the big hits are F3 and G3, the right specific winning opening 657a is opened even when the small winning is achieved in the third embodiment. It is configured to be open. As a result, when the right specific winning port 657a is opened, it is difficult to identify whether the opening is due to the big wins F3, G3 or the small wins. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether or not the second special symbol has been a big hit from the operation of the right specific winning port 657a, so as in the first embodiment, more attention is paid to the result of the door breakthrough mode effect. You can play games.

As shown in FIG. 91(b), with respect to the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and the number of rounds is 16 rounds "jackpot A3" is associated. is defined (see 202b1 in FIG. 91(b)), and the range of "5 to 84" is defined in association with "jackpot B3" in which the number of rounds is 5 (see 202b2 in FIG. 91(b) ), the range of “85 to 94” is defined in association with the “jackpot C3” with two rounds (see 202b3 in FIG. 91(b)), and the range of “95 to 99” includes rounds A "jackpot D3" with a number of 16 rounds is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 91(b)). Since the value that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2 is 100 from "0 to 99", the ratio of "jackpot A3" to be determined when the first special symbol jackpot is 5% (5/ 100). Similarly, the rate at which "jackpot B3" is determined is 80% (80/100), the rate at which "jackpot C3" is determined is 10% (10/100), and the rate at which "jackpot D3" is determined ratio is 5% (5/100). That is, in the lottery of the first special symbols, the percentage of right-handed jackpots (jackets A3 to C3) is 95%, and the percentage of left-handed jackpots (jackpot D3) is 5%. Since the ratio of left-handed big wins is extremely low compared to the right-handed big wins, the player can be given a greater sense of satisfaction when an advantageous left-handed big win is reported.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 91(b), for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 3", and the number of rounds is 16 rounds "jackpot E3". It is defined in association (see 202b5 in FIG. 91(b)), and in the range of "4 to 48", the number of rounds is defined in association with "jackpot F3" with 7 rounds (in FIG. 91(b) 202b6), the range of "49 to 98" is defined in association with the "jackpot G3" with 6 rounds (see 202b7 in FIG. 91(b)), and "99" has the number of rounds. 16 rounds of "jackpot H3" are associated and defined (see 202b8 in FIG. 91(b)). Therefore, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is determined, the ratio of determining the "jackpot E3" is 4% (4/100), and the percentage of determining the "jackpot F3" is 45% (45/100). , the ratio of determining the “jackpot G3” is 50% (50/100), and the percentage of determining the “jackpot H3” is 1% (1/100). That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big hit, the ratio of determining a big hit (either of the big wins F3 and G3) to which the variable probability state is difficult to be given is 95%. Therefore, when the second special symbol hits the jackpot during the door breakthrough mode, the game shifts to the normal mode at an extremely high rate (95%). In addition, the ratio of the left specific winning opening 656a to be opened (provided with a variable probability state after the jackpot) to be a jackpot is 5%, of which 4% is a right-handed jackpot (jackpot E3), 1% is a left-handed jackpot ( It becomes a jackpot H3). Therefore, when a left-handed jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the player can be made to think that he or she is very lucky, so that the player can be made to feel greater joy. .

In addition, in the third embodiment, there is a possibility that the promotion effect will be executed even when the jackpots E3 and H3 are obtained. Since the jackpots E3 and H3 are both jackpots of 16 rounds, they are the jackpots E3 and H3, and when the promotion effect is executed, the effect is executed in which the main symbols simulating odd numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display. After that, in the promotion performance, the performance of whether or not to be promoted to the main symbol imitating "7" is executed. The jackpot H3 is a rare jackpot type that is selected only at a rate of 1% in the jackpot of the second special symbol, but when the jackpot is announced, the possibility of the jackpots F3 and G3 accounting for 95% is eliminated. be done. That is, when the big win is reported in the lottery of the second special symbols, it is determined that the distribution is the 4% big win E3 or the 1% big win H3. Therefore, since the jackpot H3 occurs at a rate of 1/5, the player can be made to recognize that this is the most advantageous chance to win the jackpot. Furthermore, as described above, the promotion production is set so that the ratio of execution is higher when the promotion is successful, so the big hit is notified by the lottery of the second special symbol, and it has developed into a promotion production. In this case, the player's expectation for the big win H3 can be further heightened. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the open scenario selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 92(a). This opening scenario selection table 202e shows, for each jackpot type, as an opening scenario, the type of the specific winning opening to be opened in each round of the jackpot (either the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a), and the opening period ( It is a data table that defines either a long release of up to 30 seconds or a short release of up to 0.2 seconds. When the jackpot is won, the unlock scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is read out from the unlock scenario selection table 202e, and stored in the unlock scenario storage area 203ba, which will be described later. During the jackpot, the opening operation of each round is set according to the scenario defined in the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a), as an opening scenario corresponding to the jackpot types "jackpot A3" to "jackpot C3" and "jackpot E3" (that is, right-handed jackpot), the left specific winning for the first round A long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the mouth 656a is defined in correspondence, and a long opening (maximum 30 seconds) of the right specific winning opening 657a is defined in association with each round after the second round (Fig. See 202e1 at 92(a)). As a result, when a right-handed jackpot is won, the left specific winning opening 656a is opened only in the first round, and the right specific winning opening 657a is opened in each round after the second round. Therefore, from the second round onwards, a prize ball cannot be obtained unless a game during a jackpot is played by aiming at the right specific winning hole 657a by hitting to the right. A large amount of balls enter 640 during the jackpot. Therefore, when the right-handed jackpot ends, the second special pattern reserved balls can be in a state of reaching the upper limit value, so that the lottery of the second special pattern that is disadvantageous after the jackpot ends is continuously executed. mode can be set. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player is expected to continuously lose the lottery of the second special symbols after the end of the big win.

Also, as shown in FIG. 92(a), as an opening scenario corresponding to the jackpot types "jackpot D3" and "jackpot H3" (that is, left-handed jackpot), the length of the left specific winning opening 656a for all rounds Open (up to 30 seconds) is associated and defined (see 202e2 in FIG. 92(a)). As a result, in the left-handed jackpot, a large number of prize balls can be obtained by simply hitting the left-handed ball aiming at the left specific winning hole 656a in all rounds. That is, since there is no need to hit to the right during the big win, there is no possibility that the ball will enter the second ball entrance 640 during the big win. Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, in many cases, the number of balls held in the second special pattern, which is disadvantageous at the end of the jackpot, is 0, and after the jackpot ends, the most advantageous directly without going through the "door breakthrough mode". It is possible to shift to "probability change mode". As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction when a left-handed hit hits the jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 92(a), as an opening scenario corresponding to the jackpot types "jackpot F3" and "jackpot G3", the right specific winning opening 657a is short-opened (maximum 0.2 seconds) for all rounds. ) are associated and defined (see 202e3 in FIG. 92(a)). As a result, when "jackpot F3" and "jackpot G3" are achieved, it is almost impossible to obtain a prize ball, and the ball is made to enter the left specific prize winning port 656a and the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3. there is no possibility to do so. In other words, it is possible to form a disadvantageous jackpot in which prize balls are not obtained and the variable probability state is not given after the jackpot.

In this way, in the third embodiment, by setting the opening operation according to the opening scenario defined in the opening scenario selection table 202e, the same opening operation can be set accurately each time for all jackpot types. can be done.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92(b). FIG. 92(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92(b), the RAM 203 of the third embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 18) in that an open scenario storage area 203ba is added. ing. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The opening scenario storage area 203ba is a storage area for storing (storing) the opening scenario when the jackpot is won and the opening scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is read out from the opening scenario selection table 202e. is. At the start of each round in the jackpot, the type of specific winning opening to be opened (left specific winning opening 656a, right specific winning opening 656a, right specific winning opening) is determined according to the opening scenario stored in this opening scenario storage area 203ba and the number of new rounds. port 657a), and the duration of the opening (either long open, up to 30 seconds, or short open, up to 0.2 seconds) is determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 93, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 93(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93(a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment has a promotion effect lottery table 222b added to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(a)). There is a difference. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Details of the promotion effect lottery table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 93(b). This promotion effect lottery table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining (lottery) whether or not promotion effects can be executed. value) are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93(b), "0 to 49" is defined in association with "jackpot A3" as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j (see FIG. 93). (b) 222b1). Although the details will be described later, the effect lottery counter 223j is configured as a random number counter that generates a value within the range of "0 to 99", and can take 100 values of "0 to 99". Therefore, the rate at which the promotion effect is determined when the "jackpot A3" is achieved is 50% (50/100). When the “jackpot A3” (16 round right-handed jackpot) was reached and the promotion effect was decided, an effect was performed in which three main patterns (third patterns) imitating the same even numbers were aligned in the variable display. After that, in the promotion performance in the jackpot, the performance of promotion to the main pattern imitating the same odd numbers other than "7" is executed, and the right hitting jackpot of 16 rounds is reported. On the other hand, when the promotion effect is not determined, an effect is executed in which the main symbols simulating odd numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display effect. In this case, the normal jackpot effect (see FIG. 8) is executed without executing the promotion effect during the jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 93(b), "0 to 19" is associated with "jackpot B3", "jackpot C3", and "jackpot E3" as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j. (see 222b2 in FIG. 93(b)). Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223j, 20 counter values (random numbers) corresponding to the execution of the promotion production are defined, so "big win B3", "big win C3". , and “jackpot E3”, the rate at which the promotion effect is determined is 20% (20/100). In the lottery of the first special pattern, "jackpot B3" (5 rounds of right-handed jackpots) or "jackpot C3" (2nd rounds of right-handed jackpots) is determined, and the promotion effect is determined, even numbers in the variable display After the performance in which three main patterns imitating the same number are aligned is executed, the performance in which the promotion fails in the promotion performance in the jackpot is executed. In addition, when the promotion effect is not determined, after the effect in which the main symbols simulating even numbers are aligned in the variable display effect, the normal jackpot effect is performed without developing into the promotion effect (see FIG. 8). is executed.

In addition, when the second special symbol lottery results in “jackpot E3” (16 round right-handed jackpot) and the promotion effect is decided, the main character imitating the same odd number other than “7” in the variable display After the performance in which three patterns are aligned is executed, the performance in which the promotion is failed in the promotion performance executed during the jackpot is executed. In addition, if the promotion effect is not determined, after the effect is executed in which the main symbols imitating the same odd numbers other than "7" are aligned in the variable display, the normal jackpot will not develop into the promotion effect. An effect (see FIG. 8) is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 93(b), for the "jackpot D3" and "jackpot H3" (16 round left-handed jackpot), the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j is "0 to 79". are defined in association with each other (see 222b3 in FIG. 93(b)). Out of 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223j, 80 counter values (random numbers) corresponding to the execution of the promotion production are defined, so that "jackpot D3" or "jackpot H3 , the rate at which the promotion effect is determined is 80% (80/100). When the lottery of the first special pattern results in a ``jackpot D3'' and the promotion performance is determined, a performance is executed in which three main patterns imitating the same even numbers are aligned in the variable display, and then the promotion in the jackpot. In the production, the production to be promoted to the main pattern imitating the number "7" is executed, and it is reported that the left-handed hit jackpot in 16 rounds. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery results in a “big hit H3” and the promotion effect is decided, an effect is executed in which three main symbols imitating the same odd numbers other than “7” are aligned in the variable display. After that, in the promotion performance in the big win, the performance of promotion to the main pattern imitating the number "7" is executed, and the left-handed big win of 16 rounds is notified. Incidentally, when the promotion effect is not determined, an effect in which the main symbols imitating the number "7" are aligned is executed in the variable display effect. In this case, the promotion performance is not executed during the big win, but the normal jackpot performance is executed.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 93(c). As shown in FIG. 93(c), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 20(b)). The difference is that an effecting flag 223k is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect lottery counter 223j is a counter used for the lottery of the effect mode such as determination (lottery) of whether or not promotion effect can be executed. This effect lottery counter 223j. The value is updated within the range of "0 to 99". At the time of lottery for the promotion performance, it is determined whether any of the random numbers (counter values) specified in the promotion performance lottery table 222b and the value of the performance lottery counter 223j match, and if the values match, the promotion performance is performed. execution is decided.

The promotion effect in progress flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the promotion effect is set. If this promotion effect in progress flag 223k is ON, it indicates that the promotion effect is set, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the promotion effect is not set. This promotion effect flag 223k is set to ON when winning the execution lottery for the promotion effect executed at the start of the variation of the third symbol when any one of the jackpots A to E and G is won in the lottery for the special symbol. (See S5405 in FIG. 103). Moreover, it is set to OFF after setting the end of the promotion effect (see S4515 in FIG. 101).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. First, the details of the special symbol variation process 3 (S121) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This special symbol variation process 3 (S121) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

Among the special symbol variation processing 3 (see FIG. 94) in the third embodiment, in each processing of S201 to S221, each processing of S201 to S221 of the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28) The same processing is performed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 94) in the third embodiment, when the process of S219 is completed, the release scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is selected from the release scenario selection table 202e. A scenario selection process (S241) is executed, and the process proceeds to S220. Details of this open scenario selection process (S241) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the above-described open scenario selection process (S241). In the open scenario selection process (S241), first, the open scenario selection table 202e (see FIG. 92(a)) is read (S1901) to identify the open scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type (S1902). Next, the identified release scenario is stored in the release scenario storage area 203ba (S1903), and this processing ends.

According to the opening scenario specified in this opening scenario selection process (see FIG. 95) and stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba, the opening operation of each round during the jackpot can be set to an appropriate operation according to the jackpot type. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) will be described. This jackpot control process 3 (S1031) is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the opening operation during the jackpot.

Among the jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 96) in the third embodiment, S1101 to S1105 and S1107 to S1112, respectively, in the jackpot control processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37) S1101 to S1105, , and the same processes as those of S1107 to S1112 are executed. Also, in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 96) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (See FIG. 38), instead of (S1131), the big hit operation setting process 3 is executed, and the process ends. Details of this jackpot operation setting process 3 (S1131) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the big hit operation setting process 3 (S1131). This jackpot action setting process 3 (S1131) is a process for setting the opening action according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Among the jackpot control processing 3 (S1131) in the third embodiment, each processing of S1202 to S1204 is the same processing as each processing of S1202 to S1204 of the jackpot operation setting processing (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment. is executed.

Also, when the jackpot action setting process 3 (see FIG. 97) in the third embodiment is executed, first, the data of the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba is read (S1211), and the read data , the type of the specific winning opening to be opened in this round (the left specific winning opening 656a or the right specific winning opening 657a) and the opening time are specified (S1212). Next, the opening of the type of specific winning opening (left specific winning opening 656a or right specific winning opening 657a) specified in the process of S1212 is set (S1213), and the opening time specified in the process of S1212 is started this time. The round time of the round is set (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1202.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process 3 (see FIG. 97), the opening operation can be set accurately for each round according to the opening scenario stored in the opening scenario storage area 203ba.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 103. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 98, the jackpot related process 3 (S4221) executed by MPU 201 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. This jackpot related process 3 (S4221) is a process executed instead of the jackpot related process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment.

Of the jackpot related processing 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, in each of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408, the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment The same processes as those of S4401, S4403, S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 are executed.

Also, in the jackpot related processing 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the opening command is received in the processing of S4401 (S4401: Yes), then whether or not the promotion effect is set , an opening command process for setting the corresponding opening effect is executed (S4411), and this process ends. The details of this opening command processing (S4411) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the jackpot related processing 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include the round number command in the processing of S4403 (S4403: No), then it is determined whether or not the command received from main controller 110 includes a winning command (S4412). In the process of S4412, if it is determined that the winning command is included (S4412: Yes), the specific winning opening (left specific winning opening 656a, or A winning command process for setting a winning effect when a winning to the right specific winning port 657a) is detected is executed (S4413), and the process ends. The details of this winning command process (S4413) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4412 that no winning command is included (S4412: No), the process proceeds to S4405.

In addition, in the jackpot related processing 3 (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the closing command has been received in the processing of S4405 (S4405: Yes), the closing command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 49), close command processing 3 is executed (S4414), and this processing ends. The details of this close command process 3 (S4414) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, details of the opening command processing (S4411) described above will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this opening command processing (S4411).

In this opening command process (see FIG. 99), first, it is determined whether the flag 223k during promotion effect is ON (S5201), and when it is determined that the flag 223k during promotion effect is ON (S5201: Yes), An opening effect (see FIG. 89(a)) corresponding to promotion effect is determined (S5202), and the process proceeds to S5204. On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if it is determined that the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is off (S5201: No), the opening effect of the aspect corresponding to the type of this big hit is determined (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Transition. In addition, the aspect corresponding to the jackpot type is, in the case of the jackpots F3 and G3, an aspect as if the door breakthrough mode effect is continuing. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type other than jackpots F3 and G3, the effect is such that a jackpot is announced.

In the process of S5204, an opening command for display indicating the aspect of the opening effect determined in the process of S5202 or S5203 is set (S5204), and this process ends. By executing this opening command process, it is possible to execute the opening effect in an appropriate mode depending on whether or not the promotion effect is set.

Next, details of the winning command process (S4413) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. When this winning command process (S4413) is executed, first, it is determined whether the promotion effect flag 223k is ON (S5301), and if it is determined that the promotion effect flag 223k is ON (S5301: Yes ), the main pattern is bombarded by the cannon 815 (see FIG. 89(b)) (S5302), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5301, when it is determined that the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is off (S5301: No), the normal mode winning effect is set (S5303), and this process ends. Note that the prize-winning effect in the normal mode indicates a effect suggesting the acquisition of a prize ball, and for example, the effect of winning a gold coin or the effect of displaying the characters "GET" is executed.

By executing this winning command process (see FIG. 100), every time a ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a in one round of a jackpot in which a promotion effect is set, the main pattern is stepped by the bombardment effect. can be hidden by the smoke image. By executing an effect in which the main pattern is hidden and it is not known whether the player will be promoted or not, the player's expectation for the promotion can be further enhanced.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the notification as to whether or not the player is promoted is performed in the interval period after the end of one round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, every time a ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to report the result. , or after 30 seconds have passed), the result may be notified. Further, for example, when the execution of the promotion effect is determined, it may be determined by lottery together with the number of wins to the left specific winning opening 656a to notify the result of the promotion effect. By configuring in this way, every time the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a, the player can expect to be notified of the promotion. It is possible to further improve the interest of the person. Furthermore, in the case where the result of the promotion presentation can be notified even if the termination condition of the first round is not satisfied, the notification of the result before the termination condition is satisfied may be limited to the case of promotion. . That is, when the promotion fails, the failure of the promotion is always notified in the interval period after the end of the first round. A configuration may be adopted in which notification is made when the number of wins is less than the upper limit number of wins for 656a. By configuring in this way, while expecting to be notified of promotion for each prize winning to the left specific prize opening 656a, if promotion fails, expectations for promotion will be longer (until the end of one round). can be sustained.

Next, the details of the close command process 3 (S4414) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This close command process 3 (S4414) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the close command process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment.

Of the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, each process of S4502 to S4505 is the same as each process of S4502 to S4505 of the closing command process (see FIG. 49) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed.

Also, when the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment is started, first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is ON (S4511). In the process of S4511, when it is determined that the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is ON (S4511: Yes), it means that the end condition of the first round of the big hit in which the promotion effect is set is satisfied. That is, it means that it is time to inform the result of the promotion effect, so next, it is determined whether the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots B3, C3, or E3 (S4512). In the processing of S4512, when it is determined that none of the jackpots B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: No), it is determined that the jackpot type for which the promotion effect is set this time is the jackpot A3, D3, or H3. means. In other words, it means that it is a jackpot type that succeeds in promotion, so in this case, an interval effect (see FIG. 90(b)) for informing success in promotion is set (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4515. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S4512, if it is determined that the jackpot being executed is one of the jackpots B3, C3, or E3 (S4512: Yes), it means that it is a jackpot type that fails to promote, An interval effect is set to notify of promotion failure (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4515. In the process of S4515, by turning off the promotion effect in progress flag 223k, the end of the promotion effect is set (S4515), and the process ends.

Further, in the closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, in the process of S4511, if it is determined that the promotion effect in progress flag 223k is off (S4511: No), then the jackpot during execution is the jackpot F3 or G3 (S4516). In the process of S4516, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed is either the jackpot F3 or G3 (S4516: Yes), the process proceeds to S4502. On the other hand, in the processing of S4516, when it is determined that the jackpot being executed is neither the jackpot F3 nor G3 (S4516: No), the interval performance is set according to the number of rounds (S4517), and the processing is executed. finish.

By executing this closing command process 3 (see FIG. 101), when the end condition of the promotion effect is met (the end timing of one round is reached), the result of an appropriate mode according to the jackpot type is notified. be able to.

Next, details of the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 3 (S4131) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. In the variable display setting process 3 (S4131) in the third embodiment, the processes in S4801 to S4809 are the same as the processes in S4801 to S4809 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. Processing is performed.

In addition, in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 101) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4803 ends, the promotion effect lottery process for determining (lottery) whether or not the promotion effect can be executed is executed (S4821). ), and the process proceeds to S4804. Details of this promotion effect lottery process (S4821) will be described with reference to FIG.

In the promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 103), first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that notifies any of the big hits A3 to E3, H3 (S5401), and the big hits A3 to H3, E3. If it is determined that it is not a variation pattern that notifies any of them (that is, it is either a miss or a big hit F3 or G3) (S5401: No), there is no possibility of executing the promotion effect, so this processing is performed as it is. exit.

On the other hand, in the process of S5401, when it is determined that the variation pattern is one of the big hits A3 to E3, H3 (S5401: Yes), the process for drawing lots to determine whether promotion effects can be executed is executed. Specifically, first, the promotion effect lottery table 222b is read (S5402). By determining whether or not there is a matching value, it is determined (lottery) whether or not promotion effect can be executed (S5403). Then, it is determined whether or not execution of the promotion effect is determined by the determination (lottery) by the processing of S5403 (S5404).

In the process of S5404, when it is determined that execution of the promotion effect has not been determined (S5404: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5404, if it is determined that the execution of the promotion effect is determined (S5404: Yes), the execution of the promotion effect is indicated by setting the flag 223k during promotion effect to ON (S5405), and then this time It is determined whether the jackpot type is either jackpot E3 or H3 (S5406).

In the processing of S5406, if it is determined that neither the jackpot E3 nor the H3 is the jackpot, it means that the first special pattern is a jackpot and the execution of the promotion effect is decided, so the third pattern imitating an even number is changed. It is set to the stop pattern at the time of stop (S5407), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in the process of S5406, if it is determined that it is either the jackpot E3 or H3 (S5406: Yes), it means that the second special symbol jackpot and the execution of the promotion effect have been decided. A third symbol simulating an odd number other than "7" is set as a stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop (S5408), and this process is terminated.

By this promotion effect lottery processing (see FIG. 103), it is possible to determine whether or not the promotion effect can be executed (lottery), and to set the stop pattern when winning the promotion effect.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the ball can be entered (easy to enter) when hitting to the left, and the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter) when hitting to the right. and a right specific winning hole 657a in which the ball can enter the ball (easy to enter) when hitting to the right and cannot enter the ball (difficult to enter) when hitting to the left. It is configured to provide two types of specific winning holes. When the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a during the jackpot, the prize ball is paid out, and the ball passes through the probability variable switch 65e3 inside the left variable winning device 656, so that after the jackpot, a special symbol is obtained. The probability change state is given. On the other hand, when the ball enters the right specific winning hole 657a, the same number of prize balls as when the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a are paid out, but the game state is set after the big win. does not affect In addition, in the third embodiment, as the type of jackpot, left-handed jackpots in which only the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in all rounds (left-handed hits in all rounds win more prize balls than right-handed hits). A jackpot that makes it easier to win more), the left specific prize winning port 656a is opened in the first round, and the right specific prize winning port 657a is opened in other rounds (the right specific prize winning port 657a is easy to open). From the second round onwards, a jackpot that makes it easier to win more prize balls by hitting with the right than with hitting with the left) is provided. In the left-handed jackpot, it is not necessary to hit the right during the jackpot (there are few opportunities to hit the right), so it is difficult to accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls during the jackpot, while in the right-handed jackpot, two Since the prize ball cannot be obtained (becomes difficult) unless the ball is hit rightward after the round, it becomes easier to accumulate the second special symbol reserved ball during the big win. Therefore, when a left-handed jackpot hits, it becomes difficult to draw a lottery of the second special symbol that is disadvantageous after the jackpot ends (the possibility that the jackpot of the second special pattern is suspended at the end of the jackpot is reduced. ) On the other hand, when a right-handed jackpot hits, a lottery of a second special symbol that is disadvantageous after the jackpot ends is likely to be executed (there is a possibility that the jackpot of the second special pattern will be suspended at the end of the jackpot). is higher than the left-handed jackpot). As a result, after the left-handed jackpot is finished, the game can be played without anxiety until the next jackpot is won. On the other hand, after the right-handed big hit is finished, the game can be played in anticipation of not getting a big hit until all the lotteries of the second special symbols that are disadvantageous based on the reserved balls of the second special symbols are finished. As described above, in the third embodiment, the game characteristics after the end of the big win can be switched according to the kind of the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition to the number of rounds of the big win and the game state set after the big win, the easiness of execution of the lottery of the second special pattern after the big win (easiness of holding the continuation game) is also variable according to the kind of the big win. can be done. This makes it possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. Therefore, when the most advantageous left-handed jackpot hits, the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

Further, in the third embodiment, the promotion effect can be executed from the opening period of the jackpot to the interval period of the first round. That is, even after passing through the variable probability switch 65e3, the promotion effect is continued. By configuring in this way, after the ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 and it is determined that the variable probability state is established, the result of the promotion performance can be made to pay attention, so that the ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3. After that, you can draw attention to the production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the big win from turning into a mere work to get the prize balls, so that the interest in the game during the big win can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in the first round of the jackpot regardless of whether it is a right-handed jackpot or a left-handed jackpot. The round and the number of times the left specific winning hole 656a is opened in the case may be arbitrarily determined. In the case of right-handed jackpots, when the left specific winning opening 656a is opened in rounds other than the first round, the opening of the right specific winning opening 657a in the first round causes the first round to start. At that point, the type of jackpot will be known. Therefore, the promotion performance should be executed in the opening period while the jackpot type is unknown.

In the third embodiment, two types of variable winning devices, the left variable winning device 656 and the right variable winning device 657, are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13, respectively. A variable winning device may be provided only on the right side of the board 13 . A storage valve 63a may be provided upstream of the second ball inlet 640 in the same manner as in the modification of the second embodiment described above. Then, instead of providing a left-handed big hit and a right-handed big hit, the storage state of the storage valve 63a is maintained during the big win (that is, even if a right-handed hit is made during the big win, the ball reaches the second ball entrance 640). impossible) and a jackpot type in which the stored state is canceled (that is, the ball can reach the second ball entrance 640 when hitting right during the jackpot). By configuring in this way, the number of variable winning devices can be reduced, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, as the promotion effect, the effect of bombarding the third symbol with the cannon 815 is executed, but the effect mode of the promotion effect is not limited to this. Any production mode may be set as long as it is possible to inform the player of two types of modes of promotion success and failure in an easy-to-understand manner. An effect may be executed in which the player 811 attacks the third symbol to promote the symbol. Also, the promotion effect is not limited to the effect of promoting the third symbol. For example, without displaying the third symbol, an effect of a battle between the adventurer 811 and the enemy may be performed, and a left-handed hit jackpot may be announced by winning the enemy. As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom in production.

In the third embodiment, the timing of notifying the result of the promotion effect is set to the end timing of the first round, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls have won in the left specific winning hole 656a, the result of the promotion effect may be notified. Also, the number of prizes to be won, which triggers the notification of the result, need not be fixed, and may be determined by lottery, for example. In this case, it is also possible to set the number of prizes that are highly selected in the case of a left-handed jackpot or the number of prizes that are highly selected in the case of a right-handed jackpot. By configuring in this way, the player who wants to perceive the jackpot type (whether it is a left-handed jackpot or a right-handed jackpot) at an early stage according to the timing when the result of the promotion effect is notified, is able to specify the left side. A game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole 656a. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot.

In the third embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the promotion performance by lottery when the jackpot is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to always execute the promotion performance. As a result, the lottery process for the promotion effect can be omitted, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, for example, when a right-handed hit hits the jackpot, the promotion performance is executed in a mode of failing in promotion without fail, and when a left-handed hit hits the jackpot, a lottery draws the number "7" in the variable display performance. or to display the main pattern simulating an even-numbered number once, and to decide whether to promote to the third pattern simulating the number ``7'' by the promotion effect. may be By constructing in this way, when a right-handed jackpot hits, it is possible to play a game during the jackpot in anticipation of promotion every time. Further, for all the jackpot types, the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot type may be definitely displayed by the variable display effect without executing the promotion effect. As a result, any performance can be executed during the opening period of the jackpot or in the first round, so that the degree of freedom of performance can be increased.

In the third embodiment, when the first special pattern lottery results in a left-handed jackpot and the promotion effect is executed, the third pattern imitating an even number is definitely displayed in the variable display effect. , but not limited to these. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a third symbol imitating an odd number other than "7" is confirmed and displayed, and is promoted to a main symbol imitating the number "7" by promotion effect. In addition, in the third embodiment, the promotion effect is executed from the opening period of the jackpot to one round of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the promotion performance may be executed within the fluctuation period of the variable display performance for notifying the big win, or the promotion performance may be executed over the fluctuation period and the opening period of the big win.

In the third embodiment, the promotion performance is configured to be executed as a performance for informing whether the left-handed big win or the right-handed big win, but there is no distinction between the left-handed big win and the right-handed big win. It may be configured to be applied to the machine 10 (for example, a general game machine in which a variable probability jackpot and a normal jackpot exist). More specifically, for example, when a probability variable jackpot is won, the third pattern imitating an even-numbered number or the third pattern imitating an odd-numbered number is definitely displayed by a variable display effect. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, the third pattern imitating an even-numbered number is determined and displayed by a variable display effect. Then, when the probability variable jackpot and the third pattern simulating an even-numbered number are determined and displayed, the structure may be such that promotion performance is executed to promote to the third pattern simulating an odd-numbered number after that. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, a configuration may be adopted in which a promotion effect in which promotion fails is executed at a predetermined rate. As a result, the versatility of the promotion performance can be enhanced.

In the third embodiment, the probability variable switch 65e3 is provided only inside the left variable winning device 656, and if the ball is not entered into the left variable winning device 656 during the big win, the variable probability state of the special symbol is given after the big win. It was configured to not be. That is, even in the case of a right-handed jackpot, in the first round, the game is played aiming at the left variable winning device 656 by left-handed hitting, but it is not limited to this. For example, inside the right variable winning device 657, similarly to the left variable winning device 656, the variable probability switch 65e3 may be provided. Then, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, only the right variable winning device 657 may enter a state in which the ball can be entered in all rounds. With this configuration, when a right-handed hit is a big hit, the ball is passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 by left-handed hit only in the first round and a prize ball is obtained, and in the remaining rounds, the shooting of the ball is stopped. It can prevent the method from being performed. That is, in order to avoid the ball from entering the second ball hole 640 during the right-handed jackpot, the ball is hit only in the round (first round) in which the ball can enter the left specific winning hole 656a. An irregular game method can be suppressed. When this irregular game method is executed, the number of prize balls obtained in the right-handed jackpot is small (only one round's worth is obtained), but since the second special symbol lottery is not executed, it is usually No falling into mode. Therefore, the variable probability state continues semipermanently, and there is a possibility that the hole may be disadvantaged unexpectedly. On the other hand, in the right-handed jackpot, only the right variable winning device 657 is set to be able to enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hole.

In the third embodiment, by varying the ease with which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a big win according to the type of the big win, It was configured to vary the possibility of including a big hit (so-called possibility of occurrence of a reservation inside Renso). That is, by switching the direction in which prize balls can be obtained by shooting balls according to the type of jackpot, it was configured to physically change the possibility of occurrence of a pending inner ring, but this is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the likelihood of occurrence of a reservation within the reservation is variable. More specifically, for example, in the same way as in the first embodiment, only on the right side of the game board 13 is provided a specific winning hole for winning a prize ball during a big hit, and the variable state of special symbols and The number of lotteries may be changed according to the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot where the number of times of lottery to be in the variable probability state is 1 and a jackpot where the number of draws is 4) may be configured. By configuring in this way, in the case of a jackpot type in which the number of times of lottery to be in a probability variable state is one, the probability of winning a big hit in the second and subsequent special symbol lotteries is low, so even the first lottery is lost. If so, the possibility of being out of all the lotteries based on the ball on hold increases. On the other hand, when the number of lotteries to be in the probability variable state is four times, all the lotteries based on the second special symbol reserved ball are executed in the probability variable state of the special symbol, so that they are suspended at the end of the big win. A lottery based on the reserved ball is more likely to win a big hit. Therefore, the operation similar to that of the above-described third embodiment can be realized with only one variable winning device. It should be noted that, as in this modification, if the variable probability state is terminated with the number of times of lottery predetermined according to the jackpot type, for example, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is all out. As a benefit in this case, it may be configured so as to be in a time-saving state of normal symbols. In other words, the number of lotteries that become the probability variation state of the special symbols and the number of lotteries that become the time-saving state of the normal symbols are different, and regardless of the number of lotteries that become the probability variation state of the special symbols, for example, 100 times of special symbol lotteries What is necessary is just to constitute so that it may become the time-saving state of a normal design over until it is completed. In this case, as a more advantageous jackpot type, a jackpot type may be provided in which the variable probability state of the special symbol is not given and only the time saving state is given. By constructing in this way, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol executed after the end of the big win can be performed in a low probability state of the special symbol, so that the lottery of the second special symbol is all lost. can increase the chances of

In the third embodiment, a jackpot type in which reserved balls of the second special pattern are easily accumulated during the jackpot and a jackpot type in which it is difficult to accumulate are provided, so that the reserved balls that are reserved at the end of the jackpot win again with the jackpot type. Although the possibility of becoming is made different for each jackpot type, it is not limited to this. For example, by providing a jackpot type in which reserved balls with normal patterns are easy to collect during the big win and a jackpot type in which reserved balls with normal patterns are difficult to collect during the big win, the number of reserved balls with normal patterns at the end of the jackpot can be increased. It may be configured to vary the possibility of occurrence of a normal symbol hit after a big win. In addition, by varying the winning probability of the normal pattern after the big win according to the type of the big win, during a predetermined period after the end of the big win (for example, until all the reserved balls of the normal pattern at the time of the end of the big win are consumed). A configuration may be adopted in which the ratio of winning the prize is changed according to the type of the jackpot. Even when configured in this manner, the degree of advantage of the player can be varied according to the type of jackpot, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the type of jackpot.

In the third embodiment, when the promotion effect is set, the ball enters the specific winning hole 656a in the first round, and even after it is confirmed that the special symbol will be in a variable state after the big hit, the ball Each time the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a, an effect (effect of bombarding the third symbol) is executed to arouse the expectation of promotion or not, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the promotion effect may be executed during the opening period of the jackpot. In the first round of the jackpot, an effect indicating that the left specific winning hole 656a is open (for example, an effect in which an image imitating the letter "V" is displayed) may be executed. good. With this configuration, the player does not notice that the big win has started and continues to see the result of the promotion effect, and fails to enter the ball into the left specific winning hole 656a (variable probability big win). In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the fact that the variable probability state is no longer given after the big hit. Further, for example, in the first round of the jackpot, the effect indicating that the left specific prize winning port 656a is the round is displayed during the first round (even after the ball enters the left specific prize winning port 656a). , may be continuously executed, and the promotion performance may be executed after one round is completed. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to put the ball into the left specific winning hole 656a, so that the player can be prevented from being excessively disadvantaged. Furthermore, no promotion effect is executed (that is, the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot type is always stopped and displayed in the variable display), and the left specific prize winning opening 656a is opened during the jackpot. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the effect indicating whether or not is continuously executed during each round. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from hitting the ball in the wrong direction.

In the third embodiment, when the ball entered inside the left variable winning device 656 passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, the pachinko machine 10 with specs that shifts to the variable probability state after the end of the big win is one of the jackpots. After winning to the left specific winning port 656a in the round and confirming the variable probability state, the result of the promotion effect is notified, but the specs to which the promotion effect can be applied are not limited to this. do not have. If the specifications allow the player to transition to either an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state compared to the advantageous state at a predetermined opportunity, the promotion effect can be applied. For example, when a ball enters a specific area inside a variable prize winning device provided on a game board, a configuration may be adopted in which a promotion effect is applied to a pachinko machine 10 with specs that gives a jackpot. That is, in the lottery based on the start-up prize, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not the ball can easily enter the variable prize winning device (whether or not the variable prize winning device can be moved). Even in such a case, the jackpot is not awarded unless the ball enters the variable winning device and the ball does not enter the specific area. In this specification, the type of jackpot given when a ball enters the specific area may be notified after the ball enters the specific area and the jackpot is confirmed. More specifically, at the time of winning the lottery for whether or not the variable prize winning device can be moved, lottery for the type of jackpot given when the ball enters the specific area and whether or not promotion performance can be executed are drawn. Then, when a lottery for promotion performance is won, even if an advantageous jackpot type is won, a third pattern combination (for example, the same even number) corresponding to a disadvantageous jackpot type is displayed. Then, when the ball is entered into the variable winning device while the variable winning device is actuated and the ball is allowed to enter, and the ball is entered into the specific area, it corresponds to the original jackpot type. An effect of displaying a third symbol combination (for example, promotion to the same odd number or maintaining the same even number) is executed. By configuring in this way, even after the ball enters the specific area, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance in anticipation of being notified of the advantageous jackpot type by the promotion performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from entering the specific area to finishing the big win from becoming like a work for simply winning a prize ball. That is, since the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 not provided with the variable probability switch 65e3 (the game state after the big win is predetermined according to the type of the big win), the game state after the big win is finished can be notified by the promotion effect. may In other words, during the jackpot, after making it difficult for the player to identify which of the time saving state and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot, the case where the time saving state is set and the case where the probability variable state is set. Then, it is notified that it has become a time saving state at the end of the jackpot. Then, when the probability variable state is set, the promotion effect is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the probability variable state is changed as a result of the promotion effect based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, when a predetermined number of starting winnings are detected). It is good also as composition which performs production which is promoted. Further, when the time-saving state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot and the promotion performance is executed, the promotion to the variable probability state may be failed based on a predetermined trigger. In addition, regarding the pachinko machine 10 in which the same opening pattern is set for the specific winning hole for the small winning and the so-called sudden probability, when the fact that the small winning is once reported and the winning is suddenly won. , may be configured to notify promotion to sudden definite at a predetermined opportunity by promotion production. Furthermore, in the jackpot type in which an open pattern that can pass through the variable probability switch is set and the jackpot type in which an open pattern that cannot pass through the variable probability switch is set, an open pattern that cannot pass through the variable probability switch is set. It may be configured to notify the jackpot type and notify the promotion to the jackpot type in which an open pattern that can pass through the variable probability switch is set at a predetermined opportunity.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. In the above-described third embodiment, when the jackpot set with the promotion performance is started, the promotion performance is executed over the opening period of the jackpot, the first round period, and the interval period. In the promotion effect, the combination of the main symbols confirmed and displayed in the variable display effect for notifying the big win is promoted to the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the big win with a higher degree of advantage for the player. In the case of success, it was configured to inform that it was a more advantageous jackpot type.

On the other hand, in this modified example, during the execution period of the variable display for notifying the big win and the period from the start of the big win to the interval period of the first round, one variable display effect is executed in a pseudo manner. and Thus, in addition to whether or not a big win is achieved, the kind of big win (whether it is a left-handed big win or a right-handed big win) in the case of a big win can be notified by one variable display effect.

FIG. 104(a) is a display that can be displayed when a special symbol lottery results in a left-handed jackpot (either of D3 or H3), and when a special symbol lottery results in a ready-to-win state. It is the figure which showed the aspect. As shown in FIG. 104(a), in this modification, when the ready-to-win state occurs, the characters "left-handed" and the image of the arrow pointing left are displayed on the upper left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. is displayed in the display area HR1. In addition, a display area HR5 is displayed in the upper center portion of the display screen, in which characters such as "Hit to the left to stop the symbols!" are displayed. These displays allow the player to easily understand that the symbol will be stopped by shooting the ball to the left.

In the case of a big win, the display mode shown in FIG. 104(a) is set at the timing when the opening period of the big win is started. That is, in this modification, the third symbol is not stop-displayed even during the opening period of the jackpot, and the ready-to-win state remains. Under this circumstance, if the left-hand shot is not suggested, there is a possibility that the ball will be delayed toward the left specific winning hole 656a in the first round. If the hitting to the left specific winning hole 656a is delayed, there is a possibility that the ball cannot enter (the ball does not pass through the variable probability switch 65e3) during the opening period of the left specific winning hole 656a, resulting in a variable probability big win. Despite this, there is a possibility that the probability change state will not be given after the big hit. In order to prevent such a situation, in this modified example, when the opening period starts during execution of the variable display, an effect suggesting a left-hand shot (see FIG. 104(a)) is executed. In addition, in order to prevent (suppress) from being perceived whether it is a big hit or not from the display mode, even during the execution of the fluctuation display of the loss, a predetermined timing (for example, 1 second before the third symbol is confirmed and displayed) It is configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 104(a)) suggesting hitting to the left. As a result, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the game is a big win or a loss until the third symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be maintained for a longer period of time.

FIG. 104(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when either the big win D3 or H3 is achieved and all the third symbols are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 104(b), when the player hits to the left during the execution of the effect suggesting hitting to the left and the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a, the number "7" is displayed. An effect is executed in which the third pattern (main pattern) simulating is aligned. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that a left-handed hit has resulted in a big win. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which a big hit is notified based on the ball entering the left specific winning hole 656a, more attention is paid to the direction of the shot ball (whether the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a). You can play games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate. In addition, if the special symbol lottery is lost and an effect suggesting a left-hand shot is executed, the left specific prize-winning hole 656a is not opened, so the ball fired by left-hand hitting enters the left specific prize-winning hole 656a. never do. In this case, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed since the effect suggesting a left-handed shot is executed, the stop symbols of the combination of failures (combination other than the squares) are stop-displayed.

In the example of FIG. 104, the case of the big wins D3 and G3 has been described, but the same effect is executed for other big wins. That is, when the jackpots A3 and E3 are obtained, an effect is executed in which third patterns (main patterns) imitating odd numbers other than "7" are aligned, and when the jackpots B3 and C3 are obtained, even numbers are produced. An effect is executed in which the third pattern (main pattern) imitating the number of is aligned. In addition, even when the player is out of reach with a reach state, the reach state may occur with a number other than "7".

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing changes over time in the effect mode after the start of the variable display effect in the case of a big win in the lottery of special symbols and in the case of a loss accompanied by a ready-to-win state. First, with reference to FIG. 105(a), the change over time of the effect mode in the case of a big win will be described.

FIG. 105(a) shows changes over time in the mode of presentation in the case of a super reach and a big win. As shown in FIG. 105(a), when the variable display corresponding to the big win is started, first, the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds, and then the ready-to-win state occurs after 10 seconds have passed. . After that, through normal reach performance for 20 seconds, super reach performance develops when 30 seconds pass from the start of fluctuation. Furthermore, after the super reach effect continues for 28 seconds, an effect suggesting left-handed hitting (left-handed navigation, see FIG. 104(a)) is displayed. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 105(a), at the time when the effect suggesting a left-handed hit is displayed, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display corresponding to the big win has actually passed, and the opening period of the big win has started. ing. Therefore, in the first symbol display device 37, the variable display of the first symbol (special symbol) ends when 58 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation, and a stop symbol indicating a big hit is displayed.

After one second of the opening period has passed and the ball enters the left specific winning port 656a after the left specific winning port 656a is opened, a third pattern ( An effect (see FIG. 104(b)) in which the main symbols are aligned is executed. Then, it is notified that the jackpot has been won, and an effect indicating that the jackpot is in progress is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 105(b), even if the lottery result is out with reach state, from the start of the variable display to the display of left-handed navigation (see FIG. 104(a)) is the same as in the case of a big hit (see FIG. 105(a)). Then, as shown in FIG. 105(b), in the case of misalignment, the combination of the third symbol indicating misalignment is stopped and displayed one second after left-handed navigation (see FIG. 104(a)) is displayed. Then, it is notified that it is out.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 105, the variation time in the case of a special symbol jackpot is set 2 seconds shorter than the variation time in the case of a loss. This is because, when the loss variation display is performed, the lottery result of the special symbol is notified within the variation display execution period, whereas when the win variation display is performed, the big win is announced. This is because the variable display is performed over the opening period and the period of the first round. If the same variation time is used for the jackpot and the loss, the timing to generate the left-handed navigation will be different between the case of the jackpot and the case of the loss, and the lottery result will be announced before the end of the variation effect due to the difference in the variation time. There is a risk of being detected. On the other hand, in this modified example, since the variation time is longer for the missed game than for the big win, the timing of displaying the left-handed navigation can be matched between the big win and the missed game. Therefore, it becomes difficult to perceive the lottery result of the special symbol from the fluctuation time, so that the result of the fluctuation display effect can be noticed.

As described above, in the modification of the third embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern, the opening period of the jackpot, and the period of the first round 1 is configured to execute the variable display effect. By constructing in this way, not only whether it is a big win but also the type of the big win can be notified in one variable display performance, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the variable display performance. can be done.

In addition, in this modification, when a big win is achieved in the variable display effect, it is configured to be in a ready-to-win state with the type of numbers corresponding to the type of big win. It is good also as a structure which draws lots. When execution of the promotion performance is determined, the promotion performance is performed by using the remaining period after the notification of the jackpot pattern in the first round of the jackpot and the interval period after the end of the first round. may be configured to execute By constructing in this way, even if the third symbols with even-numbered numbers are once arranged, the player can expect the promotion performance to be executed, so that the player's interest can be improved. .

In this modified example, during the opening period of the jackpot and the last two seconds of the variation pattern corresponding to the loss, an image suggesting a left-handed hit is displayed in the upper left display area HR1 of the display screen. It is not something that can be done. For example, an effect suggesting a left-handed shot to the player may be performed in a more conspicuous manner than the changing third symbol. Specifically, for example, instead of or in addition to the configuration of the above modification, the characters "Aim for V!" It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an image schematically shown is displayed. Then, when the ball enters the left specific winning hole 656a (when the lottery result of this special symbol is a big win), an image in which the third symbols imitating the same numbers are displayed in a stopped state is displayed. As the background, an image imitating the letter "V" may be displayed on the front side of the third pattern. The display of the image simulating the letter "V" may be continued until, for example, one round is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to see the result of the effect without launching the ball until the end of the variable display. Therefore, when a big win is achieved, the ball can be more reliably entered into the left specific winning hole 656a in the first round. Further, for example, the changing third symbol may be displayed in a translucent manner so that the effect suggesting a left-handed shot is more conspicuous, or the third symbol may be temporarily hidden.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 112. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, when the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, it is configured to have a small hit with a high probability, and the opening period of the opening and closing door 65f1 in the case of a small hit, the jackpot E, The opening period of the opening/closing door 65f1 in each round of F is the same (0.2 seconds). Furthermore, the length of the interval period after the 1st to 4th rounds of the jackpots E and F are completed is configured to be 1 second, which is the same period as the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. . As a result, even if the big hit E or F is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol held at the end of the big win, or if they are all out, the time until the door breakthrough mode effect ends. A series of opening and closing operations of the opening and closing door 65f1 are configured to be the same.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, there is a type of jackpot that the player can easily detect whether or not the result of the variation display of the second special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot is wrong, and a type that is difficult to detect. It was configured to provide a jackpot. As a result, depending on the type of jackpot, the playability of not knowing whether or not the hit of the second special pattern was included until the result of the door breakthrough mode production is confirmed, and the execution of the door breakthrough mode production to determine whether it is out. It is possible to switch between the playability that is easy to perceive inside.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. The ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment has a configuration of the first winning type selection table 202b and a configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d with respect to the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13(a)). It is different in that Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 106, in the fourth embodiment, five jackpot types A4 to E4 are provided as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. In addition, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of jackpots F4 to H4 are provided.

Jackpots A4, B4, D4, F4 to H4 are jackpot types that operate in the same manner as the jackpots A to F in the first embodiment. That is, the jackpots A4 and F4 are both jackpots with 16 rounds, the jackpot B4 is a jackpot with 5 rounds, and the jackpot D4 is a jackpot with 2 rounds. When these big wins occur, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for 30 seconds at maximum in each round, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained during the big win and the balls can be easily passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the big win. can be done. Also, the jackpot G4 is a jackpot with 7 rounds, and the jackpot H4 is a jackpot with 6 rounds. When these jackpots are hit, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened only for 0.2 seconds at the maximum in each round, so it is almost impossible to obtain a prize ball, and there is almost no possibility that the ball will pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot. do not have.

The jackpot C4 has the same operation as the jackpot B4 (5 rounds jackpot), but after the jackpot is over, whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol is lost during the execution of the variable display based on the held balls of the second special symbol. easier to distinguish. More specifically, when the jackpot C4 is reached, after the jackpot ends, if the second special symbol lottery is lost, a variation time (3 seconds) are more likely to be selected. Therefore, by observing the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) is opened, it is possible to guess whether or not the lottery for the special symbol has been lost. In other words, when the player feels that the interval at which the specific winning port 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) is opened clearly exceeds one second after the big win, the opening of the special symbol this time becomes a miss (small win). It can be made to recognize that there is a high possibility that the opening is based on the fact that

Also, the jackpot E4 has the same operation as the jackpot D4 (two-round jackpot), but is a jackpot type that makes it easy to determine whether or not the lottery for the second special pattern is lost after the jackpot ends, similarly to the jackpot C4.

Thus, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot C4 or the jackpot E4 is reached, by observing the interval at which the specific winning port 65a (opening/closing door 65f1) is opened, it is possible to determine whether or not it is out. is configured so that it can be inferred. As a result, after the end of the jackpot, the game can be played by paying attention not only to the content of the door breakthrough mode effect but also to the opening interval of the specific prize winning port 65a (opening/closing door 65f1). In particular, during the execution of the performance (the performance of trying to open the door 814 using the tattered key 813) in which there is a high risk of winning the jackpot with the second special symbol that is disadvantageous, When the player feels that the opening interval of the winning opening 65a exceeds one second, the possibility that the current fluctuation is the fluctuation display corresponding to the loss increases, so that the player can be relieved. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, the big wins (jackpots C4, E4) from which it is easy to guess whether or not the lottery of the second special symbols executed after the big wins will be lost will be referred to as "special wins."

On the other hand, when it comes to big hits A4, B4, D4, F4, as in the first embodiment, whether the lottery result of the second special symbol executed after the big win is lost (small win) or big win. is impossible (difficult) to identify from the opening operation of the specific winning port 65a. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, depending on the jackpot type, it is not possible to know whether the hit of the second special symbol was included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is confirmed, and whether it is out. Since it is possible to switch between easily perceivable game characteristics during execution of the door breaking mode effect, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the operation during the big win (opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a, display mode of the third symbol display device 81) is configured to be exactly the same between the big win B4 and the big win C4. there is Similarly, the big win D4 and the big win E4 are configured so that the operation during the big win is exactly the same. For this reason, when the jackpot ends in the 2nd round or the 5th round, it is not possible to know whether the hit of the second special pattern was included until the result of the door breakthrough mode production is confirmed, and whether it has come off. It becomes difficult to identify which is set, whether it is the playability which is easy to perceive during execution of the door breaking mode effect. Therefore, even if the same period as the interval period is continuously set as the interval at which the specific winning opening 65a is opened, whether the winning of the second special symbol is included until the result of the door breakthrough mode effect is confirmed. It is possible to make the player think that the playability is set to be unknown. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of shifting to the variable probability mode until the door breakthrough mode effect is completed.

As shown in FIG. 106, for the first special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 "0 to 9" is defined in association with "jackpot A4", and "10 to 19 ” is defined in association with “jackpot B4”, the range of “20 to 89” is defined in association with “jackpot C4”, and the range of “90, 91” is defined in association with “jackpot D4” is defined in correspondence, and the range of “92 to 99” is defined in association with “jackpot E4”. That is, in the 5-round jackpots, the ``jackpot B4'' and the ``jackpot C4'' are configured so that the ``jackpot C4'' (special prize) is selected at a higher rate (7 times more likely to be selected). . In addition, in the 2-round jackpot "jackpot D4" and "jackpot E4", the "jackpot E4" (special win) is more likely to be selected (5 times more likely to be selected). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set a game property in which it is easy to perceive whether or not the player has come off during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, after the big win is over, the game can be played while paying more attention to the operation of the specific winning hole 65a.

The range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each of the jackpots F4 to H4 is the same as the jackpots D to F in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 107(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107(a), the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(a)). The difference is that a post-hit table 202d8 and a special post-hits table 202d9 are added.

The table 202d8 for post-special winning wins a big win in the lottery of the second special symbols within a range of 4 times or less of the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the special winning (big win C4 or E4) is completed. is a data table referenced by In addition, the table 202d9 for loss after the special win is in the range where the number of fluctuations of the special symbols executed after the end of the special win is 4 times or less, when the second special symbol lottery results in a loss (small win). is a data table referenced by The details of the special hit/return table 202d8 and the special hit/return table 202d9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107(b) and 107(c).

FIG. 107(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 202d8 for special hits and subsequent hits. As shown in FIG. 107(b), in the table 202d8 for special hits and subsequent hits, the value "0" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in association with "hit middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. , and the range of "1 to 198" are defined in association with "per hit short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 1 second. Therefore, if the second special symbol lottery is a big hit after the end of the special hit, the fluctuation time of 1 second is set with a high probability (198/199), but with a low probability (1/199) A variation time of 3 seconds may be set. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set (the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a becomes 3 seconds), it is not determined that the lottery result of the loss (small hit) is obtained, but the big hit. There is also a possibility of becoming.

FIG. 107(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 202d9 for special wins and losses. As shown in FIG. 107(c), in the table 202d9 for special hits and losses, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 66" corresponds to "losing middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds. The range of "67 to 198" is defined in association with "off-short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 1 second. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery results in a loss (small hit) after the special hit, a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set at a rate of about 34% (67/199). That is, the opening interval of the specific winning opening 65a becomes 3 seconds or more. As described above, when the second special symbol lottery after the special hit results in a big win, the variation time of 3 seconds is selected only with a very low probability, so the variation time is 3 seconds ( When the player recognizes that the time has exceeded 1 second), it can be made to think that the variable display currently being executed is likely to be the variable display corresponding to the loss. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property that the possibility of shifting to the probability variable mode can be predicted from the set variable time during execution of the door breakthrough mode effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 108, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 108, the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment has a variation number counter 203ca and a post-special hit flag 203cb added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18). They are different in that respect.

The variation number counter 203ca is a counter that counts the number of times of special symbol variation display (special symbol lottery) executed after the big hit. The initial value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the special symbol fluctuation start timing comes (see S2001 in FIG. 110 and S2201 in FIG. 112). In addition, when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the initial value is reset to 0 (see S253 in FIG. 109). When the second special symbol lottery is executed, one data table for determining the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the value of the variation number counter 203ca (Fig. 111 S2103, S2109).

The post-special win flag 203cb is a flag indicating whether or not the previous big win was a special win (big win C3 or E3). If this post-special win flag 203cb is ON, it means that the previous big win is a special win, and if it is OFF, it means that the previous big win is not a special win. The initial value of the special winning flag 203cb is set to OFF, and is updated according to the jackpot type at the start of the jackpot (see S254 in FIG. 109). When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, this post-special winning flag 203cb is referred to, and one data table for determining the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d (Fig. 111 (See S2105 and S2111). In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the update of the special winning flag 203cb is configured to be executed when setting the start of the big win, but it may be set at the end of the big win.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 109 to 112. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 109, special symbol variation processing 4 (S131) in the fourth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 4 (S131) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment.

Of the special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S201 to 212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221, the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28) ) are executed in steps S201-212, S214-S218, S220, and S221.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S207 ends, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol is performed. Execute (S251) and terminate this process. Details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S251) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S212 ends, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed (S252), and the process ends. The details of this special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S252) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 109) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big hit in the processing of S218 (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is reset to OFF. At the same time, the fluctuation number counter 203ca is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S253). Next, according to the type of the jackpot won this time, the post-special winning flag 203cb is updated (S254), and the process proceeds to S220. In the process of S254, the post-special win flag 203cb is set to ON when the special win (either of the jackpot C3 or E3) is won this time, and is set to OFF when the other jackpot types are selected. By switching the state of the post-special-hit flag 203cb according to the type of big win, the data table to be referred to for selecting the variation pattern can be switched according to the state of the post-special-hit flag 203cb after the end of the big win. Therefore, if the post-special hit flag 203cb is on, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol after the big win, the table 202d8 for post-special hit and the table 202d9 for loss after special hit are referred to for the variation pattern. is determined, a game property is set in which it can be relatively easily guessed whether or not the player is out based on the opening interval of the specific winning hole 65a. Further, if the post-special win flag 203cb is off, a game property is set in which it is difficult to identify whether the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big win wins or loses from the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. .

Next, with reference to Drawing 110, the details of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S251) mentioned above are explained. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S251) is, as described above, a process for starting the fluctuation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol.

In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 110), first, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is updated by adding 1 (S2001), and the data of the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired. (S2002). Next, the variable probability flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols (S2003). In the process of S2003, if the probability variation flag 203g is ON, it is determined that the probability variation state of the special symbol is present, and if the probability variation flag 203g is OFF, the special symbol low probability state is determined. In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol (S2003: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S2002 and the special symbol for high probability time Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained (S2004). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 13(b)). As described above, 40 random numbers from "0 to 39" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number that becomes the winning. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S2006.

On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variable state (it is in the special symbol low probability state) (S2003: No), the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S2002 and the first winning random number table for low probability (see FIG. 13(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S2005). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, "0 to 39"), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S2006.

Then, special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S2004 or S2005 (S2006). The details of this special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) ends, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is set ( S2007). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 223f (S2008). Then, the stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S2006) is set (S2009), and this process ends. These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 36).

Next, with reference to Drawing 111, the details of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern decision processing (S2006) mentioned above are explained. This special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S2006) is, as described above, a processing for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

In this special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit (S2101), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (S2101: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2002 of the process (see FIG. 110), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S2102). More specifically, the value of the first per type counter C2 obtained in the process of S2002 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 110) and the first per type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106) are compared. , to determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is a big hit F4 (16 round probability variable big hit). If it is in the range of "5 to 49", it is judged to be a jackpot G4 (7 rounds normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is judged to be a jackpot H4 (6 rounds normal jackpot) Determine (see FIG. 106).

In the process of S2102, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot F4 to H4). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot F4 to H4) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

When the process of S2102 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2103), and if it is 5 or more (S2103: Yes), from the variation pattern selection table 202d, per special figure 2 (5 fluctuations or more) table 202d5 is read (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2114.

On the other hand, in the process of S2103, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2103: No), it is determined whether the special hit flag 203cb is on (S2105), and the special hit flag If 203cb is on (S2105: Yes), from the variation pattern selection table 202d, read the table 202d8 for special hit after hit (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2114. Also, in the process of S2105, if it is determined that the flag 203cb after the special hit is off (S2105: No), from the variation pattern selection table 202d, read the table 202d4 for special figure 2 (4 variations or less) ( S2107), and the process proceeds to S2114.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is lost (S2101: No), first, the display mode at the time of loss is set (S2108). In the process of S2108, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front-rear out-of-reach, non-front-rear out-of-reach, or complete out-of-order.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 203ca is 5 or more (S2109), and if it is determined that it is 5 or more (S2109: Yes), the special figure 2 is removed from the variation pattern selection table 202d (5 variations or more ) table 202d7 (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2114. On the other hand, in the process of S2109, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 203ca is less than 5 (S2109: No), it is determined whether the special hit flag 203cb is on (S2111), and after the special hit If the flag 203cb is ON (S2111: Yes), the table 202d9 for special hits and after-out is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2112), and the process proceeds to S2114. Also, in the process of S2111, if it is determined that the flag 203cb after the special hit is off (S2111: No), read the table 202d6 for special figures 2 off (4 variations or less) from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2113 ), and the process proceeds to S2114.

In the process of S2114, based on the data table read out by any of the processes of S2104, S2106, S2107, S2110, S2112, and S2113 and the value of the variation type counter CS1, the lottery result of this special symbol is determined. The variation pattern to be shown is determined (S2114), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to Drawing 112, the details of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S252) mentioned above are explained. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S252) is, as described above, a process for starting a fluctuation pattern according to the lottery result of the first special symbol.

Of this special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 112), S2201 ~ S2205, and in each process of S2214 ~ S2216, S2001 ~ S2005 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see Figure 110), and S2007 ~ The same processing as each processing of S2009 is executed.

Also, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 112), when the process of S2204 or S2205 is completed, it is then determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained in the process of S2204 or S2205 is a big hit ( S2206), when it is determined that it is a big hit (S2206: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S2207). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S2202 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106) to determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is a big hit A4 (16 round probability variable big hit). If it is in the range of "10 to 19", it is determined to be a jackpot B4 (5 rounds of variable probability), and if it is in the range of "20 to 89", it is a jackpot C4 (5 rounds special hit). If it is in the range of "90, 91", it is determined to be a jackpot D4 (2 rounds of variable probability), and if it is in the range of "92 to 99", it is a jackpot E4 (2 rounds special hit). Determine (see FIG. 106).

In the process of S2207, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A4 to E4). Also, in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpots A4 to E4) are set as the stop types. When the process of S2207 is completed, the table 202d1 for per special figure is read from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2208), and the process proceeds to S2213.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2206 that the obtained lottery result is a loss (S2206: No), the display mode for a loss is set (S2209). In the process of S2209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, the third symbol display device As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether it is front-rear out-of-reach, non-front-rear out-of-reach, or complete out-of-reach.

Next, it is determined whether it is in the probability variation state of the special symbol from the state of the probability variation flag 203g (S2210), and when it is determined that it is in the probability variation state (S2210: Yes), the special figure 1 is removed from the variation pattern selection table 202d The (probability variation) table 202d3 is read (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, in the process of S2210, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in the probability variation state (S2210: No), read the table 202d2 for special figure 1 off (normal) from the variation pattern selection table 202d (S2212), and process to S2213.

In the process of S2213, the data table read by any of the processes of S2208, S2211, or S2212 and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S2213), and the process proceeds to S2214. do.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a jackpot of a type that allows the player to easily perceive whether or not the result of the variation display of the second special symbol executed after the jackpot ends is wrong, It is configured to provide a jackpot of a type that is difficult to perceive. More specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the big win is lost, the variation time of the period different from the interval period of the second special symbol is likely to be selected (special winning). and a jackpot type that is difficult to select. As a result, after the special win is over, the player can guess whether or not the lottery result is a loss by paying attention to the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1. That is, the player can be made to predict the possibility of shifting to the variable probability mode before the result of the door breaking mode effect is notified. On the other hand, after the end of the big win other than the special win, it is determined from the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 whether the opening/closing operation is due to continuous small wins or the opening/closing motion is due to the big win G4 or H4. becomes difficult. As a result, depending on the type of jackpot, it is not possible to know whether or not the hit of the second special pattern was included until the result of the door breakthrough mode production is confirmed, and whether or not the door breakthrough mode production is executed. It is possible to switch between the playability that is easy to perceive inside. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery after the special hit is lost (small hit), it is longer than the interval period (1 second) of the second special symbol jackpot (3 seconds However, the variable time (that is, the interval until the open/close door 65f1 is opened in the event of disconnection) is limited to this. not a thing It may be set arbitrarily within a range in which the player can determine that a period different from the interval period has been set. With this configuration, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened and closed at clearly short intervals, so there is a high possibility that the opening/closing of the opening/closing door 65f1 is caused by a small win for the player. I can make you think. Therefore, the game can be played while paying more attention to the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 65f1. In addition to the open/close door 65f1, a variable member capable of variable operation is provided, and the variable operation of the variable member is determined depending on whether it is a loss after a special win or a big win other than a special win. It is good also as a structure which makes it different.

In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is assumed to be disadvantageous to the player when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win. It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 which is advantageous. By configuring in this way, the higher the number of times the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened at intervals of 1 second after the end of the big win, the higher the expectation for the big win of the second special pattern. The player can be made to pay attention to the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 while playing the game.

In the fourth embodiment, there are provided a jackpot type in which the variable operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 after the jackpot ends is likely to be different from that in the jackpot, and a jackpot type that tends to be the same variable operation. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the mode of the effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to provide a jackpot type that tends to be different between the case of losing and the case of a jackpot, and a jackpot type that is likely to match. Also, for example, depending on the type of big win, the probability of a small win (that is, the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds)) probability in the case of a loss in the special symbol lottery may be different. It may be configured to allow As a result, the game can be played with the expectation that the opening/closing door 65f1 will not be opened (that is, it will come off).

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 139. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the variable probability switch 65e3 of the special discharge flow path 65e2 When the ball passes through, the game state after the big hit is set to a variable probability mode (variable probability state of special symbols and time saving state of normal symbols) advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, instead of the variable winning device 65, a V winning device 670 having the same external appearance and internal structure as the variable winning device 65 and different functions of each part is provided. ing. The V winning device 670 opens the opening/closing door 670f1 when a special symbol lottery results in a small win, so that a game ball can enter. Inside the V winning device 670, a V winning switch 670e3 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable probability switch 65e3 in the first embodiment. A game ball that enters the V winning device 670 during the open period of the opening/closing door 670f1 passes through the V winning switch 670e3, so that a big winning game is awarded after the small winning ends. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the special symbol lottery results in a small win and the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3 in the V prize device 670. It is configured so that the jackpot is started even when it is done. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the small hit is won with a high probability (for example, 9/10) only in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 6400). (The second special symbol lottery is easier to win a small prize than the first special symbol lottery), and the ease of entering the second ball entrance 6400 according to the game state is improved. It is configured to be variable. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the special symbol lottery is fixed regardless of the game state, and the opening probability of the electric accessory 6400a associated with the second ball entrance 6400 (normal symbol winning and (probability of winning), normal symbol fluctuation time, opening time, etc., are varied according to the game state, so that the possibility of winning a small win is changed according to the game state, resulting in a possibility of winning a big win. are different (so-called specifications of a 1-type 2-type mixer).

Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is configured to provide three types of game states. Specifically, a time-saving game state A that makes it easy to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, a normal game state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, and Three types of time saving game state B are provided. In the time-saving game state A, by playing a game aiming at the second ball entrance 6400, the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 6400 with a high probability, and the second ball can be played with almost no reduction in the number of balls held. A lottery of special symbols can be continuously executed. In addition, when the jackpot is achieved in the time-saving gaming state A, the time-saving gaming state A becomes again at a high rate (80%), so once the time-saving gaming state A is reached, the time-saving gaming state A and the jackpot easier to repeat. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state A becomes a gaming state that is extremely advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal game state, since it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, it becomes difficult to generate a V prize due to a small hit. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a big hit becomes low. Also, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the ratio of shifting to the time-saving game state after the big win is also low (for example, 50% ratio), so the normal game state is the most disadvantageous for the player. becomes. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state B, it is the same as the normal gaming state in that it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, but when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the time-saving gaming state B is the same as the normal gaming state. Since the rate of shifting to the game state A is the highest (for example, 100% rate), the state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when a big win is made in the time saving game state A, either the time saving game state A or the time saving game state B is set as the game state after the big win. By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving game state A is not set, it becomes the time-saving game state B that is more advantageous than the normal game state (it is easy to shift to the time-saving game state A when it becomes a big hit). , it is possible to prevent the player from immediately quitting the game when the time-saving game state A ends. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the following description of the fifth embodiment, the most disadvantageous normal game state is called "normal mode", the most advantageous time-saving game state A is called "renso mode", and it is disadvantageous during the stay, but it goes to consecutive house mode. The time-saving game state B, which is easy to shift to, is called a “pullback mode”.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 , the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 113, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 113 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 113, in the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment, the electric accessory 64a that was provided in association with the first ball entrance 64 in the first embodiment is deleted. Note that the first ball entrance 64 in the fifth embodiment receives a game ball shot (left-handed) toward a flow path provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. While it becomes possible to enter the ball, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball that is shot (hit to the right) toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the front view. The arrangement of nails and the like is set as follows. Further, below the first ball entrance 64, a variable prize winning device 650 is provided which is set in a state in which a game ball can enter in each round of the jackpot. The specific winning hole 650a of the variable winning device 650 is configured as a winning hole from which ten prize balls are paid out each time a game ball wins.

A V winning device 670 is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. As described above, this V winning device 670 has the same structure as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 4 to 6), but the function of each part is different. More specifically, in the V winning device 670, the opening/closing door 670f1 on the upper surface is normally closed, and only when a special symbol lottery results in a small win, the opening/closing door 670f1 provided on the upper surface is closed for a predetermined period of time. It is opened (for example, for 1.5 seconds), and a state is formed in which a game ball can enter inside through the V winning opening 670a, which is an opening. Inside the V winning device 670, instead of the normal discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 6(a)) and the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6(b)) in the first embodiment, the same structure as these A normal discharge channel 670e1 and a special discharge channel 670e2 are provided. The game ball that has flowed into the inside of the V winning device 670 flows down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 670e1 and the special discharge flow path 670e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the special discharge channel 670e2 is provided with a V winning switch 670e3 for starting a big hit after a small hit by passing a game ball. The details will be described later, but during the small hit, the game balls are basically distributed to the normal discharge flow path 670e1, and only for a short period of time (for example, 0.075 seconds). to form Therefore, even if the game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 670 during the opening period (1.5 seconds) of the open/close door 670f1 based on the small win, it is distributed to the special discharge channel 670e2. If it is not during the period, it will flow down the normal discharge channel 670e1, and the jackpot will not start. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the game ball is continuously shot aiming at the V winning device 670, the game ball enters the special discharge channel 670e2 at a rate of about once every 20 small hits. is configured to

As shown in FIG. 113, a through gate 67 is provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the front view of the game board 13, and a game ball enters thereunder. A second ball entrance 6400 is provided which triggers the execution of the lottery for the second special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 113, a large number of nails are planted in the area from the upstream side of the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the front view to the second ball entrance 6400. With these nails, almost all game balls that are fired at least with a firing strength that collides with the return rubber 69 (for example, a firing strength of 95% or more) flow down to the second ball entrance 6400 (guide can do. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the area for guiding the game ball to the second ball entrance 6400 will be referred to as the second ball entrance guide area.

The second ball entrance 6400 includes a horizontally long rectangular electric accessory 6400a that covers the second ball entrance 6400, and an electric accessory for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the electric accessory 6400a as an axis. a solenoid (not shown). The electric accessory 6400a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win. In the closed state of the electric accessory 6400a, the electric accessory 6400a and the game board 13 are closed so as to be on the same plane, so that the game ball can pass through the front side of the electric accessory 6400a. In addition, by tilting the electric accessory 6400a to the lower front side, an open state is temporarily formed in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 6400.例文帳に追加For this reason, even if the game ball is shot with a launch intensity that collides with the return rubber 6400, if the electric accessory 6400a is not in the open state at the timing when it reaches the second ball entrance 6400, the game ball will hit the second The ball passes through the entrance 6400 without being able to enter, and flows downward (the area where the V winning device 670, the variable winning device 650, the out port 66, etc. are provided).

As shown in FIG. 113, the inside of the second ball entrance guidance area and the upstream side of the second ball entrance 6400 branches into a right flow path R1 and a left flow path R2. A through gate 67 is provided in the left flow path R2 as shown in FIG. Furthermore, on the upstream side of the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2, a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance guidance area is sent to either the right flow path R1 or the left flow path R2. A sorting member 6600 for sorting is provided. Although the details will be described later, depending on the interval at which the game ball reaches, the distribution member 6600 tends to be biased toward one flow path, or the distribution member 6600 tends to alternately distribute to both flow paths. It is variable. More specifically, when the shooting interval of the game ball (the interval at which the game ball reaches the distribution member 6600) becomes longer (for example, when the shooting interval and arrival interval are 1.5 seconds or more) , while the game ball is distributed only to the right flow path R1 by the distribution member 6600, when the shooting interval of the game ball (the interval at which the game ball reaches the distribution member 6600) is shortened (for example , the shortest firing interval of 0.6 seconds), the game balls are alternately distributed to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 by the distribution means. In addition, when the game ball is shot at a shooting interval of 0.6 seconds to 1.5 seconds, depending on the arrangement of the distribution member 6600 when it reaches the distribution member 6600, the right flow path R1 Whether it is distributed or distributed to the left flow path R2 is variable. Therefore, if the shooting interval can be adjusted accurately between 0.6 seconds and 1.5 seconds, it is possible to continue distributing game balls only to the left flow path R2. The configuration of distribution member 6600 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

114(a) to (d) are diagrams showing the operation contents of the distribution member 6600. FIG. FIG. 114(a) shows a state in which the game ball has flowed down (dropped) toward the distribution member 6600 while the distribution member 6600 is arranged at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 114(a), the distribution member 6600 includes a rotating shaft 6600a, a substantially bar-shaped right receiving portion 6600R extending rightward with respect to the rotating shaft 6600a, and an upper left with respect to the rotating shaft 6600a. A substantially rod-shaped left receiving portion 6600L extending in the direction, a substantially rod-shaped hanging portion 6600b extending (drooping) in the lower left direction with respect to the rotation axis, and joined to the right side of the hanging portion 6600b in front view. and a substantially rectangular parallelepiped biased portion 6600c. The sorting member 6600 is configured to be capable of rotating clockwise and counterclockwise in a front view with the rotating shaft 6600a as the center of rotation, and the hanging portion 6600b can rotate with respect to the rotating shaft 6600a. By arranging it vertically downward, it is configured to have a substantially “Y” shape when viewed from the front. The weighted portion 6600c is made of a material with a higher density than the other portions (the right receiving portion 6600R, the left receiving portion 6600L, and the hanging portion 6600b) of the distributing member 6600, and the center of gravity of the distributing member 6600 as a whole is There is a difference in mass from the other parts to the extent that it substantially coincides with the center of gravity of the unevenly weighted portion 6600c. Specifically, for example, the biased portion 6600c is made of iron and has a mass of 4 g, while the other portions are all made of PS material and have a total mass of 0.5 g. It is In a state where no force other than gravity G acts on the sorting member 6600, the center of gravity is finally stabilized at the lowest position (the state where the potential energy is the lowest). Even if it is moved to the position, it will eventually return to the position shown in FIG.

The distribution member 6600 is configured so as to be able to receive game balls that have flowed down from above the second ball entrance guidance area with a right receiving portion 6600R and a left receiving portion 6600L. At the initial position (static position) of the distribution member 6600, when a game ball flows down from above the second ball entrance guidance area (see FIG. 114(a)), the game ball is received mainly by the right receiving portion 6600R. be done. When the game ball collides with the right receiving portion 6600R, a downward force acts on the right receiving portion 6600R when viewed from the front. In other words, a force acts to rotate the distribution member 6600 in the clockwise direction in a front view about the rotation shaft 6600a. Here, the mass of the game ball is heavier (about 5.5 g) than the total mass of the distribution member 6600 (about 4.5 g). , the right receiving portion 6600R is pushed downward, and the distribution member 6600 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. As a result, the distribution member 6600 rotates until the right receiving portion 6600R forms an inclination in the direction from the upper left direction in front view to the lower right direction (see FIG. 114(b)). Therefore, the game ball received by the right receiving portion 6600R flows down in the lower right direction when viewed from the front along the slope formed by the right receiving portion 6600R, and falls into the right flow path R1. That is, game balls are distributed to the right channel R1.

In this way, the game ball that first reaches the distribution member 6600 in a state where the distribution member 6600 is arranged at the initial position (completely stationary) is distributed to the right flow path R1. there is As described above, the through gate 67 is provided in the left flow path R2, while the through gate 67 is not provided in the right flow path R1. This flow path is disadvantageous to the player because there is no possibility of it being done. By arranging the initial position of the distribution member 6600 so that it can be distributed to the disadvantageous channel, it is possible to prevent the initial state of the game machine from becoming an advantageous state.

After the game ball has been distributed to the right flow path R1 (dropped from the right receiving portion 6600R), the force (load due to the weight of the game ball) rotating the distribution member 6600 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is applied. Therefore, only the gravity G acts on the sorting member 6600 . Here, immediately after the game balls are distributed to the right channel, the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 is moved to the upper left side from the initial arrangement. Therefore, of the gravity G acting on the distribution member 6600, the component Gc parallel to the rotation direction is a force in the direction (lower right in the front view) to rotate the distribution member 6600 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Due to this rotational component Gc of gravity, the distribution member 6600 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It should be noted that even if the distribution member 6600 reaches the initial arrangement by this rotating operation, it does not stop immediately, but passes through the initial arrangement once. This is because kinetic energy is generated during the rotational movement from the arrangement shown in FIG. 114(b) to the initial arrangement. Therefore, the distribution member 6600 continues to rotate in the counterclockwise direction even after passing through the initial arrangement, and temporarily stops when the kinetic energy becomes 0 (the speed of the rotation becomes 0). See FIG. 114(c)). In addition, if the player continuously shoots the game ball to the second ball entrance guidance area (that is, if the game ball is shot at the shortest shooting interval of 0.6 seconds), the initial The next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 before and after this temporary rest position (see FIG. 114(c)), which is placed after passing the placement. That is, the movable range ( The next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 while it is moving in the rotation range).

As shown in FIG. 114(d), when the game ball reaches the distribution member 6600 after passing through the distribution member 6600, the game ball mainly collides with the left receiving portion 6600L. The left receiving portion 6600L that has collided with the game ball exerts a force in a downward direction in front view due to the weight of the collided game ball. In other words, a force acts to rotate the distribution member 6600 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. As described above, since the mass of the game ball is heavier than the total mass of the distribution member 6600, the distribution member 6600 rotates and the left receiving portion 6600L tilts downward from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front. Form. The game ball received by the left receiving portion 6600L rolls along this inclination and drops into the left flow path R2 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. That is, game balls are distributed to the left flow path R2.

After the game ball is distributed to the left flow path R2 (dropped from the left receiving portion 6600L), a force (load due to the weight of the game ball) rotates the distribution member 6600 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. disappears, only the gravity G acts on the sorting member 6600 . Therefore, after distributing the game ball to the right flow path R1 (see FIGS. 114(b) and (c)), of the gravity G acting on the distributing member 6600, the component Gc parallel to the rotation direction As a result, the distribution member 6600 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

After that, while the game balls continue to be continuously shot at the shortest (0.6 second) shot interval, the distribution member 6600 moves the game balls to one flow path (right flow path R1, left flow path The action of distributing the game ball to one of the flow paths R2) and the action of rotating to an arrangement in which the game ball can be distributed to the other flow path in reaction to the distributing of the game ball are repeated. As a result, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 by continuously shooting the game balls at the shortest shooting intervals. As described above, since the through gate 67 is provided in the left flow path R2, by continuously shooting the game balls at the shortest shooting interval, the through gate is opened at a ratio of one game ball to two. 67 can be passed.

On the other hand, when the game ball is continuously shot at a shooting interval of 1.5 seconds or more, the recoil of the game ball distributed to the right flow path R1 temporarily distributes the game ball to the left flow path R2. Although it rotates up to the initial position, it rotates again toward the initial position, and thereafter performs a pendulum movement centering on the initial position. The amplitude of this pendulum movement decreases over time due to air resistance and dynamic friction acting on the rotating shaft 6600a. The pendulum motion is performed (or is stationary) only in the range where the hanging part 6600b is arranged on the left side of the vertical line drawn vertically downward from 6600a. Therefore, if a game ball is shot with an interval of 1.5 seconds or longer, the game ball will be distributed only to the right flow path R1, so that the game ball can be played through the through gate 67 provided in the left flow path R2. It becomes impossible to pass the ball. That is, since it becomes impossible to execute the lottery for the normal symbols, it is particularly easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400 (when the game ball hits the normal symbol, the game ball In the consecutive game mode in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that easily enter the second ball entrance 6400 and the release pattern of the electric accessory 6400a are set), it is extremely disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, in the continuous mode, a game ball can be shot at the shortest shooting interval for the player who wants to distribute the game ball to the left flow path R2. That is, since game balls can be continuously shot in the continuous mode, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, the distribution member 6600 is performing pendulum motion by adjusting the firing interval according to the operation of the distribution member 6600 between the shortest firing interval (0.6 seconds) and 1.5 seconds. It is also possible for the game ball to reach the distribution member 6600 only at the timing when the position is changed to the position where the game ball can be distributed to the left flow path R2. In addition, in order to shoot the game ball at the shortest shooting interval, it is sufficient to perform a relatively simple operation of maintaining the operation handle 51 at the maximum amount of rotation. Delicate manipulation of the operating handle 51 is required to shoot the game ball as intended at a shooting interval other than the shooting interval. Therefore, except for some players with high game skills, it is better to continue to shoot the game balls at the shortest shooting interval by keeping the operation handle 51 at the maximum amount of rotation. By distributing the balls to the left flow path R2, it is possible to execute more lotteries of normal symbols.

In this manner, the distribution member 6600 in the fifth embodiment can change the flow path through which game balls flow down according to the details of the operation of the handle 51 by the player. That is, by performing the operation of maintaining the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 and continuing to shoot the game ball at the shortest shooting interval, the game ball is reliably flowed alternately into the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2. can be made In other words, there is a disadvantageous flow path (right flow path R1) in which the lottery for normal symbols is not executed even if the game ball passes through, and an advantageous flow path (right flow path R1) in which the lottery for normal symbols is executed by the passing of the game ball. It can be alternately distributed to the flow path (left flow path R2). In addition, while the distribution member 6600 is performing a pendulum movement centering on the initial arrangement (see FIG. 114 (a)) in reaction to distributing the game ball to one of the flow paths, the game moves to the left flow path R2. By operating the operation handle 51 so as to make the game balls reach the target during the period in which the movable range in which the balls can be distributed is moved, most of the game balls that are shot are moved to the left side where the through gate 67 is provided. It is also possible to distribute to the flow path R2. In other words, it is also possible to realize an operation of biasing and distributing to a flow path that is advantageous for the player. Also, although there is no merit for the player, by operating the operation handle 51 so that the shooting interval is 1.5 seconds or longer, the game balls can be distributed by modulating the flow path that is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to change the details of the operation on the operating handle 51 according to the skill of the player and the action desired to be realized, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In the fifth embodiment, in the consecutive game mode (time-saving game state A), the electric accessory 6400a is opened at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second ball entrance 6400. be done. That is, a very short variation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the variation time of normal symbols. In addition, 0.2 second is set as the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a in the case of winning the normal symbol. It takes about 0.2 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to reach the second ball entrance 6400. Reach 6400 and enter the ball. Therefore, during the continuous mode, all the game balls distributed to the left flow path R2 are sent to the second ball entrance 6400 by simply hitting the game balls to the right with the maximum firing intensity and the shortest firing interval. It can be made to enter the ball. That is, game balls can enter the second ball entrance 6400 at a rate of about one in two.

On the other hand, in the pull-back mode (time-saving gaming state B), the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is also shot to the second ball entrance guidance area next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and is moved to the right flow path. A normal symbol variation time (0.5 seconds) is set in which it is impossible (difficult) to enter the second ball entrance 6400 for the game ball distributed to R1. By setting the variation time of 0.5 seconds, when the normal pattern hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has passed through the second ball entrance 6400 (that is, through After 0.2 seconds, which is the flow-down period of the flow path from the gate 67 to the second entrance 6400, the electric accessory 6400a is opened. In addition, since the opening period of the electric accessary 6400a is set to 0.2 seconds as in the continuous mode, the game ball 1 passes through the through gate 67 and the opening period is 0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds. It is impossible to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 6400 unless another game ball reaches the . However, even if the game ball continues to be shot to the second ball entrance guidance area at the shortest shooting interval, the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is distributed to the right flow path R1 and is sent to the second ball entrance guidance area. Since it takes about 0.8 seconds to reach the ball entrance 6400, the ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 after the lapse of the open period. Therefore, even if the ball is hit to the right with the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pullback mode, it is impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, and it is useless. It becomes an extremely disadvantageous state that only reduces the number of balls you have. Therefore, in the pullback mode, it is possible to perform a game method in which the player enters the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting left to proceed with the game (lottery for special symbols). In other words, the game method similar to the normal mode (normal game state) is performed instead of the game method aiming at the second ball entrance 6400 which is easily opened despite the fact that the time-saving state of the normal symbol is provided. It is possible to realize a novel game property that can be done.

In addition, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, there is a higher possibility that the pull-back mode will shift to the consecutive mode after the jackpot ends when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal mode. It is configured as follows. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the continuous mode, the withdrawal mode is set until at least 30 special symbol lotteries are completed. More specifically, when the jackpot E5 is reached in the continuous mode, the pullback mode is set until the lottery of special symbols is completed 30 times after the jackpot is completed, and when the jackpot is F5, the lottery of special symbols is set to 100 after the jackpot is completed. Retraction mode is set until the end of the cycle. On the other hand, if another jackpot type (jackpots A5 to D5) is set in the consecutive villa mode, the consecutive villa mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, after the end of the consecutive villa mode, if the lottery of special symbols does not result in a big hit, the pullback mode is maintained until the lottery of special symbols is completed 30 times or 100 times. In other words, the pullback mode is maintained at least until the lottery of special symbols is completed 30 times after the end of the continuous mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that it is advantageous to continue playing the game until at least 30 special symbol lotteries are performed after the end of the continuous mode. In other words, the game can be continued until at least 30 special pattern lotteries are completed even after the continuous mode is ended, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Here, in a game machine with a specification that gives a jackpot when a special pattern lottery wins or when a game ball enters a specific area (so-called one type and two types mixed machine), the game state is Only two types of game states, a normal game state in which game balls are difficult to enter the specific area and a time-saving game state in which game balls are easy to enter the specific area, are provided, and when the time-saving game state ends, immediately. It was common to switch to the most disadvantageous normal game state. However, in this configuration, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game will be greatly reduced when the game shifts to the disadvantageous normal game state, and the player will immediately quit the game when the time-saving game state ends. There was a possibility that it would be lost.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the continuous mode, at least until the lottery of special symbols is executed 30 times, there is a special special pattern that makes it easy to shift to the continuous mode when the jackpot is won. The configuration is such that the state (retraction mode) is set. As a result, even if the consecutive game mode ends and the game ball enters a disadvantageous game state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, the player's motivation for playing the game is prevented from decreasing. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the consecutive game mode is finished, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the continuous villa mode ends, the mode is always switched to the pullback mode. That is, in the case of a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, only the jackpot type that shifts to the continuous mode again after the jackpot ends and the jackpot type that shifts to the pullback mode after the jackpot ends. Although it was set as the structure provided, it is not restricted to this. At a predetermined ratio (for example, 5%), it may be configured to provide a jackpot type that shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot ends.

In the fifth embodiment, when the game ball is continuously shot at the shortest shooting interval (0.6 second interval), the distribution member 6600 can distribute the game ball to the right flow path R1 and the left side. The cycle of switching between the motion ranges that can be distributed to the flow path R2 and the shooting interval of the game ball are substantially the same. That is, the distribution member 6600 of this embodiment, after distributing the game ball to one flow path, during 0.6 seconds until the next game ball reaches the distribution member 6600, the other flow path (The half period of the pendulum movement of the distribution member 6600 is substantially the same as 0.6 seconds), but it is not limited to this. . If the game balls can be alternately distributed to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 when the game balls are shot at the shortest shooting interval, the next game ball arrives after the first game ball is distributed. It may be configured to reciprocate the movement range that can be distributed to one flow path and the movement range that can be distributed to the other flow path by pendulum movement once or multiple times during 0.6 seconds until the . In other words, an odd multiple of the half period of the pendulum motion of the distribution member 6600 may be configured to be substantially the same as the shortest firing interval of 0.6 seconds. Even with this configuration, every time a game ball shot at the shortest shooting interval reaches the sorting member 6600, the game ball can be alternately sorted to the right channel R1 and the left channel R2.

In the fifth embodiment, by displacing the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 by providing the biased portion 6600c, in a state where the distribution member 6600 is stationary, game balls can be distributed to the right flow path R1 (see FIG. 114). (a)), but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of providing the biased portion 6600c, an elastic body such as a spring is used, and after the distribution member 6600 rotates by distributing the game balls, the initial arrangement shown in FIG. may be configured to return to

Next, referring to FIG. 115, the operation of the V winning device 670 in the fifth embodiment will be described. As described above, the V winning device 670 is in a state in which the opening/closing door 670f1 is opened and a ball can be entered inside when the special symbol lottery results in a small hit. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the open period of the opening/closing door 670f1 based on the small win and the channel inside the V winning device 670 through which the game ball can flow down.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 115, when a small win is won, the opening/closing door 670f1 is opened. This open period continues for 1.5 seconds, and when 1.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the opening/closing door 670f1 is closed and the small win ends. Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 115, for 0.5 seconds after the start of the small win, game balls that have flowed into the V winning device 670 are guided to the normal discharge channel 670e1. , the flow path solenoid 670k is kept off. As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball to flow down to the special discharge channel 670e2 for 0.5 seconds from the start of the small win. Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the passage solenoid 670k is set to ON for 0.075 seconds, thereby guiding the game ball to the special discharge passage 670e2. state (a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow down to the normal discharge flow path 670e1). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the V winning device 670 for 0.075 seconds is guided to the special discharge channel 670e2 and easily passes through the V winning switch 670e3.

After 0.075 seconds have passed since the flow path solenoid 670k was set to ON, the flow path solenoid 670k is set to OFF until the end of the small hit. That is, a state is set in which the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the V winning device 670 is easily guided to the normal discharge flow path 670e1. By these operation contents, if the game ball can be made to enter the V winning device 670 and reach the special discharge channel 670e2 during 0.075 seconds when it is easy to be guided to the special discharge channel 670e2, the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 and a big win is awarded after the small win is completed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning switch 670e3 during the opening period of the small win, the big win is not awarded.

While the opening period of the small win is 1.5 seconds, it is only 0.075 seconds that the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass, so the game in which the ball entered the V winning opening 670a in the small win The probability of the ball passing through the V winning switch 670e3 is 1/20 (0.075/1.5). As described above, in the Renso mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400 unless the game ball is continuously shot at the shortest shooting interval. The player basically keeps shooting game balls at the shortest shooting interval. In other words, it becomes difficult to adjust the shooting timing of the game ball aiming at the period during which the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass. It depends only on the fluctuation time of the pattern, the flowing direction of the game ball, and the like. That is, there is almost no room for the skill of the player to intervene, and the degree of expectation for a big win is always constant (1/20) when a small win is won. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the consecutive game mode can be made almost constant regardless of the player's skill, so that even a player who is not accustomed to playing with the pachinko machine 10 can play the game without worry. can be done.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the mode is shifted to the continuous mode after the end of the big win, the continuous mode will continue until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times or until the big win is achieved. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 9/10, and the probability of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/200. The probability that the continuous mode will end without winning the big prize is about 0.6%. That is, once the player shifts to the consecutive villa mode, an extremely advantageous state in which the consecutive villa mode and the jackpot are almost repeated is formed until winning the jackpot of the type to which the pullback mode is provided after the completion of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with the goal of making the player switch to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117, description will be given of an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the pullback mode, which is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the withdrawal mode is set until the lottery for special symbols is executed at least 30 times after the end of the continuous mode. That is, when a big win is won, an advantageous state is set in which the mode is always shifted to the consecutive mode after the big win is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game while the withdrawal mode is set. That is, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game. However, if the number of lotteries for the special symbols set as the pullback mode is too large, the rate of re-entering the Renso mode (the rate of pulling back the Renso mode) becomes too high, which is excessively advantageous for the player. There is a risk that it will become Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, after providing variations in the number of lotteries for which the pullback mode is set (that is, with a configuration in which either 30 times or 100 times is set), any lottery The configuration is such that the selection of the number of times is not specified (hidden). Then, according to the type of the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the number of times of the selected lottery (duration of the pullback mode) is suggested. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it ambiguous whether the pullback mode is terminated or continues, so that the game can be continued even if the minimum number of lotteries in the case of shifting to the pullback mode exceeds 30 times. It can make you want to continue. Therefore, since the game can be continued for a longer period of time after the continuous mode ends, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be further improved. In addition, since it is possible to realize the playability of predicting whether or not the pull-back mode has ended from the type of the back image, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game after the multi-station mode ends.

In the fifth embodiment, three types of rear images are provided as the rear images suggesting the degree of expectation that the withdrawal mode continues. 116(a)), a back image with a medium expectation (see FIG. 116(b)), and a back image with a low expectation (see FIG. 116(b)). 117) are provided. When the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 30 times after the pull-back mode is set, the rear image is re-lottered every time the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not the pullback mode will continue according to the update status of the back image. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 116(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the back image with the highest degree of expectation (back image for high expectation) is displayed in which the withdrawal mode continues. As shown in FIG. 116(a), when the back image with the highest degree of expectation is set, the display mode is such that the character 811 advances through the forest. Further, in the upper center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a display area HR6 is formed in which characters "CHANCE!!" These display contents can suggest to the player that the withdrawal mode is likely to continue.

FIG. 116(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a rear image with a medium degree of expectation is displayed in which the pullback mode continues. As shown in FIG. 116(b), when a back image with a medium level of expectation is set, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode of going down the river. Also, the characters displayed inside the display area HR6 are "CHANCE!?". Due to these display contents, the expectation of the pullback mode is lower than when the back image for high expectations (back image for medium expectations) is displayed (high possibility that it has shifted to normal mode ) to the player.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a state in which the back image with the lowest degree of expectation (back image for low expectation) in which the pullback mode continues is displayed. As shown in FIG. 117, when the back image with the lowest degree of expectation is set, the display mode is such that the character 811 advances through the wilderness. Also, the characters displayed inside the display area HR6 are "CHANCE...?". These display contents can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for the withdrawal mode is extremely low (there is a high possibility that the transition to the normal mode has been completed).

In this way, in the fifth embodiment, whether or not the pullback mode continues can be suggested by the display mode of the rear image. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature in which it is possible to predict whether or not the withdrawal mode continues from the type of the back image, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. The pull-back mode is continued until the lottery of special symbols is executed a maximum of 100 times after the end of the jackpot won during the consecutive mode. To put it the other way around, when the lottery for the special symbol ends 100 times, the mode always shifts to the normal mode. Therefore, after the lottery for the special symbol is completed 100 times, the background image (not shown) for the normal mode is set.

<Electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 118(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 also received in the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 118(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 118(a), the configuration of the ROM202 in the fifth embodiment is the configuration of the ROM202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13(a)), the small hit type selection table 202da, and the time saving The difference is that the number of times selection table 202db and the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202dc are added. In addition, in the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment, the contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, and the variation pattern table 202d are partially changed.

First, referring to FIG. 118(b), the first winning random number table 202a in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 118(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118(b), in the first hit random number table 202a in the fifth embodiment, two random numbers (counter values) of "0, 1" are defined as judgment values for judging a big hit. (See 202a1 in FIG. 118(b)). It should be noted that, as in the first embodiment, the determination value for the big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, "2 to 399" is defined as the range of determination values determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 118 (b)), and determination to be determined as a small hit of the first special symbol No value is defined (see 202a3 in FIG. 118(b)). In addition, "2 to 40" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 118 (b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol "41 to 399" is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 118(b)).

In this way, in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to win a small prize only in the second special symbol lottery. As a result, a state in which the V winning switch 670e3 can be easily passed in the continuous mode in which the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed can be formed, so that in the continuous mode, the big win is likely to occur again in a short period of time. As a result, the degree of advantage in the consecutive villa mode can be further increased, so that the player can be greatly delighted when the mode is shifted to the consecutive villa mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119(a), the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 119(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 119(a), the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment is provided with two types of jackpots A5 and B5 as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C5 is provided as a jackpot type of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 119(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with "jackpot A5". (See 202b1 in FIG. 119(b)). This "jackpot A5" has 5 rounds, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the jackpot type (5 rounds It is a time-saving jackpot). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot A5", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A5" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 119(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with "jackpot B5". (See 202b2 in FIG. 119(b)). This "jackpot B5" is a jackpot type (5-round special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the jackpot changes according to the game state at the time of winning. More specifically, in the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design, when it becomes "big hit B5", the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design is set as the game state after the big hit. When "jackpot B5" is reached in the time-saving state of normal symbols (pull-back mode or continuous mode), the time-saving state A of normal symbols (continuous mode) is set as the game state after the big win. It should be noted that the correspondence between the jackpot type, the game state when the jackpot is won, and the game state to be set is defined in a time reduction number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119(c)), which will be described later. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot B5", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B5" is determined. ratio is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 119(a), all possible values of the first winning type counter C2 for the second special symbol are defined in association with "jackpot C5" (FIG. 119 ( a) 202b3). This "jackpot C5" is a jackpot type (10-round special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10, and the game state after the jackpot changes according to the game state at the time of winning. More specifically, in the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design, when it becomes "big hit C5", the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design is set as the game state after the big hit. When "jackpot C5" is reached in the time-saving state of normal symbols (pull-back mode or continuous mode), the time-saving state A of normal symbols (continuous mode) is set as the game state after the big win.

In this way, half of the first special pattern jackpot is a special jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal mode is set after the jackpot when winning in the normal mode, and the consecutive mode is set after the jackpot when winning in a mode other than the normal mode). In a plurality of game states (normal mode, pullback mode) in which it is necessary to mainly execute the lottery for the first special symbol (the lottery for the second special symbol is difficult to execute), a difference can be provided in the degree of advantage. That is, when the jackpot of the first special pattern is obtained in the normal mode, the consecutive mode is set after the jackpot at a rate of 50%, whereas when the jackpot of the first special pattern is drawn in the pullback mode, the rate is 100%. It can be configured so that the continuous mode is set after the jackpot. As a result, in the normal mode and the pullback mode, the degree of advantage until winning the jackpot is common (unfavorable state in which it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 6400), while the degree of advantage when winning the jackpot is common. The advantage can be configured to be higher in pullback mode than in normal mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that it is advantageous to continue the game at least during the pullback mode, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the Renso mode ends (when a jackpot in which a mode other than the Renso mode is set after the end of the jackpot is won), the mode is always shifted to the pullback mode. there is This makes it possible to make the player want to continue playing the game at least until the return mode ends even after the consecutive villa mode ends. In other words, a player who has won a large number of prize balls by repeating the jackpot and the Renso mode in the Renso mode is satisfied with the game and immediately quits the game when the last big win in the Renso mode ends. It can be suppressed. That is, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and the game can be continued in a disadvantageous state (pull-back mode) compared to the consecutive mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. can be improved.

In addition, as in the pullback mode, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols in the consecutive mode, the consecutive mode can be set after the jackpot at a rate of 100%. As a result, for example, in the state where the reserved ball of the first special pattern remains, the mode is shifted to the continuous mode, and when the lottery of the special pattern based on the reserved ball of the first special pattern results in a big hit, the continuous mode is always selected. can be continued. In other words, after shifting to Renso mode, an absurd situation occurs in which the player wins the first special symbol lottery and immediately shifts to the normal mode or pullback mode. Therefore, the player's motivation for playing the game during the consecutive villa mode can be suppressed. In addition, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the consecutive villa mode, the special jackpot will be obtained and the consecutive villa mode will be set again after the big win. It is possible to more reliably eliminate the possibility that the mode ends without winning either. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's motivation for playing in the consecutive villa mode.

Furthermore, by making all the big wins of the second special symbols not the time-saving big wins but the special big wins, it is possible to prevent an attempt to execute the lottery of the second special symbols in the normal mode. That is, if an irregular game method is performed in which a game ball is hit to the right in the normal mode and the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 6400 to play a game, even if a big win is achieved, the most disadvantageous game is always reached after the big win. Since the normal mode can be set, it is possible to enhance the effect of suppressing irregular game methods.

Next, with reference to Drawing 119 (b), small hit classification selection table 202da is explained. FIG. 119(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table 202da. This small hit type selection table 202da is a data table that defines a determination value for determining a small hit type when a small hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery, and is a determination value of the small hit type counter C5. Is defined in association with each small hit type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 49", "small hit A" is defined in association with the small hit type (See 202da1 in FIG. 119(b)). This "small win A" is a small win type in which a "big win C5" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. As described above, the jackpot C5 has 10 rounds, and if it is won in the normal mode, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends, while in other than the normal mode (pullback mode or Renso mode) This is a jackpot type in which, when winning, the Renso mode is set after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 50 counter values are "small hit A", so if a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit A" The ratio determined is 50% (50/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit B" as the small hit type for the range of "50 to 79" ( See 202da2 in FIG. 119(b)). This “small win B” is a small win type in which “big win D5” is given when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670 e 3 of the V winning device 670 . Here, "jackpot D5" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15, and the mode shifts to the continuous mode after the jackpot ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 30 counter values are "small hit B". The ratio determined is 30% (30/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit C" as the small hit type for the range of "80 to 94" ( See 202da3 in FIG. 119(b)). This "small win C" is a small win type in which a "big win E5" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, the "jackpot E5" has 10 rounds, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the withdrawal mode is set from the end of the jackpot to the end of 30 special symbol lotteries. It is a jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 15 counter values are "small hit C". The ratio determined is 15% (15/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit D" as the small hit type for the range of "95 to 99" ( See 202da4 in FIG. 119(b)). This "small win D" is a small win type in which a "big win F5" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. Here, "jackpot F5" has 10 rounds, and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the withdrawal mode is set from the end of the jackpot to the end of 100 special symbol lotteries. It is a jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 5 counter values that become the "small hit D", so when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the "small hit D" The percentage determined is 5% (5/100).

Thus, in the fifth embodiment, four types of small hits are provided, and the types of big hits that are executed (started) when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed differ depending on the type of small hits. It is configured. In the continuous mode (and the pullback mode in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set), the small winning A or the small winning B is won, and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small winning game. As a result, the jackpot C or jackpot D is started, and the continuous game mode is set again as the game state (mode) after the jackpot ends. Therefore, it can be said that the small winning A and the small winning B are relatively advantageous small winning types for the player. In addition, since the number of rounds of the jackpot executed when the small win B is passed through the V winning switch 670e3 is larger, the small win B is a small win type with a higher degree of advantage than the small win A. I can say that there is. The percentage of winning small win A or small win B is a total of 80% (50% + 30%), and as described above, consecutive villa mode ends without a big win ( The probability that a short period of time will pass 100 times is about 0.6%. .

In addition, in the continuous mode (and the withdrawal mode in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set), the small hit C or the small hit D is won, and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small hit game. As a result, a jackpot E or a jackpot F is started, and a pullback mode is set as a game state (mode) after the jackpot ends. Since the withdrawal mode is a game state (mode) in which the degree of advantage is lower than that of the consecutive mode, it can be said that the small wins C and D are relatively disadvantageous small win types for the player. Note that the small hit C and the small hit D have the same performance (number of rounds) of the big hit executed when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3, but the period of the pullback mode set after the big win (Number of times) is configured to be shorter in the pullback mode based on the small hit C. For this reason, it can be said that the small hit D is a small hit type with a higher degree of advantage than the small hit C. The percentage of winning either the small win C or the small win D is 20% (15% + 5%), so if a big win occurs in Renso mode, about 20% of the time it will shift to pullback mode. . In addition, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols in the consecutive villa mode (when the jackpot is won without passing through the V winning switch 670e3), the game is shifted to the consecutive villa mode after the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the normal mode, when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 after winning a small win (small wins A, C, D) other than the small win B, the normal mode is set as the mode after the end of the big win. end up That is, when the V winning prize switch 670e3 is passed in the normal mode, the normal mode is set after the big win at a rate of 70%, so an irregular game method to make the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode is performed. Doing so would be extremely disadvantageous to the player. As described above, if the lottery of the first special pattern is a big hit, the transition to the consecutive mode will be made after the big hit at a rate of 50%, whereas if the lottery of the second special pattern is a big hit, the rate of 100% will be increased. After hitting the jackpot at a certain rate, it shifts to the normal mode again. In addition, in the normal mode, even if the lottery for the second special symbol results in a small hit and the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3, the game will shift to the normal mode again after the big win at a rate of 70%. Therefore, if a game method is implemented in which only the lottery of the second special symbols is performed by performing an irregular game method, the rate of transition to the consecutive game mode which is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. becomes low, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, an irregular game method is performed in which the player is forced to enter the second ball entrance 6400 where the game ball is difficult to enter in the normal mode, and only the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Since the advantage can be eliminated, in the normal mode, a left-handed game can be played in order to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent unforeseen disadvantages to the hole or, conversely, excessive loss to the player due to the implementation of an irregular game method. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG.119(c), the detail of time-saving frequency|count selection table 202db is demonstrated. FIG. 119(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time reduction frequency selection table 202db in the fifth embodiment. This time saving frequency selection table 202db is referred to at the end of the big win, and the number of time saving times after the end of the big win (the number of lotteries of special symbols until shifting to the normal mode) is set according to the type of the big win and the game state at the time of winning the big win. is a data table in which data for In this time saving frequency selection table 202db, not only the number of time saving times after the end of the jackpot but also data indicating the type of time saving state (whether it is time saving state A or time saving state B) are also defined.

As shown in FIG. 119 (c), as the jackpot type, the jackpot A5 and D5 are defined in association with 100 times as the number of times of time saving regardless of the game state at the time of winning, and as the type of time saving state, Time saving state A is defined in association (see 202db1 in FIG. 119(c)). For this reason, the jackpot A5 is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202b1 in FIG. 119 (a)), or the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3 during the opening period of the small hit B and the jackpot D5 is won. If you do (see 202da2 in Figure 119 (b)), regardless of the game state at the time of winning, after the jackpot, until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times, the time saving state A of normal symbols (Consecutive mode ) is set. As described above, the consecutive mode is the most advantageous gaming state for the player. is one of the types of jackpots that are preferable (pleasing) to the player. Also, in the continuous game mode in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by mainly executing the lottery of the second special symbols, the big win D5 is one of the preferred big win types for the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), as the jackpot type, the jackpot B5 and C5 are defined in association with 0 times as the number of time reductions in the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design, and the normal design Time saving state A of 100 times is defined in association with the time saving state (pull back mode, continuous mode) (see 202db2 in FIG. 119(c)). Therefore, in the normal mode set to the normal state of the normal symbols, if the lottery of the first special symbols results in a big win B5, the normal mode is set again after the big win, so the big win B5 is an unfavorable big win for the player. It is one of the types. On the other hand, in the pull-back mode, even if the big win B5 is reached, the mode shifts to the consecutive mode, which is advantageous after the big win is over, so it is one of the types of big wins that is preferable for the player. Also, in the consecutive game mode in which it is necessary to proceed with the game mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbols, the jackpot C5 in which the game is shifted to the advantageous consecutive game mode after the big win is one kind of jackpot type preferable for the player. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), as a jackpot type, the jackpot E5 is defined in association with 0 times as the number of time reductions in the normal state of the normal design, and the time reduction state of the normal design (pull back mode, 30 times of time saving state B is associated with continuous mode) is defined (see 202db3 in FIG. 119 (c)). In addition, in the normal mode and pullback mode in which it is necessary to proceed with the game mainly by lottery of the first special symbols, the jackpot E5 is basically not won, but if the normal mode is irregular or illegal, Even if the lottery of the second special pattern is performed and the small win C is won and the big win E5 is won, the jackpot E5 is the most unfavorable big win type in the normal mode because it shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the big win. It is one type. Further, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the pullback mode and the jackpot E5 is won, the game shifts to the pullback mode after the jackpot. In other words, if the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big win, the pullback mode is looped in vain despite the shift to the 100% continuous mode, so even in the pullback mode, the jackpot E5 is compared. It is one of the unfavorable (disadvantageous) jackpot types. In addition, if the small win C and the big win E5 are reached in the continuous mode, the game shifts to a pullback mode that is more disadvantageous to the player than in the continuous mode. It becomes one of the unfavorable (disadvantageous) jackpot types.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119 (c), as a jackpot type, the jackpot F5 is defined in association with 0 times as the number of time reductions in the normal state of the normal design, and the time reduction state of the normal design (retraction mode, 100 times of time saving state B is associated with continuous mode) is defined (see 202db4 in FIG. 119 (c)). That is, when the jackpot F5 is reached, the same mode shift as the jackpot E5 (see 202db3 in FIG. 119 (c)) is performed, but the length of the pullback mode that shifts when winning in the consecutive villa mode (the number of times of lottery of special symbols) is longer than the case of winning the jackpot E5 (the number of lotteries increases). Therefore, the jackpot F5 is one type of jackpot type that is not preferable (disadvantageous) like the jackpot E5 in the normal mode and the pullback mode. Also, in the continuous mode, it is one of the unfavorable jackpot types, but it can be said that it is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than the jackpot E5 in that the pullback mode after the jackpot continues for a long time.

In this way, in the fifth embodiment, by setting the number of times of reduction in working hours specified in the number of times of reduction in working hours selection table 202db (see FIG. 119(c)), the normal mode (normal state of the normal symbol) is triggered by the jackpot. ), continuous mode (time-saving state A with normal patterns), and pullback mode (time-saving state B with normal patterns). As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the mode (game state) after the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, details of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fifth embodiment will be described. This variation pattern selection table 202d, like the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, is referred to for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol. data table.

FIG. 120(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 120(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the fifth embodiment has a special figure 1 for the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(a)). A single special figure 1 out table 202d11 is provided instead of the out (normal) table 202d2 and the special figure 1 out (probability variation) table 202d3, per special figure 2 (4 fluctuations or less) In place of the table 202d4 for special figure 2 and the table 202d5 for special figure 2 (5 variations or more), a single table 202d12 for special figure 2 is provided, and the table for special figure 2 off (4 variations or less) 202d6 and a table 202d7 for special figure 2 loss (5 fluctuations or more), a table 202d13 for special figure 2 loss (normal / pullback) and a table 202d14 for special figure 2 loss (renso) are provided There is a difference. In addition, since the specified contents of the table 202d11 for the special figure 1 are the same as the table 202d2 for the special figure 1 (normal) in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(c)), the detailed description will be given here. are omitted.

The special figure 2 winning table 202d12 is a data table that is referred to for determining a variation pattern (variation time) when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win. As shown in FIG. 120(b), the special figure 2 per table 202d12 has a variation pattern (variation time) selected for each mode (game state) at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed. stipulated. As shown in FIG. 120 (b), when the second special symbol lottery hits in the normal mode and the pullback mode, the variation pattern exceeds the variation time of 180 seconds regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. A long variation is determined. On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol in the consecutive villa mode results in a big win, the variation pattern is determined to be middle variation with a variation time of 10 seconds, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. In this way, in the normal mode or pullback mode in which it is necessary to advance the game by lottery of the first special symbol, when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big win, an extremely long variation time is set. Therefore, it is possible to lower the game efficiency when the second special symbol lottery is performed irregularly or illegally in the normal mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being irregularly or fraudulently executed.

In addition, the table 202d13 for the special figure 2 loss (normal/pullback) determines the variation pattern (variation time) when the second special symbol lottery (including small hits) is lost in the normal mode and the pullback mode. This is a data table that is referenced to As shown in FIG. 120(c), in the table 202d13 for special figure 2 loss (normal/retraction), regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, as a variation pattern, there is only a super long variation with a variation time of 180 seconds. is stipulated. In this way, in the normal mode or pullback mode where it is necessary to proceed with the game by lottery of the first special symbol, when the lottery of the second special symbol is lost (or small hit), an extremely long fluctuation time is set. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further reduce the game efficiency when the second special symbol lottery is performed irregularly or fraudulently in the normal mode or the pullback mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being irregularly or fraudulently executed.

In addition, the table 202d14 for special figure 2 loss (renso) is referred to for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the second special symbol lottery is lost (or a small hit) in the Renso mode. data table. As shown in FIG. 120(d), the table 202d14 for special figure 2 out (renso) defines a variation pattern that can be determined for each lottery result. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(d), for the deviation of the second special symbol, the variation time is 10 seconds for all possible values of the variation type counter CS1. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode, when the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, a variation time of 10 seconds is always set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), for the small hit of the second special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 174" The small hit short with a variation time of 5 seconds Fluctuations are defined in correspondence, and small hit middle fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "175 to 198". According to these provisions, in the continuous mode, only a relatively short variation time of 5 seconds or 10 seconds is set when the second special symbol lottery is executed, so the game efficiency in the continuous mode is improved. can be enhanced. Therefore, the superiority of the consecutive villa mode can be further enhanced, so that the player's pleasure when shifting to the consecutive villa mode can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game in the consecutive villa mode.

In addition, in Renso mode, when a small win with a high probability of winning is set, the ratio of setting a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is increased, and a relatively low ratio (about 1/4) is set in the case of a small win. ), a relatively long (10 seconds) variation time is set as in the case of hit or miss. As a result, every time a relatively long variation time is selected, the player can be made to think that there is a possibility that the lottery for the second special symbol has directly won a big win. Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode, the game can be played by paying attention to the fluctuation time, so that the interest of the player in the consecutive villa mode can be improved.

Next, with reference to Drawing 121 (a), the details of normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc are explained. This normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202dc is a data table referred to for setting the normal symbol variation time when the normal symbol lottery is executed, and as shown in FIG. The game state (mode) at the time when the symbol lottery is executed and the normal symbol variation pattern (variation time) are defined in association with each other.

As shown in FIG. 121(a), for the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design, as a variation pattern, a long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is associated and defined (FIG. 121(a) 202dc1). On the other hand, for the time saving state A (Renso mode) of the normal pattern, a short variation A with a variation time of 0.1 seconds is associated and defined (see 202dc2 in FIG. 121 (a)), A short variation B with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is defined in association with the time saving state B (pull-back mode) of normal symbols (see 202dc3 in FIG. 121(a)).

Therefore, when the normal pattern lottery is executed in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is set to be extremely long compared to the time-saving state (Renso mode, pullback mode), so in the normal mode, through by hitting right. If the game is played aiming at the gate 67 and the second ball entrance 6400, the game efficiency can be significantly deteriorated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal mode. In addition, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal pattern in the continuous mode (time saving state A) to 0.1 seconds, when the normal pattern hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 will directly enter the second input. It can be configured so that the ball can be easily entered into the ball opening 6400 . Therefore, during the continuous mode, the game ball is distributed to the left flow path R2 (see FIG. 113) just by continuing to hit the game ball to the right with the maximum firing intensity and the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval). It is possible to make the game ball entered into the second ball entrance 6400 with a high probability (at 1/1.2, which is the probability of winning the normal symbol).

On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the withdrawal mode (time saving state B) to 0.5 seconds, even if the normal symbol lottery wins, the game ball that triggered the lottery (through A game ball that has passed through the gate 67) and a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and is then launched into the second ball entrance guidance area and distributed to the right flow path R1 (see FIG. 113). It can be configured such that it is impossible (difficult) to enter the second ball entrance 6400 . That is, by setting a variation time of 0.5 seconds, when the normal pattern hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has passed through the second ball entrance 6400 (that is, The electric accessory 6400 is opened after 0.2 seconds, which is the flow-down period of the flow path from the through gate 67 to the second ball entrance 6400, has passed. Also, since the electric accessory 6400a has an open period of 0.2 seconds, other game balls must not reach within 0.5 to 0.7 seconds after one game ball passes through the through gate 67. cannot enter the second ball entrance 6400. However, even if the game ball continues to be shot to the second ball entrance guidance area at the shortest shooting interval, the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is distributed to the right flow path R1 and is sent to the second ball entrance guidance area. Since it takes about 0.8 seconds to reach the ball entrance 6400, the ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 after the lapse of the open period. Therefore, even if the ball is hit to the right with the shortest firing interval (0.6 second interval) in the pullback mode, it is impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, and it is useless. It becomes an extremely disadvantageous state that only reduces the possession ball. Therefore, in the pullback mode, it is possible to perform a game method in which the player enters the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting left to proceed with the game (lottery for special symbols). In other words, it is not a game method aiming at the second ball entrance 6400 that is easy to open despite the fact that the time saving state of the normal symbol is given, but a game method similar to the normal mode (normal game state) (by left-handed hitting) A game method in which a game is played aiming at the first ball entrance 64) can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided inside the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 121(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 121(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 18), while the time saving medium counter 203da, and the jackpot type storage area 203db. , a mode type storage area 203dc, a V passage flag 203dd, and a winning mode storage area 203de are added. Also, the difference is that the variable probability flag 203g, the variable probability setting flag 203h, the variable probability passage counter 203i, the variable probability effective flag 203n, and the variable probability effective timer 203o are deleted.

The time saving medium counter 203da is a counter for counting the number of times of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the time saving state of the normal symbols ends. If the value of the counter 203da during this time saving is 1 or more, it means that it is in the time saving state of the normal design (either the continuous mode or the pullback mode), and if the value of the counter 203da during the time saving is 0, it is normal. It means the normal state of the design. The counter 203da during this time saving has an initial value set to 0, and at the end of the jackpot, the number of time saving times specified in the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119(c)) is set (see S1323 in FIG. 133) ). In addition, the value of the time saving medium counter 203da is updated by subtracting one each in the time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) executed at the timing of stopping the variation of the special symbol (see S2302 of FIG. 128). When executing the lottery for normal symbols, it is determined whether or not the time saving state for normal symbols is determined by the value of the time saving medium counter 203da, and a random number table for normal symbols for high probability (Fig. 14 (b)) 202c3, 202c4) to perform a lottery for normal symbols, or a random number table per normal symbol for low probability (202c1, 202c2 in FIG. 14(b)) to determine whether to perform a lottery for normal symbols. (see S608 in FIG. 130).

The jackpot type storage area 203db is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. In the jackpot type storage area 203db, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot (see S331 in FIG. 127). Also, when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit and the V winning switch 670e3 is passed in the small win, data indicating a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is stored (see S1629 in FIG. 134). The data stored in this jackpot type storage area 203db is held until the end timing of the winning jackpot, and is used to select the number of times of reduction in working hours from the number of times of reduction in working hours selection table 202db at the end of the jackpot (see S1322 in FIG. 133).

The mode type storage area 203dc is a storage area for storing data indicating the current mode (game state). If "00H" is stored as data in this mode type storage area 203dc, it indicates that the current mode is the normal mode (normal state of normal symbols), and if "01H" is stored, It indicates that it is a continuous mode (time saving state A of normal symbols), and if "02H" is stored, it indicates that it is a pullback mode (time saving state B of normal symbols). Normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202dc (see FIG. 121 (a)) When selecting and setting the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, the fluctuation time corresponding to the data stored in this mode type storage area 203dc is set be done.

The V passing flag 203dd is a flag for indicating whether or not the V winning switch 670e3 has been passed during execution of the small winning game (whether or not it is confirmed that a big winning will occur after the small winning is finished). . If the V passing flag 203dd is turned on at the end of the small win, the start of the big win is set at the end of the small win, whereas if the V passing flag 203dd is off, the small win is made without starting the big win. is terminated. This V passage flag 203dd has an initial value set to off, and is set to on when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 670e3 during execution of the small winning game (see FIG. 135 (see S2506). In addition, it is set to OFF after setting the start of the jackpot based on passing through the V winning switch 670e3 (see S1630 in FIG. 134).

The winning mode storage area 203de is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating a mode (game state) when winning a jackpot. The winning mode storage area 203de stores data in the same format as the mode type storage area 203dc. At the start of the jackpot, the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is transferred to the winning mode storage area 203de, and the data is held until the jackpot ends. At the end of the jackpot, the mode at the time of winning the jackpot is determined using the data stored in the mode storage area 203de at the time of winning, and the corresponding number of reduced hours is read from the reduced number of times selection table 202db (see FIG. 119(c)). output and set (see S1322 in FIG. 133).

Next, referring to FIG. 122, a game state (mode) transition method in the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 122, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is provided with roughly three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 122 (normal state of the normal pattern), the continuous mode shown in the lower left part of FIG. A mode (ordinary pattern time saving state B) is provided.

As described above, the normal mode indicates the normal state of the normal symbol, and the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and even if the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the continuous mode This is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In addition, as described above, the continuous mode indicates a game state in which the time saving state A of the normal pattern is set, and since it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, it is a small hit with a high probability. is generated and the chances of passing through the V prize switch 670e3 increase, so this is a gaming state in which the possibility of winning a big win is higher than in the normal mode. In addition, since the consecutive game mode is easily set again after the end of the big win, the game state becomes the most advantageous for the player.

In addition, the pull-back mode indicates a game state in which the time saving state B of the normal symbol is set, and as described above, the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 6400, so the same as the normal mode. Although it is necessary to play the game aiming at the 1 ball entrance 64, the game state is more advantageous than the normal mode because the game shifts to the continuous mode at a rate of 100% when winning a jackpot.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 122, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another mode only in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big win and the big win A5 is determined as the big win type, the continuous mode is set as the game state after the big win. On the other hand, when the big win B5 is determined, the normal mode is set as the game state after the big win, so the most unfavorable game state is repeated. That is, in the normal mode, unless the big win A5, which is determined at a rate of 50% of the big win, cannot be won, there is no transition to another game state. In other words, even if a jackpot is won, the same state is looped at a rate of 50%, resulting in an extremely disadvantageous gaming state.

As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 122, there is a possibility of shifting from the continuous mode to another mode not only when the jackpot is won, but also when the time reduction number of normal symbols is finished. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 122, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, and a V prize (event in which the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3) occurs, and the big hits E5 and F5 is determined, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the withdrawal mode. In addition, when the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times without a big win, the number of times of shortening the working hours of the normal symbols passes, and the game shifts (falls) to the normal mode. On the other hand, when the jackpots C5 and D5 are determined when a V prize is won, or when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols, the continuous mode is set again after the jackpot ends. In addition, as described above, the probability that the 100th special symbol variation ends without a big hit is about 0.6%, so it is a phenomenon that hardly occurs. Therefore, the transition to another mode in the consecutive villa mode occurs when the jackpots E5 and F5 are won. Small wins (small wins C, D) corresponding to big wins E5, F5 are determined at a rate of 20% of all small wins, so when it comes to continuous mode, 80% or more of the big win and continuous mode It becomes an extremely advantageous game state that repeats at a rate. Therefore, since the player can play the game with the goal of shifting to the consecutive villa mode, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

As shown in the lower right part of FIG. 122, there is a possibility that the pullback mode will shift to another mode when a jackpot is won and when the number of times of time reduction of the normal symbol ends. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 122, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, even if the jackpot A5 or the jackpot B5 is reached, the game after the jackpot ends. The state is set to Renso mode. In addition, when the lottery of special symbols for the number of times of time saving is completed without a big hit, it shifts to the normal mode (falls down). In the normal mode, even if the jackpot of the first special pattern is achieved, the mode is shifted to the multi-floor mode only at a rate of 50%. Therefore, while the preparation mode continues, the game can be played with a strong desire to win the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game in the preparation mode.

Thus, in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to switch between three types of modes with different degrees of advantage. As a result, since the game can be sharpened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 123(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 123(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment has an expectation level selection table 222da added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(a)). There is a difference. This expectation degree selection table 222da is used to draw a lottery for a back image during a predetermined period (until the fluctuation display of the special symbols ends 100 times) after the continuous mode ends (shifts to the pullback mode). Data table used. Here, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, either 30 times (jackpot E5) or 100 times (jackpot F5) is set as the number of special symbol lotteries in which the pullback mode continues. That is, if the number of special symbol lotteries exceeds 30 after transitioning to the pullback mode, there is a possibility of transitioning (falling) to the normal mode. In the fifth embodiment, it is not clearly notified whether the normal mode has been entered or whether the pullback mode continues, and whether or not the pullback mode continues depends on the type of the rear image (see FIGS. 116 and 117). By suggesting the degree of expectation, a game feature is provided that allows the player to predict whether or not it is the withdrawal mode.

More specifically, after shifting to the pullback mode (that is, after the jackpot E5 or the jackpot F5 is completed), the number of lotteries of special symbols is within a range of 30 times (that is, staying in the pullback mode) is determined), the back image for high expectations is set as the back image, and if the number of lotteries exceeds 30 times (that is, the number of lotteries that may have ended the pullback mode ), every time the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times, the back image is reselected using the expectation selection table 222da (the expectation is updated every 10 lotteries). there is Details of the expectation level selection table 222da will be described with reference to FIG. 123(b).

FIG. 123(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the expectation level selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 123(b), the expectation level selection table 222da is for each mode (game state) at the time of executing a lottery for reselecting a back image (expectation level re-lottery). The type and the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223da are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(b), in the normal mode, the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is in the range of "0 to 4", and the back image for high expectation (FIG. 116(a) reference) is defined in association with the range of "5 to 49", the rear image for medium expectations (see FIG. 116 (b)) is defined in association with the range of "50 to 99", and low expectations in the range of "50 to 99" A rear image (see FIG. 117) for is defined in correspondence.

Since the effect lottery counter 223da can take 100 values from "0 to 99", when the expectation re-lottery is executed in the normal mode, the ratio of setting the back image for the high expectation is 5. % (5/100). On the other hand, the ratio of setting the back image for medium expectation is 45% (45/100), and the ratio of setting the back image for low expectation is 50% (50/100). Therefore, if you have already transitioned (falling) from the pullback mode to the normal mode (when the pullback mode with a reduction in time of 30 times is set after the end of the previous jackpot), the expectation re-lottery will return the back for low expectations. An image is most likely to be set, while a high-expectation back image is most likely to be set.

Further, as shown in FIG. 123(b), for the pullback mode, the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is in the range of "0 to 9", and the back image for high expectation (see FIG. 116(a)) is displayed. Defined in correspondence, the back image for medium expectations in the range of "10 to 79" (see FIG. 116 (b)) is defined in correspondence, and the back for low expectations in the range of "80 to 99" An image (see FIG. 117) is associated and defined. Therefore, when the expectation re-lottery is executed in the pullback mode, the ratio of setting the back image for high expectation is 10% (10/100), and the back image for middle expectation is set. The ratio is 70% (70/100), and the ratio of setting the back image for low expectations is 20% (20/100). Therefore, when the pullback mode continues (when the pullback mode with 100 times of time saving is set after the end of the previous jackpot), the back image for high expectation is set by the expectation re-lottery. The possibility is doubled compared to the normal mode, and the possibility of setting the low-expectation background image is reduced to less than half. In addition, the ratio of setting the back image for medium expectation is increased by 25%.

Therefore, when the back image for high expectations is set, the possibility that the pullback mode continues (expectation) increases, while when the back image for low expectations is set, the pullback mode ends The possibility (expectation) that it is (has been shifted to normal mode) increases. Therefore, since the player can guess the mode according to the type of the back image, it is possible to improve the interest in the game until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times after the continuous mode is completed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 124, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(b)) in that an effect lottery counter 223da and a variation counter 223db are added. The difference is that they are added. In addition, the breakthrough effect counter 223g is deleted because the breakthrough effect in the first embodiment is not executed.

The effect lottery counter 223da is a counter used to select one back image (expectation level) from the above-described expectation level selection table 222da. The value of the effect lottery counter 223da is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When selecting a back image, a random number (counter value) defined in the expectation selection table 222da is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223da, and one corresponding back image is selected. This effect lottery counter 223da is updated, for example, every 1 ms during the main process (see FIG. 45).

The variation number counter 223db is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries (number of times of execution of variation display) after the end of the big win. The fluctuation number counter 223db has an initial value set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 when execution of the fluctuation display effect is set based on a new fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. It is updated (see S5601 in FIG. 139). Also, when the jackpot is won, the value is reset to 0. During the period from when the withdrawal mode is set after the end of the jackpot to when the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times, the variation counter 223db is referred to every time the variation display performance is set, and the expectation selection table 222da is used. It is determined whether or not it is time to execute the re-lottery for the degree of expectation (see S5603 and S5605 to S5608 in FIG. 139).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 135, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, timer interrupt processing 5 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 125) is executed instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. , is a periodic process that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds.

Of the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 125) in the fifth embodiment, the processes of S101, S102, S105, and S107 to S109 each correspond to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) of the first embodiment. The same processes as those of S101, S102, S105, and S107 to S109 are executed. Further, in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 125) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S102 is completed, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the The random number counter C4 per 2 and the small per type counter C5 are updated (S141). That is, in addition to various counter values updated in the process of S103 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated. After the process of S141, instead of the special symbol variation process (S104, see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the special symbol variation process 5 is executed (S142), and the process proceeds to S105. The details of this special symbol variation process 5 (S142) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 125) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S105 is completed, next, instead of the normal symbol variation process (S106, see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, normal Symbol variation processing 5 is executed (S143), and the processing proceeds to S107. The details of this normal symbol variation process 5 (S143) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, details of the special symbol variation process 5 (S142) described above will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 5 (S142). This special symbol variation process 5 (S142) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37, the variable display of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

Of the special symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221, the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28) ) are executed in steps S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, and S221. Also, in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S207 or the process of S212 is completed, the special symbol variation start process (S213, see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment Instead, the special symbol variation start process 5 is executed (S261), and the process ends. The details of this special symbol variation start process 5 (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, in the processing of S218, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big hit (S218: Yes), the mode type storage area 203dc After the data is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S262), the counter value of the time saving counter 203da and the data of the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S263), and the process proceeds to S220. By transferring the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc to the winning mode storage area 203de before returning the jackpot state to the initial state (normal state of normal symbols) in the process of S263. , data indicating the mode (game state) at the time of winning the big win can be held until the end of the big win. Therefore, at the end of the big win, the game state at the time of winning the big win can be accurately discriminated, and the corresponding number of times of time saving can be set.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S218, it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not a big hit (that is, it is a miss or a small hit). In the case (S218: No), if it is in the time saving state (that is, if it is the continuous villa mode or the pullback mode), the time saving number update process for updating the number of time saving is executed (S264). The details of this time saving frequency update process (S264) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the time saving number update process (S264) is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S265), and if it is determined to be a small hit (S265: Yes), a small hit A small win start process for setting the start of the opening operation is executed (S266), and the process proceeds to S221. The details of this small winning start process (S266) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S265, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (that is, it is a loss) (S265: No), the process of S266 is skipped and the process proceeds to S221.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, details of the above-described special symbol variation start process 5 (S261) will be described. This special symbol variation start process 5 (S261) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. reference), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, along with performing a special symbol lottery (determination of success or failure), the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of .

Of the special symbol variation start processing 5 (see FIG. 127) in the fifth embodiment, in each processing of S301 to S312, each of S301 to S312 of the special symbol variation start processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 29) The same processing as the processing is executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 127) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit (S305: Yes), this time winning Data corresponding to the type of the jackpot obtained is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db (S331), and the process proceeds to S306. By storing data corresponding to the jackpot type in the jackpot type storage area 203db in advance in the process of S331, the jackpot type can be accurately determined based on the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db at the end of the jackpot. can be discriminated. Therefore, it is possible to accurately set the game state after the end of the big win.

Also, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 127) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a big hit in the process of S305 (S305: No), next, this time It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (S332), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S332: Yes), a small hit type determination table 202da and a small hit type The display mode of the first special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the small hit type specified from the value of the counter C5 is set (S333), and the variation pattern corresponding to the small hit is selected in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 120). ) is referred to and determined (S334), and the process proceeds to S310. On the other hand, in the process of S332, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is not a small hit (S332: No), it means that the lottery result of this time is lost, so the process proceeds to S308. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the above-described time saving frequency update process (see FIG. 128) will be described. This time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) is, as described above, one process in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126), and is a process for updating the time saving number of normal symbols. As shown in FIG. 128, in the time saving number update process (see FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203da is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S2301), and the time saving When it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203da is 0 (S2301: No), the current state is the normal state (normal mode) of the normal design, and the time saving state is not set (there is no need to update the time saving number of times) ), the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203da during time saving is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S2301: Yes), the value of the counter 203da during time saving is updated by subtracting 1 (S2302), set the remaining time reduction command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of the counter 203da during time reduction after updating (S2303). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203da has become 0 (S2304), and if the value of the time saving counter 203da is 0 (S2304: Yes), the continuous villa mode or the pullback mode ends Therefore, a state command is set to notify the sound lamp controller 113 of the shift to the normal mode (S2305), and the normal mode is set in the mode type storage area 203dc. "00H" indicating data is stored (S2306), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2304, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203da after the update by the process of S2302 is not 0 (S2304: No), each process of S2305 and S2306 is skipped, This process is terminated as it is. By executing this time saving frequency update process (see FIG. 128), the time saving frequency can be appropriately updated in the continuous mode in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set, and in the pullback mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the above-described small winning start processing (S266) will be described. This small winning start process (S266) is, as described above, one process in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126), and is a process for setting the start of the small winning opening operation.

As shown in FIG. 129, in the small winning start process (see FIG. 129), first, the operation pattern of the V winning device 670 corresponding to the small winning type is read (S2401). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when a small win is achieved, the open door 670f1 of the V winning device 670 is opened for 1.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the open period, A period of 0.075 seconds is set so that the special discharge channel 670e2 can pass through (see FIG. 115).

When the processing of S2401 is completed, then, the data indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the current small hit type is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db (S2402). In addition, as described above, if the small hit A, the corresponding jackpot type is the jackpot C5 (see 202da1 in FIG. 119 (b)), if the small hit B, the corresponding jackpot type is the jackpot D5 ( 202da2 in FIG. 119(b)), if it is a small hit C, the corresponding jackpot type is a big hit E5 (see 202da3 in FIG. 119(b)), and if it is a small hit D, the corresponding jackpot type is a big hit F5 (see 202da4 in FIG. 119(b)).

When the process of S2402 ends, the start of the small hit is set (S2403), and this process ends. By executing this small winning start process (see FIG. 129), when the fluctuation of the variation pattern corresponding to the small winning stops, the corresponding small winning operation pattern can be started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, details of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S143) will be described. This normal design variation process 5 (S143) is a process executed instead of the normal design variation process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 125). This is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, like the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) in one embodiment.

In each process of S601 to S613, S617 to S620, and S623 of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 130) in the fifth embodiment, each of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment The same processes as those of S601 to S613, S617 to S620, and S623 are executed. Also, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130) in the fifth embodiment, after setting the display mode according to the lottery result of the normal symbol in the process of S612 or S613, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202dc (See FIG. 121) is read (S641), and from the read table, the fluctuation time of the normal design corresponding to the current mode indicated by the data stored in the mode type storage area 203dc is read and set (S642), End this process.

Also, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (the value of the counter 203da during time saving is 0) ( S620: No), the opening time of the electric accessary 6400a and the number of times of opening are set to 0.1 second x 1 (S643), and the process proceeds to S623.

On the other hand, in the process of S620, when it is determined that it is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (the value of the time saving counter 203da is 1 or more) (S620: Yes), the opening time and opening of the electric accessory 6400a The number of times is set to 0.2 seconds×1 time (S644), and the process proceeds to S623.

By executing this normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 130), the normal symbol variation time and the release pattern of the electric accessory 6400a when the normal symbol wins are set appropriately according to the mode. be able to. As a result, in the normal mode and the pull-back mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400 during the period in which the electric accessory 6400a is opened, while in the continuous mode. Then, it is possible to create a state in which a game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 6400 during the open period of the electric accessory 6400a. As a result, in the pullback mode, although the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, it is advantageous for the player to hit the ball with the left hand aiming at the first ball entrance 64, thereby providing novel game characteristics. can be realized.

Next, startup processing 5 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 131 . This start-up process 5 is a process executed instead of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. This is a process that is started along with

S901 to S910 and S912 to S916 of the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 131) in the fifth embodiment correspond to S901 to S910 and S910 of the start-up process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. , and the same processes as those of S912 to S916 are executed. Further, in the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 131) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S910 is completed, then the value of the time saving counter 203da and the data of the mode type storage area 203dc are read out (S931). , sets a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the game state specified from each read data (S912), and shifts the processing to S913. By executing the start-up process 5 (see FIG. 131), the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the mode at power-on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the jackpot control process 5 (1031) executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) in the fifth embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 5 (S1031) is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1004, see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 650a. .

Among the jackpot control processing 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, S1101 to S1105, and S1107 to S1109, respectively, in the jackpot control processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37) S1101 to S1105, , and the same processes as those of S1107 to S1109 are executed. Also, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the specific winning opening 650a is opened. setting (S1141), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1142), and this process is terminated.

Also, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: No), then the specific winning opening 650a (S1143). As described above, when 30 seconds have passed since each round of big wins started, or when 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning hole 650a, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. In the process of S1143, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening 650a is satisfied (S1143: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening 650a is set (S1144), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1143, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening 650a is not established (S1105: No), the processing proceeds to S1107.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S1109, when it is determined that the jackpot end timing has come (the end time of the ending effect has come) (S1109: Yes ), instead of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, jackpot end processing 5 (S1145) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of this jackpot ending process 5 (S1145) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 5 (S1145). This jackpot end processing 5 (S1145) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, and the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for setting the game state (mode) after the end of the jackpot.

In this jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 133), first, the time saving number selection table 202db (see FIG. 119 (c)) is read (S1321), and the number of time saving times and the type of time saving state specified in the read table Among them, the jackpot type indicated by the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203db and the mode at the time of jackpot winning indicated by the data stored in the winning mode storage area 203de Time saving number and mode (time saving state type) is specified (S1322). When the processing of S1322 ends, the specified number of times of time saving is set in the time saving counter 203da (S1323), and the data indicating the mode (type of time saving state, game state) specified in the processing of S1322 is stored in the mode type storage area 203dc. (S1324). Next, a state command indicating the set game state (mode) is set (S1325), the jackpot flag 203r and winning mode storage area 203de are reset (S1326), and the process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 133), the game state after the jackpot ends can be appropriately set according to the jackpot type and the game state (mode) at the time of winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, small hit control processing 5 (1032) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 36) in the fifth embodiment will be described. This small winning control process 5 (S1032) is a process executed in place of the small winning control process (S1005, see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the operation of the V winning device 670. be.

Of the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, in each process of S1601 to S1604 and S1607 to S1610, S1601 to the small hit control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 42) The same processes as S1604 and S1607 to S1610 are executed. Also, in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S1604, when it is determined that the small hit game is being executed (that is, the flag 203s during the small hit is ON) (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the V winning opening 670a (S1621). (S1622), this processing ends.

In addition, in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1621: No), then at the closing timing of the V winning opening 670a If it is determined that it is time to close the V winning opening 670a (S1623: Yes), the closing of the V winning opening 670a is set (S1624), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1623, if it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 670a (S1623: No), the process proceeds to S1607.

In addition, in the small hit control processing 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, in the processing of S1609, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1609: No), the game ball for the V winning switch 670e3 V passage detection processing is executed to monitor the passage of (S1625), and this processing ends. The details of this V passage detection process (S1625) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1610 is completed, next, whether the V passing flag 203dd is on (the V winning switch 670e3 is turned on during the small has passed) or not (S1626), and if it is determined that the V passage flag 203dd is on (S1626: Yes), each process of S1627 to S1630 for setting the execution of the jackpot Execute. Specifically, first, the data in the mode type storage area 203dc is stored in the winning mode storage area 203de (S1627), and the time saving medium counter 203da and the data in the mode type storage area 203dc are reset (S1628). Next, the start of the type of jackpot corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area 203db is set (S1629), the V passage flag 203dd is set to off (S1630), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1626, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203dd is off (S1626: No), the condition for executing the big hit was not established during the execution of the small winning game (V winning switch 670e3 not even one game ball has passed through), skipping the process for starting the jackpot (each process of S1627 to S1630) and terminating this process as it is.

By executing this small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134), when the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 670e3 during the execution of the small hit game, the start of the big hit corresponding to the small hit type can be accurately started. Can be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, details of the above-described V passage detection process (S1625) will be described. This V passage detection process (S1625) is one process in the small hit control process 5 (see FIG. 134), and as described above, is a process for monitoring the passage of the game ball to the V prize switch 670e3.

In the V passage detection process (see FIG. 135), first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203dd is on (S2501). If it is determined that the V passage flag 203dd is on (S2501: Yes) In this small win, the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 has already been detected, and it means that the execution of the big win is already decided after the small win is finished, so this processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203dd is off (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 670e3 (S2502), and the V winning switch 670e3 is determined. If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through (S2502: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2502, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 670e3 (S2502: Yes), then the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 was detected during the regular period (V valid period) (S2503). Here, as the V valid period, the special discharge channel 670e2 is set to be passable for 0.075 seconds, and just before the end of the period, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge channel 670e2 reaches the V passage switch 670e3. 0.2 seconds, which is a period that can be required until

In the processing of S2503, if it is determined that the passage of the V winning switch 670e3 is not detected during the V valid period (S2503: No), there is a fraudulent act of illegally passing the V winning switch 670e3 to execute a big win. Since there is a possibility that it has been performed, an error command is set (S2504), and this processing ends. By setting the error command, the display of the error image is set in the sound lamp control device 113, so that the hall clerk or the like who visually recognizes the error image can be made to recognize the occurrence of the fraudulent act early.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2503, if it is determined that the V winning switch 670e3 was passed during the V valid period (S2503: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 notifies that the game ball has passed the V winning switch 670e3. (S2505), sets the V passage flag 203dd to ON (S2506), and terminates this processing. By setting the V passing flag 203dd to ON, the start of the big win can be set after the small win is finished.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to 136, the details of command determination processing 5 (S4141) in the fifth embodiment will be described. This command determination process 5 (S4141) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, and similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, This is a process for executing control according to the type of command output from main controller 110 .

S4201 to S4209 and S4213 to S4215 of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment correspond to S4201 to S4209, S4209 and S4209 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment, respectively. and the same processing as the processing of S4213 to S4215 are executed. In addition, in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4209 that the status command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110, (S4209: Yes), state command processing for performing control according to the game state (mode) notified by the state command is executed (S4221), and this processing ends. Details of this status command will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the state command processing (S4221) described above. This state command process (S4221) is, as described above, a process for performing control according to the game state (mode) notified by the state command. In this state command process (4221), first, the data in the game state storage area 223h is updated according to the game state indicated by the received state command (S5501). That is, the data is updated to the data indicating the gaming state notified from the main controller 110 .

When the process of S5501 is completed, it is then determined whether the status command received this time is a status command for notifying that the multi-family mode has been entered (S5502). If it is determined that the command is to show (S5502: Yes), the back image for the multi-family villa mode is set (S5503), and this processing ends. By setting a rear image (not shown) dedicated to the multi-streak mode when the multi-streak mode is entered, the player can easily understand that the multi-streak mode is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing the shift to the consecutive villa mode.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5502, if it is determined that the command is not for notifying that the mode has shifted to the multi-station mode (S5502: No), then whether the command is for notifying the game state at the time of power return. It is determined whether or not (S5504), and if it is determined that the status command was output when the power was restored (S5504: Yes), the back image for normal mode is set (S5506), and this processing ends. The fact that the status command is not a status command for notifying the continuous mode and is output at the time of power restoration is a command indicating the pullback mode or the normal mode. By setting the same rear image in both the pullback mode and the normal mode, especially when the power is turned off when the pullback mode is entered and the number of fluctuations exceeds 30 times and is within 100 times. Furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the game state from the back image when the power is restored (to make it difficult to distinguish between the normal mode and the withdrawal mode). That is, the game property before the power is turned off (the game property of predicting whether the game has been shifted to the normal mode or whether the withdrawal mode is continuing) can be taken over after the power is turned on again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered when the power supply is cut off due to a so-called momentary power failure or the like.

In the processing of S5504, if it is determined that the current status command is not a command for power restoration (S5504: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a command indicating the normal mode (S5505), and the normal mode is changed. If it is determined that the command is to show (S5505: Yes), the process proceeds to S5506 in order to set the back image for the normal mode. On the other hand, in the processing of S5505, if it is determined that the command is not the command indicating the normal mode (that is, the command indicating the pullback mode) (S5505: No), the back image for high expectation (see FIG. 116(a) ) is set (S5507), and the process ends. By setting a high-expectation back image when the withdrawal mode is notified, the player can be made to recognize that the player is in a relatively advantageous state. Therefore, since the game can be continued even after the consecutive villa mode ends, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, variable display setting processing 5 (S4142) in the fifth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 5 (S4142) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment. This is a process for executing a variable effect in the 3-symbol display device 81 .

In each process of S4801 to S4809 of the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 138), the same process as each of S4801 to S4809 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed. be done. In addition, in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 138) in the fifth embodiment, after the process of S4805 is finished, the back image indicating the degree of expectation as to whether or not the pullback mode continues is drawn again. is executed (S4831), and the process proceeds to S4806. The details of this expectation update process (S4831) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the above-described expectation updating process (S4831). In this expectation updating process (S4831), first, the value of the variation counter 223db is updated by adding 1 (S5601), and then whether the current mode is the continuous mode (connected to the game state storage area 223h). (S5602). In the processing of S5602, if it is determined that the mode is the continuous villa mode (S5602: Yes), the possibility of the pullback mode is 0, and there is no need to suggest the degree of expectation by the rear image, so this processing ends as it is. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5602 that the current mode is not the multi-storied villa mode (S5602: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image for the normal mode is set (S5603). If it is determined that the back image is set (S5604: Yes), there is no possibility of executing a re-lottery for the back image (after the big win, the normal mode is shifted to, and the normal mode continues ), the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, if it is determined that the back image for the normal mode is not set (S5603: No), the pullback mode was set after the previous big win, and it has already fallen to the normal mode. Alternatively, it means that the pullback mode is being continued. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter 223db is 101 (S5604). If the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is 101 (S5604: Yes), it means that the number of fluctuations in the pullback mode has ended and the normal mode has been entered, regardless of whether the previous jackpot was a jackpot E5 or a jackpot F5. A back image for normal mode is set (S5605), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5604 that the value of the variation number counter 223db is not 101 (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter 223db is greater than 30. (S5606), if it is determined to be 30 or less (S5606: No), it is the number of fluctuations that confirms that the pullback mode continues regardless of whether the previous jackpot was jackpot E5 or jackpot F5, and high expectations Since there is no need to change the back image for the first image, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5606 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is greater than 30 (S5606: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is 31. (S5607). In the process of S5607, when it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223db is 31 (S5607: Yes), each process (S5609, S5610) for re-lottery of the degree of expectation is executed. More specifically, the expectation level selection table 222da is read (S5609), and from the read table, the back image (expectation level) corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is specified and set as the back image (S5610). , the process ends. This makes it possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation as to whether or not the pullback mode continues at the time when the number of fluctuations at which there is a possibility that the pullback mode has ended. It is possible to predict whether or not is continuing. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

If it is determined in the processing of S5607 that the value of the variation number counter 223db is not 31 (S5607: No), it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223db is a multiple of 10 (S5608). (S5608: Yes), each process (S5609, S5610) for re-lottery of the degree of expectation is executed. In other words, after reaching the number of times of variation that may have ended the pullback mode, the degree of expectation can be updated every time the variation display is performed 10 times. Therefore, as the game continues, it is possible to accurately predict whether or not the game is in the pullback mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, in the processing of S5608, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is not a multiple of 10 (S5608: No), this processing ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the V winning switch inside the V winning device 670 that enables ball entry when a small win is made in addition to the case where a special symbol lottery results in a big win. Also when the game ball passes through 670e3, the jackpot game is executed. In addition, while the small hit cannot be won in the first special symbol lottery, it is configured to be won with a high probability (9/10) in the second special symbol lottery. In other words, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, even if the result of the lottery does not result in a big win, if the lottery results in a small win, a big win can be expected. It can be said that the special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the ratio of executing the lottery of the second special symbols (easiness of execution) is varied according to the game state. That is, a game state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400 and a game state in which it is easy to enter the game ball are provided. More specifically, in the normal mode in which the normal state of the normal pattern is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal pattern is low, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is long, and the normal pattern is hit. Since the opening period of the electric accessory 6400a is shortened in this case, even if the player continues to aim at the through gate 67 by hitting to the right, the rate at which the electric accessory 6400a is opened becomes extremely low, and the second ball entrance 6400 is played. It also becomes difficult to enter the ball. On the other hand, in the continuous mode in which the time saving state A of the normal pattern is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal pattern increases, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern shortens, and the normal pattern hits. Since the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a in , is also longer, many game balls can enter the second ball entrance 6400 simply by continuing to shoot game balls aiming at the through gate 67 by hitting to the right. . Therefore, the continuous mode can create an advantageous state in which a big win is more likely to occur than in the normal mode.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, in addition to the normal mode and the consecutive villa mode, a retraction mode in which the time saving state B of the normal pattern is set is provided. In this pull-back mode, the probability of winning a normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a in the case of winning a normal symbol are the same as in the continuous mode, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different from that in the continuous mode. It is configured. In the continuous mode, the normal pattern variation time is set so that the electric accessory 6400a is opened at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can directly enter the second ball entrance 6400. was set, in the pullback mode, after the game ball that passed through the through gate 67 has passed through the second ball entrance 6400 and before the next game ball reaches the second ball entrance 6400 The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set so that the electric accessory 6400a is released only before. As a result, in the pullback mode, it is possible to frequently open the electric accessory 6400a by continuously shooting the game ball aiming at the through gate 67, but the game ball almost reaches the second ball entrance 6400. Since it does not enter the ball, it becomes an extremely disadvantageous state that only reduces the number of balls it has. Therefore, in the pullback mode, it is possible to perform a game method in which the player enters the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting left to proceed with the game (lottery for special symbols). In other words, the game method similar to the normal mode (normal game state) is performed instead of the game method aiming at the second ball entrance 6400 which is easily opened despite the fact that the time-saving state of the normal symbol is provided. It is possible to realize a novel game property that can be done.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the pullback mode than in the normal mode, there is a higher possibility of shifting to the consecutive mode after the jackpot ends. . In addition, in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the continuous mode, the withdrawal mode is set until at least 30 special symbol lotteries are completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that it is advantageous to continue playing the game until at least 30 special symbol lotteries are performed after the end of the continuous mode. Here, when a special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, or when a game ball enters a specific area, a game machine with specifications that give a jackpot (so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine), as a game state Only two types of game states, a normal game state in which game balls are difficult to enter the specific area and a time-saving game state in which game balls are easy to enter the specific area, are provided, and when the time-saving game state ends, the game is immediately started. It was common to switch to the most disadvantageous normal game state. However, in this configuration, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game will be greatly reduced when the game shifts to the disadvantageous normal game state, and the player will immediately quit the game when the time-saving game state ends. There was a possibility that it would be lost. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, after the end of the continuous mode, at least until the lottery of special symbols is executed 30 times, there is a special special pattern that makes it easy to shift to the continuous mode when the jackpot is won. The configuration is such that the state (retraction mode) is set. As a result, even if the consecutive game mode ends and the game ball enters a disadvantageous game state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400, the player's motivation for playing the game is prevented from decreasing. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the consecutive game mode is finished, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, the ratio of mode transition (ratio of each jackpot type) is not limited to the content of the fifth embodiment, and is arbitrarily determined within the range where the normal mode is the most disadvantageous and the consecutive villa mode is the most advantageous. be able to. For example, in the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols in the normal mode, the game state after the jackpot ends is either the consecutive mode or the normal mode. However, the retraction mode may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, 10%). In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery in the pull-back mode results in a big win, the mode is always switched to the multi-family mode, but the normal mode and the pull-back mode are lower than the multi-family mode. It is good also as a structure which can be set with a ratio.

In the fifth embodiment, only 30 times or 100 times are provided as the number of times of the pullback mode, but the number is not limited to this, and the number of times may be diversified. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether or not the pullback mode has ended, so that the player can more seriously predict how long the pullback mode will continue. In addition, a part of the jackpot won during the Renso mode is configured to shift to the normal mode, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the type of the back image in the same way as when the pullback mode is set. may be configured. By constructing in this way, even when the normal mode is set after the end of the big win, the player can continue the game by trying to determine whether or not it is in the pullback mode from the type of the rear image. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the fifth embodiment, the state of the distribution member 6600 includes a state in which game balls are distributed to the right flow path R1 and a state in which game balls are distributed to the left flow path R2 by passing (distribution) of the game balls. Although it was set as the structure which switches, it is not restricted to this. For example, it may be configured to determine the shooting interval of the game ball and electrically switch the state of the distribution member 6600 . In this case, for example, in the time saving state A, it may be operated so as to be alternately distributed to the right side flow path R1 and the left side flow path R2, and in the time saving state B, it may be operated so as to be distributed only to the right side flow path R1. . By configuring in this way, even reaching the through gate 67 is blocked in the time saving state B, so that the game can be played more reliably by hitting to the left.

In the fifth embodiment, there are one type of state in which game balls are likely to enter the second ball entrance 6400 (Renso mode), and two types of state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second ball entrance 6400. (Normal mode, pullback mode). That is, in the Renso mode, a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entrance 6400 directly, while in the other modes (normal mode, pullback mode), the game ball can pass through the through gate 67. A game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path R1 after being shot cannot enter the second ball entrance 6400. Although the variable time and the open period of the electric accessory 6400a are set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 6400, two types of game states may be provided. Specifically, for example, both time-saving state A and time-saving state B are configured as game states in which it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and in time-saving state A, game balls are shot at the shortest shooting interval. If this continues, only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entrance 6400 (the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is fired next and passes through the right flow path R1). On the other hand, in the time saving state B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 are fired next to the right flow path R1 It may be configured to set the open period of the electric accessory 6400a so that both the game ball that has passed through can enter. That is, in the time-saving state A, the opening period of the length in which the electric accessory 6400a is closed before the game ball next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entrance 6400 is set. , In the time-saving state B, after the game ball next to the game ball that passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entrance 6400, the electric accessory 6400a may be closed. good. By configuring in this way, the time-saving state B can reduce waste balls when the game balls are continuously hit to the right than the time-saving state A. - 特許庁Therefore, since the time saving state B can be made to have a higher degree of advantage, the setting of the time saving state B can make the player more happy than the setting of the time saving state A. - 特許庁

In the fifth embodiment, by making the fluctuation time of the normal pattern different between the time saving state A and the time saving state B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 in the time saving state A directly enters the second ball entrance 6400. While the ball is possible, in the time saving state B, neither the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 nor the game ball that has been fired after the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entrance 6400. It was configured to be That is, in the time-saving state A, if the game ball is continuously struck to the right at the shortest shooting interval, most of the game balls distributed to the left flow path R2 by the distribution member 6600 enter the second ball entrance 6400. On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, neither the game ball that has been hit to the right and distributed to the right flow path R1 nor the game ball that has been distributed to the left flow path R2 cannot enter the second ball entrance 6400. Although the configuration is described as being possible, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the variation time of the normal symbol, by varying the opening pattern of the electric accessory 6400a according to the type of the time saving state, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 in the time saving state B. It is good also as a structure which becomes difficult to ball. Specifically, for example, in the time saving state A, similarly to the fifth embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.1 seconds, and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a is set to 0.2 seconds. A game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is directly entered into the second ball entrance 6400 . On the other hand, in the time saving state B, after 0.1 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, it is opened momentarily (for example, 0.01 seconds), and then 0.4 seconds have passed. After that, the electric accessory 6400a may be opened for a relatively long time (for example, 0.19 seconds). With this configuration, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second ball entrance 6400 before and after the electric accessory 6400a is momentarily opened. It becomes impossible to enter the ball into the ball entrance 6400. In addition, the game ball launched next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can reach the second ball entrance 6400 only after a relatively long opening time (0.19 seconds) has elapsed. Even if hitting to the right, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 6400 . Therefore, since the operation similar to that of the fifth embodiment can be realized, the game can be played by hitting to the left in the time-saving state B.

In the fifth embodiment, in the time saving state A, the variation time of the normal symbol is always 0.1 seconds (the variation time in which the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is likely to enter the second ball entrance 6400 directly). It is set, and in the time saving state B, the variation time of the normal pattern is always set to 0.5 seconds (the variation time that makes it difficult to enter the second ball entrance 6400), but there are variations in the variation time. may be provided. Specifically, for example, in the time saving state A, a variable time of 0.5 seconds is set with a low probability (for example, 10%), and in the time saving state B, a variable time of 0.1 seconds with a low probability may be set. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variation time of normal symbols.

In the fifth embodiment, as the normal pattern variation time in the time saving state A, when the normal pattern hits, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the second ball entrance 6400 directly. Although the configuration is such that the time is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation time of the normal symbol may be set so that the game ball fired next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and distributed to the right flow path R1 can enter. By configuring in this way, in the time saving state A, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 6400 only by passing it through the through gate 67, so in the time saving state A, the game can be played continuously. You can keep shooting balls. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

In the fifth embodiment, by biasing the center of gravity of the distribution member 6600 to the lower right side by the biased portion 6600c of the distribution member 6600, the game ball does not reach the distribution member 6600 for 1.5 seconds or longer. In this case, the distributing member 6600 is configured to return to the state of distributing to the right flow path R1, but the biased portion 6600c is not necessarily provided. It may be configured such that the game balls that have reached the distribution means are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path regardless of the shooting interval of the game balls.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 156. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, the normal mode in which the normal state of the normal symbols is set is the most disadvantageous state (a state in which the number of balls held is likely to decrease and the lottery of the second special symbols that is disadvantageous is likely to be executed), The continuous mode in which the time-saving state A of the normal symbols is set is the most advantageous state (the state in which the number of held balls is difficult to decrease and the lottery of the advantageous second special symbols is easily executed). In addition, in the pullback mode that may shift when a big win is achieved in the consecutive mode, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting it left handed in the same way as in the normal mode, and to proceed with the game. However, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the pullback mode, the ratio of shifting to the consecutive mode is higher than when the jackpot is won in the normal mode. That is, as a disadvantageous mode (game state) in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by lottery of the first special symbol, two types of modes, a normal mode and a pullback mode, are provided. A relatively advantageous pullback mode is set only during the period.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the time-saving state B of normal symbols is set to the most disadvantageous game state in which it is difficult to shift to the continuous mode even if the jackpot is won, and when the normal state of normal symbols is reached, normal symbols are set. It is configured so that the shift rate to the continuous mode is higher than in the time-saving state B in the case of a big win. More specifically, when the first special pattern lottery hits in the time saving state B of the normal pattern, the game state after the jackpot ends at a high rate becomes the time saving state B of the normal pattern, and the continuous mode at a low rate. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern in the normal state of the normal pattern, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to 100% continuous mode. As a result, when the time saving state B of the normal pattern ends and the normal pattern shifts to the normal state, it becomes easier to shift to the continuous mode, so when the time saving state B is set, the time saving state is set. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is played with the expectation that the game will end.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, even in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a low probability (for example, 1/200). The small hit type of the first special symbol includes a small hit type that shifts to the continuous mode after the big hit given when the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3, and a small hit that shifts to the normal state of the normal pattern. A hit type is provided. Therefore, if a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3 after winning a small hit, there is a possibility that it will shift to an advantageous state, so in the disadvantageous normal pattern time saving state B, the first special pattern lottery It is possible to provide a novel game property in which a game is played in anticipation of a small win rather than a big win.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, in addition to the case where the number of lotteries of special symbols in the time saving state of 1 ends the specified number of times (for example, 100 times), a small hit of a specific type in the time saving state of 1 (small hit A6) Even when the number of winning times reaches a specified number (for example, once), it is configured to directly shift from the time saving state to the normal state. That is, when winning a specific type of small hit (small hit A6) in the time saving state B of the normal pattern, the small hit ends without the game ball passing through the V prize switch 670e3, and the remaining time saving Regardless of the number of times, it goes directly to the relatively advantageous normal mode. As a result, in the most disadvantageous time-saving state B of normal symbols, the game can be played in anticipation of winning a specific type of small win (small win A6) at an early stage (small number of lotteries of special symbols). can. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous while the most disadvantageous time saving state B is set, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel game property that it is advantageous not to generate a V prize in a specific type of small win (small win A6).

In the following description of the sixth embodiment, for simplification of the description, the time saving state B of the most disadvantageous normal pattern is called "normal mode", and when it becomes a jackpot than the time saving state B The normal state of the normal pattern that easily shifts to the continuous mode is called "preparation mode". In addition, since the time-saving state A of normal symbols is the most advantageous state as in the fifth embodiment, it is referred to as the "consecutive mode" as in the fifth embodiment.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed, and the sound lamp The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The only difference is that the control processing to be executed is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, elements that are the same as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 140, a selection effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 when a small win is made in the normal mode (ordinary symbol time saving state B) in the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed during the small winning period and a big win is achieved, the small winning type (small winning B6, C6 ) and a small hit type (small hit A6) in which the time saving state ends and shifts to the normal mode by finishing the small hit as it is without passing through the V prize switch 670e3. In other words, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a small hit, the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3 and passes through the V prize switch 670e3. A small win type is provided in which it is advantageous to finish the small win as it is without doing so. In this selection effect, an effect is executed in which the player selects whether to hit to the right in order to pass the V prize switch 670e3 or to hit to the left so that the game ball does not pass through the V prize switch 670e3. be done.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140, when a small win is won during the normal mode, "3", "4" and "1" indicating the small win are displayed on the display area Ds2 in the upper right portion of the display screen. ” is stopped and displayed. In addition, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is divided into two on the left and right, and in the upper center of the display screen, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR7 in which the characters "Choose!" is displayed. is formed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 140, in the left half of the display screen, there is formed a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR8 in which characters such as "A chance to enter the preparation mode by avoiding V!?" , an arrow image YG1 resembling a left-pointing arrow is displayed, in which characters "left-handed" are displayed. In addition, in the right half of the display screen, there is formed a display area HR9 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape in which characters such as "V-get a big win! Maybe Renso mode...?" , an arrow image YG2 imitating a right-pointing arrow with characters "Right shot" is displayed.

Depending on the contents of these displays, there is a possibility that the player will shift to the preparation mode by hitting left, but if the player hits right and wins a V prize, the game will shift to the Renso mode in addition to the jackpot. It is possible to make them understand that there is a possibility to do so. As a result, the player is made to judge whether it is better to hit the right hand to aim for the V prize or to hit the left hand to avoid the V prize, and the game is played according to the judgment. Since the game can be played by the method, the interest of the player can be enhanced each time a small win is obtained. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the ratio of determining the small hit type (small hit A6) that shifts to the preparation mode when avoiding the V prize is 50%, whereas the V prize occurs The ratio of determining the small hit type (small hit B6) that shifts to Renso mode after the big hit is 40%, and when the V prize occurs, it moves to the preparation mode (time saving state B) after the small hit. The rate at which the small hit type (small hit C6) is determined is 10%. Also, when a V winning occurs in the small win A6, the normal mode is reset 100 times after the big win. Therefore, if a game is played with the aim of winning a V prize, and if a V prize occurs as intended, a jackpot will always be awarded, but the normal mode will be looped rather than the possibility of shifting to the Renso mode. more likely. Also, if you avoid the V prize, 50% of the time, it will shift to the preparation mode, and 50% of the time, the normal mode will be maintained. can be made to judge. Also, the determination of whether to avoid the V winning or to aim for the V winning can be made different according to the remaining number of times of shortening the time (remaining number of times in the normal mode). Specifically, for example, when the number of times of time saving in the normal mode is small, it is better to avoid the V prize than to risk that the normal mode will be reset by allowing the player to win the V prize. It can make you think that is good. Also, when the number of times of time saving is large, even if the number of times of time saving is reset, there is little shock, so it is possible to make the player think that he should actively aim for the V prize. Therefore, it is possible to change the game method when the selection effect occurs according to the number of times of remaining time saving in the normal mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 141(a). FIG. 141(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141(a), the configuration of the ROM202 in the sixth embodiment is the configuration of the ROM202 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 118(a)), and the small hit prescribed number of times selection table 202ea is added. It is different in that In addition, the contents of the first hit random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, the small hit type selection table 202da, and the time saving frequency selection table 202db are partially changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 118(a)) in the fifth embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIG. 141(b), details of the first winning random number table 202a in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 141(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141(b), in the first hit random number table 202a in the sixth embodiment, five random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 4" are defined as judgment values for judging a big hit. (See 202a1 in FIG. 141(b)). It should be noted that, similarly to the fifth embodiment, the determination value for the big hit is common between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Of the 400 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers judged to be big hits is 5, so the lottery for special symbols is executed in the sixth embodiment. In that case, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/80 (5/400). That is, it is set to be twice or more higher than the jackpot probability (1/200) in the fifth embodiment. As a result, it becomes difficult to allow the number of times of time saving to pass before the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode. Therefore, when the normal mode (time saving state B with normal symbols) shifts to the preparation mode (normal state with normal symbols), it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction. In addition, the normal mode basically continues until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times. The probability that the lottery of special symbols will not be won even once in 100 times of lottery is about 28.4% (79/80 to the 100th power). 4%.

In addition, "5 to 397" is defined as the range of determination values determined to be out of the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 141 (b)), and determination to be determined as a small hit of the first special symbol "398, 399" is defined as the value range (see 202a3 in FIG. 141(b)). Therefore, the probability of winning a small prize in the first special symbol lottery is 1/200 (2/400). That is, in the normal mode, the probability of winning a small prize is set to be lower than the probability of winning a big prize in the special symbol lottery. In other words, it is configured so that the possibility of shifting to another mode due to the lapse of the number of big wins or time saving is higher than that of shifting to another mode triggered by a small win.

In addition, "5 to 40" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 141 (b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol "41 to 399" is defined as the range (see 202a3 in FIG. 141(b)). Thus, as in the fifth embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, a small win is won with a high probability (9/10), so the game ball can pass through the V prize switch 670e3. More periods are set as well. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the time-saving state A (continuous villa mode) in which the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG.141(c), the detail of the 1st hit classification selection table 202b in the 6th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 141(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 141(c), in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot A6 and the jackpot B6 are provided as the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the jackpot C6 is provided as the jackpot of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 141 (c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 69", and "jackpot A6" is defined in correspondence. (See 202b1 in FIG. 141(c)). This "jackpot A6" is a special jackpot in which the number of rounds is 5 lands, and the mode after the jackpot ends varies according to the game state (mode) when the jackpot is won. Specifically, when it becomes "jackpot A6" in the time saving state (normal mode, continuous mode), after the jackpot ends, the normal mode with the number of time saving times of 100 times is set, while the normal state of the normal pattern (preparation mode ), when the "jackpot A6" is reached, a continuous mode with 100 times of time saving is set. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A6" is 70, so the first special symbol If the lottery results in a big win, the percentage of determining "jackpot A6" is 70%.

In addition, since the Renso mode is a game state in which the game is progressed mainly by lottery of the second special symbol, in most cases of winning the "jackpot A6", it is not necessary to proceed with the game by lottery of the first special symbol. Some normal mode, or preparation mode. When it becomes "jackpot A6" in normal mode, the most disadvantageous normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends, and the number of times of time saving is reset 100 times regardless of the number of times of time saving at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, "jackpot A6" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type in the normal mode. On the other hand, when the "jackpot A6" is reached in the preparation mode, the most advantageous continuous mode (time-saving state A) is set after the jackpot ends, so if the "jackpot A6" is reached during the preparation mode, it is advantageous for the player. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 141(c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" as corresponding to "jackpot B6". (See 202b2 in FIG. 141(c)). This "jackpot B6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the jackpot is set to the continuous mode regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. That is, in the normal mode, it is the jackpot type that is the most advantageous for the player. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B6" is 70, so the first special symbol If the lottery results in a big win, the ratio of determining "jackpot A6" is 30%. That is, in the normal mode, even if the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the "jackpot A6" in which the normal mode is set again after the big hit is determined at a rate of 70%, and only at a rate of 30%, after the big hit A "jackpot B6" in which the consecutive villa mode is set is determined. In other words, even if a big hit is made in the normal mode, the expectation of shifting to another mode is low (30%), so if it is a big hit rather than a big hit in the first special symbol lottery in the normal mode It is possible to provide a novel game property that makes the player want to exit the normal mode (end the time-saving state) and shift to the preparation mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 141(c), as the second special symbol jackpot type, "jackpot C6" is defined in association with all the values of the first hit type counter C2 (FIG. 141 (c) 202b3). This "jackpot C6" is a jackpot that has 15 rounds and shifts to the Renso mode after the jackpot ends. Therefore, when a jackpot is achieved in the consecutive game mode in which the game is progressed mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbols, the game is certainly shifted to the consecutive game mode again after the jackpot is finished. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, it is better to win a big hit in the second special symbol lottery than to win a big win through a small win in the continuous mode. Possibility of going into Sou mode increases. Therefore, it is possible to please the player when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win.

Next, with reference to Drawing 142 (a), the details of small hit classification selection table 202da in the 6th embodiment are explained. FIG. 142(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table 202da.

As shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the first special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 49", "small hit A6" is defined in association with (See 202da1 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small win A6" is a small win type in which a "big win D6" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 670e3 of the V winning device 670. The jackpot D6 is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5, and the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, "small win A6" is a small win type in which the game state after the big win becomes the most disadvantageous when a V prize is won during the small win game. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 50 counter values are "small hit A6", so when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit A6" The ratio determined is 50% (50/100). In addition, this "small hit A6" is a small hit that serves as an opportunity to end the time saving state regardless of the number of remaining time saving. For this reason, in the normal mode, if it becomes "small hit A6" and V prize does not occur, it shifts to a relatively advantageous preparation mode after the small win, so it is better not to win a V than to win a V. However, it is a special small hit type in which the gaming state is advantageous.

Further, as shown in FIG. 142(a), as the small hit type of the first special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "50 to 89", and "small hit B6" is associated. (see 202da2 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small hit B6" is a small hit type in which a "big hit B6" is given when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. As described above, the jackpot B6 is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5, and the continuous mode is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, the "small win B6" is a small win type in which the game state after the big win is the most advantageous state by winning a V prize during the small win game. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 25 counter values are "small hit B6", so when a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit B6" The ratio determined is 25% (25/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 142(a), as the small hit type of the first special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "90 to 99", and "small hit C6" is associated. defined (see 202da3 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small hit C6" is a small hit type in which a "big hit E6" is given when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. This "jackpot E6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5, and the preparation mode is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, the "small win C6" is a small win type in which the game state after the big win is set to a relatively advantageous state by winning a V prize during the small win game. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 10 counter values are "small hit C6", so if a special symbol lottery results in a small hit, "small hit C6" The percentage determined is 10% (10/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as a small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit D6" is defined in association with the range of "0 to 29" for the small hit type counter C5. (see 202da4 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small hit D6" is a small hit type in which a "big hit C6" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. As described above, this "jackpot C6" has 15 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the consecutive game mode is set after the jackpot is finished regardless of the game state at the time of winning. In other words, the ``small win D6'' is a jackpot that has the largest number of rounds and the most advantageous game state after the big win by winning a V prize during the small win game. is one of the most advantageous small winning types for the player. Of the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes the "small hit D6" is 30, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the "small hit D6" The ratio determined is 30% (30/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as a small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit E6" is defined in association with the range of "30 to 79" for the small hit type counter C5. (See 202da5 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small hit E6" is a small hit type in which a "big hit F6" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. This "jackpot F6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the game state after the jackpot ends is varied according to the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, when it becomes "jackpot F6" in the time saving state (normal mode, consecutive mode), after the jackpot ends, the consecutive mode with a time saving number of times of 100 is set, while the normal state of the normal pattern (preparation mode), when it becomes "jackpot F6", the number of times of time saving is set to 0 times (preparation mode is set). Therefore, when "big hit F6" occurs in the consecutive mode, the continuous mode continues even after the big win ends, which is advantageous for the player. It will be disadvantageous compared to the case of hitting the jackpot. This is because, if the lottery of the first special symbol in the preparation mode results in a big hit, the mode is shifted to the continuous mode, which is advantageous at a rate of 100%. Therefore, in the preparation mode in which it is necessary to play the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting left, when an irregular game for executing the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the degree of advantage for the player. can be reduced, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods. Of the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes the "small hit E6" is 50, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the "small hit E6" The ratio determined is 50% (50/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as a small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit F6" is defined in association with the range of "80 to 89" for the small hit type counter C5. (see 202da6 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small win F6" is a small win type in which a "big win G6" is awarded when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. This "jackpot G6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. The period of the normal mode (the number of lotteries of special symbols until shifting to the preparation mode) set after the end of the "jackpot G6" is configured differently according to the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, when the “jackpot G6” is reached during the time saving state of the normal pattern, the normal mode (time saving state B) is set 50 times after the jackpot ends, while the “jackpot” is set during the normal state of the normal pattern. G6", the normal mode is set for 100 times after the jackpot is completed. Therefore, if the game goes to "jackpot G6" in the continuous mode, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends, which is disadvantageous for the player. However, since the number of times of the normal mode is set to be smaller than the number of times of the normal mode (100 times) which is set when "jackpot A6" is reached in the normal mode, it becomes easier to exit the normal mode and shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game until the game shifts to the preparation mode or until the jackpot is won before shifting to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the consecutive game mode ends, so that the availability of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Of the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes "small hit F6" is 10, so when it becomes a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit F6" The percentage determined is 10% (10/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as a small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit G6" is defined in association with the range of "90 to 94" for the small hit type counter C5. (See 202da7 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small hit G6" is a small hit type in which a "big hit H6" is given when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. This "jackpot H6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends, like the "jackpot G6". Specifically, when the "jackpot H6" is reached during the time saving state of the normal pattern, the normal mode (time saving state B) is set 25 times after the jackpot ends, while the "jackpot" is set during the normal state of the normal pattern. H6", the normal mode is set for 100 times after the jackpot is finished. Therefore, if "big win H6" is reached in the continuous mode, the game will shift to the most disadvantageous normal mode after the big win, which is disadvantageous for the player. However, the number of times of normal mode (100 times) set when "jackpot A6" is reached in normal mode, and the number of times of normal mode (25 times) set when "jackpot G6" is reached in continuous mode ) is set, it becomes easier to leave the normal mode and shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game until the game shifts to the preparation mode or until the jackpot is won before shifting to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately after the consecutive game mode ends, so that the availability of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Of the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes the "small hit G6" is 5, so when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the "small hit G6". The percentage determined is 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), as the small hit type of the second special symbol, "small hit H6" is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99" for the small hit type counter C5. (see 202da8 in FIG. 142(a)). This "small hit H6" is a small hit type in which a "big hit I6" is given when a game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3. Like the "jackpot G6" and the "jackpot H6", this "jackpot I6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. Specifically, when it becomes "jackpot I6" during the time saving state of the normal pattern, one normal mode (time saving state B) is set after the jackpot ends, while the "jackpot" is set during the normal state of the normal pattern I6", the normal mode is set for 100 times after the jackpot is completed. Therefore, when it becomes "jackpot I6" in Renso mode, if it is lost in the first special pattern lottery after the jackpot ends, it is possible to shift to the preparation mode, so the normal mode is set among the jackpot types. Then, it is most advantageous for the player (it becomes easier to shift to the preparation mode). Of the 100 counter values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, the counter value that becomes "small hit H6" is 5, so when it becomes a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit H6" The percentage determined is 5% (5/100).

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, in the continuous mode, when the game shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot ends, the number of times the normal mode (time saving state B) continues is not clearly indicated to the player. That is, as in the sixth embodiment, the type of the rear image suggests the degree of expectation as to whether or not the normal mode has shifted to the preparation mode. By configuring in this way, during a predetermined period (in the sixth embodiment, 50 times after the end of the jackpot) after the end of the consecutive villa mode, the normal mode is maintained whether the transition to the preparation mode is made or not. It is possible to provide a game property that makes it possible to predict whether or not there is. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142(b), the details of the time reduction frequency selection table 202db in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time reduction frequency selection table 202db. This time-saving frequency selection table 202db, like the time-saving frequency selection table 202db in the fifth embodiment, the time-saving frequency after the end of the jackpot (the number of lotteries of special symbols until shifting to the normal mode) is determined by the jackpot type, and when the jackpot is won. This is a data table that defines data to be set according to the game state of the game.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b), as a jackpot type, for the jackpot A6, 100 times of time saving state A is associated with the normal state (preparation mode) of the normal symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol ( 100 time saving state B is defined in association with normal mode, continuous mode) (see 202db1 in FIG. 142(b)). Therefore, in the preparation mode set to the normal state of the normal symbols, if the lottery of the first special symbols results in a jackpot A6, the continuous mode is set after the jackpot, so it is one of the jackpot types preferable for the player. . On the other hand, in the normal mode and the consecutive mode, when the jackpot reaches A6, the mode shifts to the most disadvantageous normal mode, which is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player. In addition, since the continuous mode is a game state in which the game is progressed by mainly executing the lottery for the second special symbol, it becomes disadvantageous when the jackpot becomes A6 (the disadvantageous normal mode is set after the jackpot ends). ) is almost normal mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot B6 and C6 are defined in association with the time saving state A of 100 times regardless of the game state at the time of winning (Fig. 202db2 at 142(b)). Therefore, even if the jackpot B6 or C6 is won in any of the game states of the normal mode, the preparation mode, and the consecutive game mode, the game state after the jackpot ends is the most advantageous consecutive game mode. Jackpots B6 and C6 are one of the most advantageous jackpot types.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as a jackpot type, the jackpot D6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times regardless of the game state at the time of winning (Fig. 142 ( b) 202db3). Therefore, the jackpot D6 is the most disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends. In addition, as the jackpot type, the jackpot E6 is defined in association with 0 times as the number of times of time saving (see 202db4 in FIG. 142(b)). Therefore, even if the jackpot E6 is won in any game state of the normal mode, the preparation mode, and the continuous mode, the preparation mode is relatively advantageous after the jackpot ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as a jackpot type, for jackpot F6, 0 times is defined as the number of time reductions in the normal state (preparation mode) of the normal design in association with the time reduction state of the normal design. (Normal mode, continuous mode) is defined in association with 100 times of time saving state A (see 202db5 in FIG. 142(b)). The jackpot F6 is a jackpot type that is won when the V winning switch 670e3 is passed during the jackpot game and becomes a jackpot E6 in the lottery of the second special symbols, and basically it is a jackpot that is won only in the consecutive mode. . When the jackpot F6 is reached in the consecutive game mode, the consecutive game mode is set again after the jackpot ends, so the jackpot F6 is one of the jackpot types in which the game state after the jackpot ends is most advantageous. The reason why the number of times of time saving is set to 0 when winning during the normal state of the normal symbol is to suppress the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation mode. . That is, in the preparation mode, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big win, the mode shifts to the continuous mode at a rate of 100%, but when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a small win E6 and the jackpot F6 is won. , looping through preparation mode. Therefore, if the lottery of the second special symbols is executed irregularly, it becomes disadvantageous, and thus, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as a jackpot type, the jackpot G6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times in the normal state of the normal symbol, and 50 times in the time saving state of the normal symbol. is defined in association with the time saving state B (see 202db6 in FIG. 142(b)). Therefore, when the jackpot G6 is reached in the continuous mode, the normal mode is set a relatively large number of times, which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, when the jackpot G6 is reached in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times, so that it is possible to suppress the irregular game method for executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as a jackpot type, the jackpot H6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times in the normal state of the normal symbol, and 25 times in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The time saving state B is defined in association with (see 202db7 in FIG. 142(b)). Therefore, when the jackpot H6 is reached in the continuous mode, the normal mode is set a smaller number of times than when the jackpot G6 is reached, so that the normal mode can be ended more easily than the jackpot G6. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player than when the jackpot G6 is reached and the consecutive villa mode ends. In addition, when the jackpot H6 is reached in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times in the same way as the jackpot G6. can be planned.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), as the jackpot type, the jackpot I6 is defined in association with the time saving state B of 100 times in the normal state of the normal symbol, and once in the time saving state of the normal symbol. is defined in association with the time saving state B (see 202db8 in FIG. 142(b)). Therefore, when the jackpot hits I6 in the continuous mode, the normal mode is set a smaller number of times than when the jackpot hits G6 or H6, so that the normal mode can be terminated much more easily than the jackpot hits G6 or H6. can be done. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player than when the consecutive game mode ends with the jackpot G6 or jackpot H6. In addition, when the jackpot I6 is reached in the preparation mode, the normal mode is set 100 times like the jackpot G6 and the jackpot H6. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, details of the small hit prescribed number of times selection table 202ea will be described. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit specified number of times selection table 202ea. This small hit prescribed number of times selection table 202ea is a data table referred to for setting end conditions of the time saving state for each small hit type. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, in addition to the number of times of saving time (number of times of lottery of special symbols), the number of times of winning until the time saving state is terminated for each type of small hit is defined, and the number of times of winning is defined within the number of times of saving time. When the specified number of times is reached, the time saving state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of time saving times. As a result, every time a small win is made in the disadvantageous normal mode, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation for reaching the specified number of times.

As shown in FIG. 143, the small hit prescribed number of times selection table 202ea is associated with the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the number of times of winning until the time saving state for each small hit type is terminated (regulation number of times) is specified. More specifically, for the big hit A6, 100 times is defined as the prescribed number of times for all the small winning types in the normal state of the normal symbol. On the other hand, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, 1 time is defined as the specified number of times for the small hit A6, and 100 times is specified as the specified number of times for the small hit type other than the small hit A6 (Fig. 143) 202ea1). In other words, when setting the continuous mode, 100 times are set as the specified number of times for all small hit types, whereas when setting the normal mode (time saving state B), the big hit A6 One time is set as the specified number of times, and 100 times is set as the specified number of times for other small hit types. In addition, 100 times is defined as the prescribed number of times for all the small winning types regardless of the game state at the time of winning (see 202ea2 in FIG. 143). That is, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, when it comes to the big hits B6 and C6 in which the continuous mode is set, 100 times is set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, for the jackpot D6 and the jackpot G6 to I6, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, one time is defined as the prescribed number of times for the small hit A6, and other 100 times is defined in association with the small hit type as the defined number of times (see 202ea3 in FIG. 143). That is, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, when it becomes one of the big hits D6, G6 to I6 in which the normal mode is set, one time is set as the specified number of times for the small hit A6, and for other small hit types 100 times is set as the specified number of times.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, for the jackpot E6, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, 0 times is defined as the prescribed number of times for all the small hit types (Fig. 143 202ea4). That is, when the normal mode is set after the end of the big hit, 0 times is set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types. In addition, for the big hit F6, in the normal state of the normal pattern, 0 times is defined as the specified number of times for all the small hit types, while in the time saving state of the normal design, all the small hit types 100 times is defined as the prescribed number of times (see 202ea5 in FIG. 143).

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the continuous villa mode is set, 100 times are set as the prescribed number of times for ending the time saving state for all small hit types. That is, until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times, the time saving state is surely continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent the disappointment of the player by forcibly terminating the time saving state and shifting to the preparation mode before the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times in the continuous mode. In addition, when the normal mode is set, one time is set for the small hit A6 as the prescribed number of small hits for ending the time saving state. As a result, in the normal mode, if you win a small hit A6, you can forcibly end the number of times of working hours and shift to the preparation mode, so even if there are many remaining times of working hours in the normal mode, small The game can be played in anticipation of winning A6. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game in the normal mode from becoming an operation of simply continuing to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 until the number of times of time saving has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game in the normal mode.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, only in the normal mode, the specified number of times for the small hit A6 is set to 1 time, and the specified number of times for the other small hit types is set to 100 times. Although the number of times is set to 100, it is not limited to this. The correspondence relationship between the specified number of small hits and the type (mode) of the time saving state may be determined arbitrarily. For example, in the consecutive villa mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a small winning type with a small prescribed number of times (for example, 5 times) is provided in the small winning of the second special symbol. By configuring in this manner, the more V prizes of about 1/20 in the Renso mode continue to fail, the higher the possibility that the Renso mode will end, so that the game in the Renso mode will have a sense of tension. can have. Further, in the normal mode, in place of or in addition to determining the specified number of times for each type of small win, the specified number may be determined by summing up the winning times of one or all of the types of small wins. Specifically, for example, the specified number of times of the small winning A6 may be set to 1 time, and the specified number of times based on the total winning number of the small winning B6 and the small winning C6 may be set to 5 times. By configuring in this way, even if the event of failing to win the V prize and maintaining the normal mode continues, it is possible to positively perceive that the specified number of times until the transition to the preparation mode is reduced, so that the game can be played. It is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 144, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment has a small hit prescribed number of times storage area 203ea added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 121(b)). They are different in that respect.

The small hit prescribed number of times storage area 203ea is for storing the number of remaining small wins for each small win type to end the time saving state (normal mode, continuous mode) and shift to the preparation mode. storage area. In the time-saving state of normal symbols, each time a small win is made, the remaining number of winnings (prescribed number of times) corresponding to the winning small win type is subtracted and updated (see S2412 in FIG. 150). Then, when the specified number of times corresponding to one of the small hit types becomes 0 (reaches the specified number of times), regardless of the remaining time reduction number of times (lottery number of special symbols), it shifts to the preparation mode. (See S2414 in FIG. 150). In addition, in the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode, since the specified number of times of the small per type other than the small per A6 is set to 100 times, depending on the small per type other than the small per A6, 100 times (or 50 times, 25 times, 1 time), there is no possibility that the time saving state will end before the time saving number of times ends. In addition, in the continuous mode, 100 times is set as the specified number of times for all the small hit types, so the specified number of small wins is reached before the 100 times, which is the number of time saving times in the continuous mode, ends. There is no possibility of transitioning to preparation mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 145, a game state transition method in the sixth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 145, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is provided with roughly three states (modes). That is, the normal mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 145 (time saving state B of normal patterns), the continuous mode shown in the lower left part of FIG. 145 (time saving state A of normal patterns), and the lower right part of FIG. A preparation mode (normal state of normal symbols) is provided.

As described above, the normal mode indicates the time-saving state B of the normal pattern, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and even if it becomes a big hit in the first special pattern lottery. Since it is difficult to shift to the mode, it is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In addition, as described above, the continuous mode indicates a game state in which the time saving state A of the normal pattern is set, and since the game ball becomes easier to enter the second ball entrance 6400, it is a small hit with a high probability. is generated and the chances of passing through the V winning switch 670e3 increase, so this is a gaming state in which the possibility of winning a big win is higher than in the normal mode. In addition, since the consecutive game mode is easily set again after the end of the big win, the game state becomes the most advantageous for the player.

In addition, the preparation mode indicates a game state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. Although it is necessary to play the game aiming at the ball entrance 64, the game state is more advantageous than the normal mode because the game shifts to the continuous mode at a rate of 100% when winning the jackpot.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 145, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal mode to another mode when a big hit is won, when a small win is won, and when the number of times of time saving has passed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big win and the big win B6 is determined as the big win type, the continuous mode is set as the game state after the big win. In addition, when the number of times of time saving passes (the lottery of special symbols for the number of times of time saving ends), it shifts to the preparation mode (normal state of normal symbols). Further, when the small winning A6 is reached and the small winning game ends without generating the V prize, the game shifts to the preparation mode due to reaching the specified number of times of the small winning A6 in the normal mode. In addition, when the small win B6 is reached and the player hits to the right aiming at the V win, and when the V win occurs, after the big win (jackpot B6) based on the V win is completed, the game shifts to the continuous mode. . Further, when the small win C6 is reached, the player hits to the right aiming at the V win, and when the V win occurs, after the big win (jackpot D6) based on the V win is completed, the mode shifts to the continuous mode. . On the other hand, when the big win A6 is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, and when the small win A6 is won and V prize is generated, the normal mode is set again after the big win is finished. Further, when the small wins B6 and C6 are reached and no V winning occurs, the normal mode is maintained.

Therefore, in the normal mode, when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big win, the mode is shifted to the continuous mode only at a rate of 30%, and the normal mode is looped at a rate of 70%. In other words, even if the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big win, there is a higher possibility that the normal mode will be looped rather than the transition to the continuous mode, so that the player will not be very pleased with the result of the lottery of the special symbol lottery. becomes. Therefore, in the normal mode, rather than getting a big win in the special symbol lottery, it can be made to want to shift to the preparation mode after the number of times of time reduction has passed, so every time the special symbol lottery is executed, a big win is made. It is possible to provide a novel game property that makes the player wish not to win the prize. Furthermore, in the normal mode, when a small win is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbols, a small win A6 is determined at a rate of 50%, with the specified number of times until the time-saving state is terminated. Therefore, if the small win becomes A6 and V winning does not occur, the mode shifts to the preparation mode, so if the small win is won with a probability of 1/200 in the lottery of the special symbols, the small win A6 is determined. It is possible to make the player expect to be there. Incidentally, if a V winning occurs in the small win A6, the normal mode is set again after the big win ends. Therefore, it can be said that the small win A6 is a small win type in which it is more advantageous not to generate a V prize than to generate a V prize in terms of game state (mode) transition. On the other hand, when a small winning type other than A6 is determined in the lottery of the first special symbol, the game state (mode) is maintained unless V winning is generated. In other words, the small winning types other than the small winning A6 are the small winning types that are more advantageous when the V winning is generated than when the V winning is not generated.

In this way, there is a small win type (small win A6) that becomes advantageous if you do not win a V prize and a disadvantage if you win a V prize, and a small win type that maintains a disadvantageous state if you do not win a V prize (small win B6, By providing C6), when winning a small prize, it is possible to provide a game property that allows the player to decide whether it is better to win a V prize or avoid a V prize. can. In addition, as described above, in the sixth embodiment, when a small hit is made in the normal mode, the selection effect (see FIG. 140) is executed regardless of the small hit type. As a result, it becomes difficult to guess the small winning type from the display mode, so that it is possible to make a determination as to whether or not to aim for the V prize more seriously. Therefore, every time a small prize is won, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 145, there is a possibility of shifting from the continuous mode to another mode not only when the jackpot is won, but also when the time reduction number of normal symbols is finished. Specifically, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 145, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a small hit and a V prize (event in which the game ball passes through the V prize switch 670e3) occurs, and the big hit G6 to I6 is determined, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal mode. In addition, when the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times without winning a big hit, the number of times of shortening the working hours of the normal symbols passes, and the game shifts (falls) to the preparation mode. On the other hand, when the jackpots C6 and F6 are determined in the case of winning the V prize, or when the jackpots are won in the lottery of special symbols, the continuous mode is set again after the jackpot ends. In addition, as described above, the probability that the 100th special symbol variation ends without a big hit is about 0.6%, so it is a phenomenon that hardly occurs. Therefore, it is when the jackpot G6 to I6 is won that the mode is shifted to another mode in the continuous mode. The small hits (small hits F6 to H6) corresponding to the big hits G6 to I6 are determined at a rate of 20% of the total small hits, so when it comes to Renso mode, the big hit and Renso mode are set at 80% or more. It becomes an extremely advantageous game state that repeats at a rate. Therefore, since the player can play the game with the goal of shifting to the consecutive villa mode, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

As shown in the lower right portion of FIG. 145, there is a possibility of transitioning from the preparation mode to another mode only in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 145, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, even if the jackpot is A6 or when the jackpot is B6, the game after the jackpot ends. The state is set to Renso mode. Although the preparation mode is basically a mode in which only the first special symbol lottery is executed (it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400), the second entry is made by an irregular game method. When a game ball is entered into the ball opening 6400 to result in a big hit or a small hit to generate a V prize, the game falls to the normal mode (when the jackpot hits F6 to H6). , the preparation mode may be looped (when jackpots D6 and E6 are obtained). Therefore, if the lottery for the second special symbol is executed by the irregular game method, it becomes more difficult to shift to the continuous mode than by executing the lottery for the first special symbol. can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146(a), the details of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 146(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 146(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 123(a)) except that the expectation level selection table 222da is deleted. The difference is that a rank-up lottery table 222ea is added.

The rank-up lottery table 222ea suggests the number of remaining fluctuations up to the preparation mode by the rank-up aspect of the rear image when the jackpot G6 to I6 is achieved in the consecutive mode and the game shifts (falls) to the normal mode. It is a data table that is referenced to set the rank-up effect for. Details of the rank-up lottery table 222ea will be described with reference to FIG. 146(b).

FIG. 146(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rank-up lottery table 222ea. As shown in FIG. 146(b), the rank-up lottery table 222ea has a determination value for determining to update (rank up) to a back image with a higher degree of expectation for each value of the number of remaining time reductions (J). (Counter value of effect lottery counter 223da) is defined in association with this data table. The update of the rear image is randomly selected every time the number of times of change becomes a multiple of 10 within the range of less than 50 times of change.

As shown in FIG. 146(b), when the value of the number of remaining time reductions (J) is less than 20, it is determined that there is no rank increase when the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is "0 to 29". On the other hand, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is "30 to 89", it is determined to be one rank up, and when it is "90 to 99", it is determined to be two ranks up. Here, 1 rank up means that if the current rear image is a rear image for low expectations, it is updated (ranked up) to a rear image for medium expectations, and is a rear image for medium expectations. In this case, the back image is updated (ranked up) for high expectations. In other words, it means raising expectations by one level. In addition, when the back image for high expectations has already been set, the back image for high expectations is not changed. In addition, 2 rank up means updating (ranking up) to a rear image for high expectations regardless of the type of the current rear image.

Further, as shown in FIG. 146(b), when the value of the number of times of remaining time reduction (J) is 20 or more, the value of the effect lottery counter 223da is "0 to 59", it is determined that there is no rank up, In the case of "60 to 97", it is determined to be one rank up, and in the case of "98, 99", it is determined to be two ranks up. In this way, when the number of times of time saving is less than 20, the rate of one rank or two ranks up is higher than when the number of times of time saving is 20 or more, so each time the lottery timing comes Whether or not to rank up It is possible to play a game while paying attention to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 147, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment has a rank-up lottery flag 223ea and an expectation storage area 223eb added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 124). It is different in that

The rank-up lottery flag 223ea is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period for lottery for rank-up of the rear image using the rank-up lottery table 222ea. This rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to ON at the timing when the jackpot of the type that shifts from the continuous mode to the normal mode ends (see S5706 in FIG. 154), and the 51st variation pattern production after the jackpot ends. is set to OFF at the start timing of (see S5624 in FIG. 156). In other words, it is set to OFF based on the number of fluctuations that determines that the transition to the preparation mode has been reached for any of the jackpots G6 to I6. In addition, although not shown, the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is also set to OFF when a big win is won. While the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on, the rank-up lottery using the rank-up lottery table 222ea is executed every time the number of variations of the special symbol becomes a multiple of 10. Thus, it is possible to provide the playability to guess whether or not the mode of rank-up is shifted to the preparation mode (whether the number of remaining time reductions before shifting to the preparation mode is less than 20 times).

The degree-of-expectation storage area 223eb is a storage area for storing data indicating the degree of expectation suggested by the type of back surface. When executing the lottery using the rank-up lottery table 222ea (see FIG. 146(b)), the current degree of expectation is determined by the data stored in the degree of expectation storage area 223eb, and determined by lottery. Identify the back face type after reflecting the rank up.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. First, the special symbol variation process 6 (S151) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this special symbol variation process 6 (S151), similar to the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) in the fifth embodiment, the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the third pattern display device 81, and the like.

Of the special symbol variation processing 6 (see FIG. 148) in the sixth embodiment, in each process of S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, S221, S261, S262, and S265, the special symbol in the fifth embodiment The same processes as S201 to S212, S214 to S218, S220, S221, S261, S262, and S265 of variation process 5 (see FIG. 126) are executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 6 (see FIG. 148) in the sixth embodiment, after the processing of S262, all the data in the time saving medium counter 203da, the small hit prescribed number of times storage area 203ea, and the mode type storage area 203dc are reset. , the process proceeds to S220 to set the start of the jackpot.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 6 (see FIG. 148) in the sixth embodiment, in the process of S218, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a special symbol jackpot (S218: No), the fifth implementation Instead of the time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) in the form, the time saving number update process 6 is executed (S272), and the process proceeds to S265. The details of this time saving frequency update process 6 (S272) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the process of S265, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S265: Yes), instead of the small hit start process (see FIG. 129) in the fifth embodiment, the small hit start process 6 is executed (S273), and the process ends. The details of this small winning start process 6 (S273) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the details of the above-described time saving frequency update process 6 (S272) will be described. This time saving number update process 6 (S272) is a process executed instead of the time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) in the fifth embodiment, and the time saving number update process (see FIG. 128) and Similarly, when it is a mode in which the time saving state is set (that is, when it is the continuous mode or the normal mode), it is a process for updating the number of times of working time saving.

In the processing of S2301 to S2304 and S2306 in the time saving number update process 6 (see FIG. 149) in the sixth embodiment, S2301 to S2304 of the time saving number update process in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 128), and S2306 are executed. In addition, in the time saving number update process 6 (see FIG. 149) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203da has become 0 in the process of S2304 (S2304: Yes), the small hit specified number of times is stored All the data in the area 203ea are reset to 0 (S2311), and a state command indicating the normal state of the normal design is set (S2312). Next, "00H" indicating the preparation mode (normal state of the normal symbol) is stored in the mode type storage area 203dc (S2313), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, details of the above-described small winning start process 6 (S273) will be described. This small hitting start process 6 (S273) is a process executed instead of the small hitting start process (see FIG. 129) in the fifth embodiment, and the small hitting start process (see FIG. 129) in the fifth embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for setting the start of the small winning opening operation.

Among the small hitting start processing 6 (see FIG. 150) in the sixth embodiment, in each processing of S2401 to S2403, each processing of S2401 to S2403 of the small hitting start processing in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 129) The same processing is performed. In addition, in the small hit start process 6 (see FIG. 150) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S2403 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203da during time saving is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) If it discriminate|determines (S2411) and the value of counter 203da is 0 in time saving (S2411:No), this process will be complete|finished as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2411, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203da during time saving is a value greater than 0 (S2411: Yes), the specified number of times for each small hit type stored in the small hit specified number of times storage area 203ea Of these, the prescribed number of times corresponding to the type of small hit won this time is updated by subtracting 1 (S2412), and it is determined whether or not the prescribed number of times after subtraction has become 0 (S2413).

In the process of S2413, if it is determined that the prescribed number of times after subtraction has become 0 (S2413: Yes), in order to terminate the time saving state, the data of the time saving medium counter 203da and the small hit prescribed number of times storage area 203ea are all set to 0 (S2414), set a state command indicating the intention to the normal state of the normal symbol (S2415), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S2413, if it is determined that the prescribed number of times after the subtraction in the process of S2412 is not 0 (S2413: No), this process ends.

By executing this small hit start processing 6 (see FIG. 150), when the small hit A6 (the specified number of times is one small hit) in the normal mode, regardless of the remaining number of times of time saving, the time saving state It can be terminated and transitioned to preparation mode.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, only in the normal mode, the specified number of times for the small hit A6 is set to 1 time, and the specified number of times for the other small hit types is set to 100 times. Although the number of times is set to 100, it is not limited to this. The correspondence relationship between the specified number of small hits and the type (mode) of the time saving state may be determined arbitrarily. For example, in the continuous villa mode, the prescribed number of times may be set to one. By configuring in this way, in the consecutive villa mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a small winning type with a small prescribed number of times (for example, 5 times) is provided in the small winning of the second special symbol. By configuring in this manner, the more V prizes of about 1/20 in the Renso mode continue to fail, the higher the possibility that the Renso mode will end, so that the game in the Renso mode will have a sense of tension. can have. Further, in the normal mode, in place of or in addition to determining the specified number of times for each type of small win, the specified number may be determined by summing up the winning times of one or all of the types of small wins. Specifically, for example, the specified number of times of the small winning A6 may be set to 1 time, and the specified number of times based on the total winning number of the small winning B6 and the small winning C6 may be set to 5 times. By configuring in this way, even if the event of failing to win the V prize and maintaining the normal mode continues, it is possible to positively perceive that the specified number of times until the transition to the preparation mode is reduced, so that the game can be played. It is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the jackpot ending process 6 (S1151) in the sixth embodiment will be described. This jackpot end process 6 (S1151) is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 133) in the fifth embodiment in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 132). Similar to the jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 133) in the form, this is processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Of the jackpot end processing 6 (see FIG. 151) in the sixth embodiment, S1321, S1322, and S1324 to S1326 of the jackpot end processing 5 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 133) S1321, S1322 , and S1324 to S1326 are executed. In addition, in the jackpot end processing 6 (see FIG. 151) in the sixth embodiment, when the processing of S1322 is completed, the small hit prescribed number of times selection table 202ea is read (S1331), and from the read table, the jackpot type storage area 203db and the game state (mode) at the time of winning indicated by the data of the winning mode storage area 203de (S1332). Next, the specified number of small hits for each type of specified small hit is stored in the specified number of times of small hit storage area 203ea, and the number of times of reduced working hours specified in the process of S1322 is set as the value of the counter 203da during reduced working hours (S1333) and processed. to S1324.

By executing this jackpot end processing 6 (see FIG. 151), the number of times of time saving and the number of times of small hits can be appropriately set according to the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 156. FIG. First, command determination processing 6 (S4151) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 6 (S4151) is executed in place of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment. This is processing for performing control according to the type of command received from the device 110 .

S4201 to S4209 and S4213 to S4215 of the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 152) in the sixth embodiment correspond to S4201 to S4209 of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 136) in the fifth embodiment. , and S4213 to S4215 are executed. In command determination processing 6 (see FIG. 152) in the sixth embodiment, if it is determined that a state command has been received in the processing of S4209 (S4209: Yes), state command processing in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 137) ), status command processing 6 is executed (S4231), and this processing ends. The details of this state command process 6 (S4231) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 152) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4209 that the state command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4209: No), It is determined whether or not a command related to a win (opening command for a small win, ending command for a small win, etc.) is received (S4232), and if it is determined that a command related to a small win is received (S4232 : Yes), small hit related processing for performing control according to the type of the command related to the small hit is executed (S4233), and this processing ends. The details of this small hit related process (S4233) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4232, when it is determined that the command related to the small hit is not received (S4232: No), the process proceeds to S4213.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, details of the state command process 6 (S4231) described above will be described. This state command processing 6 (S4231) is executed instead of the state command processing (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment, and similar to the state command processing (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment, the status command This is a process for performing control according to the game state (mode) notified from the control device 110 .

S5501 to S5504 and S5506 of the state command processing 6 (see FIG. 153) in the sixth embodiment correspond to S5501 to S5504 and S5506 of the state command processing (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. are executed. In addition, in the state command processing 6 (see FIG. 153) in the sixth embodiment, in the processing of S5504, if it is determined that the current state command is not the command output when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is restored (S5504 : No), then it is determined whether or not it is a state command output at the end of the jackpot (S5511).

In the processing of S5511, if it is determined that the current state command is the state command output at the end of the jackpot (S5511: Yes), after the end for setting the back image according to the gaming state after the jackpot Back face setting processing is executed (S5512), and this processing ends. The details of the post-finish back face setting process (S5512) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S5511, if it is determined that it is not the state command output at the end of the jackpot (if the time saving number of times has elapsed, or if the normal mode has shifted to the preparation mode due to the arrival of the small hit specified number of times) (S5511: No), this process is terminated as it is. It should be noted that when the transition from the normal mode to the preparation mode without going through the jackpot, notification in the small hit related processing (see FIG. 155), or expectation update processing 6 (see FIG. 156), or by the rear image Suggestion settings are made.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the details of the post-end back setting process (S5512) will be described. As described above, the post-finish background image setting process (S5512) is a process for setting the background image after the jackpot is finished in accordance with the gaming state after the jackpot is finished. In the back setting process after the end (S5512), first, it is determined whether or not the data in the game state storage area 223h updated based on the state command is data corresponding to the number of time reduction times of 100 (S5701). . Here, the back setting process after the end (S5512) is a process that is not executed in the case of the multi-family mode. be. In addition, the normal mode that is set after the end of the continuous mode is set to the number of times of time saving of 50 times or less. It means that if Therefore, in the processing of S5701, when it is determined that the remaining number of times of time saving is 100 times (S5701: Yes), the back image for normal mode is set (S5702), and this processing ends. This allows the player to easily understand that the normal mode has been set after the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the remaining number of times of time saving is not 100 times (S5701: No), then whether the remaining number of times of saving time is 0 (that is, after the jackpot is in preparation mode (S5703), and if it is determined that the remaining number of times of time saving is 0 (S5703: Yes), the back image for the preparation mode is set (S5704), and this processing ends as it is. This allows the player to easily understand that the preparation mode has been set after the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S5703, if it is determined that the remaining number of times of time saving is not 0 (S5703: No), it is the normal mode after the continuous villa mode (50 times, 25 times, or 1 time). It means that it is a normal mode of the number of times of time saving), so the back image for low expectations is set (S5705), and the rank up lottery flag 223ea is set to ON (S5706), and this process ends do. By turning on the rank-up lottery flag 223ea, the rank-up lottery for the degree of expectation (type of back image) can be executed every time the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting the number of remaining time reductions from the mode of rank-up, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, details of the above-described small winning related process (S4233) will be described. This small hit related process (S4233) is one process in the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 152). is a process for executing

In the small hit related process (see FIG. 155), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command for the small hit is received from the main control device 110 (S5801), and when it is determined that the opening command for the small hit is received (S5801: Yes), then, from the data stored in the game state storage area 223h, it is determined whether the current mode is the normal mode (S5802). In the processing of S5802, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal mode (time saving state B) (preparation mode or continuous mode) (S5802: No), then the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is turned on (S5803), and if the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is off (S5803: No), whether it is the continuous villa mode or the preparation mode and the back image for the preparation mode has already Since it means that it is in a switched state, execution of a right hitting navigation effect is set to urge the player to hit to the right aiming at the V winning device 670 (S5804), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5802, when it is determined that the normal mode (S5802: Yes), and when it is determined in the process of S5803 that the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is ON (S5803: Yes), the selection effect ( (see FIG. 140) is set (S5805), and this process ends. Even in the preparation mode, the selection effect (see FIG. 140) is executed when the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is ON, so that a small win is won during the execution period of the rank-up effect. Also, the display mode can be shared between the normal mode and the preparation mode. Therefore, during the execution period of the rank-up effect (between the end of the last jackpot in Renso mode and the end of 50 special symbol lotteries), whether the mode is transitioning to the preparation mode or the normal mode is maintained. It is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish whether the Therefore, since the player can play the game while paying more attention to the rank-up mode of the rank-up effect, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, in the processing of S5801, if it is determined that the opening command for the small hit is not received from the main control device 110 (S5801: No), then whether or not the ending command for the small hit is received It is determined (S5806). In the processing of S5806, if it is determined that the ending command for the small hit is received (S5806: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning has already been detected in the small hit game this time (S5807 ), if it is determined that the V winning is not detected (S5807: No), then whether the specified number of small wins has been reached It is determined whether or not the data indicating the number of times is data corresponding to 0 (S5808).

In the processing of S5808, when it is determined that the specified number of small hits has been reached (S5808: Yes), the back image for the preparation mode is set (S5809), and the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to OFF. (S5810), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5808, when it is determined that the specified number of small hits has not been reached (the data indicating the specified number of times in the gaming state storage area 223h is not 0) (S5808: No), this process is continued as it is. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S5807, if it is determined that V winning has been detected during the execution of this small winning game (S5807: Yes), the notification of the start of the big winning is set (S5811), and this End the process.

By executing this small hit related process (see FIG. 155), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode as the effect at the time of the small win according to the game state. In addition, it is possible to appropriately set the notification contents after the end of the small winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the expectation updating process 6 (S4841) in the sixth embodiment will be described. This expectation level update process 6 (S4841) is a process executed in place of the expectation level update process (see FIG. 139) in the fifth embodiment. It is a process for setting the rank-up lottery of.

In the processing of S5601, S5603, and S5608 of the expectation level update processing 6 (see FIG. 156) in the sixth embodiment, S5601 and S5603 of the emergency treatment processing (see FIG. 139) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. , and S5608 are executed. In addition, in the expectation updating process 6 (see FIG. 156) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S5601 ends, it is next determined whether or not the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is on (S5621), and the rank When it is determined that the up lottery flag 223ea is ON (S5621: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter 223db is 51 (S5622).

In the process of S5622, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223db is 51 (S5622: Yes), the previous jackpot type is any of the jackpots G6 to I6. has reached the number of fluctuations, the lottery period for the rank-up effect is terminated, and processing (each processing of S5623 and S5624) for setting the back image for the preparation mode is executed. Also, if it is determined in the process of S5603 that the value of the variation number counter 223db is not 101 (S5603: No), it means that the normal mode has shifted to the preparation mode, so the process shifts to S5623. In the process of S5623, the background image for the preparation mode is set (S5623), the rank-up lottery flag 223ea is set to OFF (S5624), and the process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S5622, if it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223db is not 51 (S5622: No), it is determined whether or not the current rear image is the rear image for high expectations (S5625 ), if it is determined that a back image for high expectations has been set (S5625: Yes), the expectations cannot be raised any further, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5625 that the currently set back image type is not the back image for high expectations (S5625: No), the process proceeds to S5608.

In addition, in the expectation updating process 6 (see FIG. 156) in the sixth embodiment, in the process of S5608, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter 223db is a multiple of 10 (S5608: Yes), the rank is increased The lottery table 222ea is read out (S5626), the value of the effect lottery counter 223da and the rank-up mode corresponding to the remaining number of times of time reduction are specified, the specified rank-up mode is set (S5627), and the process is terminated. do.

By executing this expectation update process 6 (see FIG. 147), the lottery for the special symbol is performed 10 times in a predetermined period after the end of the continuous mode (until the lottery for the special symbol is completed 50 times). Every time it is executed, a lottery can be drawn for a rank-up of the rear image. As a result, it is possible to realize a game feature that allows the player to guess the remaining number of times of time saving according to the ease of rank-up.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the time-saving state B of normal symbols is set to the most unfavorable game state (normal mode) in which it is difficult to shift to the continuous mode even if the jackpot is won, and the normal symbols are set. In the normal state (preparation mode), the transition rate to the continuous mode in the case of a big win is higher than in the time-saving state B of the normal pattern. As a result, it is easier to shift to Renso mode when the jackpot is reached after the number of times in the normal mode is reduced and the transition to the preparation mode is made, rather than when the jackpot is hit in the normal mode. , it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in anticipation of the end of the time saving state. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player expects to continuously lose the lottery in the special symbol lottery in the normal mode.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the type of the small hit that is won with a low probability (1/200) is the normal mode after the end of the big win due to the occurrence of the V prize. A small hit type (small hit A6) that is reset, a small hit type (small hit B6) that shifts to Renso mode after the end of the jackpot due to the occurrence of a V prize, and a jackpot end due to the occurrence of a V prize. A small hit type (small hit C6) that shifts to the preparation mode later is provided. As a result, in the case of a small win in the normal mode, the occurrence of the V winning will result in a disadvantage in the game state (the number of time reductions for the amount consumed is reset and return to 100), and it will be advantageous. (Transition to preparation mode or Renso mode) can be provided, so if a small win occurs in the normal mode, is it better to win a V prize or avoid a V prize? It is possible to provide a game property that allows you to judge whether. In addition, when it becomes a small hit A6 in the normal mode, the time saving state is terminated regardless of the number of remaining time saving times. As a result, in the small win A6, avoiding the V prize and shifting to the preparation mode is more advantageous as a game state than resetting the normal mode with the V prize. Therefore, when a small win is achieved, the player can make a more serious decision as to whether to hit to the right in order to win a V prize or to hit to the left to avoid winning a V prize. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game when the player wins a small prize.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, only in the normal mode, the specified number of times for the small hit A6 is set to 1 time, and the specified number of times for the other small hit types is set to 100 times. Although the number of times is set to 100, it is not limited to this. The correspondence relationship between the specified number of small hits and the type (mode) of the time saving state may be determined arbitrarily. For example, in the consecutive villa mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a small winning type with a small prescribed number of times (for example, 5 times) is provided in the small winning of the second special symbol. By configuring in this manner, the more V prizes of about 1/20 in the Renso mode continue to fail, the higher the possibility that the Renso mode will end, so that the game in the Renso mode will have a sense of tension. can have. Further, in the normal mode, in place of or in addition to determining the specified number of times for each type of small win, the specified number may be determined by summing up the winning times of one or all of the types of small wins. Specifically, for example, the specified number of times of the small winning A6 may be set to 1 time, and the specified number of times based on the total winning number of the small winning B6 and the small winning C6 may be set to 5 times. By configuring in this way, even if the event of failing to win the V prize and maintaining the normal mode continues, it is possible to positively perceive that the specified number of times until the transition to the preparation mode is reduced, so that the game can be played. It is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game.

In the sixth embodiment, as the small hit type of the first special symbol, when V wins, the normal mode is set after the big win, and when the V win is avoided, the small win A shifts to the preparation mode, and when the V wins, the preparation mode after the big win. is set, but if you avoid the V prize, the current mode will be maintained. Although it has been configured to provide three types of winning types, the types of small winnings are not limited to these three types, and the types may be arbitrarily increased or decreased. For example, by setting the small winning type of the first special symbol to only small winning A6, at the time when the small winning is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is confirmed that the preparation mode will be entered if V winning is avoided. , the player can feel great satisfaction when winning a small prize. Conversely, in addition to the big hits A6 to C6, for example, when V winning or when avoiding V winning, it may be possible to provide a relatively advantageous small winning type that shifts to the preparation mode. It is also possible to provide a comparatively disadvantageous small win type in which the game shifts to the normal mode when the game is won and the mode is maintained when the V prize is avoided. By constructing in this way, it is possible to seriously judge whether to win a V prize or to avoid it when winning a small prize, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode, in the normal mode, a small winning type that is more advantageous than the case where the V winning is generated, and the person who causes the V winning is more advantageous than the case where the V winning is avoided Although it was configured to provide a small hit type that is also advantageous, it is not limited to this. For example, even if V winning is avoided, it is good also as a structure which provides the small hit classification which becomes advantageous, even if V winning is generated. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which the predetermined number of times is one and the preparation mode is set after the end of the big hit by the occurrence of the V prize. Conversely, even if V winning is avoided, even if V winning is generated, it is good also as a structure which provides the small hit classification which becomes normal mode.

In the sixth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal mode, either the mode is shifted to the continuous mode or the time saving state B of 100 times is set. However, it is not limited to this. A case of shifting to the preparation mode may be provided, or a configuration may be provided in which variations are provided in the number of times of time reduction in the normal mode after the end of the jackpot. Similarly, for other modes, it is possible to arbitrarily determine the ratio of transition to each mode and the variation of the number of times of time reduction when a big win is achieved.

In the sixth embodiment, the operation pattern of the V winning device 670 when a small win is made is common regardless of the type of small win, but it is not limited to this. For example, an open pattern with a short open period (a game ball is difficult to enter) and an open pattern with a long open period (a game ball is easy to enter) may be provided.

In the sixth embodiment, the display mode shown in FIG. 140 is executed as a selection effect executed when a small win is made in the normal mode, but the game determines whether or not to generate a V prize. It can be determined arbitrarily as long as it is a mode that allows the person to choose. In addition, at a predetermined ratio in the case of a small win, the selection performance may be executed in a manner that allows notification or suggestion of the small win type. Specifically, for example, when winning a small win A6 that is more advantageous to avoid the V prize, an arrow with the character "left hitting" at a first rate (for example, a rate of 5%) While the image YG1 is displayed in red, when it becomes another small hit type, the arrow image YG1 is displayed in red at a second rate (for example, 1% rate) lower than the first rate. It may be configured as By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a playability in which the type of small winning is predicted based on the display mode of the selection effect and the shooting direction is determined.

In the sixth embodiment, the current mode is not specified from the end of the continuous villa mode until the lottery of special symbols is completed 50 times, and the mode is shifted to the preparation mode according to the rank-up mode of the rear image. It was configured to only suggest the number of lotteries for the remaining special symbols up to. In other words, the current mode is not indicated to the player by means of a display mode or the like until the lottery for the special symbols is completed 50 times (the number of lotteries has been reached to ensure that the preparation mode has already been entered regardless of the type of jackpot). However, it is not limited to this. The current mode may be notified when an arbitrary number of lotteries has reached the number of times of lotteries (50 times) that ensures transition to the preparation mode after the consecutive villa mode ends. . More specifically, for example, after the continuous mode ends (that is, after the jackpot G6-I6 ends), at the point when the lottery of the special symbols ends 30 times, the normal mode remains or the preparation mode has already been entered. It is also possible to determine whether the display mode is , and change to a rear image according to the mode (a rear image for normal mode or a rear image for preparation mode). By constructing in this way, the player can be made to think to continue the game until at least the number of lotteries in which the current mode is specified, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Also, even if the normal mode is notified when the lottery of 30 special symbols is completed, the remaining number of lotteries until the preparation mode is 20 times, and more than half of the remaining number of lotteries until the preparation mode. Since it is digested, it is possible to make the player have the impression that "it will be possible to shift to the preparation mode in a little while". Therefore, even when the normal mode is notified, the game can be continued with the aim of shifting to the preparation mode.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily conjectured that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. It is possible.

For example, in each of the above-described embodiments and its modifications, a disadvantageous state (normal mode) is entered until all the lotteries based on the second special symbol reserved balls, which are executed after the big win, are completed. Although it was set as the structure which alert|reported by the door breakthrough mode production whether it was or not, it is not restricted to this. Regardless of whether or not the ball is held for the second special symbol, after the end of the jackpot, the door determines whether or not it has shifted to a disadvantageous state (or advantageous) within the range of the special symbol lottery of a predetermined number of times. It is good also as composition which notifies by breakthrough mode production. Specifically, for example, in the variable probability state of the special symbols, each time it is time to perform the lottery of the special symbols, a transition (fall) to a low probability state is made without going through the big win, apart from the lottery of the special symbols. A door breakthrough mode performance is applied to a pachinko machine 10 having a specification (a specification in which it is more advantageous not to obtain a lottery result corresponding to a fall) to draw a lottery as to whether or not the player will fall with a predetermined probability (for example, a fall probability of 1/100). good too. That is, when a jackpot that shifts to the variable probability state occurs, for example, the door breaking mode effect may be executed until the lottery of 100 special symbols is completed after the jackpot is finished. Then, if the player falls to the low-probability state of the special pattern within 100 times, the performance of failing to break through the door is executed, and if the player does not fall, the performance of successfully breaking through the door is executed. . Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 having specifications in which the number of lotteries for which the variable probability state is set is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 130 times after the big win), the jackpot is won within the range of the number of lotteries for which the variable probability state is set. Or, it may be configured to suggest (notify) whether the probability variable state has ended by the door breakthrough mode production. More specifically, when the jackpot is won during the variable probability state, it is suggested that it is advantageous to the player (executing the effect of successfully breaking through the door), and the predetermined number of times (130 If the lottery for the first time has ended, it may be configured to suggest that the player is at a disadvantage (perform an effect of failing to break through the door). Furthermore, in this case, the door breakthrough mode effect may be executed over the entire period in which the variable probability state is set, or for a part of the period (for example, the number of lotteries after the big win is 125 times or later). Only, it may be configured to execute the door breakthrough mode effect.

In addition, for example, as a game state after the big hit, the special pattern probability variable state until the next big hit, and the jackpot type (jackpot a), which is a time-saving state of the normal pattern, and the special pattern lottery are selected a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) until the end of the pachinko machine 10, which has at least a jackpot type (jackpot b) set to a low-probability state of special patterns and a short-time state of normal patterns. After making it impossible (difficult) to distinguish whether it is a jackpot a or a jackpot b from the performance etc., after the jackpot, until the lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times), It may be configured such that the game state set after the last big hit is notified by the door breakthrough mode effect. That is, if the game state is a probability variable state of special symbols and a time-saving state of normal symbols, a performance (a performance of breaking through the door) suggesting that the state is advantageous for the player is executed, and the game state is set. If is in a low probability state of special symbols and a short working time state of normal symbols, an effect suggesting that the player is in a disadvantageous state (an effect of failing to break through the door) may be executed. Also, for example, in the lottery of special symbols, a small win is obtained with a lower probability than a loss, and the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a when a part of the probability variable jackpot (jackpot c) is determined is equivalent to a small win ( The door breaking mode effect may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having specifications that are the same or have only a difference that the player cannot distinguish between them. That is, it is made difficult to determine which lottery result is obtained by the effect or the operation of the specific prize winning port 65a, depending on whether the game is a small win or a big win c. Then, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, after the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the small win or the big win c, the state is notified by the door breaking mode effect. may be That is, if a small win is achieved and the low probability state of the special symbols is maintained, an effect suggesting that the player is in a disadvantageous state (an effect of failing to break through the door) is executed, resulting in a big win c. If the transition to the probability variable state of the special symbol is performed, an effect suggesting that it is in an advantageous state for the player (an effect that the door is successfully broken through) may be executed.

In each of the above embodiments, it was configured to notify whether or not it is in an advantageous state (mode) by the door breakthrough mode production, but the content notified (suggested) by the door breakthrough mode production is not necessarily limited to the mode. . For example, it may be configured such that whether or not the presentation mode is changed is notified by the door breaking mode presentation. More specifically, for example, whether or not the game will develop into a highly reliable ready-to-reach effect, or whether or not a so-called continuous effect will progress to the next step, etc., may be notified by the door breaking mode effect.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of held balls of the second special symbol is increased to the upper limit number (4) at the end of the big win, but it is not limited to after the big win. It is applicable if the second special symbol holding balls increase to the upper limit number in a state different from the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), for example, the end of the probability variable state It may be configured so that the second special symbol holding ball becomes the upper limit value at the time or at the end of the time saving state. In addition, for example, a state in which it is easy to get a small win (lottery probability is high or lottery conditions are likely to be established) and a state in which it is difficult to get a small win (lottery probability is low or lottery conditions are difficult to be established) are provided. It is good also as a structure applied to the state which tends to become a small hit.

In each of the above embodiments, the second ball entrance 640 and the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) are provided on the right side of the game board 13. However, during the jackpot, the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) The arrangement may be changed to any arrangement within the range that the ball hit toward the second ball entrance 640 can also enter the second ball entrance 640 . Also, a ball launched toward the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device 650) during the big win is difficult to enter the first ball entrance 64, but the first ball entrance 64 It may be configured so that the ball can enter the ball.

In each of the above embodiments, the correspondence between the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the game state set after the jackpot ends can be arbitrarily determined without departing from the spirit of each embodiment. .

In the above fifth and sixth embodiments, in the time-saving state A of the normal design, if the lottery of the normal design wins, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 directly enters the second ball entrance 6400. Although the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a are set so as to make a ball, it is not limited to this. The variation time of the normal symbols and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a make it easier for the game ball struck to the right in the time-saving state A of the normal symbols to enter the second ball entrance 6400, and the time-saving state of the normal symbols. It can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which it is difficult for a game ball struck to the right in B to enter the second ball entrance 6400 . Specifically, for example, in the time-saving state A of the normal design, the game ball that has reached the distribution member 6600 next to the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and has been distributed to the right flow path R1 is the second entrance. In order to make it easier to enter 6400, it may be configured to determine the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 6400a.

In the above-mentioned fifth and sixth embodiments, game balls shot with a shooting intensity of 95% or more are guided to the distribution member 6600 by a plurality of nails planted above the distribution member 6600. However, instead of or in addition to this, game balls shot at the shortest shooting interval (0.6 second interval) surely reach the distribution member 6600 at 0.6 second intervals. You may provide the structure which adjusts the arrival interval of a game ball. More specifically, for example, directly above the distribution member 6600, an open state in which the game ball can flow down toward the distribution member 6600 and a game ball can not flow down to the distribution member 6600 and stay above A configuration may be adopted in which an opening/closing device is provided that periodically switches between the closed state and the closed state. In other words, a game ball fired at a firing intensity of 95% or more is always operated by an open/close device that repeats an open state period long enough for only one game ball to fall and a closed state period at a cycle of 0.6 seconds. It is good also as a structure provided in the position which passes. By configuring in this way, when the game balls are continuously shot at the shortest shooting interval, the interval at which the game balls reach the distribution member 6600 is more reliably set to an interval of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, the game balls can be distributed alternately to the right flow path R1 and the left flow path R2 more reliably.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (Playability that is advantageous if no holding group occurs)
A first ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a first direction can easily enter, and first discrimination information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. A first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring, a first discrimination means for performing a first discrimination based on the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means, and a direction different from the first direction A second ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a second direction can easily enter, and second discrimination information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. Second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring; second discrimination means for performing second discrimination based on the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means; and second discrimination information acquisition means After the second determination information is acquired by, until the second determination based on the acquired second determination information is performed, the second determination information is stored with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit and a first state in which the game ball shot in the second direction is placed at a position where it is easy for the game ball to enter, and the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. variable ball entry means that can be changed to the second state, privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the first determination means, or Variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed to the first state for a predetermined number of times based on the result of the determination by the second determining means, and the variable game execution. One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as a game state after execution of the variable game by means is completed. and a game state setting means for setting the game state, wherein the game state setting means determines the specific determination result by the second determination means rather than the specific determination result by the first determination means. A game machine A1 characterized in that the ratio of setting the first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is finished is higher if the game state is changed.

According to the gaming machine A1, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is likely to enter, and the game ball enters the first ball entering means. First discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means. The first determination is performed by the first determination means based on the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction is likely to enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Then, the second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means. After the second determination information is acquired by the second determination information acquisition means, until the second determination based on the acquired second determination information is executed, the second determination information is stored by the determination information storage means. A predetermined number of pieces of information is stored as an upper limit. A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state is provided so that a game ball launched in a second direction enters. placed in an easy-to-reach position. A predetermined privilege is given by a privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. The variable game execution means executes a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. . Among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, as a game state after execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is completed. 1 game state is set by the game state setting means. The specific determination result by the second determination means is the first game state as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed by the game state setting means rather than the specific determination result by the first determination means. setting is higher.

Thus, when the game ball is shot in the second direction to obtain a predetermined privilege during execution of the variable game, the game ball enters the second ball entering means and the second discrimination information is stored. . When a specific determination result is obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information, the ratio of setting to the first game state having a lower advantage than the second game state is high, so it is stored during the execution of the variable game. A player can play a game in anticipation that a specific determination result will not be obtained in the second determination based on the second determination information. Therefore, there is an effect that novel game characteristics can be realized.

In the gaming machine A1, a plurality of variable patterns of the variable ball-entering means include at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball-entering means than the first variable pattern. variable pattern setting means for setting any one of the variable patterns, the variable pattern setting means, when the determination by the first determination means results in the specific determination result, the variable pattern is set to the second variable pattern rather than the second variable pattern The ratio of setting the first variable pattern increases, and the ratio of setting the second variable pattern becomes higher than the first variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the second determination means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the variable pattern of the variable ball-entering means, any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball-entering means than the first variable pattern. is set by the variable pattern setting means. When the determination by the first determination means results in a specific determination result, the ratio of setting the first variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than the second variable pattern. On the other hand, when the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result, the ratio of setting the second variable pattern by the variable pattern setting means is higher than the first variable pattern.

As a result, when the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result, the second variable pattern in which the game ball is less likely to enter the variable ball entry means is likely to be set, so that the variable game is being executed. The second determination based on the second determination information stored in .

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, based on the start of the variable game, as the variable pattern of the variable ball entering means, a first variable pattern and a game ball to the variable ball entering means rather than the first variable pattern. variable pattern setting means for setting any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter, and the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern is set so that the game ball is It is composed of a period that is at least longer than the period until the second identification information of the predetermined number of pieces of information is obtained by the second identification information obtaining means when the ejection is continued in the second direction. A gaming machine A3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the start of the variable game, the variable pattern of the variable ball-entering means is a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the variable ball-entering means than the first variable pattern. Any one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a pattern is set by the variable pattern setting means. During the period from the start to the end of the first variable pattern, when the game ball continues to be shot in the second direction, the second discrimination information acquisition means acquires a predetermined number of pieces of second discrimination information. It consists of a period that is at least longer than the period until

As a result, during the execution of the variable game in which the first variable pattern is set, if the player continues to shoot the game ball in the second direction in order to obtain a predetermined benefit, the second variable pattern of at least the predetermined number of pieces of information or more is acquired. Therefore, the second determination of the upper limit number of times is executed each time after the end of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in anticipation that the second discrimination of the upper limit number of times will not all result in a specific discrimination result.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination means is executed with priority over the first determination by the first determination means. Game machine A4.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the second determination by the second determination means is executed with priority over the first determination by the first determination means. Execution of the first discrimination can be suppressed even if a game ball enters the first ball entering means in a state where the second discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to attract attention by the second determination.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a game ball launched in the second direction is placed at a position that can be reached, and the game ball that has reached the first flow path provided with the second ball entering means is provided. and a second channel provided with the variable ball entry means.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the first channel provided with the second ball entry means and the second channel provided with the variable ball entry means Distributing means for distributing the game balls to the second direction is arranged at a position where the game balls shot in the second direction can reach, so that the flow direction of the game balls shot in the second direction is biased. There is an effect that it can be prevented.

In the game machine A5, the game machine A6 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means. A ball can be alternately entered into the second ball entering means and the variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game ball launched in the second direction from being unevenly entered into the second ball entering means or the variable ball entering means.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a first position at which a game ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means compared to the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to hit the ball, and a variable control means that controls the variable operation of the variable means. The second game state is characterized in that the variable means is more easily changed to the first position by the variable control means than in the first game state. Gaming machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the first position where the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means and the first position compared to the first position The variable means is changed to the second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. A variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. In the first game state, the variable means is less likely to be varied to the first position by the variable control means, and in the second game state, the variable means is more likely to be varied to the first position by the variable control means than in the first game state. .

Thereby, in the first game state, the variable means is easily changed to the first position, so that the game ball is easily entered into the first ball entering means. Therefore, in the first game state, the game can be played more efficiently, so that there is an effect that the game can be played with a higher expectation of the first game state.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the first game state is such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result in the determination by the first determining means and the second determining means is set to the first probability. In the second game state, the probability that the specific discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination by the first discriminating means and the second discriminating means is set to a second probability lower than the first probability. A gaming machine A8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first game state, the probability that the determination by the first determination means and the second determination means will result in a specific determination result is set to the first probability. On the other hand, in the second game state, the probability that the determination by the first determination means and the second determination means will result in a specific determination result is set to a second probability lower than the first probability.

Thus, in the first game state, the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is higher than in the second game state, so that after the variable game ends, the variable game can be easily executed again with a relatively small number of determinations. Therefore, in the first game state, it can be expected that a greater number of predetermined benefits will be obtained in a relatively short period of time, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Feature B Group> (Executing a specific effect using the jackpot ending period and the pending digestion period)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means, and the privilege. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as game states after execution of the privilege game by the game execution means is completed. game state setting means for setting one game state out of the states; dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the result of discrimination by the discrimination means; Based on the establishment of a specific condition, a period until the end of the privilege game and a period until the dynamic display of one or more of the identification information executed after the end of the privilege game is completed. and a specific performance executing means for executing a specific performance, wherein the specific performance is a performance capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the game state after the specific performance is finished is the second game state. A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. carried out by means. A plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first game state as game states after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. One game state out of the states is set by the game state setting means. Identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A dynamic display of one or a plurality of identification information executed after the end of the privilege game and the period until the end of the privilege game based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during the execution of the privilege game. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means during the period until the end of . The specific effect is composed of an effect capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the game state after the specific effect is finished is the second game state.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed over the period from the establishment of the specific condition to the end of dynamic display of one or a plurality of pieces of identification information, so the period until the end of the privilege game can be executed. , or in the case where the specific effect is executed during the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of one piece of identification information, the degree of freedom of the specific effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the establishment of the specific condition when the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the second game state. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it executes

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, when the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the second gaming state, the specific performance is generated based on the establishment of the specific condition. is executed by the specific effect executing means, the second game state is suggested in the specific effect unless a specific determination result is obtained during execution of the specific effect and the game state is shifted to the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that a specific determination result will not be obtained during execution of a specific effect.

In the game machine B1 or B2, based on a predetermined specific trigger, a discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means; discrimination information storage means that can store a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit until the discrimination condition for the acquired discrimination information is satisfied; determination means for determining whether or not the determination information corresponding to the specific determination result is included in the determination information stored therein; and effect mode determination means, wherein the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on a predetermined specific trigger, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discriminating means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used as discrimination against the acquired discrimination information. Until the condition is satisfied, the predetermined number of pieces of information is stored by the determination information storage means as the upper limit. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the determination means determines whether or not the determination information stored in the determination information storage means includes determination information corresponding to the specific determination result. An effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the effect mode determination means based on the determination result by the determination means. A specific effect of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is executed by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, the result of determination by the determination means can be determined in advance, so there is an effect that it is possible to set an effect mode that is in line with the result of determination actually performed by the determination means.

In the gaming machine B3, as the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a first privilege game in which the game state after execution is set to the first game state by the game state setting means; a type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a second privilege game whose game state after execution is set to the second game state; is for determining whether the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included in the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, and the production mode determining means determines whether the discrimination information Based on the fact that the means determines that the identification information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, a performance mode is provided that suggests that the game state after the specific performance is completed is the first game state. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it determines.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution is set to the first game state by the game state setting means, and the first privilege game after the execution is completed One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of privilege game types including at least a second privilege game in which the game state is set to the second game state. The determining means determines whether or not the determining information stored in the determining information storing means includes the determining information corresponding to the first privilege game. Based on the determination by the determination means that the discrimination information corresponding to the first privilege game is included, a performance mode suggesting that the game state after the end of the specific performance is the first game state is rendered. Determined by the mode determining means.

As a result, it is possible to provide novel game characteristics such that the game is played with the expectation that the first privilege game is not included. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A game machine B5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B4, a predetermined specific period is set as an effect period for the specific effect regardless of the effect mode.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines B1 to B4, as the effect period of the specific effect, a predetermined specific period is set irrespective of the effect mode, so the effect period can be lengthened. Therefore, it becomes difficult to predict the result of the specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the result of the specific effect until the end.

In the gaming machine B5, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display execution means executed by the dynamic display execution means dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means, wherein the specific period is set after the specific condition is satisfied and the bonus game is determined by the dynamic display period determination means when all determinations by the determination means for a predetermined specific number of times result in deviation determination results different from the specific determination result. A game machine B6 characterized in that it is the sum of the dynamic display period for a specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means. A dynamic display time in dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the determination result of the determination means. A dynamic display period is determined when the period from the establishment of a specific condition to the end of the privilege game and the determination result by the determination means for a predetermined specific number of times are all different from the specific determination result. A sum of a specific number of dynamic display periods determined by means is set as the specific period.

As a result, the specific effect can be ended at the timing when the dynamic display of the identification information for the specific number of times ends, so there is an effect that the specific effect can be ended neatly.

In the game machine B6, the dynamic display period determination means, after the end of the privilege game, when the determination by the determination means within the specified number of times results in a specific determination result, at least until the specified period ends. A game machine B7 characterized in that a period equal to or longer than the remaining period of is determined as the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, after the end of the privilege game, if the discrimination by the discrimination means within a specified number of times results in a specific discrimination result, at least the remainder until the end of the specified period Since a period equal to or longer than the period is determined as the dynamic display period by the dynamic display period determining means, when a specific determination result is obtained in determination within a specific number of times, the privilege game is played before the end of the specific period. can be suppressed from being started. Therefore, by starting the privilege game before the end of the specific performance, it is possible to prevent the result of the specific performance from being known in advance, so that there is an effect that the specific performance can draw the player's attention.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B7 is provided with an expectation level indication effect executing means for executing an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the suggestion of the second game state by the specific effect during execution of the privilege game. A game machine B8 characterized by.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines B1 to B7, the expectation level suggesting effect executing means provides an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the fact that the second game state is suggested by the specific effect during execution of the privilege game. Therefore, the player can have the impression that the performance mode during execution of the privilege game and the specific performance are a series of performances. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved during execution of the privilege game.

<Characteristic group C> (Makes it difficult to determine from the actions of the attacker whether or not a holding series will occur)
A privilege ball entry means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball, a first position where the game ball can enter the privilege ball entry means, and a game from the first position. Variable means for changing to a second position where it is difficult for the ball to enter, determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and determination by the determination means based on the first determination result. a first variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary in a first variable mode; and a second determination result different from the first determination result obtained by determination by the determination means a game state setting means capable of setting a game state different from the game state at the time when the determination was performed; A second variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode that is executed the specific number of times when all determinations by the determination means result in the first determination result, and a second variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable.

According to the gaming machine C1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball, and the first position where the game ball can be entered into the privilege ball entry means; The variable means is variable to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable means is varied in the first variable mode based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. controlled by It is distinguished from the first variable mode executed a specific number of times when all the determinations by the determination means for a specific number of times result in the first determination result based on the fact that the determination by the determination means has resulted in the second determination result. In a second variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult, the variable means is controlled to be variable by the second variable control means.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the first determination result or the second determination result is obtained from the variable mode of the variable means. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for a person to discriminate.

In the gaming machine C1, the game state setting means can set one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more disadvantageous than the first game state. When the determination by the determination means results in the second determination result, the rate of setting the second game state is set higher than the rate of setting the first game state. A gaming machine C2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one game state is set by the game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more disadvantageous than the first game state. A rate of setting the second game state by the game state setting means is set higher than a rate of setting the first game state when the determination by the determination means results in a second determination result.

As a result, when the second determination result is obtained, the disadvantageous second game state is likely to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the first determination result.

A gaming machine C3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, a rate of the first discrimination result in discrimination by the discrimination means is set higher than a rate of other discrimination results.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the ratio of the first judgment result in the judgment by the judgment means is set higher than the ratio of the other judgment results. The possibility of obtaining the first determination result continuously over the number of times increases. Therefore, even when the second determination result is obtained and the variable means is controlled in the second variable mode, it is possible to make the user think that the first determination result may have continued for a specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not a different game state has been set.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C3, the determination means executes determination when either a first determination condition or a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. , the game state setting means sets a high percentage of setting the first game state when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the second determination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that a ratio of setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state is set higher when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on establishment. C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means when either the first determination condition or the second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied. When the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition results in the second determination result, the ratio of setting the first game state by the game state setting means is set high. On the other hand, when the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition results in the second determination result, the ratio of setting the second game state, which is more disadvantageous than the first game state, is set high.

Thus, when the second determination result is obtained in the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first game state having a higher degree of advantage than the second game state is likely to be set. A game can be played in anticipation of success. Therefore, there is an effect that, when the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means, the type of the discrimination condition that triggered the execution of the discrimination can be focused on.

In the game machine C4, when the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means and the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the bonus ball entry means is selected rather than the second variable mode. A game machine C5 comprising a third variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary in a third variable mode in which a game ball is likely to enter.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the determination by the determination means results in the second determination result, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the second variable mode is obtained. Since the variable means is controlled by the third variable control means so as to vary in the third variable mode in which the game ball easily enters the bonus ball entry means, the second determination is made based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The resulting advantage can be made higher. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game expecting that the first determination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine C4 or C5, a first ball-entering means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction is likely to enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. a second ball-entering means arranged at a position where it is easy to enter the ball, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball-entering means; The second determination condition is established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and the privilege entering means has entered the game ball launched in the second direction. A game machine C6 characterized in that it is provided at a position where it is easy to hit a ball.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4 or C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball-entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction is likely to enter, while the second ball-entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction is likely to enter. A ball-entering means and a privilege-ball-entering means are provided. The first discrimination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, whereas the second discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. holds.

Thus, when the privilege ball entering means is changed to the first position and the game is launched in the second direction to obtain a predetermined privilege, the game ball enters the second ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is likely to be executed after the privilege ball-entering means is changed to the first position.

In the game machine C6, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and a discrimination information acquisition means acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means and a determination information storage means capable of storing at least a predetermined number of pieces of the determination information until the determination by the determination means is executed.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is Up to a predetermined number of pieces of information are stored at least by the determination information storage means until determination is performed by the determination means.

Thus, when a ball entering the second ball entering means is detected in a situation in which the discrimination by the discrimination means cannot be started, the discrimination information used for discrimination can be stored in the discrimination information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball entering the second ball entering means from being wasted.

In any of the game machines C4 to C7, the determination executed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition is executed with priority over the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines C4 to C7, the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is more than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. is executed with priority, there is an effect that when a determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is executed, attention can be paid to the result of the determination.

<Feature D group> (A special 2 start-up prize is likely to occur during the jackpot, and is unlikely to occur normally)
A first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and the first determination a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by means or the second determination means; and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. Type determination for determining the type of one privilege game from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. setting a first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied based on a specific determination result obtained by determination by means, the first determination means or the second determination means, and performing the privilege game; state setting means for setting a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state, based on the fact that the end condition is satisfied; A ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the first determination means results in the specific determination result than when the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result. Characterized gaming machine D1.

According to the gaming machine D1, determination is performed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. be done. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the scoring game execution means based on a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game executing means, a category is selected from among a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first privilege game. The type of one privilege game is determined by the determining means. The state setting means sets a first state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. On the other hand, the state setting means sets a second state in which the second determination condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state based on the fact that the condition for ending the privilege game is satisfied. The type determining means is arranged so that the ratio of determining the second privilege game is higher when the determination by the first determining means results in a specific determination result than when the determination by the second determining means results in a specific determination result. It is configured.

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the second determination condition from being established in a state other than during execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to limit the chances of executing the first privilege game with a low degree of advantage.

In the gaming machine D1, a discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means. is stored up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the second determination condition, the determination information acquisition means acquires determination information to be used for determination by the second determination means. Until the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means, the discrimination information storage means stores a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit.

Thereby, when the second determination condition is satisfied a plurality of times before the determination by the second determination means is executed, the plurality of determination information acquired according to the satisfaction of the second determination condition for the plurality of times. is stored by the discrimination information storage means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the discrimination is not executed even though the second discrimination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine D2, the second discriminating means acquires by the discrimination information acquiring means during execution of the privilege game, based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, after the privilege game ends A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is one that executes discrimination.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the privilege is determined by the second discrimination means based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means during execution of the privilege game and stored in the discrimination information storage means. Since the determination is performed after the game is finished, the chances of performing the determination by the second determination means can be concentrated after the privilege game is finished. Therefore, after the end of the privilege game, the player can play the game expecting that the determination by the second determining means will not result in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a ball entry means for satisfying the second determination condition based on the entry of a game ball, and a first position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means. , a second position at which a game ball is easier to enter than the first position; Specific determining means for determining whether to vary to the second position, and the variable means varies to the second position based on determination by the specific determining means that the first position should be varied to the second position. wherein the variable control means controls the specific determination means in the second state more than the case where the specific determination means determines that the variable means is to be varied in the second state. A game machine D4 characterized in that the period during which the variable means is varied to the second position is longer when it is determined that the variable means is varied by.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, a first position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means where the second determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball, and a game ball is more likely to enter than the first position. The variable means is varied to the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific determination condition, the specific determination means determines whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. The variable control means controls the variable means to be variable to the second position based on the determination by the specific determination means that the first position should be varied to the second position. The variable means is at the second position when the specific determining means determines to vary the variable means in the second state than when the specific determining means determines to vary the variable means in the second state. It is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable period becomes long.

Thereby, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the ball entering means in the first state than in the second state. Therefore, in the first state, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be established more easily than in the second state.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of the game ball, and a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means. , a second position at which a game ball is easier to enter than the first position; Specific determining means for determining whether to vary to the second position, and the variable means varies to the second position based on determination by the specific determining means that the first position should be varied to the second position. The period from the start to the end of the discrimination of 1 by the specific discriminating means tends to be shorter in the first state than in the second state. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means where the second determination condition is established based on the entry of the game ball, and a game ball is easier to enter than the first position. The variable means is varied to the second position. Based on the establishment of a specific determination condition, the specific determination means determines whether to change the variable means from the first position to the second position. The variable control means controls the variable means to be variable to the second position based on the determination by the specific determination means that the first position should be varied to the second position. In the first state, the period from the start to the end of the determination of 1 by the specific determination means is more likely to be shorter than in the second state.

As a result, in the first state, the period required for the specific determination means to perform the same number of determinations is shorter than in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the opportunity to change the variable means to the second position more times, so that there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered in the first state.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, a ball entry means provided in a specific flow path and satisfying the second determination condition based on the entry of a game ball, and a game ball difficult to flow down the specific flow path. and an open state in which the game ball can flow down, and the opening and closing means are set to the open state based on the first state. and opening/closing control means for setting the game machine to the closed state when the game machine D6 is in the second state.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific channel is provided with ball entry means that satisfies the second determination condition based on the entry of a game ball. The opening/closing means is variable between a closed state in which the specific channel is closed so that the game ball cannot easily flow down, and an open state in which the game ball can flow down. The opening/closing means is set to the open state by the opening/closing control means based on the first state, and the opening/closing means is set to the closed state by the opening/closing control means based on the second state. .

Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the second determination condition from being satisfied in the second state.

In the gaming machine D6, the opening/closing means is configured to be able to park a specific number of game balls upstream of the opening/closing means when the opening/closing means is set to the closed state. Machine D7.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machine D6, when the opening/closing means is set in the closed state, a specific number of game balls can be parked upstream of the opening/closing means. Therefore, when the open state is set, the parked game ball can enter the ball entering means. Therefore, in the first state in which the open state is set, there is an effect that the second determination condition can be more easily established.

<Feature group E> (Information corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the specific effect is included in the fluctuation pattern command from the main to the sub)
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a performance mode, main control means for performing main control relating to a game, and slave control means for performing control relating to a game based on a command output from the main control means The main control means includes determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of determination by the determining means becoming a specific determination result. A privilege game execution means, a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means, and a dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. dynamic display time determination means for determining a target display time; information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means; and command output means for outputting a dynamic display time command including at least information to the slave control means, wherein the slave control means receives the dynamic display time command output by the command output means. dynamic display time specifying means for specifying the dynamic display time based on the dynamic display time command being received by the command receiving means; and a predetermined specific condition being established. Based on this, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect executable over one or more of the dynamic display times on the display means, and the specific information included in the dynamic display time command Based on, the specific effect end determination means for determining whether or not to end the specific effect, and the specific effect end determination means determined to end the specific effect, used for the determination a specific effect ending means for ending the specific effect until the dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command ends. Gaming machine E1 to play.

According to the gaming machine E1, in the main control means, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and when the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, the game is advantageous to the player. A privilege game is executed by a privilege game executing means. The dynamic display executing means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determining means. A dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A dynamic display time command including at least information corresponding to the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means and specific information different from the information corresponding to the dynamic display time is output by the command output means. It is output to the slave control means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display time command output by the command output means is received by the command receiving means, and based on the reception of the dynamic display time command by the command receiving means, the dynamic display time is set dynamically. It is specified by the display time specifying means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, a specific effect that can be executed over one or more dynamic display times is executed on the display means by the specific effect executing means. Based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, the specific effect end determining means determines whether or not to end the specific effect. The dynamic display time specified by the dynamic display time specifying means based on the dynamic display time command used for the determination ends when the specific effect end determining means determines to end the specific effect. The specific effect is terminated by the specific effect main hot water amount means until the specified effect is completed.

As a result, there is an effect that the specific effect can be terminated favorably.

In the gaming machine E1, when it is determined by the specific effect end determining means that the specific effect is to end, the specific effect is determined based on the information according to the determination result of the determining means included in the dynamic display time command. The game machine E2 is characterized by comprising a performance mode determination means for determining a performance mode until the specified performance is terminated by the performance end means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when it is determined by the specific performance end determining means that the specific performance is to be terminated, the game machine E2 responds to the determination result by the determining means included in the dynamic display time command. Based on the information, the performance mode determining means determines the performance mode until the specific performance ending means terminates the specific performance, so that the performance mode can be determined in consideration of the determination result by the determining means. . Therefore, there is an effect that the effect mode of the specific effect can be preferably set.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the slave control means includes an input determination means for determining power-on of the game machine, and a dynamic display time command included in the dynamic display time command when the power-on is determined by the power-on determination means. cut-off determination means for discriminating whether or not the specific performance was being executed at the time when the power of the game machine was cut off based on the specific information received; and execution of the specific performance by the cut-off determination means. A gaming machine E3 characterized by comprising post-throwing effect execution means for executing the specific effect based on the fact that it is determined to be in the middle.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the power-on of the gaming machine is determined by the power-on determination means in the slave control means, and the power-on is determined by the power-on determination means. Secondly, based on the specific information included in the dynamic display time command, the cut-off time discriminating means discriminates whether or not the specific effect was being executed at the time when the power of the gaming machine was cut off. The specific performance is executed by the post-throwing performance executing means based on the determination that the specific performance was being executed by the shut-off determination means.

Thus, even if the power supply is cut off during execution of the specific performance, the specific performance can be restarted, so that the player is prevented from being puzzled by the different performance modes before and after the power cutoff. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine E3, the game machine E4 is characterized in that the specific effect ending means terminates the specific effect executed by the post-throwing effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the specific effect executed by the effect executing means after the input is terminated by the specific effect ending means, so that the power of the gaming machine is turned off during execution of the specific effect. There is an effect that the specific effect can be terminated favorably even when it is interrupted.

In the gaming machine E4, the game machine E5 is characterized in that the specific effect executing means sets a predetermined specific period as the effect period of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5, a specific period predetermined by the specific production executing means is set as the production period of the specific production, so that a simple process is performed when setting the specific production. There is an effect that it can be set by

In any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the main control means acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and acquisition by the discrimination information acquisition means. determination information storage means capable of storing at least a predetermined number of pieces of the determined determination information until they are used for determination by the determination means; and the command output means stores the determined determination information in the determination information storage means. and outputting to the sub-control means an information number command including information corresponding to the number of pieces of information of the identification information that is stored, and the specific effect executing means outputs the number of pieces of information of the identification information included in the information number command. The game machine E6 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed over the dynamic display of the identification information a number of times equal to or less than the number of pieces of information.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquiring means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. The determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is stored in the determination information storage means at least until the determination information is used for determination by the determination means, with a predetermined number of pieces of information being the upper limit. An information number command including information corresponding to the number of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is output to the slave control means by the command output means. The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect over the dynamic display of the identification information for the number of times equal to or less than the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information included in the number-of-information command.

As a result, the specific effect can be executed within a range equal to or less than the number of identification information stored in the identification information storage means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the continuation of the presentation.

In the gaming machine E6, the information corresponding to the number of pieces of information of the identification information is stored until all identifications based on the identification information stored in the identification information storage means are completed after the specific condition is established. The gaming machine E7 is characterized by comprising information corresponding to the number of information of the remaining identification information stored in the identification information storage means.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of the game machine E6, the information corresponding to the number of information of the discrimination information is stored in all the discriminations based on the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means after the specific condition is established. Since it is composed of information corresponding to the number of information of the remaining discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means until the end of, the specific performance is more surely stored in the discrimination information storage means. There is an effect that it can be executed within a range equal to or less than the number of pieces of discrimination information.

<Feature F Group> (Depending on the winning pattern, the ease of execution of the special drawing lottery on the disadvantageous side is changed)
A first ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a first direction can easily enter, and first discrimination information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means. First determination information acquisition means to be acquired, first determination means for performing first determination using the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means, and the first direction Second discriminating information based on a second ball entering means arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a different second direction can easily enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. and the second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means to obtain a second discrimination that is likely to result in a discrimination result that is more disadvantageous than the first discrimination. a second determination means for executing; a determination information storage means capable of storing the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information; the first determination means; or As a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result in the discrimination by the second discrimination means, and a privilege game type executed by the privilege game execution means a first privilege game in which it is more advantageous to shoot a game ball in the first direction than in the second direction for at least a predetermined period; and a game ball to shoot in the second direction rather than the first direction during the predetermined period. A game machine F1 characterized by comprising a type determining means for determining one type of the privilege game from among a plurality of types including a second privilege game which is likely to be more advantageous to launch.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines have advantages such as changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have different degrees. However, it has been desired to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the winning type.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction is likely to enter. The first discrimination information is acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first discrimination information acquired by the first information acquiring means is used. , a first determination is performed by the first determination means. A second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction is likely to enter. The second discrimination information is acquired by the second discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Using the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means, the second determination is performed by the second determination means, which tends to result in a more disadvantageous determination result than the first determination. The second discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as the upper limit. Based on a specific determination result obtained by determination by the first determination means or the second determination means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. As the types of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a first privilege game in which it is more advantageous to shoot the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction at least during a predetermined period, and a first privilege game in which the game ball is more likely to be shot in the first direction than in the first direction during the predetermined period One privilege game category is determined by a category determining means from among a plurality of categories including a second privilege game in which shooting a game ball in the second direction tends to be more advantageous.

As a result, the first privilege game, which is advantageous by shooting the game ball in the first direction, is difficult to execute the second discrimination, which tends to result in a disadvantageous discrimination result, so that the first privilege game and the second privilege. It is possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage from the game. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, so that when a specific determination result is obtained, the effect is that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of the privilege game. There is

In the gaming machine F1, a first apparatus is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can easily enter, and can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter. A variable ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction is easy to enter, and is variable between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter. 2 variable ball entry means, and privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, In the first privilege game, the first variable ball entry means is more likely to be changed to a state where the ball can be entered than the second variable ball entry means, and the second privilege game is the first privilege. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the second variable ball-entering means is more likely to be changed to a state in which a ball can be entered than in a game.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which a game ball can be entered and a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can easily enter. It is A second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which a game ball can be entered and a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can easily enter. there is A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. The first privilege game is more likely to be changed to a state in which the first variable ball-entering means can enter the ball than the second variable ball-entering means. In the second privilege game, the second variable ball-entering means is more likely to be changed to the state in which the ball can be entered than in the first privilege game.

As a result, during execution of the privilege game, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to whether the shot game ball enters the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. be.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the bonus game is finished. game state setting means for setting the game state, and the first game state is set after the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result in the determination by the second determination means is completed. The game machine F3 is characterized in that the rate set as the later game state is higher than the second game state.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the game state after the end of the privilege game, one game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. It is set by the setting means. In the first game state, a ratio set as the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result in the determination by the second determination means is higher than that in the second game state. is configured to be

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game feature in which a game is played in anticipation that a specific determination result will not be obtained when the determination by the second determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F3, the game state setting means sets the first game state at a ratio of setting the second game state as the game state after the first privilege game or the second privilege game is completed. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the ratio is higher than the ratio of playing.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the ratio of setting the second game state as the game state after the first privilege game or the second privilege game is completed is Since it is configured to be higher than the set ratio, the second determination executed based on the shooting of the game ball in the second direction in the predetermined period results in a specific determination result, and the first game state The player can be made to think that he/she wants to avoid that is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the second determination will not result in a specific determination result after the second privilege game is finished.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting a determination result by the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means, and the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means. As an effect, either a first suggested effect or a second suggested effect different from the first suggested effect is determined when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, and the type determining means determines A game machine F5, further comprising a suggestive effect determining means for determining the first suggestive effect when the second privilege game is determined.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect suggesting the result of determination by the first determining means or the second determining means. As the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means, either a first suggestive effect or a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect is suggested when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. It is determined by the performance determining means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, the first suggestive effect is determined by the suggestive effect determining means.

As a result, when the second suggestive performance is executed, it is confirmed that the first privilege game is played, so that the game can be played in anticipation of the execution of the second suggestive performance as the suggestive performance. has the effect of Further, since the first suggesting effect may be executed even in the first privilege game, it is possible to play the game expecting that the first suggesting effect is the first privilege game when the first suggesting effect is executed. has the effect of

In the gaming machine F5, when the suggestive effect executing means executes the first suggestive effect based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determining means, after the first suggestive effect is completed, the A gaming machine F6 characterized by executing a second suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, when the first suggestive effect is executed based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determining means, after the first suggestive effect is completed, Since the second suggestive performance is executed by the suggestive performance executing means, the game is played with the expectation that the second suggestive performance will be executed after the first suggestive performance is finished when the first suggestive performance is executed. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the predetermined period of time is defined as, when the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction, the second discriminating information acquisition means obtains at least the predetermined number of pieces of information or more. The gaming machine F7 is characterized by a period of time during which the discrimination information is acquired.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, when the second privilege game is entered and the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction for a predetermined period, the discrimination information storage means Since the second determination information of the predetermined number of information, which is the upper limit, is stored, there is an effect that the second determination can be executed the number of times corresponding to the upper limit number after the second privilege game is finished.

In the gaming machine F7, the game ball is arranged at a position where the game ball shot in the second direction can easily enter, and can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter. second variable ball entry means; variable control means for changing the state of the second variable ball entry means to the first state in the predetermined period; and a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the hitting of the ball, and the second ball-entering means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can reach, and receiving the game ball that has reached the game ball. A game machine F8, characterized in that it comprises a sorting means for sorting either the first flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means or the second flow path provided with the second variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exhibited. Second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can easily enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot easily enter. are placed. The state of the second variable ball entering means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period by the variable control means. A predetermined privilege is imparted by the privilege imparting means based on the entry of the game ball into the second variable ball entering means. A first flow path provided with a second ball entry means and a second flow path provided with a second variable ball entry means to place a game ball at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can reach. and distribution means for distributing to either.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the flow direction of the game ball shot in the second direction from becoming biased.

In the game machine F8, the game machine F9 is characterized in that the distribution means alternately distributes the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, the game ball launched in the second direction during the predetermined period in the second privilege game is transferred to the second ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. You can enter the ball alternately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the game ball shot in the second direction from being unevenly entered into the second ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means.

<Feature G group> (Notify the jackpot type based on the V winning)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means, and a game ball. a ball-entering means capable of entering a ball, a first position allowing a game ball to enter the ball-entering means, and a second position more difficult to enter than the first position. means, variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during execution of the privilege game, and when the privilege game is completed. As a later game state, a first game state advantageous to the player is set when a game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the privilege game, and the ball enters during the execution of the privilege game. A game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball does not enter the means, and a privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. A type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the type determining means. When at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined, a suggestive effect suggesting the type of the determined privilege game is generated when the game ball enters the ball entering means. and a suggestion performance executing means that can be executed based on the game machine G1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886). In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines that do not notify the game state after winning at the time of winning, but execute an effect that suggests the game state after winning during the winning state. Are known. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the rest of the winning game becomes monotonous after the effect suggesting the game state after the end of winning is executed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the special game execution means determines the player when the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result. A privilege game advantageous to is executed. The variable means is varied between a first position at which a game ball can be entered into a ball entry means, and a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by the variable control means for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the predetermined condition during execution of the privilege game. As a game state after the end of the privilege game, a first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the privilege game, the game state setting means sets a second game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. Determined by the type determining means. When at least the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means, the performance suggesting the determined type of the privilege game is suggested, and the game ball enters the entering means by the performance executing means. executed on the basis of

As a result, even after the game ball enters the ball-entering means and the setting of the advantageous first game state is determined, attention is paid to the type of privilege game suggested by the suggestive performance executed by the suggestive performance executing means. You can play games by Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous after the game ball is entered into the ball entering means.

In the gaming machine G1, the determining means comprises first determining means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determining condition as the determining condition, and second determining means different from the first determining condition. and a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a condition, wherein the type determination means obtains the specific determination result in the first determination by the first determination means. As the type of the privilege game to be executed based on, one type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the second by the second determination means As the type of the privilege game executed based on the specific determination result in the determination of the above, the first privilege game, and the second privilege game during execution of the privilege game said entering means One type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a third privilege game in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the first privilege game is the privilege game rather than the second privilege game. A game machine G2 characterized in that the second determination is likely to be executed in a predetermined period after the end of the game machine G2.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the first determination is performed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition in the determination means. A second discrimination is performed by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. A plurality of bonus games including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game are selected by the type determining means as the classification of the bonus game to be executed based on the specific identification result obtained in the first identification by the first identification means. One type is determined from among the types. On the other hand, as the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the second determination by the second determination means, during the execution of the privilege game rather than the first privilege game and the second privilege game One type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the third privilege game that is difficult to enter into the ball-entering means. In the first privilege game, the second discrimination is more likely to be executed in a predetermined period after the completion of the privilege game than in the second privilege game.

As a result, when the first privilege game ends, the disadvantageous second discrimination is more likely to be executed in a predetermined period, so it is strongly expected that the second privilege game will be decided when a specific discrimination result is obtained. can be made Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of privilege game.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, execution of a specific effect for executing a specific effect during a period from when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is started until at least the game ball enters the ball entering means. means, wherein the suggesting effect executing means executes an effect suggesting the type of the privilege game as a result of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. During a period from when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is started until at least the game ball enters the ball entering means, the specified performance executing means executes the specified performance. As a result of the specific effect, the suggesting effect executing means executes an effect suggesting the type of privilege game.

As a result, it is possible to show a series of effects with the specific effect and the effect suggesting the type of the privilege game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display means for displaying dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and dynamic display means thereof Identification information capable of determining one identification information from a plurality of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information, as the identification information dynamically displayed by and a determination means, wherein the identification information determination means is the specific determination result in determination by the determination means, and the first identification information when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means is determined, and the first identification information or the second identification information is determined when the second privilege game is determined.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is displayed by the dynamic display means. As the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, one identification information is identification information among a plurality of identification information including at least first identification information and second identification information different from the first identification information. Determined by a determining means. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determination means when the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result and the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means. On the other hand, when the second privilege game is determined, the first identification information or the second identification information is determined by the identification information determining means.

As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information can be confirmed in anticipation that the second identification information that is determined only by the advantageous second privilege game will be displayed. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the first identification information can be displayed even in the case of the second privilege game, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the second privilege game when the first identification information is displayed. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine G4, the suggestive effect executing means executes the suggestive effect when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, The types of the suggestive effect include a first suggestive effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and a first suggestive effect in which the first identification information is displayed as the first identification information. The game machine G5 is characterized by being provided with at least a second suggestive effect variable in the identification information.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means, the suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect. The types of suggestion effects include a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information is maintained as the first identification information, and a first suggestion effect in which the first identification information is changed to the second identification information. At least a second suggestion effect is provided.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation that the second suggestion effect will be executed when the first identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information.

The gaming machine G5 comprises suggestive effect execution determination means for determining whether or not the suggestive effect is to be executed when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, The identification information determining means determines the first identification information based on the fact that the suggestive effect execution determining means determines that the suggestive effect is to be executed, and the suggestive effect executing means is the type determining means. The first privilege game is determined by, the first suggestion performance is executed when it is determined that the suggestion performance is executed by the suggestion performance execution determination means, and the second privilege game is determined by the type determination device. A game machine G6, characterized in that said second suggestive effect is executed when said suggestive effect execution determination means determines that said suggestive effect is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the type determining means determines the first privilege game or the second privilege game, the suggestive effect execution determination means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect. The first identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the determination by the suggestive effect execution determination means that the suggestive effect is to be executed. When the first identification information is determined by the type determining means and the suggestive effect execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect, the first suggestive effect is executed by the suggestive effect executing means. On the other hand, when the type determining means determines the second privilege game and the suggestive effect execution determining means determines to execute the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect executing means executes the second suggestive effect.

As a result, the second suggestive effect is executed only when the second privilege game is determined, so there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the execution of the second suggestive effect.

In the gaming machine G6, the suggestive effect execution determining means executes the suggestive effect more when the second bonus game is determined than when the first bonus game is determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that the rate of discrimination is high.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6, the suggestive effect executing means performs more when the second privilege game is determined than when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. Since the ratio of determination increases when the suggestive effect is executed, there is an effect that the sense of expectation for the second privilege game can be improved when the suggestive effect is started.

In the game machine G1 or G2, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means in the display means, and dynamic display thereof Over a period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result executed by the execution means and a period from when the privilege game is started until at least the variable means is varied to the first position. and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect as a result of the specific effect, wherein the suggestive effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting the type of the privilege game as a result of the specific effect. Gaming machine G8.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the period of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the period from the start of the privilege game until at least the variable means is biased to the first position. A specific effect is executed by a specific effect executing means over a period of time. As a result of the specific effect, a suggestive effect suggesting the type of privilege game is executed by the suggestive effect executing means.

As a result, it is possible to show a series of effects with the specific effect and the effect suggesting the type of the privilege game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature H group> (Depending on the type of jackpot, the ease of predicting the presence or absence of holding consecutive occurrences is changed)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; Bonus game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means; As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game executing means, one category is determined from a plurality of categories including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. means, a variable means capable of being varied in a predetermined variable mode, and a first variable mode and a first variable mode based on the determination by the determination means that a result of determination is different from the specific determination result. A first variable control means for varying the variable means in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a second variable mode different from the mode, and determination by the determination means result in the specific determination result. second variable control means for varying the variable means in a third variable mode that includes at least a specific variable mode that makes it difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode, and the first privilege game is completed. until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first variable control means sets the first variable state in which the variable means is easily variable in the first variable mode, and the second privilege game is performed. variable state setting means for setting a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be varied in the second variable mode than the first variable state during a period from the end of the process until the specific condition is satisfied; A gaming machine H1 characterized by comprising:

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a win is achieved, the win is reported, and the type of win is also reported. In some cases, the game becomes monotonous because the work is just to digest the hits. In addition, in conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to distinguish whether a winning state or a small winning state, which is a type of loss, is made based on the performance mode or the opening and closing operation of a specific winning port. A configured game machine is also known, and there is also known a game machine that allows the user to expect that the winning game has been completed even after the winning game is over. However, in such a gaming machine, it takes too much time to grasp whether a win or a small win has occurred, and there is a risk that the player's interest in the game may be lost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game executing means, one category is selected by the category determination device from a plurality of categories including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. It is determined. A plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode different from the first variable mode, based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means resulted in an outlier discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. In one of the variable modes, the variable means is varied by the first variable control means. In a third variable mode including at least a specific variable mode that looks difficult to distinguish from the first variable mode, the variable means is controlled by the second variable control means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. variable. During the period from the end of the first privilege game to the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the variable state setting means sets a first variable state in which the variable means is likely to be varied in the first variable mode by the first variable control means. set. On the other hand, the variable state setting means sets a second variable state in which the variable means is more likely to be varied in the second variable mode than the first variable state during the period from the end of the second privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition. be done.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish the appearance of the variable mode of the variable means between the case of the failure determination result after the end of the first privilege game and the case of the specific determination result, so that at least the specific condition is satisfied. Until then, it can be difficult to identify whether or not the privilege game is executed from the variable mode of the variable means. On the other hand, when the result of determination is lost after the end of the second privilege game, the second variable mode is set. becomes easier. Therefore, it is possible to change the easiness of distinguishing the result of determination until the specific condition is established according to the type of privilege game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, a game ball can enter a ball entering means, and the variable means has a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means and a game ball at a position higher than the first position. is variable from the second position to the second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and in the first variable mode, the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period and the second variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the elapse of a second period different from the first period. A gaming machine H2 characterized by:

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable mode is a variable mode in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the passage of the first period, and the second variable mode is a second variable mode different from the first period. The variable means is configured in a variable mode in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the lapse of the period.

As a result, the player can easily distinguish between the first variable mode and the second variable mode by confirming the interval until the variable means is varied to the first position. There is

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the determination means comprises a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and a second determination means for executing a second determination based on establishment, and the first variable control means, based on the result of the determination by the first determination means as the result of the determination of the deviation, the first variable control means The variable means is varied in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least the first variable mode and the second variable mode, and the second variable control means comprises the first determination means. A gaming machine H3, wherein the variable means is varied in the third variable mode based on the specific determination result obtained in the determination by H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first discrimination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. A second discrimination is performed by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. The first variable control is performed in any one of a plurality of variable modes including at least a first variable mode and a second variable mode, based on the result of determination by the first determination means as a result of determination. The variable means is varied by the means. The variable means is varied in the third variable mode by the second variable control means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination means.

As a result, the variable mode of the variable means is changed in accordance with the type of privilege game when the result of determination by the first determination means is a failure determination result. There is an effect that the player can play the game while paying attention to the variable mode of the variable means each time the determination by is executed.

In the gaming machine H3, the type determination means determines the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result obtained in the second determination by the second determination means. A game machine H4 characterized by.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machine H3, the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result obtained in the second determination by the second determination means is determined by the type determination means. Since it is determined, when the second determination by the second determination means is executed, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether the first privilege game is determined or the second privilege game is determined. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the first determination condition is more likely to be established than the second determination condition during a period from the end of the privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition. Gaming machine H5.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the first determination condition is satisfied more than the second determination condition during the period from the end of the privilege game until the specific condition is satisfied. Since it becomes easier, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying more attention to the variable mode of the variable means until the specific condition is satisfied.

In any one of the game machines H3 to H5, a first ball entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. A second ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball can enter; and the state of the privilege ball entry means is changed from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the start of the privilege game. a variable control means for changing a predetermined number of times to a possible second state, wherein the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means; The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H3 to H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball-entering means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a second ball-entering means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. 2 ball entry means are provided. At a position where the game ball shot in the first direction is likely to enter, there is provided a privilege ball entry means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball. The state of the bonus ball entry means is changed by the variable control means a predetermined number of times from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball can be entered based on the start of the bonus game. The first discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. is established.

Thus, by shooting a game ball aiming at the privilege ball entering means during execution of the privilege game, the game ball can enter the first ball entering means as well. Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination condition can be easily established when the privilege game is executed.

In the gaming machine H6, a first determination information acquisition means for acquiring first determination information used for determination by the first determination means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means; 1 discrimination information storage means capable of storing the first discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the specific condition is the discrimination information at the end of the privilege game The game machine H7 is characterized in that it is established based on the determination based on all the first determination information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first discrimination information used for discrimination by the first discrimination means is acquired by the first discrimination information acquiring means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. The first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition means is stored by the determination information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. A specific condition is established based on execution of determination based on all the first determination information stored in the determination information storage means at the end of the privilege game.

As a result, the first determination information acquired during execution of the privilege game is stored in the determination information storage means, so that the first determination can be efficiently executed.

In the gaming machine H7, the game state after the privilege game is finished is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. game state determination means for determining one game state, wherein the type determination means determines the game state as a type of privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the first determination; a first type determination means in which a rate of determining a third privilege game for which the first game state is determined by the determination means is higher than a rate of determining the type of other privilege games; A second type that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game as the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the determination result of and a determination means, wherein the game state determination means sets the second game state as a game state after the end of the privilege game when the first privilege game or the second privilege game is played. The gaming machine H8 is characterized in that it determines.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the game state after the privilege game is finished, one game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. is determined by the game state determining means. As the type of privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the first determination, the third privilege game in which the first game state is determined by the game state determination means is determined by the first type determination means. The percentage of winning is higher than the percentage of determining the type of other privilege games. As the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the specific determination result in the second determination, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game. It is determined by the two-type determining means. When the first privilege game or the second privilege game is played, the second game state is determined by the game state determining means as the game state after the privilege game ends.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first determination, the first determination stored in the determination information storage means during execution of the privilege game is highly likely to be determined after the privilege game is completed. Based on the information, it is possible to play the game hoping that all the first determinations executed after the end of the privilege game will result in a false determination result. Therefore, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that make the player want to avoid a specific determination result, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic group I> (Different susceptibility to occurrence of holding series depending on the type of jackpot)
a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition; a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition; A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means, and the privilege game execution means As the type of the privilege game to be executed, the first privilege game and the determination by the second determination means between the completion of the privilege game and the establishment of the specific condition rather than the first privilege game a second privilege game that tends to result in a specific determination result; and game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the first game state, the first bonus game and the second bonus game. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that, as a game state after the end of the privilege game, the set ratio of the first game state is higher than that of the second game state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, the machine shifts to a winning state. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines have advantages such as changing the game state given after winning or changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Some have different degrees. However, it has been desired to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage according to the winning type.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, the determination is executed by the first determination means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the second determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition different from the first determination condition. 2 The determination is performed by the determination means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game and the discrimination by the second discrimination means between the end of the privilege game and the establishment of the specific condition rather than the first privilege game The type determination means determines the type of one privilege game out of a plurality of types including at least the second privilege game that tends to result in a specific determination result. A game state setting means sets one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state as a game state after the privilege game is finished. . In both the first privilege game and the second privilege game, the set ratio of the second game state is higher than that of the second game state as the game state after the privilege game is finished.

Thus, depending on whether the first privilege game is played or the second privilege game is played, the possibility that the determination by the second determination means will result in a specific determination result before the specific condition is satisfied differs. There is an effect that a game can be played while paying more attention to the type of privilege game determined by the type determining means.

In the game I1, the type determining means includes at least the first privilege game, the second privilege game, and the third privilege game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the other privilege game types. The type of the privilege game from 1 is determined, and the third privilege game is determined by the second determination means rather than the first determination means. When the specific determination result is obtained A game machine I2 characterized by having a high rate determined by the type determining means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the type determination means selects one privilege game type from among a plurality of at least a first privilege game, a second privilege game, and a third privilege game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the other privilege game types. determined by When the determination by the second determination means results in a specific determination result, the third privilege game is determined by the type determination means at a higher rate than the determination by the first determination means.

Thus, when the discrimination by the second discriminating means results in a specific discrimination result, the rate of determining the disadvantageous third privilege game increases, so that it is hoped that the discrimination by the second discriminating means will not result in a specific discrimination result. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that it will be the first privilege game rather than the second privilege game that tends to result in a specific discrimination result in the discrimination by the second discriminating means.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the first game state is such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result when the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means is executed is the second game state. During the period from the end of the second privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition, the second judgment condition is more likely to be established than the first judgment condition. A game machine I3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first game state is configured such that the probability of obtaining a specific determination result when the determination by the first determination means or the determination by the second determination means is executed is higher than that in the second game state. . During the period from the end of the second privilege game to the establishment of the specific condition, the second determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first determination condition.

Thus, in the first game state, the probability of obtaining a specific determination result is higher than in the second game state, so that the privilege game is likely to be played continuously at relatively short intervals. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved when the first game state is entered.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means on the basis of establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; A discrimination information storage means capable of storing discrimination information up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, and one discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means. and erasing means for erasing the one discrimination information from the discrimination information storage means, wherein the specific condition is that the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means becomes zero. A game machine I4 characterized by being established based on.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. The determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is stored in the determination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as the upper limit. Based on the fact that the piece of identification information stored in the identification information storage means is used for identification by the second identification unit, the piece of identification information is erased from the identification information storage unit by the erasing means. A specific condition is established when the number of pieces of identification information stored in the identification information storage means becomes zero.

Thus, until the information number of discrimination information becomes 0, discrimination by the second discrimination means tends to result in a specific discrimination result, so that the game is played while paying attention to the number of information stored in the discrimination information storage means. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines I1 to I4, a first ball-entering means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction. a second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball can enter, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The second determination condition is established based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second privilege game is when the privilege game is started. A game machine I5 characterized in that, for at least a predetermined period afterward, it is easier for the player to shoot game balls in the second direction than in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter. A second ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. The first determination condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, while the second determination condition is that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. Established on the basis of In the second privilege game, it is easier for the player to shoot the game ball in the second direction than in the first direction for at least a predetermined period after the privilege game is started.

As a result, when the second privilege game is entered, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entering means by shooting the game ball in the second direction for a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to form a state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied after the privilege game is finished.

In the gaming machine I5, a first device is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter, and can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter. A variable ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can be entered, and is variable between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball is difficult to enter. 2 variable ball entry means; and privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means; 2. A game machine I6 characterized in that the variable ball entry means is capable of changing the state in which a game ball can be entered for at least the predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter. It is A second variable ball entry means capable of changing between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction can enter. there is A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means. The second variable ball entry means is changed to a state in which a game ball can be entered during at least a predetermined period of time during execution of the second scoring game.

As a result, during the predetermined period during execution of the second privilege game, the game ball can be shot in the second direction to the player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be entered into the second ball entering means during the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine I6, the first variable ball entry means is capable of changing the state in which game balls can be entered during at least the predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game. Gaming machine I7 to play.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I6, during execution of the first scoring game, the first variable ball entry means changes the state in which the game ball can be entered for at least a predetermined period of time. Therefore, during the predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game, the game ball can be shot in the first direction to the player who wants to obtain the predetermined privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second ball entering means during the predetermined period during execution of the first privilege game.

In any one of gaming machines I5 to I7, discrimination information acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the second discriminating means based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entering means; a determination information storage means capable of storing the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction during the predetermined period. In this case, the gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the period is a length during which at least the predetermined number of pieces of information or more of the second discrimination information are acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I5 to I7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the discrimination information acquisition means acquires the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means. The determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is stored by the determination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as the upper limit. The predetermined period is constituted by a length in which at least a predetermined number of pieces of second identification information or more are acquired by the identification information storage means when the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction.

As a result, when the second privilege game is played, there is an effect that the determination information can be reliably stored in the determination information storage means up to the upper limit of the number of pieces of information.

In the game machine I8, the game ball launched in the second direction is passed through the first channel provided with the second ball entering means and the second channel provided with the second variable ball entering means. A gaming machine I9 characterized by comprising a sorting means capable of sorting to either

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effects of the game machine I8, the game ball shot in the second direction passes through the first flow path provided with the second ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means. Since it is distributed by the distribution means to either the provided second flow path, the game ball fired in the second direction is biased toward the second ball entry means, or conversely, the second ball There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball from being unevenly entered into the variable ball entering means.

<Feature J Group> (As the state of playing a game in Special 1, a state in which it is easy to give time reduction and a state in which it is difficult to give time reduction are provided)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be varied, a first variable pattern based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable pattern, based on the establishment of a specific variable condition. A variable control means for making a variable with one of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a variable pattern, a determination means for performing determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the determination means. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based at least on a specific determination result in determination, and a game state after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. , a first game state, a second game state different from the first game state, and a third game state different from the first game state and the second game state. and game state setting means for setting a game state, wherein the first game state and the second game state are set by the variable control means in the first variable pattern rather than the third game state. A game machine J1 characterized in that the rate at which is varied is low.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are those that are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous game state is not set at the end of the winning state, the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered, and it is easy for the player to quit the game. There was a problem.

In particular, in a game machine of a type that does not have a so-called probability variation function and only two types of game states, a time-saving game state and a normal game state, are provided, the normal game state is set after the time-saving game state. In that case, the player may be satisfied with the game because he/she was able to play the game in the time-saving game state, and it may become difficult to persuade the player to continue the game in the normal game state after that.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, there is a first position where a game ball can be entered into a ball entry means into which a game ball can be entered, and a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means is configured to be variable between the second position and the second position. The variable means, based on the establishment of a specific variable condition, generates a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball-entering means than the first variable pattern. It is varied in one variable pattern out of a plurality of at least. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means at least based on a specific discrimination result in discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering means. be done. As a game state after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed, a first game state, a second game state different from the first game state, and both the first game state and the second game state One of a plurality of game states including at least a different third game state is set by the game state setting means. The first game state and the second game state are configured such that the rate at which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern by the variable control means is lower than that in the third game state.

This makes it difficult to distinguish between the first game state and the second game state from the variable ratio of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the first game state and the second game state are characterized in that the probability of the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means is a common specific probability. Machine J2.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, the first game state and the second game state are set so that the probability of obtaining a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means is a common specific probability. Since it is configured, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to distinguish between the first game state and the second game state.

In a gaming machine J1 or J2, a second ball entering means different from the above ball entering means, a second determination means for performing a determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a second privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the determination by the second determination means having the specific determination result, wherein the first game state is determined by the second determination means; When the determination results in the specific determination result, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a first ratio, and the second game state is determined by the second determination means. A game machine J3 characterized in that, when the specific determination result is obtained in the game state setting means, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate by the game state setting means. .

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the second determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means different from the ball entry means. The privilege game is executed by the second privilege game executing means based on the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means resulting in a specific discrimination result. When a specific determination result is obtained in the determination by the second determination means in the first game state, the game state setting means sets the third game state at the first rate, while the second game state is set in the second game state. When the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a second rate higher than the first rate.

As a result, in the second game state, it is easier to set the third game state as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, in the second game state than in the first game state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of what will happen.

In the gaming machine J3, the third game state is set at a third rate higher than the first rate by the game state setting means when the privilege game is executed. A game machine J4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, when the privilege game is executed in the third gaming state, the third gaming state is set to the third rate higher than the first rate by the gaming state setting means. Therefore, when the third game state is reached, the privilege game and the third game state are likely to be repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when the third game state is entered.

In the gaming machine J4, a game in which the game state is shifted to the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition that is at least different from the specific determination result in the second game state. State transition means is provided, and the third game state is set to either the second game state or the third game state by the game state setting means when the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine J5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second game state, the game state is shifted to the first game state by the game state shift means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition different from at least a specific determination result. When the privilege game is executed in the third game state, either the second game state or the third game state is set by the game state setting means.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in the third game state, the first game state is not set. Until the transition from the second game state to the first game state, the player can be made to think about continuing the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine J5, the game state transition means is based on, as the specific condition, a determination result different from the specific determination result continuously over a predetermined number of times in the determination by the determination means, A game machine J6 characterized in that it shifts from the second game state to the first game state.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J5, as a specific condition, based on the fact that the judgment by the judgment means has continuously produced a different judgment result different from the specific judgment result for a predetermined number of times. Since the second game state is shifted to the first game state by the game state shifting means, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of consecutive times of the result of determination of failure. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine J6, as the type of the second game state set by the game state setting means, the game state transition is performed based on the result of the determination of the first number of times by the determination means. Based on the fact that the result of determination is out of the first type of transition to the first game state by the means and the determination of the second number of times that is larger than the first number of times, the game state transition means performs the first game state. A game machine J7 characterized by comprising a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a second type to be shifted to one game state.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6, as the type of the second game state set by the game state setting means, the discriminating result of the first number of discriminations by the discriminating means is a result of discriminating. Based on the first type that is shifted to the first game state by the game state transition means based on the above, and the second number of times that is larger than the first number of times, the game state transition means based on the result of discriminating out. Since one type is determined by the type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the second type to be shifted to the first game state, the second game state can be continued over a larger number of determinations. can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In a game machine J7, display means capable of displaying an effect mode, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the display means can display the first effect mode. When the second game state is set by the first display control means and the game state setting means, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode can be displayed on the display means. The first effect mode is displayed during the period from when the second game state is set by the second display control means and the game state setting means to when the result of the determination is obtained over the second number of times. A gaming machine J8 characterized by comprising a limiting means for limiting the.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first presentation mode is displayed on the display means by the first display control means. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is displayed on the display means by the second display control means. The restriction means restricts the display of the first performance mode from when the second game state is set by the game state setting means until the result of the determination of failure is obtained over the second number of times.

As a result, even if the result of determination is out of reach for the first number of times after the second game state is set, the first effect mode is not displayed until the second number of times. It becomes difficult to identify whether it is the second game state of one type or the second game state of the second type. Therefore, regardless of the type of the second game state, it is possible to make the player think that the game should be continued at least until the determination is made the second number of times, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine J8, a third display for displaying the first effect mode based on the second game state being set by the game state setting means and the second game state being determined to be out of the second game state. A gaming machine J9 characterized by comprising display control means.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J8, the third display is performed based on the fact that the second game state is set by the game state setting means and the second game state is set to the second game state, and the second game state is determined as a result of the determination. Since the first effect mode is displayed by the control means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the period during which it is unclear whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state from becoming too long.

A gaming machine J10 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines J4 to J9, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J4 to J9, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio. There is an effect that it can be made to expect more strongly to become.

<Characteristic K group> (Configuration that makes it difficult for Special 2 to turn during time saving)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, a first game state, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. a game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of at least including; a ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter; A variable means that can be changed between a position and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a variable operation of the variable means is changed to the ball entering means in the first game state. Control by the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter, in the second game state, control by the second control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means, and in the third game state, A gaming machine K1 characterized by comprising: variable control means for performing control by a third control that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first control and the second control.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are those that are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the advantageous game state is not set at the end of the winning state, the player's motivation for playing the game is lowered, and it is easy for the player to quit the game. There was a problem.

In particular, in a game machine of a type that does not have a so-called probability variation function and only two types of game states, a time-saving game state and a normal game state, are provided, the normal game state is set after the time-saving game state. In that case, the player may be satisfied with the game because he/she was able to play the game in the time-saving game state, and it may become difficult to persuade the player to continue the game in the normal game state after that.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, a first game state, a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the second game state are based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition. The game state setting means sets one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state more advantageous to the player than the third game state. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. there is The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means under the first control that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means in the first game state, and the game ball enters the ball entering means in the second game state. is controlled by the variable control means in the second control that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and in the third game state, the variable control means controls the game ball in the third control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means.

As a result, the degree of advantage is differentiated between the first game state in which the ball is hardly entered into the ball-entering means and the second game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the second control makes it easier for the variable means to be arranged at the first position than the first control.

According to the game machine 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the second control is configured to make it easier for the variable means to be arranged at the first position than in the first control. Although the variable means is more likely to be placed at the first position than the first control, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel operation in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball-entering means as in the first control.

The gaming machine K2 comprises passing means through which a game ball can pass, and determination means for performing a determination based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means, wherein the variable control means performs determination by the determination means. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the specific determination result obtained in step 1, and the first game state is determined by the determination by the determination means. The specific determination result is obtained with a probability of 1, and the second game state and the third game state are determined by the determination means with a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it provides a specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the determining means based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means through which the game ball can pass. The variable control means causes the variable means to be varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. In the first game state, determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result with a first probability. A specific determination result is obtained with a probability of 2.

As a result, although the second game state and the third game state have the same probability of obtaining a specific determination result, it is possible to realize a novel operation in which the easiness of entering the ball into the ball-entering means is different. has the effect of

In the game machine K3, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls at a shooting interval equal to or greater than a predetermined interval is provided, and the second game state is determined by the determination means after the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, and the variable means is changed to the A period until the variable means is changed to the first position is set as the first period, and a period from when the variable means is changed to the first position until it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passing game ball reaches the ball entering means tends to be shorter than the first period, and 1 The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until the game ball fired by the shooting means at the predetermined interval next to the passing game ball reaches the variable means is The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that it tends to be longer than the sum of one period and the second period.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, game balls are shot by the shooting means at a shooting interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. In the second game state, the first period is set to the period from when the determining means obtains a specific determination result to when the variable means is varied to the first position, and the variable means is variable to the first position. The second period is set to the period from when it is changed to when it is changed to the second position. A period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means tends to be shorter than the first period. The period from when one game ball passes through the passing means until the game ball fired by the shooting means at a predetermined interval next to the passing game ball reaches the variable means is the first period and the second period. It tends to be longer than the sum of the two periods.

Thereby, even if the game balls are continuously shot to the passing means in the second game state, the game balls are allowed to reach the ball entering means while the variable means is changed to the first position. can make it difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the second game state can be made into a special state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means although the variable means is likely to be changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine K4, the third game state is defined as a period from when the determination by the determination means provides the specific determination result to when the variable means is varied to the first position, which is longer than the first period. is set to a long third period, and the period from when the variable means is varied to the first position to when it is varied to the second position is set to the second period; The period from when the game ball passes through the means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means is longer than the third period, and the third period and the second period A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is likely to be shorter than the sum of .

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of the game machine K4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the third game state, a period from when the determining means obtains a specific determination result to when the variable means is varied to the first position is set to a third period longer than the first period, A period from when the variable means is changed to the first position to when it is changed to the second position is set as the second period. The period from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the passed game ball reaches the ball entering means is longer than the third period, and is the sum of the third period and the second period. It becomes easier to be shorter than

Thus, in the third game state, when a specific determination result is obtained in the determination executed based on passing through the passing means, the game ball that has passed through the passing means is directly entered into the ball-entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the third game state can be progressed efficiently.

In any one of gaming machines K1 to K5, second ball entering means different from the above ball entering means and capable of entering a game ball, and based on the fact that the game ball has entered the above ball entering means A first determination means for executing a first determination, a second determination means for performing a second determination based on the entry of a game ball into the second ball entry means, and the first determination means a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination or the result of the determination by the second determination means resulting in a predetermined first determination result, wherein the game state The setting means sets the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the first game state at a first rate. 3 game states are set, and the first game state is set as the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the second game state. A game machine K6 characterized in that the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the rate.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first determination is performed by the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means different from the ball entry means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on a predetermined first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the discrimination by the second discrimination means. The third game state is set at a first rate by the game state setting means as the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the first game state. set. A game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate as a game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the second determination in the second game state. A third game state is set by means.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained during the second game state.

In the gaming machine K6, the game state setting means sets the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the third game state. , wherein the third game state is determined at a third rate higher than the first rate.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, the game state after the end of the privilege game executed based on the first determination result in the first determination in the third game state. Since the third game state is determined by the game state setting means at the third rate higher than the first rate, the third game state is likely to reappear after the privilege game is finished in the third game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction when the third game state is entered.

A game machine K8 characterized in that, in the game machine K7, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7, the second ratio is configured to be higher than the third ratio, so that the first determination result is obtained in the second game state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of .

<Characteristic group L> (A mechanism that allows a game to be played in a game method that makes it easy to be alternately distributed to two routes by the distribution means and a game method that makes it easy to be distributed to one route)
An operating means operable by a player, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball according to the operation content of the operating means, a first passage through which the game ball shot by the shooting means can pass, While the second flow path different from the first flow path and the first condition that can be established by performing the operation of the first operation content on the operating means are satisfied, the game ball that has reached the first condition is held. A second condition is established that can be established by performing an operation of a second operation content different from the operation of the first operation content. A game machine L1, characterized in that it is provided with a distributing means that makes it easier to distribute the arriving game balls to the first flow path while the first condition is satisfied.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a distribution member for distributing game balls to one of two types of flow paths provided on the board surface. In such a conventional game machine, game balls that reach the distribution member are distributed one by one to two types of flow paths, thereby making it possible to cause game balls to flow down the two types of flow paths in a well-balanced manner. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231902).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the game balls that reach the distribution member are alternately distributed to two types of flow paths regardless of the game method of the player, so there is room for the skill of the player to intervene. There is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, a game ball is shot by the shooting means according to the operation contents of the operation means that the player can operate. A first flow path through which a game ball shot by the shooting means can pass, and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided. While the first condition that can be established by performing the operation of the first operation content on the operating means is satisfied, the state of the sorting means divides the arrived game balls into the first flow path and the second flow path. It becomes a state in which it is easy to distribute alternately to the flow path. While a second condition that can be satisfied by performing an operation with a second operation content different from the first operation content is satisfied, the state of the sorting means is higher than that while the first condition is satisfied. A game ball that has reached the first flow path is easily distributed to the first flow path.

As a result, the manner in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution means can be varied according to the operation content of the player, so there is an effect that the operation of the operation means can be devised.

In the gaming machine L1, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, game balls are shot by the shooting means at a first shooting interval, and the operation of the second operation content is performed. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that, by doing so, game balls are shot by the shooting means at a second shooting interval longer than the first shooting interval.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the operation of the first operation content is executed, the game ball is shot at the first shooting interval by the shooting means. When the operation of the second operation content is executed, the game ball is shot by the shooting means at a second shooting interval longer than the first shooting interval. As a result, it is possible to easily change how the game balls are distributed by the distribution means by simply changing the shooting interval, so that there is an effect that convenience for the player can be enhanced.

In the game machine L2, the sorting means has at least a first movable range in which the arriving game ball is easily sorted to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the game ball is easily sorted to the second flow path. It is configured to be able to move a specific movable range including, the distribution means, by distributing the game ball to the first flow path in a state arranged in the first movable range, the second It is configured to be easily movable within the movable range, and to be easily movable within the first movable range by distributing the game balls to the second flow path while being arranged in the second movable range. A gaming machine L3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the distributing means can move a specific movable range including at least a first movable range in which the arriving game ball is easily distributed to the first flow path and a second movable range in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path. do. By distributing the game balls to the first flow path in the state of being arranged in the first movable range, the distributing means can be easily moved to the second movable range. Further, by distributing the game balls to the second flow path while being arranged in the second movable range, the distributing means can be easily moved to the first movable range.

As a result, it is possible to realize an operation of alternately distributing the game balls to the first flow path and the second flow path by continuously reaching the distributing means.

In the game machine L3, when the game ball is distributed to the first flow path and moved to the second movable range, the distribution means is shorter than the length of the second shooting interval and the first The game machine L4 is characterized in that it can move up to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the firing interval.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3, when the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and the distributing means moves to the second movable range, the length of the second firing interval is shorter In addition, since the sorting means moves up to the first movable range in a period longer than the length of the first shooting interval, when the game balls are continuously shot at the shooting interval longer than the second shooting interval, the sorting means can be distributed. There is an effect that the movable range of the means can be reliably set to the first movable range.

In the game machine L4, the distributing means can easily move from the first movable range to the second movable range by the mass of the game balls distributed to the first flow path, and distributes the ball to the second flow path. The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that it is easily movable from the second movable range to the first movable range by the mass of the game ball.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects of the game machine L4, the mass of the game balls distributed to the first flow path makes it easier for the distribution means to move from the first movable range to the second movable range. The mass of the game balls distributed to the two flow paths facilitates the movement of the distributing means from the second movable range to the first movable range, thereby eliminating the need for a power source for moving the distributing means. has the effect of

In the game machine L4 or L5, the distribution means is configured so that a predetermined position in the first movable range is the initial arrangement, and the game ball returns to the predetermined position when the game ball does not reach for a predetermined period of time. A gaming machine L6 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects of the game machine L4 or L5, the distribution means is configured so that the predetermined position in the first movable range is the initial arrangement, and game balls are distributed to the distribution means. On the other hand, since the distribution means is configured to return to the predetermined position when the game ball is not reached for the predetermined period, the distribution means is maintained within the first movable range unless the game ball is distributed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball that reaches the sorting means first can be surely sorted to the first flow path.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L6, passing means provided at a position through which the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass; A ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the flow path can enter, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a position before the first position a second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the entering ball means; variable control means for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the game machine L7.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L6, the following effects are produced. That is, the passing means is provided at a position through which the game balls distributed to the second flow path can pass. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down through the first flow path and a game ball that has flowed down through the second flow path can enter. A variable means is configured to be variable between a first position at which a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter into the ball entering means than at the first position. It is Determination by the determining means is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means. The variable control means causes the variable means to be varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the result of discrimination by the discriminating means, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L7, a first game state, a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition. a game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a third game state; The variable means is controlled to be variable in a first variable mode in which it is difficult for the ball to enter, and in the second game state, the second variable mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means is performed. The variable means is controlled to be variable, and in the third game state, the game ball is easier to enter the ball entering means than the first variable mode and the second variable mode. The game machine L8 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be variable.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of the game machine L7, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, a first game state, a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state. One game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a game state is set by the game state setting means. In the first game state, the variable control means controls so that the variable means is variable in the first variable mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means. In the second game state, the variable control means controls the variable means to vary in the second variable mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball entering means. In the third game state, the variable control means controls the variable means to vary in the third variable mode in which the game ball enters the ball-entering means more easily than in the first variable mode and the second variable mode.

As a result, since a plurality of game states with different easiness of entering the ball into the ball entering means are provided, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine L8, the first game state is a state in which the specific determination result is obtained with a first probability by the determination means, and the second game state is determined by the determination means with a higher probability than the first probability. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific determination result is obtained with a high second probability, and the three game states are those that result in the specific determination result with the second probability by the determination means. L9.

According to the game machine L9, in addition to the effects of the game machine L8, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first game state, the discrimination means produces a specific discrimination result with a first probability. In the second game state, the determination means provides a specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability. In the third game state, the determination means provides a specific determination result with a second probability.

As a result, although the second game state and the third game state have the same probability of obtaining a specific determination result, a novel operation is realized in which the easiness of entering the ball into the ball entering means is made different. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature M group> (It is advantageous to get out of time saving)
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player at least based on a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means, and One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state as a game state after execution of the bonus game by the bonus game executing means is completed. game state setting means for setting the game state, and in a state in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a specific transition condition different from at least the end of execution of the privilege game is established. and game state transition means for shifting from the first game state to the second game state based on.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are those that are set to either a normal game state or an advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state when the winning state ends (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2006-000392).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the normal game state is set at the end of the winning state, the disadvantageous state continues at least until the next winning state. However, there is a problem that it is impossible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, in addition to the normal game state and the advantageous game state, there is provided a third game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state and more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state. After the winning state ends, either the advantageous game state or the third game state is set, so that the game can be continued at least until the third game state ends. There are also things that can make people think. However, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined number of lotteries are completed in the third game state, it is normal to shift from the third game state to the normal game state. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player after the game has ended.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, at least based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition results in a specific discrimination result, the privilege game executing means provides a privilege advantageous to the player. A game is executed. One of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state as a game state after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed. A game state is set by the game state setting means. In a state in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first game state is changed to the second game state based on establishment of a specific transition condition that is at least different from the end of execution of the privilege game. The transition is made by the game state transition means.

As a result, the game can be played in anticipation that the specific transition condition will be satisfied in the first game state, so there is an effect that the game in the first game state can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine M1, the specific transition condition is a determination result different from the specific determination result a predetermined specific number of times in the determination by the determination means executed after the first game state is set. The game machine M2 is characterized in that it is established when .

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, in the determination by the determination means executed after being set to the first game state, a predetermined specific number of times, a deviation determination different from a specific determination result Since a specific transition condition is established when a result is obtained, a novel game property can be realized in which, in the first game state, a failure determination result can be expected every time determination is performed by the determination means. has the effect of

In a game machine M1 or M2, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a position from the first position to the ball entry means A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter, and a first variable control that makes it easier for the variable means to be changed to the first position in the first game state, and the first variable control is performed. 2 variable control execution means for executing a second variable control in which the variable means is less likely to be varied to the first position than in the first game state in a game state, wherein the determination condition is the ball entering means; A game machine M3 characterized in that it is established based on the entry of a game ball.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is variable between the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the second position where the game ball enters the ball entering means more difficult than the first position. In the first game state, the variable control executing means executes the first variable control that makes it easier to change the variable means to the first position, and in the second game state, the variable means is more variable to the first position than in the first game state. The second variable control, which is difficult to perform, is executed by the variable control execution means. A determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entering means.

As a result, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that the variable means will be varied to the first position.

In the game machine M3, the game state setting means selects one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state, the second game state, and a third game state more advantageous than the second game state. 1 game state is set, and the variable control execution means makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable control and the second variable control in the third game state. A game machine M4 characterized in that it executes a third variable control.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, the following effects are produced. That is, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state more advantageous than the second game state is set by the game state setting means. . In the third game state, the variable control executing means executes the third variable control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable control and the second variable control.

As a result, in the third game state, determination by the determination means is facilitated, so that the game can be played efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the third game state.

In the gaming machine M4, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a first rate as the game state after the privilege game ends when the specific determination result is obtained in the first game state. is set, and when the specific determination result is obtained in the second game state, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate Game machine M5.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine M4, when a specific determination result is obtained in the first game state, the game state after the privilege game ends is set to the first ratio by the game state setting means. While the third game state is set in the second game state, when a specific determination result is obtained in the second game state, the third game state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate, so the second The third game state is more likely to be set as the game state after the end of the privilege game when a specific determination result is obtained in the game state. Therefore, in the first game state, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in anticipation of the establishment of a specific transition condition rather than a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine M5, the game state setting means sets the third game state at a third rate higher than the first rate as a game state after the privilege game executed in the third game state is finished. A gaming machine M6 characterized by being a setting.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of the game machine M5, the game state setting means sets the third rate higher than the first rate as the game state after the privilege game executed in the third game state ends. Since the third game state is set, in the third game state, it becomes easy to enter the third game state again after the privilege game ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction by entering the third game state.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, there is a ball entry area into which a game ball can enter, and a second bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game based on the game ball entering the ball entry area. and a gaming machine M7 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the second privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry area. , the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Features N group> (If you win during a short time, you will be at a disadvantage after the small hit ends)
Determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and first advantageous game execution for executing a first advantageous game advantageous to the player based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. means, and as the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. and a type determination means for determining the type of the game, and a second determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game based on the second determination result different from the first determination result in the determination by the determination means. A second advantageous game executing means for executing a second advantageous game, and a first game state as a game state after execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game executing means, and the first game state. is a different second game state, and a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of at least including; game state termination means for terminating the first game state if a predetermined specific condition is established when a determination result of Compared to the case where the first determination result is obtained and the first type is determined by the type determination unit, the determination by the determination unit results in the first determination result, and the type determination unit determines the first determination result. The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it is configured such that it is easier to establish when two types are determined.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance into which a ball can be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and a game ball enters the ball entrance. A game ball that enters the interior of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) executed based on the There has been proposed a pachinko machine capable of providing a privilege game (such as a jackpot game) that is advantageous to a player by passing through the machine (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if a small winning game is executed, the bonus game is not executed unless the game ball can enter the V winning device. There is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be lost if the ball cannot be entered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first advantageous game advantageous to the player is selected based on the first determination result in the determination by the determination means executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. Executed by advantageous game executing means. As the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type is selected by the type determining means. A type is determined. A second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game executing means based on the fact that the judgment by the judging means results in a second judgment result different from the first judgment result. be. As a game state after execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed, a game is selected from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. One game state is set by the state setting means. When a determination result other than the second determination result is obtained in determination by the determination means executed in the first game state, if a predetermined specific condition is established, the first game state is terminated by the game state ending means. is terminated by Compared to the case where the discrimination by the discrimination means yields the first discrimination result and the discrimination by the discrimination means determines the first classification, the discrimination by the discrimination means yields the first discrimination result, and the discrimination by the discrimination means determines the second classification. is determined, the specific condition is more likely to be established.

As a result, when the first determination result is obtained, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the determination of the first type.

In the gaming machine N1, the second game state is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. game machine N2, characterized in that the game machine N2 shifts from the game state to the second game state.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first game state. If the specific condition is established, the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state by the game state ending means.

As a result, the game can be played in the first game state in anticipation of the establishment of the specific condition, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine N1 or N2 is provided with a ball entry area in which a game ball can be entered based on the execution of the first advantageous game, and the second advantageous game execution means moves the game into the ball entry area. The second advantageous game is executed based on the entry of a ball, and the game state ending means performs the first advantageous game of the first type for the first number of times in the first game state of 1. The first game state is terminated based on the execution, and the first advantageous game of the second type is executed a second number of times less than the first number of times in the first game state of 1. The game machine N3 is characterized in that the first game state is ended based on the game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous game is executed by the second advantageous game executing means based on the game ball entering the ball entry area that becomes possible to enter the ball based on the execution of the first advantageous game. . While the first game state is terminated by the game state termination means based on the first number of executions of the first advantageous game of the first type in the one first game state, the first game state is terminated in the one first game state. The first game state is terminated by the game state termination means based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the two types is executed a second number of times smaller than the first number of times.

As a result, during the execution of the first advantageous game, the game ball is entered into the ball entry area and the second advantageous game is executed, or the specific condition is established without entering the ball into the ball entry area. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a playability that allows the user to choose whether to expect it.

In the gaming machine N3, the game state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the first game state is determined as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game when the second advantageous game ends.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N3, the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. In this case, since the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the second advantageous game is completed, it is determined whether the first advantageous game is the first type or the second type. Select whether to make a more serious prediction and execute the second advantageous game by entering the game ball into the ball entry area, or to expect that the specific condition is established without entering the ball into the ball entry area. can be made Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine N4, the game state setting means executes the second advantageous game based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. The gaming machine N5 is characterized in that the second game state is set as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game when the second advantageous game is ended.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entry area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. In this case, the game state setting means sets the second game state as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game, so if the first advantageous game is of the first type, the ball is not allowed to enter the ball entry area. While there is a possibility that the specific condition is satisfied and the game state shifts to the second game state, if it is the second type, the second advantageous game is executed by entering the ball into the ball entering area, and furthermore, the second game state is executed. 2 It shifts to a game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of the first advantageous game can be predicted more seriously.

In the gaming machine N5, when the determination by the determining means yields the first determination result, a common specific effect is executed regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine N6 characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means for executing.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N5, based on the first determination result in the determination by the determination means, regardless of the type of the first advantageous game determined by the type determination means Since the common specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, it becomes difficult to distinguish from the effect whether it is the first type or the second type. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more seriously predict whether it is the first type or the second type.

In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N6, the game state setting means sets the first game state, the second game state, and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state. 1 game state is set from among a plurality of game states including at least 3 game states, and the game state setting means sets the game state after the second advantageous game executed in the first game state is completed. As a state, the third game state is set at a first rate, and as a game state after the second advantageous game executed in the second game state is completed, a second rate higher than the first rate is set. A game machine N7 characterized in that the third game state is set at a ratio of .

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state setting means selects one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state, a second game state, and a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state. A game state is set. As a game state after the second advantageous game executed in the first game state is completed, the game state setting means sets the third game state at the first ratio, while the game state is executed in the second game state. As a game state after the second advantageous game ends, a third game state is set by the game state setting means at a second rate higher than the first rate.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the second advantageous game will be executed in the second game state.

In the gaming machine N7, the game state setting means sets the game state at a third rate higher than the first rate as a game state after the second advantageous game executed in the third game state is finished. 3. A game machine N8 characterized in that it sets three game states.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N7, as the gaming state after the second advantageous game executed in the third gaming state is completed, the gaming state setting means sets the second rate higher than the first rate. Since the third game state is set at a ratio of 3, when the third game state is reached, the second advantageous game and the third game state are likely to be repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction when the third game state is entered.

A gaming machine N9 characterized in that, in the gaming machine N8, the second ratio is higher than the third ratio.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N8, the second ratio tooth is configured at a ratio higher than the third ratio, so when the second game state is entered, the second advantageous game There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the will be executed.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, J1 to J10, K1 to K8, L1 to L9, A game machine Z1 in any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N9, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, J1 to J10, K1 to K8, L1 to L9, A game machine Z2 in any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N9, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I9, J1 to J10, K1 to K8, L1 to L9, A game machine Z3 in any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N9, wherein said game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a ball entrance that allows a ball to be entered by opening (or moving) an electric accessory, and execution is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entrance. A game ball that enters a V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is opened passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2011-010741).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if a small winning game is executed, the bonus game is not executed unless the game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device. There is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be lost if the ball cannot be entered.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a game based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. A first advantageous game executing means for executing a first advantageous game advantageous to a player, a first type as a type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means, and the first type. and a second determination result different from the first determination result obtained by the determination by the type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a different second type. second advantageous game execution means for executing a second advantageous game more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game based on; game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state; game state ending means for terminating the first game state if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied when the determination by the executed determination means results in a determination result other than the second determination result; and, the specific condition is the first determination result in determination by the determination means, and the first type is determined by the determination means as compared with the case where the first type is determined by the type determination means. This is more likely to be established when the first determination result is obtained and the second type is determined by the type determining means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state ending means comprises the If the specific condition is established, the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state.
A gaming machine according to Technical Thought 3 is the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 1 or 2, comprising a ball entry area in which a game ball can be entered based on execution of the first advantageous game, The second advantageous game executing means executes the second advantageous game based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering area, and the game state ending means is the first game state of 1. The first game state is terminated based on the fact that the first advantageous game of the first type is executed the first number of times in 1, and the first advantageous game of the second type is executed in the first game state of 1. The first game state is terminated based on the fact that the game has been executed a second number of times, which is less than the first number of times.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein the gaming state setting means determines whether a game ball enters the ball entry area during execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. When the second advantageous game is executed based on the fact that the ball is landed, the first game state is set as the game state after the second advantageous game is finished.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, wherein the gaming state setting means determines whether a game ball enters the ball entry area during execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. When the second advantageous game is executed based on the ball being thrown, the second game state is set as the game state after the second advantageous game is finished.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, there is provided a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and an advantage to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. First advantageous game execution means for executing a first advantageous game, and a first type as the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means, and a second type different from the first type. and a type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least and, based on the second determination result different from the first determination result in the determination by the determination means A second advantageous game executing means for executing a second advantageous game more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game, and a game state after the execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game executing means is completed, game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state; a game state ending means for terminating the first game state if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied when a determination result other than the second determination result is obtained by determination by the determination means. and the specific condition is such that the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result, and the first determination is obtained by the determination by the determination means than when the first type is determined by the type determination means. As a result, it is easier to establish when the second type is determined by the type determining means.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and The game state ending means shifts the game state from the first game state to the second game state if the specific condition is established.
As a result, the game can be played in the first game state in anticipation of the establishment of the specific condition, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 1 or 2, game balls can be entered based on the execution of the first advantageous game. A ball entry area is provided, and the second advantageous game executing means executes the second advantageous game based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry area, and the game state ending means The first game state is ended based on the first advantageous game of the first type having been executed a first number of times in the first game state of 1, and the second type in the first game state of 1. The first game state is terminated when the first advantageous game is executed a second number of times which is less than the first number of times.
As a result, during the execution of the first advantageous game, the game ball is entered into the ball entry area and the second advantageous game is executed, or the specific condition is satisfied without entering the ball into the ball entry area. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a playability that allows the user to choose whether to expect it.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, the game state setting means can set the ball entering during execution of the first advantageous game of the second type. When the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the area, the first game state is set as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game. Predict more seriously whether the advantageous game is the first type or the second type, enter the game ball into the ball entry area to execute the second advantageous game, or enter the ball entry area It is possible to select whether or not to expect a specific condition to be established without letting the player enter the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, the game state setting means can set the ball entering during execution of the first advantageous game of the first type. When the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the region, the second game state is set as the game state after the end of the second advantageous game. If the advantageous game is the first type, there is a possibility that the specific condition is established by not allowing the ball to enter the ball entering area, and the state shifts to the second game state. A second advantageous game is executed by entering the ball into the area, and the game state shifts to the second game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of the first advantageous game can be predicted more seriously.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines )

Claims (5)

a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a first advantageous game executing means for executing a first advantageous game advantageous to the player based on a first judgment result obtained by the judgment by the judging means;
As the type of the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game executing means, one type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first type and a second type different from the first type. a type determining means for determining;
A second advantageous game for executing a second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game based on a second judgment result different from the first judgment result obtained by the judgment by the judgment means. a means of execution;
A plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state as a game state after execution of the second advantageous game by the second advantageous game execution means is completed a game state setting means for setting one game state from
When a determination result other than the second determination result is obtained in the determination by the determination means executed in the first game state, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the first game state is changed. and a game state ending means for ending,
The specific condition is that the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result, and the first determination result in determination by the determination means is higher than the case where the first type is determined by the type determination means. and the second type is determined by the type determining means more easily to be established. The second game state is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein said game state ending means shifts said game state from said first game state to said second game state if said specific condition is satisfied. A ball entry area is provided in which a game ball can be entered based on the execution of the first advantageous game,
The second advantageous game execution means executes the second advantageous game based on the game ball entering the ball entry area,
The game state ending means terminates the first game state based on the first advantageous game of the first type having been executed a first number of times in the first game state of 1, and the first game state of 1. The first game state is terminated when the first advantageous game of the second type is executed a second number of times less than the first number of times in the game state. Or the gaming machine according to 2. The game state setting means, when the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the second type, the 4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the first game state is set as the game state after the second advantageous game is finished. The game state setting means, when the second advantageous game is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering area during the execution of the first advantageous game of the first type, the 5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein said second game state is set as a game state after the second advantageous game is finished.

Images